JP7392983B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine is known that can execute a display performance using a display device when a game ball enters a winning opening (for example, see Patent Document 1).

Such gaming machines can perform display effects using character images, symbols, and the like.

JP2016-202930A Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2016-198339 Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2016-182376

However, even with the above-mentioned gaming machines, there is still room for improvement in terms of technology for increasing the interest of gaming.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and aims to improve the interest of games.

The present invention has been made to solve at least part of the above-mentioned problems, and can be realized as the following application examples. Note that the reference numerals and supplementary explanations in parentheses in this column indicate the correspondence with the embodiments described later to aid understanding of the present invention, and do not limit the present invention in any way. .

[Application example 1]
a display means capable of displaying multiple types of images;
A fixed member arranged so that the whole is visible,
a first movable member;
A gaming machine comprising: a pair of second movable members arranged to be difficult to see due to the fixed member,
At least the fixed member, the first movable member moved to a predetermined first position in front of the display means, and the pair of second movable members moved to a predetermined second position in front of the display means. one of the members and the other of the pair of second movable members moved to a predetermined third position in front of the display means are combined to represent a part of a specific object,
When one of the pair of second movable members is in the second position, it is covered by the first movable member that has moved to the first position, and the other of the pair of second movable members is , when in the third position, is not covered by the first movable member that has moved to the first position;
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

FIG. 3 is a front view of the gaming machine. It is an explanatory view showing details of the second grand prize winning device. It is an enlarged view of display devices. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control board side of the gaming machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sub-control board side of the gaming machine. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a main ROM and a main RAM. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a sub-ROM and a sub-RAM. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining various types of random numbers used in gaming machines. It is a diagram for explaining a special symbol hit determination table and the like. FIG. 2 is a first diagram for explaining a hit type determination table. It is a 2nd diagram for explaining a hit type determination table. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a variation pattern determination table. It is a diagram for explaining a normal symbol hit determination table and the like. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining an electric chew opening pattern determination table. It is a diagram for explaining a big winning opening pattern determination table. It is a flowchart of main control main processing. 3 is a flowchart of main side timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of starting port sensor detection processing. It is a flowchart of normal operation processing. It is a flowchart of special operation processing. It is a flowchart of special symbol standby processing. It is a flowchart of special symbol hit determination processing. It is a 1st flowchart of special symbol variation pattern selection processing. It is a second flowchart of special symbol variation pattern selection processing. It is a flowchart of special symbol fluctuation processing. It is a flowchart of special symbol confirmation processing. It is a flowchart of gaming state management processing. It is a flowchart of special electric accessories processing 1. It is a flowchart of gaming state setting processing. It is a figure for explaining the setting table of a time-saving counter. It is a 1st flowchart of the special electric accessory process 2. It is a 2nd flowchart of the special electric accessory process 2. It is a flowchart of V opening/closing member control processing. It is a flowchart of V area sensor detection processing. 3 is a flowchart showing sub-control main processing. 3 is a flowchart of sub-side timer interrupt processing. 3 is a flowchart of received command analysis processing. It is a flowchart of a fluctuating production start process. It is a flowchart of a fluctuating performance end process. It is a flowchart of ending performance pattern determination processing. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a mode status setting table. It is a diagram for explaining a time-saving effect scenario determination table. It is a figure for explaining the specific content of a time-saving production scenario. It is an explanatory diagram illustrating the expected performance of V. It is an explanatory diagram illustrating a winning game performance when special figure 2 is won. It is an explanatory diagram illustrating a variation performance at the time of special drawing 2 lottery. It is an explanatory diagram illustrating a countdown performance. It is an explanatory diagram illustrating a one-time performance of crying. It is an explanatory view illustrating movement of the first movable accessory 14 in the advancing direction. It is an explanatory view illustrating a second aspect of the first movable accessory 14. It is an explanatory view illustrating a combination effect of the first movable accessory 14 and an image. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a rotational movement of the first movable accessory 14. FIG. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a first light emitting mode of the first movable accessory 14. FIG. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second light emitting mode of the first movable accessory 14. FIG. It is an explanatory view illustrating a second aspect of the second movable accessory 15. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a rotational movement of the second movable accessory 15. FIG. It is an explanatory view illustrating a first combination effect of first and second movable accessories. It is an explanatory view illustrating a second combination effect of the first and second movable accessories. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a variation timing change effect A. FIG. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a variation timing change effect B; It is an explanatory diagram illustrating a variation timing change effect C. It is an explanatory diagram illustrating a symbol direction change effect A. It is an explanatory diagram illustrating a symbol direction change effect B. It is an explanatory diagram illustrating a symbol direction change effect C. It is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of accessory symbol cooperation production A. It is an explanatory view illustrating an example of accessory symbol cooperation production B. It is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of accessory symbol cooperation production C. It is an explanatory diagram illustrating a specific image pattern cooperation effect A. It is an explanatory diagram illustrating a specific image pattern cooperation effect B. It is an explanatory diagram illustrating a specific image pattern cooperation effect C. It is an explanatory view illustrating a decorative pattern mode change effect A. It is an explanatory diagram illustrating decorative pattern mode change production B. It is an explanatory diagram illustrating a decorative pattern mode change effect C. It is an explanatory diagram illustrating a decorative pattern variable area effect A. It is an explanatory view illustrating a decorative pattern variation region effect B. It is an explanatory diagram illustrating a decorative pattern variation area production C. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of operation promotion performance A. FIG. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of operation promotion performance B; It is an explanatory diagram illustrating operation promotion performance C. It is an explanatory diagram illustrating a winning/losing notification effect A. It is an explanatory diagram illustrating a winning/losing notification effect B. It is an explanatory diagram illustrating a winning/losing notification effect C. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of an operation unit image display effect A. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of operation unit image display effect B; FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of an operation unit image display effect C. It is an explanatory diagram illustrating an appearance/disappearance effect A of a effect button. It is an explanatory view illustrating an appearance/disappearance effect B of a effect button. It is an explanatory diagram illustrating an appearance/disappearance effect C of a effect button. It is an explanatory diagram illustrating a winning notification effect A. It is an explanatory diagram illustrating a winning notification effect B. It is an explanatory diagram illustrating a winning notification effect C. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of an inside/outside effect A of a stereoscopic image. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of an outer/outer outer appearance B of a stereoscopic image. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of an outer-interior rendering C of a three-dimensional image. It is an explanatory view illustrating a selective display prevention effect A of the effect mode. It is an explanatory diagram illustrating selection display prevention performance B of the performance mode. It is an explanatory diagram illustrating a selection display prevention effect C of the effect mode. It is an explanatory diagram illustrating a game ball image effect A. It is an explanatory diagram illustrating a game ball image effect B. It is an explanatory diagram illustrating a game ball image production C. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a specific edge effect A of a stereoscopic image. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a specific edge effect B of a stereoscopic image. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a specific edge effect C of a stereoscopic image. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a combination production A of movable accessories. It is an explanatory view illustrating a combination production B of movable accessories. It is an explanatory diagram illustrating a combination production C of movable accessories. It is a figure which illustrated the 1st aspect of the 1st movable accessory of other embodiments. It is a figure which illustrated the 2nd aspect of the 1st movable accessory of other embodiments. It is a figure which illustrated the 3rd aspect of the 1st movable accessory of other embodiments. It is a figure which illustrated the 4th aspect of the 1st movable accessory of other embodiments. It is a diagram illustrating a pending number-linked image display performance A. It is a diagram illustrating an example of a pending number-linked image display performance B. It is a diagram illustrating a pending number-linked image display effect C. It is a diagram illustrating a pending number-linked image display effect D. It is a diagram illustrating a holding number change interlocking effect A. It is a diagram illustrating an example of a performance B that is linked to changes in the number of reservations. It is a diagram illustrating a performance C linked to change in the number of reservations. It is a diagram illustrating a performance D linked to change in the number of reservations. It is a diagram illustrating a pending icon movement change effect A. It is a diagram illustrating a pending icon movement change effect B. It is a diagram illustrating a pending icon movement change effect C. It is a diagram illustrating a pending icon movement change effect D. It is a diagram illustrating a fluctuating medium-next mode start display effect A. It is a diagram illustrating a fluctuating medium-next mode start display effect B. It is a diagram illustrating a fluctuating medium-next mode start display effect C. It is a diagram illustrating a fluctuating medium-next mode start display effect D. It is a diagram illustrating a predetermined image continuous display effect A. It is a diagram illustrating a predetermined image continuous display effect B. It is a diagram illustrating a predetermined image continuous display effect C. It is a diagram illustrating a predetermined image continuous display effect D. It is a diagram illustrating a background image switching effect A. It is a diagram illustrating a background image switching effect B. It is a diagram illustrating a background image switching effect C. It is a diagram illustrating a background image switching effect D. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an image blurring effect A. FIG. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an image blurring effect B; It is a diagram illustrating an image blurring effect C. It is a diagram illustrating an image blurring effect D. It is a diagram illustrating a winning/losing notification effect A. It is a diagram illustrating a winning/losing notification effect B. It is a diagram illustrating a winning/losing notification effect C. It is a diagram illustrating a winning/losing notification effect D. It is a diagram illustrating a decorative pattern display area effect A. It is a diagram illustrating a decorative pattern display area effect B. It is a diagram illustrating a decorative pattern display area production C. It is a diagram illustrating a decorative pattern display area effect D. It is a diagram illustrating an example of a hold-compatible image production A. It is a diagram illustrating an example of a hold-compatible image production B. It is a diagram illustrating an example of a hold-compatible image production C. It is a diagram illustrating an example of a hold-compatible image production D. It is a diagram illustrating a pending image effect A. It is a diagram illustrating a pending image effect B. It is a diagram illustrating a pending image effect C. It is a diagram illustrating a pending image effect D. It is a diagram illustrating a disappearance effect A of the pending icon. It is a diagram illustrating a disappearance effect B of the pending icon. It is a diagram illustrating a disappearance effect C of the pending icon. It is a diagram illustrating a disappearance effect D of the pending icon. It is a diagram illustrating a pending icon image display effect A. It is a diagram illustrating a pending icon image display effect B. It is a diagram illustrating a pending icon image display effect C. It is a diagram illustrating a pending icon image display effect D. FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating an example of operation state suggestion production A; It is a figure which illustrated operation state suggestion production B. It is a diagram illustrating an operation state suggestion production C. It is a figure which illustrated the operation state suggestion production D. It is a diagram illustrating an operation image stock effect A. It is a diagram illustrating an example of operation image stock performance B. It is a diagram illustrating an example of operation image stock performance C. It is a diagram illustrating an operation image stock effect D. It is a diagram illustrating an example of performance A that can announce winning or losing. It is a diagram illustrating an example of performance B that can announce winning or losing. It is a diagram illustrating an example of a performance C that can announce winning or losing. It is a diagram illustrating an example of a performance D that can announce winning or losing. It is a diagram illustrating a specific target display effect A. It is a diagram illustrating a specific target display effect B. It is a diagram illustrating a specific target display effect C. It is a diagram illustrating a specific target display effect D. It is a diagram illustrating a multiple role object combination production A. It is a diagram illustrating a multiple role object combination performance B. It is a diagram illustrating a combination of multiple role objects C. It is a diagram illustrating a combination performance D of multiple role objects. It is a diagram illustrating a winning/losing announcement tilt effect A. It is a diagram illustrating a winning/losing announcement tilt effect B. It is a diagram illustrating a winning/losing announcement tilt effect C. It is a diagram illustrating a winning/losing announcement tilt effect D. It is a diagram illustrating a character selection effect A. It is a diagram illustrating character selection performance B. It is a diagram illustrating a character selection effect C. It is a diagram illustrating a character selection effect D. It is a diagram illustrating a starting port light emitting effect A. It is a diagram illustrating a starting port light emitting effect B. It is a diagram illustrating a starting port light emitting effect C. It is a diagram illustrating a starting port light emitting effect D.

<First embodiment>
1. Structure of Gaming Machine The structure of a gaming machine 1 as an embodiment of the present invention will be explained based on FIGS. 1 and 2. FIG. 1 is a front view of the gaming machine 1. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing details of the second grand prize winning device 36. In the following, the left-right direction of the gaming machine 1 will be explained so as to correspond to the left-right direction as seen from the player facing the gaming machine 1. Further, the forward direction of the gaming machine 1 will be explained as the direction from the gaming machine 1 toward the player, and the backward direction of the gaming machine 1 will be explained as the direction from the player toward the gaming machine 1.

The gaming machine 1 is a pachinko gaming machine that fires game balls based on a player's firing operation, and when a game ball wins a prize in a specific winning device, pays out a predetermined number of game balls to the player based on the winning. be. The game machine 1 includes a game machine frame 50 and a game board 2, and the game board 2 is attached to the inside of the game machine frame 50. The gaming machine frame 50 includes, in addition to a front frame (front frame part) 53, an outer frame (base frame part) that forms the outer shell of the gaming machine, and an inner frame to which the gaming board 2 is attached inside the outer frame. We are prepared. The front frame (front frame portion) 53 is a vertically rectangular unit disposed on the front side of the outer frame and the inner frame, and includes a handle 60, a batted ball supply tray (upper tray) 61, and an excess ball tray (lower tray). ) 62, a performance button 63, a sword member 64, a sword button 65, a frame lamp 66, a speaker 67, and a select button 68. An opening is formed in the center of the front frame 53, and the gaming area 3 of the gaming board 2 can be viewed through the opening.

The handle 60 is arranged at the lower end of the right side of the front frame 53, and causes the game ball to be launched at a firing intensity that corresponds to the rotation angle. A batted ball supply tray (upper tray) 61 is provided below the front frame 53 and stores game balls. The surplus ball receiving tray (lower tray) 62 is arranged below the batted ball supply tray (upper tray) 61, and stores game balls that cannot be accommodated in the batted ball supply tray 61. The performance button 63 is an operation unit disposed near the batted ball supply tray (upper tray) 61, and is operated (pressed) by the player during a performance performed as the game progresses. The sword member 64 is an operation part imitating the shape of a sword, and can be pushed downward by the player during performances performed as the game progresses. The sword button 65 is an operation unit provided at the upper end of the sword member 64, that is, at the end of the sword handle, and is operated (pressed) by the player during performances performed as the game progresses. Ru. The sword member 64 is configured to be able to perform two different operations: a first operation of pushing the entire sword member 64 downward, and a second operation of pressing the sword button 65 at the tip. The frame lamp 66 is arranged around the opening of the front frame 53, and performs a light emitting effect during a game or the like. The speakers 67 are arranged at the upper left and upper right of the front frame 53, and perform sound production during games and the like.

The game board 2 includes a game area 3, a rail member 4, a board lamp 5, an image display device 7, a first board movable body 14, a second board movable body 15, and an illumination panel (light guide plate) 18. , a fixed winning device (belly button) 19, a normal variable winning device (electronic chew) 22, a first gate (through chucker) 28, a second gate (through chucker) 29, and a first big winning device (first attacker). ) 31, a second big winning device (second attacker) 36, a general winning opening (normal winning opening) 27, an out opening 16, and display devices 40.

The game area 3 is an area where game balls shot by operating the handle 60 flow down, and a plurality of game nails for guiding the game balls are provided protrudingly. The rail member 4 is arranged at the left end of the game area 3 and guides the game ball launched by operating the handle 60 toward the upper side of the game area 3. The board lamp 5 is arranged on the back side of the game area 3, and emits light from the back side of the game area 3. Here, some of the board lamps 5 are also provided inside each of the first board movable body 14 and the second board movable body 15. is configured to be able to produce light emission in a specific manner.

The image display device 7 is provided near the center of the gaming area 3 and includes a display screen 7a. The image display device 7 may be a liquid crystal display device, or may be another image display device such as an organic EL display device, a plasma display, a projector, or a dot matrix. The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 includes a production pattern display area where production patterns (decorative patterns) 8L, 8C, 8R) are variably displayed (also referred to as variable display), and a storage image display area where storage images 9A and 9B are displayed. It has a display area and a pending digested image display area where the pending digested image 9C is displayed. The pending images 9A and 9B are images representing pending status, and are also referred to as pending icons. The pending digest image 9C is an image representing the pending, and is also referred to as the pending icon or variable icon. The hold icon and the hold icon are collectively referred to as simply hold icons.

The performance symbol display area includes three symbol display areas: "left", "middle", and "right". A left effect pattern 8L is displayed in the left pattern display area. A medium effect pattern 8C is displayed in the medium pattern display area. A right production symbol 8R is displayed in the right symbol display area. The performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are composed of a plurality of symbols representing numbers from "1" to "9", for example. The variable display of the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, which will be described later. The image display device 7 displays a first special symbol displayed by a first special symbol display 41a and a second special symbol display 41b, which will be described later, by a combination of effect symbols displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas. The result of the variable display of the second special symbol (big win/small win lottery result) can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner to the player.

For example, in the case of winning a jackpot, the effect pattern is stopped and displayed as a zero number such as "777". If it is a miss, the effect pattern is stopped and displayed with a miss, such as "637". This makes it easier for the player to grasp the progress of the game. The player can grasp the results of the large winning/small winning lottery through the image display device 7 in addition to the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b. Note that the position of the symbol display area does not have to be fixed. Furthermore, the manner in which the performance symbols are displayed in a variable manner may be a manner in which they are scrolled in the vertical direction, or may be in any other manner. Further, when winning a small hit, the performance symbols may be stopped and displayed at a predetermined chance such as "135", or the performance symbols may be stopped and displayed at the winning number. The combination of performance symbols to be stopped and displayed according to each lottery result is not limited to the above and can be arbitrarily set. Hereinafter, the performance that displays the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R will also be referred to as "variable performance of performance symbols" or simply "fluctuation performance" and "fluctuation display." In addition, this decorative pattern fluctuation performance is counted as one fluctuation performance (one cycle of fluctuation performance) during the period from when the special symbol starts to fluctuate until it stops fixed (also called special symbol fluctuation period). . Therefore, even if there is a case where the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped during the period from when the special pattern starts to fluctuate until it is fixed and stopped, the performance of the temporary stop is included in the fluctuating performance of the decorative pattern.

The image display device 7 can display on the display screen 7a, in addition to the performance symbol variation performance, a jackpot performance performed in parallel with the jackpot game (second special game), a demonstration performance for waiting for customers, etc. In the performance symbol variation performance, performance images such as background images and character images may also be displayed in addition to the performance symbols. In addition to the production pattern, the image display device 7 also includes an identification display (fourth pattern, not shown) that can indicate that the special pattern is changing or indicate the lottery result of the special pattern. may be displayed on the display screen 7a. Note that the identification display (fourth symbol) may be displayed by a light emitting device such as an LED provided in the game area 3.

The reserved image display area is a first reserved display area that displays reserved images 9A according to the number of stored first special figures reserved, which will be described later, and a reserved image 9B that displays reserved images 9B according to the number of stored second special figures reserved, which will be described later. and a second hold display area. By displaying the holding images 9A and 9B, the stored number of first special figure holdings displayed on the first special figure holding display 43a, which will be described later, and the number of second special figure holdings displayed on the second special figure holding display 43b are determined. The number of memories can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner to the player. The pending digest image display area includes a pending digest display area that displays the pending digest image 9C. The pending digesting image 9C corresponds to the production symbols (production symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) currently being changed on the display screen 7a, and depending on the display of the pending digesting image 9C, the first special symbol pending or the second special symbol pending It is possible to clearly display to the player that the special drawing reservation has been completed ("extinction of special drawing reservation" to be described later).

On the left and right sides of the image display device 7, a first board movable body 14 (also referred to as a first movable accessory 14), which is a movable so-called gimmick, is provided. The first movable accessory 14 is configured such that two half-ring-shaped members arranged on the left and right sides are movable in the left-right direction. The first movable accessory 14 normally remains stationary at retracted positions on the left and right sides of the image display device 7 (FIG. 1), and moves from the retracted position toward the center of the display screen 7a so as to approach each other ( (Advance) and stand still at the advance position in front of the display screen 7a. The first movable accessory 14 forms a ring-shaped decorative part when the left and right members are combined at the advanced position, and covers a part of the image display device 7.

A second board movable body 15 (also referred to as a second movable accessory 15), which is a movable so-called gimmick, is provided above the image display device 7. The second movable accessory 15 is configured such that a rectangular member (decoration part) written with "OARO" is movable in the vertical direction. The second movable accessory 15 normally remains stationary at a retracted position above the image display device 7 (FIG. 1), and moves (advances) downward from the retracted position toward the center of the display screen 7a for display. It can stand still at the advanced position in front of the screen 7a. The second movable accessory 15 covers a part of the image display device 7 when stopped at the advanced position.

A stage section 11 is formed at the bottom of the image display device 7. The stage part 11 has a shape that can guide a game ball rolling on the upper surface of the stage part 11 to a first starting port 20, which will be described later. A warp portion 12 is provided at the lower left of the center decorative body 10. The warp section 12 includes an inlet section through which game balls flow in and an outlet section through which game balls flow out, and causes the game balls that flowed in through the inlet section to flow out to the stage section 11 through the exit section.

The illumination panel (light guide plate) 18 is a transparent flat plate member attached to the central opening of the front frame 53, and the game area 3 of the game board 2 is visible through the illumination panel 18. That is, the illumination panel 18 is arranged in front of the image display device 7, and the image displayed on the image display device 7 is visible through the illumination panel 18. The illumination panel 18 is configured to be able to display a predetermined image on its main surface by irradiating LED light from the end surface. The illumination panel 18 is configured to be able to display several types of images in multiple types of colors depending on the irradiation direction and color of the LED light.

The fixed winning device (belly button) 19 is arranged below the image display device 7 in the gaming area 3, and includes a first starting opening (first starting winning opening, first ball entry opening, fixed starting opening) 20. The winning of the game ball into the first starting hole 20 is an opportunity for a first special symbol lottery (big win/small win lottery). In other words, the winning of the game ball into the first starting hole 20 is an opportunity to obtain a random number per special symbol and to determine a jackpot.

The normal variable prize winning device (electronic chew) 22 is arranged below the first starting hole 20 in the gaming area 3, and includes a second starting hole (second starting winning hole, second ball entering hole, variable starting hole) 21. ing. The winning of the game ball into the second starting hole 21 is an opportunity for a second special symbol lottery (big win/small win lottery). The electric chew 22 includes a movable member 23 that can move forward and backward, and the second starting port 21 is opened and closed by the operation of the movable member 23. The movable member 23 is driven by an electric solenoid 24 . A game ball can enter the second starting port 21 when the movable member 23 is in the open state (advancing state). The electric chew 22 only needs to enter the second starting port 21 more easily when the movable member 23 is in the open state than when it is in the closed state (retracted state). 2. The ball may be allowed to enter the starting port 21.

The first gate (through chucker) 28 is arranged on the right side of the image display device 7 in the gaming area 3, and the second gate (through chucker) 29 is arranged on the left side of the image display device 7 in the gaming area 3. Each of them is configured so that a game ball can pass through them. Passage of the game ball to the gates (first gate 28 and second gate 29) is an opportunity for a normal symbol lottery to determine whether or not to release the electric chew 22. In other words, the passage of the game ball to the gates 28 and 29 is a trigger for obtaining a random number per symbol and determining a hit.

Here, the "special symbol lottery" means that when a game ball enters the first starting hole 20 or the second starting hole 21, a random number for special symbol determination is acquired, and this acquired random number is used as a predetermined random number. It is a process of determining whether or not it is a big win and whether or not it is a small win by comparing it with the value corresponding to the "big win" or "small win". The lottery results of the "big hit" and "small win" are not immediately notified to the player, but a variable display of special symbols is performed on the first special symbol display 41a or the second special symbol display 41b, which will be described later. Then, after a predetermined variable time has elapsed, the special symbol corresponding to the lottery result is stopped and displayed (confirmed display), and the player is notified of the lottery result. In the image display device 7, a pattern matching game is performed in which performance symbols are variably displayed in synchronization with the variably displayed special symbols, and the jackpot lottery result is more effectively notified to the player by this symbol matching game.

In addition, "normal symbol lottery" means that when a game ball passes through the first gate 28 or the second gate 29, a random number for normal symbol determination is obtained, and this obtained random number is used as a predetermined "winning". ” refers to the process of determining whether or not it is a hit by comparing it with the value corresponding to . Regarding the lottery result of this normal symbol, the lottery result is not immediately notified when the game ball passes through the first gate 28 or the second gate 29, but the normal symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner on the normal symbol display 42, which will be described later. is carried out, and after a predetermined variable time has elapsed, the normal symbol corresponding to the lottery result is displayed as confirmed (lit or unlit), and the player is notified of the lottery result.

The first big winning device (first attacker, first special variable winning device) 31 is arranged below the first gate 28 in the gaming area 3, and includes a first big winning opening (first special winning opening) 30. There is. The first big prize opening 30 includes an opening/closing member (first special winning opening opening/closing member) 32 that allows or inhibits reception of game balls through a swing-type opening/closing operation. The opening/closing member 32 is driven by the first big prize opening solenoid 33. A game ball can enter the first big prize opening 30 when the opening/closing member 32 is in an open state.

The second big winning device (second attacker, second special variable winning device) 36 is disposed below the first big winning hole 30 in the gaming area 3, and is connected to the second big winning hole (second special winning hole) 35. We are prepared. The second special winning opening 35 includes an opening/closing member (second special winning opening opening/closing member, movable member) 37 that obstructs or allows reception of game balls by a shutter-type opening/closing operation. The opening/closing member 37 is driven by the second big prize opening solenoid 38. A game ball can enter the second big prize opening 35 when the opening/closing member 37 is in an open state.

The second big winning device 36 internally includes a V area (specific area) 39, a V area sensor 39a, a non-V area (non-specific area) 70, a non-V area sensor 70a, and a second big winning opening sensor. 35a, a V opening/closing member 71, and a V opening/closing member solenoid 73. The V area (specific area) 39 and the non-V area (non-specific area) 70 are configured as areas through which the game ball that has passed through the second grand prize opening 35 can pass inside the second grand prize winning device 36. . The second big winning hole sensor 35a is arranged upstream of the V area 39 and the non-V area 70, and detects winning of a game ball into the second big winning hole 35. The V area sensor 39a is arranged in the V area 39 and detects passage of a game ball to the V area 39. The non-V area sensor 70a is arranged in the non-V area 70 and detects passage of a game ball to the non-V area 70. The V opening/closing member 71 distributes the game balls that have passed through the second big prize opening 35 to either the V area 39 or the non-V area 70. The V opening/closing member solenoid 73 drives the V opening/closing member 71. The V opening/closing member 71 is configured to rotate (clockwise and counterclockwise with respect to the game board 2), and when the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is energized, it rotates clockwise from the origin position to move the game ball to the V. A first state (rotating state) in which game balls are distributed to the region 39 is entered, and when the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is not energized, a second state (stopping state) is entered in which the balls are located at the origin and are distributed to the non-V region 70. In addition, the V opening/closing member 71 is not limited to rotational movement, but may have the function of distributing the game ball that has passed through the first big prize opening 30 to either the V area 39 or the non-V area 70, for example, It may be configured to move in the left-right direction with respect to the game board 2. That is, when the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is energized, the game ball is distributed to the V area 39 in a retracted state (first state), and when the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is not energized, the game ball is distributed to the non-V area 70 in the advancing state. (Second state).

FIG. 2A shows a state in which the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is energized. When the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is energized, the V opening/closing member 71 is in a state (first state) that allows the game ball to pass through the V area 39. When the V opening/closing member 71 is in the first state, the game ball that has entered the second big winning hole 35 passes through the second big winning hole sensor 35a and then passes through the V area 39 (as shown in FIG. 2(A)). A route). This route of the game ball is called the "first route". FIG. 2(B) shows a state in which the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is not energized. When the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is not energized, the V opening/closing member 71 is in a state (second state) that prevents the game ball from passing into the V area 39. When the V opening/closing member 71 is in the second state, the game ball that has entered the second big winning hole 35 passes through the second big winning hole sensor 35a, rolls on the upper surface of the V opening/closing member 71, and enters the non-V opening/closing member 71. It passes through area 70 (route B in FIG. 2(B)). This route of the game ball is called the "second route". In addition, in the gaming machine 1, passage of the game ball to the V area 39 is an opportunity to execute a jackpot game (second special game) to be described later. In other words, a jackpot lottery is also performed depending on whether or not the game ball has successfully passed through the V area 39. The jackpot won by the above-mentioned lottery of the first special symbol or the lottery of the second special symbol is also called a "type 1 jackpot", and the jackpot won by the passage of the game ball to the V area 39 is also called a "type 2 jackpot".

Returning to FIG. 1, two normal winning holes 27 are provided at the bottom of the gaming area 3. Note that the number of normal winning holes 27 can be set arbitrarily. The out port 16 is provided at the lower part of the game area 3, and discharges game balls that have not won in any of the winning holes to the outside of the game area 3. The display devices 40 are arranged at the lower right part of the game board 2. Details of the display devices 40 will be described later.

The gaming area 3 includes a left gaming area 3A on the left side of the center in the left-right direction, and a right gaming area 3B on the right side. A hitting method in which the game ball is launched so that it flows down the left game area 3A is called "left-handed hitting." On the other hand, a hitting method in which the game ball is launched so that it flows down the right game area 3B is called "right-handed hitting." In the gaming machine 1, the player can aim to pass through the second gate 29 and win a prize at the first starting port 20 by playing left-handed. On the other hand, it is configured so that by hitting right, you can aim to pass through the first gate 28 and win the second starting opening 21, the first big winning opening 30, and the second big winning opening 35.

FIG. 3 is an enlarged view of the displays 40. The displays 40 include a first special symbol display 41a, a second special symbol display 41b, a normal symbol display 42, a first special symbol reservation display 43a, and a second special symbol reservation display 43b. , and a general figure reservation display 44. The first special symbol display 41a variably displays the first special symbol. The second special symbol display 41b variably displays the second special symbol. The normal symbol display 42 variably displays normal symbols. The first special symbol reservation display 43a displays the number of stored operation reservations (first special symbol reservation) of the first special symbol display 41a. The second special symbol reservation display 43b displays the number of stored operation reservations (second special symbol reservation) of the second special symbol display 41b. The normal symbol reservation display 44 displays the number of stored operation reservations (common symbol reservations) of the ordinary symbol display 42. The variable display of the first special symbol is triggered by the landing of a game ball into the first starting port 20. The variable display of the second special symbol is triggered by the landing of a game ball into the second starting port 21. Below, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are also collectively referred to as a "special symbol." Further, the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b are also collectively referred to as the "special symbol display 41." In addition, the first special figure holding display 43a and the second special figure holding display 43b are also collectively referred to as the "special figure holding display 43."

The special symbol display device 41 displays a special symbol (identification information) in a variable manner (fluctuating display) and then stops displaying the special symbol (identification information). , big win, small win lottery). The special symbol that is stopped and displayed (stop symbol, special symbol that is derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) is one special symbol that is selected from a plurality of types of special symbols by special symbol lottery. If the stopped symbol is a special symbol (jackpot symbol) with a predetermined jackpot stopping pattern, the first jackpot 30 is opened in an opening pattern according to the type of jackpot symbol that is stopped and displayed (the type of jackpot that was won). A jackpot game (second special game) is played in which the player is allowed to release the following. In addition, if the stopping symbol is a special symbol (small winning symbol) with a predetermined small winning stopping mode, an opening pattern corresponding to the type of the small winning symbol that is stopped and displayed (the type of winning small winning) A small winning game (first special game) in which the second big prize opening 35 is opened is played. The opening pattern of the big winning hole (the first big winning hole 30 and the second big winning hole 35) in the first special game or the second special game will be described later.

The special symbol display 41 is composed of eight LEDs arranged side by side, and displays a special symbol according to the result of the special symbol winning lottery depending on the lighting mode. For example, if you win a jackpot (one of the multiple types of jackpots described below), you can select one or two from the left as "○○●●○○●●" (○: lit, ●: off). , 5th and 6th LEDs are lit to display jackpot symbols. Also, if you win a small win (one of the multiple types of small wins described below), the 5th and 6th LEDs from the left will light up like "●●●●○○●●". Display small winning symbols. In addition, in the case of a loss, a losing symbol such as "●●●●●●●○" with only the rightmost LED lit is displayed. A mode may be adopted in which all the LEDs are turned off as a losing symbol. Before the special symbols are stopped and displayed, the special symbols are displayed in a variable manner (variable display) for a predetermined variable time. For example, each LED may be turned on so that light repeatedly flows from left to right. The mode of the variable display is not limited to the above mode and can be any lighting mode as long as each LED is not displayed in a stopped state (lighted up display in a specific mode). For example, the variable display mode may be such that all the LEDs blink at the same time.

In the gaming machine 1, when a game ball enters the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21, various random number values (numeric information ) is temporarily stored in the special figure reservation storage area 85 (FIG. 6). Specifically, if the winning is in the first starting opening 20, it is stored in the first special drawing holding storage area 85a (FIG. 6) as the first special drawing holding, and if it is winning in the second starting opening 21, it is stored in the first special drawing holding storage area 85a (FIG. 6). , is stored in the second special figure reservation storage area 85b (FIG. 6) as a second special figure reservation. There is an upper limit to the number of special figure reservations that can be stored in each special figure reservation storage area 85, and the upper limit in this embodiment is four for the first special figure reservation storage area 85a and four for the second special figure reservation storage area. There is one 85b. The special figure reservation stored in the special figure reservation storage area 85 is consumed when variable display of special symbols based on the special figure reservation becomes possible. "Extinguishing the special symbol reservation" refers to determining the random number etc. per special symbol corresponding to the special symbol reservation and executing a variable display of the special symbol to show the determination result. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1, if the variable display of the special symbol based on the winning of a game ball to the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21 cannot be performed immediately after the winning, that is, the variable display of the special symbol is executed. Even if a prize is won during execution of a medium or special game (big win game or small win game), the right to draw a big win or small win for that prize can be reserved up to a predetermined number of prizes. The number of special figure reservations is displayed on the special figure reservation display 43. The first special figure holding display 43a is composed of, for example, four LEDs, and the second special figure holding display 43b is composed of, for example, four LEDs. Each special figure reservation display 43 displays the number of special symbols reserved by lighting up LEDs corresponding to the number of special symbols reserved.

The variable display of normal symbols is triggered by passage of a game ball to the first gate 28 or the second gate 29. The normal symbol display device 42 notifies the result of the normal symbol lottery based on the passage of the game ball to the first gate 28 or the second gate 29 by displaying the normal symbols variably (fluctuatingly) and then stop displaying them. The normal pattern that is stopped and displayed (the normal pattern that is stopped and the normal pattern that is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display) is one normal pattern that is selected from a plurality of types of normal patterns by a normal pattern lottery. When the normal pattern stopping pattern is a predetermined specific normal pattern (normal pattern with a predetermined stopping pattern, that is, a normal winning pattern), assistance is provided to open the second starting port 21 in an opening pattern according to the current gaming state. A game is played. Note that the opening pattern of the second starting port 21 will be described later.

The normal symbol display 42 is composed of three LEDs, and displays a normal symbol according to the result of the normal symbol lottery depending on the lighting mode. For example, if the lottery result is a win, a normal winning symbol with the first and second LEDs from the left lit is displayed, such as "○○●" (○: lit, ●: off). If the lottery result is a loss, a normal loss symbol such as "●●○" with only the right LED lit is displayed. A mode in which all the LEDs are turned off as a normal losing symbol may be adopted. Before the normal symbols are stopped and displayed, the normal symbols are displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined variable time. For example, each LED may be turned on so that light repeatedly flows from left to right. The mode of the variable display is not limited to the above mode and can be any lighting mode as long as each LED is not displayed in a stopped state (lighted up display in a specific mode). For example, the variable display mode may be such that all the LEDs blink at the same time.

In the gaming machine 1, when a game ball passes through the first gate 28 or the second gate 29, the value of the random number per normal symbol acquired for that passage is stored in the normal symbol holding storage area 86 (FIG. 6). It will be temporarily stored as a reservation. There is an upper limit to the number of regular symbols that can be stored in the regular symbol reservation storage area 86, and the upper limit in this embodiment is one. The general symbol reservation stored in the ordinary symbol reservation storage area 86 is consumed when the variable display of the ordinary symbol based on the ordinary symbol reservation becomes possible. The extinguishing of a normal symbol reservation means to determine a random number per normal symbol corresponding to the ordinary symbol reservation, and to execute a variable display of the ordinary symbol to show the determination result. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1, if the variable display of the normal symbols based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 cannot be performed immediately after the passage, that is, when the variable display of the normal symbols is being executed or the auxiliary game is being executed, winnings will be won. Even if there is, it is possible to reserve the right to draw a normal symbol lottery for the passing of a predetermined number of symbols as an upper limit. The number of general drawings on hold is displayed on the general drawing holding display 44. The common picture reservation display 44 is composed of, for example, one LED, and displays the number of common pictures pending by lighting up the LEDs for the number of common pictures pending.

2. Electrical Configuration of Gaming Machine The electrical configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be explained based on FIGS. 4 and 5. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control board side of the gaming machine 1. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sub-control board side of the gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. The gaming machine 1 includes a main control board 80 (FIG. 4), a sub-control board 90 (FIG. 5), an image control board 100 (FIG. 5), a lamp control board 107 (FIG. 5), and an audio control board 106 (FIG. 5). FIG. 5) and a payout control board 110 (FIG. 4). The main control board 80 is a game control board that controls gaming profits such as big winning/small winning drawings and transition of gaming states, and constitutes a main control section. The sub-control board 90 is an effect control board that controls the effects to be executed as the game progresses, and together with the image control board 100, the lamp control board 107, and the audio control board 106, constitutes a sub-control unit. Note that the sub-control unit can be configured as long as it includes at least the sub-control board 90.

The main control board 80 includes a game control microcomputer 81 and an input/output circuit 87. The game control microcomputer 81 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the main control board 80, and controls the progress of the game of the gaming machine 1 according to a program. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a main ROM 83 that stores programs for controlling the progress of the game, a main RAM 84 that is used as a work memory, and a main CPU 82 that executes the programs stored in the main ROM 83. Contains. Details of the data stored in the main ROM 83 and details of the storage area provided in the main RAM 84 will be described later. The main ROM 83 may be configured as an external ROM. The game control microcomputer 81 sends and receives data to and from other boards etc. via an input/output circuit (I/O port section) 87. The input/output circuit 87 may be built into the game control microcomputer 81.

Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87 and a relay board 88. The main control board 80 receives signals output from each sensor and outputs a signal to each solenoid. The sensors connected via the relay board 88 include the first starting port sensor 20a, the second starting port sensor 21a, the first gate sensor 28a, the second gate sensor 29a, the first big winning port sensor 30a, and the second starting port sensor 20a. The big prize opening sensor 35a, the V area sensor 39a, the non-V area sensor 70a, and the normal winning opening sensor 27a are exemplified. Examples of the solenoids connected via the relay board 88 include the electric chew solenoid 24, the first big winning hole solenoid 33, the second big winning hole solenoid 38, and the V opening/closing member solenoid 73. The first starting port sensor 20a is provided inside the first starting port 20, and detects a game ball that has entered the first starting port 20. The second starting port sensor 21a is provided inside the second starting port 21, and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the second starting port 21. The first gate sensor 28a is provided inside the first gate 28 and detects a game ball that has passed through the first gate 28. The second gate sensor 29a is provided inside the second gate 29 and detects a game ball that has passed through the second gate 29. The first big winning hole sensor 30a is provided inside the first big winning hole 30, and detects a game ball that has won in the first big winning hole 30. The second big winning hole sensor 35a is provided inside the second big winning hole 35, and detects the game ball that has entered the second big winning hole 35. The V area sensor 39a is provided in the V area 39 inside the second big prize opening 35, and detects a game ball that has passed through the V area 39. The non-V area sensor 70a is provided in the non-V area 70 inside the second big prize opening 35, and detects the game ball that has passed through the non-V area 70. The normal winning hole sensor 27a is provided inside the normal winning hole 27, and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the normal winning hole 27. The electric chew solenoid 24 drives the movable member 23 of the electric chew 22. The first big prize opening solenoid 33 drives the opening/closing member 32 of the first big winning device 31. The second big prize opening solenoid 38 drives the opening/closing member 37 of the second big winning device 36. The V opening/closing member solenoid 73 drives the V opening/closing member 71 of the second big prize opening 35.

Display devices 40 are connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a first special symbol display 41a, a second special symbol display 41b, a normal symbol display 42, a first special symbol pending display 43a, a second special symbol pending display 43b, and a normal symbol pending. Display control for the display 44 is performed.

A payout control board 110 is connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87. The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the payout control board 110 and receives signals from the payout control board 110 for monitoring payout. A prize ball payout device 120, a rental ball payout device 130, and a card unit 135 are connected to the payout control board 110, and a shooting device 112 is connected via a shooting control circuit 111. The prize ball payout device 120 pays out prize balls. The payout control board 110 drives the prize ball motor 121 of the prize ball payout device 120 based on a signal from the game control microcomputer 81 to pay out prize balls. The paid out prize balls are detected by the prize ball sensor 122 for counting. The rental ball payout device 130 pays out rental balls. The payout control board 110 drives the ball rental motor 131 of the rental ball payout device 130 based on a signal from the card unit 135 connected to the gaming machine 1 to pay out rental balls. The paid-out rental balls are detected by the rental ball sensor 132 for counting. The card unit 135 is arranged adjacent to the gaming machine 1, and outputs information regarding ball lending based on information such as an inserted prepaid card. The firing device 112 includes a handle 60 (FIG. 1), a firing motor 113, a touch switch 114, and a firing volume 115. When the player operates the handle 60, the firing device 112 detects the contact of the handle 60 with the touch switch 114, and detects the amount of rotation of the handle 60 with the firing volume 115. Then, the firing motor 113 is driven so that the game ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the firing volume 115.

A sub-control board 90 (FIG. 5) is connected to the main control board 80 via an input/output circuit 87. The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the sub control board 90. The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub-control board 90 is a unidirectional communication connection that allows only the transmission of signals from the main control board 80 to the sub-control board 90. That is, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode), not shown, is interposed between the main control board 80 and the sub-control board 90 as a communication direction regulating means.

The sub-control board 90 includes a production control microcomputer 91 and an input/output circuit 95. The production control microcomputer 91 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the sub-control board 90, and controls the production of the game of the gaming machine 1 according to a program. The performance control microcomputer 91 includes a sub-ROM 93 that stores programs for controlling the performance as the game progresses, a sub-RAM 94 that is used as a work memory, and a sub-ROM that executes the programs stored in the sub-ROM 93. It includes a CPU 92. Details of the data stored in the sub-ROM 93 and details of the storage area provided in the sub-RAM 94 will be described later. The sub ROM 93 may be configured as an external ROM. The performance control microcomputer 91 sends and receives data to and from other boards etc. via an input/output circuit (I/O port section) 95. The input/output circuit 95 may be built in the production control microcomputer 91. An image control board 100 , an audio control board 106 , a lamp control board 107 , and a relay board 108 are connected to the sub-control board 90 via an input/output circuit 95 .

The image control board 100 includes an image control microcomputer 101, an input circuit 105a, and an output circuit 105b. The image control microcomputer 101 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the image control board 100, and controls the display of the image display device 7 according to a program. The image control microcomputer 101 includes a CPU 102, a ROM 103, and a RAM 104. In addition to programs for display control, the ROM 103 stores still image data and video data displayed on the image display device 7, including characters, items, figures, letters, numbers, symbols, etc. image data such as background images, etc.) are stored. RAM 104 is used as a memory for expanding image data. CPU 102 executes a program stored in ROM 103. The production control microcomputer 91 causes the image control microcomputer 101 to control the display of the image display device 7 based on commands received from the main control board 80. The image control microcomputer 101 reads image data from the ROM 103 based on instructions from the performance control microcomputer 91, and performs display control based on the read image data.

A speaker 67 is connected to the audio control board 106, and the performance control microcomputer 91 outputs audio, music, and sound effects from the speaker 67 via the audio control board 106 based on commands received from the main control board 80. etc. is output. Acoustic data such as audio output from the speaker 67 is stored in the sub ROM 93 of the sub control board 90. Note that the voice control board 106 may include a CPU, and may cause the CPU to execute voice control based on commands. Furthermore, the audio control board 106 may be equipped with a ROM, and may store acoustic data in the ROM. Alternatively, the speaker 67 may be connected to the image control board 100 and the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 may be caused to perform audio control. Furthermore, the acoustic data may be stored in the ROM 103 of the image control board 100.

A frame lamp 66, a board lamp 5, a first movable accessory 14, and a second movable accessory 15 are connected to the lamp control board 107, and controls these. The production control microcomputer 91 controls the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5 (the lamps of the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15) via the lamp control board 107 based on commands received from the main control board 80. control the lighting of lamps such as In other words, the performance control microcomputer 91 creates light emission pattern data (data that determines lighting/extinguishing, light emission color, etc., also referred to as lamp data) that determines the light emission mode of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5, and creates a light emission pattern. Light emission of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 is controlled according to the data. Data stored in the sub ROM 93 of the sub control board 90 is used to create the light emission pattern data. The performance control microcomputer 91 operates the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 based on commands received from the main control board 80. The production control microcomputer 91 creates motion pattern data (drive data) that determines the operation mode of each of the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15, and controls the movement of these movable accessories according to the motion pattern data. Control behavior. Data stored in the sub ROM 93 is used to create the operation pattern data. Note that the lamp control board 107 may include a CPU, and may cause the CPU to control the lighting of the lamp and control the operation of the movable accessory based on commands. In this case, the lamp control board 107 may be equipped with a ROM, and data regarding the light emission pattern and the operation pattern may be stored in the ROM.

A production button detection switch 63a and a selection button detection switch 68a are connected to the relay board 108. The production button detection switch 63a detects that the production button 63 has been pressed. When the effect button 63 is pressed, a switch signal is output from the effect button detection switch 63a to the sub-control board 90 via the relay board 108. The select button detection switch 68a detects that the select button 68 has been pressed. Further, the sub-control board 90 can cause the effect button 63 and the select button 68 to perform a light emission effect via the relay board 108.

3. Data Configuration of Gaming Machine The data configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be explained based on FIGS. 6 and 7. FIG. 6(A) is a diagram for explaining a table stored in the main ROM 83. FIG. 6(B) is a diagram for explaining storage areas provided in the main RAM 84. FIG. 7(A) is a diagram for explaining a table stored in the sub ROM 93. FIG. 7(B) is a diagram for explaining storage areas provided in the sub-RAM 94.

The main ROM 83 (FIG. 6(A)) includes a special symbol hit determination table T1, a reach determination table T2, a special symbol hit type determination table T3, a special symbol variation pattern determination table T4, and a normal symbol hit determination table T5. , a normal symbol per type determination table T6, a normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table T7, an electric chew opening pattern determination table T8, and a big winning opening pattern determination table T9 are stored. These determination tables are referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 in main control main processing (described later) that the game control microcomputer 81 executes. The specific contents of each determination table will be described later.

The main RAM 84 (FIG. 6(B)) includes a command set area 84a, a flag set area 84b, a counter set area 84c, a special operation status set area 84d, a special figure reservation storage area 85, and a general figure reservation memory. A region 86 is provided. The command set area 84a is an area (output buffer) where commands output from the main control unit side to the sub control unit side are set in the main control main processing (described later), and includes a fluctuation start command, a fluctuation stop command, and an opening command. Command, Round designation command, Ending command, Game state designation command, V passing command, Advance judgment command, Customer waiting standby command, Pending ball count command, Normal symbol fluctuation start command, Normal symbol fluctuation stop command, Normal symbol opening command, Normal Design ending commands etc. are set. The flag set area 84b is an area where flags indicating the status of the gaming machine and the gaming status are set in the main control main processing (described later), and include the jackpot flag, jackpot end flag, small win flag, small win end flag, V A flag, a time saving flag, a V opening/closing member operation flag, etc. are set. The counter set area 84c is an area where counters used in main control main processing (described later) are set, and a random number counter, a round counter, a first time saving counter, a second time saving counter, etc. are set. The special operation status setting area 84d is an area in which the status in special operation processing (FIG. 20), which will be described later, is set. The special figure reservation storage area 85 includes a first special figure reservation storage area 85a in which a first special figure reservation is stored, and a second special figure reservation storage area 85b in which a second special figure reservation is stored. The first special figure reservation storage area 85a stores a group of random numbers (reservation information) such as random numbers per special symbol corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth of the first special figure reservation. A first storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided for storage. The second special figure reservation storage area 85b is provided with a first storage area for storing a random number group (reservation information) corresponding to the first piece of the second special figure reservation. The normal pattern reservation storage area 86 is provided with a first storage area for storing a random number group (reservation information) such as a random number per normal symbol corresponding to the first normal pattern reservation. In addition to the above-mentioned areas, the main RAM 84 is provided with a winning type set buffer in which special figure stop symbol data is set, a drive data buffer in which drive data for driving the decorative movable body 15 is set, and the like. It is being

The sub ROM93 (FIG. 7(A)) includes a variable performance pattern determination table T51, a stop symbol pattern determination table T52, a mode status setting table T53, a time-saving performance scenario determination table T54, and a look-ahead performance pattern determination table T55. is stored. These decision tables are referred to by the production control microcomputer 91 in sub-control main processing (described later) that the production control microcomputer 91 executes. The specific contents of each determination table will be described later.

The sub-RAM 94 (FIG. 7(B)) is provided with a command storage area 94a, a production command set area 94b, a preliminary determination information storage area 94c, a counter set area 94d, and a mode status set area 94e. . The command storage area 94a is an area (input buffer) in which commands input from the main control unit are stored in sub-control main processing (described later), including a fluctuation start command, a fluctuation stop command, an opening command, and a round designation command. , ending command, game state specification command, V passing command, advance judgment command, customer waiting standby command, number of pending balls command, normal symbol fluctuation start command, normal symbol fluctuation stop command, normal symbol opening command, normal symbol ending command, etc. Stored. The production command set area 94b is an area (output buffer) where commands to be output from the sub-control board 90 to the image control board 100, lamp control board 107, and audio control board 106 are set in sub-control main processing (described later). Yes, variable performance start command, variable performance end command, opening performance start command, round performance start command, ending performance start command, normal symbol fluctuation performance start command, normal symbol fluctuation performance end command, normal symbol opening performance start command, normal symbol Ending production start commands etc. are set. The preliminary determination information storage area 94c stores preliminary determination information in sub-control main processing (described later). The counter set area 94d is an area in which counters used in the sub-control main processing (described later) are set, including a random number counter, a first special symbol reservation performance counter, a second special symbol reservation performance counter, and a regular symbol reservation performance counter. , a first time saving performance counter, a second time saving performance counter, etc. are set. In the mode status setting area 94e, a mode status (described later) indicating a gaming state of the gaming machine 1 (a time-saving state or a non-time-saving state, which will be described later) is set.

FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining various types of random numbers used in the gaming machine 1. FIG. 8(A) shows a random number obtained by the game control microcomputer 81 on the main control section side, and FIG. 8(B) shows a random number obtained by the production control microcomputer 91 on the sub control section side. There is. The game control microcomputer 81 inputs "random numbers per special symbol", "type random number per special symbol", "reach random number", "fluctuation pattern random number", "random number per normal symbol", and "type per normal symbol". Random numbers" are respectively acquired at timings described later. The "special symbol per random number" is a random number used for a lottery to determine whether it is a big hit or a small win (big win/small win lottery), and takes a value in the range of 0 to 65535. The "special symbol winning type random number" is a random number used for lottery (winning type determination) of the winning jackpot or small winning type, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. "Reach Random Number" is a random number used to determine whether or not to generate a reach in the performance symbol variation performance that indicates the result when the jackpot/small hit judgment is a loss, and ranges from 0 to 127. takes the value of Reach is a state in which there is only one fluctuating performance symbol remaining among multiple performance symbols (decorative symbols), and it depends on which symbol the fluctuating performance symbol is stopped and displayed. This is a state in which a combination of performance symbols indicating a jackpot, small win, or winning (for example, a state of "7↓7") occurs. Note that the performance symbols that are displayed in a stopped state in the ready-to-win state may be displayed as if they are shaking within the display screen 7a. The "variation pattern random number" is a random number used to determine a variation pattern including variation time, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "random number per normal symbol" is a random number used for a winning lottery (normal symbol lottery) to determine whether or not to play an auxiliary game that opens the electric chew 22, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 255. "Normal symbol per type random number" is a random number used for lottery of the winning type (win type determination) in the normal symbol lottery, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 65535. "Random number per special symbol", "Type random number per special symbol", "Reach random number", "Variation pattern random number" are obtained based on the ball entering the starting hole (first starting hole 20 or second starting hole 21) be done. The random number group obtained based on the ball entering the first starting port 20 is stored in the first special figure reservation storage area 85a, and the random number group obtained based on the ball entering the second starting port 21 is stored in the first special figure reservation storage area 85a. It is stored in the second special figure reservation storage area 85b. The "random number per normal symbol" and the "type random number per normal symbol" are acquired based on passing through a gate (first gate 28 or second gate 29). The acquired random number value per normal symbol and type random number value per normal symbol are stored in the regular symbol retention storage area 86.

The performance control microcomputer 91 is configured to acquire a "variable performance pattern random number", a "time-saving performance scenario random number", and a "preread performance random number" at timings described later. The "variable effect pattern random number" is a random number used to determine the variable effect pattern, and takes a value in the range from 0 to 127. The "time saving effect scenario random number" is a random number used to determine the change scenario of the remaining number of time savings (remaining number of display time savings) displayed on the image display device 7 during the time saving state, and has a value in the range of 0 to 127. Take. The "pre-read effect random number" is a random number used to determine the pre-read effect during the variable effect, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "fluctuation effect pattern random number" is acquired based on the output of a fluctuation start command from the main control section to the sub-control section. The obtained random number value is stored in the sub-RAM 94. The "time-saving effect scenario random number" is obtained based on the output of the ending command from the main control section to the sub-control section. The "pre-read effect random number" is acquired based on the output of a preliminary determination command from the main control section to the sub-control section. The obtained random number value is stored in the sub-RAM 94.

FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining the special symbol hit determination table T1 and the reach determination table T2. FIG. 9(A) shows a diagram for explaining the special symbol hit determination table T1, and FIG. 9(B) shows a diagram for explaining the reach determination table T2.

The special symbol winning determination table T1 indicates whether the special symbol winning random number value (any of 0 to 65535) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main processing (described later) is a "big hit", "small hit", or "loss". This is a table that is referenced to determine which of the following applies. In FIG. 9(A), in the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1), if the random value per special symbol is "0 to 210", it is determined as a "jackpot", and the random value per special symbol is " 10,000 to 10,500", it is determined to be a "small hit", and if the random number per special symbol is a value other than the above from 0 to 65,535, it is determined to be a "loss". . In addition, in the lottery of the second special symbol (special symbol 2), if the random number per special symbol is "0 to 210", it will be determined as a "jackpot", and if the random number per special symbol is "10,000 to 16,500". In this case, it is determined to be a "small hit", and if the special symbol winning random number value is a value other than the above among 0 to 65535, it is determined to be a "lose".

The reach determination table T2 indicates whether the reach random value (one of 0 to 127) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main processing (described later) corresponds to "reach exists" or "reach does not exist". This is a table that is referenced to determine whether the In FIG. 9(B), in the "non-time saving state", if the reach random value is "0 to 13", it is determined that there is a "reach", and if the reach random value is "a number other than 0 to 13 (14 to 127), it is determined that there is no reach. In addition, in the "time saving state", if the reach random value is "0 to 5", it is determined that there is a "reach", and if the reach random value is "a number other than 0 to 5 (6 to 127)", it is determined that there is a reach. It is shown that it is determined that there is no reach. The contents of the "time-saving state" and "non-time-saving state" will be described later. In the reach determination table T2, it is harder to reach in the event of a loss in the time-saving state than in the non-time-saving state. This is because in the time-saving state, more no-reach losses with short fluctuation times are selected, thereby speeding up the processing speed of special symbol reservations.

The special symbol hit type determination table T3 will be explained based on FIGS. 10 and 11. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the special symbol winning type determination table T3 in the lottery of special symbol 1. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining the special symbol hit type determination table T3 in the special symbol 2 lottery. The special symbol winning type determination table T3 determines the "jackpot type" or "jackpot type" according to the special symbol winning type random value (any of 0 to 127) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main processing (described later). This table is referred to in order to determine the "small hit type" and the "special symbol type." In Figure 10, when a "big hit" is won in the lottery of special symbol 1 in "non-time saving state", if the special symbol per type random number is "0 to 15", the jackpot type is "15R time saving 99 times jackpot". A", and the stop symbol of special symbol 1 (special symbol 1 halt symbol) that is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41a is determined to be "time-saving symbol 1." When the special symbol hit type random number value is "16 to 63", the jackpot type is determined to be "15R time-saving 99 times jackpot B", and the special symbol 1 stop symbol is determined to be "time-saving symbol 2". When the special symbol hit type random number value is "64 to 127", the jackpot type is determined to be "15R time saving 5 times jackpot A", and the special symbol 1 stop symbol is determined to be "time saving symbol 3". On the other hand, if a "small hit" is won in the lottery of special symbol 1 in "non-time saving state", the small win type is It is determined that "16R normal small win A (substantially impossible to pass through 5R/V)", and the special symbol 1 stop symbol is determined to be "small win symbol 1 without time saving".

When you win a jackpot in the lottery for special symbol 1 in the "time saving state", if the special symbol winning type random number is "0 to 63", the jackpot type is determined to be "15R time saving 99 times jackpot C". , the special figure 1 stop symbol is determined to be the "time saving symbol 4". When the special symbol hit type random number value is "64 to 127", the jackpot type is determined to be "15R time saving 5 times jackpot B", and the special symbol 1 stop symbol is determined to be "time saving symbol 5". On the other hand, if you win a "small hit" in the lottery for special symbol 1 in the "time saving state", the small win type will be " 16R normal small win B (substantially impossible to pass through 5R/V)", and the special symbol 1 stop symbol is determined to be "small win symbol 2 without time saving".

In FIG. 11, when a "big hit" is won in the lottery of special symbol 2 in "non-time saving state", if the special symbol winning type random number is "0 to 63", the jackpot type is "15R time saving 5 times jackpot". C", and the stop symbol of the special symbol 2 (special symbol 2 halt symbol) that is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 41b is determined to be the "time-saving symbol 6." When the special symbol winning type random number value is "64 to 95", the jackpot type is determined to be "15R time saving 15 times jackpot A", and the special symbol 2 stop symbol is determined to be "time saving symbol 7". When the special symbol hit type random number value is "96 to 127", the jackpot type is determined to be "15R time-saving 99 times jackpot D", and the special symbol 2 stop symbol is determined to be "time-saving symbol 8". On the other hand, when a "small hit" is won in the special drawing 2 lottery in "non-time saving state", if the special symbol per type random number is "0 to 63", the small winning type is "16R time saving 5 times small". It is determined that the winning A (substantially 15 R/V can be passed)", and the special symbol 2 stop symbol of the special symbol 2 on the second special symbol display 41b is determined to be "small winning symbol 1 with time saving". If the special symbol hit type random number is "64 to 127", the small hit type is determined to be "16R time saving 99 times small hit A (actually 15R/V can be passed)", and the special symbol 2 stop symbol is "time saving". It is determined that there is a small winning symbol 2.

When you win a jackpot in the special drawing 2 lottery in the "time saving state", if the special symbol winning type random number is "0 to 79", the jackpot type is determined to be "15R time saving 5 times jackpot D". , the special figure 2 stop symbol is determined to be the "time saving symbol 9". When the special symbol hit type random number value is "80 to 95", the jackpot type is determined to be "15R time saving 15 times jackpot B", and the special symbol 2 stop symbol is determined to be "time saving symbol 10". When the special symbol hit type random number value is "96 to 127", the jackpot type is determined to be "15R time saving 99 times jackpot E", and the special symbol 2 stop symbol is determined to be "time saving symbol 11". On the other hand, when a "small hit" is won in the special drawing 2 lottery in "time saving state", if the special symbol winning type random number is "0 to 63", the small winning type is "16R time saving 5 times small winning". B (substantially 15R/V can be passed)", and the special symbol 2 stop symbol is determined to be "time-saving small winning symbol 3". If the special symbol hit type random number is "64 to 95", the small hit type is determined to be "16R time saving 10 times small hit (actually 15R/V can be passed)", and the special symbol 2 stop symbol is "time saving available". It is determined that the small winning symbol is 4. If the special symbol hit type random number is "96 to 111", the small hit type is determined to be "16R time saving 15 times small hit (actually 15R/V can be passed)", and the special symbol 2 stop pattern is "time saving available". It is determined that the small winning symbol is 5. If the special symbol per type random number is "112 to 127", the small hit type is determined to be "16R time saving 99 times small hit B (actually 15R/V can be passed)", and the special symbol 2 stop symbol is "time saving". It is determined that there is a small winning symbol 6. In addition, by referring to the special symbol hit type determination table T3, in addition to the "special symbol stop symbol data" corresponding to the special symbol stop symbols (special symbol 1 stop symbol and special symbol 2 stop symbol), the "opening" of the special game (OP) command,” “round designation command,” and “ending (ED) command.” The specific details of each jackpot and each small win will be described later.

FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4. The special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table T4 is a table that is referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main processing (described later) to determine the fluctuation pattern according to the acquired fluctuation pattern random value (0 to 127). It is. In FIG. 12, for example, if a prize is won in the first starting hole 20 in a non-time saving state, it is determined to be a "jackpot" in the special symbol hit determination table T1, and the fluctuation pattern random value is "111 to 127", the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "P2". Also, for example, if a prize is entered in the first starting slot 20 in a non-time saving state, it is determined as a "lose" in the special symbol hit determination table T1, it is determined as "no reach" in the reach determination table T2, and the number of reserved balls is "1". ~2'', it is shown that the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "P6" regardless of the fluctuation pattern random value (any of 0 to 127). Also, for example, if you win at the second starting port 21 in the time saving state and it is determined to be a "small hit" in the special symbol hit determination table T1, regardless of the fluctuation pattern random value (any of 0 to 127) ), it is shown that the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "P17". As shown in FIG. 12, once the fluctuation pattern is determined, the fluctuation time is also determined. In addition, when reaching a reach, it is also determined whether the reach will be a normal reach or a super reach (SP reach). In addition, in the case of super reach, it is also determined whether there is a pseudo link or not.

FIG. 13(A) shows a diagram for explaining the normal symbol hit determination table T5, and FIG. 13(B) shows a diagram for explaining the normal symbol hit type determination table T6. 13(C) shows a diagram for explaining the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T7. The normal symbol winning determination table T5 indicates whether the acquired normal symbol winning random number (any of 0 to 255) corresponds to a "win" or a "loss" in the main control main processing (described later) by the game control microcomputer 81. This is a table that is referenced to determine whether the item is applicable. In FIG. 13(A), in both the "non-time saving state" and the "time saving state", when the random number per normal symbol is "0 to 254" in the drawing of a normal symbol (common symbol), It is shown that if it is determined to be a "win" and the random number per symbol is "a number other than 0 to 254 (255)", it is determined to be a "lose".

The normal symbol winning type determination table T6 determines the "winning type" and "win type" according to the normal symbol winning type random value (any of 0 to 65535) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main processing (described later). This is a table that is referred to to determine the type of normal symbol. In FIG. 13(B), when winning in the lottery of regular symbols in "non-time saving state", if the random number per symbol per symbol is "0 to 30", the winning type is determined to be "Long Open 1". Then, the stop symbol of the ordinary symbol (ordinary symbol stop symbol) that is stopped and displayed on the ordinary symbol display 42 is determined to be "winning symbol 1". If the normal symbol per type random number value is "100 to 170", the winning type is determined to be "short open 1", and the regular symbol stop symbol is determined to be "winning symbol 2". If the normal symbol per type random number value is a value other than the above from 0 to 65535, it indicates that the winning type is determined to be "short open 2" and the regular symbol stop symbol is determined to be "winning symbol 3". has been done. On the other hand, if you win in the lottery of a regular symbol in the "time saving state", the winning type is determined to be "long open 2" regardless of the random number per symbol type (any number from 0 to 65535). It is shown that the normal stop symbol is determined to be "winning symbol 4". In addition, by referring to the normal symbol hit type determination table T6, it is possible to specify "normal symbol stop symbol data" (not shown) corresponding to the ordinary symbol stop symbol.

The normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table T7 is a table that is referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main processing (described later) to determine the fluctuation time of the common symbol according to the lottery result and winning type of the common symbol. It is. In FIG. 13(C), for example, when the lottery result of the ordinary figure in the non-time saving state is "win" and the winning type is "long open 1", the fluctuation time of the ordinary figure is determined to be "30 seconds". It has been shown that Further, for example, it is shown that when the lottery result of the common symbol in the time saving state is "lose", the fluctuation time of the common symbol is determined to be "1 second".

FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining the electric chew opening pattern determination table T8. The electric chew opening pattern determination table T8 is used by the game control microcomputer 81 to determine the opening pattern of the electric chew 22 according to the ordinary figure stop symbol (ordinary figure stop symbol data) in the main control main processing (described later). This is the table being referenced. In FIG. 14(A), for example, when the normal pattern stopping pattern is "winning pattern 1", the opening pattern of the electric chew 22 is determined to be "opening pattern 11"; 4'', the opening pattern is determined to be ``opening pattern 14''. FIG. 14(B) shows the contents of each open pattern 11 to 14. In the opening pattern 11, the electric chew 22 is opened once with an opening (OP) time of 6 seconds, an opening time of 5 seconds, and an ending (ED) time of 1 second. In opening patterns 11 and 12, the electric chew 22 is opened once with an opening (OP) time of 0.01 seconds, an opening time of 0.02 seconds, and an ending (ED) time of 0.01 seconds. In the opening pattern 14, the electric chew 22 is opened once with an opening (OP) time of 0.01 seconds, an opening time of 3 seconds, and an ending (ED) time of 0.01 seconds. However, the opening of this electric chew 22 is closed even if the opening time remains if a predetermined number of game balls are won (regular number of winnings, maximum 2).

FIG. 15 is a diagram for explaining the big winning opening pattern determination table T9. The big winning hole opening pattern determination table T9 is based on the first big winning hole 30 and the second big winning hole opening pattern determined by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main processing (described later) according to the special pattern stopping pattern (special pattern stopping pattern data). This table is referred to in order to determine the opening pattern of the winning opening 35. In FIG. 15(A), the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "12H", "13H", "15H", "16H", "21H", "22H", "23H", "31H", " 32H" or "33H", the opening pattern of the first big winning hole 30 and the second big winning hole 35 is determined to be "opening pattern 21", and the special figure stop symbol data is "14H" or " 17H", the opening pattern is determined to be "Opening pattern 22", and when the special figure stop symbol data is "24H", "25H", "34H", "35H", "36H", or "37H" , it is shown that the open pattern is determined to be "open pattern 23". FIG. 15(B) shows the contents of each open pattern 21-23. In the opening pattern 21, after the opening (OP) for 6 seconds, in the 1st to 15th R, the first big prize opening 30 is opened once for the opening time of 29.5 seconds (long opening). In the opening pattern 22, after the opening (OP) for 4 seconds, in the 1st round, the second big prize opening 35 is opened once and for an opening time of 1.6 seconds, and in the 2nd to 6th rounds, the number of openings is increased. Open the first grand prize opening 30 with an opening time of 29.5 seconds (long opening) once, and from 7th to 16th R, open the first grand prize opening 30 once with an opening time of 0.1 seconds. Perform opening (short opening). In the opening pattern 23, after the opening (OP) for 0.01 seconds, in the 1st round, the second grand prize opening 35 is opened once and for an opening time of 1.6 seconds, and in the 2nd to 16th rounds, The first big prize opening 30 is opened once and for an opening time of 29.5 seconds (long opening). However, the first grand prize opening 30 and the second grand prize opening 35 will be opened even if the opening time remains if a predetermined number of game balls are won (regular number of prizes, maximum 9). Closed.

4. Explanation of Jackpot etc. In the gaming machine 1, there are "big wins", "small wins", and "losses" as a result of the special symbol lottery (big win, small win lottery). In the case of a "jackpot", the "jackpot symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 41. In the case of a "small win", the "small win symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 41. At the time of "losing", the "losing symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 41. When a jackpot is won, a ``jackpot game (second special game)'' is executed to open the first jackpot 30 in an opening pattern according to the type of special symbol (type of jackpot) that is stopped and displayed. "Small winning game (first special game)" in which when a small winning is won, the second large prize opening 35 is opened once in an opening pattern according to the type of special symbol that is stopped and displayed (small winning type). is executed. When a game ball enters the V area 39 inside the second big prize opening 35 during execution of a small winning game, the first big winning opening 30 is opened in an opening pattern according to the type of small winning that has been won. A "jackpot game (second special game)" to open the game is executed. Incidentally, a jackpot game executed based on the result of the special symbol lottery being a jackpot win is also referred to as a "type 1 jackpot game." Further, the jackpot game executed based on the passage of the game ball to the V area 39 is also referred to as a "type 2 jackpot game". In addition, jackpot games and small win games are also called "special games." This special game may include a round in which the big prize opening is opened multiple times in one round.

The jackpot game includes multiple round games that open the first big prize opening 30 (unit opening game), an opening (OP) before the first round game starts, and after the final round game ends. It includes an ending (ED). Each round game starts with the end of the opening or the end of the previous round game, and ends with the start of the next round game. The closing time (interval time) of the first big winning hole 30 between round games is included in the open round game before the closing. The small winning games include a small winning opening game in which the second large winning opening 35 is opened, an opening (pre-opening interval) before the small winning opening game starts, and an ending (closing) after the small winning opening game ends. (post-interval).

There are multiple types of jackpots. Here, the jackpot types are set as "15R time saving 99 times jackpot A to E", "15R time saving 15 times jackpot A, B", and "15R time saving 5 times jackpot A to D". All of these jackpots are jackpots in which the game state is controlled to the "time saving state and high base state" described later after executing a jackpot game (type 1 jackpot game) in which the first big prize opening 30 is opened for 15R. . On the other hand, these wins differ in the number of times the "time saving state and high base state" ends after the jackpot game. Here, the "time saving number" is the number of variable displays (variable display) of special symbols that can be performed in the "time saving state and high base state" after the jackpot game, and is set in advance for each jackpot type. For example, in "15R time saving 99 jackpots A to E", the number of time savings is 99 times, and in "15R time saving 15 jackpots A, B", the number of time savings is 15 times. Note that the "time saving state and high base state" ends when a jackpot is won and the jackpot game is executed even before the time saving number is achieved.

There are multiple types of small wins. Here, the small winning types are "16R normal small win A, B", "16R time saving 5 small winnings A, B", "16R time saving 10 small winning", "16R working time saving 15 small winning", "16R time saving small winning" 99 small wins A and B are set. In these small wins, first, a small win game is executed, and when a game ball passes through the V area 39 (V passage), a jackpot game (type 2 jackpot game) is executed. Therefore, in the small win, the opening of the second big winning hole 35 as a small winning game corresponds to the 1R, and the jackpot game that opens the first big winning hole 30 over 15R, which is executed after that when V passes, is This corresponds to 2Rth to 16thR. If V does not pass in the small winning game, the jackpot game will not be executed. Here, the "16R (actually 5R) normal small win" is a small win that is virtually impossible to pass through V. On the other hand, "16R time saving 5 times small win", "16R time saving 10 times small win", "16R time saving 15 times small win", "16R time saving 99 times small win" are small wins that can pass V. . Whether or not it is possible to pass the V during the small winning game can be set by the operation pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 and the opening pattern of the opening/closing member 37 of the second big winning device 36. Specifically, the details are as follows.

For each of the above-mentioned small wins, the second large winning opening 35 is opened once for 1.6 seconds in the small winning game after winning (FIG. 15). On the other hand, the opening time in the small win game differs depending on the type of small win. Specifically, "16R normal small win" (opening pattern 22) has an opening time of 4 seconds, "16R time shortened 5 times small win", "16R time shortened 10 times small win", "16R time shortened 15 times small win" The opening time for "win" and "16R time saving 99 small wins" (opening pattern 23) is 0.01 seconds. The reason why the opening time of the small winning game differs depending on the small winning type is that the opening timing of the second big prize opening 35 for the V opening/closing member 71, which is moving in a constant motion from the start of the opening, is changed. It's for a reason. Here, the V opening/closing member 71 is opened for 4 seconds after opening for 0.01 seconds when the small winning game is started. Since the opening pattern 22 is such that the second big prize opening 35 is opened 4 seconds after the start of the small winning game, the V opening/closing member 71 closes 0.01 seconds after the second big winning opening 35 is opened. become. Therefore, in the "16R normal small win", it is virtually impossible to pass V during the small win game. On the other hand, in the opening pattern 23, the second big prize opening 35 and the V opening/closing member 71 are opened at the same time 0.01 seconds after the start of the small winning game, and both continue to be opened for 1.6 seconds, leading to the second big prize winning. The V opening/closing member 71 closes 2.4 seconds after the opening 35 closes. Therefore, in "16R time-saving 5 times small win", "16R time-saving 10 times small win", "16R time-saving 15 times small win", and "16R time-saving 99 times small win", it is possible to pass V during the small win game. ing.

"16R time-saving 5 times small win", "16R time-saving 10 times small win", "16R time-saving 15 times small win", "16R time-saving 99 times small win" is a jackpot if the jackpot game is executed after the small win game. This is a win that controls the gaming state after the game to the "time saving state and high base state" which will be described later. "16R time saving 5 times small win", "16R time saving 10 times small win", "16R time saving 15 times small win", "16R time saving 99 times small win" are the number of time savings in "time saving state and high base state" respectively. different. For example, in "16R time saving 10 times small win", the number of time savings is 10 times, and in "16R time saving 15 times small win", the time saving number is 15 times. On the other hand, the "16R normal small win" is a win that, when a jackpot game is executed, controls the gaming state to the "non-time saving state and low base state" described later after the jackpot game. However, since the "16R normal small win" is a small win that is virtually impossible to pass through V, a jackpot game is almost never executed.

All small wins in the special drawing 1 lottery during the non-time saving state are "16R normal small wins" in which it is virtually impossible to pass V. On the other hand, the distribution ratio of small wins in the special drawing 2 lottery during the time-saving state is 50% for "16R time-saving 5 times small win", 25% for "16R time-saving 10 times small win", and "16R time-saving 15 times small win". ” was 12.5%, “16R time saving 99 small wins” was 12.5%, and “16R regular small wins” were not included. Since the probability of winning a jackpot is the same between the special drawing 1 lottery and the special drawing 2 drawing, the probability of winning either a "big hit" or a "small win where a jackpot game (type 2 jackpot game) is executed" is: The price of the special drawing 2 lottery in the time saving state is higher than that of the special drawing 1 drawing in the non-time saving state. In this way, in the gaming machine 1, the game ball is hit to the right and placed in the second starting port 21 during the time saving state, rather than the game ball being hit to the left and placed in the first starting port 20 in the non-time saving state. The setting is such that it is more advantageous for the player to win a prize.

In the gaming machine 1, there are "wins" and "losses" as a result of normal symbol drawings (winning drawings). In the case of "winning", the "winning symbol" is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display 42. At the time of "losing", the "losing symbol" is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display 42. When a win is won, a "win game (normal game)" as an auxiliary game for opening the electric chew 22 is executed in an opening pattern according to the type of the stopped and displayed normal symbol (type of win). In this winning game (normal game), the electric chew may be released multiple times during one round. A winning game (normal game) includes one round game (unit open game), an opening (OP) before the round game starts, and an ending (ED) after the round game ends. . There are multiple types of hits. Here, "Long Open 1", "Long Open 2", "Short Open 1", and "Short Open 2" are set as the winning types. These wins have different variable times, opening times, opening times, and ending times.

5. Explanation of the gaming state The gaming control microcomputer 81 of the gaming machine 1 can execute "variable time reduction control" for the special symbols displayed on the special symbol display 41 and the normal symbols displayed on the ordinary symbol display 42, respectively. It is. Here, the state in which the game control microcomputer 81 controls the special symbols on the special symbol display 41 to shorten the fluctuation time is referred to as a "time saving state", and the state in which the fluctuation time is not shortened is simply "non-time saving state". ”. In the time saving state, the variation time of the special symbol (the time from the start of variable display to the time of deriving and displaying the display result) is shorter than in the non-time saving state. The game control microcomputer 81 uses a special symbol variation pattern determination table T4 (FIG. 12) that is determined so that a variation pattern with a shorter variation time is selected more often in a time saving state than in a non-time saving state. The fluctuation pattern is determined using In other words, when the game control microcomputer 81 executes variable time reduction control for the special symbols on the special symbol display 41, the variation of the special symbol A short variation time is more likely to be selected as the display variation time. As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace at which the reserved special drawings are consumed becomes faster, and effective winnings in the starting opening (winnings that can be stored as reserved special drawings) are more likely to occur. Therefore, players can aim for a jackpot while the game progresses smoothly.

The game control microcomputer 81 executes the fluctuation time shortening control for the normal symbols on the normal symbol display 42 in synchronization with the fluctuation time shortening control for the special symbols on the special symbol display 41. That is, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the variable time reduction control for normal symbols when in the time saving state, and does not execute it when in the non-time saving state. In the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shorter than in the non-time saving state. The game control microcomputer 81 uses a normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination table T7 (FIG. 13) that is determined so that a fluctuation pattern with a shorter fluctuation time is selected more often in a time-saving state than in a non-time-saving state. The fluctuation pattern is determined using In other words, when the game control microcomputer 81 executes the variable time reduction control for the normal symbols on the normal symbol display 42, compared to the case where the variable time reduction control is not executed, the variation of the normal symbol A short variation time is more likely to be selected as the display variation time.

Furthermore, in the time-saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 22 in the auxiliary game tends to be longer than in the non-time-saving state (FIG. 13). Even in the non-time saving state, if you win "Long Open 1" in the normal symbol lottery, the opening pattern of the electric chew will be "Open Pattern 11" and the opening time will be long for 5 seconds, but the winning type will be "Long Open 1". The probability of being sorted into "Open 1" is as low as 31/65536, and in most cases, even if you win, the opening time will be 0.02 seconds. On the other hand, in the time-saving state, if a winner is won, the opening time of the electric chew is always 3 seconds, so in fact, in the time-saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 22 in the auxiliary game is longer than in the non-time-saving state. It can be said that it is easy to occur. That is, in the time saving state, it can be said that the game control microcomputer 81 executes open time extension control on the electric chew 22. Under the situation where the game control microcomputer 81 is executing the fluctuation time shortening control for the normal symbols on the normal symbol display 42 and the opening time extension control for the electric chew 22, there is a case where these controls are not executed. In comparison, the electric chew 22 is opened frequently, and the game ball enters the second starting port 21 frequently. As a result, the base, which is the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of fired balls, increases. Therefore, a state where these controls are being executed is called a "high base state", and a state where these controls are not being executed is called a "low base state". In a high base state, you can aim for a jackpot without significantly reducing the number of game balls you have. Note that the high base state does not need to execute all of the above controls. That is, by executing one or more of the fluctuation time shortening control for the normal symbols on the normal symbol display 42 and the opening time extension control for the electric chew 22, the electric chew 22 It would be good if it were easy to open. Further, the high base state may be controlled independently without being associated with the time saving state.

In gaming machine 1, "15R time saving 99 times jackpot A to E", "15R time saving 15 times jackpot A, B", "15R time saving 5 times jackpot A to D", "16R time saving 99 times small win", "16R time saving" The gaming state after a jackpot game executed by winning "15 times small win", "16R time saving 10 times small win", or "16R time saving 5 times small win" is "time saving state and high base state" . In the "time saving state and high base state", the variable display (variable display) of special symbols is executed a predetermined number of times (5, 10, 15, or 99 times), or when a jackpot is won. The game ends when the jackpot game is executed. The gaming state after winning the "16R normal small win" and playing the jackpot game is "non-time saving state and low base state". This gaming state is also called the "normal gaming state." Note that when playing the gaming machine 1 for the first time, the gaming state after the power is turned on is this normal gaming state. Here, the "time-saving state and high base state" is also simply referred to as the "time-saving state", and the "non-time-saving state and low base state" is also simply referred to as the "non-time-saving state".

In the high base state (time saving state), the game can proceed more advantageously if the game ball enters the right game area 3B (FIG. 1) by hitting right. This is because the electric chew 22 is easier to open compared to the low base state (non-time saving state), and it is easier to win a prize in the second starting port 21 than to win in the first starting port 20. be. Therefore, in the high base state, the game ball is hit to the right in order to enter the second starting port 21 while passing the game ball to the first gate 28 which is the trigger for the normal symbol lottery. This allows you to get more starting prizes (winning into the starting hole) than if you hit left-handed. In addition, in the gaming machine 1, even during the jackpot game, the game is played with the right hand. On the other hand, in the low base state, the game can proceed more advantageously if the game ball enters the left game area 3A (FIG. 1) by hitting the ball to the left. This is because the electric chew 22 is more difficult to open than in the high base state, and winning a prize in the first starting port 20 is easier than winning in the second starting port 21. Therefore, in the low base state, the game ball is hit to the left in order to enter the first starting port 20 while passing the game ball to the second gate 29, which is the trigger for the normal symbol lottery. This allows you to win more starting prizes than if you hit right-handed. On the other hand, even in the low base state (non-time saving state), if you win "Long Open 1" by passing the game ball to the second gate 29, the electric chew 22 will be opened for 5 seconds, so the 2. Hit the game ball to the right to make it enter the starting hole 21. After closing the electric chew 22, perform the left-handed shot again.

6. Operation of the game control microcomputer 81 The operation of the game control microcomputer 81 provided on the main control board 80 (FIG. 4) will be described based on FIGS. 16 to 34. Counters, flags, status, buffers, etc. that appear in the explanation of the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 are provided in the main RAM 84. As explained below, the game control microcomputer 81 reads out the program stored in the main ROM 83 and functions as a win/fail determination means, a symbol control means, a winning game execution means, a game state control means, and a winning type selection means. (See, for example, FIGS. 22, 27-29, 31, and 32).

[Main control main processing]
FIG. 16 is a flowchart of main control main processing. When the game machine 1 is powered on, the game control microcomputer 81 reads a program for executing main control main processing from the main ROM 83. In the main control main process, the game control microcomputer 81 first performs initial settings (step S001). Initial settings include, for example, setting the main CPU 82 and resetting various flags, statuses, counters, and the like. The initial value of the flag is "0", that is, "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". Note that the initial settings are executed only once after the power is turned on, and are not executed thereafter.

After the initial setting, the game control microcomputer 81 prohibits interrupt processing (step S002), and performs normal symbol/special symbol main random number update processing (step S003). In this normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 updates various random number counter values (random value per special symbol, type random value per special symbol, reach random value, The fluctuation pattern random value, the random value per normal symbol, the type random value per normal symbol) are updated by adding 1. When each random number counter value reaches the set upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. Note that the initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" or may be changed randomly. Further, each random number may be a so-called hardware random number generated using a known random number generation circuit including a counter IC or the like.

After the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 allows an interrupt of the interrupt process (step S004). While interrupts are enabled, main side timer interrupt processing (step S005) can be executed. The main side timer interrupt process is executed based on an interrupt pulse that is repeatedly input to the main CPU 82 at a predetermined period (for example, a 4 msec period). That is, the main side timer interrupt process is executed at predetermined intervals (for example, every 4 msec). Then, after the main side timer interrupt processing ends and until the next main side timer interrupt processing starts, the updating processing of various counter values by the normal symbol / special symbol main random number updating processing is repeatedly executed. . Note that if an interrupt pulse is input to the main CPU 82 in the interrupt disabled state, the main side timer interrupt processing is not started immediately, but is started after the interrupt is enabled.

[Main side timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the main side timer interrupt processing (FIG. 16: step S005). In the main side timer interrupt process, the game control microcomputer 81 first performs a random number update process (step S101). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 updates various random number counter values shown in FIG. 8(A). This random number update process is the same as the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process performed in the main control main process (FIG. 16) described above. In other words, the update processing of various random number counter values is performed during the execution period of the main side timer interrupt processing and other periods (the period from the end of the main side timer interrupt processing until the start of the next main side timer interrupt processing). It is carried out both.

After the random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs an input process (step S102). In input processing, the game control microcomputer 81 reads detection signals detected by various sensors attached to the gaming machine 1, and outputs payout data to the main RAM 84 for paying out prize balls according to the type of winning opening. Set in buffer. The various sensors are, for example, the first starting hole sensor 20a, the second starting hole sensor 21a, the first big winning hole sensor 30a, the second big winning hole sensor 35a, and the normal winning hole sensor 27a (FIG. 4).

After the input processing, the game control microcomputer 81 performs starting port sensor detection processing (step S103), normal operation processing (step S104), special operation processing (step S105), V opening/closing member control processing (step S106), and V area control processing. The sensor detection process (step S107) is executed in order. Details of these processes will be described later. After the V area sensor detection processing, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a reserved ball number processing (step S108). Here, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the number of special symbol 1 reserved balls, the number of special symbol 2 reserved balls, and the number of normal symbol reserved balls stored in the main RAM 84. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the number of reserved balls command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84. The number of reserved balls command is a command for notifying the sub-control board 90 of the number of reserved balls, and includes information regarding the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1, the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2, and the number of regular symbol reserved balls. . After setting the number of reserved balls command, the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process.

After processing the number of reserved balls, the game control microcomputer 81 performs output processing (step S109). In the output process, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs the commands and the like set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 in each of the above processes to the sub control board 90. After the output process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other processes (step S110). In other processes, for example, the second special figure holding display 43b is controlled to display the number based on the number of reserved balls for special figure 2, which will be described later, and the first special figure is displayed based on the number of reserved balls for special figure 1. The hold display 43a is controlled to display the number.

[Starting port sensor detection processing]
FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the starting port sensor detection process (FIG. 17: Step S103). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether the game ball has passed through the first gate 28 or the second gate 29 (step S201). This determination is made depending on whether a game ball is detected by the first gate sensor 28a or the second gate sensor 29a. If the game ball has not passed through either the first gate 28 or the second gate 29 (step S201: NO), the process skips to step S205. When the game ball passes through either the first gate 28 or the second gate 29 (step S201: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the number of normal symbol reserved balls is "1 (upper limit)" or not. A determination is made (step S202). The number of normal symbols reserved is the number of normal symbols reserved, and more specifically, it is the value of a counter provided in the main RAM 84 that counts the number of regular symbols reserved. If the number of normal symbols reserved balls is "1" (step S202: YES), the process skips to step S205. When the number of normal symbols reserved balls is "0" (step S202: NO), after adding "1" to the number of normal symbols reserved balls (step S203), normal symbol random number acquisition processing is performed (step S204). Here, the game control microcomputer 81 controls the value of the random number counter per normal symbol (Figure 8: value of label-TRND-H) and the value of the type counter per normal symbol (value of label-TRND-HS). ), and stores the obtained random number group in the first storage area of the general pattern reservation storage area 86 of the main RAM 84.

In step S205, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether a game ball has entered the second starting port 21 or not. This determination is made depending on whether or not a game ball is detected by the second starting port sensor 21a. If no game ball has entered the second starting port 21 (step S205: NO), the process skips to step S210. If the game ball wins (step S205: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the number of special drawing 2 reserved balls is "1 (upper limit)" (step S206). The number of special symbols 2 reserved balls is the number of reserved 2nd special symbols, and more specifically, it is the value of a counter provided in the main RAM 84 that counts the number of reserved 2nd special symbols. If the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "1" (step S206: YES), the process skips to step S210. When the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "0" (step S206: NO), after adding "1" to the number of special figure 2 reserved balls (step S207), special figure 2 related random number acquisition processing is performed (step S208 ). Here, the value of the random number counter per special symbol (Figure 8: value of label-TRND-A), the value of the type random number counter per special symbol (value of label-TRND-AS), the value of the reach random number counter (Figure 8: value of label-TRND-AS), FIG. 8: Value of label-TRND-RC) and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter (FIG. 8: Value of label-TRND-T1) are obtained. The game control microcomputer 81 stores the acquired random number group in the first storage area of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b. The game control microcomputer 81 also temporarily stores the acquired random number group in a buffer (advance determination buffer) different from the second special figure reservation storage area 85b for the special figure 2 advance determination process to be described later. hold). After the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 2 preliminary determination process (step S209). In the special figure 2 preliminary determination process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a preliminary jackpot determination with reference to the jackpot determination table T1. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires a jackpot random number value as a determination value that is temporarily stored in the preliminary determination buffer through special figure 2 related random number acquisition processing. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 uses the reference jackpot determination table T1 and the jackpot random number value to pre-determine whether or not it is a jackpot. When the result of the jackpot preliminary determination is "jackpot", the game control microcomputer 81 performs a jackpot type preliminary determination. In the jackpot type preliminary determination, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires the jackpot type random number value as a determination value temporarily stored in the preliminary determination buffer by special figure 2 related random number acquisition processing. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 pre-determines the jackpot type based on the acquired jackpot type random number value and the jackpot type determination table T5. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a preliminary determination of the fluctuation pattern. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires the fluctuating pattern random value and the reach random value as the determination value temporarily stored in the preliminary determination buffer through the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process. do. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 creates a preliminary determination command. The preliminary determination command includes a jackpot preliminary determination result (in the case of a jackpot, a jackpot type preliminary determination result), and a fluctuation pattern preliminary determination result. The game control microcomputer 81 sets the created advance determination command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this process.

In step S210, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether a game ball has entered the first starting port 20 or not. This determination is made depending on whether a game ball is detected by the first starting port sensor 20a. If no game ball has entered the first starting port 20 (step S210: NO), this process ends. When a game ball enters the first starting port 20 (step S210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the number of reserved balls for special drawing 1 is "4 (upper limit)" ( Step S211). The number of reserved special symbols 1 is the number of reserved first special symbols, and more specifically, it is the value of a counter provided in the main RAM 84 that counts the number of reserved first special symbols. If the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is "4" (step S211: YES), this process is ended. When the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is "3" or less (step S211: NO), after adding "1" to the number of special figure 1 reserved balls (step S212), special figure 1 related random number acquisition processing is performed (step S213). Here, similarly to the above-mentioned special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (step S208), the value of the random number counter per special symbol, the value of the type random number counter per special symbol, the value of the reach random number counter, and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter are obtained. get. The game control microcomputer 81 stores the obtained random number group in a storage area corresponding to the current number of special figure 1 reserved balls among the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a. The game control microcomputer 81 temporarily stores (retains) the acquired random number group in a buffer (advance determination buffer) different from the first special figure holding storage area 85a for the special figure 1 preliminary determination process. let After the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 1 preliminary determination process (step S214). The special figure 1 preliminary determination process is similar to the above-mentioned special figure 2 preliminary determination process.

[Normal operation processing]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the normal operation process (FIG. 17: step S104). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the electric chew 22 is in operation (step S501). If the electric chew 22 is in operation (step S501: YES), the process moves to step S540. When the electric chew 22 is not in operation (step S501: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the normal symbol is being displayed in a stopped state (has the variable stop time elapsed) (step S502). If the normal symbol is being displayed in a stopped state (step S502: YES), the process moves to step S531. If the normal symbols are not being displayed in a stopped state (step S502: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the normal symbols are changing (step S503). If the normal symbol is changing (step S503: YES), the process moves to step S521. If the normal symbols are not changing (step S503: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the number of reserved balls of the normal symbols is "0" (step S504). If the number of reserved pitches is "0" (step S504: YES), this process ends. If the number of reserved balls is not "0" (step S504: NO), the number of normal symbol reserved balls is decremented by 1 (step S505). Therefore, when a game ball passes through the first gate 28 or the second gate 29 with the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol being "0", the normal symbol is temporarily The number of reserved balls becomes "1", and then, in this step S505, the reservation is exhausted and the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol immediately becomes "0". This also applies to the number of reserved balls in the special symbol. That is, in step S207 and step S212 of the starting port sensor detection process (FIG. 18), the number of reserved special symbols becomes "1", and then in step S1404 and step S212 of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 21), which will be described later. In S1410, the reservation is exhausted and the number of reserved balls of the special symbol becomes "0". Incidentally, the decrement of the number of normal symbols reserved balls (the extinguishment of the ordinary symbols reserved) is executed together with the clearing process to clear the reservation information (various random values) stored in the first storage area of the ordinary symbols reserved storage area 86. Ru.

Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a hit determination with reference to the normal symbol hit determination table T5 (FIG. 13(A)) (step S506). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first generates a random number value per normal symbol as a judgment value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first normal symbol pending) of the normal symbol pending storage area 86. Read out. Then, it is determined whether or not it is a win using the normal symbol win random number value, the gaming state (whether it is a time saving state or not), and the normal symbol win determination table T5. For example, in a non-time saving state, if the random number per normal symbol is "0" to "254", it will be determined as a "win", and if the random number per normal symbol is "255" otherwise, it will be determined as a "lost". ” (FIG. 13(A)).

Next, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the normal symbol per type determination table T6 (FIG. 13(B)) to determine the type of the normal symbol (ordinary symbol stop symbol) (step S507). Specifically, if the game control microcomputer 81 has won the winning determination in the above (step S506), first, the game control microcomputer 81 first selects the winning normal symbol stored in the first storage area of the normal symbol holding storage area 86. Read the type random value. Then, the winning type and the normal symbol (normal symbol stop symbol) are determined using the normal symbol per type random number value, the gaming state (whether it is a time saving state or not), and the normal symbol per type type determination table T6. For example, in a non-time saving state, if the random number per normal symbol is between "0" and "30", the winning type is determined to be "long open 1" and the normal symbol is determined to be "winning symbol 1". . If the normal symbol per type random number value is "100" to "170", the winning type is determined to be "short open 1", and the normal symbol is determined to be "winning symbol 2". If the normal symbol per type random value is other than that, the winning type is determined to be "short open 2" and the normal symbol is determined to be "winning symbol 3" (FIG. 13(B)). On the other hand, in the case of a "lose" in the above hit determination, a "lose symbol" is set as a normal symbol.

Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern with reference to the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T7 (FIG. 13(C)) (step S508). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a normal symbol variation pattern using the gaming state (whether it is a time saving state or not), the winning determination result, the winning type, and the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T7. do. For example, in a non-time saving state, if the winning type is "Long Open 1", the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be "30 seconds". Further, for example, in the time saving state, if the winning determination is a "lose", the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be "1 second" (FIG. 13(C)). The game control microcomputer 81 sets a normal symbol variation start command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84 in order to notify the sub-control board 90 of the start of variation of the normal symbols and the variation time (step S509). The normal symbol variation start command includes information regarding the normal stop symbol data and information regarding the normal symbol variation pattern. After that, the game control microcomputer 81 starts the fluctuating display of the normal symbols and ends this process (step S510).

In step S521, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the normal symbol variation time has elapsed and ended. The fluctuation time of the normal symbol is the fluctuation time selected in step S508 (FIG. 13(C)). If the variable time has not ended (step S521: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. That is, the fluctuating display of the normal symbols continues. On the other hand, if the fluctuation time has ended (step S521: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 changes the fluctuation display of the normal symbol to the normal symbol specified in step S507 (the normal symbol for a hit or the normal symbol for a loss). It is stopped at the figure stop symbol) (step S522). In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a normal symbol fluctuation stop command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 in order to notify the sub-control board 90 of the normal symbol fluctuation stop (step S523). After that, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the normal symbol stop time and finishes this process (step S524). Here, the normal symbol stop time is 0.5 seconds.

In step S531, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the normal symbol fluctuation stop time has elapsed. If the stop time has not elapsed (step S531: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. That is, the stop display of the normal symbols is continued. On the other hand, if the stop time has elapsed (step S531: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 executes this process if the hit determination in the above (step S506) is a "loss" (step S532: NO). Finish. On the other hand, in the case of "win" in the above hit determination (step S532: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sends the normal symbol opening to notify the sub-control board 90 of the start of the opening of the winning game (normal game). The command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S533). Furthermore, the game control microcomputer 81 sets an electric chew opening pattern (step S534). The opening pattern of the electric chew 22 is selected with reference to the electric chew opening pattern determination table T8 (FIG. 14(A)). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 uses the type of normal symbol (normal symbol stop symbol data) determined in the above (step S507) and the electric chew opening pattern determination table T8 to release the electric chew 22. Select a pattern. Here, for example, when the normal symbol is "winning symbol 1", "opening pattern 11" is selected, and when the normal symbol is "winning symbol 4", "opening pattern 14" is selected (see FIG. 14). . After selecting the opening pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 starts operating the electric chew according to the selected opening pattern (step S535), and ends this process.

In step S501 described above, if the electric chew 22 is in operation (step S501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the closing condition for the electric chew 22 is satisfied (step S540). The closing condition here is that the number of prizes entered into the electric chew 22 has reached the specified maximum number of prizes (for example, 2 pieces), or the opening time of the electric chew 22 has elapsed and the time to close the electric chew 22 has arrived. One of the things that has been achieved is that it has been fulfilled. The opening time of the electric chew 22 is the opening time corresponding to the opening pattern selected in step S534 (see FIG. 14). If the closing condition for the electric chew 22 is not satisfied (step S540: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, if the closing condition for the electric chew 22 is satisfied (step S540: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sends the normal symbol ending to the sub-control board 90 in order to inform the sub-control board 90 of the start of the ending of the game (normal game). The command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S541). Furthermore, the game control microcomputer 81 closes (blocks) the electric chew 22 to stop its operation (step S542), and ends this process.

[Special operation processing]
FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the special operation process (FIG. 17: step S105). Here, the processing related to the special symbol display 41 and the grand prize device (first grand prize device 31 and second grand prize device 36) is divided into five stages, and each stage is divided into "1" of "special operation status", They are called "2", "3", "4", and "5". When the "special operation status" is "1" (step S1301: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs special symbol standby processing (step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, special symbol hit determination, special symbol variation pattern selection, etc. are executed. When the "special operation status" is "2" (step S1301: NO, step S1303: YES), special symbol fluctuation processing is performed (step S1304). In the special symbol fluctuation processing, output of a fluctuation stop command etc. is executed after the fluctuation time has elapsed. When the "special operation status" is "3" (steps S1301, S1303: NO, step S1305: YES), special symbol confirmation processing is performed (step S1306). In the special symbol confirmation process, an opening command is output when a big hit or a small hit occurs. When the "special operation status" is "4" (steps S1301, S1303, S1305: NO, step S1307: YES), special electric accessory processing 1 (jackpot game) is performed (step S1308). In the special electric accessory processing 1, a jackpot game (second type special game) is executed. When the "special operation status" is "5" (steps S1301, S1303, S1305, step S1307: NO), special electric accessories processing 2 (small winning game) is performed (step S1309). In the special electric accessory processing 2, a small winning game (first type special game) is executed. Details of each of the above processes will be described later. Note that the special operation status is "1" in the initial setting.

[Special symbol standby processing]
FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 20: Step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether the number of reserved balls (special symbol 2 reserved) in the second starting port 21 is "0" (step S1401). When the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "0" (step S1401: YES), in other words, the random value group acquired due to the winning in the second starting opening 21 is stored in the second special figure reserved storage area 85b. If there is no memory, the process moves to step S1407. When the number of special figure 2 reserved balls is "1" or more (step S1401: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 performs special symbol hit determination processing (step S1402) and special symbol fluctuation pattern selection processing (step S1403). Execute. Details of these processes will be described later. After the special symbol variation pattern selection process, the number of special symbol 2 reserved balls is decremented by one (step S1404). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 clears the reservation information (various random numbers) stored in the first storage area of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b (step S1405). Through the above steps, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the pending image 9B corresponding to the first storage area of the second special figure pending storage area 85b is shifted to the pending digested image display area side, and is displayed as the pending digested image 9C. be done. Thereby, the player can recognize that one second special figure reservation has been used up. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step S1406). In the special figure 2 variation start process, a variation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 to start variable display of the second special symbol, and the special operation status is set to "2". In addition, the variation start command (special symbol 2 variation start command) set in the special symbol 2 variation start process includes information regarding the special symbol stop symbol data set in the special symbol hit determination process (step S1402) and special symbol variation. Information regarding the variation pattern set in the pattern selection process (step S1403) is included.

In step S1401, if the number of reserved balls for special chart 2 is "0" (step S1401: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines that the number of reserved balls for the first starting port 20 (special chart 1 reserved) is "0". It is determined whether or not there is one (step S1407). If the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is "0" (step S1407: YES), that is, the random value group acquired due to the winning in the first starting slot 20 is stored in the first special figure reserved storage area 85a. If there is no memory, the process moves to step S1413. When the special figure 1 reserved ball number is "1" or more (step S1407: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 performs special symbol hit determination processing (step S1408) and special symbol fluctuation pattern selection processing (step S1409). Execute. Details of these processes will be described later. After the special fluctuation pattern selection process, the number of special figure 1 reserved balls is decremented by one (step S1410). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 changes the storage location of the reservation information (various random numbers) stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a from the current position to the side from which it is read. At the same time as shifting by one, the reservation information stored in the farthest place from the read side in the first special figure reservation storage area 85a is cleared (step S1411). For example, if pending information is stored in the first to third storage areas, the pending information stored in the third storage area is cleared and the pending information is stored in the first to fourth storage areas. If so, the pending information stored in the fourth storage area is cleared. Through the above steps, the first special figure reservations are consumed in the order in which they were reserved. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reserved image 9A (the rightmost reserved image 9A among the four reserved images 9A) corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a is displayed. It is shifted to the held digested image display area side and displayed as the held digested image 9C. In addition, when there is pending information in the second to fourth storage areas of the first special figure holding storage area 85a, the holding image 9B corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas (of the four holding images 9A, the right The second, third, and fourth reserved images 9A) are each shifted one position to the right. Thereby, the player can recognize that one first special symbol reservation has been used up. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (step S1412). In the special figure 1 variation start process, a variation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 to start variable display of the first special symbol, and the special operation status is set to "2" (step S1406). In addition, the variation start command (special symbol 1 variation start command) set in the special symbol 1 variation start process includes information regarding the special symbol stop symbol data set in the special symbol hit determination process (step S1408) and special symbol variation. Information regarding the variation pattern set in the pattern selection process (step S1409) is included.

In step S1407, if the number of reserved balls for special drawing 1 is "0" (step S1407: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is a standby screen (step S1413). The standby screen is a demo screen for waiting for customers. The game control microcomputer 81 may determine, for example, by turning on/off a demo screen display flag for waiting for customers. If it is a standby screen (step S1413: YES), this process ends. If it is not a standby screen (step S1413: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 waits for a predetermined standby time to elapse, and then sets a customer waiting standby command to display a standby scene in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84. (Step S1414), this process ends. As described above, according to the special symbol standby process of this embodiment, the variable display of the special symbol based on the first special symbol reservation is executed only when the second special symbol reservation is "0". That is, the extinguishment of the second special figure reservation is executed in priority to the extinguishment of the first special figure reservation.

[Special symbol hit determination processing]
FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the special symbol hit determination process (FIG. 21: steps S1402 and S1408). The hit determination process for special figure 2 (step S1402) and the hit determination process for special figure 1 (step S1408) have the same process flow, so they will be explained together. In the special symbol hit determination process, first, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a hit determination with reference to the special symbol hit determination table T1 (FIG. 9(A)) (step S1502). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out a random value per special symbol as a determination value. For example, in the hit determination process for special symbol 2, the random number value per special symbol stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first of the second reserved special symbol) of the second special symbol reservation storage area 85b is read out. In the hit determination process for special symbol 1, the random number value per special symbol stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first special symbol reserved) of the first special symbol reservation storage area 85a is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 uses the special symbol winning determination table T1 to refer to and the read special symbol winning random number value to determine whether or not it is a big hit or not and whether or not it is a small hit. In this way, the game control microcomputer 81 functions as a "properness determination means."

If the result of the special symbol hit determination is "jackpot" (step S1503: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the jackpot flag (step S1505) and determines the jackpot type (step S1507). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out a special symbol per type random number value as a determination value. For example, in the hit determination process for special figure 2, the special symbol hit type random number value stored in the first storage area of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read out. In the hit determination process for special figure 1, the special symbol hit type random number value stored in the first storage area of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the jackpot type based on the read special symbol hit type random number value and the special symbol hit type determination table T3 (FIGS. 10 and 11). In this way, the game control microcomputer 81 functions as a "winning type selection means". After determining the jackpot type, the special symbol stop symbol data (jackpot symbol) corresponding to the specified jackpot type is set in the win type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1509), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if the result of the special symbol hit determination is not a "big hit" (step S1503: NO) but a "small hit" (step S1510: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the small hit flag and (Step S1512), the small hit type is determined (Step S1514). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the special symbol hit type random number value as a determination value, similar to the determination of the jackpot type. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the small winning type based on the read special symbol winning type random number value and the special symbol winning type determination table T3 (FIGS. 10 and 11). After determining the small winning type, the special symbol stop symbol data (small winning symbol) corresponding to the specified small winning type is set in the winning type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1516), and this process ends.

If the result of the special symbol hit determination is not a "big hit" or "small hit" but a "loss" (steps S1503, S1510: NO), special symbol stop symbol data (01H) corresponding to the losing symbol is provided in the main RAM 84. The winning type is set in the jackpot type buffer (step S1518), and the process ends.

[Special symbol variation pattern selection process]
23 and 24 are flowcharts of the special symbol variation pattern selection process (FIG. 21: steps S1403 and S1409). The variation pattern selection process of special figure 2 (step S1403) and the variation pattern selection process of special figure 1 (step S1409) have the same processing flow, so they will be explained together. In the variation pattern selection process, first, the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether the gaming state is a time saving state (step S1600). A determination as to whether or not the time saving state is established is made based on whether the time saving flag is ON or not. If it is in the time saving state (step S1600: YES), the process moves to step S1612. If it is not in the time saving state (step S1600: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the jackpot flag is ON or not (step S1602).

If the jackpot flag is ON (step S1602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern by referring to the table for non-time saving state jackpots out of the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4 (FIG. 12). (Step S1603). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out a fluctuating pattern random value as a determination value. For example, in the variation pattern selection process for special figure 2, the variation pattern random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first of the second special figure reservation) of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read out. In the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 1, the variation pattern random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first special figure reserved) of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern using the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4 and the variation pattern random value. Here, as a table for non-time-saving state jackpots, of the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table T4 shown in FIG. The part (in special figure 2, the part whose variation pattern is "P14") is referred to (the address is set). From the read variation pattern random number value, either "P1" or "P2" is selected as the variation pattern in the special figure 1, and "P14" is selected as the variation pattern in the special figure 2 regardless of the variation pattern random value.

In step S1602, when the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1602: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the small jackpot flag is ON (step S1604). When the small hit flag is ON (step S1604: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines the variation pattern by referring to the table for non-time-saving small winnings in the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4 (FIG. 12). A selection is made (step S1605). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out a variable pattern random value as a determination value, similar to step S1603 above. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern using the portion of the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4 that corresponds to a small win in a non-time saving state and the variation pattern random value. Here, in the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table T4, the part corresponding to the small hit in the non-time saving state is the part where the fluctuation pattern is "P3" in special figure 1, and the part where the fluctuation pattern is "P15" in special figure 2. Therefore, these are selected regardless of the fluctuation pattern random value.

In step S1604, when the small hit flag is OFF (step S1604: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the reach random number is a reach established random number (step S1606). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads a reach random value as a determination value. In the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 2, the reach random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first piece of the second special figure reservation) of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read out. In the variation pattern selection process of special figure 1, the reach random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first special figure pending) of the first special figure pending storage area 85a is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not there is a reach, using the reach determination table T2 (FIG. 9(B)) and the reach random value. Here, since it is a non-time-saving state, the reach is determined based on the table for the non-time-saving state (the part where the reach judgment value (reach establishment random number) is "0" to "13") of the reach judgment table T2. Determine the presence or absence.

When the reach random value is a reach establishment random value (step S1606: YES), that is, in the case of a loss with reach, the game control microcomputer 81 selects the reach in the non-time saving state from the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4. A variation pattern is selected with reference to the table for presence/loss (step S1607). Here, as a table for a loss with reach in a non-time saving state, a part of the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table T4 shown in FIG. ”, “P5” part, and in special figure 2, the variation pattern is “P14” part) are referred to. In the special figure 1, either "P4" or "P5" is selected as a variation pattern from the read variation pattern random value. In special figure 2, "P14" is selected as the variation pattern regardless of the read variation pattern random value.

If the reach random value is not the reach establishment random value (step S1606: NO), that is, if there is no reach and there is no reach, the game control microcomputer 81 selects the reach in the non-time saving state from the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table T4. A variation pattern is selected with reference to the table for no loss (step S1608). Here, as a table for a no-reach loss in a non-time saving state, a part of the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table T4 shown in FIG. ”, “P7” part, and in special figure 2, the variation pattern is “P15” part) are referred to. In the special figure 1, either "P6" or "P7" is selected as the variation pattern from the readout variation pattern random value and the current number of reserved balls (1 to 4) for the special figure 1. In special figure 2, "P15" is selected as the variation pattern regardless of the read variation pattern random value. In special figure 1, the variation pattern selected changes depending on the number of balls on hold, so a shortening variation function is activated according to the number of balls on hold. That is, in special map 1, when the number of reserved balls is "3" to "4", more fluctuation patterns with short fluctuation times are selected than when the number of reserved balls is "1" to "2". It is now possible to do so. Thereby, when the number of reserved balls is large, it is possible to increase the speed at which special symbols are reserved.

In step S1600, when it is determined that the gaming state is the time saving state, the gaming control microcomputer 81 determines whether the jackpot flag is ON or not (FIG. 24: step S1612). Thereafter, the processing in steps S1613 to S1618 is the same as the processing in steps S1603 to S1608 described above, except for the following points, so a description thereof will be omitted. The difference between the processing in steps S1613 to S1618 and the processing in steps S1603 to S1608 is that in steps S1613, S1615, S1617, and S1618, the part of the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table T4 that is referred to is the previously described step S1603, S1605, and S1607. , S1608. Specifically, in steps S1603, S1605, S1607, and S1608, the table for the non-time saving state of the special symbol variation pattern determination table T4 is referred to, whereas in steps S1613, S1615, S1617, and S1618, A table for time-saving states is referenced. For example, in the case of step S1615, the part of the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table T4 that corresponds to the small hit in the time-saving state (the part where the fluctuation pattern is "P9" in special symbol 1, and the fluctuation pattern is "P17" in special symbol 2) ) is referred to. For example, in the case of step S1617, the part of the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table T4 that corresponds to the loss with reach in the short time state (the part where the fluctuation pattern is "P10" in special symbol 1, and the fluctuation pattern is "P10" in special symbol 2) "P18" part) is referred to.

After selecting the variation pattern as described above, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the selected variation pattern (step S1630) and ends this process. Information on the set variation pattern is included in the variation start command and transmitted to the sub-control board 90 in the output process (FIG. 17: Step S109). This starts the variable display of special symbols.

[Special symbol fluctuation processing]
FIG. 25 is a flowchart of the special symbol variation process (FIG. 20: Step S1304). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the special symbol variation time has elapsed and ended (step S1701). The special symbol fluctuation time is a fluctuation time determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected in the above-mentioned special symbol fluctuation pattern selection process (FIGS. 23 and 24) (see FIG. 12). If the variable time has not ended (step S1701: NO), this process ends. That is, the variable display of the special symbol started in step S1406 or S1412 of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 21) is continued. On the other hand, if the fluctuation time has ended (step S1701: YES), a fluctuation stop command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S1702), and the special operation status is set to "3" (step S1703). . In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other processing associated with the stoppage of fluctuation (step S1704). For example, the game control microcomputer 81 performs processing to stop the variable display of special symbols on the special symbol display 41 at a symbol corresponding to the set special symbol stop symbol data (stop display of special symbols). In this way, the game control microcomputer 81 functions as a "symbol control means". In addition, the stop display time of the special symbol can be arbitrarily set according to the lottery result of the special symbol 1 or the lottery result of the special symbol 2. After that, the game control microcomputer 81 finishes this process.

[Special design confirmation process]
FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the special symbol determination process (FIG. 20: Step S1306). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the special symbol stop time has elapsed (step S1800). If the stop time has not elapsed (step S1800: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, if the stop time has elapsed (step S1800: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a game state management process (step S1801). The game state management process is a process for switching the game state according to the number of changes in the special symbol executed during the time saving state, and the contents will be described later. After the game state management process, it is determined whether the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802).

If the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets a jackpot opening pattern according to the type of jackpot won (step S1803). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the big winning hole opening pattern determination table T9 (FIG. 15), determines the opening pattern of the big winning hole from the special figure stop symbol data, and uses the determined opening pattern. set. Here, no matter what type of jackpot it is (even if the special pattern stop symbol data is 11H to 13H, 15H, 16H, 21H to 23H, 31H to 33H), "Open pattern 21" is used as the opening pattern of the winning hole. " is set. The value of the round counter is set to the number of rounds according to the type of jackpot won in conjunction with the setting of the opening pattern of the jackpot. The round counter counts the number of unit opening games (round games) executed during the jackpot game. Here, regardless of the type of jackpot, "15" is set in the round counter (FIG. 15(B)).

After setting the opening pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON (step S1804), and if it is ON (step S1804: YES), it is switched to OFF (step S1805). As a result, while the type 1 jackpot game is being executed, the game is in a non-time saving state. Thereafter, in order to start the type 1 jackpot game, an opening command for the type 1 jackpot game is set (step S1806), and the opening of the jackpot game is started (step S1807). Thereafter, the special operation status is set to "4" (step S1808), and the present process ends. By setting the special operation status to "4", the process shifts to special electric accessory process 1 (jackpot game).

In step S1802, when the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1802: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the small jackpot flag is ON (step S1810). When the small win flag is ON (step S1810: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets an opening pattern for the large winning hole according to the type of small win won (step S1811). Specifically, similar to step S1803 described above, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the big winning hole opening pattern determination table T9, determines the opening pattern of the big winning hole from the special figure stop symbol data, and determines the opening pattern of the big winning hole. Set the opening pattern. Here, for example, when the small hit type is "16R normal small win A" (special figure stop symbol data is "14H"), "opening pattern 22" is set as the opening pattern of the winning hole. Further, for example, when the small win type is "16R time saving 5 times small win A" (special figure stop symbol data is "24H"), "opening pattern 23" is set as the opening pattern of the winning hole. Together with the setting of the opening pattern of the big prize opening, the value of the round counter is set to the number of rounds according to the type of small winning won. Here, regardless of the type of small win, "16" is set in the round counter (FIG. 15(B)).

After setting the opening pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the V opening/closing member operation flag to ON (step S1812). The V opening/closing member operation flag is a flag indicating that it is the period in which the V opening/closing member 71 is to be operated. In the V opening/closing member control process (FIG. 33), when the V opening/closing member operation flag is ON, the V opening/closing member 71 is operated in a predetermined operation pattern. Here, in any small winning game, the V opening/closing member 71 operates so as to be closed for 0.01 seconds as an opening after the small winning game, then opened for 4 seconds, and then closed. In addition, when the small hit flag is ON, unlike when the jackpot flag is ON, even if the time saving flag is ON, it is not switched to OFF. Thereafter, in order to start the small winning game, a small winning opening command is set (step S1813), and the opening of the small winning game is started (step S1814). Thereafter, the special operation status is set to "5" (step S1815), and the present process ends. By setting the special operation status to "5", the process shifts to special electric accessory process 2 (small winning game).

In step S1810, when the small hit flag is OFF (step S1810: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "1" (step S1820) and ends this process. As a result, neither the jackpot game nor the small win game is started, and the process shifts to the special symbol standby process (FIG. 20: step S1302) again, and the special symbol hit determination for the next hold is executed.

[Game state management processing]
FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the gaming state management process (FIG. 26: Step S1801). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON. If the time-saving flag is OFF (step S2005: NO), that is, in a non-time-saving state, the process skips to step S2040. When the time saving flag is ON (step S2005: YES), that is, in the time saving state, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the fluctuation is a fluctuation of the second special symbol (step S2010). When the fluctuation is a fluctuation of the second special symbol (step S2010: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 decrements the values of the first time saving counter C1 and the second time saving counter C2 by 1 (step S2010: YES). S2015). The "first time saving counter C1" counts the number of changes in the second special symbol executed during the time saving state. The "second time saving counter C2" counts the number of changes in the special symbol executed during the time saving state (the total number of changes in the first special symbol and the number of changes in the second special symbol). The initial values respectively set in the first time saving counter C1 and the second time saving counter C2 are determined based on the setting table of FIG. 30 in the game state setting process (FIG. 29) described later. On the other hand, when the variation is a variation of the first special symbol (step S2010: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 decrements only the value of the second time saving counter C2 by 1 (step S2020).

The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether at least one of the values of the first time-saving counter C1 and the second time-saving counter C2 has become "0" as a result of step S2015 or step S2020 (step S2030). If neither value of the first time saving counter C1 nor the second time saving counter C2 is "0" (step S2030: NO), the process skips to step S2040. When the value of at least one of the first time saving counter C1 and the second time saving counter C2 is "0" (step S2030: YES), the time saving flag is switched to OFF (step S2035). Thereby, the gaming state is switched from the time-saving state to the non-time-saving state. That is, when the number of variations of the special symbols executed in the time saving state reaches the number shown in FIG. 30, the gaming state is switched to the non-time saving state.

In step S2040, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the game state designation command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this process. The gaming state designation command includes information regarding the current gaming state just set (whether or not it is a time saving state, the respective values of the first time saving counter and the second time saving counter, etc.).

[Special electric accessory processing 1 (jackpot game)]
FIG. 28 is a flowchart of the special electric accessory processing 1 (FIG. 20: step S1308). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200). The "jackpot end flag" is a flag indicating that all openings of the first jackpot winning device 31 based on the opening pattern have been completed in the jackpot game currently being executed. If the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), the process moves to step S2230. When the jackpot end flag is OFF (step S2200: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the first jackpot opening 30 is open (step S2202). If it is open (step S2202: YES), the process moves to step S2210.

If the first big prize opening 30 is not open (step S2202: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether it is the time (timing) to open the first big prize opening 30 (step S2203). . The time (timing) to open the first big prize opening 30 may be, for example, when the opening time of the jackpot game has passed and it is time to start opening in the first round game, or when it is temporarily closed after opening. This includes the time when the interval time (closing time) until the first big prize opening 30 is opened again has elapsed and it is time to start opening it again. If it is not the time (timing) to open the first big prize opening 30 (step S2203: NO), the process moves to step S2220.

If it is the time (timing) to open the first big winning hole 30 (step S2203: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs big winning hole opening processing (step S2207). Here, the game control microcomputer 81 opens the first big winning opening 30 according to the opening pattern (FIG. 15(B)) according to the winning type (big winning type or small winning type). When a type 1 jackpot game is being executed, the first jackpot 30 is opened according to the opening pattern 21 regardless of the jackpot type. When a type 2 jackpot game is being executed, the first jackpot 30 is opened according to the opening pattern 22 or the opening pattern 23 depending on the type of small winning. After the big winning opening opening process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a round designation command (step S2208). The round designation command includes information regarding the number of rounds of the special game (small winning game and jackpot game) being executed, and the game control microcomputer 81 sets the round designation command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84. do. This allows the sub-control board 90 to be notified of the number of rounds of the special game. In addition, in this embodiment, the first big prize opening 30 is not opened multiple times during one round game. However, as another embodiment, when the first big winning hole 30 is opened multiple times during one round game, the game control microcomputer 81 controls the first big winning hole 30 to be opened only once. It is also possible to determine whether or not it is the first release in the current round, and set the round designation command only in the case of the first release. After setting the round designation command, this processing ends.

In step S2202 described above, if the first big prize opening 30 is open (step S2202: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the closing condition of the first big prize opening 30 is satisfied. (Step S2210). The closing condition here is that the number of prizes entered into the first grand prize opening 30 in the round game has reached the specified maximum number of prizes (for example, nine per round), or One of the following conditions is satisfied: the time to close has arrived (that is, a predetermined opening time (for example, 29.5 seconds) has elapsed since the first grand prize winning opening 30 was opened). Then, if the condition for closing the first big prize opening 30 is not satisfied (step S2210: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, if the closing condition for the first big prize opening 30 is satisfied (step S2210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 closes (blocks) the first big prize opening 30 (step S2211), and then closes the first big prize opening 30 (step S2211). Finish processing.

In step S2203 described above, if it is not the time (timing) to open the first big prize opening 30, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended (step S2220). Here, one round ends after a predetermined period of time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed since the first big prize opening 30 was closed. This is because, as described above, the time (interval time) for closing the first big winning hole 30 between round games is included in the open round game before the closing. The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game has ended, depending on whether a predetermined interval time has elapsed since the first big prize opening 30 was closed. If the round game has not ended (step S2220: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process.

If the round game has ended (step S2220: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 decrements the value of the round counter by 1 (step S2221), and checks whether the value of the round counter has become "0" or not. A determination is made (step S2226). If the value of the round counter is not "0" (step S2226: NO), that is, if the prescribed number of round games has not yet been played, this process ends in order to start the next round game. On the other hand, if the value of the round counter is "0" (step S2226: YES), as a jackpot ending process to end the jackpot game, the ending command of the jackpot game is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S2227). , starts the jackpot ending (step S2228). The ending command includes information regarding the special symbol stop symbol data set in the special symbol hit determination process (FIG. 21). After the jackpot ending starts, the jackpot end flag is set to ON (step S2229), and this process ends.

In step S2200 described above, if the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), the final round has ended, so the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot ending time has elapsed. (Step S2230). If the ending time has not elapsed (step S2230: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, if the ending time has elapsed (step S2230: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns off the jackpot end flag (step S2231), turns off the jackpot flag (step S2232), and sets the special operation status. is set to "1" (step S2233). As a result, in the next special operation process, the special symbol standby process (FIG. 20: Step S1302) is executed again. Thereafter, the game control microcomputer 81 executes a game state setting process (step S2234), which will be described later, and ends this process. The game state setting process (FIG. 29) sets the game state (time-saving state or non-time-saving state) after the jackpot game, and in the case of the time-saving state, the first time-saving counter C1 and the second time-saving counter C1 are set according to the winning type. This is a process of setting an initial value (time saving number) in the counter C2.

[Game status setting process]
FIG. 29 is a flowchart of the gaming state setting process (FIG. 28: Step S2234). The gaming control microcomputer 81 functions as a "gaming state control means" by executing the above-mentioned gaming state management process (FIG. 27) and this gaming state setting process. The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether the jackpot game executed this time is a time-saving hit (that is, "15R time-saving 5 times jackpot", "15R time-saving 15 times jackpot", "15R time-saving 99 times jackpot", "16R time-saving 5 times small" It is determined whether or not the game is a jackpot game executed in response to a "win", "16R time saving 10 times small win", "16R time saving 15 times small win", "16R time saving 99 times small win") (step S2301) . If the time saving win is not the trigger (step S2301: NO), that is, if the current jackpot game is being executed by the normal win (ie, "16R normal small win"), the process skips to step S2309. On the other hand, if the current jackpot game is being executed in response to a time-saving win (step S2301: YES), the time-saving flag is turned on (step S2302), and the game control microcomputer 81 controls the first time-saving counter C1 and the second time-saving counter. Setting values shown in a setting table (FIG. 30) to be described later are set in the counter C2 (step S2303). As a result, the gaming state after the current jackpot game is set to the "time saving state and high base state". This "time saving state and high base state" is a condition that either the variable display of the special symbol is performed a predetermined number of times or the next jackpot (type 1 jackpot or type 2 jackpot) is won. It ends when . In step S2309, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the game state designation command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this process. The gaming state designation command includes information regarding the gaming state that has just been set (whether or not it is a time saving state, the respective values of the first time saving counter C1 and the second time saving counter C2, etc.).

FIG. 30 is a diagram for explaining a setting table for the first time-saving counter C1 and the second time-saving counter C2. This setting table is referred to by the gaming control microcomputer 81 in step S2303 of the gaming state setting process (FIG. 29) described above. In FIG. 30, for example, if the jackpot game executed this time is triggered by "15R time saving 99 times jackpot" or "16R time saving 99 times small win" (special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "12H") , "15H", "25H", or "37H"), "99" is set in each of the first time saving counter C1 and the second time saving counter C2. For example, if the jackpot game executed this time is triggered by the "16R time saving 10 times small win" (when the special pattern stop symbol data is "35H"), "10" is displayed in the first time saving counter C1. "15" is set in the second time saving counter C2.

[Special electric accessory processing 2 (small winning game)]
31 and 32 are flowcharts of the special electric accessory processing 2 (FIG. 20: step S1309). The game control microcomputer 81 functions as a "winning game execution means" by executing the above-mentioned special electric accessory processing 1 (big winning game: FIG. 28) and this special electric accessory processing 2 (small winning game). do. The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the small winning end flag is ON (step S2400). "Small winning end flag" is a flag indicating that opening of the second big winning device 36 based on the opening pattern has ended in the small winning game that is being executed. If the small hit end flag is ON (step S2400: YES), the process moves to step S2420. When the small winning end flag is OFF (step S2400: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the second big prize opening 35 is open (step S2402). If it is open (step S2402: YES), the process moves to step S2410.

If the second big prize opening 35 is not open (step S2402: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether it is the time (timing) to open the second big prize opening 35 (step S2404). . The time (timing) to open the second big prize opening 35 is when the opening time of the small win has passed and the time to start opening has arrived. The opening time for the small win is 4 seconds for the open pattern 22 and 0.01 seconds for the open pattern 23. If it is not the time (timing) to open the second big prize opening 35 (step S2404: NO), this process ends. If it is the time (timing) to open the second big winning hole 35 (step S2404: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs big winning hole opening processing (step S2406). Here, the game control microcomputer 81 opens the second big prize opening 35 according to the opening pattern (FIG. 15(B)) according to the small winning type. After the big winning opening opening process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a round designation command (step S2408). The round designation command includes information regarding the number of rounds of the special game being executed, and the game control microcomputer 81 sets the round designation command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84. Thereby, the number of rounds of the special game can be notified to the sub-control board 90. After setting the round designation command, this processing ends.

In step S2402 described above, if the second grand prize opening 35 is open (step S2402: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the closing condition for the second grand prize opening 35 is satisfied. (Step S2410). The closing condition here is that the number of prizes entered into the second grand prize opening 35 has reached the specified maximum number of prizes (for example, 10), or that the time has come to close the second grand prize opening 35. (That is, a predetermined opening time (for example, 1.5 seconds) has elapsed since the second big prize opening 35 was opened). If the condition for closing the second big prize opening 35 is not satisfied (step S2410: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, if the closing condition for the second big winning opening 35 is satisfied (step S2410: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 executes the big winning opening closing process to close (block) the second big winning opening 35. (Step S2412). Here, an ending command for the small winning game is also set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 as a small winning ending process for ending the small winning game. After the big winning opening closing process, the game control microcomputer 81 decrements the value of the round counter by 1 (step S2414). This is because the small winning game corresponds to the 1st round. After that, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the small hit end flag to ON (step S2416) and ends this process.

In step S2400 described above, if the small hit end flag is ON (step S2400: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the post-closure interval time (ending time) has elapsed (step S2420). ). If the ending time has not elapsed (step S2420: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, if the ending time has elapsed (step S2420: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the small hit end flag to OFF (step S2422), and also switches the small hit flag to OFF (step S2424). After that, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the V flag is ON or not (step S2430). The "V flag" is a flag indicating that a game ball has passed into the V area 39 during the execution of a small winning game, and is a flag that is turned ON in the V area sensor detection process (FIG. 34), which will be described later. . When the V flag is OFF (step S2430: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the round counter to "0" (step S3432) and sets the special operation status to "1" in order to not execute the type 2 jackpot game. ” (step S2434), and the process ends. As a result, in the next special operation process, the special symbol standby process (FIG. 20: Step S1302) is executed again.

In step S2430 described above, if the V flag is ON (step S2430: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the V flag to OFF (step S2436), and sets the jackpot flag to execute the type 2 jackpot game. is turned ON (step S2437), and the special operation status is set to "4" (step S2438). By setting the special operation status to "4", in the next special operation process (FIG. 20), the process shifts to special electric accessory process 1 (jackpot game). After setting the special operation status, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON (step S2440), and if it is ON (step S2440: YES), it is switched to OFF (step S2442). As a result, the game is in a non-time saving state while the type 2 jackpot game is being executed. Thereafter, in order to start the jackpot game, the game control microcomputer 81 sets an opening command for the type 2 jackpot game (step S2444), and starts the opening of the jackpot game (step S2446). Thereby, the game shifts from a small winning game in which the second big prize opening 35 is opened for a short period of time to a type 2 big winning game.

[V opening/closing member control processing]
FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the V opening/closing member control process (FIG. 17: Step S106). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether the V opening/closing member operation flag is ON (step S2500). If the V opening/closing member operation flag is OFF (step S2500: NO), this process ends. If the V opening/closing member operation flag is ON (step S2500: YES), a "V opening/closing member operation process" is performed to operate the V opening/closing member 71 in a predetermined operation pattern (step S2502), and at the same time, during a predetermined period (timing) A "V validity period setting process" is performed in which the passing of the game ball through the V is considered valid (step S2504). When the V opening/closing member operation flag is ON, the opening of the small winning game is started (FIG. 26: Steps S1812, S1814), so the V opening/closing member operation process and the V validity period setting process are performed in accordance with this small winning game. It will be done.

In the V opening/closing member operation process, a timer is set to measure the operating time of the V opening/closing member 71, and based on the timer, the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is turned on when the opening timing of the V opening/closing member 71 comes. , when the timing for closing the V opening/closing member 71 comes, the V opening/closing member solenoid 73 is turned OFF. As a result, the V opening/closing member 71 moves in a constant motion from the start of the opening of the small winning game. Specifically, the V opening/closing member 71 is first controlled to a passage blocking state (closed state) for 0.01 seconds from the start of the opening of the small winning game, and then controlled to a passage permitting state (open state) for 4 seconds. After that, the passage is blocked (closed state) for 6 seconds.

In the V valid period setting process, a V valid period is set for the constant operation of the V opening/closing member 71 as described above. The "V valid period" is a period during which, when a game ball is detected by the V area sensor 39a, the detection is regarded as valid and the V flag is turned ON. The V effective period is from the start of opening of the V area 39 (the point in time when the V opening/closing member 71 is controlled to be in a passing permissible state) until a predetermined time has elapsed. The predetermined time is set to be longer than the opening time of the V area 39 (the time during which the V opening/closing member 71 is controlled to be in a passing permissible state) (here, the opening time of the V area 39 + 1 second). This is because the time lag until the game ball passes through the arrangement position of the V opening/closing member 71 and reaches the V area 39 is taken into consideration. In the V effective period setting process, a timer is set to measure the V effective period, and based on the timer, when it is time to enable the V area 39, the V effective flag is turned ON, and the V area 39 is activated. When the timing to invalidate comes, the V valid flag is turned OFF. In the V area sensor detection process (FIG. 34), which will be described later, it is determined whether or not the V valid period is in progress, depending on whether or not this V valid flag is ON.

After the V opening/closing member operation process and the V valid period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the operation of the V opening/closing member 71 has ended (step S2506). Specifically, based on the timer set in the V opening/closing member operation process (step S2502), the total operating time from when the V opening/closing member 71 starts a certain operation until it ends (0.01 seconds + 4 seconds + 6 seconds) ) has passed. If the operation of the V opening/closing member 71 has not been completed (step S2506: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, if the operation of the V opening/closing member 71 has ended (step S2506: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the V opening/closing member operation flag to OFF (step S2508), and ends this process.

Here, the relationship between the operation pattern of the V opening/closing member 71 and the opening pattern of the second big prize opening 35 (opening/closing member 32) in the small winning game will be explained. As described above, the V opening/closing member 71 is closed for 0.01 seconds from the start of the opening of the small winning game, then opened for 4 seconds, and then closed for 6 seconds. In "16R normal small win" (opening pattern 22), the second large prize opening 35 is closed for 4 seconds from the start of the opening of the small win game, then opened for 1.6 seconds, and then 4.41 Closed for seconds. Therefore, in the opening pattern 22 of "16R normal small win", the V opening/closing member 71 closes 0.01 seconds after the second big prize opening 35 is opened, and the game ball passes through the V during the small winning game. has become virtually impossible. On the other hand, in "16R time saving 5 times small win", "16R time saving 10 times small win", "16R time saving 15 times small win", "16R time saving 99 times small win" (open pattern 23), the second big prize opening 35 is closed for 0.01 seconds from the start of the opening of the small winning game, then opened for 1.6 seconds, and then closed for 3 seconds. Therefore, in the opening pattern 23, the second big prize opening 35 and the V opening/closing member 71 are opened simultaneously 0.01 seconds after the start of the small winning game, and both continue to be opened for 1.6 seconds, leading to the second big prize winning. The V opening/closing member 71 closes 2.4 seconds after the opening 35 closes. Therefore, no matter what winning timing a game ball enters the second grand prize opening 35, the game ball can pass through the V area 39. In addition, here, if the game ball is continuously fired with the right hand, the second prize is set so that the game ball will definitely enter the second prize opening 35 during the period when the second prize winning opening 35 is open. Various devices such as the grand prize device 36 are arranged. Further, the time required for the game ball passing through the second big prize opening 35 to reach the arrangement position of the V opening/closing member 71 is configured to be shorter than 2 seconds. From this, in "16R time-saving 5 times small win", "16R time-saving 10 times small win", "16R time-saving 15 times small win", and "16R time-saving 99 times small win", it is possible to hit right during the small winning game. If you continue to shoot the game ball continuously, the game ball will definitely pass through the V.

[V area sensor detection processing]
FIG. 34 is a flowchart of the V area sensor detection process (FIG. 17: Step S107). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not a game ball has been detected by the V area sensor 39a (step S2601). If no game ball is detected by the V area sensor 39a (step S2601: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, if there is a detection (step S2601: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the V is in the valid period (step S2602). The V valid period is a period set by the V valid period setting process (step S2504) of the V opening/closing member control process (FIG. 33). The V effective period is set to several seconds (ball brushing period) when the V opening/closing member 71 is opened or after it is closed. Here, 1 second is set as the ball brushing period. If it is not within the V validity period (step S2602: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is within the V validity period (step S2602: YES), the gaming control microcomputer 81 turns on the V flag (step S2603) and sets the V passing command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 ( Step S2604), this process ends. The “V passing command” is a command for notifying the sub-control board 90 of V passing.

7. Operation of the production control microcomputer 91 The operation of the production control microcomputer 91 provided on the sub-control board 90 (FIG. 5) will be described based on FIGS. 35 to 43. Counters, flags, status, buffers, etc. that appear in the explanation of the operation of the production control microcomputer 91 are provided in the sub-RAM 94. As explained below, the production control microcomputer 91 functions as a production execution means by reading the program stored in the sub ROM 93.

[Sub control main processing]
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the sub-control main processing. When the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the performance control microcomputer 91 reads a program for executing the sub-control main process from the sub-ROM 93. In the sub-control main processing, the production control microcomputer 91 first performs CPU initialization processing (step S4000). In the CPU initialization process, for example, settings of the sub CPU 92, reset of various flags, statuses, counters, etc. are performed. The initial value of the flag is "0", that is, "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". Note that the CPU initialization process is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed thereafter.

After the CPU initialization process, the production control microcomputer 91 prohibits the interruption of the interrupt process (step S4015), and performs the random number update process (step S4020). In this random number update process, the production control microcomputer 91 adds 1 to the various random number counter values shown in FIG. 8(B) and updates them. When each random number counter value reaches the set upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. Note that the initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" or may be changed randomly. Furthermore, instead of adding up the random numbers one by one, two or more may be added. Each random number may be a so-called hardware random number.

After the random number update process, the production control microcomputer 91 allows the interruption of the interrupt process (step S4025). While interrupts are enabled, sub-side timer interrupt processing (step S4035) can be executed. The sub-side timer interrupt process is executed based on interrupt pulses that are repeatedly input to the sub CPU 92 at predetermined intervals. That is, the sub-side timer interrupt process is executed at predetermined intervals. Then, the random number update process is repeatedly executed between the end of the sub-side timer interrupt process and the start of the next sub-side timer interrupt process.

[Sub-side timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 36 is a flowchart of the sub-side timer interrupt process (FIG. 35: step S4035). The production control microcomputer 91 first performs received command analysis processing (step S4300). Details of the received command analysis process (FIG. 37) will be described later. After the received command analysis process, the production control microcomputer 91 performs a switch process (step S4310). In the switch processing, the production control microcomputer 91 sets the display contents of the display screen 7a based on the switch data (edge data and level data) output based on the detection signal from the production button detection switch 63a. . After the switch process, the production control microcomputer 91 performs a command transmission process (step S4315). In the command transmission process, the production control microcomputer 91 transmits various commands set in the production command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub-RAM 94 in the received command analysis process (FIG. 37) to the image control board 100, the audio control board 106, and the like. It is sent to the lamp control board 107. The image control board 100 that has received various commands uses the image display device 7 to execute display effects according to the received commands. Furthermore, the audio control board 106 that has received various commands executes audio production to output audio from the speaker 67 in accordance with the received commands. The lamp control board 107 that has received the various commands executes a lamp effect that controls the light emission of the board lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66 in accordance with the received commands. After the command transmission process, the production control microcomputer 91 performs other processes (step S4320), and ends this process. Other processing includes, for example, random number updating processing.

[Received command analysis processing]
FIG. 37 is a flowchart of the received command analysis process (FIG. 36: step 4300). The performance control microcomputer 91 first determines whether or not a preliminary determination command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4415). If it has been received (step S4415: YES), prefetch effect determination processing is performed (step S4420). The "pre-reading effect determination process" is a process of determining whether or not to perform the pre-reading effect and the pre-reading effect pattern in the case of executing the pre-reading effect. In the pre-read effect determination process, a pre-read effect execution determination is made to determine whether or not to execute a pre-read effect, and a pre-read effect pattern selection is performed. Specifically, the performance control microcomputer 91 acquires the counter value of the pre-read performance random number random number, and performs the pre-read performance by referring to the acquired random number value and the pre-read performance pattern determination table T55 stored in the sub ROM 93. It is determined whether or not to perform the pre-reading effect and the pre-reading effect pattern when performing the pre-reading effect. When it is determined that the pre-read effect is to be executed, the selected pre-read effect pattern is stored in the advance determination information storage area 94c.

On the other hand, if the advance determination command is not received from the main control board 80 (step S4415: NO), the above-mentioned pre-read effect determination process is skipped. The look-ahead performance is a performance that suggests that there is a high possibility that the reservation information newly stored in the special figure reservation storage area 85 includes a jackpot, and is executed during the variable performance.

Subsequently, the production control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a command for the number of reserved balls has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4445). If it has been received (step S4445: YES), a hold display process is performed (step S4450). In the hold display process, information is set in the counter set area 94d of the sub-RAM 94 based on information regarding the number of special figure 1 held balls, the number of special figure 2 held balls, and the number of normal pattern held balls included in the number of held balls command. The values of the first special symbol reservation performance counter, the second special symbol reservation performance counter, and the regular symbol reservation performance counter are updated. Thereby, information on each number of reserved balls can be held not only on the main control board 80 side but also on the sub control board 90 side. Furthermore, the production control microcomputer 91 controls the pending image 9A displayed on the display screen 7a, Update 9B. On the other hand, if the hold pitch count command has not been received (step S4445: NO), the above-described hold display process is skipped.

Subsequently, the production control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a variation start command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4455). If it has been received (step S4455: YES), a variable effect start process (FIG. 38) is performed (step S4460). "Variation performance start processing" is a process of selecting a fluctuation performance pattern (content) to be executed during special symbol fluctuation. Details of the variable performance start process will be described later.
On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S4455: NO), the above-described variable effect start process is skipped.

Subsequently, the production control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a fluctuation stop command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4465). If it has been received (step S4465: YES), the variable effect end process (FIG. 39) is performed (step S4470). The "variable effect end process" is a process for stopping the variable effect, and the details will be described later. On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S4465: NO), the above-described fluctuating effect end process is skipped.

Subsequently, the production control microcomputer 91 determines whether an opening command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4475). If it has been received (step S4475: YES), opening performance pattern determination processing is performed (step S4480). The "opening performance pattern determination process" is a process for selecting an opening performance pattern (content) to be executed at the start of a special game (big win game or small win game). In the opening performance pattern determination process, the performance control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the opening command, and sub-subscribes information regarding the special figure stop pattern data that is included in the opening command and is set when determining whether a jackpot or small win has been won. Set it in RAM94. Then, the opening performance start command for starting the selected opening performance is selected in the performance command set area of the sub-RAM 94 by selecting the performance pattern of the opening performance that has been set in advance in accordance with the winning type indicated by the special figure stop symbol data. Set to 94b. When the opening effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 36: step 4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 stores the predetermined opening effect image in the ROM 103. The image data is read from the image display device 7 and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (for example, FIG. 45). In addition, in step S4475, if the opening command is not received (step S4475: NO), the above-mentioned opening effect pattern determination process is skipped.

Subsequently, the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a round designation command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4485). If it has been received (step S4485: YES), round effect pattern determination processing is performed (step S4490). The "round performance pattern determination process" is a process for selecting an opening game performance pattern (content) to be executed during opening of the big prize opening or during an interval between openings in a special game (big winning game or small winning game). In the round performance pattern determination process, the performance control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the round designation command, and sets information regarding the special figure stop symbol data and information regarding the number of rounds included in the round designation command in the sub-RAM 94. do. Then, select a preset round performance performance pattern corresponding to the winning type and number of rounds indicated by the special figure stop symbol data, and send a round performance start command to the sub-RAM 94 to start the selected round performance. Set it in the command set area 94b. When the round performance start command set in the performance command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads a predetermined round performance image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. In addition, in step S4485, if the round designation command is not received (step S4485: NO), the above-mentioned round effect pattern determination process is skipped.

Subsequently, the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the ending command of the jackpot game has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4495). If it has been received (step S4495: YES), ending effect pattern determination processing (FIG. 40) is performed (step S4500). The "ending effect pattern determination process" is a process of selecting an ending effect pattern (content) to be executed during the ending of the jackpot game. Details of the ending effect pattern determination process will be described later. When the performance control microcomputer 91 receives the ending command of the small winning game from the main control board 80, it performs processing different from the above-described ending performance pattern determination process. In addition, in step S4495, if the ending command of the jackpot game is not received (step S4495: NO), the above-mentioned ending effect pattern determination process is skipped.

Subsequently, the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a normal symbol variation start command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4505). If it has been received (step S4505: YES), normal symbol variation production start processing is performed (step S4510). “Normal symbol variation performance start processing” is a process for selecting a normal symbol variation performance pattern (content) to be executed during normal symbol variation. In the normal symbol variation performance start processing, the production control microcomputer 91 first sets information regarding the regular symbol stop symbol data included in the normal symbol fluctuation start command and information regarding the normal symbol fluctuation pattern (FIG. 13) in the sub-RAM 94. do. The set information includes game state information that indicates the current gaming state, symbol information that indicates the symbol as a determination result of the hit determination process for the common symbol, and the like. The gaming state information and symbol information acquired here can be appropriately referred to by the performance control microcomputer 91. The production control microcomputer 91 selects a normal symbol variation production pattern that is preset corresponding to the normal symbol variation pattern, and sends a normal symbol variation production start command to the sub-RAM 94 to start the selected normal symbol variation production. Set it in the production command set area 94b. When the normal symbol variation performance start command set in the production command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads a predetermined normal symbol variation performance image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. Here, if the winning type is "long open 1" or "short open 1" and the winning type is won in the non-time saving state, the performance control microcomputer 91 executes the "V's expected performance" (FIG. 44), which will be described later. . In addition, in step S4505, if the normal symbol variation start command is not received (step S4505: NO), the above-mentioned normal symbol variation performance start process is skipped.

Subsequently, the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a normal symbol variation stop command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4515). If it has been received (step S4515: YES), normal symbol variation performance end processing is performed (step S4520). The "normal symbol variation performance end process" is a process for stopping the normal symbol variation performance. In the normal symbol variation production end processing, the production control microcomputer 91 analyzes the normal symbol variation stop command, and sets the normal symbol variation production end command in the production command set area 94b to end the normal symbol variation production. . In addition, in step S4515, if the normal symbol variation stop command is not received (step S4515: NO), the above-mentioned normal symbol variation performance end process is skipped.

Subsequently, the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a normal symbol opening command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4525). If it has been received (step S4525: YES), normal symbol opening performance pattern determination processing is performed (step S4530). The "normal symbol opening performance pattern determination process" is a process for selecting a normal game performance pattern (content) to be executed during a winning game (normal game) associated with winning a normal symbol. The normal game performance selected here includes an opening performance executed during the opening and an open game performance executed while the electric chew 22 is opened. In the normal symbol opening production pattern determination process, the production control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the normal symbol opening command, and uses the normal symbol stop symbol data that is included in the normal symbol opening command and is set at the time of determining the winning of the normal symbol. The information is set in the sub RAM 94. Then, select the performance pattern of the opening performance that has been set in advance corresponding to the winning type indicated by the normal symbol stop symbol data, and send the normal symbol opening performance start command to the sub-RAM 94 as a production command to start the selected opening performance. Set it in the set area 94b. When the normal symbol opening performance start command set in the performance command set area 94b is sent to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 36: step 4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 starts the predetermined opening performance image. is read out from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition, in step S4525, if the normal symbol opening command is not received (step S4525: NO), the above-mentioned normal symbol opening performance pattern determination process is skipped.

Subsequently, the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a normal symbol ending command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4535). If it has been received (step S4535: YES), normal symbol ending effect pattern determination processing is performed (step S4540). "Normal symbol ending performance pattern determination process" is a process for selecting an ending performance pattern (content) to be executed during the ending of a winning game (normal game) associated with winning a normal symbol. In the normal symbol ending production pattern determination process, the production control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the normal symbol ending command and sets information regarding the regular symbol stop symbol data included in the normal symbol ending command in the sub-RAM 94. Then, select the effect pattern of the ending effect that has been set in advance corresponding to the winning type indicated by the normal pattern stop pattern data, and send the normal pattern ending effect start command to the sub-RAM 94 as the effect command to start the selected ending effect. Set it in the set area 94b. When the normal symbol ending effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is sent to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 36: step 4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 starts the predetermined ending effect image. is read out from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition, in step S4535, if the normal symbol ending command is not received (step S4535: NO), the above-mentioned normal symbol ending performance pattern determination process is skipped.

Subsequently, the production control microcomputer 91 performs other processing (step S4545). In other processes, for example, when the production control microcomputer 91 receives the gaming state designation command, the production control microcomputer 91 inputs information regarding the gaming state included in the gaming state designation command (whether or not it is in a time saving state, a first time saving counter and a second time saving counter). counter values, etc.) are held in the sub-RAM 94. Furthermore, when the production control microcomputer 91 receives the V passing command, it causes the RAM 94 to hold information about the V passing. Further, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs processing based on commands other than those mentioned above (customer waiting command, preliminary determination command, RAM clear notification command, etc.), and ends this processing. The performance control microcomputer 91 functions as a "performance execution means" by executing the variable performance end process (step S4470) and the opening performance pattern determination process (step S4480).

[Variable effect start processing]
FIG. 38 is a flowchart of the variable performance start process (FIG. 37: Step S4460). The production control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the variation start command (step S5000). Here, the performance control microcomputer 91 sets information regarding the special figure stop symbol data included in the fluctuation start command and information regarding the fluctuation pattern in the sub-RAM 94. The set information includes game state information indicating the current gaming state, symbol information indicating the symbol as a determination result of the hit determination process of special symbol 1 or special symbol 2, and the like. The gaming state information and symbol information acquired here can be appropriately referred to by the performance control microcomputer 91.

Subsequently, the production control microcomputer 91 refers to the mode status M (step S5005). "Mode status M" indicates the performance mode to be executed. The production mode here refers to the mode of production on the image display device 7, and when the production mode is different, the images (characters, items, background images, etc. that appear) displayed on the image display device 7 are different, resulting in variable production. is also executed in a manner according to the production mode. Here, the mode status M is set to "1" and "2", where "1" corresponds to a non-time saving state and "2" corresponds to a time saving state. The performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether the mode status M is "1" or "2".

When the mode status M is "2" (step S5010: YES), that is, in the time saving state, the production control microcomputer 91 refers to the time saving production scenario (step S5025). The "time saving effect scenario" refers to the remaining number of time saving effects displayed on the image display device 7 (hereinafter referred to as the "display time saving remaining number") in the later-described "countdown effect" (FIG. 47) that is executed in the time saving state after the jackpot game. It shows the change scenario. The time-saving effect scenario is determined in the ending effect pattern determination process (FIG. 40), which will be described later. Here, the "remaining number of times of time saving" is the remaining number of variable displays of the second special symbol that can be executed in the time saving state after the jackpot game, and the number of times of variable display of the second special symbol that has already been executed in the time saving state is This is the remaining number of times until reaching the time saving number set according to the winning type. The remaining number of time savings corresponds to the value of the first time savings counter C1 on the main control unit side. When the remaining time saving number becomes "0", the gaming state is switched from the time saving state to the non-time saving state (FIG. 27: Steps S2030 and S2035). The game machine 1 of this embodiment performs a performance in which the remaining display time saving number displayed on the image display device 7 is made different from or coincident with the actual remaining time saving number based on a time saving performance scenario. Specific aspects will be described later. Here, the production control microcomputer 91 specifies the remaining number of display time savings to be displayed on the image display device 7 this time by referring to the time saving production scenario. Specifically, the production control microcomputer 91 specifies the remaining number of display time savings to be displayed this time from the value of a first time saving production counter JC1 and the time saving production scenario, which will be described later. In addition, when the mode status M is "1" (step S5010: NO), that is, when it is in a non-time-saving state, the production control microcomputer 91 skips reference to the time-saving production scenario.

Subsequently, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs a variable performance pattern determination process (step S5015). In the variable performance pattern determination process, the performance control microcomputer 91 first obtains a variable performance pattern random value for performance determination. Then, from the variable performance pattern determination table T51 stored in the sub ROM 93, the mode status M, the fluctuation pattern indicated by the fluctuation start command, the random value of the variable performance pattern, the specified remaining number of display time reductions when time is shortened, and the special performance flag. Set a variable effect pattern corresponding to ON/OFF. The "special effect flag" is a flag indicating whether or not to execute the "one-time crying effect" (FIG. 48), which will be described later, and is set in the flag set area of the sub-RAM 94. When the special effect flag is ON, the effect control microcomputer 91 switches it to OFF and executes a "crying effect" as a variable effect. On the other hand, if the special effect flag is OFF and the variation pattern indicated by the variation start command is "P12" to "P15", that is, if it is a variation of the second special symbol in a non-time saving state, the "V card" described later 44 (G)). When the mode status M is "2", the performance control microcomputer 91 performs a "countdown performance" (FIG. 47), which will be described later. The performance control microcomputer 91 performs this countdown performance, so it functions as a "number of times display performance execution means."

The production control microcomputer 91 further refers to the contents of the preview performances such as the so-called step-up notice production and chance-up notice production, based on the variable production pattern random number value, and also the stop symbol pattern determination table T52. The combination of the effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R to be displayed is determined. Based on these, it is determined what kind of performance will be performed as a variable performance.

The performance control microcomputer 91 sets a variable performance start command in the performance command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub-RAM 94 so that a variable performance based on the variable performance pattern determined in step S5015 is realized (step S5020). ), this process ends. When the variable effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub RAM 94 is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 36: step 4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 starts the predetermined variable effect. The image is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

[Fluctuating performance end processing]
FIG. 39 is a flowchart of the variation production end process (FIG. 37: step S4470). The production control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the fluctuation stop command (step S5100) and refers to the mode status M (step S5105). If mode status M is "1" (step S5110: YES), the process skips to step S5140. When the mode status M is "2" (step S5110: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether the fluctuation is a fluctuation of the second special symbol (step S5115). The production control microcomputer 91 can determine whether the variation is a variation of the first special symbol or a variation of the second special symbol from the information regarding the variation pattern set in the sub-RAM 94. If the change is a change in the second special symbol (step S5115: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 decrements the values of the first time-saving effect counter JC1 and the second time-saving effect counter JC2 by 1. (Step S5120). The "first time saving counter JC1" is used to count the number of variations of the second special symbol executed during the time saving state on the sub-control unit side, and the "first time saving counter C1" on the main control unit side. Compatible. "Second time saving production counter JC2" is the number of variations of special symbols executed during the time saving state (total of the number of variations of the first special symbol and the number of variations of the second special symbol) on the sub-control unit side. This counter corresponds to the "second time saving counter C2" on the main control unit side. The initial values set in the first time-saving performance counter JC1 and the second time-saving performance counter JC2 are determined in the ending performance pattern determination process (FIG. 40) described later. On the other hand, when the variation is a variation of the first special symbol (step S5115: NO), only the value of the second time saving effect counter JC2 is decremented by 1 (step S5125).

The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether at least one of the values of the first time-saving effect counter JC1 and the second time-saving effect counter JC2 has become "0" as a result of step S5120 or step S5125. (Step S5130). If the values of both the first time-saving effect counter JC1 and the second time-saving effect counter JC2 are not "0" (step S5130: NO), the process skips to step S5140. When the value of at least one of the first time saving effect counter JC1 and the second time saving effect counter JC2 is "0" (step S5130: YES), the mode status M is switched to "1" (step S5135). When switching the mode status M to "1", the production control microcomputer 91 also determines whether or not there is special figure 2 pending, and if there is special figure 2 pending, it sets the special effect flag. Switch to ON. As a result, if there is a special map 2 pending when transitioning from the time-saving state to the non-time-saving state, the "crying one-time performance" (Fig. 48), which will be described later, will be executed as the first variable performance in the non-time-saving state. . In addition, the performance control microcomputer 91 determines whether it is a time-saving state or a non-time-saving state from the information regarding the gaming state held in the sub-RAM 94 in step S5130, and in the case of a non-time-saving state, changes the mode status M to " 1". The information regarding the gaming state held in the sub-RAM 94 is updated when a gaming state designation command is received from the main control board 80. In step S5140, the performance control microcomputer 91 sets a variable performance end command for ending the variable performance. As a result, the fluctuating decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. After that, this process ends.

[Ending production pattern determination process]
FIG. 40 is a flowchart of the ending effect pattern determination process (FIG. 37: Step S4500). The performance control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the ending command (step S5500). The performance control microcomputer 91 sets information regarding the special figure stop symbol data included in the ending command in the sub-RAM 94. Subsequently, the production control microcomputer 91 performs mode status setting processing (step S5505). The "mode status setting process" is a process for determining the production mode after the jackpot game. In the mode status setting process, the production control microcomputer 91 sets the mode status M using a mode status M setting table described below.

FIG. 41 is a diagram for explaining the mode status setting table T53. The mode status setting table T53 is a table that is referred to in order to determine the mode status M according to the winning type (special symbol stop symbol data). The production control microcomputer 91 determines the mode status from the special figure stop symbol data included in the ending command and the mode status setting table T53. For example, when determining the ending performance pattern of a type 2 jackpot game after winning "16R normal small win A", the special pattern stop symbol data included in the ending command is 14H, so the mode status M is "1". is selected. Also, for example, when determining the ending performance pattern of a type 1 jackpot game after winning "15R time saving 99 times jackpot E", the special pattern stop pattern data included in the ending command is 33H, so the mode status M "2" is selected.

Returning to FIG. 40, if the mode status M set in step S5505 is "1" (step S5510: NO), the production control microcomputer 91 skips the process to step S5525. On the other hand, when the set mode status M is "2" (step S5510: YES), the production control microcomputer 91 selects the first time-saving production counter JC1 and the second time-saving production counter JC2 for the type (special figure stop pattern data) Set values corresponding to the respective values (step S5515). The set value set to the first time saving effect counter JC1 is the same as the value set to the first time saving counter C1 on the main control unit side. Further, the set value set to the second time saving effect counter JC2 is the same as the value set to the second time saving counter C2 on the main control unit side. A setting table similar to the setting table of FIG. 30 is stored in the sub ROM 93, and the production control microcomputer 91 can perform the first time saving by referring to the special figure stop symbol data included in the ending command and this setting table. Setting values to be set in the performance counter JC1 and the second time saving performance counter JC2 can be specified. For example, when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "99" is set to the first time-saving effect counter JC1 and the second time-saving effect counter JC2, respectively. Further, for example, when the special figure stop symbol data is "35H", "10" is set to the first time-saving effect counter JC1, and "15" is set to the second time-saving effect counter JC2. After setting the setting values in the time-saving performance counters JC1 and JC2, the performance control microcomputer 91 performs a time-saving performance scenario determination process (step S5520). The "time saving effect scenario determination process" is the remaining number of time saving effects (display time saving remaining number of times) to be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the later-described "countdown effect" (FIG. 47) which is executed in the time saving state after the jackpot game. ) is a process for determining a change scenario. In the time-saving performance scenario determination process, the performance control microcomputer 91 sets a time-saving performance scenario using a time-saving performance scenario determination table T54, which will be described below.

FIG. 42 is a diagram for explaining the time-saving effect scenario determination table T54. The time-saving performance scenario determination table T54 is a table that is referred to in order to determine the time-saving performance scenario according to the winning type (special symbol stop symbol data) and the time-saving performance scenario random value. The production control microcomputer 91 first obtains a time-saving production scenario random value. Then, a time-saving performance scenario is determined from the special figure stop symbol data included in the ending command, the acquired random number value, and the time-saving performance scenario determination table T54. For example, in the case of the ending of a type 2 jackpot game after winning "16R time saving 99 times small win A" (special figure stop pattern data 25H), if the acquired time saving scenario random number is "0 to 63". If "Scenario B" is selected as the time-saving production scenario and the time-saving production scenario random number is "64-95", "Scenario C" is selected as the time-saving production scenario, and if the time-saving production scenario random number is "96-127". If so, "Scenario D" is selected as the time-saving production scenario. For example, if it is the ending of a type 1 jackpot game after winning "15R time saving 5 times jackpot D" (special figure stop pattern data 31H), regardless of the acquired time saving scenario random value, it will be used as a time saving scenario. "Scenario H" is selected.

FIG. 43 is a diagram for explaining the specific contents of the time-saving production scenario. FIG. 43 shows the time saving effect displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the "countdown effect" (FIG. 47) that is executed in the time saving state after the jackpot game in each of the time saving effect scenarios (scenarios A to H). The correspondence relationship between the remaining number of times (remaining display time saving number of times) and the value of the first time saving effect counter JC1 is shown. For example, in "scenario A", the performance control microcomputer 91 displays the same value as the value of the first time-saving performance counter JC1 on the display screen 7a as the remaining number of display time-savings. In "Scenario B", when the value of the first time saving effect counter JC1 is "99", "5" is displayed on the display screen 7a as the remaining number of display time saving times, and then the value of the first time saving effect counter JC1 is "96". ”, the remaining display time saving number is decreased as the value of the first time saving effect counter JC1 is decreased. That is, when the value of the first time saving effect counter JC1 changes from "99" to "96", the remaining number of display time savings changes from "5" to "2". When the first time saving effect counter JC1 is "95", the remaining display time saving number is set to "1" and a display indicating that the remaining display time saving number is increased by 94, for example, "+94" is displayed. Then, the same value as the value of the first time saving effect counter JC1 is displayed as the remaining display time saving number until the first time saving effect counter JC1 becomes from "94" to "1". In "Scenario E", when the value of the first time saving effect counter JC1 is "15", "5" is displayed on the display screen 7a as the remaining display time saving number, and then the value of the first time saving effect counter JC1 is "12". ”, the remaining display time saving number is decreased as the value of the first time saving effect counter JC1 is decreased. That is, when the value of the first time saving effect counter JC1 changes from "15" to "12", the remaining display time saving number changes from "5" to "2". When the first time saving performance counter JC1 is "11", the remaining display time saving number is set to "1" and a display indicating that the remaining display time saving number is increased by 10, for example, "+10" is displayed. Then, the same value as the value of the first time saving effect counter JC1 is displayed as the remaining display time saving number until the first time saving effect counter JC1 changes from "10" to "1". In this way, by making the remaining number of display time savings different from the actual remaining number of time savings, that is, the value of the first time saving effect counter JC1, the player is given the expectation that the remaining number of display time savings may increase midway through. be able to.

Returning to FIG. 40, in step S5525, the performance control microcomputer 91 refers to the mode status M and determines the ending performance pattern (step S5530). Multiple types of ending effect patterns are prepared, and the ending effect pattern is determined based on the special figure stop pattern data included in the ending command. The effect control microcomputer 91 sets an ending effect start command in the output buffer of the sub-RAM 94 so that an ending effect based on the determined ending effect pattern is realized (step S5535), and ends this process.

8. Production example of this embodiment [Expected production of V (when normal symbol is won in non-time saving state)]
FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the expected performance of V. This V expected performance is when you win with a normal symbol while special symbol 1 is changing or stopping in a non-time saving state, and the winning type is "long opening 1" or "short opening 1" (see Figure 13). is executed. The expected production of V is a production that suggests whether or not the long opening of the electric chew 22 will be made, and furthermore, if the game ball enters the electric chew 22, the result of the judgment of the validity of the special figure 2. be.

The expected production of V is during the variation production of the special figure 1 as shown in FIG. This is executed when a game ball passes through the second gate 29 during a ready-to-win state), and a winning is won with a normal symbol, and the winning type is selected as ``Long Open 1'' or ``Short Open 1''. That is, the production control microcomputer 91 receives the normal symbol variation start command from the main control board 80 (FIG. 37: Step S4505: YES), and in the normal symbol variation production start processing (FIG. 37: Step S4510), the command included in this command is The winning type is determined to be "Long Open 1" or "Short Open 1" from the information regarding the normal stop symbol data, and the variation pattern corresponding to the expected performance of V is selected and executed. As the expected effect of V, first, as shown in FIG. 44(B), the display area of the variable effect corresponding to special figure 1 is reduced and displayed in the display area HR1, and the variable effect of special figure 1 until then is The expected cut-in effect of V is executed using the area where the cut-in effect has been performed, which displays an image GA1 suggesting that the expected effect of V is to be started. Note that the display area HR1 is provided at one corner of the display screen 7a. The performance of the display area HR1 is executed when the performance control microcomputer 91 receives the fluctuation start command from the main control board 80 (FIG. 37: Step S4455: YES), and in the fluctuation start processing (FIG. 37: Step S4460), executes the fluctuation performance start command. (FIG. 38: Step S5020) is executed by setting.

Next, as shown in FIG. 44(C), a V level challenge performance is executed that displays an image GA2 that prompts the player to press the performance button 63, and an image GA3 that shows an indicator that can represent an increase in points. . In this V level challenge effect, the player can increase the points of the indicator in image GA3 by pressing the effect button 63, thereby increasing the V level. In addition, also in this V level challenge effect, as shown in FIG. 44(C), the variable effect corresponding to the special figure 1 is continuously shown in the display area HR1.

When the hit type of the normal symbol is "short open 1", the electric chew 22 is short opened for 0.02 seconds (Fig. 14), and then the indicator is displayed as shown in Fig. 44 (D). Displaying an image GA4 that suggests that the points have been lowered and the V level has decreased and the V level could not reach a certain level, and an image GA5 that suggests that the V level has decreased and that a jackpot cannot be expected this time. Perform a level down effect. In addition, in this V level down effect, as shown in FIG. 44(D), a variable effect corresponding to the special figure 1 is shown subsequent to the display area HR1.

On the other hand, if the winning type of the normal symbol is "Long Open 1", then the electric chew 22 is long opened for 5 seconds (Fig. 14), and the indicator changes as shown in Fig. 44 (E). Image GA6 suggests that the points have increased and the V level has increased and the V level has reached a certain level, and that the V level has increased and you can move on to the next stage, suggesting that you can expect a jackpot. A V level up effect that displays image GA7 is executed. In addition, in this V level up effect, as shown in FIG. 44(E), a variable effect corresponding to the special figure 1 is shown subsequent to the display area HR1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 44(F), an image GA8 is displayed on the right side to prompt the player to hit the game ball to the right in order to enter the electric chew 22 in order to move on to the next stage. Execute the hit suggestion performance. In addition, in this right-hand hitting suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. 44(F), the variable effect of the special figure 1 is continuously shown in the display area HR1. This right hit suggestion performance is executed until the variable performance corresponding to the special figure 1 being displayed in the display area HR1 ends. This right hit suggestion performance is executed based on the normal symbol opening command (FIG. 37: Step S4525) that the performance control microcomputer 91 receives from the main control board 80.

If not a single ball enters the electric chew 22, after the above-mentioned right-handed hitting suggestion effect, the above-mentioned V level down effect shown in FIG. 44(D) is executed. This V level down performance is executed based on the normal symbol ending command (FIG. 37: Step S4535) that the performance control microcomputer 91 receives from the main control board 80. On the other hand, if one or more balls enter the electric chew 22, after the above-mentioned right-handed hitting suggestion effect, as a variable effect of special figure 2, as shown in FIG. A V-card shuffle effect is executed to display an image GA9 for shuffling the facing cards. In this case, a display area HR2 provided at one corner of the display screen 7a shows the changing state of the decorative pattern. The V-card shuffle effect and the effect in the display area HR2 are executed based on a variation start command received by the effect control microcomputer 91 from the main control board 80, triggered by a winning in the second start opening 21.

If the result of the judgment of special drawing 2 is a big hit or a small hit, after the V card shuffle effect, as shown in Figure 44 (H), the three shuffled by the V card shuffle effect are A V card selection effect is executed in which one of the cards is selected and turned over, and an image GA10 showing that the turned over card is a V card is displayed. In the display area HR2, after a ready-to-win state is shown using a decorative pattern, a pattern arrangement of zeros indicating a small hit or a type 1 jackpot is stopped and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 44(I), an expected success effect of V is executed, which displays an image GA11 suggesting that a jackpot game will be executed, and a right-handed hitting suggestion image GA12 encouraging right-handed hitting. This expected success performance of V suggests that the expected performance of V is a success and that the expectation level of a jackpot (type 1 jackpot or type 2 jackpot) is high.In other words, the expectation level of the jackpot game being executed is high. This is a performance that suggests this. This expected success performance of V is started after a predetermined time (for example, 0.01 seconds) has elapsed since the zero-th symbol arrangement was stopped and displayed in the display area HR2. In other words, the timing (time) from when the small winning symbol is confirmed to be displayed on the special symbol display 41 to when V's expected success performance starts, and from when the jackpot symbol is confirmed to be displayed to when V's expected success performance starts. It is configured so that the timing (time) until the "Equal" here does not mean a complete match, and there may be an error in timing as long as the player feels they are equal. An example of the error is, for example, about ±2 seconds. In the case of a small win, after the expected success of this V, a small win game is executed, and when the player passes the V by hitting the right hand, it becomes a type 2 jackpot, and the game shifts to the jackpot game. In this way, in this embodiment, when a small hit is made, the variable performance is stopped and a performance that suggests that a jackpot (type 2 jackpot) game will be executed even though V has not been passed (Fig. 44) (I)). Then, during the small winning game, no performance suggesting a small winning game or a performance suggesting V passing is performed. With this configuration, even in the case of a small win, the player is not aware of the small win game and can be made to think that he has won a type 1 jackpot. Further, in this embodiment, when the variable performance is stopped, the same performance (FIG. 44(I)) is started in the case of a big hit and the case of a small win. With this configuration, it is possible to make it even more difficult to distinguish between a type 1 jackpot and a type 2 jackpot. Note that even if the numbers stopped and displayed in the display area HR2 are different in the case of a big hit and the case of a small hit, these are naturally included in the same effect. In addition, the expected success performance of V in the case of a jackpot and the case of a small win may be started before the small winning symbol or the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed.

On the other hand, if the result of the judgment of special drawing 2 is a loss, after the V-card shuffle effect, one of the three cards shuffled by the V-card shuffle effect is next shown in FIG. 44 (J). A loss card selection effect is executed in which a card is selected and turned over, and an image GA13 showing that the turned over card is a loss card is displayed. Note that in the display area HR2, a ready-to-reach state using decorative symbols is shown.

Next, as shown in FIG. 44(K), V's expected failure performance displays an image GA14 that suggests that V's expected performance is a failure and that the jackpot game is not executed due to a loss rather than a jackpot or small hit. Execute. In this case, the display area HR2 shows a pattern arrangement using decorative patterns to suggest a loss. In addition, when special drawing 2 is on hold, after this V expected failure performance, the V card shuffle performance is again performed (see FIG. 44(G)). If there is no special figure 2 on hold, the process shifts to the normal performance corresponding to the special figure 1.

Incidentally, the variation effects of the special figure 2 shown in FIGS. 44(G), (H), and (I) are examples of effects executed when the variation pattern "P13" (FIG. 12) is selected. The variation effect of the special figure 2 shown in FIGS. 44(G), (J), and (K) is an example of effect executed when the variation pattern "P14" (FIG. 12) is selected.

In addition, V level challenge effect (Figure 44 (C)), V level down effect (Figure 44 (D)), V level up effect (Figure 44 (E)), and right hit suggestion effect (Figure 44 (F)) ), the variable effect of the special figure 1 shown in FIG. 44(A) is shown in the display area HR1, but this is a case where the variable effect corresponding to the special figure 1 has ended and the special figure 1 is on hold. In this case, the variable performance corresponding to the next special figure 1 is displayed continuously.

Furthermore, in the expected presentation of V shown in FIG. 44, the display of the pending images 9A, 9B, and the pending digested image 9C is omitted. Furthermore, in the effects shown in FIGS. 45 to 48 and 50, which will be described later, similarly, the display of the held images 9A, 9B and the held digested image 9C is omitted.

[Winning game performance]
FIG. 45 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a winning game effect when winning the special drawing 2 lottery. This winning game performance is executed when a big hit or a small hit is made in the special drawing 2 lottery. Specifically, the performance control microcomputer 91 receives an opening command for a jackpot game or a small win game from the main control board 80 (FIG. 37: Step S4475: YES), and in the opening performance pattern determination process (FIG. 37: Step S4480). When it is determined from the information regarding the special figure stop symbol data included in this command that the special figure 2 is a big hit or a small hit, a corresponding opening performance start command is set and executed. This winning game performance: Figure 45 (A) is, for example, a performance suggesting that a jackpot game will be executed (V's expected success performance: Figure 44 (I), V roulette success performance: Figure 46 (C), Successful guess effect: Executed following the sequence shown in FIG. 48(C)).

First, at the start of a jackpot game associated with a type 1 jackpot, or at the start of a small win game associated with a small win, as shown in FIG. A suggestive image GB1 and a right-handed hitting suggestive image GB2 are displayed. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 45(B), an image GB3 suggesting that a jackpot game will be executed using a predetermined character or the like and a right-handed hitting suggestion image GB2 are displayed.

The performances shown in FIGS. 45(A) and 45(B) are continued in the type 1 jackpot game until a predetermined period (hereinafter also referred to as "first game period") has elapsed from the start of the jackpot game. Further, in the small winning game, the small winning game continues from the start of the small winning game until the first game period has elapsed. That is, in both the type 1 jackpot game and the small win game, the same (similar) performance is performed during the first game period. In addition, this first game period includes at least the opening time (here, 0.01 seconds) of the small winning game (opening pattern 23) and the opening time of the second big prize opening 35 (here, 1.6 seconds). (seconds) and the total time (1.61 seconds). Here, the first game period is the period from the start of the small winning game to the end of the small winning game (opening time (0.01 seconds) + opening time of the second big prize opening 35 (1.6 seconds) + ending time (3 seconds)) is set to 4.61 seconds. When the first gaming period has passed since the start of a jackpot game associated with a type 1 jackpot, or when the first gaming period has passed since the start of a small winning game and a type 2 jackpot due to V passing has been confirmed, As shown in FIG. 45(C), an image GB4 that clearly suggests that a jackpot game is in progress and a right-handed hitting suggestion image GB2 are displayed. That is, when a type 2 jackpot is achieved after the small winning game, the effects shown in FIGS. 45(A), (B), and (C) are executed in the same way as when the player wins a type 1 jackpot.

On the other hand, when the first game period has elapsed from the start of the small winning game associated with the small winning and it is confirmed that the jackpot game will not be played due to non-passing of V, the image shown in FIG. 45(D) is displayed instead of the image GB4. As shown, an image GB5 indicating that the jackpot game will not be executed is displayed.

In the winning game performance in this embodiment, the performance during the type 1 jackpot game and the performance during the small win game accompanying the small win and the performance during the type 2 jackpot game are similar (Figs. 45 (A), (B), ( C)). In other words, the performance from the start of the type 1 jackpot game to the end of the jackpot game and the performance from the start of the small win game to the end of the type 2 jackpot game are configured to be similar. In addition, even if the second type jackpot is not executed after the small winning game due to the small winning, at least during the small winning game, the same effect as in the case of the first type jackpot (Fig. 45 (A), (B) ) is performed, and after the first game period has elapsed, a performance (FIG. 45(D)) that is different from the case of the first type jackpot is performed. "Similar (same) performance" as used herein means that the content is similar enough that it is difficult for the player to distinguish between a big win and a small win, and the performance does not need to be completely the same. . For example, if some of the characters are different, if some aspects of a given character (e.g. clothing, color of clothes, equipment) are different, or if the timing of the appearance of a given character is slightly different, etc. Naturally, it is included in the same production. In addition, in the winning game performance in this embodiment, if a type 2 jackpot occurs after the small winning game, the jackpot game performance (FIGS. 45 (A) and (B)) is started based on passing V by the small winning game. Instead, the jackpot game performance is started at the start of the small win game (that is, based on the confirmed display of the small win symbol). In other words, in this embodiment, in the case of a small win, a performance suggesting a small win game (for example, a performance instructing the player to aim for V) is not performed during the small win game. With this configuration, even in the case of a small win, the player is not aware of the small win game and can be made to think that he has won a type 1 jackpot. In addition, in this embodiment, the timing (time) from when the small winning symbol is confirmed displayed on the special symbol display 41 until the small winning game production (FIGS. 45 (A), (B), and (C)) is started. ) is configured so that the timing (time) from when the jackpot symbol is confirmed to be displayed until the jackpot game production (FIGS. 45 (A), (B), and (C)) starts is equal. . As is clear from the above, the series of performances suggesting that a jackpot game will be executed (V's expected success performance: Figure 44 (I) → Figure 45 (A) → Figure 45 (B)) is small. In the case of a hit and the case of a type 1 jackpot, the same contents (similar effects) are maintained for a predetermined period from the start of a series of effects. The predetermined period is a period longer than the period from the start of V's expected success performance to the end of the small winning game at the time of winning the small winning. For example, when V's expected successful performance time is 5 seconds and the small winning game time is 4.61 seconds, the predetermined period is 9.61 seconds. A series of performances suggesting that a jackpot game will be executed include V's expected success performance: Figure 44 (I), V roulette success performance: Figure 46 (C), and hit success performance: Figure 48 (C)) may be used. Here, both the V roulette success performance time and the hit success performance time are 5 seconds.

[Fluctuating effect during special drawing 2 lottery (when in short time state)]
FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a variation effect at the time of special drawing 2 lottery. This variable performance at the time of the special drawing 2 lottery is executed when the special drawing 2 wins a small hit, the special drawing 2 hits a jackpot, or the special drawing 2 loses in the time saving state. Specifically, the production control microcomputer 91 receives a variation start command from the main control board 80 (FIG. 37: Step S4455: YES), and in the variation production start processing (FIG. 37: Step S4460, FIG. 38), this command is When it is determined that the variation pattern is "P16" to "P19" (Figure 12) from the information regarding the included variation pattern, the corresponding variation effect start command is set and executed (Figure 38: Step S5020).

In the variable effect at the time of the special drawing 2 lottery, first, as shown in FIG. 46(A), a V roulette effect is executed to display an image GC1 showing how a roulette wheel having a loss zone and a V zone is rotated. In this case, a display area HR3 provided at one corner of the display screen 7a shows the changing state of the decorative pattern.

If the result of the judgment of special drawing 2 is a jackpot or a small win, after the V roulette effect, as shown in FIG. 46(B), the roulette that was spinning in the V roulette effect stops, A V zone selection effect is executed to display an image GC2 indicating that the stop zone is the V zone. In the display area HR3, after a ready-to-win state is shown using a decorative pattern, a pattern arrangement of zeros indicating a small hit or a type 1 jackpot is stopped and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 46(C), a V roulette success effect is executed in which an image GC3 suggesting that a jackpot game will be executed and an image GC4 suggesting a right-hand hit are displayed. This V roulette success performance suggests that the V roulette performance is successful and that there is a high expectation of a jackpot (type 1 jackpot or type 2 jackpot). In other words, it indicates that the expectation that a jackpot game will be executed is high. It is a suggestive performance. Similar to the expected success performance of V (FIG. 44(I)), this V roulette success performance is performed after a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.01 seconds) has elapsed since the zero number symbol arrangement was stopped and displayed in the display area HR2. Begins. In other words, the timing (time) from when the small winning symbol is confirmed to be displayed on the special symbol display 41 until the V Roulette successful performance starts, and from the time when the jackpot symbol is confirmed to the start to the start of the V Roulette successful performance. The timing (time) of and are configured to be equal. In the case of a small win, after this V roulette success performance, a small win game is executed, and when the player passes the V by hitting the right hand, it becomes a type 2 jackpot and the game shifts to the jackpot game. In this way, in this embodiment, when a small hit is made, the variable effect is stopped and the effect (Fig. 46 (C)). Then, during the small winning game, no performance suggesting a small winning game or a performance suggesting V passing is performed. With this configuration, even in the case of a small win, the player is not aware of the small win game and can be made to think that he has won a type 1 jackpot. Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the variable performance is stopped, the same performance (FIG. 46(C)) is started in the case of a big hit and the case of a small win. With this configuration, it is possible to make it even more difficult to distinguish between a type 1 jackpot and a type 2 jackpot. Note that even if the numbers stopped and displayed in the display area HR2 are different in the case of a big hit and the case of a small hit, these are naturally included in the same effect. In addition, the expected success performance of V in the case of a jackpot and the case of a small win may be started before the small winning symbol or the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed.

On the other hand, if the result of the judgment of special drawing 2 is a loss, after the V roulette performance, the roulette that was spinning in the V roulette performance stops and the stop zone becomes the loss zone. A loss zone selection effect is executed to display an image GC5 indicating that the loss zone is selected. In the display area HR3, a ready-to-reach state using decorative symbols is shown.

Next, as shown in FIG. 46(E), a V roulette failure performance is executed to display an image GC6 indicating that the V roulette performance has failed and the jackpot game will not be executed. In the display area HR3, a pattern arrangement indicating a loss is shown using decorative patterns. In addition, if the special drawing 2 is on hold, after this V roulette failure effect, the V roulette effect is shifted again (see FIG. 46(A)).

In addition, in the time saving state, if a judgment is made on special drawing 1 and there is a jackpot (Figure 12: when the fluctuation pattern "P8" is selected) or a small hit (Figure 12: when the fluctuation pattern "P9" is selected) In this case, the effects shown in FIGS. 46(A) to 46(C) are executed in the same way as when a big hit or a small hit is made in special drawing 2. In addition, if the special figure 1 is judged to be correct or not, and if it is a loss (Figure 12: when the variation pattern "P10" is selected), the same way as in the case of a loss in the special figure 2, Fig. 46 (A), (D) , (E) is performed. In addition, in the time saving state, if you lose in the judgment of the special figure 2 (Figure 12: When the fluctuation pattern "P19" is selected) or if you lose in the judgment of the validity of the special figure 1 (Figure 12: Variation pattern If "P11" is selected), a variable effect is executed to quickly notify a loss using a decorative pattern.

[Countdown performance (during time-saving state fluctuation performance)]
FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a countdown effect. This countdown performance is a performance that displays an image of the remaining number of times of time saving on the display screen 7a during each variable performance during the time saving state. The countdown performance is started from the first change of the special symbol in a time-saving state after the jackpot game. Specifically, the production control microcomputer 91 receives a variation start command from the main control board 80 (FIG. 37: Step S4455: YES), and in the variation production start processing (FIG. 37: Step S4460, FIG. 38), the mode status M When is "2", the corresponding variable effect start command is set and executed (FIG. 38: Step S5020). The "remaining display time saving number" indicated by the time saving remaining number image of the countdown performance is determined with reference to the time saving performance scenario (see FIG. 43) determined based on the time saving performance scenario determination table T56 (see FIG. 42). Therefore, the "remaining number of displayed time savings" shown in the remaining number of time savings images is either the same number of times as the actual remaining number of time savings (actual remaining number of fluctuations) until the end of the time saving state, or a number that is less than the actual remaining number of time savings. is shown as a pseudo time saving remaining number of times. The countdown effect shown in FIG. 47 is an example of a effect corresponding to "scenario C".

In the countdown effect based on "scenario C," first, countdown effect A is displayed as shown in FIG. 47(A). In this countdown effect A, in the first variation after entering the time saving state, the remaining time saving number image GDA is displayed with the "display time saving remaining number" being 5 times, and from the 2nd variation to the 5th variation, the previous variation is displayed. A time saving remaining number image GDA representing the number of times one is subtracted from the indicated display time saving remaining number of times is displayed. For example, in countdown effect A, in the second variation, the remaining time saving number image GDA is displayed with the "remaining display time saving number" set to 4 times, and in the fifth variation, the "remaining display time saving number" is set to 1 time. Display the time saving remaining number of times image GDA.

When the display of the time saving remaining number image GDA of the fifth variation in the countdown effect A is completed, next, as shown in FIG. 47(B), the charge effect A is executed during the variation effect of the fifth variation. In this charging effect A, a charging image CHA is displayed that suggests charging (increasing) the "remaining number of display time reductions" by about 10 times.

Next, as shown in FIG. 47(C), countdown effect B is executed. In this countdown effect B, in the 6th variation which is the next variation of charge effect A, the charge amount (10 Displays the remaining time saving number image GDB in which the number of times (10 times) increased by 10 times is the "display time saving remaining number of times", and from the 7th variation to the 15th variation, the remaining number of times shown in the previous variation is increased by one. A time saving remaining number image GDB representing the subtracted remaining number of times is displayed. For example, in countdown effect B, in the 6th variation, the remaining time reduction image GDB is displayed with the "remaining number of display time reductions" set to 10, and in the 7th variation, the time reduction image GDB is displayed with the "remaining number of display time reductions" set to 9. The remaining number of times image GDB is displayed, and at the 15th variation, the remaining number of times saving time image GDB is displayed with the "remaining number of times of display time saving" set to one.

When the display of the time saving remaining number image GDB of the 15th variation in the countdown performance B is completed, next, as shown in FIG. 47(D), charge performance B is executed during the variation performance of the 15th variation. In this charging effect B, a charging image CHB is displayed that suggests charging (increasing) the "remaining number of display time reductions" by about 84 times.

Next, as shown in FIG. 47(E), countdown effect C is executed. In this countdown effect C, in the 16th variation which is the next variation of charge effect B, the charge amount (84 The remaining time saving number image GDC is displayed with the number of times increased by 84 times (84 times) as the "display time saving remaining number of times", and from the 17th variation to the 99th variation, the remaining number of times shown in the previous variation is increased by one. A time saving remaining number image GDC representing the subtracted remaining number of times is displayed. For example, in countdown effect C, at the 16th variation, the remaining time reduction image GDC is displayed with the "remaining number of display time reductions" set to 84, and at the 17th variation, the time reduction image GDC is displayed where the "remaining number of display time reductions" is set to 83. Display the remaining number of times image GDC.

Note that the countdown effect is executed at a predetermined timing of each variable effect in the time saving state. For example, it may be executed at the start timing of each variable effect, or may be executed at the end timing of each variable effect. Furthermore, the image of the remaining number of time savings may be continuously displayed during each variable performance.

[One-time crying performance (first variation (special figure 2) performance after the end of time saving state)]
FIG. 48 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a crying performance once. This crying one-time performance is a variation performance that is executed in the next variation of the variation when the special drawing 2 is held in the last variation of the time-saving state, that is, the first variation after the time-saving state. It is a variation of the special figure 2 in a non-time saving state. Specifically, the performance control microcomputer 91 receives a fluctuation start command from the main control board 80 (FIG. 37: Step S4455: YES), and in the fluctuation performance start processing (FIG. 37: Step S4460, FIG. 38), the special performance flag is set. When is ON, the corresponding variable effect start command is set and executed (FIG. 38: Step S5020).

In the crying performance, first, as shown in FIG. 48(A), an image GE1 showing a rotating "target" consisting of a winning zone and a losing zone, and a state advantageous to the player are displayed at the end. A guessing start effect is executed to display an image GE2 indicating that the target is the target. In this case, a display area HR4 provided at one corner of the display screen 7a shows the fluctuating state of the decorative pattern.

If the result of the judgment of special figure 2 is a big hit or a small hit, after the target hit start performance, the arrow hits the hit zone of the target as shown in FIG. 48(B). A hit effect is executed to display an image GE3 indicating that. In the display area HR4, after a ready-to-win state is shown using decorative symbols, a pattern arrangement of zeros indicating a small hit or a type 1 jackpot is stopped and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 48(C), an image GE4 suggesting that a jackpot game will be executed, and a right-hand-hitting suggestion image GE5 encouraging right-hand hitting are displayed, indicating that the hit was a success and the jackpot ( A successful hit performance is performed which suggests that the expectation level is high for a type 1 jackpot or type 2 jackpot, or in other words, that the expectation level is high for a jackpot game to be executed. Similar to the expected success performance of V (FIG. 44(I)), this success performance is performed after a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.01 seconds) has elapsed since the zero-th mark array was stopped and displayed in the display area HR2. will be started. In other words, the timing (time) from when the small winning symbol is confirmed to be displayed on the special symbol display 41 to when the successful hit performance starts, and from when the jackpot symbol is confirmed to be displayed to when the successful hit performance starts. The timing (time) of and are configured to be equal. In the case of a small win, after this successful performance, a small win game is executed, and when the player hits right and passes V, it becomes a type 2 jackpot, and the game shifts to a jackpot game. In this way, in this embodiment, when a small win is achieved, the variable effect is stopped, and the effect (Fig. 48 (C)). Then, during the small winning game, no performance suggesting a small winning game or a performance suggesting V passing is performed. With this configuration, even in the case of a small winning game, the player does not notice the small winning game and can be made to think that he has won a type 1 jackpot. Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the variable performance is stopped, the same performance (FIG. 48(C)) is started in the case of a big hit and the case of a small win. With this configuration, it is possible to make it even more difficult to distinguish between a type 1 jackpot and a type 2 jackpot. Note that even if the numbers stopped and displayed in the display area HR2 are different in the case of a jackpot and the case of a small win, these are naturally included in the same performance. In addition, the expected success performance of V in the case of a jackpot and the case of a small win may be started before the small winning symbol or the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed.

On the other hand, if the result of the determination of the special figure 2 is a loss, after the target start performance, as shown in FIG. 48(D), an image GE6 showing that the arrow has hit the loss zone of the target Execute a hit-or-miss effect that displays. In the display area HR4, a ready-to-reach state is shown using decorative symbols.

Next, as shown in FIG. 48(E), a hit failure effect is executed to display an image GE7 indicating that the hit is a failure and the jackpot game is not executed because it is a loss without a jackpot or small hit. . In the display area HR4, a pattern arrangement indicating a loss is shown using decorative patterns.

Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 48(A) to (C) in the one-time crying effect are when the variation pattern P13 (see FIG. 12) is selected in the first variation after transitioning from the time-saving state to the non-time-saving state. The effects shown in FIGS. 48(A), (D), and (E) are examples of effects executed in the above-described effects when the variation pattern P14 (see FIG. 12 ) is selected.

9. Operation of the board movable body The operation of the board movable body (first movable accessory 14 and second movable accessory 15) will be explained using FIGS. 49 to 58. The performance control microcomputer 91 performs drive control to operate the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 during a game performance (display performance) or during an initial operation when the power is turned on. In addition, the performance control microcomputer 91 causes the image display device 7 to display a specific image during the game performance (display performance) or during the initial operation when the power is turned on, etc. 15 in a specific manner.

The operation of the first movable accessory 14 will be explained using FIGS. 49 to 54. FIG. 49 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the movement of the first movable accessory 14 in the advancing direction (moving in the advancing direction). FIG. 50 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the second aspect of the first movable accessory 14. FIG. 51 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a combination effect of the first movable accessory 14 and the image display device 7. FIG. 52 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the rotational movement of the first movable accessory 14. FIG. 53 and FIG. 54 are explanatory diagrams illustrating the light emission mode of the first movable accessory 14.

As shown in FIG. 49, the first movable accessory 14 includes a left movable accessory 14L and a right movable accessory 14R. The left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R are each configured to be movable in the left-right direction, and halves of ring-shaped decorative parts (left side decorative part and right side decorative part) are attached to the tip sides. That is, the left decorative portion and the right decorative portion each have an arc shape that is half an annular shape. As shown in FIG. 1, the first movable accessory 14 is in a retracted position (home position) where the left movable accessory 14L is stored on the left side of the display screen 7a and the right movable accessory 14R is stored on the right side of the display screen 7a. It can stand still (first aspect). At this time, parts of the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R are each partially visible. As shown in FIG. 49, the first movable accessory 14 advances from the state shown in FIG. 1 toward the center of the display screen 7a (in a direction in which they approach each other). By moving, the left decorative part and the right decorative part are combined at the advanced position (deployed position) shown in FIG. 50, and one decorative member (combined accessory) is formed (second mode). Here, the combined accessory forms the outline of the face. In this second aspect, the combined accessory in which the left side decorative part and the right side decorative part are combined covers a part of the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a on the front of the image display device 7, and is displayed from an opening formed in the center. The screen 7a stands still in a visible state. That is, the combined accessory forms only the outline of the face and does not have the central part of the face, and instead is configured so that the display screen 7a can be visually recognized. Then, as shown in FIG. 51, a face image is displayed on the display screen 7a corresponding to the opening formed in the center of the combined accessory, thereby completing the human face as a whole. That is, by displaying the missing part (for example, the central part of the face) in the combined accessory as an image on the display screen 7a, a combination of the accessory and the image is created to complete one object (for example, a human face). can be executed. Note that the object completed by the first movable accessory 14 and the display screen 7a is not limited to a human face. For example, it may be the entire human body, a robot, or the like. That is, the head, body, right arm, and both legs may be completed using the combined accessories, and the left arm may be displayed on the display screen 7a. The first movable accessory 14 can be moved (retracted) from the advanced position shown in FIGS. 50 and 51 through the state shown in FIG. 49 to the retracted position shown in FIG. 1, and stops there. be able to.

As shown in FIG. 52, this combined accessory can be vertically rotated in front of the display screen 7a. That is, the combined accessory can rotate about an axis that is parallel and horizontal to the display screen 7a, and can be stopped at any tilted angle. At this time, the central opening of the combined accessory gradually becomes an elliptical shape that is narrower in the vertical direction when viewed from the player. On the display screen 7a, the image of the person's face to be displayed is deformed in accordance with the deformation of the opening into the elliptical shape. As a result, for example, the first movable accessory 14 and the display screen 7a can create the appearance that a person's face is bowing.

As shown in FIGS. 53 and 54, the first movable accessory 14 is configured to be able to emit light. Specifically, a plurality of LEDs are arranged side by side on the surface of the combined accessory (decorative member), and each LED is configured to be able to be turned on and off. For example, as shown in FIG. 53, the right movable accessory 14R can emit light in conjunction with (correspond to) the light emission of the frame lamp 66. Moreover, as shown in FIG. 54, the right side movable accessory 14R and the left side movable accessory 14L can be made to emit light in conjunction with each other.

The operation of the second movable accessory 15 will be explained using FIGS. 55 and 56. FIG. 55 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second aspect of the second movable accessory 15. FIG. 56 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the rotational movement of the second movable accessory 15. The second movable accessory 15 includes a rectangular decorative part with "OARO" written on it, and is configured to be able to move up and down and rotate left and right. As shown in FIG. 1, the second movable accessory 15 can stand still at a retracted position (home position) above the display screen 7a (first mode). At this time, a part of the second movable accessory 15 becomes difficult to see. The second movable accessory 15 can move downward from the state shown in FIG. 1 toward the center of the display screen 7a and come to rest at the advanced position (deployed position) shown in FIG. 55 (second mode) . In this second aspect, the decoration part stops on the front surface of the image display device 7 so as to cover the vicinity slightly above the center of the display screen 7a. Further, as shown in FIG. 56, this decorative portion can rotate clockwise and counterclockwise (clockwise rotation in the drawing) in front of the display screen 7a, and can stop at any tilted angle. The second movable accessory 15 can be moved upward (retracted) from the advanced position shown in FIGS. 55 and 56 to the retracted position shown in FIG. 1, and can come to rest there.

A combination effect of the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 will be explained using FIGS. 57 and 58. FIG. 57 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a first combination effect using the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15. FIG. 58 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second combination effect using the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15. As shown in FIG. 57, the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 can perform the first combination effect by both being in the second mode. That is, by moving both the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 to the advanced position, the second movable accessory 15 will be in a state where it covers a part of the upper part of the first movable accessory 14. In other words, the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 can stand still while partially overlapping and combined. In addition, as shown in FIG. A second combination effect can be performed in which the movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 are each tilted at a predetermined angle. This second combination performance is performed after the first combination performance, in which two movable accessories are formed by rotating (tilted) together, and in which they move to the advance position in a tilted state and overlap. There are cases where the second combination effect is directly performed without going through the first combination effect.

10. Other production examples, effect examples, modifications, and mode examples of the present embodiment Each production example (display production example, role object movable production example) of the present embodiment will be described below. In addition, examples of effects, modifications, and aspects of the production example will also be explained. As mentioned above, the performance that will be described below is based on various information (win determination information, winning type information, fluctuation pattern information, advance determination information, etc.) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 81. This is an effect realized by the image control microcomputer 101). Note that the following display effect example is executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Furthermore, although the hold display (hold icon) may be omitted in the display performance examples, it is actually displayed unless otherwise specified.

The fluctuation timing change effects A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 59 to 61. This fluctuating timing change effect may be executed during the fluctuating effect of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a variable timing change effect, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image. The image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7. In addition, the lamp control board 107 analyzes the fluctuating performance start command received from the sub-control board 90, and when the instruction to execute the fluctuating timing change performance is included, the first movable accessory 14 or the second movable accessory 15 is driven.

[Fluctuating timing change production A]
FIG. 59 is a diagram for explaining the fluctuation timing change effect A. In the variable timing change performance A, first, as shown in FIG. 59(A), two sets of decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the first decorative symbols 2l, 8c, and 8r and the second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a fluctuating manner in which they move vertically at high speed. The first decorative pattern includes a left decorative pattern 8l, a middle decorative pattern 8c, and a right decorative pattern 8r, and is a set of symbols that can notify whether or not it is a hit based on the combination of these stop patterns. The second decorative pattern includes a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R, and is a set of symbols that can notify whether or not it is a hit based on the combination of these stop patterns. A white spherical pending icon 9C is displayed at the pending display position (above the rectangular image) below the center of the display screen 7a. Three hold icons 9A are displayed in the first hold display area on the left side of the hold display position. A black spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position on the far right. A star-shaped hold icon 9A is displayed at the second hold display position, second from the right. A white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the third hold display position that is third from the right (in this case, the leftmost position). Here, hold icons of the same color and shape are displayed at the third hold display position and the hold display position. Differences in the shape and color of the pending icons represent differences in the degree of expectation of winning at the time of lottery corresponding to the pending icon. Here, among the three pending icons 9A: the star-shaped pending icon, the black spherical pending icon, and the white spherical pending icon, the star-shaped pending icon has the highest probability of winning, and the black spherical pending icon has the highest probability of winning. The expectation of winning is the highest, and the white spherical pending icon has the lowest expectation of winning.

As shown in FIG. 59(A), in a case where the white ball hold icon reaches the hold display position, the white ball hold icon reaches the hold display position from the first hold display position, and at the same time the two decorative symbols ( The first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern) start to be displayed in a variable manner. That is, when the hold icon reaches the hold display position, a variable effect corresponding to the reached hold icon (the hold icon) is started. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 59(B), the first decorative patterns 2l, 8c, 8r and the second decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed simultaneously. Moreover, at this time, at the same time, an effect is executed in which the pending icon 9C disappears (disappears). That is, in the lottery corresponding to the white spherical pending icon 9C with relatively low expectation of winning, the two decorative patterns (the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern) start changing at the same time, and at the same time stop displaying. be done.

Next, as shown in FIG. 59(C), the black sphere hold icon 9A that was at the first hold display position moves toward the hold display position. At this time, the two decorative patterns (the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern) are maintained in a stopped display. As shown in FIG. 59(D), at the same time as the black ball reservation icon 9A reaches the reservation display position, the two decorative symbols (the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol) start variable display. That is, when the hold icon reaches the hold display position, a variable effect corresponding to the reached hold icon (the hold icon) is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 59(E), the first decorative symbols 2l, 8c, and 8r are stopped and displayed while the second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R continue to be displayed in a variable manner. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 59(F), the second decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed. That is, when the hold icon 9C is a black ball hold icon, the two decorative symbols are not stopped and displayed at the same time, but are configured so that the timing of the stop display is shifted. In this embodiment, the first decorative symbols 2l, 8c, and 8r are stopped and displayed before the second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, but the opposite may be used. Furthermore, which one is stopped and displayed first may change each time there is a change (it may be random). In this way, in the lottery corresponding to the black spherical pending icon 9C with a relatively medium expectation of winning, the two decorative patterns (the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern) start changing at the same time. , the stop display is not simultaneous, but the timing is different. As shown in FIG. 59(F), simultaneously with the stop display of the second decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, an effect is performed in which the pending icon 9C disappears (disappears).

Next, as shown in FIG. 59(G), the star-shaped hold icon 9A that was at the first hold display position moves toward the hold display position. At this time, the second decorative pattern among the two decorative patterns (the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern) starts variable display. The stop display of the first decorative pattern is maintained. That is, the second decorative pattern starts to be displayed in a variable manner before the pending icon 9A located at the first pending display position starts moving and reaches the corresponding pending display position. Then, as shown in FIG. 59(H), at the same time as the star-shaped hold icon 9A reaches the hold display position, the first decorative pattern starts to be displayed in a variable manner. In this embodiment, the second decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate before the first decorative patterns 2l, 8c, and 8r, but the opposite may be possible. Furthermore, which one starts changing first may change each time there is a change (or may be random).

Next, as shown in FIG. 59(I), the first decorative symbols 2l, 8c, and 8r are stopped and displayed while the second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R continue to be displayed in a variable manner. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 59(J), the second decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed. In this embodiment, the first decorative symbols 2l, 8c, and 8r are stopped and displayed before the second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, but the opposite may be used. Furthermore, which one is stopped and displayed first may change each time there is a change (it may be random). In this way, in the lottery corresponding to the star-shaped pending icon 9C, which has a relatively high expectation of winning, the fluctuation start timing of the two decorative symbols (the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol) and the stop display are determined. The timing is different. After FIG. 59(J), the white ball hold icon 9A that was at the first hold display position moves toward the hold display position. In a case where the white ball hold icon reaches the hold display position, as shown in FIG. 59(A), the white ball hold icon reaches the hold display position from the first hold display position, and two decorative symbols The first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern) start to be displayed in a variable manner. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 59(B), the first decorative patterns 2l, 8c, 8r and the second decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed simultaneously. Moreover, at this time, at the same time, an effect is executed in which the pending icon 9C disappears (disappears).

[Fluctuating timing change production B]
FIG. 60 is a diagram for explaining the fluctuation timing change effect B. In the variable timing change effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 60(A), three sets of decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, first decorative patterns 2l, 8c, 8r, second decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R, and third decorative patterns 8ml, 8mc, 8mr are variably displayed. The first decorative pattern includes a left decorative pattern 8l, a middle decorative pattern 8c, and a right decorative pattern 8r, and is a set of symbols that can notify whether or not it is a hit based on the combination of these stop patterns. The second decorative pattern includes a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R, and is a set of symbols that can notify whether or not it is a hit based on the combination of these stop patterns. The third decorative pattern includes a left decorative pattern 8ml, a middle decorative pattern 8mc, and a right decorative pattern 8mr, and is a set of symbols that can notify whether or not it is a hit based on the combination of these stop symbols. A white spherical pending icon 9C is displayed at the pending display position (above the rectangular image) below the center of the display screen 7a. Three hold icons 9A are displayed in the first hold display area on the left side of the hold display position. A black spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position on the far right. A star-shaped hold icon 9A is displayed at the second hold display position, second from the right. A white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the third hold display position that is third from the right (in this case, the leftmost position). Here, hold icons of the same color and shape are displayed at the third hold display position and the hold display position. Differences in the shape and color of the pending icons represent differences in the degree of expectation of winning at the time of lottery corresponding to the pending icon. Here, among the three pending icons 9A: the star-shaped pending icon, the black spherical pending icon, and the white spherical pending icon, the star-shaped pending icon has the highest probability of winning, and the black spherical pending icon has the highest probability of winning. The expectation of winning is the highest, and the white spherical pending icon has the lowest expectation of winning.

As shown in FIG. 60(A), in a case where the white ball hold icon reaches the hold display position, the white ball hold icon reaches the hold display position from the first hold display position, and at the same time the three decorative symbols ( (the first decorative pattern, the second decorative pattern, and the third decorative pattern) start to be displayed in a variable manner. That is, when the hold icon reaches the hold display position, a variable effect corresponding to the reached hold icon (the hold icon) is started. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 60(B), the first decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r, the second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the third decorative symbols 8ml, 8mc, 8mr are simultaneously stopped and displayed. Ru. Moreover, at this time, at the same time, an effect is executed in which the pending icon 9C disappears (disappears). That is, in the lottery corresponding to the white spherical pending icon 9C, which has a relatively low probability of winning, the three decorative patterns (the first decorative pattern, the second decorative pattern, and the third decorative pattern) start changing at the same time. The display will stop and display at the same time.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60(C), the black sphere hold icon 9A that was at the first hold display position moves toward the hold display position. At this time, the three decorative patterns (the first decorative pattern, the second decorative pattern, and the third decorative pattern) are maintained in a stopped display. As shown in FIG. 60(D), at the same time as the black ball hold icon 9A reaches the hold display position, the three decorative patterns (first decorative pattern, second decorative pattern, and third decorative pattern) are displayed in a variable manner. Start. That is, when the hold icon reaches the hold display position, a variable effect corresponding to the reached hold icon (the hold icon) is started.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60(E), while the second decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the third decorative patterns 8ml, 8mc, 8mr continue to be displayed in a variable manner, the first decorative patterns 2l, 8c, 8r is stopped and displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 60(F), the second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R and the third decorative symbols 8ml, 8mc, and 8mr are stopped and displayed simultaneously. In other words, when the hold icon 9C is a black ball hold icon, the stop display of the three decorative patterns is not simultaneous, and the timing of the stop of the first decorative pattern is different from the stop of the second and third decorative patterns. It is configured to be out of sync with the timing. In this embodiment, the first decorative pattern is stopped and displayed before the second decorative pattern and the third decorative pattern, but the opposite may be possible. Furthermore, which one is stopped and displayed first may change each time there is a change (it may be random). Furthermore, the three decorative patterns may stop at different timings. In this way, in the lottery corresponding to the black spherical pending icon 9C with a relatively medium probability of winning, three decorative symbols (first decorative symbol, second decorative symbol, and third decorative symbol) are drawn simultaneously. While the fluctuations are started, the stop displays are not all at the same time, but the timing is shifted in at least some of them. As shown in FIG. 60(F), simultaneously with the stop display of the second decorative pattern and the third decorative pattern, an effect is performed in which the pending icon 9C disappears (disappears).

Next, as shown in FIG. 60(G), the star-shaped hold icon 9A that was at the first hold display position moves toward the hold display position. At this time, two decorative patterns (the second decorative pattern and the third decorative pattern) among the three decorative patterns (the first decorative pattern, the second decorative pattern, and the third decorative pattern) start variable display. The stop display of the first decorative pattern is maintained. That is, the two decorative patterns (the second decorative pattern and the third decorative pattern) start to be displayed in a variable manner before the pending icon 9A that was at the first pending display position starts moving and reaches the corresponding pending display position. do. Then, as shown in FIG. 60(H), at the same time as the star-shaped hold icon 9A reaches the hold display position, the first decorative pattern starts to be displayed in a variable manner. In this embodiment, the two decorative patterns (the second decorative pattern and the third decorative pattern) start changing before the first decorative pattern, but the opposite may be possible. Furthermore, which one starts changing first may change each time there is a change (it may be random). Furthermore, the three decorative patterns may start changing at different timings.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60(I), while the two decorative patterns (the second decorative pattern and the third decorative pattern) continue to be displayed in a variable manner, the first decorative patterns 2l, 8c, and 8r are stopped and displayed. Ru. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 60(J), the two decorative patterns (the second decorative pattern and the third decorative pattern) are stopped and displayed. In this embodiment, the first decorative patterns 2l, 8c, and 8r are stopped and displayed before the two decorative patterns (the second decorative pattern and the third decorative pattern), but the opposite may be possible. Furthermore, which one is stopped and displayed first may change each time there is a change (it may be random). Furthermore, the three decorative patterns may stop at different timings. In this way, in the lottery corresponding to the star-shaped pending icon 9C with relatively high expectation of winning, at least part of the three decorative patterns (the first decorative pattern, the second decorative pattern, and the third decorative pattern) In this case, the fluctuation start timing and the stop display timing are different from each other.
After FIG. 60 (J), the white ball hold icon reaches the hold display position from the first hold display position, and at the same time, the three decorative patterns (first decorative pattern, second decorative pattern, and third decorative pattern) Start variable display. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 60(B), the first decorative symbols 2l, 8c, 8r, the second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the third decorative symbols 8ml, 8mc, 8mr are simultaneously stopped and displayed. Ru. Moreover, at this time, at the same time, an effect is executed in which the pending icon 9C disappears (disappears).

[Fluctuating timing change production C]
FIG. 61 is a diagram for explaining the fluctuation timing change effect C. FIGS. 61(A) and 61(B) of the variable timing change effect C are the same as FIGS. 60(F) and 60(G) of the variable timing change effect B. That is, before the fluctuation timing change effect C shown in FIG. 61(A), FIGS. 60(A) to 60(E) are executed. In FIG. 61(A), after the first decorative symbols 2l, 8c, and 8r are stopped and displayed, the second decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R and the third decorative symbols 8ml, 8mc, and 8mr are simultaneously stopped and displayed after a delay. . The first decorative pattern includes a left decorative pattern 8l, a middle decorative pattern 8c, and a right decorative pattern 8r, and is a set of symbols that can notify whether or not it is a hit based on the combination of these stop patterns. The second decorative pattern includes a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R, and is a set of symbols that can notify whether or not it is a hit based on the combination of these stop patterns. The third decorative pattern includes a left decorative pattern 8ml, a middle decorative pattern 8mc, and a right decorative pattern 8mr, and is a set of symbols that can notify whether or not it is a hit based on the combination of these stop symbols. At this time, at the same time, an effect is executed in which the black spherical hold icon 9C displayed at the hold display position (above the rectangular image) at the lower center of the display screen 7a disappears (disappears). Two hold icons 9A are displayed in the first hold display area on the left side of the hold display position. A star-shaped hold icon 9A is displayed at the first hold display position on the far right. A white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the second hold display position that is second from the right (in this case, the leftmost position). Differences in the shape and color of the pending icons represent differences in the degree of expectation of winning at the time of lottery corresponding to the pending icon. Here, among the three pending icons 9A: the star-shaped pending icon, the black spherical pending icon, and the white spherical pending icon, the star-shaped pending icon has the highest probability of winning, and the black spherical pending icon has the highest probability of winning. The expectation of winning is the highest, and the white spherical pending icon has the lowest expectation of winning.

Next, as shown in FIG. 61(B), the star-shaped hold icon 9A that was at the first hold display position moves toward the hold display position. At this time, two decorative patterns (the second decorative pattern and the third decorative pattern) among the three decorative patterns (the first decorative pattern, the second decorative pattern, and the third decorative pattern) start variable display. The stop display of the first decorative pattern is maintained. That is, the two decorative patterns (the second decorative pattern and the third decorative pattern) start to be displayed in a variable manner before the pending icon 9A that was at the first pending display position starts moving and reaches the corresponding pending display position. do. Then, as shown in FIG. 61(C), the second movable accessory 15 advances downward, comes to rest in the second mode, and then moves to the retracted position (first mode). The first decorative pattern disappears from the display as the second movable accessory 15 moves without starting to fluctuate. This suggests that a pseudo-continuation performance will begin. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 61(D), the three decorative patterns (the first decorative pattern, the second decorative pattern, and the third decorative pattern) are displayed in a variable manner. Next, as shown in FIG. 61(E), the first decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed. The two decorative patterns (the second decorative pattern and the third decorative pattern) continue to be displayed in a variable manner. After that, as shown in FIG. 61(F), the first decorative pattern starts changing again, and all three decorative patterns (first decorative pattern, second decorative pattern, and third decorative pattern) are displayed in a variable manner. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 61(G), the first decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed again. The two decorative patterns (the second decorative pattern and the third decorative pattern) continue to be displayed in a variable manner. Furthermore, after that, as shown in FIG. 61(H), the first decorative pattern starts to change again, and all three decorative patterns (the first decorative pattern, the second decorative pattern, and the third decorative pattern) are displayed in a variable manner. Ru. Next, as shown in FIG. 61(I), the first decorative pattern is stopped and displayed at the winning number "555". The two decorative patterns (the second decorative pattern and the third decorative pattern) continue to be displayed in a variable manner. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 61(J), two decorative patterns (a second decorative pattern and a third decorative pattern) are stopped and displayed on the same hit as the second decorative pattern.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the variable timing change effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the first decorative pattern is, for example, as shown in FIGS. A first effect in which the second decorative pattern is stopped and displayed after it has been stopped and displayed, and a second effect in which the second decorative pattern is displayed in the next state before the first decorative pattern has started the next variable display after the first effect. A second effect of starting a variable display can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 59(G), in the second effect, before the hold icon arrives at the hold display position by shift movement, the hold icon is displayed in the second decorative pattern. A corresponding fluctuation is initiated. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 60 and 61.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 60(D) to (H) and 61(D) to (H), in the first effect, after the first decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, The three decorative patterns are displayed in a stopped state, and in the second performance, the third decorative pattern starts the next variable display while the first decorative pattern has not started the next variable display. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 59(H) to (J), (A), and FIGS. It is possible to execute a third effect in which the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern simultaneously start the next variable display without performing the effect described above. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 59(D) to (H), FIGS. 60(D) to (H), and FIGS. , a second performance is performed after the first performance, and when the hold icon is a white sphere, a third performance is performed after the first performance. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.

[Modified example]
Below, a modification of the variation timing change effect will be shown.
[Modification 1]
The first variation in FIGS. 59(A) and (B), the second variation in FIGS. 59(C) to (F), and the third variation in FIGS. 59(G) to (J) are executed in any order. may be done. For example, the third variation, the second variation, and the first variation may be executed in this order. Further, the same type of variation may be repeatedly executed. For example, the third variation, the third variation, and the first variation may be executed in this order. The same applies to FIGS. 60 and 61. The type of hold icon is not limited to the above embodiment.

[Modification 2]
The relative positional relationship and size of the first decorative pattern, the second decorative pattern, and the third decorative pattern are not limited to the above. These positions and sizes can be arbitrary. The type, shape, and display method of the first decorative pattern 2l, second decorative pattern 8L, and third decorative pattern 8ml are not limited to those described above, as long as they are displayed on the image display device 7.

[Modification 3]
The first decorative pattern 2l, the second decorative pattern 8L, and the third decorative pattern 8ml are not limited to the above-mentioned variation display mode. For example, the variable display may not be displayed on the image display device 7. Further, the numbers may be displayed in such a manner that they move at high speed and cannot be distinguished, or they may be displayed at a speed that is distinguishable. Further, the fluctuation speed may change midway.

[Modification 4]
The first decorative pattern is assumed to start changing when the hold icon reaches the hold display position. However, it may be just before or after that. Immediately before and immediately after are, for example, a range of 2 to 3 seconds before and after.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect A1-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a set of first decorative patterns that can notify whether or not it is a hit;
One of the plurality of types of images is a set of second decorative patterns that can notify whether or not it is a hit;
a first effect in which the second decorative pattern is stopped and displayed after the first decorative pattern is stopped and displayed;
After the first performance, a second performance in which the second decorative pattern starts the next variable display while the first decorative pattern has not started the next variable display;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A1-1,
One of the plurality of types of images is a hold icon,
In the second performance, before the hold icon arrives at the hold display position by shift movement, a change corresponding to the hold icon is started in the second decorative pattern.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A1-1 or aspect A1-2,
One of the plurality of types of images is a set of third decorative patterns that can notify whether or not it is a hit;
In the first performance, after the first decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the third decorative pattern is stopped and displayed,
In the second performance, the third decorative pattern starts the next variable display while the first decorative pattern has not started the next variable display.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A1-1 to A1-3,
After the first performance, it is possible to perform a third performance in which the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern simultaneously start the next variable display without performing the second performance.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A1-5]
A gaming machine according to aspect A1-4 that is subordinate to aspect A1-2,
When the hold icon is in the first mode, the second performance is performed after the first performance,
When the hold icon is in the second mode, the third effect is performed after the first effect;
A gaming machine characterized by:

The symbol direction change effects A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 62 to 64. This symbol direction change performance may be executed during the variation performance of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation performance start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a symbol direction change performance, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image. The image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7. In addition, when the lamp control board 107 analyzes the fluctuation performance start command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute a symbol direction change performance, the lamp control board 107 analyzes the first movable accessory 14 or the second movable accessory. 15 is driven.

[Symbol direction change effect A]
FIG. 62 is a diagram for explaining the symbol direction change effect A. In the symbol direction change performance A, first, as shown in FIG. 62(A), the left decorative symbol 8L among the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed in a variable manner on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. . At this time, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are not displayed. In other words, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are changing, but are not in a visible state. The left decorative pattern 8L enters the frame from near the upper center of the display screen 7a and moves diagonally downward to the left. At this time, each number constituting the left decorative pattern 8L moves with the direction (posture) of the number tilted to the right. That is, each number is tilted along the direction of movement, and the bottom of each number is displayed facing the direction of travel (lower left direction). The speed of the variable display gradually slows down, and a specific number (here, "2") temporarily stops at a first position near the lower left of the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are also referred to as a first decorative pattern, a second decorative pattern, and a third decorative pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(B), a specific image CHA is displayed above this specific number (left decorative pattern 8L). The specific image CHA represents a specific object. Here, the specific image CHA represents a smiley face. Note that the specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose meaning is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist. The specific image CHA covers a part of the upper part of the specific number (left decorative pattern 8L), making a part of the specific number difficult to see. This specific image CHA also has a tilted direction (posture) similarly to the specific number (left decorative pattern 8L). The specific image CHA and the specific number (left decorative pattern 8L) have the same orientation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(C), an effect is performed in which a specific number (left decorative pattern 8L) and a specific image CHA bounce. Thereby, the display position and direction of the specific number (left decorative pattern 8L) and specific image CHA change while maintaining their mutual positional relationship. Specifically, the specific number (the left decorative pattern 8L) and the specific image CHA move to a second position in the upper left direction of the display screen 7a, and are oriented along the vertical direction (straight). The second position is located above the first position in the vertical direction. Then, as shown in FIG. 62(D), the specific number (left decorative pattern 8L) and specific image CHA move downward while maintaining their orientation along the vertical direction, and reach the third position. Stop display. . The third position is located vertically lower than the second position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(E), while the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed in a stopped state, the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed in a variable manner. At this time, the medium decorative pattern 8C is not displayed. In other words, although the medium decorative pattern 8C is changing, it is not in a visible state. The right decorative pattern 8R enters the frame from near the upper center of the display screen 7a and moves diagonally downward to the right. That is, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed variably in a direction different from that of the left decorative pattern 8L. At this time, each number constituting the right decorative pattern 8R moves with the direction (posture) of the number tilted to the left. That is, each number is tilted along the direction of movement, and the bottom of each number is displayed facing the direction of travel (lower right direction). The speed of the variable display gradually slows down and temporarily stops when a specific number (here, "2") is located near the lower right of the display screen 7a. Next, as shown in FIG. 62(F), a specific image CHA is displayed above this specific number (right decorative pattern 8R). The specific image CHA represents a specific object. Here, the specific image CHA is the same as that displayed on the left decorative pattern 8L, but may be an image with different content. The specific image CHA covers a part of the upper part of the specific number (right decorative pattern 8R), making a part of the specific number difficult to see. This specific image CHA is also tilted in direction like the specific numbers.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(G), an effect is performed in which a specific number (right decorative pattern 8R) and a specific image CHA bounce. As a result, the display position and orientation of the specific number (right decorative pattern 8R) and specific image CHA change while maintaining their mutual positional relationship. Specifically, the specific number (the right decorative pattern 8R) and the specific image CHA move toward the upper left of the display screen 7a while being oriented along the vertical direction (straight). Then, as shown in FIG. 62(H), the specific number (right decorative pattern 8R) and specific image CHA move downward while maintaining their orientation along the vertical direction, and stop displaying at that position. be done.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62(I), while the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed, the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed in a variable manner. In other words, the fluctuation of the medium decorative pattern 8C becomes visible. The medium decorative pattern 8C enters the frame from near the upper center of the display screen 7a and moves vertically downward. That is, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a varying direction different from that of the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R. At this time, each number constituting the medium decorative pattern 8C moves with the direction (posture) of the number along the vertical direction (straight state). In other words, each number is oriented along the direction of movement, and the bottom of each number is displayed facing the direction of travel (downward). The speed of the fluctuating display gradually slows down and stops temporarily when a specific number (here, "2") is located near the bottom center of the display screen 7a. Next, as shown in FIG. 62(J), the specific image CHA is not displayed above this specific number (medium decorative pattern 8C) but is displayed in a stopped state. As a result, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are fixedly displayed.

[Symbol direction change effect B]
FIG. 63 is a diagram for explaining the symbol direction change effect B. In the symbol direction change performance B, first, as shown in FIG. 63(A), the left decorative symbol 8L among the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed in a variable manner on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. . At this time, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are not displayed. In other words, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are changing, but are not in a visible state. The left decorative pattern 8L enters the frame from near the upper left corner of the display screen 7a and moves diagonally downward to the right. At this time, each number constituting the left decorative pattern 8L moves with the direction (posture) of the number tilted to the left. That is, each number is tilted along the direction of movement, and the bottom of each number is displayed facing the direction of travel (lower right direction). The speed of the variable display gradually slows down, and a specific number (here, "2") temporarily stops at a first position near the bottom center of the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are also referred to as a first decorative pattern, a second decorative pattern, and a third decorative pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(B), a specific image CHA is displayed above this specific number (left decorative pattern 8L). The specific image CHA represents a specific object. Here, the specific image CHA represents a smiley face. Note that the specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose meaning is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist. The specific image CHA covers a part of the upper part of the specific number (left decorative pattern 8L), making a part of the specific number difficult to see. This specific image CHA also has a tilted direction (posture) similarly to the specific number (left decorative pattern 8L). The specific image CHA and the specific number (left decorative pattern 8L) have the same orientation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(C), an effect is performed in which a specific number (left decorative pattern 8L) and a specific image CHA bounce. Thereby, the display position and direction of the specific number (left decorative pattern 8L) and specific image CHA change while maintaining their mutual positional relationship. Specifically, the specific number (the left decorative pattern 8L) and the specific image CHA move to a second position in the upper left direction of the display screen 7a, and are oriented along the vertical direction (straight). The second position is located above the first position in the vertical direction. Then, as shown in FIG. 63(D), the specific number (left decorative pattern 8L) and specific image CHA move downward while maintaining their orientation along the vertical direction, and reach the third position. It will stop and be displayed. The third position is located vertically lower than the second position.

In parallel with the stop display, the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed in a variable manner. At this time, the medium decorative pattern 8C is not displayed. In other words, although the medium decorative pattern 8C is changing, it is not in a visible state. The right decorative pattern 8R enters the frame from near the upper center of the display screen 7a and moves diagonally downward to the right. That is, it is displayed variably in the same direction as the left decorative pattern 8L. At this time, each number constituting the right decorative pattern 8R moves with the direction (posture) of the number tilted to the left. That is, the left decorative pattern 8L moves in a state of inclination to the same extent as the inclination of the numbers when changing. Each number is tilted along the direction of movement, and the bottom of each number is displayed facing the direction of travel (lower right direction). The speed of the variable display gradually slows down and temporarily stops when a specific number (here, "2") is located near the lower right of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(E), a specific image CHA is displayed above this specific number (right decorative pattern 8R). The specific image CHA represents a specific object. Here, the specific image CHA is the same as that displayed on the left decorative pattern 8L, but may be an image with different content. The specific image CHA covers a part of the upper part of the specific number (right decorative pattern 8R), making a part of the specific number difficult to see. This specific image CHA is also tilted in direction like the specific numbers.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(F), an effect is performed in which a specific number (right decorative pattern 8R) and a specific image CHA bounce. As a result, the display position and orientation of the specific number (right decorative pattern 8R) and specific image CHA change while maintaining their mutual positional relationship. Specifically, the specific number (the right decorative pattern 8R) and the specific image CHA move toward the upper left of the display screen 7a while being oriented along the vertical direction (straight). Then, as shown in FIG. 63(G), the specific number (right decorative pattern 8R) and specific image CHA move downward while maintaining their orientation along the vertical direction, and stop displaying at that position. be done. While the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a stopped state, the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed in a fluctuating manner. In other words, the fluctuation of the medium decorative pattern 8C becomes visible. The medium decorative pattern 8C enters the frame from near the upper left of the display screen 7a and moves diagonally downward to the right. That is, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a variable direction in the same direction as the variable direction. At this time, each number constituting the medium decorative pattern 8C moves with the direction (posture) of the number tilted to the left. That is, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R move with the same degree of inclination as the numbers when they change. Each number is tilted along the direction of movement, and the bottom of each number is displayed facing the direction of travel (lower right direction). The speed of the variable display gradually slows down and temporarily stops when a specific number (here, "2") is located near the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(H), a specific image CHA is displayed above this specific number (medium decorative pattern 8C). The specific image CHA represents a specific object. Here, the specific image CHA is the same as that displayed on the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R, but may be an image with different content. The specific image CHA covers a part of the upper part of the specific number (medium decorative pattern 8C), making a part of the specific number difficult to see. This specific image CHA also has a tilted direction (posture) similarly to the specific number (center decoration pattern 8C). The specific image CHA and the specific number (medium decorative pattern 8C) have the same orientation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63(I), an effect is performed in which a specific number (medium decorative pattern 8C) and a specific image CHA bounce. As a result, the display position and orientation of the specific number (medium decorative pattern 8C) and the specific image CHA change while maintaining their mutual positional relationship. Specifically, the specific number (medium decorative pattern 8C) and the specific image CHA move toward the upper left of the display screen 7a while being oriented along the vertical direction (straight). Then, as shown in FIG. 63(J), the specific number (medium decorative pattern 8C) and the specific image CHA move downward while maintaining their orientation along the vertical direction, and stop displaying at that position. be done. As a result, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are fixed and displayed.

[Design direction change production C]
FIG. 64 is a diagram for explaining the symbol direction change effect C. In the symbol direction change production C, first, as shown in FIG. 64(A), the left decorative symbol 8L among the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed in a variable manner on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. . At this time, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are not displayed. In other words, the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are changing, but are not in a visible state. The left decorative pattern 8L enters the frame from near the upper left corner of the display screen 7a and moves diagonally downward to the right. At this time, each number constituting the left decorative pattern 8L moves with the direction (posture) of the number tilted to the left. That is, each number is tilted along the direction of movement, and the bottom of each number is displayed facing the direction of travel (lower right direction). The speed of the variable display gradually slows down, and a specific number (here, "2") temporarily stops at a first position near the bottom center of the display screen 7a. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are also referred to as a first decorative pattern, a second decorative pattern, and a third decorative pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(B), a specific image CHA is displayed below this specific number (left decorative pattern 8L). The specific image CHA represents a specific object. Here, the specific image CHA represents a smiley face. Note that the specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose meaning is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist. The specific image CHA covers a part of the lower part of the specific number (left decorative pattern 8L), making a part of the specific number difficult to see. This specific image CHA also has a tilted direction (posture) similarly to the specific number (left decorative pattern 8L). The specific image CHA and the specific number (left decorative pattern 8L) have the same orientation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(C), an effect is performed in which a specific number (left decorative pattern 8L) and a specific image CHA bounce. Thereby, the display position and direction of the specific number (left decorative pattern 8L) and specific image CHA change while maintaining their mutual positional relationship. Specifically, the specific number (the left decorative pattern 8L) and the specific image CHA move to a second position in the upper left direction of the display screen 7a, and are oriented along the vertical direction (straight). The second position is located above the first position in the vertical direction. Then, as shown in FIG. 64(D), the specific number (left decorative pattern 8L) and specific image CHA move downward while maintaining their orientation along the vertical direction, and reach the third position. Stop display. The third position is located vertically lower than the second position.

In parallel with the stop display, the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed in a variable manner. At this time, the medium decorative pattern 8C is not displayed. In other words, although the medium decorative pattern 8C is changing, it is not in a visible state. The right decorative pattern 8R enters the frame from near the upper center of the display screen 7a and moves diagonally downward to the right. That is, it is displayed variably in the same direction as the left decorative pattern 8L. At this time, each number constituting the right decorative pattern 8R moves with the direction (posture) of the number tilted to the left. That is, the left decorative pattern 8L moves in a state of inclination to the same extent as the inclination of the numbers when changing. Each number is tilted along the direction of movement, and the bottom of each number is displayed facing the direction of travel (lower right direction). The speed of the variable display gradually slows down and temporarily stops when a specific number (here, "2") is located near the lower right of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(E), a specific image CHA is displayed below this specific number (right decorative pattern 8R). The specific image CHA represents a specific object. Here, the specific image CHA is the same as that displayed on the left decorative pattern 8L, but may be an image with different content. The specific image CHA covers a part of the lower part of the specific number (right decorative pattern 8R), making a part of the specific number difficult to see. This specific image CHA is also tilted in direction like the specific numbers.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64(F), an effect is performed in which a specific number (right decorative pattern 8R) and a specific image CHA bounce. As a result, the display position and orientation of the specific number (right decorative pattern 8R) and specific image CHA change while maintaining their mutual positional relationship. Specifically, the specific number (the right decorative pattern 8R) and the specific image CHA move toward the upper left of the display screen 7a while being oriented along the vertical direction (straight). Then, as shown in FIG. 64(G), the specific number (right decorative pattern 8R) and specific image CHA move downward while maintaining their orientation along the vertical direction. Then, as shown in FIG. 64(H), the display is stopped at that position. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 64(I), the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed in a variable manner while the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed. In other words, the fluctuation of the medium decorative pattern 8C becomes visible. The medium decorative pattern 8C enters the frame from near the upper center of the display screen 7a and moves downward in the vertical direction. That is, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a varying direction different from that of the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R. At this time, each number constituting the medium decorative pattern 8C moves with the direction (posture) of the number along the vertical direction (straight state). In other words, each number is oriented along the direction of movement, and the bottom of each number is displayed facing the direction of travel (downward). The speed of the variable display gradually slows down and temporarily stops when a specific number (here, "2") is located near the center of the display screen 7a. Next, as shown in FIG. 64(J), the specific image CHA is not displayed above this specific number (medium decorative pattern 8C) but is displayed in a stopped state. As a result, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are fixed and displayed.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the symbol direction change effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 62(A) and 62(B), the left decorative pattern is oriented along the first direction and the left decorative pattern is After the first effect, the left decorative pattern is displayed in a second direction (direction) that is different from the first direction, as shown in FIGS. For example, a second effect that is stopped and displayed in an orientation along the vertical direction) can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 63 and 64.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 62(A), in the second performance, the left decorative pattern reaches the first position in the direction along the first direction (for example, diagonally right direction). After that, as shown in FIG. 62(C), while moving toward a second position located vertically above the first position, the orientation is along the second direction (e.g., vertical direction). After reaching the second position, the third position is located vertically lower than the second position while maintaining the orientation along the second direction, as shown in FIG. move towards a position. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 63 and 64.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 62(B) and (C), in the second performance, the left decorative pattern moves toward the second position after reaching the first position. At this time, a part of the specific image CHA becomes difficult to see. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 63 and 64.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 63(D), after the second performance, the right decorative pattern is newly moved from the undisplayed state to the first direction (for example, diagonally to the right). As shown in FIG. 63 (G), after the third effect, the right decorative pattern is displayed in a direction along the second direction. A fourth effect that is stopped and displayed in the opposite direction can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 64(I), after the fourth effect, the inner decorative pattern is oriented in a third direction (e.g., vertical direction) different from the first direction. A fifth effect that is displayed variably in a direction along the third direction can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 62, the first direction is a direction oblique to the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the second direction is a vertical direction. The direction is along the According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.

[Modified example]
Below, a modification of the symbol direction change effect will be shown.
[Modification 1]
Although the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are made of specific numbers, they may not be numbers. It may be a character or graphic symbol. Although it is assumed that only one set of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed on the display screen 7a, a plurality of sets of decorative patterns may be displayed.

[Modification 2]
In FIG. 62, after the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed in a fluctuating manner, it bounces in a direction along the vertical direction, but if it is in a direction different from the fluctuating direction, it may be in a direction other than the vertical direction. good. For example, after bouncing, the left decorative pattern 8L may be tilted to the left and displayed stationary, or may be tilted sideways and displayed stationary. Furthermore, after the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed in a variable manner, the left decorative pattern 8L may change its direction without bouncing and be displayed in a stopped state.

[Modification 3]
In the symbol direction change productions A, B, and C, the right decorative symbol may be visible to change (variation display is displayed) before the left decorative symbol stops, or after the left decorative symbol stops, The fluctuation may be visible (a fluctuation display may be displayed). The same applies to the interior decoration design.

[Modification 4]
The contents of the symbol direction change effects A, B, and C may be combined as appropriate. For example, in the symbol direction change effects A and B, the display position of the specific image CHA may be set as in the symbol direction change effect C. Further, for example, in the pattern direction change effects A and B, the fluctuation direction and stopping mode of the medium decorative pattern may be made as in the pattern direction change effect C.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect A2-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a first decorative pattern,
a first effect in which the first decorative pattern is displayed oscillatingly in a direction along the first direction in a direction along the first direction;
After the first performance, a second performance in which the first decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in a direction along a second direction different from the first direction;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A2-1,
In the second performance, after the first decorative pattern reaches a first position along the first direction, a second decorative pattern is placed on one side of the first position in the vertical direction. While moving toward the position, the orientation becomes along the second direction, and after reaching the second position, the orientation is more vertical than the second position while maintaining the orientation along the second direction. moving towards a third position located on the other side of the direction;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A2-1 or aspect A2-2,
One of the plurality of types of images is a specific image,
In the second effect, when the first decorative pattern moves toward the second position after reaching the first position, a part of the first decorative pattern becomes difficult to see due to the specific image.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A2-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A2-1 to A2-3,
One of the plurality of types of images is a second decorative pattern that together with the first decorative pattern constitutes a set of decorative patterns that can notify whether or not it is a hit;
After the second performance, a third display in which the second decorative pattern is displayed variably in a direction along the first direction from an undisplayed state to a new direction along the first direction. and the performance of
after the third performance, a fourth performance in which the second decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in an orientation along the second direction;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A2-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect A2-4,
One of the plurality of types of images is a third decorative pattern that together with the first decorative pattern constitutes a set of decorative patterns that can notify whether or not it is a hit;
After the fourth performance, a fifth performance in which the third decorative pattern is variably displayed in a direction along the third direction in a direction along a third direction different from the first direction. executable,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A2-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A2-1 to A2-5,
The first direction is a direction oblique to the display means,
The second direction is a direction along the vertical direction.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The accessory symbol cooperation effects A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 65 to 67. This accessory symbol collaboration performance may be executed during the fluctuating performance of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable production start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the role model cooperation production, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the display device 7. In addition, the lamp control board 107 analyzes the variable performance start command received from the sub-control board 90, and when the instruction to execute the accessory symbol cooperation performance is included, the first movable accessory 14 or the second movable character The object 15 is driven.

[Yakuza pattern collaboration production A]
FIG. 65 is a diagram for explaining the accessory symbol cooperation production A. The accessory symbol collaboration performance A is one of the variation pattern performances including a pseudo-continuation performance, and the sequences shown in FIGS. 65(A) to (J) are executed in one variation. In the accessory symbol cooperation performance A, first, as shown in FIG. 65(A), decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a fluctuating manner in which they move vertically at high speed. The decorative symbols include a left decorative symbol 8L, a middle decorative symbol 8C, and a right decorative symbol 8R, and are a set of symbols that can notify whether or not it is a hit based on the combination of these stop symbols. A white spherical pending icon 9C is displayed at the pending display position (above the rectangular image) below the center of the display screen 7a. Four hold icons 9A are displayed in the first hold display area on the left side of the hold display position.

After that, as shown in FIG. 65(B), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a stopped state (including a temporary stopped display), and then the pseudo-series start suggestion effect shown in FIG. 65(C) is executed. In the pseudo-association start suggestion performance, the second movable accessory 15 moves (advances) downward from the retracted position above the image display device 7 (FIG. 1) toward the center of the display screen 7a to cover a part of the display screen 7a. It stops at the forward advancing position covering the area. As the second movable accessory 15 moves to the advanced position, the shapes of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed on the display screen 7a change (deform). Here, the shapes of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R gradually collapse in conjunction with the downward movement of the second movable accessory 15. That is, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are crushed and deformed by the second movable accessory 15. The player understands that the statically displayed decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are crushed and distorted by the second movable accessory 15, so the statically displayed symbols are not finalized and the fluctuations will be executed again. , that is, it can be noticed that a pseudo-association is executed. Thereby, it is possible to improve interest.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65(D), an image corresponding to the characters "OARO" in the decorative part of the second movable accessory 15 is displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, in a state where the second movable accessory 15 is stationary at the advanced position, a plurality of characters (that is, "OARO") that are the same as the decoration part of the second movable accessory 15 are displayed. It should be noted that the image displayed on the display screen 7a only needs to be an image that is related to the specific object (characters, figures, symbols, etc.) represented on the decorative part of the second movable accessory 15, and it may be completely the same. It doesn't have to be a color or shape. At this time, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are not displayed. Here, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are not displayed, and an image with the same content as the decorative part of the second movable accessory 15 is displayed on the display screen 7a, so that the player is informed that this is a special performance. It can make an impression and improve interest.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65(E), variable display is started again. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 65(F), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a stopped state (including a temporary stopped display), and then the pseudo-coupling continuation suggestion effect shown in FIG. 65(G) is executed. The pseudo-sequence continuation suggestion performance is similar to the above-mentioned pseudo-sequence start suggestion performance. That is, the second movable accessory 15 moves to the advanced position. With this movement to the advancing position, the shapes of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed on the display screen 7a change (deform). Here, the shapes of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R gradually collapse in conjunction with the downward movement of the second movable accessory 15. That is, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are crushed and deformed by the second movable accessory 15. Note that the mode of transformation may be different from the pseudo-sequence start suggestion performance.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65(H), an image corresponding to the characters "OARO" in the decorative part of the second movable accessory 15 is displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, in a state where the second movable accessory 15 is stationary at the advanced position, a plurality of characters (that is, "OARO") that are the same as the decoration part of the second movable accessory 15 are displayed. It should be noted that the image displayed on the display screen 7a only needs to be an image that is related to the specific object (characters, figures, symbols, etc.) represented on the decorative part of the second movable accessory 15, and it may be completely the same. It doesn't have to be a color or shape. At this time, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are not displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65(I), variable display is started again. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 65(J), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and displayed. Here, the game is stopped and displayed in the form of a jackpot.

[Yakuza pattern collaboration production B]
FIG. 66 is a diagram for explaining the accessory symbol cooperation production B. Role symbol cooperation production B is one of the variation pattern productions including pseudo-coupling production, and Figures 66 (A) to (B) are the previous one variation, and Figures 66 (C) to (J) are the previous one variation. This is the next variation that includes a pseudo-connection performance. First, as shown in FIG. 66(A), two sets of decorative patterns are displayed in a variable manner on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R and the second decorative symbols 2l, 8c, and 8r are displayed in a fluctuating manner in which they move vertically at high speed. The first decorative pattern includes a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R, and is a set of symbols that can notify whether or not it is a hit based on the combination of these stop patterns. The second decorative pattern includes a left decorative pattern 8l, a middle decorative pattern 8c, and a right decorative pattern 8r, and is a set of symbols that can notify whether or not it is a hit based on the combination of these stop patterns. A white spherical pending icon 9C is displayed at the pending display position (above the rectangular image) below the center of the display screen 7a.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 66(B), the first decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R and the second decorative patterns 2l, 8c, and 8r are simultaneously stopped and displayed (including a confirmed stop display). Moreover, at this time, at the same time, an effect is executed in which the pending icon 9C disappears (disappears). Next, as shown in FIG. 66(C), the hold icon 9A that was at the first hold display position moves toward the hold display position. At this time, of the two decorative patterns (the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern), the second decorative patterns 2l, 8c, and 8r start variable display. The first decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R maintain a stop display. That is, the second decorative pattern starts to be displayed in a variable manner before the pending icon 9A located at the first pending display position starts moving and reaches the corresponding pending display position.

Next, the pseudo-coupling start suggestion effect shown in FIG. 66(D) is executed. In the pseudo consecutive start suggestion performance, first, in a state where the second decorative patterns 2l, 8c, and 8r continue to display fluctuations, the first decoration continues to stop at the number "123" that was displayed as a confirmed stop last time. The displays of symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R temporarily disappear, and instead, a pseudo-sequence start suggestion display of "Let's go!!!" is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 66(E), the second movable accessory 15 moves (advances) downward from the retracted position above the image display device 7 (FIG. 1) toward the center of the display screen 7a and displays the image. It stops at a forward advancing position that covers a part of the screen 7a. After the pseudo series start suggestion display, the first decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed on the display screen 7a again change their shapes (deformation) as the second movable accessory 15 moves to the advanced position. do. Here, the shapes of the first decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R gradually collapse in conjunction with the downward movement of the second movable accessory 15. That is, the first decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are crushed and deformed by the second movable accessory 15. The player understands that since the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed are crushed and distorted by the second movable accessory 15, the stopped and displayed symbols are not finalized and the fluctuations are executed again. In other words, you can notice that a pseudo-association is being executed. Thereby, it is possible to improve interest.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(F), an image corresponding to the characters "OARO" in the decorative part of the second movable accessory 15 is displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, in a state where the second movable accessory 15 is stationary at the advanced position, a plurality of characters (that is, "OARO") that are the same as the decoration part of the second movable accessory 15 are displayed. Note that the image displayed on the display screen 7a may be an image that is related to the specific object (characters, figures, symbols, etc.) represented on the decoration part of the second movable accessory 15, and may be completely the same. It doesn't have to be a color or shape. At this time, the first decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are not displayed, while the second decorative patterns 2l, 8c, and 8r continue to be displayed in a variable manner. Here, the first decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are not displayed, and an image with the same content as the decorative part of the second movable accessory 15 is displayed on the display screen 7a, which is a special effect for the player. It is possible to give an impression that this is true, and to improve interest.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66(G), while the second decorative symbols 2l, 8c, and 8r continue to be displayed in a variable manner, the variable display of the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is started. As a result, both the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R and the second decorative symbols 2l, 8c, and 8r are displayed in a variable manner. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 66(H), while the second decorative patterns 2l, 8c, and 8r continue to display fluctuations, the first decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R display a stop display (including a temporary stop display). ), and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 66(I), the first decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start varying display again. In other words, a pseudo-coupled effect is executed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 66(J), both the first decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R and the second decorative patterns 2l, 8c, and 8r are fixed and displayed. Here, the game is stopped and displayed in the form of a jackpot.

[Accessory pattern collaboration production C]
FIG. 67 is a diagram for explaining the accessory symbol cooperation production C. Role symbol cooperation production C is one of the variation pattern productions including pseudo-coupled production, and Figures 67(A) to (B) are the previous one variation, and Figures 67(C) to (J) are the previous one variation. This is the next variation that includes a pseudo-connection performance. First, as shown in FIG. 67(A), two sets of decorative patterns are displayed in a variable manner on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R and the second decorative symbols 2l, 8c, and 8r are displayed in a fluctuating manner in which they move vertically at high speed. The first decorative pattern includes a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R, and is a set of symbols that can notify whether or not it is a hit based on the combination of these stop patterns. The second decorative pattern includes a left decorative pattern 8l, a middle decorative pattern 8c, and a right decorative pattern 8r, and is a set of symbols that can notify whether or not it is a hit based on the combination of these stop patterns. A white spherical pending icon 9C is displayed at the pending display position (above the rectangular image) below the center of the display screen 7a.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 67(B), the first decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R and the second decorative patterns 2l, 8c, and 8r are simultaneously stopped and displayed (including a confirmed stop display). Moreover, at this time, at the same time, an effect is executed in which the pending icon 9C disappears (disappears). Next, as shown in FIG. 67(C), the hold icon 9A that was at the first hold display position moves toward the hold display position. At this time, of the two decorative patterns (the first decorative pattern and the second decorative pattern), the second decorative patterns 2l, 8c, and 8r start variable display. The first decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R maintain a stop display. That is, the second decorative pattern starts to be displayed in a variable manner before the pending icon 9A located at the first pending display position starts moving and reaches the corresponding pending display position.

Next, the pseudo-coupling start suggestion effect shown in FIG. 67(D) is executed. In the pseudo consecutive start suggestion performance, first, in a state where the second decorative patterns 2l, 8c, and 8r continue to display fluctuations, the first decoration continues to stop at the number "123" that was displayed as a confirmed stop last time. The displays of symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R temporarily disappear, and instead, a pseudo-sequence start suggestion display of "Let's go!!!" is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 67(E), the second movable accessory 15 moves (advances) downward from the retracted position above the image display device 7 (FIG. 1) toward the center of the display screen 7a and displays the image. It covers a part of the screen 7a and performs a rotation operation at that position. As a result, the shapes of the first decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R displayed on the display screen 7a again after the pseudo-sequence start suggestion display change as the second movable accessory 15 moves downward and rotates. (transform. Here, as the second movable accessory 15 moves downward, the first decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R crack, and their shapes gradually collapse. That is, the first decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are crushed by the second movable accessory 15 and deformed so as to be distorted and cracked. The player understands that the first decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed are crushed by the second movable accessory 15, distorted, and cracked. You can notice that it is executed, that is, that the pseudo-association is executed. Thereby, it is possible to improve interest.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(F), an image corresponding to the characters "OARO" in the decorative part of the second movable accessory 15 is displayed on the display screen 7a. Here, when the second movable accessory 15 has returned to the retracted position, the same characters as the decoration part of the second movable accessory 15 (i.e., "OARO") are displayed in large numbers near the center of the display screen 7a. . It should be noted that the image displayed on the display screen 7a only needs to be an image that is related to the specific object (characters, figures, symbols, etc.) represented on the decorative part of the second movable accessory 15, and it may be completely the same. It doesn't have to be a color or shape. At this time, both the first decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R and the second decorative patterns 2l, 8c, and 8r are not displayed. Here, both the first decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R and the second decorative patterns 2l, 8c, and 8r are not displayed, and an image with the same content as the decorative part of the second movable accessory 15 is displayed on the display screen 7a. By doing so, it is possible to give the impression to the player that the performance is special, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

Next, as shown in FIG. 67(G), the variable display of both the first decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the second decorative patterns 2l, 8c, 8r is started again. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 67(H), while the second decorative patterns 2l, 8c, and 8r continue to display fluctuations, the first decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R display a stop display (including a temporary stop display). ), and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 67(I), the first decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start varying display again. In other words, a pseudo-coupled effect is executed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 67(J), both the first decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R and the second decorative patterns 2l, 8c, and 8r are displayed as fixed and stopped. Here, the game is stopped and displayed in the form of a jackpot.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the role model cooperation production is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 65(F), the first effect in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed, and the first effect as shown in FIG. 65(G), After the first performance, a second performance in which the shapes of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R change as the second movable accessory 15 moves to an advanced position covering a part of the display screen 7a. can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 66 and 67.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 65(G), in the second performance, the shapes of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are distorted as the second movable accessory 15 moves. . According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 66 and 67.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 65(G), the second movable accessory 15 has a decorative part labeled "OARO", and as shown in FIG. As shown, after the second performance, a third performance in which "OARO" is displayed on the display screen 7a can be performed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 66 and 67.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 66(C) to (J) and FIGS. 67(C) to (J), the first performance and the second performance are performed during one fluctuation. In the first performance, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the manner in which they were stopped and displayed after the variation immediately before the variation in which the first performance is executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 66(G) to (J) and FIGS. 67(G) to (J), a pseudo continuous effect is executed after the third effect. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 66(C) and 67(C), one of the plurality of types of images is a second image different from the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. It is a decorative pattern, and in the first performance, the second decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.

[Modified example]
Below, a modified example of the accessory symbol cooperation production is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the accessory symbol cooperation performance A, it is assumed that FIGS. 65(A) to 65(J) are executed in one variation. However, FIGS. 65(A) to (B) and FIGS. 65(C) to (J) may have different variations. In addition, for accessory symbol collaboration effects B and C, there is a 1 variation in Figures 66 (A) to (B) and Figures 67 (A) to (B), and Figures 66 (C) to (J), and Figure 67 It is assumed that (C) to (J) are the following one variation. However, FIGS. 66(A) to (J) and FIGS. 67(A) to (J) may be executed with one variation.

[Modification 2]
The modes of deformation of decorative patterns illustrated in the accessory pattern cooperation productions A to C are just examples, and the present invention is not limited to these modes. That is, the deformation of the decorative pattern when the second movable accessory 15 advances is not limited to a distorted manner. For example, the decorative pattern may collapse into pieces, or may have the same shape but be smaller in size.

[Modification 3]
In the accessory symbol cooperation performance A, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are specified as specific numbers, but they may not be numbers. It may also be a text or graphic symbol. Although it is assumed that only one set of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed on the display screen 7a, a plurality of sets of decorative patterns may be displayed. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may temporarily disappear from being displayed while changing, or may not be continuously displayed. Here, the fluctuating display refers to a state in which a fluctuating aspect is visibly displayed.

[Modification 4]
The contents of the accessory symbol cooperation effects A to C may be combined as appropriate. For example, in FIG. 66(E) of the accessory symbol cooperation performance B, the presentation of FIG. 67(E) of the accessory symbol cooperation performance C may be performed. Furthermore, for example, in the pseudo-continuous presentation of FIGS. 66(G) to (J) of the accessory symbol cooperative presentation B, the pseudo-continuous presentation of the accessory pattern cooperative presentation A may be executed.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect A3-1]
a display means capable of displaying multiple types of images;
A gaming machine comprising a movable accessory movable in front of the display means,
One of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern,
a first effect in which the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed;
After the first performance, a second performance in which the shape of the decorative pattern changes as the movable accessory moves to the advanced position covering a part of the display means can be executed. ,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A3-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A3-1,
The gaming machine is characterized in that in the second performance, the shape of the decorative pattern is distorted as the movable accessory moves.
◇[Aspect A3-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A3-1 or aspect A3-2,
The movable accessory has a decorative part representing a specific object,
After the second performance, a third performance can be executed in which the specific target is displayed on the display means;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A3-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect A3-3,
After the third performance, a pseudo continuous performance is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A3-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A3-1 to A3-4,
The first performance and the second performance are executed during one fluctuation,
In the first performance, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in the manner in which it was stopped and displayed after the variation immediately before the variation in which the first production is executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A3-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A3-1 to A3-5,
One of the plurality of types of images is a second decorative pattern different from the decorative pattern,
In the first performance, the second decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Specific image symbol cooperation effects A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 68 to 70. This specific image pattern cooperation production can be executed during the variation production of decorative patterns. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable production start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a specific image symbol cooperation production, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the display device 7. In addition, when the lamp control board 107 analyzes the variable performance start command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute a specific image symbol cooperation performance, the first movable accessory 14 or the second movable character The object 15 is driven.

[Specific image design cooperation production A]
FIG. 68 is a diagram for explaining specific image symbol cooperation production A. In the specific image pattern cooperation effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 68(A), decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a fluctuating manner in which they move vertically at high speed. The decorative symbols include symbol images of a left decorative symbol 8L, a middle decorative symbol 8C, and a right decorative symbol 8R, and are a set of symbols that can notify whether or not it is a hit based on the combination of these stop symbols. A white spherical pending icon 9C is displayed at the pending display position (above the rectangular image) below the center of the display screen 7a. Four hold icons 9A are displayed in the first hold display area on the left side of the hold display position.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 68(B), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed (including a temporary stop display) at the off-line "123". The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed side by side along the horizontal direction. Here, "lined up horizontally" includes not only lines lined up strictly horizontally but also lines lined up generally horizontally. That is, all the items that a person skilled in the art can recognize as being lined up in the horizontal direction of the display screen 7a are included in the items lined up in the horizontal direction.

Thereafter, the pseudo-coupling start suggestion effect shown in FIG. 68(C) is executed. In the pseudo sequence start suggestion effect, the specific image CHA is newly displayed from above the display screen 7a by frame-in, and moves downward on the display screen 7a. The specific image CHA represents a specific object. Here, the specific image CHA represents a smiley face. Note that the specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose meaning is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 68(D), the specific image CHA moves to a position overlapping the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed, and then moves back and forth in the horizontal direction. Here, "moving back and forth along the horizontal direction" includes not only moving strictly horizontally but also moving roughly horizontally. That is, all objects that a person skilled in the art can recognize as moving in the horizontal direction of the display screen 7a are included in objects moving in the horizontal direction. Since the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R that are being stopped and displayed are lined up along the horizontal direction, the specific image CHA moves back and forth along the arrangement direction of the decorative patterns. At this time, the specific image CHA is displayed on the front side of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. Here, when an image is "displayed in front" of another image, it is displayed as if it is located on the near side (front side) when two images are displayed overlapping each other. More specifically, it refers to a state in which two images are displayed without being missing in the overlapping area. On the other hand, when two images are displayed overlapping each other, the image appears to be located at the back (rear side), and the area where the two images overlap is partially displayed. , the image is said to be "displayed behind" other images.

By reciprocating in the horizontal direction, the specific image CHA overlaps both the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R, as shown in FIG. 68(D), and is displayed on the front side thereof. As shown in (E), an effect is performed that overlaps both the middle decorative pattern 8C and the left decorative pattern 8L and repeats the manner in which they are displayed on the front side. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 68(F), the specific image CHA is displayed on the back side of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed, and moves back and forth in the horizontal direction on these back sides. By reciprocating the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the back side, as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 68(G), an effect is performed in which the pattern overlaps both the middle decorative pattern 8C and the left decorative pattern 8L and is displayed on the back side thereof.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68(H), a fade-out effect is performed. Specifically, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R and the specific image CHA are gradually faded in a state where the specific image CHA is located on the back side of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, 8R. It becomes difficult to see (fade out). As a result, it becomes increasingly difficult for the player to see the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed on the wrong side, so this does not mean that the stopped and displayed symbols are fixed, but the variations are executed again. In other words, it can be noticed that a pseudo-association is executed. Thereby, it is possible to improve interest.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68(I), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start variable display again. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 68(J), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and displayed. Here, the game is stopped and displayed in the form of a jackpot.

[Specific image design cooperation production B]
FIG. 69 is a diagram for explaining specific image design cooperation effect B. In the specific image pattern cooperation production B, first, as shown in FIG. 69(A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R after the fluctuating display are displayed as "789", which is an outlier. A stop display (including a temporary stop display) is displayed. The decorative symbols include symbol images of a left decorative symbol 8L, a middle decorative symbol 8C, and a right decorative symbol 8R, and are a set of symbols that can notify whether or not it is a hit based on the combination of these stop symbols. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed side by side along the horizontal direction. Here, "lined up horizontally" includes not only lines lined up strictly horizontally but also lines lined up generally horizontally. That is, all the items that a person skilled in the art can recognize as being lined up in the horizontal direction of the display screen 7a are included in the items lined up in the horizontal direction. A white spherical pending icon 9C is displayed at the pending display position (above the rectangular image) below the center of the display screen 7a. Four hold icons 9A are displayed in the first hold display area on the left side of the hold display position.

Thereafter, pseudo-association suggestion effects shown in FIGS. 69(B) and 69(C) are executed. In the pseudo consecutive start suggestion performance, as shown in FIG. 68(C) of specific image symbol cooperation performance A, the specific image CHA is newly displayed by frame-in from the top of the display screen 7a, and moves downward on the display screen 7a. do. The specific image CHA represents a specific object. Here, the specific image CHA represents a smiley face. Note that the specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose meaning is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 69(B), the specific image CHA moves to a position overlapping the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed, and then moves back and forth along the horizontal direction. Here, "moving back and forth along the horizontal direction" includes not only moving strictly horizontally but also moving generally horizontally. That is, all objects that a person skilled in the art can recognize as moving in the horizontal direction of the display screen 7a are included in objects moving in the horizontal direction. Since the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R that are being stopped and displayed are lined up along the horizontal direction, the specific image CHA moves back and forth along the arrangement direction of the decorative patterns. At this time, the specific image CHA is displayed on the front side of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. Here, when an image is "displayed in front" of another image, it is displayed as if it is located on the near side (front side) when two images are displayed overlapping each other. More specifically, it refers to a state in which two images are displayed without being missing in the overlapping area. On the other hand, when two images are displayed overlapping each other, the image appears to be located at the back (rear side), and the area where the two images overlap is partially displayed. , the image is said to be "displayed behind" other images.

By reciprocating in the horizontal direction, the specific image CHA overlaps both the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R, as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 68(E) of symbol cooperation performance A, a performance is performed in which the mode overlaps both the middle decorative pattern 8C and the left decorative pattern 8L and is displayed on the front side thereof. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 69(C), the specific image CHA is displayed on the back side of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed, and moves back and forth in the horizontal direction on these back sides. By reciprocating the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the back side, as shown in FIG. 69(C), the medium decorative pattern 8C and the left decorative pattern 8L are overlapped and displayed on the back side thereof; As shown in FIG. 68(F) of the specific image design cooperation performance A, a performance is performed in which the mode overlaps with both the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R and is displayed on the back side thereof.

Next, as shown in FIG. 68(H) of specific image symbol cooperation effect A, a fade-out effect is performed. Specifically, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R and the specific image CHA are gradually faded so that the specific image CHA is located on the back side of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the images gradually become lighter. It becomes difficult to see (fade out). As a result, it becomes increasingly difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed as outliers, so this does not mean that the stopped and displayed symbols are fixed, but the variations are executed again. In other words, it can be noticed that a pseudo-association is executed. Thereby, it is possible to improve interest.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69(D), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start changing display again. Specifically, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a fluctuating manner in which they move vertically at high speed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 69(E), the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and displayed. Here, the game is stopped and displayed in the form of a jackpot.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 69(F), a specific image CHA and a jackpot confirmation suggestion image CHB are displayed. The jackpot confirmation suggestion image CHB is an image that suggests to the player that a jackpot has been confirmed, and here the words "You did it!" are displayed. Here, two jackpot confirmed suggestion images CHB are displayed. Both the specific image CHA and the jackpot confirmed suggestion image CHB are newly displayed by frame-in from the top of the display screen 7a, and move downward on the display screen 7a. The specific image CHA and the jackpot confirmed suggestion image CHB move to positions overlapping the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed on the jackpot. The specific image CHA and the jackpot confirmation suggestion image CHB are both displayed on the front side of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the jackpot confirmation suggestion image CHB is displayed on the front side of the specific image CHA. That is, the specific image CHA is displayed in front of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and furthermore, the jackpot confirmation suggestion image CHB is displayed in front of the specific image CHA. In this way, by overlapping a plurality of images, it is possible to create a three-dimensional effect in the depth direction, and it is possible to improve the interest.

After that, as shown in FIG. 69(G), the jackpot confirmed suggestion image CHB disappears from the display screen 7a, and the specific image CHA is moved along the horizontal direction while overlapping the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed. Move back and forth. Since the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R that are being stopped and displayed are lined up along the horizontal direction, the specific image CHA moves back and forth along the arrangement direction of the decorative patterns. At this time, the specific image CHA is continuously displayed on the front side of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. By reciprocating in the horizontal direction, the specific image CHA overlaps both the middle decorative pattern 8C and the left decorative pattern 8L, as shown in FIG. 69(G), and is displayed on the front side thereof. As shown in (B), an effect is performed that overlaps both the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R and repeats the manner in which they are displayed on the front side. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 69(H), the specific image CHA is displayed on the back side of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed, and moves back and forth in the horizontal direction on these back sides. By reciprocating the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the back side, as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 69(C), an effect is performed that overlaps both the middle decorative pattern 8C and the left decorative pattern 8L and repeats the manner in which they are displayed on the back side.

Next, as shown in FIG. 69(I) of specific image symbol cooperation effect A, a fade-out effect is performed. Specifically, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R and the specific image CHA are gradually faded so that the specific image CHA is located on the back side of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the images gradually become lighter. It becomes difficult to see (fade out). As a result, the player can notice that the jackpot game will start after this because the stop-displayed decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R of the jackpot will gradually become difficult to see. Thereby, it is possible to improve interest. After that, as shown in FIG. 69(J), the right-handed game image MGU is displayed, and then the jackpot game is executed.

[Specific image design cooperation production C]
FIG. 70 is a diagram for explaining the specific image design cooperation effect C. In the specific image pattern cooperation production C, first, as shown in FIG. 70(A), decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a fluctuating manner in which they move vertically at high speed. The decorative symbols include symbol images of a left decorative symbol 8L, a middle decorative symbol 8C, and a right decorative symbol 8R, and are a set of symbols that can notify whether or not it is a hit based on the combination of these stop symbols. A white spherical pending icon 9C is displayed at the pending display position (above the rectangular image) below the center of the display screen 7a. Four hold icons 9A are displayed in the first hold display area on the left side of the hold display position. A specific image CHA is displayed overlapping the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that are displayed in a variable manner. The specific image CHA is newly displayed by frame-in from above the display screen 7a, and moves to a position overlapping the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R on the display screen 7a. The specific image CHA is displayed on the front side of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that are displayed in a variable manner. The specific image CHA represents a specific object. Here, the specific image CHA represents a smiley face. Note that the specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose meaning is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 70(B), the specific image CHA moves back and forth in the horizontal direction while overlapping the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that are displayed in a variable manner. Here, "moving back and forth along the horizontal direction" includes not only moving strictly horizontally but also moving roughly horizontally. That is, all objects that a person skilled in the art can recognize as moving in the horizontal direction of the display screen 7a are included in objects moving in the horizontal direction. At this time, the moving specific image CHA is displayed on the front side of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. Here, when an image is "displayed in front" of another image, it is displayed as if it is located on the near side (front side) when two images are displayed overlapping each other. More specifically, it refers to a state in which two images are displayed without being missing in the overlapping area. On the other hand, when two images are displayed overlapping each other, the image appears to be located at the back (rear side), and the area where the two images overlap is partially displayed. , the image is said to be "displayed behind" other images.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70(C), the fluctuation speed of the left decorative pattern 8L among the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R slows down, and it begins to fluctuate (move) in the vertical direction while the numbers are visible. . Since the specific image CHA continues to move back and forth in the horizontal direction, it overlaps with a plurality of moving number images forming the left decorative pattern 8L. Also at this time, the specific image CHA is displayed on the front side of the number image forming the left decorative pattern 8L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70(D), the fluctuation speed of the right decorative pattern 8R among the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R slows down, and it begins to fluctuate (move) in the vertical direction with the numbers visible. . On the other hand, the variation speed of the left decorative pattern 8L is further reduced, and the display is stopped at a specific number (here, "1"). Since the specific image CHA continues to move back and forth in the horizontal direction, it overlaps with a plurality of moving number images forming the right decorative pattern 8R. It also overlaps with the left decorative pattern 8L that is being displayed in a stopped state. Also at this time, the specific image CHA is displayed on the front side of the number image forming the right decorative pattern 8R. Moreover, it is displayed on the front side of the left decorative pattern 8L during stop display.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70(E), the fluctuation speed of the medium decorative pattern 8C among the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R slows down, and it begins to fluctuate (move) in the vertical direction while the numbers are visible. . On the other hand, the variation speed of the right decorative pattern 8R is further reduced, and the display is stopped at a specific number (here, "7"). Since the specific image CHA continues to move back and forth in the horizontal direction, it overlaps with a plurality of moving number images forming the medium decorative pattern 8C. It also overlaps with the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R which are being stopped and displayed. Also at this time, the specific image CHA is displayed on the front side of the number image forming the middle decorative pattern 8C. Moreover, it is displayed on the front side of each of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R which are being displayed in a stopped state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70(F), after the medium decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed at the off-center mark "167", a change effect in which the shape of the specific image CHA changes is executed. Here, as one of the change effects, the specific image CHA is made larger, but the mode of change is not limited to this. For example, the content of the specific image CHA may change to a different content. Even during the change production, the specific image CHA continues to move back and forth in front of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R that are displayed in a stopped state. This change performance can make the player expect that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that were stopped and displayed on a miss will change again, and can improve the player's interest.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70(G), a plurality effect is executed in which a plurality of specific images CHA are displayed. Here, as one of the pluralization effects, an effect is performed in which one new specific image CHA is additionally displayed, but the mode of pluralization is not limited to this. For example, two or more specific images CHA may be additionally displayed. Even during the pluralization effect, the specific image CHA before being added continues to move back and forth in front of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are displayed in a stopped state. The newly added specific image CHA is moving back and forth on the back side of the stationary displayed decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. This multiplication effect can further heighten the expectation that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, which were stopped and displayed on a miss, will change again, thereby increasing the interest.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 70(H), an effect is performed in which the two specific images CHA are out of frame. Here, one of the two specific images CHA moves upward, the other moves downward, and goes out of frame at the same time. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 70(I), a pseudo-coupling suggestion image NKM is displayed, which suggests that the decorative pattern will start changing again (the start of a pseudo-coupling). Here, in the pseudo-coupling suggestion image NKM, characters "2nd time!!" indicating the number of pseudo-couplings are displayed. At this time, the display of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R disappears. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 70(J), when the pseudo-coupled suggestion image NKM disappears, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are again displayed in a variable manner.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of specific image design cooperation production is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. As shown in 68(F) to (G), after the first effect, a second effect can be executed in which the specific image CHA is displayed on the back side of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. . According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 68(D) to (G), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a stopped state in the first performance and the second performance. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 68, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, which can notify whether or not there is a hit or not. In the first production, as shown in FIG. 68(D), the specific image CHA is one or more of the symbol images of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. After that, as shown in FIG. 68(E), it is displayed superimposed on one or more of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 68(B) to 68(G), in the first effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed in line in the horizontal direction. , the specific image CHA moves back and forth along the horizontal direction. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 68(B), in the first effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed while the specific image CHA is not displayed. , as shown in FIGS. 68(C) to 68(D), includes an effect in which the specific image CHA is newly displayed on the front side of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R by frame-in. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 68(H), after the second effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the specific image CHA become difficult to see due to fading out. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.

[Modified example]
Below, a modified example of the specific image design cooperation effect will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In specific image symbol cooperation productions A and B, the specific image CHA is assumed to overlap two symbol images at the same time. However, the specific image CHA may sequentially overlap with only one symbol image, or may overlap with three symbol images at the same time.

[Modification 2]
In the specific image symbol cooperation performances A to C, the specific image CHA is assumed to move along the horizontal direction. However, the specific image CHA may draw an arc or meander. It may also move left and right while swinging up and down. Furthermore, it may be stopped midway.

[Modification 3]
In the specific image pattern cooperation effects A to C, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are specified as specific numbers, but they may not be numbers. It may be a character or graphic symbol. Although it is assumed that only one set of decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R is displayed on the display screen 7a, a plurality of sets of decorative patterns may be displayed. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may temporarily disappear from being displayed while changing, or may not be continuously displayed. Here, the fluctuating display refers to a state in which a fluctuating aspect is visibly displayed.

[Modification 4]
The contents of the specific image design cooperation effects A to C may be combined as appropriate. For example, after FIGS. 68(A) to (I), FIGS. 70(A) to 70(J) may be executed. Further, for example, after FIGS. 70(A) to (J), FIGS. 69(D) to (J) may be executed.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect A4-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern,
One of the plurality of types of images is a specific image,
a first effect in which the specific image is displayed on the front side of the decorative pattern;
after the first performance, a second performance in which the specific image is displayed on the back side of the decorative pattern;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A4-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A4-1,
In the first performance and the second performance, the decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A4-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A4-2,
The decorative pattern includes a plurality of pattern images that can notify whether it is a hit or not,
In the first effect, the specific image is displayed overlapping with one or more of the plurality of symbol images, and then displayed overlapping with one or more of the other one or more of the plurality of symbol images.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A4-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect A4-3,
In the first performance, the symbol images are displayed stationary in line in a first direction, and the specific image moves back and forth along the first direction.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A4-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A4-1 to A4-4,
The first performance includes a performance in which, after the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed while the specific image is not displayed, the specific image is newly displayed in front of the decorative pattern by frame-in. There is,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect A4-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A4-1 to A4-5,
After the second effect, the decorative pattern and the specific image become difficult to see due to fading out.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The decorative pattern mode change effects A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 71 to 73. This decorative pattern change performance may be executed during a decorative pattern variation performance. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable production start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a decorative pattern change production, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and executes the main command. This is an effect that displays an image on the display screen 7a of the display device 7.

[Decorative pattern change effect A]
FIG. 71 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern mode change effect A. In the decorative pattern change performance A, first, as shown in FIG. 71(A), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a decorative pattern variation performance ( (variable display) is performed. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner at such high speed that the numbers cannot be visually recognized. In addition, after being fluctuated and displayed at high speed, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R may be made to disappear once or may not be made to disappear.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(B), an effect is performed in which the left decorative pattern 8L appears. Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L moves along a curved trajectory that draws an arc so as to curve rightward from the front side to the back side of the display screen 7a while the movement speed becomes slow. It is displayed fluctuatingly. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed gradually smaller as it moves toward the back of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(C), the moving speed of the left decorative pattern 8L is further slowed, and one of the left decorative patterns 8L (in this embodiment, the image of the number "9") is moved to the left decorative pattern 8L. It rotates horizontally at the stop display position where 8L is stopped and displayed. The rotation direction of the left decorative pattern 8L is not limited to the horizontal direction, but may be the vertical direction or the diagonal direction. Further, the number of rotations of the left decorative pattern 8L may be one time or a plurality of times.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(D), after the left decorative pattern 8L is horizontally rotated at the stop display position, the aspect of the image of the number "9" changes. Specifically, in the left decorative pattern 8L, the image of the number "9" becomes slightly smaller and the character image is attached to the lower right of the image of the number "9". It changes in a different manner. Then, the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed in a state where the aspect thereof is changed at the stop display position. At this time, the left decorative patterns 8L other than the left decorative pattern 8L at the stop display position disappear.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(E), an effect is performed in which the right decorative pattern 8R appears. Specifically, the right decorative pattern 8R moves along a curved trajectory that draws an arc so as to curve leftward from the back side of the display screen 7a toward the front side while the movement speed becomes slow. While the display is changing. That is, the right decorative pattern 8R is variably displayed while moving in a direction different from that of the left decorative pattern 8L. At this time, the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed gradually larger as it moves toward the front side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(F), the moving speed of the right decorative pattern 8R becomes even slower, and one of the right decorative patterns 8R (in this embodiment, the image of the number "5") moves to the right decorative pattern 8R. It rotates horizontally at the stop display position where 8R is stopped and displayed. At this time, the rotation direction of the right decorative pattern 8R is not limited to the horizontal direction, but may be the vertical direction or the diagonal direction. Further, the number of rotations of the right decorative pattern 8R may be one time or a plurality of times.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(G), after the right decorative pattern 8R is horizontally rotated at the stop display position, the aspect of the image of the number "5" changes. Specifically, in the right decorative pattern 8R, the image of the number "5" is slightly smaller and the character image is attached to the lower right of the image of the number "5". It changes in a different manner. Then, the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed in a state where the mode has changed at the stop display position. At this time, the right decorative symbols 8R other than the right decorative symbol 8R at the stop display position disappear.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(H), an effect is performed in which a medium decorative pattern 8C appears. Specifically, the medium decorative pattern 8C is displayed in a variable manner while moving downward from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a along a linear trajectory while the movement speed becomes slow. That is, the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed in a variable manner while moving in a direction different from that of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R. At this time, the size of the medium decorative pattern 8C does not change as it moves. Note that the medium decorative pattern 8C may be displayed gradually larger or smaller as it moves.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(I), the moving speed of the medium decorative pattern 8C is further slowed, and one of the medium decorative patterns 8C (in this embodiment, the image of the number "3") It rotates horizontally at the stop display position where 8C is stopped and displayed. At this time, the rotation direction of the middle decorative pattern 8C is not limited to the horizontal direction, but may be the vertical direction or the diagonal direction. Further, the number of rotations of the medium decorative pattern 8C may be one time or a plurality of times.

Next, as shown in FIG. 71(J), after the medium decorative pattern 8C is horizontally rotated at the stop display position, the aspect of the image of the number "3" changes. Specifically, in the medium decorative pattern 8C, the image of the number "3" is slightly smaller than the image of the number "3", and the character image is attached to the lower right of the image of the number "3". It changes in a different manner. Then, the medium decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed in a state where the mode has changed at the stop display position. At this time, the medium decorative pattern 8C other than the medium decorative pattern 8C at the stop display position disappears. In this way, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed in a losing mode (losing pattern). Note that the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R that are stopped and displayed may be at the same or different positions in the vertical direction of the display screen 7a.

[Decorative pattern change effect B]
FIG. 72 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern mode change effect B. In the decorative pattern change performance B, first, as shown in FIG. 72(A), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a decorative pattern variation performance ( (variable display) is performed. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner at such high speed that the numbers cannot be visually recognized. In addition, after being fluctuated and displayed at high speed, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R may be made to disappear once or may not be made to disappear.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(B), an effect is performed in which the left decorative pattern 8L appears. Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed in a variable manner while moving diagonally upward to the left from the front side of the display screen 7a toward the back side along a linear trajectory while the movement speed becomes slow. . At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed gradually smaller as it moves toward the back of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(C), the moving speed of the left decorative pattern 8L is further slowed down, and one of the left decorative patterns 8L (in this embodiment, the image of the number "9") is moved to the left decorative pattern 8L. It rotates horizontally at the stop display position where 8L is stopped and displayed. The rotation direction of the left decorative pattern 8L is not limited to the horizontal direction, but may be the vertical direction or the diagonal direction. Further, the number of rotations of the left decorative pattern 8L may be one time or a plurality of times.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(D), after the left decorative pattern 8L is horizontally rotated at the stop display position, the aspect of the image of the number "9" changes. Specifically, in the left decorative pattern 8L, the image of the number "9" becomes slightly smaller and the character image is attached to the lower right of the image of the number "9". It changes in a different manner. Then, the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed in a state where the aspect thereof is changed at the stop display position. At this time, the left decorative patterns 8L other than the left decorative pattern 8L at the stop display position disappear.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(E), an effect is performed in which the right decorative pattern 8R appears. Specifically, the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed in a variable manner while moving diagonally downward to the left from the back side of the display screen 7a toward the front side along a linear trajectory while the movement speed becomes slow. . That is, the right decorative pattern 8R is variably displayed while moving in a direction different from that of the left decorative pattern 8L. At this time, the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed gradually larger as it moves toward the front side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(F), the moving speed of the right decorative pattern 8R becomes even slower, and one of the right decorative patterns 8R (in this embodiment, the image of the number "5") moves to the right decorative pattern 8R. It rotates horizontally at the stop display position where 8R is stopped and displayed. The rotation direction of the right decorative pattern 8R is not limited to the horizontal direction, but may be the vertical direction or the diagonal direction. Further, the number of rotations of the right decorative pattern 8R may be one time or a plurality of times.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(G), after the right decorative pattern 8R is horizontally rotated at the stop display position, the aspect of the image of the number "5" changes. Specifically, in the right decorative pattern 8R, the image of the number "5" becomes a little smaller and the character image is attached to the lower right of the image of the number "5" from the image of the number "5". It changes in a different manner. Then, the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed in a state where the mode has changed at the stop display position. At this time, the right decorative symbols 8R other than the right decorative symbol 8R at the stop display position disappear.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(H), an effect is performed in which a medium decorative pattern 8C appears. Specifically, the medium decorative pattern 8C is displayed in a variable manner while moving downward from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a along a linear trajectory while the movement speed becomes slow. That is, the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed in a variable manner while moving in a direction different from that of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R. At this time, the size of the medium decorative pattern 8C does not change as it moves. Note that the medium decorative pattern 8C may be displayed gradually larger or smaller as it moves.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(I), the moving speed of the medium decorative pattern 8C becomes slower, and one of the medium decorative patterns 8C (in this embodiment, the image of number "3") It rotates horizontally at the stop display position where 8C is stopped and displayed. At this time, the rotation direction of the middle decorative pattern 8C is not limited to the horizontal direction, but may be the vertical direction or the diagonal direction. Further, the number of rotations of the medium decorative pattern 8C may be one time or a plurality of times.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72(J), after the medium decorative pattern 8C is horizontally rotated at the stop display position, the aspect of the image of the number "3" changes. Specifically, in the medium decorative pattern 8C, the image of the number "3" is slightly smaller than the image of the number "3", and the character image is attached to the lower right of the image of the number "3". It changes in a different manner. Then, the medium decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed in a state where the mode has changed at the stop display position. At this time, the medium decorative pattern 8C other than the medium decorative pattern 8C at the stop display position disappears. In this way, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed in a losing mode (losing pattern). Note that the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R that are stopped and displayed may be at the same or different positions in the vertical direction of the display screen 7a.

[Decorative pattern change production C]
FIG. 73 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern mode change production C. In the decorative pattern change production C, first, as shown in FIG. 73(A), on the display screen 7a of the main display device 7, a decorative pattern variation production ( (variable display) is performed. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner at such high speed that the numbers cannot be visually recognized. In addition, after being fluctuated and displayed at high speed, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R may be made to disappear once or may not be made to disappear.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(B), an effect is performed in which the left decorative pattern 8L appears. Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L moves along a curved trajectory that draws an arc so as to curve rightward from the front side to the back side of the display screen 7a while the movement speed becomes slow. It is displayed fluctuatingly. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed gradually smaller as it moves toward the back of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(C), the moving speed of the left decorative pattern 8L is further slowed down, and one of the left decorative patterns 8L (in this embodiment, the image of the number "9") is moved to the left decorative pattern 8L. The aspect changes at the stop display position where 8L is stopped and displayed. Specifically, the image of the number "9" in the left decorative pattern 8L changes from blue to red. Note that the left decorative pattern 8L may have any color, and the color may change from any color to any color.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(D), in the left decorative pattern 8L, the aspect of the image of the red number "9" changes. Specifically, in the left decorative pattern 8L, from the aspect of the image of the red number "9", the image of the red number "9" becomes a little smaller and the lower right corner of the image of the red number "9" The image of the character changes to be attached to the image of the character. Then, the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed in a state where the aspect thereof is changed at the stop display position. At this time, the left decorative patterns 8L other than the left decorative pattern 8L at the stop display position disappear.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(E), an effect is performed in which the right decorative pattern 8R appears. Specifically, the right decorative pattern 8R moves along a curved trajectory that draws an arc so as to curve leftward from the back side of the display screen 7a toward the front side while the movement speed becomes slow. It is displayed fluctuatingly. That is, the right decorative pattern 8R is variably displayed while moving in a direction different from that of the left decorative pattern 8L. At this time, the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed gradually larger as it moves toward the front side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(F), the moving speed of the right decorative pattern 8R becomes even slower, and one of the right decorative patterns 8R (in this embodiment, the image of the number "5") The mode changes at the stop display position where 8R is stopped and displayed. Specifically, the image of the number "5" on the right decorative pattern 8R changes from blue to red. Note that the right decorative pattern 8R may have any color, and the color may change from any color to any color.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(G), in the right decorative pattern 8R, the aspect of the image of the red number "5" changes. Specifically, in the right decorative pattern 8R, from the aspect of the image of the red number "5", the image of the red number "5" becomes a little smaller and the lower right of the image of the red number "5" The image of the character changes to be attached to the image of the character. Then, the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed in a state where the mode has changed at the stop display position. At this time, the right decorative symbols 8R other than the right decorative symbol 8R at the stop display position disappear.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(H), an effect is performed in which a medium decorative pattern 8C appears. Specifically, the medium decorative pattern 8C is displayed in a variable manner while moving downward from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a along a linear trajectory while the movement speed becomes slow. That is, the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed in a variable manner while moving in a direction different from that of the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R. At this time, the size of the medium decorative pattern 8C does not change as it moves. Note that the medium decorative pattern 8C may be displayed gradually larger or smaller as it moves.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(I), the moving speed of the medium decorative pattern 8C becomes slower, and one of the medium decorative patterns 8C (in this embodiment, the image of the number "3") The aspect changes at the stop display position where 8C is stopped and displayed. Specifically, the image of the number "3" in the medium decorative pattern 8C changes from blue to red. Note that the color of the medium decorative pattern 8C may be any color, and the color may change from any color to any color.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73(J), the mode of the image of the red number "3" in the middle decorative pattern 8C changes. Specifically, in the medium decorative pattern 8C, from the image of the red number "3", the image of the red number "3" becomes a little smaller and the lower right corner of the image of the red number "3" The image of the character changes to be attached to the image of the character. Then, the medium decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed in a state where the mode has changed at the stop display position. At this time, the medium decorative pattern 8C other than the medium decorative pattern 8C at the stop display position disappears. In this way, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed as losing patterns (losing patterns). Note that the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R that are stopped and displayed may be at the same or different positions in the vertical direction of the display screen 7a.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the decorative pattern mode change effect will be shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 71 to 73, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner in a first manner (for example, numbers, etc.), and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are The display changes from the first mode to the second mode (for example, numbers + characters, etc.), and the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed in the second mode. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 71 to 73, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R change from the first mode to the second mode at the stop display position. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 71 and 72, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R change from the first mode to the second mode while rotating laterally at the stop display position. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 71 to 73, for example, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed in a variable manner while moving along a predetermined direction, and the right decorative pattern 8R is different from the left decorative pattern 8L. It is displayed fluctuating while moving along different directions. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 71 and 73, for example, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed in a variable manner while moving along a curved trajectory, and the right decorative pattern 8R is It is displayed in a fluctuating manner while moving along a curved trajectory that resembles an arc. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 71 to 73, for example, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed gradually smaller as it moves, and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed gradually larger as it moves. Ru. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.

[Modified example]
Below, a modified example of the decorative pattern mode change effect will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In FIGS. 71 to 73, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are all displayed in a variable manner while moving in different directions, but two of the three decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R move. The directions may be the same. For example, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R may be displayed in a variable manner while moving in the same direction, and the middle decorative pattern 8C may be displayed in a variable manner while moving in a different direction from the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R. .
[Modification 2]
In FIGS. 71 to 73, after the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed at the stop display position, the decoration patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R other than the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R at the stop display position disappear. However, for example, after the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed at the stop display position, the left decorative pattern 8L other than the left decorative pattern 8L at the stop display position is produced so that it remains and is displayed without disappearing. Good too.
[Modification 3]
In FIGS. 71 to 73, decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed variably in a first mode (for example, numbers, etc.), and change from the first mode to a second mode (for example, numbers + characters, etc.). The second mode is displayed and stopped in the second mode, and the mode here includes various modes such as the type, color, and shape of the image representing the decorative pattern. It may change from any aspect to any aspect. Further, the number of changes may be one time or multiple times.
[Modification 4]
In FIGS. 71 to 73, the left decorative pattern 8L, the right decorative pattern 8R, and the middle decorative pattern 8C are displayed variably in the order, change from the first mode to the second mode, and are stopped, but the variable display and mode The order of change, stop display, etc. is not limited to this, and may be any order.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect A5-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern,
a first effect in which the decorative pattern is variably displayed in a first manner;
a second effect in which the decorative pattern is displayed changing from the first mode to the second mode different from the first mode;
a third effect in which the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in the second mode;
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect A5-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A5-2,
In the second performance, the decorative pattern changes from the first mode to the second mode at the stop display position.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect A5-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A5-1 or aspect A5-2,
In the second performance, the decorative pattern changes from the first mode to the second mode while rotating in a predetermined direction at the stop display position.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect A5-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A5-1 to A5-3,
The decorative pattern has a first decorative pattern and a second decorative pattern,
In the first presentation of the first decorative pattern, the first decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner while moving along a first direction;
In the first presentation of the second decorative pattern, the second decorative pattern is variably displayed while moving along a second direction different from the first direction.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect A5-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect A5-4,
In the first presentation of the first decorative pattern, the first decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner while moving along a curved trajectory like an arc;
In the first presentation of the second decorative pattern, the second decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner while moving along a curved trajectory like an arc.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect A5-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect A5-4 or aspect A5-5,
In the first presentation of the first decorative pattern, the first decorative pattern is displayed gradually smaller as it moves;
In the first presentation of the second decorative pattern, the second decorative pattern is displayed gradually larger as it moves.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Decorative pattern variation area effects A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 74 to 76. This decorative pattern variable area presentation may be executed during the decorative pattern variation presentation. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the decorative pattern variable area effect, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and executes the main command. This is an effect that displays an image on the display screen 7a of the display device 7.

[Decorative pattern variation area production A]
FIG. 74 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern variation area effect A. In the decorative pattern variation area production A, first, as shown in FIG. The symbol is stopped and displayed. The positions of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R that are stopped and displayed in the vertical direction of the display screen 7a may be the same or different. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a first display area R1 surrounded by a rectangular frame on the display screen 7a of the display device 7. The first display area R1 is provided in the lower part of the display screen 7a. The first display area R1 is included in a second display area R2 that is larger than the first display area R1. In this embodiment, the second display area R2 is the display screen 7a of the display device 7.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(B), in the first display area R1, a decorative pattern variation effect (variable display) is performed using the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner at such high speed that the numbers cannot be visually recognized.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(C), in the first display area R1, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, which were being displayed in a variable manner, disappear from the first display area R1, and the left decorative pattern 8R disappears from the first display area R1. The variable displays of the pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(D), an effect is performed in which the left decorative pattern 8L that once disappeared appears. Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L (number "3" pattern) slowly descends downward from the upper left side of the second display area R2 (display screen 7a) and moves downward in the vertical direction of the second display area R2. The display stops at an intermediate position. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed larger than when it was displayed in the first display area R1 (see FIG. 74(A)). That is, the enlarged left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed in the second display area R2. Moreover, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed so that a part thereof overlaps (straddles) the upper left part of the first display area R1. Then, a part of the first display area R1 becomes difficult to see due to the left decorative pattern 8L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(E), an effect is performed in which the right decorative pattern 8R that once disappeared appears. Specifically, the right decorative pattern 8R (number "3" pattern) slowly descends downward from the upper right side of the second display area R2 (display screen 7a). At this time, the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed larger than when it was displayed in the first display area R1 (see FIG. 74(A)). Then, while moving further slowly downward at a position slightly above the middle position in the vertical direction of the second display area R2, a check is made as to whether or not to form a reach state in conjunction with the left decorative symbol 8L (number "3" symbol). Perform reach-inciting performances.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(F), the right decorative pattern 8R (number "3" pattern) does not stop at an intermediate position in the vertical direction of the second display area R2, but moves downward as it is. . That is, a ready-to-win state is not formed in combination with the left decorative symbol 8L (number "3" symbol). The right decorative pattern 8R is displayed so that a portion thereof overlaps (straddles) the right end portion of the first display area R1. Then, a part of the first display area R1 becomes difficult to see due to the right decorative pattern 8R. In addition, the right decorative pattern 8R (number "3" pattern) is stopped and displayed at an intermediate position in the vertical direction of the second display area R2, and together with the left decorative pattern 8L (number "3" pattern) forms a reach state. If so, another reach effect may be performed from there.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(G), the right decorative pattern 8R (number "4" pattern) slowly descends from the upper right side of the second display area R2 (display screen 7a) to the bottom. The image is stopped and displayed at an intermediate position in the vertical direction of the 2 display area R2. At this time, the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed larger than when it was displayed in the first display area R1 (see FIG. 74(A)). That is, the enlarged right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed in the second display area R2. Further, the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed so that a part thereof overlaps (straddles) the upper right portion of the first display area R1. Then, a part of the first display area R1 becomes difficult to see due to the right decorative pattern 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(H), an effect is performed in which the medium decorative pattern 8C that once disappeared appears. Specifically, the medium decorative pattern 8C (number "2" pattern) slowly descends downward from the upper center of the second display area R2 (display screen 7a), and moves downward in the vertical direction of the second display area R2. The display stops at an intermediate position. At this time, the medium decorative pattern 8C is displayed larger than when it was displayed in the first display area R1 (see FIG. 74(A)). That is, the enlarged medium decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed in the second display area R2. Moreover, the medium decorative pattern 8C is displayed so that a part thereof overlaps (straddles) the upper center part of the first display area R1. Then, a part of the first display area R1 becomes difficult to see due to the middle decorative pattern 8C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(I), the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R move from the second display area R2 toward the first display area R1. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R move from the second display area R2 toward the first display area R1 while gradually becoming smaller (shrinking).

Next, as shown in FIG. 74(J), the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R gradually become smaller from the second display area R2 toward the first display area R1 ( move (while zooming out). Then, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed within the first display area R1 (returned). In this way, in the first display area R1, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed in a losing mode (losing pattern).

[Decorative pattern variable area production B]
FIG. 75 is a diagram for explaining decorative pattern variation area production B. In the decorative pattern variation region production B, first, as shown in FIG. It is stopped and displayed with a symbol). The positions of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R that are stopped and displayed in the vertical direction of the display screen 7a may be the same or different. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a first display area R1 surrounded by a rectangular frame on the display screen 7a of the display device 7. The first display area R1 is provided in the lower part of the display screen 7a. The first display area R1 is included in a second display area R2 that is larger than the first display area R1. In this embodiment, the second display area R2 is the display screen 7a of the display device 7.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(B), in the first display area R1, a decorative pattern variation effect (variable display) is performed using the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner at such high speed that the numbers cannot be visually recognized.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(C), in the first display area R1, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, which were displayed in a variable manner, disappear from the first display area R1, and the left decorative pattern 8R disappears from the first display area R1. The variable displays of the pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(D), an effect is performed in which the left decorative pattern 8L that once disappeared appears. Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L (number "3" pattern) slowly descends downward from the upper left side of the second display area R2 (display screen 7a) and moves downward in the vertical direction of the second display area R2. The display stops at an intermediate position. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed larger than when it was displayed in the first display area R1 (see FIG. 75(A)). That is, the enlarged left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed in the second display area R2. Moreover, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed so that a part thereof overlaps (straddles) the upper left part of the first display area R1. Then, a part of the first display area R1 is displayed so as to be visible through the transparent left decorative pattern 8L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(E), an effect is performed in which the right decorative pattern 8R that once disappeared appears. Specifically, the right decorative pattern 8R (number "3" pattern) slowly descends downward from the upper right side of the second display area R2 (display screen 7a). At this time, the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed larger than when it was displayed in the first display area R1 (see FIG. 75(A)). Then, while moving further slowly downward at a position slightly above the middle position in the vertical direction of the second display area R2, a check is made as to whether or not to form a reach state in conjunction with the left decorative symbol 8L (number "3" symbol). Perform reach-inciting performances.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(F), the right decorative pattern 8R (number "3" pattern) does not stop at an intermediate position in the vertical direction of the second display area R2, but moves downward as it is. . That is, a ready-to-win state is not formed in combination with the left decorative symbol 8L (number "3" symbol). The right decorative pattern 8R is displayed so that a portion thereof overlaps (straddles) the right end portion of the first display area R1. Then, a part of the first display area R1 becomes difficult to see due to the right decorative pattern 8R. In addition, the right decorative pattern 8R (number "3" pattern) is stopped and displayed at an intermediate position in the vertical direction of the second display area R2, and together with the left decorative pattern 8L (number "3" pattern) forms a reach state. If so, another reach effect may be performed from there.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(G), the right decorative pattern 8R (number "4" pattern) slowly descends from the upper right side of the second display area R2 (display screen 7a) to the bottom. The image is stopped and displayed at an intermediate position in the vertical direction of the 2 display area R2. At this time, the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed larger than when it was displayed in the first display area R1 (see FIG. 75(A)). That is, the enlarged right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed in the second display area R2. Further, the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed so that a part thereof overlaps (straddles) the upper right portion of the first display area R1. Then, a part of the first display area R1 is displayed so as to be visible through the transparent right decorative pattern 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(H), an effect is performed in which the medium decorative pattern 8C that once disappeared appears. Specifically, the medium decorative pattern 8C (number "2" pattern) slowly descends downward from the upper center of the second display area R2 (display screen 7a), and moves downward in the vertical direction of the second display area R2. The display stops at an intermediate position. At this time, the medium decorative pattern 8C is displayed larger than when it was displayed in the first display area R1 (see FIG. 75(A)). That is, the enlarged medium decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed in the second display area R2. Moreover, the medium decorative pattern 8C is displayed so that a part thereof overlaps (straddles) the upper center part of the first display area R1. Then, a part of the first display area R1 is displayed so as to be visible through the medium decorative pattern 8C having transparency.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75(I), in the second display area R2, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R that have been stopped and displayed disappear from the second display area R2, and the left decorative pattern The pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(J), an effect is performed in which the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, which have disappeared again, appear again. Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a reduced state within the first display area R1. In this way, in the first display area R1, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed in a losing mode (losing pattern).

[Decorative pattern variable area production C]
FIG. 76 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern variation area production C. In the decorative pattern variation region production C, first, as shown in FIG. The symbol is stopped and displayed. The positions of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R that are stopped and displayed in the vertical direction of the display screen 7a may be the same or different. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a first display area R1 surrounded by a rectangular frame on the display screen 7a of the display device 7. The first display area R1 is provided in the lower part of the display screen 7a. The first display area R1 is included in a second display area R2 that is larger than the first display area R1. In this embodiment, the second display area R2 is the display screen 7a of the display device 7.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(B), in the first display area R1, a decorative pattern variation effect (variable display) is performed using the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner at such high speed that the numbers cannot be visually recognized.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(C), in the first display area R1, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, which were displayed in a variable manner, disappear from the first display area R1, and the left decorative pattern 8R disappears from the first display area R1. The variable displays of the pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(D), an effect is performed in which the left decorative pattern 8L that once disappeared appears. Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L (number "3" pattern) slowly descends downward from the upper left side of the second display area R2 (display screen 7a) and moves downward in the vertical direction of the second display area R2. The display stops at an intermediate position. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed larger than when it was displayed in the first display area R1 (see FIG. 76(A)). That is, the enlarged left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed in the second display area R2. Moreover, the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed so that a part thereof overlaps (straddles) the upper left part of the first display area R1. Then, a part of the first display area R1 becomes difficult to see due to the left decorative pattern 8L.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(E), an effect is performed in which the right decorative pattern 8R that once disappeared appears. Specifically, the right decorative pattern 8R (number "3" pattern) slowly descends downward from the upper right side of the second display area R2 (display screen 7a). At this time, the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed larger than when it was displayed in the first display area R1 (see FIG. 76(A)). Then, while moving further slowly downward at a position slightly above the middle position in the vertical direction of the second display area R2, a check is made as to whether or not to form a reach state in conjunction with the left decorative symbol 8L (number "3" symbol). Perform reach-inciting performances.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(F), the right decorative pattern 8R (number "3" pattern) is stopped and displayed at an intermediate position in the vertical direction of the second display area R2. As a result, a reach state is formed between the left decorative pattern 8L (number "3" pattern) and the right decorative pattern 8R (number "3" pattern). At this time, the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed larger than when it was displayed in the first display area R1 (see FIG. 76(A)). That is, the enlarged right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed in the second display area R2. Further, the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed so that a part thereof overlaps (straddles) the upper right portion of the first display area R1. Then, a part of the first display area R1 becomes difficult to see due to the right decorative pattern 8R. Note that another ready-to-win effect may be performed after the ready-to-win state is formed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(G), an effect is performed in which the medium decorative pattern 8C that once disappeared appears. Specifically, the medium decorative pattern 8C (number "2" pattern) slowly descends downward from the upper center of the second display area R2 (display screen 7a), and moves downward in the vertical direction of the second display area R2. The display stops at an intermediate position. At this time, the medium decorative pattern 8C is displayed larger than when it was displayed in the first display area R1 (see FIG. 76(A)). That is, the enlarged medium decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed in the second display area R2. Moreover, the medium decorative pattern 8C is displayed so that a part thereof overlaps (straddles) the upper center part of the first display area R1. Then, a part of the first display area R1 becomes difficult to see due to the middle decorative pattern 8C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(H), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R move from the second display area R2 toward the first display area R1. At this time, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R move from the second display area R2 toward the first display area R1 while gradually becoming smaller (shrinking).

Next, as shown in FIG. 76(I), the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R gradually become smaller from the second display area R2 toward the first display area R1 ( move (while zooming out). Then, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed within the first display area R1 (returned). In this way, in the first display area R1, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed in a losing mode (losing pattern).

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the decorative pattern variable area presentation will be shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 74 to 76, in the first display area R1 (first area) of the display screen 7a (display means) of the display device 7, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, A first effect in which 8R is displayed in a variable manner, and after the first effect, a decorative pattern 8L is displayed in a second display area R2 (second area) including the first display area R1 on the display screen 7a of the display device 7. , 8C, and 8R are enlarged and variably displayed compared to the first performance. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 74 to 76, in the second performance, at least a part of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are enlarged and variably displayed are in the first display area R1. are displayed in an overlapping manner. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 74 to 76, in the first effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner in the first display area R1 of the display screen 7a of the display device 7. After that, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R disappear from the first display area R1. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 74 to 76, in the second selection, an effect is performed to determine whether or not the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R form a ready-to-win state. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 76, after the second performance, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R form a ready-to-reach state in the second display area R2 of the display screen 7a of the display device 7. It is further possible to perform a third performance. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, after the second effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R appear in the second display area R2 of the display screen 7a of the display device 7. It is further possible to perform a fourth performance in which a losing symbol is stopped and displayed without forming a state. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, after the fourth performance, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R move while shrinking from the second display area R2 to the first display area R1. It is further possible to perform a fifth effect that is displayed as follows. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.

[Modified example]
Below, a modified example of the decorative pattern variation area presentation will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In FIGS. 74 to 76, the first display area R1 on the display screen 7a of the display device 7 has a rectangular shape in the decorative pattern variation area effects A to C, but is not limited to this, and may have a circular shape, It may be elliptical, square, or the like. Moreover, various shapes can be adopted for the shape of the second display area R2. Further, the second display area R2 may be the same as the display screen 7a of the display device 7, or may be a part thereof.
[Modification 2]
In FIGS. 74 to 76, in the decorative pattern variation area productions A to C, at least a portion of the enlarged left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are displayed overlapping the first display area R1. , may be displayed so as not to overlap with the first display area R1. For example, it may be displayed so as to fit within the second display area R2.
[Modification 3]
In FIGS. 74 to 76, in the decorative symbol variation area productions A to C, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are enlarged and variably displayed in the reach promotion production to determine whether or not to form a ready-to-reach state, but other In various effects, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may be enlarged and displayed in a variable manner.
[Modification 4]
In FIGS. 74 to 76, the left decorative pattern 8L, the right decorative pattern 8R, and the middle decorative pattern 8C are stopped and displayed in this order, but the order of stop display is not limited to this, and any order may be used. Good too.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect A6-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern,
a first effect in which the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner in a first area of the display means;
a second performance in which, after the first performance, the decorative pattern is enlarged and variably displayed in a second area of the display means including the first area; is executable,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect A6-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A6-1,
In the second performance, at least a part of the decorative pattern that is enlarged and displayed in a variable manner is displayed overlapping the first area.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect A6-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect A6-1 or aspect A6-2,
In the first performance, after the decorative pattern is variably displayed in the first area of the display means, the decorative pattern disappears from the first area.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect A6-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A6-1 to A6-3,
In the second selection, an effect is performed as to whether or not the decorative pattern forms a ready-to-reach state.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect A6-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect A6-4,
After the second performance, it is further possible to perform a third performance in which the decorative pattern forms a ready-to-reach state in the second area of the display means;
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect A6-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect A6-4,
After the second performance, it is further possible to perform a fourth performance in which the decorative pattern does not form a reach state and is stopped and displayed as a losing pattern in the second area of the display means.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect A6-7]
The gaming machine according to aspect A6-6,
After the fourth performance, it is further possible to perform a fifth performance in which the decorative pattern is displayed so as to move from the second area to the first area while shrinking.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The operation promotion effects A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 77 to 79. This operation promotion performance can be executed during the variation performance of the performance symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the operation promotion effect, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays it on the main display device. This is an effect that displays an image on the display screen 7a of 7.

[Operation promotion performance A]
FIG. 77 is a diagram for explaining operation promotion effect A.
First, as shown in FIG. 77(A), a variation start effect is executed. Here, a state in which the left presentation pattern 8L, the middle presentation pattern 8C, and the right presentation pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner is shown. A pending image 9B is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The pending images 9B are displayed according to the number of stored second special symbols, and here, three pending images 9B are displayed. The pending digested image 9C corresponds to the production symbols (production symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) currently being changed on the display screen 7a. It is assumed that the fluctuation occurs during a time-saving game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(B), a reach formation effect is executed. Here, it is shown that both the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R have stopped at "7".
Next, as shown in FIG. 77(C), a battle start effect is executed. In the battle start production, an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB appear. After this, a battle takes place between the friendly character CRA and the enemy character CRB, and when the friendly character CRA finally defeats the enemy character CRB, it becomes a jackpot. At this time, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed at the lower right portion of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(D), a size change effect is executed. The size change performance is a performance in which the size of the button image BG is enlarged and displayed. This suggests the level of expectation for a jackpot. Here, an ally character CRA appears.
Next, as shown in FIG. 77(E), a button rotation effect is executed. The button rotation performance is a performance in which a button image BG, which is an image imitating the performance button 63 seen from the direction perpendicular to the top surface, is displayed and rotated as shown by an arrow YG around the direction perpendicular to the top surface.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(F), a button enlargement effect is executed. In the button enlargement effect, the button image BG is enlarged to the extent that the entire button image BG does not fit on the display screen 7a. Therefore, there is a portion that is not displayed at the end of the button image BG. Note that the rotation of the button image BG continues.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77(G), a press promotion effect is executed. In the push promotion effect, the button image BG enlarged and displayed in the button enlargement effect gradually becomes smaller, and by rotating around the left-right direction, the top surface that was facing toward you gradually becomes upward. A button image BG is arranged at the lower center of the display screen 7a. At this time, a message image MG saying "Press" is also displayed.

When the player presses the effect button 63, a confirmed stop effect (jackpot) is executed, as shown in FIG. 77(H). In the confirmed stop performance (jackpot), the left performance symbol 8L, the middle performance symbol 8C, and the right performance symbol 8R stop at the same number, forming a so-called double number. Here, the left presentation pattern 8L, the middle presentation pattern 8C, and the right presentation pattern 8R all stop at "7". A message image MG saying "Victory" is also displayed, indicating that the ally character CRA has won against the enemy character CRB.

[Operation promotion performance B]
FIG. 78 is a diagram for explaining operation promotion effect B.
First, as shown in FIG. 78(A), a variation start effect is executed. Here, a state in which the left presentation pattern 8L, the middle presentation pattern 8C, and the right presentation pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner is shown. A pending image 9B is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The pending images 9B are displayed according to the number of stored second special symbols, and here, three pending images 9B are displayed. The pending digested image 9C corresponds to the production symbols (production symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) currently being changed on the display screen 7a. It is assumed that the fluctuation occurs during a time-saving game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78(B), a reach formation effect is executed. Here, it is shown that both the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R have stopped at "7".
Next, as shown in FIG. 78(C), a battle start effect is executed. In the battle start production, an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB appear. After this, a battle takes place between the friendly character CRA and the enemy character CRB, and when the friendly character CRA finally defeats the enemy character CRB, it becomes a jackpot. At this time, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed at the lower right portion of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78(D), a button movement effect is executed. The button movement performance is a performance that moves the button image BG at high speed. The button image BG moves from one peripheral edge of the display screen 7a to the other peripheral edge of the display screen 7a so as to cross the display screen 7a. Here, an ally character CRA appears.
Next, as shown in FIG. 78(E), a button rotation effect is executed. The button rotation performance is a performance in which a button image BG, which is an image imitating the performance button 63 seen from the direction perpendicular to the top surface, is displayed and rotated as shown by an arrow YG around the direction perpendicular to the top surface.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78(F), a button enlargement effect is executed. In the button enlargement effect, the button image BG is enlarged to the extent that the entire button image BG does not fit on the display screen 7a. Therefore, there is a portion that is not displayed at the end of the button image BG. Note that the rotation of the button image BG continues.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78(G), a press promotion effect is executed. In the push promotion effect, the button image BG enlarged and displayed in the button enlargement effect gradually becomes smaller, and by rotating around the left-right direction, the top surface that was facing toward you gradually becomes upward. A button image BG is arranged at the lower center of the display screen 7a. At this time, a message image MG saying "Press" is also displayed.

When the player presses the effect button 63, a confirmed stop effect (jackpot) is executed, as shown in FIG. 78(H). In the confirmed stop performance (jackpot), the left performance symbol 8L, the middle performance symbol 8C, and the right performance symbol 8R stop at the same number, forming a so-called double number. Here, the left presentation pattern 8L, middle presentation pattern 8C, and right presentation pattern 8R all stop at "7". A message image MG saying "Victory" is also displayed, indicating that the ally character CRA has won against the enemy character CRB.

[Operation promotion performance C]
FIG. 79 is a diagram for explaining the operation promotion effect C.
First, as shown in FIG. 79(A), a variation start effect is executed. Here, a state in which the left presentation pattern 8L, the middle presentation pattern 8C, and the right presentation pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner is shown. A pending image 9B is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The pending images 9B are displayed according to the number of stored second special symbols, and here, three pending images 9B are displayed. The pending digested image 9C corresponds to the production symbols (production symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) currently being changed on the display screen 7a. It is assumed that the fluctuation occurs during a time-saving game. Further, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed at the lower right portion of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79(B), a reach formation effect is executed. Here, it is shown that both the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R have stopped at "7". Note that a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed at the lower right portion of the display screen 7a.
Next, as shown in FIG. 79(C), a battle start effect is executed. In the battle start production, an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB appear. After this, a battle takes place between the friendly character CRA and the enemy character CRB, and when the friendly character CRA finally defeats the enemy character CRB, it becomes a jackpot. Note that a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed at the lower right portion of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79(D), a color change effect is executed. The color change performance is a performance that changes the color of the top surface of the button image BG. For example, a white top surface may be changed to blue, green, or red. This suggests the level of expectation for a jackpot. Here, an ally character CRA appears.
Next, as shown in FIG. 79(E), a button rotation effect is executed. In the button rotation effect, a button image BG, which is an image imitating the effect button 63 seen from the direction perpendicular to the top surface, is displayed, and the button image BG is rotated as shown by an arrow YG around the direction perpendicular to the top surface.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79(F), a button enlargement effect is executed. In the button enlargement effect, the button image BG is enlarged to the extent that the entire button image BG does not fit on the display screen 7a. Therefore, there is a portion that is not displayed at the end of the button image BG. Note that the rotation of the button image BG continues.

When the player presses the performance button 63, a pressing promotion performance is executed as shown in FIG. 79(G). In the push promotion effect, the button image BG enlarged and displayed in the button enlargement effect gradually becomes smaller, and by rotating around the left-right direction, the top surface that was facing toward you gradually becomes upward. A button image BG is arranged at the lower center of the display screen 7a. At this time, a message image MG saying "Press" is also displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79(H), a confirmed stop effect (loss) is executed. In the confirmed stop performance (loss), both the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R are stopped at "7", and the middle performance symbol 8C is stopped at "8". Note that a message image MG saying "defeat" is also displayed, indicating that the ally character CRA has been defeated by the enemy character CRB. Note that there may be a transition from the color change effect shown in FIG. 79(D) to the confirmed stop effect (loss) shown in FIG. 79(H).

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the operation promotion effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment described above, a button rotation effect is executed. In the button rotation effect, the button image BG, which is an image imitating the effect button 63 seen from the direction perpendicular to the top surface, is displayed, and the button image BG is rotated as shown by the arrow YG around the direction perpendicular to the top surface (FIG. 77) E), FIG. 78(E), FIG. 79(E)). According to this configuration, it is possible to contribute to promoting the operation of the performance button 63 and to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment described above, a button enlargement effect is executed. In the button enlargement effect, the button image BG is enlarged to such an extent that the entire button image BG cannot fit on the display screen 7a, and there are parts that are not displayed at the ends (FIGS. 77(F), 78(F), and 79(F)). According to this configuration, it is possible to further contribute to promoting the operation of the performance button 63 and to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment described above, a button movement effect is executed. The button movement performance is a performance that moves the button image BG at high speed. The button image BG moves from one peripheral edge of the display screen 7a to the other peripheral edge so as to cross the display screen 7a (FIG. 78(D)). According to this configuration, it is possible to further contribute to promoting the operation of the performance button 63 and to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment described above, a press promotion effect is executed. In the push promotion effect, the button image BG enlarged and displayed in the button enlargement effect gradually becomes smaller, and by rotating around the left and right directions, the top surface that was facing toward you gradually becomes upward. A button image BG is arranged at the lower center of the display screen 7a. At this time, a message image MG saying "Press" is also displayed (FIG. 77(G), FIG. 78(G), FIG. 79(G)). According to this configuration, it is possible to further contribute to promoting the operation of the performance button 63 and to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, an effect in which the button image BG is displayed is first performed (FIGS. 77(C)(D), FIG. 78(C), FIGS. 79(A) to (D)). According to this configuration, attention can be directed to the performance button 63 prior to operating the performance button 63, contributing to improving the interest of the game.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the color change effect shown in FIG. 79(D) may shift to the confirmed stop effect (loss) shown in FIG. 79(H). That is, after the effect of displaying the button image BG is executed, the button rotation effect, the button confirmation effect, and the pressing promotion effect may not be executed. According to this configuration, the range of performances can be expanded and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modified example]
A modified example of the operation promotion effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the above, the button rotation effect and the button enlargement effect are performed as a series of effects, but either the button rotation effect or the button enlargement effect may be performed.

[Modification 2]
Although the above was an example of the performance in the variation during the time-saving game, it may also be applied to the variation during the normal game where the player is left-handed.

[Modification 3]
In the above, the size change effect (FIG. 77(D)) and color change effect (FIG. 79(D)) are performed following the battle start effect. Such size change performance and color change performance may be performed, for example, when a game ball enters the game ball. For example, it is conceivable to set it as the timing when the second special figure reservation increases. Further, for example, it is possible to set the timing to be an over-win.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect B1-1]
A gaming machine that is equipped with an operation section that can be operated by a player and that can perform performances based on the operation of the operation section,
The operation promotion effect that promotes operation of the operation section includes displaying an operation section image imitating the operation section on the display screen as an image of the operation section viewed from a predetermined direction, and rotating the operation section about the predetermined direction. Includes a rotating effect that
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B1-1,
The operation promotion performance includes an enlargement performance in which the entire operation unit image does not fit on the display screen and its edges are not displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B1-1 or aspect B1-2,
The operation promotion performance includes a movement performance in which the operation unit image moves from one peripheral part to the other peripheral part so as to cross the display screen.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B1-1 to B1-3,
The operation promotion performance includes a promotion performance that displays the operation unit image and urges the user to press the operation unit.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B1-1 to B1-4,
After a display effect in which the operation unit image is displayed on a display screen, the operation promotion effect is transferred to.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B1-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect B1-5,
Even if the display effect is executed, the transition to the operation promotion effect may not occur;
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B1-7]
The gaming machine according to aspect B1-5 or aspect B1-6,
In the display performance, the entry of the game ball into a predetermined ball entry hole is used as an opportunity to suggest the expectation of a jackpot.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B1-8]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B1-5 to B1-7,
The display performance is executed from the start of variation of the performance symbol,
A gaming machine characterized by:

The winning/losing notification performances A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 80 to 82. This winning/losing notification performance can be executed during the variation performance of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable performance start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the winning/losing notification performance, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays it on the main display device. This is an effect that displays an image on the display screen 7a of 7.

[Win/lose announcement performance A]
FIG. 80 is a diagram for explaining the winning/losing notification performance A.
First, after the variation start effect is executed and the variation of the effect symbols is started, the battle effect is executed as shown in FIG. 80(A). The battle performance is a performance in which an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB fight. Here, an effect is performed in which the attack of the friendly character CRA hits the enemy character CRB.

Following the battle effect described above, a button get effect is executed as shown in FIG. 80(B). In the button get effect, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The displayed button image BG becomes the reward for the battle performance. The obtained button images BG are piled up and displayed (stocked) on the right side of the display screen 7a. Here, two button images BG are obtained.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80(C), a battle effect is performed. The battle performance is a performance in which an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB fight. Here, an effect is performed in which the attack of the friendly character CRA hits the enemy character CRB.

Following the battle effect described above, a button get effect is executed as shown in FIG. 80(D). In the button get effect, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The displayed button image BG becomes the reward for the battle performance. The obtained button images BG are piled up and displayed (stocked) on the right side of the display screen 7a. Here, three button images BG are obtained, and a total of five button images BG are stocked. Note that the number of button images BG in stock suggests the degree of expectation for a jackpot.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80(E), a press promotion effect (initial stage) is executed. In the push promotion effect (initial stage), a large button image BG is displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a, and a message image MG "Press" is displayed above it. Further, a stocked button image BG is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. Here, when the player presses the performance button 63, a performance is performed in which the button images BG stocked on the right side are digested in order from the top.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80(F), a press promotion effect (final stage) is executed. In the push promotion effect (final stage), a large button image BG is displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a, and a message image MG saying "Press" is displayed above it. Further, a stocked button image BG is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. Here, when the player presses the performance button 63, a performance is performed in which the button images BG stocked on the right side are digested in order from the top. The push-down promotion effect (final stage) indicates a state in which the number of button images BG stocked on the right side is running low.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80(G), a jackpot confirmation effect is executed. The jackpot confirmation performance is a performance in which the ally character CRA appears and the background becomes a rainbow background RB that is displayed in seven colors of the rainbow. The rainbow background RB is a background that guarantees a jackpot.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80(H), a confirmed stop effect (jackpot) is executed. In the confirmed stop performance (jackpot), the left performance symbol 8L, the middle performance symbol 8C, and the right performance symbol 8R stop at the same number, forming a so-called double number. Here, the left presentation pattern 8L, middle presentation pattern 8C, and right presentation pattern 8R all stop at "7".

[Win/Lose Announcement Performance B]
FIG. 81 is a diagram for explaining the winning/losing notification performance B.
First, after the variation start effect is executed and the variation of the effect symbols is started, the battle effect is executed as shown in FIG. 81(A). The battle performance is a performance in which an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB fight. Here, an effect is performed in which the attack of the friendly character CRA hits the enemy character CRB.

Following the battle effect described above, a button get effect is executed as shown in FIG. 81(B). In the button get effect, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The displayed button image BG becomes the reward for the battle performance. The obtained button images BG are piled up and displayed (stocked) on the right side of the display screen 7a. Here, two button images BG are obtained.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(C), a battle effect is performed. The battle performance is a performance in which an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB fight. Here, an effect is performed in which the attack of the friendly character CRA hits the enemy character CRB.

Following the battle effect described above, a button get effect is executed as shown in FIG. 81(D). In the button get effect, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The displayed button image BG becomes the reward for the battle performance. The obtained button images BG are piled up and displayed (stocked) on the right side of the display screen 7a. Here, one button image BG is obtained, and a total of three button images BG are stocked. Note that the number of button images BG in stock suggests the degree of expectation for a jackpot.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(E), a press promotion effect (initial stage) is executed. In the push promotion effect (initial stage), a large button image BG is displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a, and a message image MG "Press" is displayed above it. Further, a stocked button image BG is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. Here, when the player presses the performance button 63, a performance is performed in which the button images BG stocked on the right side are digested in order from the top.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(F), a press promotion effect (final stage) is executed. In the push promotion effect (final stage), a large button image BG is displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a, and a message image MG saying "Press" is displayed above it. Further, a stocked button image BG is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. Here, when the player presses the performance button 63, a performance is performed in which the button images BG stocked on the right side are digested in order from the top. The push-down promotion effect (final stage) indicates a state in which the number of button images BG stocked on the right side is running low. Here, a situation is shown in which the stocked button images BG are used up.

Next, as shown in FIG. 81(G), a confirmed stop effect (loss) is executed. In the confirmed stop performance (loss), both the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R are stopped at "7", and the middle performance symbol 8C is stopped at "8".

[Win/lose announcement performance C]
FIG. 82 is a diagram for explaining the winning/losing notification effect C.
First, after the variation start effect is executed and the variation of the effect symbols is started, the battle effect is executed as shown in FIG. 82(A). The battle performance is a performance in which an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB fight. Here, an effect is performed in which the attack of the friendly character CRA hits the enemy character CRB.

Following the battle effect described above, a button get effect is executed as shown in FIG. 82(B). In the button get effect, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The displayed button image BG becomes the reward for the battle performance. The obtained button images BG are piled up and displayed (stocked) on the right side of the display screen 7a. Here, two button images BG are obtained.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(C), a battle effect is performed. The battle performance is a performance in which an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB fight. Here, an effect is performed in which the attack of the friendly character CRA hits the enemy character CRB.

Following the battle effect described above, a button get effect is executed as shown in FIG. 82(D). In the button get effect, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The displayed button image BG becomes the reward for the battle performance. The obtained button images BG are piled up and displayed (stocked) on the right side of the display screen 7a. Here, three button images BG are obtained, and a total of five button images BG are stocked.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(E), a battle effect is performed. The battle performance is a performance in which an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB fight. Here, an effect is performed in which the attack of the friendly character CRA hits the enemy character CRB.

Following the battle effect described above, a button get effect is executed as shown in FIG. 82(F). In the button get effect, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The displayed button image BG becomes the reward for the battle performance. The obtained button images BG are piled up and displayed (stocked) on the right side of the display screen 7a. Here, three button images BG have been obtained, and a total of eight button images BG are in stock. Note that the number of button images BG in stock suggests the degree of expectation for a jackpot.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(G), a jackpot confirmation effect is executed. The jackpot confirmation performance is a performance in which the ally character CRA appears and the background becomes a rainbow background RB that is displayed in seven colors of the rainbow. The rainbow background RB is a background that guarantees a jackpot.

Next, as shown in FIG. 82(H), a confirmed stop effect (jackpot) is executed. In the confirmed stop performance (jackpot), the left performance symbol 8L, the middle performance symbol 8C, and the right performance symbol 8R stop at the same number, forming a so-called double number. Here, the left presentation pattern 8L, middle presentation pattern 8C, and right presentation pattern 8R all stop at "7".

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the winning/losing announcement performance is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, a button get effect is performed in which button images BG are stocked (FIGS. 80(B)(D), FIGS. 81(B)(D), FIGS. 82(B)(D)(F)). )) After that, when the player presses the performance button 63, a pressing promotion performance is performed to digest the stocked button image BG (FIGS. 80(E)(F), FIGS. 81(E)(F)). In the middle of the pressing promotion performance, a jackpot confirmation performance is performed (FIG. 80(G)). According to this configuration, since the jackpot is announced by pressing the performance button 63, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment described above, a button get effect in which button images BG are stocked is performed multiple times. In addition, one or more button images BG are stocked in one button get effect (Fig. 80(B)(D), Fig. 81(B)(D), Fig. 82(B)(D)(F)) ). According to this configuration, the stock of button images BG that allow the operation of the performance button 63 increases in stages, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the number of stocked button images BG in the button get effect suggests the degree of expectation for a jackpot. According to this configuration, the stock number of button images BG in the button get effect becomes an important factor, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, it is possible to execute a jackpot confirmation performance that notifies the confirmation of a jackpot (FIGS. 80(G) and 82(G)). According to this configuration, when the jackpot confirmation effect is executed, the player can feel a sense of superiority, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after executing the button get effect, it is possible to execute the jackpot confirmation effect without pressing the effect button 63 (FIG. 82(B)(D)(F)(G) )). According to this configuration, it is possible to surprise the player and improve the interest of the game.

[Modified example]
A modified example of the winning/losing announcement performance is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the above, the ally character CRA appears and the rainbow background RB is used as the jackpot confirmation effect. On the other hand, any kind of presentation may be used to notify the confirmation of the jackpot. For example, a full rotation performance may be performed in which the performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R rotate in a so-called double-roll state. Furthermore, for example, it may be a premium effect that displays a premium image that guarantees a jackpot. For example, it may be an effect such as vibrating the effect button 63, sending air toward the player, or lighting a specific lamp.

[Modification 2]
In the above, when the player presses the performance button 63 in the push promotion performance, a performance is performed in which the button images BG stocked on the right side are digested in order from the top (FIG. 81(F)). Here, if the jackpot confirmation performance is not executed and the stocked button images BG have been used up, the winning will be unsuccessful (FIG. 81(G)). On the other hand, it may be possible to perform a performance that clearly indicates that the selection has been rejected during the push promotion performance.

[Modification 3]
The above was an example of notifying the winners and losers of the jackpot lottery, but it is also possible to notify the winners and losers of the lottery for the number of rounds when a jackpot is achieved, and the hearth win of the lottery that transitions to a high probability state after a jackpot game. good.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect B2-1]
A gaming machine that is equipped with an operation section that can be operated by a player and that can perform performances based on the operation of the operation section,
a first effect in which an operation unit image imitating the operation unit is stocked on the display screen; a second effect in which the operation unit image stocked by the first effect is consumed by the operation of the operation unit; In the middle of the second performance, it is possible to execute a third performance that can announce a win or loss in a specific lottery,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-1,
The first performance is a performance in which one or more of the operation unit images are stocked multiple times;
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-1 or aspect B2-2,
Suggesting the degree of expectation of winning in the specific lottery based on the stock number of the operation unit images in the first performance;
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B2-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B2-1 to B2-3,
The specific lottery in the third performance is a jackpot lottery;
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B2-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-4,
The third performance is a confirmation performance that notifies the confirmation of a jackpot.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B2-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B2-1 to B2-5,
It is possible to perform the third performance after the first performance without executing the second performance;
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B2-7]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-5,
The confirmed performance includes a full rotation performance in which the performance symbols are aligned.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The operation section image display effects A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 83 to 85. This operation unit image display effect can be executed in various types of effects such as a variation effect of a decorative pattern. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the operation section image display effect, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and executes the main control board. This is an effect that displays an image on the display screen 7a of the display device 7.

[Operation unit image display effect A]
FIG. 83 is a diagram for explaining the operation unit image display effect A. In the operation unit image display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 83(A), during a round game after a jackpot is confirmed, a effect ( A MAX acquisition challenge performance) will be held. Here, in a state where 4R has already been obtained as the number of rounds for a jackpot, it is a performance (round promotion performance) that aims to promote the number of rounds from 4R to the upper limit number of rounds 16R. On the display screen 7a of the display device 7, a character image MG1 of "MAX Acquisition Challenge!" is displayed. Note that MAX indicates the upper limit of the total number of rounds in this jackpot (for example, 16R). Further, the MAX acquisition challenge effect may be performed during the round game or may be performed before the round game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(B), a character image CG is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. Further, below the character image CG, the type of MAX acquisition challenge is displayed, and here, a character image MG2 of "Ippatsu!" is displayed. This suggests that a performance will be performed to determine whether or not MAX can be obtained with a single operation. Further, a button image BG and a sword image KG are displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. The sword image KG represents the appearance of the sword member 64. The sword image KG includes a sword button image KBG representing the appearance of the sword button 65 at the upper end portion of the sword member 64. Button image BG represents the appearance of production button 63. The sword image KG is displayed so as to overlap in front of the button image BG, and the portion of the button image BG where the sword image KG overlaps is difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(C), a character image CG is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. Further, on the right side of the display screen 7a, a character image MG3 of "Please!" is displayed. This indicates that the character is praying for MAX acquisition. A button image BG and a sword image KG are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap with the front of the sword image KG. The part of the sword image KG where the button image BG overlaps is difficult to see.
Moreover, the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed smaller than when they were displayed in FIG. 83(B).

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(D), the button image BG and sword image KG of FIG. 83(C) gradually disappear in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap in front of the sword image KG. Note that the character image CG and character image MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(E), a button image BG and a sword image KG are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap in front of the sword image KG. The part of the sword image KG where the button image BG overlaps is difficult to see. Moreover, the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed larger than when they were displayed in FIGS. 83(C) and (D). Note that the character image CG and character image MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(F), the button image BG and sword image KG of FIG. 83(E) gradually disappear in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap in front of the sword image KG. Note that the character image CG and character image MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(G), a button image BG and a sword image KG are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap in front of the sword image KG. The part of the sword image KG where the button image BG overlaps is difficult to see. Moreover, the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed larger than when they were displayed in FIGS. 83(E) and (F). Note that the character image CG and character image MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(H), the button image BG and sword image KG in FIG. 83(G) gradually disappear in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap in front of the sword image KG. Note that the character image CG and character image MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

Next, as shown in FIG. 83(I), a sword image KG, a timer bar TB, and an operation promotion image SG are displayed. The sword image KG is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. The timer bar TB indicates the valid period for accepting operation of the sword member 64. The timer bar TB is displayed in front of the sword image KG, overlapping the lower part of the sword image KG. The operation promotion image SG is an image that prompts the player to operate the sword member 64, and here a character image MG4 of "Push in!!!" is displayed. The operation promotion image SG is displayed in front of the sword image KG, overlapping the top of the sword image KG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(J), when the player presses the sword member 64 and confirms that MAX acquisition is achieved, a character image MG5 of "MAX acquisition!" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. .

[Operation unit image display effect B]
FIG. 84 is a diagram for explaining the operation unit image display effect B. In the operation unit image display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 84(A), during a round game after a jackpot is confirmed, a display ( A MAX acquisition challenge performance) will be held. Here, in a state where 4R has already been obtained as the number of rounds for a jackpot, it is a performance (round promotion performance) that aims to promote the number of rounds from 4R to the upper limit number of rounds 16R. On the display screen 7a of the display device 7, a character image MG1 of "MAX Acquisition Challenge!" is displayed. Note that MAX indicates the upper limit of the total number of rounds in this jackpot (for example, 16R). Further, the MAX acquisition challenge effect may be performed during the round game or may be performed before the round game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(B), a character image CG is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. Further, below the character image CG, the type of MAX acquisition challenge is displayed, and here, a character image MG2 of "Ippatsu!" is displayed. This suggests that a performance will be performed to determine whether or not MAX can be obtained with a single operation. Further, a button image BG and a sword image KG are displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. The sword image KG represents the appearance of the sword member 64. The sword image KG includes a sword button image KBG representing the appearance of the sword button 65 at the upper end portion of the sword member 64. The button image BG represents the appearance of the sword button 65, and is the same image as the sword button image KBG, except for the size difference. Button image BG represents the appearance of production button 63. The sword image KG is displayed so as to overlap in front of the button image BG, and the portion of the button image BG where the sword image KG overlaps is difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(C), a character image CG is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. Further, on the right side of the display screen 7a, a character image MG3 of "Please!" is displayed. This indicates that the character is praying for MAX acquisition. A button image BG and a sword image KG are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap in front of the sword image KG. The part of the sword image KG where the button image BG overlaps is somehow visible through the button image BG. That is, the button image BG is a transparent image. Moreover, the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed smaller than when they were displayed in FIG. 83(B).

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(D), the button image BG and sword image KG of FIG. 84(C) gradually disappear at the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap in front of the sword image KG. Note that the character image CG and character image MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(E), a button image BG and a sword image KG are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap in front of the sword image KG. The part of the sword image KG where the button image BG overlaps is somehow visible through the button image BG. Moreover, the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed larger than when they were displayed in FIGS. 84(C) and (D). Note that the character image CG and character image MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(F), the button image BG and sword image KG of FIG. 84(E) gradually disappear in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap in front of the sword image KG. Note that the character image CG and character image MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(G), a button image BG and a sword image KG are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap in front of the sword image KG. The part of the sword image KG where the button image BG overlaps is somehow visible through the button image BG. Moreover, the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed larger than when they were displayed in FIGS. 84(E) and (F). Note that the character image CG and character image MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(H), the button image BG and sword image KG in FIG. 84(G) gradually disappear at the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap in front of the sword image KG. Note that the character image CG and character image MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(I), a sword image KG, a timer bar TB, and an operation promotion image SG are displayed. The sword image KG is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. The timer bar TB indicates the valid period for accepting operation of the sword member 64. The timer bar TB is displayed in front of the sword image KG, overlapping the lower part of the sword image KG. The operation promotion image SG is an image that prompts the player to operate the sword member 64, and here a character image MG4 of "Push in!!!" is displayed. The operation promotion image SG is displayed in front of the sword image KG, overlapping the top of the sword image KG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84(J), when the player presses the sword member 64 and confirms that MAX acquisition is achieved, a character image MG5 of "MAX acquisition!" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. .

[Operation unit image display effect C]
FIG. 85 is a diagram for explaining the operation section image display effect C. In the operation unit image display effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 85(A), during a round game after a jackpot is confirmed, a display ( MAX acquisition challenge performance) will be held. Here, in a state where 4R has already been obtained as the number of rounds for a jackpot, it is a performance (round promotion performance) that aims to promote the number of rounds from 4R to the upper limit number of rounds 16R. On the display screen 7a of the display device 7, a character image MG1 of "MAX Acquisition Challenge!" is displayed. Note that MAX indicates the upper limit of the total number of rounds in this jackpot (for example, 16R). Further, the MAX acquisition challenge effect may be performed during the round game or may be performed before the round game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(B), a character image CG is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. Further, below the character image CG, the type of MAX acquisition challenge is displayed, and here, a character image MG2 of "Ippatsu!" is displayed. This suggests that a performance will be performed to determine whether or not MAX can be obtained with a single operation. Further, a button image BG and a sword image KG are displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. The sword image KG represents the appearance of the sword member 64. The sword image KG includes a sword button image KBG representing the appearance of the sword button 65 at the upper end portion of the sword member 64. Button image BG represents the appearance of production button 63. The sword image KG is displayed so as to overlap in front of the button image BG, and the portion of the button image BG where the sword image KG overlaps is difficult to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(C), a character image CG is displayed on the left side of the display screen 7a. Further, on the right side of the display screen 7a, a character image MG3 of "Please!" is displayed. This indicates that the character is praying for MAX acquisition. A button image BG and a sword image KG are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The sword image KG is displayed faintly and is somehow visible. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap in front of the sword image KG. The part of the sword image KG where the button image BG overlaps is somehow visible through the button image BG. That is, the button image BG is a transparent image. Moreover, the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed smaller than when they were displayed in FIG. 85(B).

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(D), a button image BG and a sword image KG are displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. The button image BG is displayed faintly and is somehow visible. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap in front of the sword image KG. The part of the sword image KG where the button image BG overlaps is somehow visible through the button image BG. That is, the button image BG is a transparent image. Moreover, the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed smaller than when they were displayed in FIG. 85(B). Note that the character image CG and character image MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(E), a button image BG and a sword image KG are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The sword image KG is displayed faintly and is somehow visible. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap in front of the sword image KG. The part of the sword image KG where the button image BG overlaps is somehow visible through the button image BG. That is, the button image BG is a transparent image. Moreover, the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed larger than when they were displayed in FIGS. 85(C) and (D). Note that the character image CG and character image MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(F), a button image BG and a sword image KG are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The button image BG is displayed faintly and is somehow visible. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap in front of the sword image KG. The part of the sword image KG where the button image BG overlaps is somehow visible through the button image BG. That is, the button image BG is a transparent image. Moreover, the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed larger than when they were displayed in FIGS. 85(C) and (D). Note that the character image CG and character image MG on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(G), a button image BG and a sword image KG are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The sword image KG is displayed faintly and is somehow visible. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap in front of the sword image KG. The part of the sword image KG where the button image BG overlaps is somehow visible through the button image BG. That is, the button image BG is a transparent image. Moreover, the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed larger than when they were displayed in FIGS. 85(E) and (F). Note that the character image CG and character image MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(H), a button image BG and a sword image KG are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The button image BG is displayed faintly and is somehow visible. At this time, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap in front of the sword image KG. The part of the sword image KG where the button image BG overlaps is somehow visible through the button image BG. That is, the button image BG is a transparent image. Moreover, the button image BG and the sword image KG are displayed larger than when they were displayed in FIGS. 85(E) and (F). Note that the character image CG and character image MG3 on the left and right sides of the display screen 7a are displayed as they are.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(I), a button image BG, a timer bar TB, and an operation promotion image SG are displayed. The button image BG is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. The button image BG represents the appearance of the production button 63, and is larger than the button images BG in FIGS. 85(B) to (H). The timer bar TB indicates the valid period for accepting the operation of the production button 63. The timer bar TB is displayed in front of the button image BG, overlapping the bottom of the button image BG. The operation promotion image SG is an image that prompts the player to operate the performance button 63, and here a character image MG6 of "Press!!!" is displayed. The operation promotion image SG is displayed in front of the button image BG, overlapping the top of the button image BG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85(J), when the player presses down the performance button 63 and cannot obtain the MAX, a character image MG7 of "MAX acquisition failed!" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Ru.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the operation unit image display effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 83 to 85, the first button image BG (first operation section image) and the sword image KG (second operation section image) are displayed so as to overlap. It is possible to perform the following effects and a second effect in which either one of the button image BG and the sword image KG is displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 83 to 85, in the first effect, the button image BG is displayed so as to overlap with the front of the sword image KG. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 83 to 85, in the first effect, the part of the sword image KG located behind the button image BG is visible through the button image BG. displayed as possible. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 83 to 85, before the first effect, a third effect is further executed in which the sword image KG is displayed in front of the button image BG so as to overlap. It is possible. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 83 to 85, in the third effect, the part of the button image BG located behind the sword image KG is difficult to see due to the sword image KG. . According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 83 to 85, the size of the button image BG displayed in the first performance is different from the size of the button image BG displayed in the third performance. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.

[Modified example]
Below, a modification of the operation unit image display effect will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In FIGS. 83 to 85, the operation unit image display performances A to C are performed during a round game, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it may be performed during a normal game, before a round game, during a jackpot game, etc.
[Modification 2]
In FIGS. 83 to 85, the operation unit image display performances A to C are performed in the performance (MAX acquisition challenge performance) that determines whether or not the maximum number of rounds can be obtained as the total number of rounds for a jackpot. It is not limited to this. For example, it may be performed in a performance that determines whether or not a particular performance will be successful, a performance that determines whether or not a particular performance is a jackpot, a performance that determines whether a normal jackpot or a variable probability jackpot, etc.
[Modification 3]
In FIGS. 83 to 85, in the operation section image display effects A to C, the size of the button image BG and the sword image KG gradually increases each time they are displayed, but for example, each time they are displayed, the size becomes smaller. They may be displayed in the same size, or they may be displayed in the same size.
[Modification 4]
In FIGS. 83 to 85, in the operation unit image display effects A to C, the button image BG is the same as the image representing the appearance of the effect button 63 and the sword button image KBG representing the appearance of the sword button 65 at the upper end of the sword member 64. Although images are used, images showing the appearance of the performance button 63, the sword member 64, the sword button 65, and various other operation parts can be used as the operation part images.
[Modification 5]
In FIGS. 83 to 85, a background image may be displayed in the background of the button image BG and the sword image KG, and the button image BG and the sword image KG may be displayed in front of the background image. Further, a portion of the background image where the button image BG and the sword image KG overlap may be made visible through the button image BG and the sword image KG.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect B3-1]
a first operation section and a second operation section that can be operated by the player;
A gaming machine comprising a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a first operation unit image representing the first operation unit,
One of the plurality of types of images is a second operation unit image representing the second operation unit,
a first effect in which the first operation unit image and the second operation unit image are displayed so as to overlap;
a second effect in which either one of the first operation unit image and the second operation unit image is displayed;
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect B3-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-1,
In the first effect, the first operation unit image is displayed so as to overlap in front of the second operation unit image.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect B3-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-2,
In the first effect, a portion of the second operation unit image located behind the first operation unit image is displayed so as to be visible through the first operation unit image.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect B3-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-2 or aspect B3-3,
Before the first effect, it is further possible to perform a third effect in which the second operation part image is displayed in front of the first operation part image so as to overlap.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect B3-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-4,
In the third effect, a portion of the first operation unit image located behind the second operation unit image is difficult to see due to the second operation unit image.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect B3-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-4 or aspect B3-5,
The size of the first operation unit image displayed in the first performance is different from the size of the first operation unit image displayed in the third performance,
A gaming machine characterized by:

The appearance/disappearance effects A to C of the effect buttons will be explained below using FIGS. 86 to 88. In FIGS. 86 to 88, the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 arranged around the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are omitted for ease of viewing the drawings, and the image display Various reserved images displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7 are also omitted for ease of viewing the drawing, and decorative patterns displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are also omitted for ease of viewing the drawing. be.

This production button appearance/disappearance production is performed during the variation production of decorative symbols (for example, the period from the start of variation to the stop of variation of the decorative symbols), during a jackpot game (jackpot production) in which a profit is given to the player, etc. This allows the player's intention to operate (press) the performance button 63 to be reflected in the progress of the performance. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 receives various commands from the sub-control board 90 (for example, a variable performance start command, a preliminary determination command, an opening command for various jackpot games, a round designation command for a jackpot game, and an ending command for a jackpot game). If the analysis includes an instruction to execute the appearance/disappearance effect of the effect button, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

Here, first, the effect button appearance/disappearance effect A will be explained, followed by the effect button appearance/disappearance effect B, and then the effect button appearance/disappearance effect C will be explained in order.

[Production button appearance/disappearance production A]
First, the appearance/disappearance effect A of the effect button will be explained with reference to FIG. 86. FIG. 86 is a diagram for explaining appearance/disappearance effect A of the effect button. The appearance/disappearance performance A of the performance button is selected from among a plurality of types of ready-to-reach performances and performed when a reach is formed during the fluctuating performance of decorative symbols. In the appearance/disappearance effect A of the effect button, first, as shown in FIG. 86(A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a. The variable display of decorative symbols (symbols: numbers "1" to "9") starts in a display mode in which the reels are rotated from the upper side to the lower side. When the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern is started, the decorative pattern that has been stopped and displayed changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed, resulting in a display mode that fluctuates at a high speed. Thereby, the background image placed behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. Immediately before the decorative pattern stops, it decelerates, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state, and is then stopped and displayed. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same pattern (number) (temporarily stopped at the number "7" here), and the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed in a variable manner to form a reach. ing.

When a reach is formed, in order to prompt the player to operate (press) the performance button 63, a first performance button image BTN imitating the performance button 63 is displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. is displayed in a predetermined light emitting manner. The English word "PUSH" is engraved in the portion of the first performance button image corresponding to the pressing operation surface of the performance button 63. In addition, the "predetermined lighting mode" may be based on the expectation of a jackpot (variable performance start command), for example, white flashing → blue flashing → green flashing → red flashing → gold flashing (yellow flashing) → seven-color flashing (rainbow flashing) The expectation level of winning the jackpot is set high in the order of blinking (high chance of jackpot).

When the reach is formed, it is the beginning of the appearance/disappearance effect execution period of the effect button in which the effect button appearance/disappearance effect can be performed, and timing starts and the effect button is not pressed until the end of the effect button appearance/disappearance effect execution period. It is now possible to perform the appearance and disappearance of. In other words, the performance button appearance/disappearance performance execution period defines a valid period in which the performance button appearance/disappearance performance can be performed, and it does not reflect the player's intention to operate (press) the performance button 63. This is a period during which the appearance and disappearance of the production button can be reflected in the progress of the production. In addition, in this embodiment, the appearance/disappearance effect execution period of the effect button is set to, for example, 6 seconds, but it may be shorter (e.g., 4 seconds) or longer (e.g., 8 seconds). good.

The first performance button image BTN is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and when the player operates (presses) the performance button 63, the display on the image display device 7 as shown in FIG. 86(B) On the upper left side of the screen 7a, there is an image that is the same as the first production button image BTN (an image with all the same characteristic information such as button shape, size, and light emitting mode) or a similar image (a part or all of the characteristic information is the same). The second effect button image BTN2 is displayed as a similar image (the light emitting mode may be the same or different), and the player is prompted to operate (press) the effect button 63. A first performance button image BTN imitating the performance button 63 is placed at the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and is displayed in a state in which a predetermined light emission mode continues. .

When the player operates (presses) the performance button 63 again, the second performance button image BTN2 displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 disappears, as shown in FIG. 86(C). (Disappear). At this time, the second effect button image BTN2 disappears (disappears) from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, whereas the first effect button image BTN is displayed as an image with the predetermined light emission mode continued. It is displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7.

Further, when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, a second effect button image BTN2 appears on the right center side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, as shown in FIG. 86(D). A first performance button image BTN imitating the performance button 63 is arranged at the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in order to prompt the player to operate (press) the performance button 63. and the predetermined light emitting mode is displayed continuously.

When the player further operates (presses) the effect button 63, the second effect button image BTN2 displayed on the right center side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is displayed as shown in FIG. 86(E). Disappear (disappear). At this time, the second effect button image BTN2 disappears (disappears) from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, whereas the first effect button image BTN is displayed as an image with the predetermined light emission mode continued. It is displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7.

After that, when the end of the performance execution period for the appearance and disappearance of the performance button, that is, when the valid period in which the appearance and disappearance of the performance button can be performed ends, as shown in FIG. 86(F), the left decorative pattern 8L is a number. "7", the middle decorative pattern 8C becomes the number "9", and the right decorative pattern 8R becomes the number "7" are stopped and displayed, and the miss is confirmed and displayed. In this embodiment, in the appearance/disappearance effect A of the effect button, the left decorative pattern 8L is the number "7", the middle decorative pattern 8C is the number "9", and the right decorative pattern 8R is the number "7" on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. "7" was stopped and displayed, and the error was confirmed, but on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are the same pattern (for example, the number " 7'') are all stopped and displayed, a jackpot game (jackpot performance) in which a jackpot is awarded and a profit is given to the player will be played.

Note that in a state where the reach shown in FIG. 86(A) is formed and the first performance button image BTN is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the player does not operate (press) the performance button 63 at all. (operation)), the appearance/disappearance effect of the effect button shown in FIGS. 86(B) to 86(E) performed within the effect button appearance/disappearance effect execution period is not performed, and the effect button appearance/disappearance effect is executed. At the end of the period, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R shown in FIG. 86(F) are stopped and displayed.

In this way, the second performance button image BTN2 appears at a random position (arbitrary position) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 so as not to overlap with the first performance button image BTN. There is.

[Production button appearance/disappearance production B]
Next, the appearance/disappearance effect B of the effect button will be explained with reference to FIG. 87. FIG. 87 is a diagram for explaining appearance/disappearance effect B of the effect button. The appearance/disappearance performance B of the performance button is selected from among a plurality of types of ready-to-reach performances when a reach is formed during the fluctuating performance of decorative symbols. In the appearance/disappearance effect B of the effect button, first, as shown in FIG. 87(A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a. The variable display of decorative symbols (symbols: numbers "1" to "9") starts in a display mode in which the reels are rotated from the upper side to the lower side. When the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern is started, the decorative pattern that has been stopped and displayed changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed, resulting in a display mode that fluctuates at a high speed. Thereby, the background image placed behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. Immediately before the decorative pattern stops, it decelerates, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state, and is then stopped and displayed. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same pattern (number) (temporarily stopped at the number "7" here), and the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed in a variable manner to form a reach. ing.

When a reach is formed, in order to prompt the player to operate (press) the performance button 63, a first performance button image BTN imitating the performance button 63 is displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. is displayed in a predetermined light emitting manner. The English word "PUSH" is engraved in the portion of the first performance button image corresponding to the pressing operation surface of the performance button 63. In addition, the "predetermined lighting mode" may be based on the expectation of a jackpot (variable performance start command), for example, white flashing → blue flashing → green flashing → red flashing → gold flashing (yellow flashing) → seven-color flashing (rainbow flashing) The expectation level of winning the jackpot is set high in the order of blinking (high chance of jackpot).

When the reach is formed, it is the beginning of the appearance/disappearance effect execution period of the effect button in which the effect button appearance/disappearance effect can be performed, and timing starts and the effect button is not pressed until the end of the effect button appearance/disappearance effect execution period. It is now possible to perform the appearance and disappearance of. In other words, the performance button appearance/disappearance performance execution period defines a valid period in which the performance button appearance/disappearance performance can be performed, and it does not reflect the player's intention to operate (press) the performance button 63. This is a period during which the appearance and disappearance of the production button can be reflected in the progress of the production. In addition, in this embodiment, the appearance/disappearance effect execution period of the effect button is set to, for example, 6 seconds, but it may be shorter (e.g., 4 seconds) or longer (e.g., 8 seconds). good.

The first performance button image BTN is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and when the player operates (presses) the performance button 63, the display on the image display device 7 is displayed as shown in FIG. 87(B). Hole images MH imitating a mole's hole are displayed on the left and right sides near the top of the screen 7a, respectively, and a hole image MH imitating a mole's hole is formed in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, Hole images MH resembling mole holes are displayed on the left and right sides near the bottom of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, respectively, and five holes resembling mole holes are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Image MH is displayed. Here, the five hole images MH have the same shape, the same size, and the same color.

An image imitating a mole with a smiling face (hereinafter referred to as "smiling mole image") is displayed from the hole image MH on the left side near the top of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a manner in which MCH1 shows its face. , an image that is the same as the first effect button image BTN (an image whose characteristic information such as button shape, size, and light emitting mode are all the same) or a similar image (the characteristic information and the same The second effect button image BTN2 is arranged and displayed as a similar image (the light emitting mode may be the same or different). At this time, in order to prompt the player to operate (press) the performance button 63, a first performance button image BTN imitating the performance button 63 is arranged at the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A predetermined light emitting mode is displayed continuously.

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 again, as shown in FIG. Disappear (disappear). At this time, the second effect button image BTN2 disappears (disappears) from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and an image imitating a mole with a dizzy and dizzy face (hereinafter referred to as (referred to as "Kurakura Mole Image") is displayed in a changed form to MCH2. Note that while the second effect button image BTN2 disappears (disappears) from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the first effect button image BTN is displayed on the image display device while the predetermined light emitting mode continues. 7 is displayed on the display screen 7a.

When the player further operates (presses) the production button 63, as shown in FIG. An image imitating a mole with a masked face (hereinafter referred to as a "glasses mole image")" MCH3 is displayed in a manner that shows its face. At this time, in order to prompt the player to operate (press) the performance button 63, a first performance button image BTN imitating the performance button 63 is arranged at the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A predetermined light emitting mode is displayed continuously. Note that the second performance button image BTN2 may be displayed in a manner that it is placed above the spectacled mole image MCH3 together with the spectacled mole image MCH3.

When the player again operates (presses) the production button 63 multiple times (three times in this case), the display changes from the spectacled mole image MCH3 to the light-headed mole image MCH2, as shown in FIG. 87(E). Ru. Unlike the smiling mole image MCH1, the glasses mole image MCH3 is resistant to being hit, and when the glasses mole image MCH3 is appearing, unless the production button 63 is operated (pressing operation) multiple times (here, 3 times), it is not easily hit. The spectacled mole image MCH3 does not change to the light-headed mole image MCH2. Note that the first performance button image BTN is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a state where a predetermined light emission mode is continued. In addition, if the second performance button image BTN2 is arranged and displayed above the spectacled mole image MCH3 together with the spectacled mole image MCH3, the player presses the performance button 63 multiple times (in this case, 3 times). When the second effect button image BTN2 disappears (disappears) from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, it is displayed in a changed form from the spectacled mole image MCH3 to the light-headed mole image MCH2. be done.

When the player further operates (presses) the effect button 63, the smiling mole image MCH1 appears from the hole image MH on the right side near the top of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, as shown in FIG. 87(F). At the same time, the second effect button image BTN2 is displayed in a manner that it appears above the smiling mole image MCH1. At this time, in order to prompt the player to operate (press) the performance button 63, a first performance button image BTN imitating the performance button 63 is arranged at the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A predetermined light emitting mode is displayed continuously.

When the player operates (presses) the performance button 63 again, the second performance button image BTN2 that was displayed on the right side near the top of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is displayed as shown in FIG. 87(G). Disappear (disappear). At this time, the second effect button image BTN2 disappears (disappears) from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and is displayed in a changed form from the smiling mole image MCH1 to the light-headed mole image MCH2. Note that while the second effect button image BTN2 disappears (disappears) from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the first effect button image BTN is displayed on the image display device while the predetermined light emitting mode continues. 7 is displayed on the display screen 7a.

Further, when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the smiling mole image MCH1 appears from the hole image MH in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, as shown in FIG. 87(H). Is displayed. At this time, in order to prompt the player to operate (press) the performance button 63, a first performance button image BTN imitating the performance button 63 is arranged at the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A predetermined light emitting mode is displayed continuously.

When the player operates (presses) the production button 63 again, the display changes from the smiling mole image MCH1 to the light-headed mole image MCH2, as shown in FIG. 87(I). Note that the first performance button image BTN is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a state where a predetermined light emission mode is continued.

After that, when the end of the performance execution period for the appearance and disappearance of the performance button, that is, when the valid period in which the appearance and disappearance of the performance button can be performed ends, as shown in FIG. 87(J), the left decorative pattern 8L is a number. "7", the middle decorative pattern 8C becomes the number "9", and the right decorative pattern 8R becomes the number "7" are stopped and displayed, and the miss is confirmed and displayed.

In this embodiment, in the appearance/disappearance effect B of the effect button, the left decorative pattern 8L is the number "7", the middle decorative pattern 8C is the number "9", and the right decorative pattern 8R is the number "7" on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. "7" was stopped and displayed, and the error was confirmed, but on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are the same pattern (for example, the number " 7'') are all stopped and displayed, a jackpot game (jackpot performance) in which a jackpot is awarded and a profit is given to the player will be played.

Note that in a state where the reach shown in FIG. 87(A) is formed and the first performance button image BTN is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the player does not operate (press) the performance button 63 at all. operation), the button appearance/disappearance effect shown in FIGS. 87(B) to 87(I), which is performed during the effect button appearance/disappearance effect execution period, is not performed, and the effect button appearance/disappearance effect is executed. At the end of the period, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R shown in FIG. 87(J) are stopped and displayed.

In this way, the second effect button image BTN2 appears at a fixed position where the smiling mole image MCH1 and the spectacled mole image MCH3 appear.

[Production button appearance/disappearance production C]
Next, the appearance/disappearance effect C of the effect button will be explained with reference to FIG. 88. FIG. 88 is a diagram for explaining appearance/disappearance effect C of the effect button. The appearance/disappearance performance C of the performance button is performed during a jackpot game (jackpot performance) in which a profit is given to the player, and is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when the jackpot performance is This will not be done if there is a so-called "holding series" in which there is a jackpot among the held balls before the end of the game). The presence or absence of this pending series is determined based on the jackpot preliminary determination result (in the case of a jackpot, the jackpot type preliminary determination result) and the fluctuation pattern preliminary determination result, which are included in the preliminary determination command. In addition, if the performance of the held series is not performed, in other words, before the jackpot performance ends, there is no held ball that will become a jackpot.

In the appearance/disappearance performance C of the performance button, first, as shown in FIG. During the period, a performance mode selection screen is displayed that allows the player to select a performance mode after the end of the jackpot performance (jackpot game). During the specific period, there is a first period for selecting a production mode (production mode selection period), and a mode transition to the selected production mode after the first period (production mode selection period) has elapsed. A second period (performance mode confirmation notification period). In this embodiment, in a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) immediately before the end of the jackpot performance (jackpot game) (that is, in a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) immediately before the end of the jackpot performance (jackpot game)), The beginning of this predetermined period coincides with the end of the specific period in order to carry out a catchphrase display in which the catchphrase of the gaming machine manufacturer is displayed, and an addictive prevention display in which a warning against dependence (addiction) on the game is displayed. ing.

When the performance mode selection screen is displayed, a first performance button image BTN imitating the performance button 63 is displayed in order to prompt the player to select the performance mode by operating (pressing) the performance button 63. It is arranged at the lower center of the display screen 7a of the device 7 and displayed in a predetermined light emitting manner. The English word "PUSH" is engraved in the portion of the first performance button image corresponding to the pressing operation surface of the performance button 63. Note that the "predetermined light emission mode" is, for example, blinking white light.

The production modes consisting of A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode are displayed in a manner in which the reels rotate, and each time the production button 63 is operated (pressed), the reels rotate and a specific area is displayed. A selection section SEL in which the performance mode that has reached 1 is displayed larger than other performance modes is displayed in a rectangular area from the center to the upper left corner of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The performance mode located in this specific area becomes the selected performance mode. Note that when the production mode selection screen is displayed for the first time, A mode is placed in a specific area as a default, but the next time the production mode selection screen is displayed, the default ( In other words, mode A) may always be arranged in a specific area, or the selected production mode may be arranged in a specific area when the production mode selection screen was displayed last time.

To the right of the selection section SEL, there is a demonstration area DS, which explains the contents of the currently selected production mode using various images and various characters, in a rectangular area from the center to the upper right corner of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Is displayed. The demo area DS is formed as a rectangular area, and the characters "DEMO" indicating the demonstration screen of the production mode are displayed on the upper left side of the demo area DS.

In mode A, a production with the theme of "sun" is promoted, and a theme image PM imitating the "sun" is displayed as an animation on the left side of the demo area DS, and the same image as the first production button image BTN is displayed. (Images with all the same characteristic information such as button shape, size, lighting mode, etc.) or similar images (images with some or all similarity to the characteristic information (the lighting modes may be the same or different) )), the second effect button image BTN2 is arranged and displayed on the lower right side of the demonstration area DS. Note that an explanatory text MME regarding the progress of the performance in the A mode is displayed on the upper right side of the demo area DS.

When the player operates (presses) the production button 63 in a state where the A mode is located in the specific area of the selection part SEL, the mode is located in the specific area of the selection part SEL, as shown in FIG. 88(B). As the A mode moves downward, the D mode, which is placed below the A mode, is displayed with the reels rotating from the bottom to the top, and the B mode, which is placed above the A mode, is identified from above. The reels are displayed as rotating towards the area. Note that even if the player operates (presses) the performance button 63, the first performance button image BTN continues to be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

In B mode, a performance with the theme of "clouds" is advanced, and a theme image PM imitating "clouds" is displayed as a moving image in the center of the demonstration area DS, and an explanatory text MME about the progress of the performance in B mode is displayed. is displayed on the upper right side of the demo area DS.

When the player operates (presses) the production button 63 in a state where the B mode is located in the specific area of the selection part SEL, as shown in FIG. 88(C), the B mode is located in the specific area of the selection part SEL. As the B mode moves downward, the A mode, which is placed below the B mode, is displayed with the reels rotating from the bottom to the top, and the C mode, which is placed above the B mode, is identified from above. The reels are displayed as rotating towards the area. Note that even if the player operates (presses) the performance button 63, the first performance button image BTN continues to be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

In C mode, a performance with the theme of "rain" is progressed, and a theme image PM imitating "rain" is displayed as an animation in the center of the demo area DS, and an explanatory text MME about the progress of the performance in C mode is displayed. is displayed on the upper right side of the demo area DS.

When the player operates (presses) the production button 63 in a state where the C mode is located in a specific area of the selection part SEL, as shown in FIG. 88(D), the C mode is located in the specific area of the selection part SEL. As the C mode moves downward, the B mode, which is placed below the C mode, is displayed with the reels rotating from the bottom to the top, and the D mode, which is placed above the C mode, is identified from above. The reels are displayed as rotating towards the area. Note that even if the player operates (presses) the performance button 63, the first performance button image BTN continues to be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

In D mode, a performance with the theme of "snow" is progressed, and a theme image PM imitating "snow" is displayed as a moving image in the center of the demonstration area DS, and an explanatory text MME about the progress of the performance in D mode is displayed. is displayed on the upper right side of the demo area DS.

When the player operates (presses) the production button 63 in a state where the D mode is located in the specific area of the selection part SEL, the D mode is located in the specific area of the selection part SEL, as shown in FIG. 88(E). As the D mode moves downward, the C mode, which is placed below the D mode, is displayed with the reels rotating from the bottom to the top, and the A mode, which is placed above the D mode, is identified from above. The reels are displayed in a manner that they rotate toward the area, and the A mode becomes a display manner in which the reels are located in the specific area again. Note that even if the player operates (presses) the performance button 63, the first performance button image BTN continues to be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

After that, in the state where the A mode is in the display mode located in the specific area of the selection section SEL, the first period for selecting the production mode (production mode selection period) has elapsed, and the display mode is changed to the selected production mode. At the start of the second period (production mode confirmation notification period) for notifying the mode transition, as shown in FIG. is displayed in a manner that spreads toward the four corners (enlarged manner), and on the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is a theme imitating the "sun" that is being performed based on the theme of "sun" in A mode. The image PM is displayed in a large size, and a message MG informing that the selected production mode is A mode is displayed in a large size on the right side of the theme image PM from the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 toward the center of the right side. , the second performance button image BTN2 is displayed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

After that, the second period (production mode confirmation notification period) has elapsed, and the start of this predetermined period arrives in a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) immediately before the end of the jackpot production (jackpot game) (that is, At the beginning of a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) immediately before the end of the jackpot effect (jackpot game), the catchphrase of the gaming machine manufacturer is displayed, alerting people against dependence on (addiction) to the game. is displayed, and at the end of the predetermined period, that is, at the end of the jackpot effect (jackpot game), as shown in FIG. A theme image PM imitating an advancing "sun" is displayed in a large size on the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and a second effect button image BTN2 is displayed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It will be displayed.

Then, based on the establishment of the starting condition (for example, entry of the game ball into the second starting hole (second starting winning hole, second ball entering hole, variable starting hole) 21), the front of the theme image PM is The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a display mode in which the reels are rotated from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and the decorative patterns (symbols: number "1" to number "9") are displayed. Fluctuation display starts. When the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern is started, the decorative pattern that has been stopped and displayed changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed, resulting in a display mode that fluctuates at a high speed. Thereby, the theme image PM, which is a background image placed behind the decorative pattern, can be visually recognized through the semi-transparent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. Immediately before the decorative pattern stops, it decelerates, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state, and is then stopped and displayed.

In this way, in the appearance/disappearance effect C of the effect button, each time the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the reels rotate in the effect modes consisting of A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode. The effect mode that reaches the specific area as the reels rotate is displayed larger than other effect modes. At this time, in the demo area DS, when the A mode reaches the specific area, the second effect button image BTN2 appears, and when the B mode reaches the specific area, the second effect button image BTN2 appears from the demo area DS. It will disappear (disappear). In other words, in the effect button appearance/disappearance effect C, when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the second effect button image BTN2 appears on the display screen 7a (demonstration area DS) of the image display device 7. It is designed to appear or disappear (disappear).

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the appearance/disappearance effect of the effect button is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 86(A) to 86(E) of appearance/disappearance effect A of the effect buttons, the effect button 63 (operating means) that can be operated by the player, The image display device 7 includes an image display device 7 (display means) capable of displaying various images, and a first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) imitating the effect button 63 (operation means) is provided on the image display device 7. (display means), the second effect button image BTN2 (second effect button image BTN2) imitating the effect button 63 (operating means) is generated based on the effect that the effect button 63 (operating means) is operated (pressing operation). 2 operation means image) is displayed (appears) on the image display device 7 (display means), and the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) is displayed (appears) on the image display device 7 (display means). At least one of the second effect that is hidden (disappeared from the image display device 7 (display means)) can be executed. According to this configuration, based on the fact that the production button 63 (operation means) has been operated (press operation), the second production button image BTN2 (second operation means image) imitating the production button 63 (operation means) is generated. ) can be displayed (appeared) on the image display device 7 (display means) or hidden (disappeared (disappeared) from the image display device 7 (display means)). It is possible to entertain people and improve their interest. The same applies to the effect button appearance/disappearance effect B shown in FIGS. 87(A) to 87(I) and the effect button appearance/disappearance effect C shown in FIGS. 88(A) to 88(E).

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 86(A) to 86(E) of appearance/disappearance effect A of the effect button, the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) is the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) in the first effect in which the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) is displayed (appears) on the image display device 7 (display means). (means image) and is displayed in a different position. For example, while the first performance button image BTN (first operation means image) is displayed at the bottom center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the second performance button image BTN2 (second (operating means image) is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and on the right center side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. According to this configuration, the image display device 7 (display Since the game is displayed on the screen (means), it is possible to visually entertain the player and increase his/her interest.
In the effect button appearance/disappearance effect B shown in FIGS. 87(A) to 87(I), the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) is placed in the lower center of the image display device 7 (display means). In contrast, the second production button image BTN2 (second operation means image) is displayed on the upper left side of the image display device 7 (display means) or on the lower right side of the image display device 7 (display means). It is the same because it is displayed.
In the effect button appearance/disappearance effect C shown in FIGS. 88(A) to 88(E), the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) is placed in the lower center of the image display device 7 (display means). In contrast, a second production button is displayed in the demo area DS (lower right side of the demo area DS) located in the rectangular area from the center to the upper right corner of the image display device 7 (display means). The same applies because image BTN2 (second operation means image) is displayed.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 86(A) to 86(E) of appearance/disappearance effect A of the effect button, the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) when a reach is formed during the fluctuating effect of decorative symbols (during a predetermined effect), and the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). can be displayed after the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). According to this configuration, when a reach is formed during a fluctuating performance of decorative symbols (during a predetermined performance), the first performance button image BTN (first operation means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means ), the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) can be displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). After the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) is actually displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). When displayed on the display device 7 (display means), the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) appears in a display mode, which can visually entertain the player and add interest. It is possible to improve the The same applies to the appearance/disappearance effect B of the effect buttons shown in FIGS. 87(A) to 87(I).
In the appearance/disappearance performance C of the performance buttons shown in FIGS. 88(A) to 88(E), the end of the jackpot performance (jackpot game) during a specific period from the beginning to the end of the jackpot performance (jackpot game) When a performance mode selection screen that allows the player to select a subsequent performance mode is displayed (during a predetermined performance), the first performance button image BTN (first operation means image) is displayed on the image display device. After being displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) when the A mode is selected. Therefore, after the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), the A mode can be actually selected. A display mode in which the second performance button image BTN2 (second operation means image) appears when the second performance button image BTN2 (second operation means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) As a result, players can be visually entertained and their interest can be increased.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 86(A) to 86(E) of appearance/disappearance effect A of the effect button, the image display device 7 (display means) has the left decorative pattern 8L, The reach effect can be displayed in the variable effect display of the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R, and the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). The predetermined performance is a reach performance. According to this configuration, the timing at which the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) can be set to the period during which the reach effect is being performed. , In addition to the image by the reach effect, after the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) appears, the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) further appears. Therefore, it is possible to visually entertain the players and increase their interest. The same applies to the appearance/disappearance effect B of the effect buttons shown in FIGS. 87(A) to 87(I).

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 88(A) to 88(E) of the appearance/disappearance effect C of the effect button, the image display device 7 (display means) displays the jackpot effect (the winning game The predetermined performance in which the first performance button image BTN (first operation means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) is a jackpot performance (performance of a winning game). It is. According to this configuration, the timing at which the first performance button image BTN (first operation means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) is during the period in which the jackpot performance (performance of the winning game) is performed. This can be a specific period of time, and in addition to the image from the jackpot effect (the effect of the winning game), after the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) appears, the second effect button is displayed. Since the image BTN2 (second operating means image) can appear, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be increased.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 86(A) to 86(E) of appearance/disappearance effect A of the effect button, the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) The color and the color of the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) are the same color. According to this configuration, the color of the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) and the color of the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) are displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). ), it is possible to visually entertain the players and increase their interest. The same applies to the effect button appearance/disappearance effect B shown in FIGS. 87(A) to 87(I) and the effect button appearance/disappearance effect C shown in FIGS. 88(A) to 88(E).

[Modified example]
Below, a modified example of the appearance/disappearance effect of the effect button is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the effect button appearance/disappearance effect A shown in FIG. 86, the effect button appearance/disappearance effect B shown in FIG. 87, and the effect button appearance/disappearance effect C shown in FIG. The first production button image BTN (first operation means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), and based on the fact that the production button 63 (operation means) has been operated (pressed operation), A first effect in which a second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) imitating the effect button 63 (operation means) is displayed (appears) on the image display device 7 (display means), and a second effect A second effect in which the effect button image BTN2 (second operating means image) is not displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) (disappears (disappears) from the image display device 7 (display means)); I was able to do one or the other. However, the sword member 64 or the sword button 65 may be used instead of the production button 63 (operating means). In this case, on the image display device 7 (display means), the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) and the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) are displayed on the sword member 64. The image imitates the sword button 65.

[Modification 2]
In the effect button appearance/disappearance effect A shown in FIG. 86, when the effect button 63 is operated (pressed), the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) disappears from the image display device 7 (display means). (disappeared), and when the production button 63 was operated (pressed) again, the second production button image BTN2 (second operation means image) was displayed (appeared) on the image display device 7 (display means). . However, after the second effect button image BTN2 (second operating means image) disappears (disappears) from the image display device 7 (display means), the effect button 63 is pressed multiple times (for example, twice, three times, ..., a predetermined fixed number of times among 9 and 10 times, or a random number of times set in real time by lottery in the production control microcomputer 91 (image control microcomputer 101) from 2 to 10 times). You may also perform an operation (press operation). In this way, each time the effect button 63 is operated (pressed), the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) is erased (disappeared) or displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). This can contribute to resolving the monotony of having to (appear). Also, depending on the number of times the player operates (presses) the performance button 63, the second performance button image BTN2 (second operation means image) may disappear (disappear) on the image display device 7 (display means). , are displayed (appeared), etc., so that the player himself/herself can discover the correspondence relationship such as , display (appearance), etc., so that the act of operating (pressing) the production button 63 is less likely to feel monotonous, thereby suppressing a decrease in the desire to play. It can also contribute to this.

[Modification 3]
In the effect button appearance/disappearance effect A in FIG. 86 and the effect button appearance/disappearance effect B in FIG. 87, the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) disappears from the image display device 7 (display means). (disappears) and is displayed (appears), the size of the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) is gradually increased toward the maximum size. Good too. In this case, each time the production button 63 is operated (pressed), the size of the second production button image BTN2 (second operation means image) is gradually increased toward the maximum size. Alternatively, the size may be stopped at a constant size from just before reaching the maximum size (a size several steps before the maximum size (in the middle)). In this way, it is possible to increase the expectation that a jackpot game (jackpot effect) that gives a profit to the player will occur due to the operation (press operation) of the effect button 63, and This can contribute to making it difficult for players to become passive.

[Modification 4]
In the effect button appearance/disappearance effect A in FIG. 86 and the effect button appearance/disappearance effect B in FIG. 87, the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) disappears from the image display device 7 (display means). (disappears) and is displayed (appears), the expectation is that a jackpot game (jackpot performance) will occur in which the color of the second performance button image BTN2 (second operation means image) gives a profit to the player. It may also be possible to change the color stepwise to a color that enhances the feeling. For example, the color gradually changes from white → blue → green → red → golden yellow → seven colors (rainbow colors). This can contribute to making it difficult for the player to become passive in operating (pressing) the performance button 63.

[Modification 5]
In the appearance/disappearance effect C of the effect button shown in FIG. 88, a theme image PM imitating the theme of each mode is displayed as a moving image on the left side of the demonstration area DS. Such videos are videos that explain the flow of the production of each mode, characters, backgrounds, scenes, etc., and may be 3D CG videos, animation videos, or movie videos. It may be a one-shot scene. Note that a still image may be used instead of a moving image.

[Modification 6]
In the effect button appearance/disappearance effect A in FIG. 86, the effect button appearance/disappearance effect B in FIG. 87, and the effect button appearance/disappearance effect C in FIG. 88, a first effect button image imitating the effect button 63 (operating means) is used. With the BTN (first operation means image) being displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), the production button 63 (operation means) is pressed based on the production button 63 (operation means) being operated (pressing operation). The second effect button image BTN2 (second operating means image) imitating the first effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) is displayed (appeared) on the image display device 7 (display means), and the second effect button image BTN2 ( It was possible to execute a second effect in which the second operation means image) is hidden from the image display device 7 (display means) (disappears (disappears) from the image display device 7 (display means)). . However, in a state where the first performance button image BTN (first operation means image) imitating the performance button 63 (operation means) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), the performance button 63 (operation means) Every time is operated (pressing operation), a second production button image BTN2 (second operation means image) imitating the production button 63 (operation means) is displayed (appears) on the image display device 7 (display means). For example, when the production button 63 (operation means) is operated (pressed) 10 times, the second production button image BTN2 (second operation means image) is executed. It may be possible to perform a second effect in which the image is hidden from the image display device 7 (display means) (disappears (disappears) from the image display device 7 (display means)). 63 (operation means) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), the production button 63 (operation means) is operated (pressed). operation), a second performance button image BTN2 (second operation means image) imitating the performance button 63 (operation means) is hidden on the image display device 7 (display means). 7 (display means)), and for example, when the presentation button 63 (operation means) is operated (pressed) 10 times, the second presentation button 63 (disappears) is executed. It may be possible to perform a first effect in which the image BTN2 (second operation means image) is displayed (appeared) on the image display device 7 (display means).

[Modification 7]
In the appearance/disappearance effect C of the effect button shown in FIG. 88, the first effect button image BTN (first operating means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) during the jackpot effect (the effect of the winning game). Afterwards, the second performance button image BTN2 (second operation means image) was displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). However, as a performance of a winning game, in addition to a jackpot performance, during a performance of a small winning game, after the first performance button image BTN (first operation means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). The second performance button image BTN2 (second operation means image) may be displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), or during the performance in a small winning game instead of the jackpot performance, the second performance button image BTN2 (second operation means image) may be displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). After the first effect button image BTN (first operation means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), the second effect button image BTN2 (second operation means image) is displayed on the image display device 7 ( display means).

[Modified example 8]
The appearance/disappearance effect of the effect button A shown in FIG. 86, the appearance/disappearance effect of the effect button B shown in FIG. 87, and the appearance/disappearance effect of the effect button C shown in FIG. A production may be added.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect B4-1]
an operation means that can be operated by a player;
A gaming machine comprising a display means capable of displaying various images,
Based on the operation of the operation means in a state where a first operation means image imitating the operation means is displayed on the display means,
a first effect in which a second operating means image imitating the operating means is displayed on the display means;
a second effect in which the second operation means image is not displayed on the display means;
capable of performing at least one of the following;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect B4-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B4-1,
The second operating means image is displayed at a different position from the first operating means image in the first effect,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect B4-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B4-1 or aspect B4-2,
The first operating means image is displayed on the display means during a predetermined performance,
The second operating means image can be displayed after the first operating means image is displayed on the display means,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect B4-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect B4-3,
The display means is capable of displaying a reach effect in a variable effect display of the decorative pattern,
The predetermined performance is the reach performance,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect B4-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect B4-3,
The display means is capable of displaying a performance of a winning game,
The predetermined performance is a performance of the winning game,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect B4-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B4-1 to B4-5,
The color of the first operating means image and the color of the second operating means image are the same color,
A gaming machine characterized by:

The winning notification performances A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 89 to 91. This winning notification performance can be executed during the variation performance of the performance symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the winning notification effect, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays it on the main display device. This is an effect that displays an image on the display screen 7a of 7.

For all winning notification performances A to C, when the performance button 63 is activated during the battle performance and the number of operations of the performance button 63 reaches 1, 5, 8, 12, or 14 times, the jackpot is confirmed. This is a performance that carries out the following. If the jackpot confirmation effect is not executed even after reaching the 14th time, the loss is confirmed.

[Winner notification performance A]
FIG. 89 is a diagram for explaining the winning notification performance A.
First, as shown in FIG. 89(A), a variation start effect is executed. Here, a state in which the left presentation pattern 8L, the middle presentation pattern 8C, and the right presentation pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner is shown. A pending image 9B is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The pending images 9B are displayed according to the number of stored second special symbols, and here, three pending images 9B are displayed. The pending digested image 9C corresponds to the production symbols (production symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) currently being changed on the display screen 7a. It is assumed that the fluctuation occurs during a time-saving game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89(B), a reach formation effect is executed. Here, it is shown that both the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R have stopped at "7".
Next, as shown in FIG. 89(C), a battle effect (start) is executed. In the battle performance (start), an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB appear. After this, a battle takes place between the friendly character CRA and the enemy character CRB, and when the friendly character CRA finally defeats the enemy character CRB, it becomes a jackpot. In the battle performance (start), the input of the performance button 63 becomes valid. That is, although there is no display on the display screen 7a that prompts the user to press the production button 63, the production control microcomputer 91 controls the production button 63 based on the signal from the production button detection switch 63a input via the relay board 108. Detects operations. The actual number of operations of the effect button 63 is shown on the right side of the display screen 7a. It is assumed that the operation has been performed a total of five times so far.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89(D), a battle effect (initial stage) is executed. In the battle performance (initial stage), the enemy character CRB has the upper hand and is driven to corner the ally character CRA to the right. In the battle performance (initial stage), the input of the performance button 63 becomes valid. The actual number of operations of the effect button 63 is shown on the right side of the display screen 7a. It is assumed that a total of 10 operations have been performed so far.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89(E), a battle performance (middle stage) is executed. In the battle performance (middle stage), an ally character CRA becomes dominant and a performance is performed in which the enemy character CRB is cornered to the left. In the battle performance (mid-term), the input of the performance button 63 becomes valid. The actual number of operations of the effect button 63 is shown on the right side of the display screen 7a. It is assumed that a total of 12 operations have been performed so far.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89(F), a jackpot confirmation effect is executed. The jackpot confirmation performance is a performance in which the ally character CRA appears and the background becomes a rainbow background RB that is displayed in seven colors of the rainbow. The rainbow background RB is a background that guarantees a jackpot. In addition, a message image MG saying "Jackpot" is displayed at the upper left of the display screen 7a. In other words, when the performance button 63 was operated 12 times in the battle performance (mid-term), the jackpot confirmation performance was executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89(G), a battle performance (final stage) is executed. The battle performance (final stage) is a performance that notifies the victory or defeat of the ally character CRA. Here, an ally character CRA is displayed in the center and a message image MG saying "Victory" is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 89(H), a confirmed stop effect (jackpot) is executed. In the confirmed stop performance (jackpot), the left performance symbol 8L, the middle performance symbol 8C, and the right performance symbol 8R stop at the same number, forming a so-called double number. Here, the left presentation pattern 8L, middle presentation pattern 8C, and right presentation pattern 8R all stop at "7".

[Winner notification performance B]
FIG. 90 is a diagram for explaining the winning notification performance B.
First, as shown in FIG. 90(A), a variation start effect is executed. Here, a state in which the left presentation pattern 8L, the middle presentation pattern 8C, and the right presentation pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner is shown. A pending image 9B is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The pending images 9B are displayed according to the number of stored second special symbols, and here, three pending images 9B are displayed. The pending digested image 9C corresponds to the production symbols (production symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) currently being changed on the display screen 7a. It is assumed that the fluctuation occurs during a time-saving game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(B), a reach formation effect is executed. Here, it is shown that both the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R have stopped at "7".
Next, as shown in FIG. 90(C), a battle effect (start) is executed. In the battle performance (start), an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB appear. After this, a battle takes place between the friendly character CRA and the enemy character CRB, and when the friendly character CRA finally defeats the enemy character CRB, it becomes a jackpot. In the battle performance (start), the input of the performance button 63 becomes valid. That is, although there is no display on the display screen 7a that prompts the user to press the production button 63, the production control microcomputer 91 controls the production button 63 based on the signal from the production button detection switch 63a that is input via the relay board 108. Detects operations. The actual number of operations of the effect button 63 is shown on the right side of the display screen 7a. It is assumed that the operation has been performed a total of five times so far.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(D), a jackpot confirmation effect is executed. The jackpot confirmation performance is a performance in which the ally character CRA appears and the background becomes a rainbow background RB that is displayed in seven colors of the rainbow. The rainbow background RB is a background that guarantees a jackpot. In addition, a message image MG saying "Jackpot" is displayed at the upper left of the display screen 7a. In other words, when the performance button 63 was operated five times in the battle performance (middle stage), the jackpot confirmation performance was executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(E), a battle effect (initial stage) is executed. In the battle performance (initial stage), the enemy character CRB has the upper hand and is driven to corner the ally character CRA to the right.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(F), a battle performance (middle stage) is executed. In the battle performance (middle stage), an ally character CRA becomes dominant and a performance is performed in which the enemy character CRB is cornered to the left.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90(G), a battle performance (final stage) is executed. The battle performance (final stage) is a performance that notifies the victory or defeat of the ally character CRA. Here, an ally character CRA is displayed in the center and a message image MG saying "Victory" is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 90(H), a confirmed stop effect (jackpot) is executed. In the confirmed stop performance (jackpot), the left performance symbol 8L, the middle performance symbol 8C, and the right performance symbol 8R stop at the same number, forming a so-called double number. Here, the left presentation pattern 8L, middle presentation pattern 8C, and right presentation pattern 8R all stop at "7".

[Winner notification performance C]
FIG. 91 is a diagram for explaining the winning notification effect C.
First, as shown in FIG. 91(A), a variation start effect is executed. Here, a state in which the left presentation pattern 8L, the middle presentation pattern 8C, and the right presentation pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner is shown. A pending image 9B is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The pending images 9B are displayed according to the number of stored second special symbols, and here, three pending images 9B are displayed. The pending digested image 9C corresponds to the production symbols (production symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) currently being changed on the display screen 7a. It is assumed that the fluctuation occurs during a time-saving game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(B), a reach formation effect is executed. Here, it is shown that both the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R have stopped at "7".
Next, as shown in FIG. 91(C), a battle effect (start) is executed. In the battle performance (start), an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB appear. After this, a battle takes place between the friendly character CRA and the enemy character CRB, and when the friendly character CRA finally defeats the enemy character CRB, it becomes a jackpot. In the battle performance (start), the input of the performance button 63 becomes valid. Here, the button image BG is displayed and the words "Press" are displayed. The performance control microcomputer 91 detects the operation of the performance button 63 based on a signal from the performance button detection switch 63a input via the relay board 108. The actual number of operations of the effect button 63 is shown on the right side of the display screen 7a. It is assumed that the operation has been performed a total of five times so far.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(D), a battle effect (initial stage) is executed. In the battle performance (initial stage), the enemy character CRB has the upper hand and is driven to corner the ally character CRA to the right. In the battle performance (initial stage), the input of the performance button 63 becomes valid. Here, the button image BG is displayed and the words "Press" are displayed. The actual number of operations of the effect button 63 is shown on the right side of the display screen 7a. It is assumed that a total of 10 operations have been performed so far.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(E), a battle performance (middle stage) is executed. In the battle performance (middle stage), an ally character CRA becomes dominant and a performance is performed in which the enemy character CRB is cornered to the left. In the battle performance (mid-term), the input of the performance button 63 becomes valid. Here, the button image BG is displayed and the words "Press" are displayed. The actual number of operations of the effect button 63 is shown on the right side of the display screen 7a. It is assumed that a total of 14 operations have been performed so far.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91(F), a battle performance (final stage) is executed. The battle performance (final stage) is a performance that notifies the victory or defeat of the ally character CRA. Here, the enemy character CRB is displayed in the center and a message image MG saying "defeat" is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 91(G), a confirmed stop effect (loss) is executed. In the confirmed stop performance (loss), both the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R stop at "7", and the middle performance symbol 8C stops at "8".

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the winning notification effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, by repeatedly operating (pressing) the production button 63 during the battle production, it is possible to execute the jackpot confirmation production when a predetermined number of operations is reached. (Fig. 89(E)(F), Fig. 90(C)(D)). According to this configuration, it is possible to contribute to promoting the operation of the performance button 63 and to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment described above, a plurality of operation times, such as 1, 5, 8, 12, and 14 times, are set as the predetermined number of operations. According to this configuration, there are a plurality of timings at which the jackpot confirmation performance may be executed, so that it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, if the jackpot confirmation effect is not executed after 14 operations, which is the upper limit of the number of operations (FIG. 91(E)), a failure in the jackpot lottery is determined. According to this configuration, the player does not have unnecessary expectations and can improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the performance that prompts the operation of the performance button 63 is not performed during the period when the performance button 63 is activated (FIGS. 89(C) to (E), FIG. 90(C)). According to this configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by providing a hidden command-like performance only for players who know the game.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, during the period in which the effect button 63 is enabled, there are cases where an effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 63 is performed (FIGS. 91(C) to (E)), and cases where the effect is not performed. (FIGS. 89(C) to (E), FIG. 90(C)). According to this configuration, the range of performances can be expanded and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modified example]
Below, a modification of the winning notification effect is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above, the operation of the performance button 63 was exemplified, but it can be similarly applied to the operation of a lever, a sword, etc.

[Modification 2]
The above was an example of notifying the winning of a jackpot lottery, but it can also be applied to winning the maximum number of rounds in a lottery for the number of rounds at the time of a jackpot, or winning in a lottery that transitions to a high probability state after a jackpot. be.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect B5-1]
A gaming machine that is equipped with an operation section that can be operated by a player and that can perform performances based on the operation of the operation section,
By repeatedly operating the operating unit during a predetermined performance, when the number of operations of the operating unit reaches a predetermined number of operations, it is possible to notify the winning of a specific lottery.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B5-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B5-1,
A plurality of times of operations are set as the predetermined number of operations,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B5-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B5-1 or aspect B5-2,
If the number of operations of the operation unit exceeds the predetermined upper limit of the number of operations and there is no notification of the winning, the specific lottery is determined to be unsuccessful;
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B5-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B5-1 to B5-3,
not performing a promotion performance that prompts the operation of the operating unit during the predetermined performance;
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B5-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B5-1 to B5-3,
During the predetermined performance, there are cases where a promotion effect that prompts the operation of the operation unit is performed, and cases where it is not performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect B5-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B5-1 to B5-5,
The particular lottery is a jackpot lottery;
A gaming machine characterized by:

The external and external effects A to C of the stereoscopic image will be explained below using FIGS. 92 to 94. In FIGS. 92 to 94, the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 arranged around the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are omitted for ease of viewing the drawings. Decorative patterns and various reserved images displayed on the display screen 7a are also omitted for ease of viewing the drawing.

This outer and outer appearance of the three-dimensional image is performed during the fluctuating performance of the decorative symbols (for example, during the period from the start of the fluctuation of the decorative symbols until they stop fluctuating), during a jackpot game (jackpot performance) in which a profit is given to the player, etc. It can be done. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90 (for example, a variable performance start command, an opening command for various jackpot games, a round designation command for a jackpot game, and an ending command for a jackpot game), and selects a button. When an instruction to execute an effect is included, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

Here, first, the external and external effects A of the stereoscopic image will be explained, followed by the external and external effects B of the stereoscopic image, and the external and external effects C of the stereoscopic image in order.

[Outside and outside production of stereoscopic images A]
First, the external and external effects A of the stereoscopic image will be described with reference to FIG. 92. FIG. 92 is a diagram illustrating an outer/interior effect A of a stereoscopic image. In the external/interior rendering A of a stereoscopic image, first, as shown in FIG. 92(A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, for example, the number "4" of the stereoscopic image is displayed as a colored and opaque stereoscopic image as a predetermined image. When it appears as an FRM, it is displayed in a manner that it approaches, moves away from, stops, or swings (including rotation; the same applies hereinafter). At this time, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 has an outer area (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") as a boundary, and an inner area FRMa of the outer outline (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"). , and an area FRMb outside the outer frame (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"). Here, the outer area FRMb of the outer frame (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is the background image.

After this, when the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") appears again on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (outline) as a boundary, an area FRMa inside the outline (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") and an outside area FRMb of the outline (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"). compartmentalized. Further, an area FRMb outside the outer frame (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") becomes a background image.

When the three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in such a manner that the three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") approaches, the inner area FRMa of the outer frame (outline) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") is displayed large and the image As the proportion occupied by the display screen 7a of the display device 7 increases, the outer region FRMb of the outer frame (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") becomes smaller, and the proportion occupied by the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 decreases. Become. On the other hand, when the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a receding manner, the inner area FRMa of the outer frame (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is displayed smaller and occupies a lower proportion on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, so that the outer region FRMb of the outer frame (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") becomes larger and the proportion of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 becomes larger. will account for a higher proportion of

After this, if the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") appears again on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display screen of the image display device 7 will have the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") approach. 7a, or when the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a receding manner, the outline (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") As the proportion of the inner area FRMa occupying the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 increases or decreases, the outer area FRMb of the outer frame (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") increases or decreases. The proportion of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 decreases or increases.

An area FRMa inside the outer frame (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is decorated with a pattern not shown. In the outer region FRMb of the outer frame (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"), rectangles are arranged in a matrix shape as a first geometric pattern, spaced apart from each other by a predetermined interval and aligned in the vertical and horizontal directions. is displayed. The first geometric pattern is a still image.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 92(B), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, from the colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") as a predetermined image, the frame of the stereoscopic image is displayed as a colored opaque frame. When the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM appears, one or both of the vertical and horizontal lengths of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM may become larger, or one or both may become smaller. displayed in a manner that At this time, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 has an outer area (outline) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM as a boundary, an inner area FRMa of the outer edge (outline) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM, and a frame-shaped stereoscopic image. It is divided into an area FRMb, which is an outer area (outline) of the FRM. Here, an area FRMb outside the outer frame (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is the background image.

After this, if the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM reappears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 will be displayed with the outline of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM as a boundary. , an area FRMa inside the outline (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM, and an area FRMb outside the outline (outline) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM. Further, an outer region FRMb of the outer frame (outline) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM becomes a background image.

The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays a stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") as a predetermined image at the timing of switching from a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") to a colored opaque frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM. ) was displayed in the outer region FRMb of the outer frame (outline) of A second geometric pattern in which bricks are piled up is displayed in an area FRMb outside the outer frame (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM. The second geometric pattern is a still image. Furthermore, the character body CRA appears in the inner area FRMa of the outer frame (outline) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM and moves within the inner area FRMa, and a moving image of the character body CRA is played back.

The frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in such a manner that one or both of the vertical length and the horizontal length of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is increased, so that the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is displayed inside the outer frame (outline) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM. When the area FRMa is displayed in a large size, the area occupied by the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 increases, so that the outer area FRMb of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM becomes smaller and the display on the image display device 7 becomes smaller. The proportion occupied by the screen 7a becomes lower. On the other hand, the outline of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in such a manner that one or both of the vertical length and the horizontal length of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM becomes smaller. When the inner region FRMa of the outline (outline) is displayed small, the proportion occupied by the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 decreases, and the outer region FRMb of the outer outline (outline) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM becomes larger and the image The proportion occupied by the display screen 7a of the display device 7 increases.

After this, when the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM reappears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, one or both of the vertical length and the horizontal length of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM becomes larger. The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 may be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in such a manner that one or both of the vertical length and the horizontal length of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is small. Similarly, when the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM has a frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM, the proportion of the inner region FRMa of the outer frame (contour) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 increases or decreases. The proportion of the outer region FRMb of the outer frame (outline) of the three-dimensional image FRM of the shape that occupies the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 decreases or increases.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 92(C), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays the colored opaque frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM as a predetermined image, then the colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") again. When the three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") appears, it is displayed in such a manner that it approaches, recedes, stops, or oscillates. Here, even if the predetermined image is switched from the colored opaque frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM to the colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"), the outer area FRMb of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is The second geometric pattern (pattern of stacked bricks) that was displayed in 3D image FRM (number "4") is inherited and displayed in the outer area FRMb of the outer frame (outline) of the 3D image FRM (number "4"), and is a still image. It does not switch to the geometric pattern.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 92(D), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") as a predetermined image, then a colored opaque frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM again. When the frame-shaped 3D image FRM appears, one or both of the vertical and horizontal lengths of the frame-shaped 3D image FRM is displayed in such a manner that one or both of them becomes larger, or one or both of them become smaller. Ru.

The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays a stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") as a predetermined image at the timing of switching from a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") to a colored opaque frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM. ) from the second geometric pattern (pattern of stacked bricks) displayed in the outer area FRMb of the outer frame (outline) of The octagons are arranged vertically and horizontally, spaced apart from each other at predetermined intervals, and arranged in a matrix pattern. The third geometric pattern is a still image. In addition, the character body CRB newly appears in the inner area FRMa of the outer frame (outline) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM and moves within the inner area FRMa, and a moving image of the character body CRB is reproduced.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 92(E), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays the colored opaque frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM as a predetermined image, then the colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") again. When the three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") appears, it is displayed in such a manner that it approaches, recedes, stops, or oscillates. Here, even if the predetermined image is switched from the colored opaque frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM to the colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"), the outer area FRMb of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is The third geometric pattern (a pattern in which octagons are spaced apart from each other by a predetermined interval and arranged in a matrix in the vertical and horizontal directions) that was displayed on the 3D image FRM (number "4") ) is taken over and displayed as is in the outer area FRMb, and is not switched to other geometric patterns that are still images.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 92(F), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays the predetermined image from a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") to a colored opaque frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM. When the frame-shaped 3D image FRM is switched, the frame-shaped 3D image FRM is displayed in such a manner that one or both of the vertical and horizontal lengths of the frame-shaped 3D image FRM becomes larger or smaller. .

The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays a stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") as a predetermined image at the timing of switching from a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") to a colored opaque frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM. ) from the third geometric pattern (a pattern in which octagons are spaced apart from each other by a predetermined interval and arranged in a matrix in the vertical and horizontal directions) displayed in the outer area FRMb of the outer frame (contour) of the frame. In the outer region FRMb of the outer frame (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM, a fourth geometric pattern in which alphabetical letters V-shaped are successively arranged in the vertical and horizontal directions is displayed. The fourth geometric pattern is a still image. In addition, two character bodies CRA and CRB appear in the inner area FRMa of the outer frame (outline) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM and approach each other in the inner area FRMa, and the animation of the two character bodies CRA and CRB is displayed. will be played.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 92(G), the two character bodies CRA and CRB displayed in the inner area FRMa of the outer frame (outline) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM are displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The action effect by the two characters CRA and CRB is displayed. That is, in addition to the two character bodies CRA and CRB displayed in the inner region FRMa of the outer frame (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM, the background images of the two character bodies CRA and CRB are also displayed on the image display device 7. It will be displayed in a large size on the screen 7a.

If the series of effects from FIG. 92(A) to FIG. 92(G) are performed during the reach effect after the reach is formed (as part of the reach effect), the action effect is developed and the image is displayed. When all the symbols with the same decorative pattern are stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7, it becomes a jackpot and a jackpot game (jackpot performance) is performed in which a profit is given to the player. If the same decorative symbols are not aligned and are stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the error will be determined and displayed.

In addition, when a series of effects from FIG. 92(A) to FIG. 92(G) are performed during a jackpot game (jackpot effect), an action effect is developed, and for example, the character body RCA is connected to the character body RCB. When the character RCA wins the game, the right-handed game is started (or continues), whereas, for example, when the character RCA loses the game against the character RCB, the left-handed game starts ( Or, the player is returned from a right-handed game to a left-handed game).

Note that as one or both of the vertical and horizontal lengths of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM becomes larger, the inner region FRMa of the outer frame (outline) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM becomes larger, or the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM becomes larger. As one or both of the vertical length and the horizontal length of the stereoscopic image FRM becomes smaller, the inner region FRMa of the outer frame (outline) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM becomes smaller. However, as the inner area FRMa of the outer frame (outline) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM becomes larger, the size of the character displayed in the inner area FRMa of the outer frame (outline) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM also increases. Rather than being displayed in a large size (enlarged display), the area around the character is expanded, allowing the background around the character and other characters and items existing around the character to be seen in addition to the character. Furthermore, as the inner area FRMa of the outer frame (outline) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM becomes smaller, the size of the character displayed in the inner area FRMa of the outer frame (outline) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM also decreases. Rather than being displayed small (reduced display), the area around the character described above becomes smaller, and furthermore, the area where the character itself can be visually recognized becomes smaller. Of course, if the character displayed in the area FRMa inside the outer frame (outline) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM approaches (moves toward the player) in the inner area FRMa of the outer frame (outline) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM. When the character moves away from the player (moves away from the player), the size of the character is displayed small.

[Outer and outer appearance of 3D image B]
Next, the external and external effects B of the stereoscopic image will be described with reference to FIG. 93. FIG. 93 is a diagram for explaining the external and external effects B of a stereoscopic image. In the external/interior rendering of the stereoscopic image B, first, as shown in FIG. When it appears as an FRM, it is displayed in various ways, such as approaching, receding, stopping, and oscillating. At this time, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 has an outer area (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") as a boundary, and an inner area FRMa of the outer frame (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"). , and an area FRMb outside the outer frame (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"). Here, the outer area FRMb of the outer frame (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is the background image.

After this, when the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") appears again on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (outline) as a boundary, an area FRMa inside the outline (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") and an outside area FRMb of the outline (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"). compartmentalized. Further, an area FRMb outside the outer frame (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") becomes a background image.

When the three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in such a manner that the three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") approaches, the inner area FRMa of the outer frame (outline) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") is displayed large and the image As the proportion occupied by the display screen 7a of the display device 7 increases, the outer region FRMb of the outer frame (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") becomes smaller, and the proportion occupied by the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 decreases. Become. On the other hand, when the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a receding manner, the inner area FRMa of the outer frame (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is displayed smaller and occupies a lower proportion on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, so that the outer region FRMb of the outer frame (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") becomes larger and the proportion of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 becomes larger. will account for a higher proportion of

After this, if the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") reappears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display screen of the image display device 7 will have the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") approach. 7a, or when the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a receding manner, the outline (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") When the ratio of the inner area FRMa occupying the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 becomes higher or lower, the outer area FRMb of the outer frame (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") becomes more or less displayed as an image. The proportion that occupies the display screen 7a of the device 7 becomes lower or higher.

An area FRMa inside the outer frame (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is decorated with a pattern not shown. In the outer region FRMb of the outer frame (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"), rectangles are arranged in a matrix shape as a first geometric pattern, spaced apart from each other by a predetermined interval and aligned in the vertical and horizontal directions. is displayed. The first geometric pattern is a still image.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 93(B), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, from the colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") as a predetermined image, the stereoscopic image board is changed to the colored opaque board. When the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM appears, it is displayed in such a manner that it approaches, recedes, stops, or rotates in a predetermined direction. At this time, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 has an outer area (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM as a boundary, an inner area FRMa of the outer frame (outline) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM, and an area FRMa of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM. It is divided into an area FRMb, which is an outer area (outline) of the FRM. Here, an area FRMb outside the outer frame (outline) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is the background image.

After this, when the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM reappears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 will be displayed with the outline of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM as the boundary. , an area FRMa inside the outline (outline) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM, and an area FRMb outside the outline (outline) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM. Further, an area FRMb outside the outer frame (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM becomes a background image.

The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays a stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") as a predetermined image at the timing of switching from a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") to a colored opaque plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM. ) was displayed in the outer region FRMb of the outer frame (outline) of A second geometric pattern in which bricks are piled up is displayed in an area FRMb outside the outer frame (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM. The second geometric pattern is a still image. In addition, the character body CRA appears in the inner region FRMa of the outer frame (outline) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM and moves within the inner region FRMa, and a moving image of the character body CRA is played back. Note that the inner region FRMa of the outer contour (outline) of the plate-shaped 3D image FRM is a surface, and the plate-shaped 3D image FRM can be displayed in the inner region FRMa according to the angle in the three-dimensional space. The shape has also been modified.

When the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in such a manner that the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM approaches, the inner region FRMa of the outer frame (outline) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is displayed in a large size, and the display screen of the image display device 7 As the proportion occupied by 7a becomes higher, the outer region FRMb of the outer frame (outline) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM becomes smaller, and the proportion occupied by the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 becomes lower. On the other hand, when the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a receding manner, the inner region FRMa of the outer frame (outline) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is displayed small and the image is displayed As the proportion occupied by the display screen 7a of the device 7 decreases, the outer area FRMb of the outer frame (outline) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM becomes larger, and the proportion occupied by the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 increases.

After this, if the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM reappears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM will be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in such a manner that it approaches, When the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a receding manner, similarly, the inner area FRMa of the outer frame (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 7. 7a increases or decreases, and accordingly, the proportion of the outer area FRMb of the outer frame (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM decreases. It can get expensive.

After that, as shown in FIG. 93(C), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays the colored opaque plate-like stereoscopic image FRM as a predetermined image, and then the colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") again. When the three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") appears, it is displayed in such a manner that it approaches, recedes, stops, or oscillates. Here, even if the predetermined image is switched from the colored opaque plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM to the colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"), the outer area FRMb of the outer frame (outline) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is The second geometric pattern (pattern of stacked bricks) that was displayed in 3D image FRM (number "4") is inherited and displayed in the outer area FRMb of the outer frame (outline) of the 3D image FRM (number "4"), and is a still image. It does not switch to the geometric pattern.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 93(D), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") as a predetermined image, then a colored opaque plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM again. When the screen changes to , and a plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM appears, it is displayed in a manner such that it approaches, moves away from, stops, or rotates.

The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays a stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") as a predetermined image at the timing of switching from a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") to a colored opaque plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM. ) from the second geometric pattern (pattern of stacked bricks) displayed in the outer area FRMb of the outer frame (outline) of The octagons are arranged vertically and horizontally, spaced apart from each other at predetermined intervals, and arranged in a matrix pattern. The third geometric pattern is a still image. In addition, a character body CRB newly appears in the inner region FRMa of the outer frame (outline) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM and moves within the inner region FRMa, and a moving image of the character body CRB is played back. Note that the inner region FRMa of the outline (outline) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is a plane, as described above, and the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is displayed in the inner region FRMa according to the angle in the three-dimensional space. The shape of the character body CRB is also modified.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 93(E), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays the colored opaque plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM as a predetermined image, then the colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") again. When the three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") appears, it is displayed in such a manner that it approaches, recedes, stops, or oscillates. Here, even if the predetermined image is switched from the colored opaque plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM to the colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"), the outer area FRMb of the outer frame (outline) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is The third geometric pattern (a pattern in which octagons are spaced apart from each other by a predetermined interval and arranged in a matrix in the vertical and horizontal directions) that was displayed on the 3D image FRM (number "4") ) is taken over and displayed as is in the outer area FRMb, and is not switched to other geometric patterns that are still images.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 93(F), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays the predetermined image from a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") to a colored opaque plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM. When the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM appears, it is displayed in such a manner that it approaches, recedes, stops, or rotates.

The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays a stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") as a predetermined image at the timing of switching from a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") to a colored opaque plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM. ) from the third geometric pattern (a pattern in which octagons are spaced apart from each other by a predetermined interval and arranged in a matrix in the vertical and horizontal directions) displayed in the outer area FRMb of the outer frame (contour) of In the outer region FRMb of the outer frame (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM, a fourth geometric pattern in which alphabetical letters V-shaped are successively arranged in the vertical and horizontal directions is displayed. The fourth geometric pattern is a still image. In addition, two character bodies CRA and CRB appear in the inner region FRMa of the outer frame (outline) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM and approach each other within the inner region FRMa, and the animation of the two character bodies CRA and CRB appears. will be played. Note that the inner region FRMa of the outline (outline) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is a plane, as described above, and the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is displayed in the inner region FRMa according to the angle in the three-dimensional space. The shapes of the two character bodies CRA and CRB have also been modified.

After that, as shown in FIG. 93(G), the two character bodies CRA and CRB displayed in the inner area FRMa of the outer frame (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM are displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The action effect by the two characters CRA and CRB is displayed. That is, in addition to the two character bodies CRA and CRB displayed in the inner area FRMa of the outer frame (outline) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM, the background images of the two character bodies CRA and CRB are also displayed on the image display device 7. It will be displayed in a large size on the screen 7a.

If the series of effects from FIG. 93(A) to FIG. 93(G) are performed during the reach effect after the reach is formed (as part of the reach effect), the action effect is developed and the image is displayed. When all the symbols with the same decorative pattern are stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7, it becomes a jackpot and a jackpot game (jackpot performance) is performed in which a profit is given to the player. If the same decorative symbols are not aligned and are stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the error will be determined and displayed.

In addition, when a series of effects from FIG. 93(A) to FIG. 93(G) are performed during a jackpot game (jackpot effect), an action effect is developed, and for example, the character body RCA is connected to the character body RCB. When the character RCA wins the game, the right-handed game is started (or continues), whereas, for example, when the character RCA loses the game against the character RCB, the left-handed game starts ( Or, the player is returned from a right-handed game to a left-handed game).

Note that as the plate-shaped 3D image FRM approaches (moves toward the player), the inner region FRMa of the outer frame (outline) of the plate-shaped 3D image FRM becomes larger, and the plate-shaped 3D image FRM moves away ( (moving away from the player), the inner region FRMa of the outer frame (outline) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM becomes smaller. However, as the inner area FRMa of the outer frame (outline) of the plate-shaped 3D image FRM becomes larger, the size of the character displayed in the inner area FRMa of the outer frame (outline) of the plate-shaped 3D image FRM also increases. Rather than being displayed in a large size (enlarged display), the area around the character is expanded, allowing the background around the character and other characters and items existing around the character to be seen in addition to the character. Furthermore, as the inner area FRMa of the outer frame (outline) of the plate-shaped 3D image FRM becomes smaller, the size of the character displayed in the inner area FRMa of the outer frame (outline) of the plate-shaped 3D image FRM also decreases. Rather than being displayed small (reduced display), the area around the character described above becomes smaller, and furthermore, the area where the character itself can be visually recognized becomes smaller. Of course, if the character displayed in the area FRMa inside the outer frame (outline) of the plate-shaped 3D image FRM approaches (moves toward the player) in the inner area FRMa of the outer frame (outline) of the plate-shaped 3D image FRM. When the character moves away from the player (moves away from the player), the size of the character is displayed small.

[Outer and outer appearance of 3D image C]
Next, the outer/interior rendering C of a stereoscopic image will be explained with reference to FIG. 94. FIG. 94 is a diagram for explaining the outer-interior rendering C of a stereoscopic image. In the external/interior rendering C of a stereoscopic image, first, as shown in FIG. When it appears as an FRM, it is displayed in such a manner that it approaches, moves away, stops, or oscillates. At this time, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 has an outer area (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") as a boundary, and an inner area FRMa of the outer outline (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"). , and an area FRMb outside the outer frame (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"). Here, the outer area FRMb of the outer frame (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is the background image.

After this, when the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") appears again on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (outline) as a boundary, an area FRMa inside the outline (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") and an outside area FRMb of the outline (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"). compartmentalized. Further, an area FRMb outside the outer frame (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") becomes a background image.

When the three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in such a manner that the three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") approaches, the inner area FRMa of the outer frame (outline) of the three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") is displayed large and the image As the proportion occupied by the display screen 7a of the display device 7 increases, the outer region FRMb of the outer frame (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") becomes smaller, and the proportion occupied by the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 decreases. Become. On the other hand, when the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a receding manner, the inner area FRMa of the outer frame (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is displayed smaller and occupies a lower proportion on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, so that the outer region FRMb of the outer frame (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") becomes larger and the proportion of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 becomes larger. will account for a higher proportion of

After this, if the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") appears again on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display screen of the image display device 7 will have the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") approach. 7a, or when the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a receding manner, the outline (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") As the proportion of the inner area FRMa occupying the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 increases or decreases, the outer area FRMb of the outer frame (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") increases or decreases. The proportion of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 decreases or increases.

An area FRMa inside the outer frame (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is decorated with a pattern not shown. In the outer region FRMb of the outer frame (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"), rectangles are arranged in a matrix shape as a first geometric pattern, spaced apart from each other by a predetermined interval and aligned in the vertical and horizontal directions. is displayed. The first geometric pattern is a still image.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 94(B), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") to a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") as predetermined images. '') is switched to the front-view stereoscopic image FRM (hereinafter referred to as the front-view stereoscopic image FRM (number "4")), and when the front-view stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") appears, it will move closer or further away. It is displayed in such a manner that it moves, stops, and moves up, down, left, and right. At this time, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 uses the outer contour (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front as a boundary, and the outer contour (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front. ) and an outer region FRMb of the outer frame (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front. Here, the outer region FRMb of the outer frame (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front is the background image.

After this, if the front-viewed stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") reappears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 will display the front-viewed stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"). The inner area FRMa of the outline (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front and the outer outline of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front, with the outline (contour) of "4") as the boundary. (contour) and an outer region FRMb. Further, an outer area FRMb of the outer frame (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front becomes a background image.

The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays a stereoscopic image as a predetermined image at the timing of switching from a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") to a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front. The first geometric pattern (a pattern in which rectangles are spaced apart from each other by a predetermined interval and aligned in the vertical and horizontal directions and arranged in a matrix) was displayed in the outer area FRMb of the outer frame (outline) of the FRM (number "4") ), a second geometric pattern in which bricks are piled up is displayed in an area FRMb outside the outer frame (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front. The second geometric pattern is a still image. In addition, the character body CRB appears in the inner area FRMa of the outer frame (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front and moves within the inner area FRMa, and a moving image of the character body CRB is played. .

When the front-viewed stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a manner approaching, the inner area of the outer frame (outline) of the front-viewed stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") As FRMa is displayed larger and occupies a higher proportion of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the outer area FRMb of the outer frame (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number “4”) viewed from the front becomes smaller and the image display device 7 occupies a lower proportion of the display screen 7a. On the other hand, when the front-viewed stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a receding manner, the outline of the front-viewed stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") ( As the inner area FRMa of the outer frame (contour) is displayed smaller and occupies a lower proportion on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the outer area FRMb of the outer frame (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front becomes larger. Therefore, the proportion occupied by the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 increases.

After this, if the front-viewed stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") appears again on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the front-viewed stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") approaches the image. When a stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front is displayed on the display screen 7a of the display device 7, or when a stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a receding manner, the stereoscopic image viewed from the front is similarly displayed. As the proportion of the inner region FRMa of the outer frame (contour) of FRM (number "4") occupies the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 increases or decreases, the stereoscopic image FRM (as seen from the front) increases or decreases. The proportion of the outer region FRMb of the outer frame (contour) of the number "4" that occupies the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 becomes lower or higher.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 94(C), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") as a predetermined image, and a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM again. (Number "4"), and when the stereoscopic image FRM (Number "4") appears, it is displayed in a manner such as approaching, receding, stopping, or swinging. Here, even if the predetermined image is switched from the colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") to the colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"), the front-viewed stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is switched again. The second geometric pattern (pattern of stacked bricks) that was displayed in the outer area FRMb of the outer frame (contour) of ``4'') is now displayed in the outer area FRMb of the outer frame (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number ``4''). It will continue to be displayed as is, and will not switch to other geometric patterns that are static images.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 94(D), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") as a predetermined image, and then a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM viewed from the front again. (Number "4"), and when the front-view stereoscopic image FRM (Number "4") appears, it is displayed in various ways, such as approaching, receding, stopping, and moving up, down, left and right.

The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays a stereoscopic image as a predetermined image at the timing of switching from a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") to a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front. The outline of the three-dimensional image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front from the second geometric pattern (pattern of stacked bricks) displayed in the outer area FRMb of the outline (outline) of FRM (number "4") In the outside area FRMb of (contour), a third geometric pattern is displayed in which octagons are arranged in a matrix in the vertical and horizontal directions, spaced apart from each other by a predetermined interval. The third geometric pattern is a still image.

In addition, here, when the front-viewed stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") approaches and a part of it protrudes (pops out) from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the front-viewed stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") approaches. Two independent inner regions FRMa, FRMa are formed as discontinuous regions on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the inner region FRMa of the outer frame (contour) of In this mode, a character CRA holding a sword newly appears and moves within two independent inner regions FRMa, FRMa, and a moving image of the character CRA is played back.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 94(E), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") as a predetermined image, which is colored and opaque as viewed from the front, and then a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM again. (Number "4"), and when the stereoscopic image FRM (Number "4") appears, it is displayed in a manner that it approaches, moves away from, stops, or swings. Here, even if the predetermined image is switched from the colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") to the colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"), the front-viewed stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is switched again. The third geometric pattern (a pattern in which octagons are spaced apart from each other by a predetermined interval and arranged in a matrix in the vertical and horizontal directions) displayed in the outer area FRMb of the outer frame (outline) of The area FRMb outside the outer frame (outline) of the image FRM (number "4") is taken over and displayed as it is, and is not switched to another geometric pattern that is a still image.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 94(F), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") as a predetermined image to a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front. When the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front appears, it is displayed in a manner that it approaches, moves away from, stops, or moves up, down, left, and right.

The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays a stereoscopic image as a predetermined image at the timing of switching from a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") to a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front. The third geometric pattern (octagons arranged vertically and horizontally at a predetermined distance from each other and arranged in a matrix) was displayed in the outer area FRMb of the outer frame (outline) of FRM (number "4"). pattern) to a fourth geometric pattern in which the alphabetical V-shape is arranged continuously in the vertical and horizontal directions in the outer area FRMb of the outer frame (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front. Is displayed. The fourth geometric pattern is a still image. In addition, the character body CRB reappears in the inner area FRMa of the outer frame (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front and moves within the inner area FRMa, and the moving image of the character body CRB is played. Ru.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 94(G), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") as a predetermined image, which is colored and opaque when viewed from the front, and then a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM again. (Number "4"), and when the stereoscopic image FRM (Number "4") appears, it is displayed in a manner such as approaching, receding, stopping, or swinging. Here, even if the predetermined image is switched from the colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") to the colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4"), the front-viewed stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") is switched again. The fourth geometric pattern (a pattern in which alphabetic V shapes are arranged consecutively in the vertical and horizontal directions) that was displayed in the outer area FRMb of the outer frame (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") The area FRMb outside the outer frame (outline) is taken over and displayed as is, and is not switched to another geometric pattern that is a still image.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 94(H), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") as a predetermined image to a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front. When the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front appears, it is displayed in a manner that it approaches, moves away from, stops, moves up, down, left and right, and stops.

The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays a stereoscopic image as a predetermined image at the timing of switching from a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") to a colored opaque stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front. A stereoscopic image viewed from the front from the fourth geometric pattern (a pattern in which alphabetic V shapes are arranged consecutively in the vertical and horizontal directions) that was displayed in the outer area FRMb of the outer frame (outline) of FRM (number "4") A fifth geometric pattern in which tiles are arranged vertically and horizontally is displayed in an area FRMb outside the outer frame (outline) of FRM (number "4"). The fifth geometric pattern is a still image. In addition, the character body CRA reappears in the inner area FRMa of the outer frame (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front and moves within the inner area FRMa, and the moving image of the character body CRB is played. Ru.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 94(I), the two character bodies CRA and CRB displayed in the inner area FRMa of the outer frame (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front are moved to the image display device 7. It is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a, and an action production by two characters CRA and CRB is developed. In other words, in addition to the two character bodies CRA and CRB displayed in the inner area FRMa of the outer frame (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front, the background images of the two character bodies CRA and CRB are also displayed. It will be displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

If the series of effects from FIG. 94(A) to FIG. 94(I) are performed during the reach effect after the reach is formed (as part of the reach effect), the action effect is developed and the image is displayed. When all the symbols with the same decorative pattern are stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7, it becomes a jackpot and a jackpot game (jackpot performance) is performed in which a profit is given to the player. If the same decorative symbols are not aligned and are stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the error will be determined and displayed.

Furthermore, when a series of effects from FIG. 94(A) to FIG. 94(I) are performed during a jackpot game (jackpot effect), an action effect is developed, and for example, the character body RCA is connected to the character body RCB. When the character RCA wins the game, the right-handed game is started (or continues), whereas, for example, when the character RCA loses the game against the character RCB, the left-handed game starts ( Or, the player is returned from a right-handed game to a left-handed game).

Note that as the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front approaches (moves toward the player), the inner area FRMa of the outer frame (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front becomes larger. The inner area FRMa of the outer frame (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front becomes larger, or the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front moves away (moves away from the player's side). As a result, the inner region FRMa of the outer frame (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front becomes smaller. However, as the inner region FRMa of the outer contour (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front becomes larger, the outer contour (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front becomes larger. The size of the character displayed in the inner area FRMa is not displayed in a large size (enlarged display), but in addition to the character, the background around the character and other characters and items existing around the character are visible. The area around the character that can be played expands. In addition, since the inner region FRMa of the outer frame (outline) of the front-viewed stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") becomes smaller, the outer frame (outline) of the front-viewed stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") becomes smaller. The size of the character displayed in the inner area FRMa is not displayed small (reduced display), but the area around the character described above is reduced, and furthermore, the area where the character itself can be visually recognized is also reduced. Of course, the character displayed in the inner area FRMa of the outer frame (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front is the inner area FRMa of the outer frame (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front. When the character approaches (moves toward the player), the character's size is displayed large; when it moves away (moves away from the player), the character's size is displayed small. .

[Effect example]
Below, examples of effects of external and external effects on stereoscopic images are shown.
[Effect 1]
The game machine 1 of the above embodiment has an image display capable of displaying various images, as shown in FIGS. A device 7 (display means) is provided, and when the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), the image is formed inside the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image). The character body CRA and the character body CRB (first effect image) to be displayed in the inner region FRMa (first region) of the outer frame (outline) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM, and the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM (predetermined a background image (second effect image) having various geometric patterns to be displayed in an outer region FRMb (second region) of the outer frame (outline) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM formed outside of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM; The frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image) is movably displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). According to this configuration, the character body CRA to be displayed in the inner region FRMa (first region) of the outer frame (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image) formed inside the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image) and character body CRB (first effect image), and an outer area FRMb (second area ) and a background image (second effect image) having various geometric patterns displayed on the background image (second effect image), it is possible to visually entertain the players and improve their interest. can.
In the outer-interior/exterior rendering B of the stereoscopic image in FIGS. 93(B), 93(D), and 93(F), the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM formed inside the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image) The character body CRA and character body CRB (first effect image) to be displayed in the inner region FRMa (first region) of the outer frame (outline) of A background image (second effect image) having various geometric patterns to be displayed in an outer area FRMb (second area) of the outer frame (contour) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM. Therefore, the same is true.
In the outer-interior/inside-outside rendering C of the stereoscopic image in FIGS. 94(B), 94(D), 94(F), and 94(H), the image is formed inside the stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image) when viewed from the front. The character body CRA and character body CRB (first effect image) displayed in the inner area FRMa (first area) of the outer frame (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front, and the 3D image viewed from the front. A background image (second This is similar because it is possible to perform effects using (effect image) and .

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 92(B), 92(D), and 92(F) of the external and external effects of the stereoscopic image, the external outline of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM ( The character body CRA and character body CRB (first effect image) displayed in the inner region FRMa (first region) of the outline) and the outer region FRMb (second It is different from the background image (second effect image) having various geometric patterns displayed in the area). According to this configuration, the character body CRA and the character body CRB (first effect image) are displayed in the inner area FRMa (first area) of the outer frame (outline) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM. , since a background image (second effect image) having various geometric patterns is displayed in the outer region FRMb (second region) of the outer frame (outline) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM, the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM The first effect image and the second effect image are different from each other with the outer frame (contour) as a boundary, and it is possible to visually entertain the player and improve his interest.
93(B), FIG. 93(D), and FIG. 93(F), a character is placed in the inner area FRMa (first area) of the outer edge (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM. While the body CRA and the character body CRB (first effect image) are displayed, various geometric patterns are displayed in the outer region FRMb (second region) of the outer frame (outline) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM. Since the background image (second effect image) is displayed, the first effect image and the second effect image are different from each other and are the same, with the outer frame (outline) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM as a boundary.
94(B), FIG. 94(D), FIG. 94(F), and FIG. 94(H). In the outer/internal/external outline of the stereoscopic image C, the outer outline (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front is shown. While the character body CRA and character body CRB (first effect image) are displayed in the inner area FRMa (first area), the outer frame (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front is displayed. ) Since a background image (second effect image) having various geometric patterns is displayed in the outer area FRMb (second area) of The first effect image and the second effect image are different from each other and are similar to each other, with the boundary being .

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. image) is moved and displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), and the inner region FRMa (first region) of the outer frame (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is displayed in a large size on the image display device 7 (display means). Then, an outer region FRMb (second region) of the outer frame (outline) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is displayed in a small size on the image display device 7 (display means). According to this configuration, by moving and displaying the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image) on the image display device 7 (display means), the character When the inner area FRMa (first area) of the outer frame (outline) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM in which the body CRA and the character body CRB (first effect image) are displayed becomes larger, a background image having various geometric patterns becomes larger. Since the outer region FRMb (second region) of the outer frame (outline) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM in which the (second effect image) is displayed becomes smaller, the player can be visually entertained. You can improve your interest.
In the external and external effects B of the stereoscopic images shown in FIGS. 93(B), 93(D), and 93(F), a plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image) is moved and displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). As a result, the outline (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM on which the character body CRA and the character body CRB (first effect image) are displayed is set using the outer frame (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM as the boundary. When the inner region FRMa (first region) becomes larger, the outer region FRMb (second The same is true because the area) becomes smaller.
In the outer/internal/external rendering C of the stereoscopic images in FIGS. 94(B), 94(D), 94(F), and 94(H), the stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image) viewed from the front is displayed on the image display device 7( The character body CRA and the character body CRB (first effect image) are displayed using the outer frame (contour) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front as a boundary. When the inner area FRMa (first area) of the outer frame (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front becomes larger, a background image (second effect image) having various geometric patterns is displayed. The same is true because the outer area FRMb (second area) of the outer frame (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front becomes smaller.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. image) is a three-dimensional image. According to this configuration, by setting the outer contour (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM, which is a three-dimensional image, as a boundary, the inner region FRMa (first region) of the outer contour (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM and , an outer region FRMb (second region) of the outer outline (outline) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM, and an inner region FRMb (second region) of the outer outline (outline) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM are easily recognized as divided regions, and an inner region FRMb (second region) of the outer outline (outline) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM. The character body CRA and character body CRB (first effect image) displayed in the (first area) and the outer area FRMb (second area) of the outer frame (outline) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM This can contribute to improving the visibility of the background image (second effect image) having various geometric patterns, which can visually entertain the players and improve their interest. can.
93(B), FIG. 93(D), and FIG. 93(F), the outline (outline) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM, which is a stereoscopic image, is used as the boundary to create a board. A region partitioned into an inner region FRMa (first region) of the outer contour (outline) of the shaped three-dimensional image FRM and an outer region FRMb (second region) of the outer contour (contour) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM. The character body CRA and character body CRB (first effect image) displayed in the inner area FRMa (first area) of the outer frame (outline) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM and the plate-shaped It can contribute to improving the visibility of the background image (second effect image) having various geometric patterns displayed in the outer region FRMb (second region) of the outer frame (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM. Therefore, it is the same.
In the outer/internal/external rendering C of the stereoscopic images in FIGS. 94(B), 94(D), 94(F), and 94(H), the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front, which is a stereoscopic image, is By setting the outer contour (contour) as a boundary, the inner region FRMa (first region) of the outer contour (contour) of the front-viewed stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") and the front-viewed stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") are separated. ), the outer area FRMb (second area) of the outer frame (contour) of The character body CRA and character body CRB (first effect image) displayed in FRMa (first area) and the outer area FRMb (outline) of the front-viewed stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") This is similar because it can contribute to improving the visibility of the background image (second effect image) having various geometric patterns displayed in the second area).

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 92(B), 92(D), and 92(F) of the external and external effects of the stereoscopic image, the external outline of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM ( The inner region FRMa (first region) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is the inner region of the outer contour (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM whose boundary is the outer contour (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM, which is a stereoscopic image. A region FRMb (second region) outside the outer contour (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is a frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM whose boundary is the outer contour (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM, which is a stereoscopic image. It is the outer area of the outer frame (contour) of According to this configuration, since the outer contour (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM, which is a stereoscopic image, can be used as the boundary, the inner region FRMa (first region) of the outer contour (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM ) and an outer region FRMb (second region) of the outer frame (outline) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM are more easily recognized as a partitioned region. As a result, the character body CRA and the character body CRB (first effect image) displayed in the inner area FRMa (first area) of the outer frame (outline) of the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM, and the frame-shaped three-dimensional image FRM The background image (second effect image) having various geometric patterns displayed in the outer region FRMb (second region) of the outer frame (contour) of It is possible to visually entertain people and improve their interest.
In the outer-interior-interior rendering B of the stereoscopic images in FIGS. 93(B), 93(D), and 93(F), the outer edge (outline) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM, which is the stereoscopic image, can be used as the boundary. , an inner region FRMa (first region) of the outer contour (contour) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM and an outer region FRMb (second region) of the outer contour (contour) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM are partitioned. This makes it easier to visually recognize the area. As a result, the character body CRA and character body CRB (first effect image) displayed in the inner region FRMa (first region) of the outer frame (contour) of the plate-shaped three-dimensional image FRM, and the character body CRA and character body CRB (first effect image) The background image (second effect image) having various geometric patterns displayed in the outer region FRMb (second region) of the outer frame (contour) of It is.
In the outer/internal/external rendering C of the stereoscopic images in FIGS. 94(B), 94(D), 94(F), and 94(H), the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front, which is a stereoscopic image, is Since the outer contour (contour) can be used as a boundary, the inner region FRMa (first region) of the outer contour (contour) of the front-viewed stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") and the front-viewed stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") The outer region FRMb (second region) of the outer frame (outline) of “4”) is more easily recognized as a partitioned region. As a result, the character body CRA and character body CRB (first effect image) displayed in the inner area FRMa (first area) of the outer frame (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front, Visual recognition of a background image (second effect image) having various geometric patterns displayed in an outer area FRMb (second area) of the outer frame (outline) of the stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front. The same is true because it can contribute to improving sexual performance.

[Modified example]
Below, a modification example of the outer and outer appearance of a stereoscopic image will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In the external and external rendering A of the stereoscopic image in FIG. 92, the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is a stereoscopic image, and in the external external rendering B of the stereoscopic image in FIG. 93, the predetermined image is a plate-shaped stereoscopic image that is a stereoscopic image. FRM, in the external and external rendering C of the stereoscopic image in FIG. 94, the predetermined image is a stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front, which is a stereoscopic image. However, if the title (or characteristic words included in the title) of any of the multiple pieces of music used as a predetermined image indicates the world view of the production by the gaming machine 1, Alternatively, it may be a structure (which may be planar or three-dimensional) that can be associated with (image) the title of the music.

[Modification 2]
In the external and external rendering A of the stereoscopic image in FIG. 92, the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is a stereoscopic image, and in the external external rendering B of the stereoscopic image in FIG. 93, the predetermined image is a plate-shaped stereoscopic image that is a stereoscopic image. FRM, in the external and external rendering of the stereoscopic image C in FIG. 94, the predetermined image is a stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front, which is a stereoscopic image. However, the predetermined image may be written on the front surface of the second movable accessory 15 (for example, "OARO").

[Modification 3]
In the external and external rendering A of the stereoscopic image in FIG. 92, the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is a stereoscopic image, and in the external external rendering B of the stereoscopic image in FIG. 93, the predetermined image is a plate-shaped stereoscopic image that is a stereoscopic image. FRM, in the external and external rendering of the stereoscopic image C in FIG. 94, the predetermined image is a stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front, which is a stereoscopic image. However, the reserved images 9A and 9B and the retained digested image 9C may be used as predetermined images. In this case, an area (first area) inside the outline (contour) of the retained images 9A, 9B or the retained digested image 9C, with the outer contour (contour) of the retained images 9A, 9B or the retained digested image 9C as the boundary, and the retained image It can be divided into an area (second area) outside the outline (contour) of the retained digested image 9A, 9B and the retained digested image 9C. Still images and moving images (3-dimensional CG moving images, animation moving images, and movie scenes) are displayed in the inner area (first area) of the outer edges (outlines) of the held images 9A, 9B and the held digested images 9C. , the outer area (second area) of the outer frame (outline) of the retained images 9A, 9B and the retained digested image 9C includes background images (still images, moving images (3-dimensional CG moving images, animation moving images, scenes from movies). )) is displayed.

[Modification 4]
In the external and external rendering A of the stereoscopic image in FIG. 92, the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is a stereoscopic image, and in the external external rendering B of the stereoscopic image in FIG. 93, the predetermined image is a plate-shaped stereoscopic image that is a stereoscopic image. FRM, in the external and external rendering of the stereoscopic image C in FIG. 94, the predetermined image is a stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front, which is a stereoscopic image. However, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R may be used as predetermined images. In this case, the inner area (contour) of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R is defined by the outer contours of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R as boundaries. It can be divided into a region (second region) outside the outer frame (outline) of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R. The inner area (first area) of the outer outline (outline) of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R contains still images, moving images (3-dimensional CG moving images, animated moving images, and scenes from movies). ) is displayed, and in the outer area (second area) of the outer frame (outline) of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, background images (still images, moving images (3-dimensional CG moving images, An animated video, a scene from a movie)) is displayed.

[Modification 5]
In the external and external effects of the stereoscopic image A in FIG. 92, the inner area FRMa (first area) of the external frame (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM, which is a stereoscopic image, is used as the predetermined image, and the external and external effects of the stereoscopic image in FIG. In B, the inner region FRMa (first region) of the outer frame (contour) of the plate-shaped stereoscopic image FRM, which is a stereoscopic image, is used as a predetermined image, and in C, the inner and outer outer contour of the stereoscopic image in FIG. The inner area FRMa (first area) of the outer frame (outline) of a stereoscopic image FRM (number "4") viewed from the front was a background image having various geometric patterns that were still images. However, the background image may be a moving image instead of a still image, or may be a mixture of still images and moving images. For example, the moving image may be one in which various geometric patterns move, or may be a three-dimensional CG moving image, an animation moving image, or a scene from a movie.

[Modification 6]
In the external and external rendering A of the stereoscopic image in FIG. 92, the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM is one stereoscopic image as the predetermined image, and in the external external rendering B of the stereoscopic image in FIG. 93, the board is one stereoscopic image as the predetermined image. In the three-dimensional image FRM of the shape, and the outer-internal/external rendering of the three-dimensional image shown in FIG. was one stereoscopic image. However, the predetermined image may be a plurality of stereoscopic images. In this case, the outer area (second area) of the outer frame (outline) of each stereoscopic image may be the same image (background image) or different images, or one image may be used for each stereoscopic image. The image may be displayed so that the entire image of one image can be understood through the inner area (first area) of the outer frame (contour) of each stereoscopic image, or the inner area (first area) of the outer frame (contour) of each stereoscopic image may be The same image may be displayed in the area) or different images may be displayed. In this way, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be increased.

[Modified example 7]
In the external/interior rendering A of the stereoscopic image in FIG. 92, the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM, which is a stereoscopic image, is a predetermined image, and one or both of the vertical and horizontal lengths becomes large, or one or both of them becomes small. It was displayed in a manner that However, the vertical and horizontal lengths of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM may be constant. Even with this configuration, the character displayed in the inner area FRMa (first area) of the outer frame (contour) of the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image) formed inside the frame-shaped stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image) Body CRA, character body CRB (first effect image), and outer area FRMb (second A background image (second effect image) having various geometric patterns displayed in the area) can be used to visually entertain the player, thereby increasing interest. be able to.

[Modified example 8]
In the outer/internal/external rendering C of the stereoscopic images in FIGS. 94(B), 94(D), 94(F), and 94(H), the stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image) viewed from the front is displayed on the image display device 7( Although the stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image) is displayed moving in a three-dimensional space, it is not limited to a front view, and even if the stereoscopic image FRM (predetermined image) is displayed in a display mode in which it rotates in a three-dimensional space or in a display mode in which it rotates and moves. good. In this case, if the three-dimensional image FRM (predetermined image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) in such a manner that a part of it protrudes (jumps out) from the image display device 7 (display means), the discontinuous three-dimensional image The image FRM (predetermined image) is displayed as a plurality of stereoscopic images on the image display device 7 (display means), and the inner area FRMa,... A plurality of independent inner regions where FRMa is discontinuous are formed in the image display device 7 (display means). In this manner, the character body CRA and the character body CRB appear and move within the plurality of independent inner regions FRMa, ... FRMa in a manner spanning the plurality of independent inner regions FRMa, ... FRMa. mode, and a moving image of the character body CRA and character body CRB is played back.

[Modification 9]
The external and external effects of the stereoscopic image A in FIG. 92, the external and external effects of the stereoscopic image B in FIG. 93, and the external and external effects of the stereoscopic image C in FIG. A production may be added.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect C1-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying various images,
When displaying a predetermined image on the display means, a first effect image is displayed in a first area formed inside the predetermined image, and a second effect image is formed outside the predetermined image. A second effect image displayed in the area can be executed.
the predetermined image is movably displayed on the display means;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect C1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C1-1,
the first effect image and the second effect image are different;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect C1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect C1-1 or aspect C1-2,
When the predetermined image is moved and displayed on the display means and the first area is displayed on the display means in a large size, the second area is displayed on the display means in a small size.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect C1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C1-1 to C1-3,
the predetermined image is a three-dimensional image;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect C1-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect C1-4,
The first area is an area inside the outline of the stereoscopic image whose boundary is the outline of the stereoscopic image,
The second area is an area outside the outline of the stereoscopic image whose boundary is the outline of the stereoscopic image,
A gaming machine characterized by:

The selection display inhibiting effects A to C of the effect mode will be explained below using FIGS. 95 to 97. In FIGS. 95 to 97, the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 arranged around the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are omitted for ease of viewing the drawings, and the image display Some decorative patterns and various reserved images displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7 are also omitted for ease of viewing the drawings.

The selection display prevention performance of this performance mode can be executed during a specific period from the start of variation of decorative symbols to the stop of variation, or during a specific period during a jackpot game (jackpot production) in which a profit is given to the player. , the player's intention to operate (press) the performance button 63 can be reflected in the progress of the performance. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 receives various commands from the sub-control board 90 (for example, a variable performance start command, a preliminary determination command, an opening command for various jackpot games, a round designation command for a jackpot game, and an ending command for a jackpot game). If the analysis includes an instruction to execute a button effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

Here, selection display prevention performance A of the performance mode will be explained first, selection display prevention performance B of the performance mode, and selection display prevention performance C of the performance mode will be explained in order.

[Production mode selection display prevention production A]
First, the selection display prevention effect A of the effect mode will be explained with reference to FIG. 95. FIG. 95 is a diagram for explaining the selection display prevention effect A of the effect mode. The selective display prevention performance A of the performance mode is performed during a specific period from the start of variation of decorative symbols to the stop of variation. In the selection display prevention performance A of the performance mode, first, as shown in FIG. A variable display of decorative symbols (symbols: numbers "1" to "9") is started in a display mode in which the reels are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of 7a. When the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern is started, the decorative pattern that has been stopped and displayed changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed, resulting in a display mode that fluctuates at a high speed. Thereby, the background image (here, a "cloud" image) placed behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. Immediately before the decorative pattern stops, it decelerates, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state, and is then stopped and displayed.

As the decorative patterns start to change, a message MG "Change mode with production button" informing that the production mode can be changed by operating (pressing) the production button 63 is displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). It is arranged and displayed on the lower left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

As the expiration of the special figure reservation, the pending extinguishing image 9C corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R that are currently changing is arranged and displayed in the lower part of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. , To the left of the retained digested image 9C, here, for example, three reserved images 9A as three first special figures reserved are displayed on the image display device 7 in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. They are arranged and displayed at the bottom of the screen 7a. Further, the retained image 9A and the retained digested image 9C each have a circular shape, and the size of the retained digested image 9C is larger than that of the retained image 9A. Note that the size of the pending digested image 9C and the size of the pending image 9A may be the same size.

To the right of the pending digested image 9C, a selection section SEL from which a performance mode can be selected is arranged and displayed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the selection section SEL, production modes consisting of A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode are displayed in a manner in which the reels rotate, and each time the production button 63 is operated (pressed), the reels rotate. By doing so, the production mode that has reached the specific area is displayed larger than other production modes. The performance mode located in this specific area becomes the selected performance mode, and the theme image PM of the selected performance mode is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Here, since the previously selected production mode was B mode, which will be described later, the B mode theme image PM (here, an image imitating "clouds") is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Ru.

Here, the A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode that constitute the production mode will be briefly explained.

In the A mode, a performance with the theme of "sun" is advanced, and a theme image PM imitating the "sun" is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the player operates (presses) the production button 63 while the A mode is located in the specific area of the selection part SEL, the A mode located in the specific area of the selection part SEL moves downward, and the A mode is activated. The D mode, which is placed below the , is displayed in a manner in which the reels rotate from the bottom to the top, and the B mode, which is placed above the A mode, is displayed in a manner in which the reels rotate from the top toward a specific area. Is displayed.

In mode B, a performance with the theme of "clouds" is performed, and a theme image PM imitating "clouds" is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the player operates (presses) the production button 63 in a state where B mode is located in a specific area of the selection part SEL, the B mode located in the specific area of the selection part SEL moves downward, thereby changing to B mode. The A mode placed below is displayed in a manner in which the reels rotate from the bottom to the top, and the C mode placed above the B mode is displayed in a manner in which the reels rotate from above towards a specific area. Is displayed.

In the C mode, a performance with a theme of "rain" is performed, and a theme image PM imitating "rain" is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the player operates (presses) the production button 63 in a state where the C mode is located in a specific area of the selection part SEL, the C mode located in the specific area of the selection part SEL moves downward, thereby changing to the C mode. The B mode, which is placed below the , is displayed in a manner in which the reels rotate from the bottom to the top, and the D mode, which is placed above the C mode, is displayed in a manner in which the reels rotate from the top toward a specific area. Is displayed.

In the D mode, a performance with the theme of "snow" is advanced, and a theme image PM imitating "snow" is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the player operates (presses) the production button 63 in a state where D mode is located in a specific area of the selection part SEL, the D mode located in the specific area of the selection part SEL moves downward, thereby changing to D mode. The C mode, which is placed below the , is displayed in such a manner that the reels rotate from the bottom to the top, and the A mode, which is placed above the D mode, is displayed in such a manner that the reels rotate from above toward a specific area. The A mode is displayed again in a display mode located in the specific area.

When the decorative pattern in FIG. 95(A) starts to fluctuate, there are cases in which no reach is formed and cases in which a reach is formed. Once the reach is formed, a reach effect is performed based on the expectation of a jackpot. There are multiple reach effects. When a reach is formed, following FIG. 95(A), as shown in FIG. 95(B), after the decorative pattern starts to fluctuate, the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed as a pattern (number). (Here, it is temporarily stopped at the number "1"), and the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are being changed. In this state, when the game ball enters the first starting port 20, the four reserved images 9A are displayed as four first special figures reserved in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. They are arranged and displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the display device 7.

After that, when the player operates (presses) the production button 63, the B mode located in the specific area of the selection section SEL moves downward, and the A mode located below the B mode moves upward from below. The reels are displayed in a rotating manner, and the C mode, which is placed above the B mode, is displayed in a manner in which the reels rotate from above toward a specific area. In the C mode, a theme image PM imitating "rain" is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, as shown in FIG. 95(C). In addition, after the decorative pattern starts to fluctuate, the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed as a pattern (number) following the left decorative pattern 8L (here, it is temporarily stopped at the number "3"), and the middle decorative pattern 8C is changed. It is inside. In this state, even if a game ball enters the first starting port 20, the number of reserved first special symbols does not increase because the upper limit of four reserved first special symbols has already been reached, and the five reserved images 9A They are arranged in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and are not displayed.

After that, when the player operates (presses) the production button 63, the C mode located in the specific area of the selection section SEL moves downward, and the B mode arranged below the C mode moves upward from below. The reels are displayed in a rotating manner, and the D mode, which is placed above the C mode, is displayed in a manner in which the reels rotate from above toward a specific area. In the D mode, a theme image PM imitating "snow" is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, as shown in FIG. 95(D). In addition, after the decorative pattern starts to change, the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed as a pattern (number) following the left decorative pattern 8L and right decorative pattern 8R (temporarily stopped at the number "5" here), and then , the left decorative pattern 8L becomes the number "1", the middle decorative pattern 8C becomes the number "5", and the right decorative pattern 8R becomes the number "3", which are stopped and displayed, and the miss is confirmed and displayed.

When the left decorative pattern 8L becomes the number "1", the middle decorative pattern 8C becomes the number "5", and the right decorative pattern 8R becomes the number "3" and are stopped and displayed, the display continues until the next decorative pattern starts changing. During the period (hereinafter referred to as "interval"), even if the player operates (presses) the production button 63, the D mode located in the specific area of the selection section SEL cannot be moved downward, and the production Mode selection is no longer possible. As a result, the already selected production mode is continued during the interval, and the theme image PM imitating "snow" is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In other words, unless the next decorative pattern starts to fluctuate, the already selected production mode will continue, and the theme image PM imitating "snow" will be displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. becomes. Note that even if a demonstration screen for waiting for customers (standby screen) is to be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, after the demonstration screen for waiting for customers (standby screen) is finished, the production mode that has already been selected will be displayed. continues, and the theme image PM imitating "snow" is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

Thereafter, as the next decorative pattern starts to change, it is aligned to the bottom of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, as shown in FIG. 95(E). When the rightmost held image 9A among the four held images 9A moves to the right as the held digested image 9C, the remaining three held images 9A move one by one to the right. displayed in a shifted manner. As the decorative patterns start to change, a message MG "Change mode with production button" informing that the production mode can be changed by operating (pressing) the production button 63 is displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). It is arranged and displayed on the lower left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and allows selection of the production mode.

In the series of performances from the start of the variation of the decorative pattern in FIG. 95(A) to FIG. 95(D), no reach was formed; on the other hand, when a reach was formed, Following FIG. 95(A), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same pattern (number) (temporarily stopped at the number "1" here), and the middle decorative pattern 8C is fluctuated. When the reach is displayed and the reach is formed, the selection section SEL is displayed at the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 at this point, as shown in FIG. When operated (pressing operation), the B mode located in the specific area of the selection section SEL can be moved downward, and the production mode can be selected. In addition, after the variation of the decorative symbols starts, by entering the game ball into the first starting port 20, four reserved images 9A are displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as four first special symbols reserved. The images are displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

When a reach is formed and the reach effect progresses, car images GYK imitating cars as special images form a group from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, as shown in FIG. 95(H). When the effect of running all at once is developed (so-called "group preview"), priority is given to displaying the special image, and the selection section SEL is selected from the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Even if the player operates (presses) the production button 63 after it disappears (disappears), the selection section SEL is not displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the production mode cannot be selected. It has become. Even if a group notice is given, the four pending images 9A and the pending digested images 9C do not disappear (disappear) from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

After that, the reach effect progresses, and the left decorative pattern 8L becomes the number "1", the middle decorative pattern 8C becomes the number "0", and the right decorative pattern 8R becomes the number "1", which are stopped and displayed, and the miss is confirmed and displayed. . Even in this state, the selection section SEL has disappeared (disappeared) from the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and even if the player operates (presses) the production button 63, The selection section SEL is not displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, making it impossible to select the production mode.

During the period from when the group notice is given until the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed, and the failure is confirmed and displayed, the player operates (presses) the performance button 63. Also, the production mode cannot be selected, and furthermore, the period from when the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are stopped until the next decorative pattern starts changing. Even during the period (hereinafter referred to as "interval"), even if the player operates (presses) the performance button 63, the performance mode cannot be selected. As a result, in the two periods, the already selected production mode is continued, and the theme image PM imitating "clouds" is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In other words, when a group notice is given, the already selected production mode is continued unless the next decorative pattern starts changing, and the theme image PM imitating "clouds" is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 7. 7a will be displayed in a large size. Note that even if a demonstration screen for waiting for customers (standby screen) is to be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, after the demonstration screen for waiting for customers (standby screen) is finished, the production mode that has already been selected will be displayed. continues, and the theme image PM imitating "clouds" is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

Thereafter, as the next decorative pattern starts to change, it is aligned to the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, as shown in FIG. 95(J). When the rightmost held image 9A among the four held images 9A moves to the right as the held digested image 9C, the remaining three held images 9A move one by one to the right. displayed in a shifted manner. As the decorative patterns start to change, a message MG "Change mode with production button" informing that the production mode can be changed by operating (pressing) the production button 63 is displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). It is arranged and displayed on the lower left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and allows selection of the production mode.

[Production mode selection display prevention production B]
Next, the selection display prevention effect B of the effect mode will be explained with reference to FIG. 96. FIG. 96 is a diagram for explaining selection display prevention performance B of the performance mode. The selective display prevention performance B of the performance mode is performed during a specific period from the start of variation of the decorative pattern to the stop of variation. In the selection display prevention performance B of the performance mode, first, as shown in FIG. A variable display of decorative symbols (symbols: numbers "1" to "9") is started in a display mode in which the reels are rotated from the upper side to the lower side of 7a. When the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern is started, the decorative pattern that has been stopped and displayed changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed, resulting in a display mode that fluctuates at a high speed. Thereby, the background image (here, a "cloud" image) placed behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. Immediately before the decorative pattern stops, it decelerates, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state, and is then stopped and displayed.

As the decorative patterns start to change, a message MG "Change mode with production button" informing that the production mode can be changed by operating (pressing) the production button 63 is displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). It is arranged and displayed on the lower left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

As the expiry of the special figure reservation, the reserved extinguished image 9C corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R that are currently changing is arranged and displayed in the lower part of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. , To the left of the reserved digested image 9C, here, for example, three reserved images 9A as three first special figures reserved are displayed on the image display device 7 in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. They are arranged and displayed at the bottom of the screen 7a. Further, the retained image 9A and the retained digested image 9C each have a circular shape, and the size of the retained digested image 9C is larger than that of the retained image 9A. Note that the size of the pending digested image 9C and the size of the pending image 9A may be the same size.

To the right of the pending digested image 9C, a selection section SEL from which a performance mode can be selected is arranged and displayed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the selection section SEL, production modes consisting of A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode are displayed in a manner in which the reels rotate, and each time the production button 63 is operated (pressed), the reels rotate. By doing so, the production mode that has reached the specific area is displayed larger than other production modes. The performance mode located in this specific area becomes the selected performance mode, and the theme image PM of the selected performance mode is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Here, since the previously selected production mode was B mode, which will be described later, the B mode theme image PM (here, an image imitating "clouds") is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Ru.

Here, the A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode that constitute the production mode will be briefly explained.

In the A mode, a performance with the theme of "sun" is advanced, and a theme image PM imitating the "sun" is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the player operates (presses) the production button 63 while the A mode is located in the specific area of the selection part SEL, the A mode located in the specific area of the selection part SEL moves downward, and the A mode is activated. The D mode, which is placed below the , is displayed in a manner in which the reels rotate from the bottom to the top, and the B mode, which is placed above the A mode, is displayed in a manner in which the reels rotate from the top toward a specific area. Is displayed.

In mode B, a performance with the theme of "clouds" is advanced, and a theme image PM imitating "clouds" is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the player operates (presses) the production button 63 while the B mode is located in the specific area of the selection part SEL, the B mode located in the specific area of the selection part SEL moves downward, and the B mode is activated. The A mode placed below is displayed in a manner in which the reels rotate from the bottom to the top, and the C mode placed above the B mode is displayed in a manner in which the reels rotate from above toward a specific area. Is displayed.

In the C mode, a performance with a theme of "rain" is performed, and a theme image PM imitating "rain" is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the player operates (presses) the production button 63 in a state where the C mode is located in a specific area of the selection part SEL, the C mode located in the specific area of the selection part SEL moves downward, thereby changing to the C mode. B mode, which is placed below, is displayed with the reels rotating from the bottom to the top, and D mode, which is placed above the C mode, is displayed with the reels rotating from above toward a specific area. Is displayed.

In the D mode, a performance with the theme of "snow" is advanced, and a theme image PM imitating "snow" is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the player operates (presses) the production button 63 in a state where D mode is located in a specific area of the selection part SEL, the D mode located in the specific area of the selection part SEL moves downward, thereby changing to D mode. The C mode, which is placed below the , is displayed in such a manner that the reels rotate from the bottom to the top, and the A mode, which is placed above the D mode, is displayed in such a manner that the reels rotate from above toward a specific area. The A mode is displayed again in a display mode located in the specific area.

When the decorative pattern in FIG. 96(A) starts to fluctuate, an effect (so-called "pre-reading effect") indicating that the pending information corresponding to the pending image 9A may include a jackpot may not be performed. A prefetch effect may be performed for the pending image 9A. If the look-ahead effect is not performed, as shown in FIG. 96(B) following FIG. 96(A), after the decorative pattern starts to fluctuate, the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed as a pattern (number). (Here, it is temporarily stopped at the number "1"), and the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are being changed. In this state, when the game ball enters the first starting port 20, the four reserved images 9A are displayed as four first special figures reserved in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. They are arranged and displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the display device 7.

After that, when the player operates (presses) the production button 63, the B mode located in the specific area of the selection section SEL moves downward, and the A mode located below the B mode moves upward from below. The reels are displayed in a rotating manner, and the C mode, which is placed above the B mode, is displayed in a manner in which the reels rotate from above toward a specific area. In the C mode, a theme image PM imitating "rain" is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, as shown in FIG. 96(C). In addition, after the decorative pattern starts to fluctuate, the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed as a pattern (number) following the left decorative pattern 8L (here, it is temporarily stopped at the number "3"), and the middle decorative pattern 8C is changed. It is inside. In this state, even if a game ball enters the first starting port 20, the number of reserved first special symbols does not increase because the upper limit of four reserved first special symbols has already been reached, and the five reserved images 9A They are arranged in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and are not displayed.

After that, when the player operates (presses) the production button 63, the C mode located in the specific area of the selection section SEL moves downward, and the B mode arranged below the C mode moves upward from below. The reels are displayed in a rotating manner, and the D mode, which is placed above the C mode, is displayed in a manner in which the reels rotate from above toward a specific area. In the D mode, a theme image PM imitating "snow" is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, as shown in FIG. 96(D). In addition, after the decorative pattern starts to change, the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed as a pattern (number) following the left decorative pattern 8L and right decorative pattern 8R (temporarily stopped at the number "5" here), and then , the left decorative pattern 8L becomes the number "1", the middle decorative pattern 8C becomes the number "5", and the right decorative pattern 8R becomes the number "3", which are stopped and displayed, and the miss is confirmed and displayed.

When the left decorative pattern 8L becomes the number "1", the middle decorative pattern 8C becomes the number "5", and the right decorative pattern 8R becomes the number "3" and are stopped and displayed, the display continues until the next decorative pattern starts changing. During the period (hereinafter referred to as "interval"), even if the player operates (presses) the production button 63, the D mode located in the specific area of the selection section SEL cannot be moved downward, and the production Mode selection is no longer possible. As a result, the already selected production mode is continued during the interval, and the theme image PM imitating "snow" is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In other words, unless the next decorative pattern starts to fluctuate, the already selected production mode will continue, and the theme image PM imitating "snow" will be displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. becomes. Note that even if a demonstration screen for waiting for customers (standby screen) is to be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, after the demonstration screen for waiting for customers (standby screen) is finished, the production mode that has already been selected will be displayed. continues, and the theme image PM imitating "snow" is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

Thereafter, as the next decorative pattern starts to change, it is aligned to the bottom of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, as shown in FIG. 96(E). When the rightmost held image 9A among the four held images 9A moves to the right as the held digested image 9C, the remaining three held images 9A move one by one to the right. displayed in a shifted manner. As the decorative patterns start to change, a message MG "Change mode with production button" informing that the production mode can be changed by operating (pressing) the production button 63 is displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). It is arranged and displayed on the lower left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and allows selection of the production mode.

In a series of effects from the start of the variation of the decorative pattern in FIG. 96(A) to FIG. 96(D), an effect (so-called 96(G) following FIG. 96(A). After the decorative pattern starts to change, the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed as a pattern (number) (temporarily stopped at the number "1" in this case), and the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are changing. It becomes. In this state, when the game ball enters the first starting port 20, the four reserved images 9A are displayed as four first special figures reserved in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. They are arranged and displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the display device 7. If the held image 9A placed closest to the held digested image 9C is the first held image 9A, then the second held image 9A is placed to the left of the first held image 9A, and the second held image 9A is placed to the left of the first held image 9A. A third pending image 9A is arranged to the left of the pending image 9A, and a pending image 9A added when a game ball enters the first starting port 20 this time is placed to the left of the third pending image 9A. is arranged as the fourth pending image 9A.

When an effect (pre-reading effect) that suggests the possibility that the pending information corresponding to this fourth pending image 9A includes a jackpot is performed, the display mode of the fourth pending image 9A is changed to another as a special image. are displayed in a manner different from the display mode of the pending images 9A (the first pending image 9A, the second pending image 9A, and the third pending image 9A). For example, in the look-ahead effect that is a special image, the display mode of the pending image 9A is, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (strong jackpot)) based on the expectation level of a jackpot. Expectations for a jackpot are now set high. Here, the display mode of the fourth pending image 9A is a mode in which it emits red light, and the other pending images 9A (first pending image 9A, second pending image 9A, third pending image 9A) ) is a display mode that emits white light (this is the case where no look-ahead effect is performed, and the expectation of a jackpot is the lowest).

In addition, in the look-ahead effect that is a special image, the display mode of the circular pending image 9A is based on the expectation level of a jackpot, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (strong jackpot)) ), the expectation of a jackpot is set to be high, but a character body may be used instead of the circular pending image 9A. In this case, in the mode in which the character body is used as the display mode of the pending image 9A, the expectation level of the jackpot is at least higher than the expectation level of the jackpot set in the mode of emitting red light as the display mode of the pending image 9A. is set to .

When a look-ahead effect that is a special image is performed, priority is given to displaying the special image, the selection section SEL disappears (disappears) from the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the player presses the effect button 63. Even if is operated (pressing operation), the selection section SEL is not displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the production mode cannot be selected. Even if the pre-read effect is performed, the four pending images 9A and the pending digested images 9C do not disappear (disappear) from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

After that, as shown in FIG. 96(H), after the decorative patterns start to fluctuate, the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed as a pattern (number) following the left decorative pattern 8L (here, the number "3" is displayed). temporary stop), and the medium decorative pattern 8C is changing. In this state, even if the player operates (presses) the performance button 63, the selection section SEL is not displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the performance mode cannot be selected.

After that, as shown in FIG. 96(I), after the decorative patterns start to change, the middle decorative pattern 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed as a pattern (number) following the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R. After that, the left decorative pattern 8L becomes the number "1", the middle decorative pattern 8C becomes the number "5", and the right decorative pattern 8R becomes the number "3", and the display stops, and the miss is confirmed. Is displayed.

Thereafter, as the next decorative pattern starts to change, it is aligned to the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, as shown in FIG. 96(J). When the rightmost held image 9A among the four held images 9A moves to the right as the held digested image 9C, the remaining three held images 9A move one by one to the right. displayed in a shifted manner. Although the decorative pattern starts to fluctuate, since the look-ahead effect has already been performed, even in this state, the selection section SEL disappears (disappears) from the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Even if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the selection section SEL is not displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the effect mode cannot be selected.

In this way, if a look-ahead effect is performed during the specified period from the start of the variation of the decorative pattern to the stop of the variation, the selection of the effect mode will be performed during the change if the look-ahead effect is performed before the look-ahead effect is performed. However, if a look-ahead effect is performed, the effect mode cannot be selected during the fluctuation. Furthermore, when a pre-reading effect is performed, the pending image 9A on which this pre-reading effect was performed moves to the right side as a pending digested image 9C, and the decorative patterns start to fluctuate, including the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern. During the period from when 8R is displayed in a stopped state until the failure is confirmed and displayed, the player can press the performance button 63 even during a specific period from the start of variation of decorative symbols to the stop of variation during which the production mode can be selected. Even if you operate (press), you cannot select the production mode. Furthermore, there is a period (hereinafter referred to as an "interval") from when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R in the reserved image 9A in which the look-ahead effect has been performed is stopped until the next decorative pattern starts to fluctuate. ), even if the player operates (presses) the performance button 63, the performance mode cannot be selected. As a result, in such a series of periods, the already selected production mode is continued, and the theme image PM imitating a "cloud" is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In other words, when the pre-read effect is performed, the pending image 9A on which the pre-read effect has been performed is digested as the pending digested image 9C. The selected production mode is continued, and the theme image PM imitating "clouds" is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

In addition, if the pending image 9A on which the pre-read effect has been performed is digested as the pending digested image 9C and becomes a jackpot, after the jackpot effect is finished, as shown in FIG. 96(A), the effect button 63 is operated ( A message MG "Change mode with production button" informing that the production mode can be changed by pressing (pressing operation) is placed on the lower left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). will be displayed, allowing you to select the production mode.

In addition, even if a demonstration screen (standby screen) for waiting for customers is to be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, after the demonstration screen (standby screen) for waiting for customers ends, the production mode that has already been selected will be displayed. continues, and the theme image PM imitating "clouds" is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

[Production mode selection display prevention production C]
Next, the selection display prevention effect C of the effect mode will be explained with reference to FIG. 97. FIG. 97 is a diagram for explaining the selection display prevention effect C of the effect mode. The performance mode selection display prevention performance C is a performance that is performed during a specific period during a jackpot game (jackpot performance) in which a profit is given to the player, and is a performance that is not performed when a predetermined condition is met. (For example, this is not performed if there is a so-called "holding series" in which there is a held ball that becomes a jackpot before the jackpot performance ends). The presence or absence of this pending series is determined based on the jackpot preliminary determination result (in the case of a jackpot, the jackpot type preliminary determination result) and the fluctuation pattern preliminary determination result, which are included in the preliminary determination command.

Here, a case will be explained in which a player plays a right-handed game, hits a jackpot, a jackpot game (jackpot performance) occurs, and continues the right-handed game after the jackpot game (jackpot performance) ends. In addition, if the performance of the held series is not performed, in other words, before the jackpot performance ends, there is no held ball that will become a jackpot.

The period from the beginning to the end of the jackpot performance (jackpot game) includes a game performance period from the beginning of the jackpot performance (jackpot game) to the end after all the performances of each round game have been performed, and a game performance period during this game performance period. Next, there is a notification period that informs the game state (for example, a state of returning to left-handed hitting, a state of continuing right-handed hitting) after the end of the jackpot performance (jackpot game), and following this notification period, a jackpot performance (jackpot game) A specific period in which a production mode selection screen is displayed that allows the player to select a production mode after the end of the production mode, and following this specific period, catchphrase productions and games in which the catchphrase of the gaming machine manufacturer is displayed. There is a predetermined period during which an addictive prevention effect is performed during which a warning is displayed to warn against dependence (absorption) on the game.

During the specific period, there is a first period for selecting a production mode (production mode selection period), and a mode transition to the selected production mode after the first period (production mode selection period) has elapsed. The second period (performance mode finalization notification period) is made up of the following.

The end of a predetermined period in which catch phrases from game machine manufacturers are displayed and addictive prevention effects in which warnings against dependence (addiction) on games are displayed, and the beginning and end of jackpot effects (jackpot games). The end of the period extending up to the end of the period coincides with

In the selection display prevention performance C of the performance mode, first, as shown in FIG. 97(A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays the performance of each round game in the jackpot performance (jackpot game), and then all the games are completed. This marks the end of the game performance period, and accordingly, at the start of the notification period, a message MG "Continue hitting right" is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in order to continue hitting right. . In addition, the holding image 9A corresponding to the first special figure holding based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, which was displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variable display of decorative patterns. , instead of the holding image 9B corresponding to the second special figure holding based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, the holding image 9B corresponding to the first special drawing holding based on the entering of the game ball into the first starting port 20. The second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is displayed as a number HMG arranged at the upper left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Here, for example, the first special symbol reservation based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 20 is zero and the number "0" is on the left, and the number "0" is set on the left side based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 21. Four special figures are reserved and the number "4" is arranged and displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 with the number "4" spaced apart from each other on the right side.

The message MG "Continue right-handed hitting" in FIG. 97(A) is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and then the notification period (for example, 3 seconds) comes to an end, and accordingly, the specific period ends. At the beginning of the game, there are cases where a performance mode selection screen is displayed that allows the player to select the performance mode after the end of the jackpot performance (jackpot game), and cases where the performance mode selection screen is not displayed. .

When the production mode selection screen is displayed, as shown in FIG. 97(B), the production button 63 is pressed to prompt the player to select the production mode by operating (pressing) the production button 63. The simulated first effect button image BTN is placed at the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and displayed in a predetermined light emitting manner. The English word "PUSH" is engraved in the portion of the first performance button image corresponding to the pressing operation surface of the performance button 63. Note that the "predetermined light emission mode" is, for example, blinking white light. In addition, the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are displayed as numbers HMG on the image display device 7. continues to be displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a.

Production modes consisting of A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode are displayed in a manner in which the reels rotate, and each time the production button 63 is operated (pressing operation), the reels rotate and a specific area is displayed. A selection section SEL in which the performance mode that has reached 1 is displayed larger than other performance modes is displayed in a rectangular area from the center to the upper left corner of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The performance mode located in this specific area becomes the selected performance mode. Note that when the production mode selection screen is displayed for the first time, A mode is placed in a specific area as a default, but the next time the production mode selection screen is displayed, the default ( In other words, mode A) may always be arranged in a specific area, or the selected production mode may be arranged in a specific area when the production mode selection screen was displayed last time.

To the right of the selection section SEL, a demonstration area DS is displayed in a rectangular area from the center to the upper right corner of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, in which the contents of the currently selected production mode are explained using various images and various characters. be done. The demo area DS is formed as a rectangular area, and the characters "DEMO" indicating the demonstration screen of the production mode are displayed on the upper left side of the demo area DS.

In mode A, a production with the theme of "sun" is promoted, and a theme image PM imitating the "sun" is displayed as an animation on the left side of the demo area DS, and the same image as the first production button image BTN is displayed. (an image with all the same characteristic information such as button shape, size, light emission mode, etc.) or a similar image (an image partially or completely similar to the characteristic information) It is placed and displayed on the lower right side. Note that an explanatory text MME regarding the progress of the performance in the A mode is displayed on the upper right side of the demo area DS.

When the player operates (presses) the production button 63 in a state where the A mode is located in the specific area of the selection part SEL, the mode is located in the specific area of the selection part SEL, as shown in FIG. 97(C). As the A mode moves downward, the D mode, which is placed below the A mode, is displayed with the reels rotating from the bottom to the top, and the B mode, which is placed above the A mode, is identified from above. The reels are displayed as rotating towards the area. Note that even if the player operates (presses) the performance button 63, the first performance button image BTN continues to be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition, the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are displayed as numbers HMG on the image display device 7. continues to be displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a.

In B mode, a production with the theme of "clouds" is progressed, and a theme image PM imitating "clouds" is displayed as a moving image in the center of the demonstration area DS, and an explanatory text MME about the progress of the production in B mode is displayed. is displayed on the upper right side of the demo area DS.

When the player operates (presses) the production button 63 while the B mode is located in the specific area of the selection part SEL, the B mode located in the specific area of the selection part SEL moves downward, and the B mode is activated. The A mode placed below is displayed in a manner in which the reels rotate from the bottom to the top, and the C mode placed above the B mode is displayed in a manner in which the reels rotate from above toward a specific area. Is displayed. Note that even if the player operates (presses) the performance button 63, the first performance button image BTN continues to be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition, the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are displayed as numbers HMG on the image display device 7. continues to be displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a.

In C mode, a performance with the theme of "rain" is progressed, and a theme image PM imitating "rain" is displayed as an animation in the center of the demo area DS, and an explanatory text MME about the progress of the performance in C mode is displayed. is displayed on the upper right side of the demo area DS.

When the player operates (presses) the production button 63 in a state where the C mode is located in a specific area of the selection part SEL, the C mode located in the specific area of the selection part SEL moves downward, thereby changing to the C mode. B mode, which is placed below, is displayed with the reels rotating from the bottom to the top, and D mode, which is placed above the C mode, is displayed with the reels rotating from above toward a specific area. Is displayed. Note that even if the player operates (presses) the performance button 63, the first performance button image BTN continues to be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition, the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are displayed as numbers HMG on the image display device 7. continues to be displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a.

In D mode, a performance with the theme of "snow" is progressed, and a theme image PM imitating "snow" is displayed as a moving image in the center of the demonstration area DS, and an explanatory text MME about the progress of the performance in D mode is displayed. is displayed on the upper right side of the demo area DS.

When the player operates (presses) the production button 63 and the B mode is located in the specific area of the selection section SEL, a first period (production mode selection period) for selecting the production mode has elapsed; At the start of the second period (performance mode confirmation notification period) for notifying the mode transition to the selected production mode, as shown in FIG. 97(D), the four corners of the rectangular demonstration area DS are displayed as images. It is displayed in a manner that spreads (enlarged manner) toward the four corners of the display screen 7a of the display device 7, and on the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a production based on the theme of "clouds" in B mode is progressing. A theme image PM imitating a "cloud" is displayed in a large size, and a message MG informing that the selected production mode is B mode is displayed on the right side from the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Displayed larger toward the center. Note that the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are displayed as numbers HMG on the image display device 7. continues to be displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a.

After that, a second period (performance mode confirmation notification period) passes, and a catchphrase production in which the catchphrase of the gaming machine manufacturer is displayed, and an addictive prevention production in which a warning against dependence (addiction) on the game is displayed are performed. At the beginning of the period, and when this period (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed and the jackpot performance (jackpot game) ends, a theme image imitating a "cloud" that progresses with the theme of "cloud" in B mode. An effect in which PM is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 will be performed.

At the end of the notification period in which the message MG "Continue right-handed hitting" in FIG. 97(A) is displayed, and accordingly, at the beginning of the specific period, the series from FIG. 97(B) to FIG. 97(D) is displayed. In the performance, a performance mode selection screen is displayed, and the performance after the end of the jackpot performance (jackpot game) is proceeded in the selected performance mode. On the other hand, the number of first special symbols held based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, which is displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, is zero, which is the number "0". , since the number of second special symbols reserved based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is four and the number "4", there are four second special symbols based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21. When the reservation information corresponding to the special figure reservation includes a jackpot, the display of the special image is given priority and the selection screen of the performance mode is not displayed in order to perform the performance of the reservation series which is a special image. Therefore, when the production mode selection screen is not displayed, light is emitted from the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in all directions, as shown in FIG. 97(G) following FIG. 97(A). The emitted flash image FH is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Note that the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are displayed as numbers HMG on the image display device 7. continues to be displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a.

Thereafter, a suspended series image HRC having a three-dimensional V-shape indicating the existence of a suspended series is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, as shown in FIG. 97(H). A first character body HRC1 having a three-dimensional circular shape is arranged on the lower side of the first surface of the V-shaped suspended series image HRC, whereas a suspended series image HRC having a V-shape A second character body HRC2 having a three-dimensional rectangular shape is arranged above the second surface (the surface opposite to the first surface) of the image HRC. The held continuous image HRC rotates around and around the vertical line passing through the center of the lower side of the held continuous image HRC, and the first surface of the held continuous image HRC and the second surface of the held continuous image HRC repeatedly appear. This is the display mode.

When an effect (pre-reading effect) that suggests the possibility that the pending information corresponding to the pending image 9A (for example, FIG. 1 and FIGS. 96(G) to 96(J)) includes a jackpot is performed, for example, a special The display mode of the fourth pending image 9A is different from the display mode of the other pending images 9A (first pending image 9A, second pending image 9A, third pending image 9A). The display mode of the first pending image 9A, the second pending image 9A, and the third pending image 9A has a circular shape, whereas the fourth pending image 9A has a circular shape. The display mode of the image 9A may be a first character HRC1 or a second character HRC2 instead of having a circular shape. In other words, the first character body HRC1 and the second character body HRC2 arranged together with the reserved series image HRC are the same characters as the characters displayed as the display mode of the reserved image 9A when the prefetch effect is performed. It has become.

Note that the character displayed as the display mode of the reserved image 9A is smaller than the size of the first character body HRC1 and the second character body HRC2 arranged together with the reserved series image HRC. Further, although the character displayed as the display mode of the reserved image 9A is the same character as the first character body HRC1 and the second character body HRC2 arranged together with the reserved series image HRC, the orientation and posture of the character are different. It may be different.

If the first side of the held series of images HRC having the first character body HRC1 is stopped and displayed facing forward (towards the player), although it is not possible to tell the type of win, the second start While it is possible to convey that the reservation information corresponding to the four second special figure reservations based on the entry of the game ball into the mouth 21 includes a jackpot, the reservation having the second character body HRC2 can be conveyed. When the second side of the continuous image HRC is stopped and displayed facing forward (toward the player), this corresponds to four second special figure reservations based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21. It can be reported that the pending information includes a predetermined number or more (for example, two) of jackpots of 16 rounds (maximum round (MAX round)).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 97(I), the first side of the reserved series image HRC having the first character body HRC1 is stopped and displayed facing forward (towards the player), and the second starting port 21 is stopped. It is reported that a jackpot is included in the reservation information corresponding to the four second special figure reservations based on the entry of game balls. Note that the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are displayed as numbers HMG on the image display device 7. continues to be displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a.

After that, it is the beginning of a period in which the catchphrase of the gaming machine manufacturer is displayed, and the addictive prevention effect is displayed to warn people against becoming addicted to the game, and this period (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed. This marks the end of the jackpot production (jackpot game). When the jackpot performance (jackpot game) comes to an end, the theme image PM imitating the "sun" is changed to the "sun" theme of the performance mode before the jackpot performance (jackpot game), for example A mode. An effect that is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the display device 7 will proceed.

In addition, when the performance of the held series is performed, and then the jackpot performance (jackpot game) ends and the right-handed game starts, when the selection screen of the performance mode was displayed in the previous jackpot performance (jackpot game) If the production mode selected in the above is maintained and a jackpot game (jackpot production) occurs again and the production mode selection screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 97(B), the maintained production mode is Although it is arranged in a specific area, the production mode can be changed by operating (pressing) the production button 63.

In this embodiment, the selection display prevention performance C of the performance mode is performed during a specific period, but the performance of the pending series is also performed during the same period as this specific period. In other words, in the first period (performance mode selection period), in the performance mode selection display prevention performance C, a performance that allows the player to select the performance mode is performed, whereas in the hold series performance, a flash image is displayed. A performance is performed using FH and the suspended continuous image HRC. Then, in the second period (performance mode confirmation notification period), in the production mode selection display prevention production C, a production is performed that conveys the transition to the selected production mode, whereas in the suspension series production, there is a notification such as the presence of a jackpot, etc. Perform a performance that conveys the message. The specific period in which the selection display prevention performance C of the performance mode is performed and the specific period in which the performance of the suspended series is performed are the same period. As a result, the time required for a series of effects from FIG. 97(B) to FIG. 97(D) following FIG. 97(A), and from FIG. 97(G) to FIG. 97(I) following FIG. ) is the same as the time required for a series of effects, so the game machine manufacturer's catchphrase is displayed as a catchphrase effect or a predetermined effect to prevent addiction is displayed as a warning against dependence (addiction) on the game. The starting time of the period is also the same, and there is no difference at all in the end of the jackpot performance (jackpot game) after this predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the selective display prevention effect of the effect mode is shown.
[Effect 1]
The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment is equipped with an image display device 7 (display means) capable of displaying various images, as shown in FIG. , B mode, C mode, and D mode (a plurality of production modes), a first production that displays a selection section SEL (selection image) on the image display device 7 (display means) that allows selection of one production mode; It is possible to perform at least one of a second effect of displaying a car image GYK (special image) imitating a car on the image display device 7 (display means), and when a reach is formed and the reach effect progresses, The arrival of the next generation (a predetermined event) in which a production (group preview) in which car images GYK (special images) imitating cars run all at once in a group from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is developed. (establishment of the condition), the display of the selection part SEL (selected image) on the image display device 7 by the first effect is prevented, and a car image imitating a car is displayed on the image display device 7 by the second effect. GYK (special image) display can be executed. According to this configuration, the image display device 7 (display means) is provided with a selection section SEL (selection image) capable of selecting one of the production modes among A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode (a plurality of production modes). Even when displayed, a production (group preview) in which car images GYK (special images) imitating cars run all at once from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as if forming a group is developed. When this effect (group preview) is developed based on the arrival of the next period (establishment of predetermined conditions), the display of the selection section SEL (selected image) on the image display device 7 (display means) is prevented. As a result, the selection section SEL (selected image) is erased (disappeared) from the image display device 7 (display means), so that the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
In the production mode selection display prevention production B shown in FIGS. 96(H) to 96(J), one production mode can be selected from A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode (a plurality of production modes). Even if part SEL (selected image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), this pre-read effect is performed based on the arrival of the next period (establishment of a predetermined condition) in which the pre-read effect which is a special image is performed. Then, the display of the selection part SEL (selected image) on the image display device 7 (display means) is blocked, so that the selection part SEL (selected image) disappears (disappears) from the image display device 7 (display means). The same is true.
In the production mode selection display prevention production C shown in FIGS. 97(G) to 97(I), one production mode can be selected from A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode (a plurality of production modes). Even if part SEL (selected image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), based on the arrival of the next period (establishment of predetermined conditions) in which the performance of the reserved series, which is a special image, is to be performed, the status of this reserved series is displayed. When the effect is performed, display of the selection part SEL (selected image) on the image display device 7 (display means) is blocked, so that the selection part SEL (selected image) disappears from the image display device 7 (display means) ( The same applies because it will be deleted (disappeared).

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 95(A) to 95(J) of selection display prevention effect A of the effect mode, A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode (a plurality of The first performance, in which a selection section SEL (selected image) from which one of the performance modes can be selected (presentation mode) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), is a specific display that extends from the start of variation of the decorative pattern to the stop of variation. A second effect that can be executed during a period and displays a car image GYK (special image) imitating a car on the image display device 7 (display means) is a specific period that extends from the start of variation of the decorative pattern to the stop of variation. It can be executed in According to this configuration, the selection section can select one of the production modes among A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode (a plurality of production modes) during a specific period from the start of variation to the stop of variation of the decorative pattern. A first effect that displays SEL (selected image) on the image display device 7 (display means), and a second effect that displays a car image GYK (special image) imitating a car on the image display device 7 (display means). Since the game can be executed as follows, it is possible to visually entertain the players and increase their interest.
In the selective display prevention performance B of the performance mode shown in FIGS. 96(A) to 96(J), A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode (multiple A first effect that displays a selection section SEL (selected image) from which one of the effect modes (presentation modes) can be selected on the image display device 7 (display means), and a first effect that displays a pre-read effect that is a special image on the image display device 7. (The second effect displayed on the display means) can be executed, so it is the same.
In the selection display prevention performance C of the performance mode shown in FIGS. 97(A) to 97(I), during a specific period during a jackpot game (jackpot performance) in which a profit is given to the player, A mode, B mode, C mode and a first effect that displays a selection part SEL (selection image) from which one of the effect modes can be selected from D mode (a plurality of effect modes) on the image display device 7 (display means); It is possible to execute the second effect of displaying the effect on the image display device 7 (display means).

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 95(A) to 95(J) of the selection display prevention effect A of the effect mode, the effect button 63, the sword member 64, which can be operated by the player, A sword button 65 and a select button 68 (a plurality of operating means) are provided, and among the effect button 63, a sword member 64, a sword button 65, and a select button 68 (a plurality of operating means), the effect button 63 (a specific operating means) is operated. Only when the user selects one of the A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode (a plurality of presentation modes) can be selected. According to this configuration, among the production button 63, the sword member 64, the sword button 65, and the select button 68 (a plurality of operation means), those are arranged on the front frame (front frame portion) 53 and around the batted ball supply tray (upper tray) 61. Of the effect button 63 and select button 68 arranged in the display button 63, the effect button 63 is located closest to the player and is formed larger than the select button 68, so that the decorative pattern starts to change. It is most preferable as an operation means for selecting one production mode among A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode (a plurality of production modes) within a limited specific period extending from to the stop of fluctuation. The same applies to the selection display prevention performance B in the performance mode shown in FIGS. 96(A) to 96(J) and the selection display prevention performance C in the performance mode shown in FIGS. 97(A) to 97(I).

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 95(A) to 95(J) of selection display prevention effect A in the effect mode, when a reach is formed and the reach effect progresses, a car is imitated. The arrival of the next generation (with predetermined conditions When a car image GYK (special image) imitating a car is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), the car image GYK (special image) imitating a car is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). A selection section SEL (selection image) that allows selection of one production mode among A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode (a plurality of production modes) before the second production to be displayed on the device (means) is executed; The effect mode (here, B mode) that has already been selected in the first effect to display on the image display device 7 (display means) is maintained. According to this configuration, when the second effect of displaying the car image GYK (special image) imitating a car on the image display device 7 (display means) is executed and finished, the A mode, B mode, C mode and D Among the modes (multiple production modes), the production mode (here, B mode) that has already been selected before the second production is executed is maintained, so the player is visually entertained. You can improve your interest.
In the selection display prevention effect B of the effect mode shown in FIGS. 96(A) to 96(J), when the second effect of displaying a pre-reading effect, which is a special image, on the image display device 7 (display means) is executed and finished. , A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode (multiple production modes), the production mode that has already been selected before the second production is executed is maintained, so the same is true. .
In the selection display prevention effect C of the effect mode shown in FIGS. 97(A) to 97(I), a second effect is executed to display the effect of the reserved series, which is a special image, on the image display device 7 (display means). When finished, the production mode that was already selected before the second production among A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode (multiple production modes) is maintained, so the same It is.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. The first effect is to display on the image display device 7 (display means) a selection section SEL (selected image) from which one of the effect modes (presentation modes) can be selected, A mode, B mode, C mode and D mode ( The names of the plurality of presentation modes are arranged in a reel-like manner and are displayed in rotation, with the selected presentation mode being placed closest to the viewer. According to this configuration, since the names of A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode (a plurality of production modes) are arranged in a reel shape, it is possible to distinguish between the type of selected mode that is rotated and the name of one production mode. It is easy to understand which production modes are to be arranged after that, and the display mode is such that the selected production mode is placed closest to you, so it is easy to select the production mode, and it is easy to visually guide the player. You can entertain yourself and improve your interest. The same applies to the selection display prevention performance B in the performance mode shown in FIGS. 96(A) to 96(E) and the selection display prevention performance C in the performance mode shown in FIGS. 97(B) to 97(C).

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 97(G) to 97(I) of the selection display inhibiting effect C in the effect mode, a performance of a reserved series that is a special image is performed (a predetermined Conditions) include conditions that indicate the degree of expectation for the occurrence of a gaming state that provides a profit to the player. According to this configuration, by performing a holding series, it is possible to suggest the expectation level of the occurrence of a gaming state that will give a profit to the player, that is, there is a jackpot among the held balls before the jackpot effect ends. can.

[Modified example]
Below, a modified example of the selective display prevention effect of the effect mode is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the selective display prevention effect A of the effect mode shown in FIG. When this performance (group preview) is developed based on the arrival of the next period for which the running performance (group preview) will be developed (establishment of a predetermined condition), the image display device 7 of the selection section SEL (selected image) The selection portion SEL (selected image) has been erased (disappeared) from the image display device 7 (display means) by preventing display on the image display device 7 (display means). However, even if the next period in which the effect (group preview) is developed arrives (even if the predetermined conditions are met), the effect (group preview) is not developed and the image in the selection section SEL (selected image) is displayed. The display on the device 7 (display means) may be continued. In this case, the sub-control board 90 performs a lottery to determine whether or not to develop the effect (group preview), and if it is won, the effect (group preview) will be developed, whereas if it is unsuccessful, the effect (group preview) will be developed. Group advance notice) will not be developed. Note that the image control microcomputer 101 may perform the lottery as to whether or not to develop the effect (group preview) instead of the sub-control board 90.
In the selective display prevention effect B of the effect mode shown in FIGS. 96(G) to 96(J), this pre-reading effect is performed based on the arrival of the next period in which the pre-reading effect, which is a special image, is to be performed (establishment of a predetermined condition). When the selected part SEL (selected image) is prevented from being displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), the selected part SEL (selected image) disappears (disappears) from the image display device 7 (display means). was. However, even if the next period in which the look-ahead effect is performed (even if a predetermined condition is met), the look-ahead effect is not performed and the selection section SEL (selected image) is not displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). May be continued. In this case, the sub-control board 90 performs a lottery to determine whether or not to perform a pre-reading effect, and if it is won, the pre-reading effect is performed, whereas if it is unsuccessful, the pre-reading effect is not performed. Note that the image control microcomputer 101 may perform the lottery as to whether or not to perform the pre-read effect instead of the sub-control board 90.
In the selection display prevention effect C of the effect mode shown in FIGS. 97(G) to 97(I), based on the arrival of the next period in which the effect of the held series, which is a special image, is to be performed (establishment of a predetermined condition), this held series is When this effect is performed, display of the selection portion SEL (selected image) on the image display device 7 (display means) is blocked, and the selection portion SEL (selected image) disappears from the image display device 7 (display means). (disappeared). However, even if the next period in which the performance of the suspended series is performed (even if a predetermined condition is met), the performance of the suspended series is not performed, and the image display device 7 (display means) of the selection section SEL (selected image) may continue to be displayed. In this case, the sub-control board 90 performs a lottery to determine whether or not to perform the performance of the suspended series, and if it is won, the performance of the suspended series is performed, whereas if it is unsuccessful, the performance of the suspended series is not performed. . Note that the image control microcomputer 101 may perform the lottery as to whether or not to perform the performance of the suspended series instead of the sub-control board 90.

[Modification 2]
In the selective display prevention effect A of the effect mode shown in FIG. 95(H), car images GYK imitating a car are arranged in groups from the right side to the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (display means) as special images. When the effect of running all at once is developed (so-called "group preview"), the display of the special image takes priority and the selection section SEL disappears from the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. (disappeared). However, instead of the car image GYK imitating a car as a special image, there are cut-in previews (additional It may also be an image inserted as a performance. In addition, when displaying an eye-catching image on the image display device 7 (display means) as the reach effect progresses, by making the eye-catching image a special image, priority is given to displaying the eye-catching image that is a special image. Then, the selection section SEL may disappear (disappear) from the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Furthermore, when making the character of the manufacturer that produces the gaming machine 1 appear on the image display device 7 (display means), this manufacturer's character is set as a special image, and the display of the manufacturer's character is given priority and the selection section SEL is displayed on the image display device. 7 may be erased (disappeared) from the lower right side of the display screen 7a.

[Modification 3]
In the selection display prevention performance B of the performance mode shown in FIGS. 96(G) to 96(J), if a look-ahead performance is performed during the fluctuation in a specific period from the start of fluctuation of the decorative pattern to the stop of the fluctuation, the look-ahead performance is If it is before the change, the production mode can be selected during the fluctuation, but if the pre-reading effect is performed, the production mode cannot be selected during the fluctuation, and furthermore, the pre-reading effect cannot be selected during the change. Even during the period (interval) from when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R in the held image 9A in which the effect has been performed are stopped and displayed until the next decorative pattern starts changing, the player Even if the player operates (presses) the production button 63, the production mode cannot be selected. However, the pending image 9A on which the look-ahead effect was performed moves to the right side as the pending digested image 9C, the decorative patterns start to fluctuate, and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed, and the deviation is It may be possible to make it impossible to select the production mode only during the period until the final display is made, and even if the pre-reading production is performed during the specified period from the start of the variation of the decorative pattern to the stop of the variation. The effect mode may be selected during the period from when the reserved image 9A on which the reading effect has been performed moves to the right side as the suspended digested image 9C until the decorative symbols start to fluctuate.

[Modification 4]
In the selection display prevention performance A of the performance mode shown in FIG. 95 and the selection display prevention performance B of the performance mode shown in FIG. Unless otherwise specified, it was not possible to select the production mode. However, it may be possible to select the production mode only at an interval in which the variable display of the decorative symbols is started after the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined production among the plurality of types of ready-to-win performances. The predetermined effects include those that have a high degree of expectation that a jackpot game (jackpot effect) that is advantageous to the player will occur, and after the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed at the so-called normal reach, the variable display of the decorative pattern starts. During this interval, the production mode cannot be selected.

[Modification 5]
In the selection display prevention performance C of the performance mode shown in FIGS. 97(G) to 97(I), the first surface of the suspended series image HRC having the first character body HRC1 faces forward (towards the player) and stops. When displayed, although it is not possible to tell the type of win, the jackpot is included in the reservation information corresponding to the four second special symbol reservations based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21. However, it was not possible to convey the number of jackpots in the reservation information corresponding to the four second special drawing reservations. Therefore, the number of jackpots may be conveyed to the reservation information corresponding to the four second special symbol reservations. For example, when the number of jackpots is 3 in the reservation information corresponding to the 4 second special figure reservations, the first of the reservation series images HRC having the first character body HRC1 facing forward (to the player side) "+3" may be displayed on the right side of the screen, or the reserved series images HRC having the first character body HRC1 may be displayed by arranging 3 horizontally, 3 vertically, or 3 diagonally. Good too.

[Modification 6]
In the selective display prevention effect C of the effect mode shown in FIG. 97, a theme image PM imitating the theme of each mode is displayed as a moving image on the left side of the demonstration area DS. Such videos are videos that explain the flow of the production in each mode, characters, backgrounds, scenes, etc., and may be 3D CG videos, animation videos, or movie videos. It may be a one-shot scene. Note that a still image may be used instead of a moving image.

[Modified example 7]
In the performance mode selection display prevention performance C of FIG. 97, a selection section SEL (selection image) from which one of the performance modes can be selected from A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode (a plurality of performance modes) is displayed as an image. The first performance displayed on the device 7 (display means) was being executed during a jackpot performance (performance of a winning game). However, in addition to the jackpot performance, during the performance of the small win game (or during the performance of the small win game instead of the jackpot performance), the selection section SEL (selected image) is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). You may also do so. In this case, regarding the second performance that displays the performance of the reserved series, which is a special image, on the image display device 7 (display means), in addition to the jackpot performance, during the performance in the small winning game (or in place of the jackpot performance, the second performance is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means)) (during performance in a winning game), it may be executed.

[Modification 8]
The selection display prevention performance A in the performance mode shown in FIG. 95, the selection display prevention performance B in the performance mode shown in FIG. 96, and the selection display prevention performance C in the performance mode shown in FIG. 97 may not include some of the effects described. However, other effects may be added.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect C2-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying various images,
a first performance that displays on the display means a selection image that allows selection of one performance mode among a plurality of performance modes;
at least one of a second effect of displaying a special image on the display means,
Based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, displaying the selected image on the display means using the first effect can be prevented and displaying the special image on the display means using the second effect;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect C2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C2-1,
The first performance and the second performance can be performed in a specific period,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect C2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect C2-1 or aspect C2-2,
Equipped with multiple operation means that can be operated by the player,
One of the plurality of presentation modes can be selected only when a specific operation means among the plurality of operation means is operated;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect C2-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C2-1 to C2-3,
When the special image is displayed on the display means based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, the effect mode already selected in the first effect is maintained before the second effect is executed. ,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect C2-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C2-1 to C2-4,
The first performance is a display mode in which the names of each of the plurality of performance modes are arranged in a reel shape and rotated, and the selected performance mode is placed closest to the front.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect C2-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C2-1 to C2-5,
The predetermined conditions include conditions that indicate the degree of expectation for the occurrence of a gaming state that provides a profit to the player.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The game ball image effects A to C will be explained below using FIGS. 98 to 100. This game ball image presentation can be executed during the variation presentation of presentation symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable production start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the game ball image production, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays it on the main display. This is an effect that displays an image on the display screen 7a of the device 7.

[Game ball image production A]
FIG. 98 is a diagram for explaining game ball image production A.
First, as shown in FIG. 98(A), a variation start effect is executed. Here, a state in which the left presentation pattern 8L, the middle presentation pattern 8C, and the right presentation pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner is shown. A pending image 9B is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The pending images 9B are displayed according to the number of stored second special figures, and here three pending images 9B are displayed. The pending digested image 9C corresponds to the production symbols (production symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) currently being changed on the display screen 7a. It is assumed that the fluctuation occurs during a time-saving game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98(B), a reach formation effect is executed. Here, it is shown that both the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R have stopped at "7".
Next, as shown in FIG. 98(C), a game ball collision effect is executed. The game ball collision effect is executed when the game ball enters the second starting port 21. Therefore, here, the number of reserved images 9B is increasing. Further, the game ball collision effect is a effect in which the game ball collides with a collision target. Here, the button image BG is the collision target.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98(D), a color change effect is executed. The color change effect is a effect in which the color of the upper surface of the button image BG changes. Here, it is assumed that the white upper surface has become green.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98(E), a game ball collision effect is executed. The game ball collision effect is executed when the game ball enters the second starting port 21. Here, the prize is over. Further, the game ball collision effect is a effect in which the game ball collides with a collision target. Here, the button image BG is the collision target.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98(F), a color change effect is executed. The color change effect is a effect in which the color of the upper surface of the button image BG changes. Here, it is assumed that the upper surface of the green color has become red.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98(G), a press promotion effect is executed. In the push promotion effect, a button image BG whose top surface has been changed in color is displayed as a color change effect. In addition, a message image MG saying "Press" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98(H), a confirmed stop effect (jackpot) is executed. In the confirmed stop performance (jackpot), the left performance symbol 8L, the middle performance symbol 8C, and the right performance symbol 8R stop at the same number, forming a so-called double number. Here, the left presentation pattern 8L, middle presentation pattern 8C, and right presentation pattern 8R all stop at "7".

[Game ball image production B]
FIG. 99 is a diagram for explaining game ball image production B.
First, as shown in FIG. 99(A), a variation start effect is executed. Here, a state in which the left presentation pattern 8L, the middle presentation pattern 8C, and the right presentation pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner is shown. A pending image 9B is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The pending images 9B are displayed according to the number of stored second special figures, and here three pending images 9B are displayed. The pending digested image 9C corresponds to the production symbols (production symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) currently being changed on the display screen 7a. It is assumed that the fluctuation occurs during a time-saving game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 99(B), a reach formation effect is executed. Here, it is shown that both the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R have stopped at "7".
Next, as shown in FIG. 99(C), a game ball collision effect is executed. The game ball collision effect is executed when the game ball enters the second starting port 21. Therefore, here, the number of reserved images 9B is increasing. Further, the game ball collision effect is a effect in which the game ball collides with a collision target. Here, the first movable accessory 14 (left side movable accessory 14L) is the collision target.

Next, as shown in FIG. 99(D), a color change effect is executed. The color change performance is a performance that changes the light emission mode of the first movable accessory 14 (decorative member). Here, it is assumed that the light is lit in green.

Next, as shown in FIG. 99(E), a game ball collision effect is executed. The game ball collision effect is executed when the game ball enters the second starting port 21. Here, the prize is over. Further, the game ball collision effect is a effect in which the game ball collides with a collision target. Here, the first movable accessory (the left movable accessory 14L) is the collision target.

Next, as shown in FIG. 99(F), a color change effect is executed. The color change performance is a performance that changes the light emission mode of the first movable accessory 14 (decorative member). Here, it is assumed that the light is lit in red.

Next, as shown in FIG. 99(G), a confirmed stop effect (jackpot) is executed. In the confirmed stop performance (jackpot), the left performance symbol 8L, the middle performance symbol 8C, and the right performance symbol 8R stop at the same number, forming a so-called double number. Here, the left presentation pattern 8L, the middle presentation pattern 8C, and the right presentation pattern 8R all stop at "7".

[Game ball image production C]
FIG. 100 is a diagram for explaining the game ball image effect C.
First, as shown in FIG. 100(A), a pending stock effect is executed. The pending stock performance is a performance that makes the stored number of second special symbol reservations the maximum of "4" in the variation. Here, the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a variable manner at the upper left of the display screen 7a, and a message image MG saying ``Stick your reserves by hitting right'' is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. A pending image 9B is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The pending images 9B are displayed according to the number of stored second special figures, and here three pending images 9B are displayed. The pending digested image 9C corresponds to the production symbols (production symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) currently being changed on the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100(B), a game ball collision effect is executed. The game ball collision effect is executed when the game ball enters the second starting port 21. Therefore, here, the number of reserved images 9B is increasing. Further, the game ball collision effect is a effect in which the game ball collides with a collision target. Panel image PG is the object of collision.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100(C), a character change effect is executed. The character change effect is a effect that changes the characters of the panel image PG. Here, the word "CHANCE" has been changed to "BIG CHANCE."

Next, as shown in FIG. 100(D), a game ball collision effect is executed. The game ball collision effect is executed when the game ball enters the second starting port 21. Here, the prize is over. Further, the game ball collision effect is a effect in which the game ball collides with a collision target. Here, the panel image PG is the collision target.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100(E), a character change effect is executed. The character change effect is a effect that changes the characters of the panel image PG. Here, the words "BIG CHANCE" have been changed to "super hot."

Next, as shown in FIG. 100(F), a battle effect is executed. The battle performance is a performance in which an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB fight.
Next, as shown in FIG. 100(G), a battle victory effect is executed. The battle victory performance is a performance that notifies that the ally character CRA has won against the enemy character CRB. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and its background is a rainbow background RB displayed in seven colors of the rainbow. The rainbow background RB is a background that guarantees a jackpot.

Next, as shown in FIG. 100(H), a confirmed stop effect (jackpot) is executed. In the confirmed stop performance (jackpot), the left performance symbol 8L, the middle performance symbol 8C, and the right performance symbol 8R stop at the same number, forming a so-called double number. Here, the left presentation pattern 8L, middle presentation pattern 8C, and right presentation pattern 8R all stop at "7".

[Effect example]
Below, examples of effects of game ball image presentation are shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a performance using the game ball image UG is executed (FIGS. 98(C)(E), FIG. 99(C)(E), FIG. 100(B)(D)), and a jackpot is achieved. It suggests the degree of expectation for transition to gaming (FIGS. 98(D)(F), FIGS. 99(D)(F), FIGS. 100(C)(E)). According to this configuration, the interest of the game can be improved by the effect using the game ball image UG.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the game ball image UG is caused to collide with the collision target (FIGS. 98(C)(E), FIG. 99(C)(E), FIG. 100(B)(D)), and the collision target is By changing the color, the expectation level of transition to a jackpot game is suggested (FIGS. 98(D)(F), FIGS. 99(D)(F), FIGS. 100(C)(E)). According to this configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by producing a color change due to the collision of the game ball images UG.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a button image BG imitating the production button 63 (FIG. 98) and a panel image PG on which characters are displayed are used as collision targets of the game ball image UG (FIG. 100). According to this configuration, it is possible to provide a unified effect on the display screen 7a, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the first possible accessory 14 (left movable accessory 14L) is adopted as the collision target of the game ball image UG (FIG. 99). According to this configuration, dynamic performance is possible and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the game ball collision effect using the game ball image UG is executed when the game ball enters the second starting port 21 (FIGS. 98(C) and 98(E)) , FIG. 99(C)(E), FIG. 100(B)(D)). According to this configuration, it is possible to feel as if a game ball collision effect has been executed by the game balls that have entered the game, so it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Modified example]
Below, a modification of the game ball image presentation will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above, the number of game balls represented in the game ball image UG is one, but a plurality of game balls may collide with the collision target.

[Modification 2]
In the above, the game ball collision effect is executed at the timing when the game ball enters the second starting port 21. On the other hand, the game ball collision effect may be executed at a timing unrelated to the game ball entering the second starting port 21.

[Modification 3]
In the above, the game ball collision effect is executed at the timing when the game ball enters the second starting port 21. On the other hand, the game ball collision effect may be executed only at the timing of over winning after the second special figure reservation reaches the upper limit.

[Modification 4]
Although the above was an example of suggesting the degree of expectation of transition to a jackpot, it may also be applied as a performance that suggests the degree of expectation of transition to a time-saving game with a high or low probability.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect C3-1]
A gaming machine,
It is possible to execute a game ball effect using a game ball image that is an image imitating a game ball, and to suggest the degree of expectation of shifting to an advantageous game that is advantageous to the player.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C3-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-1,
In the game ball effect, the game ball image is caused to collide with a collision target, and the display color or coloring mode of the collision target is changed, thereby suggesting the degree of expectation for transition to the advantageous game.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C3-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-1 or aspect C3-2,
The collision target is an image displayed on a display screen,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C3-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C3-1 to C3-3,
The collision target is an accessory placed in the game area,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C3-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C3-1 to C3-4,
The game ball performance is executed when a game ball enters a predetermined ball entrance,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C3-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C3-1 to C3-5,
The advantageous game is a jackpot game,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C3-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C3-1 to C3-6,
The advantageous game is a time-saving game,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect C3-8]
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-5,
The predetermined ball entry port is a starting port, and the game ball is executed when the game ball enters the starting port after the reservation memory due to the ball entering the starting port reaches an upper limit.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Specific edge effects A to C of stereoscopic images will be explained below using FIGS. 101 to 103. 101 to 103, various reserved images displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are omitted for ease of viewing the drawings, and the decorative patterns displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are not shown in the drawings. Some items are omitted for the sake of simplicity, and the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 arranged around the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are also omitted for ease of viewing the drawing. There is something that has been done.

This specific edge presentation of the stereoscopic image can be executed during the variation presentation of the decorative pattern (for example, during the period from the start of the variation to the stop of the variation of the decorative pattern). That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands (for example, a variable effect start command) received from the sub-control board 90, and if an instruction to execute a specific edge effect of a stereoscopic image is included, the corresponding command is executed from the ROM 103. The image data is read out and the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition, the lamp control board 107 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90, and determines the position, inclination, and light emission of the second movable accessory 15 when an instruction to execute a specific end face effect of a stereoscopic image is included. Change the aspect.

Here, first, a specific edge rendering A of a stereoscopic image will be explained, followed by a specific edge rendering B of a stereoscopic image, and a specific edge rendering C of a stereoscopic image in order.

[Specific edge effect A of stereoscopic image]
First, specific edge effect A of a stereoscopic image will be explained with reference to FIG. 101. FIG. 101 is a diagram for explaining specific end face rendering A of a stereoscopic image. The specific edge effect A of the three-dimensional image is selected from among multiple types of reach effects when a reach is formed during the fluctuating effect of the decorative pattern, and is performed as part of the reach effect. be. In other words, the plurality of types of reach effects include the specific edge effect A of the stereoscopic image.

In the specific edge effect A of the stereoscopic image, first, as shown in FIG. A variable display of decorative symbols (symbols: numbers "1" to "9") is started in a display mode in which the right decorative symbols 8R are rotated from the upper side of the display screen 7a to the lower side of the reel. When the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern is started, the decorative pattern that has been stopped and displayed changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed, resulting in a display mode that fluctuates at a high speed. Thereby, the background image placed behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. Immediately before stopping, the decorative pattern decelerates and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is then stopped and displayed. Here, as shown in FIG. 101(B), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same design (number) (temporarily stopped at the number "9" here), and the middle decoration is displayed. The symbol 8C is displayed in a variable manner to form a reach.

When the reach is formed, the medium decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image temporarily stops at the number "8", and the medium decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image rotates (for example, the medium decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image stops at the number "8"). When the display mode is set such that it moves away from the rear and gradually becomes smaller while rotating round and round from the top side to the bottom side), it is next rotated in another direction (for example, from the right side to the left side of the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image). The left decorative pattern 8L approaches the front while rotating, gradually becoming larger, and is finally temporarily stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, as shown in FIG. 101(C). The size of the right decorative pattern 8R becomes larger than that of the right decorative pattern 8R, and the rotation is stopped. As will be described later, this is done in order to display in a large size the double-folding mode formed by the right side of the left side medium decorative pattern 8CL and the left side of the right side medium decorative pattern 8CR, which are obtained by dividing the medium decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image into left and right sides.

Thereafter, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the three-dimensional image is divided into left and right sides with a vertical line (center line) passing through the midpoint of the upper side and the midpoint of the lower side of the three-dimensional image middle decorative pattern 8C as a boundary, and the middle decorative pattern 8C of the three-dimensional image 8CL and a right-side center decorative pattern 8CR of the stereoscopic image, and as shown in FIG. 101(D), the right side of the left-side center decorative pattern 8CL and the left side of the right-side center decorative pattern 8CR are opened in a double-fold manner. Here, the right side end surface of the left side medium decorative pattern 8CL becomes a specific end surface 8CLa of the left side medium decorative pattern 8CL, which is a three-dimensional image whose open side end surface is the open side end surface, and the stereoscopic image whose left side end surface of the right side medium decorative pattern 8CR becomes the open side end surface. This becomes the specific end face 8CRa of the right side middle decorative pattern 8CR.

The medium decorative pattern 8C is formed as a colored opaque, but when the left medium decorative pattern 8CL and the right medium decorative pattern 8CR are opened in a double-door display mode, the specific end surface 8CLa of the left medium decorative pattern 8CL and the right side The specific end surface 8CRa of the medium decorative pattern 8CR is represented in a transparent manner. Here, the specific end surface 8CLa of the left-side medium decorative pattern 8CL and the specific end surface 8CRa of the right-side medium decorative pattern 8CR are transparent regions, respectively.

When the left side medium decorative pattern 8CL and the right side medium decorative pattern 8CR are opened in a double-folding manner, a predetermined image that should not exist in the background image is placed between the transparent area of the specific end surface 8CLa of the left side medium decorative pattern 8CL and the right side. It can be visually recognized through the transparent area of the specific end surface 8CRa of the medium decorative pattern 8CR.

Here, the "predetermined images" are two characters CRA and CRB, and are a still image of the two characters CRA and CRB facing each other holding swords, which shows the world view of the production by the gaming machine 1. Yes, even if the left middle decorative pattern 8CL and the right middle decorative pattern 8CR are gradually opened in a double-door pattern, the positions of the two character bodies CRA and CRB do not change, and the distance and size from each other do not change. It has become. The character body CRB can be visually recognized on the specific end surface 8CLa of the left-side medium decorative pattern 8CL, and the character body CRA can be visually recognized on the specific end surface 8CRa of the right-side medium decorative pattern 8CR.

When the left center decorative pattern 8CL and the right center decorative pattern 8CR have just been opened in a double-folding manner, the transparent area of the specific end surface 8CLa of the left center decorative pattern 8CL and the transparency of the specific end surface 8CRa of the right center decorative pattern 8CR. Although the area is small and it is difficult to notice that the transparent area of the specific end surface 8CLa of the left center decorative pattern 8CL and the transparent area of the specific end surface 8CRa of the right center decorative pattern 8CR are transparent, the left center decorative pattern As 8CL and the right-side middle decorative pattern 8CR are opened in a double-door pattern, the transparent area of the specific end surface 8CLa of the left-side middle decorative pattern 8CL and the transparent area of the specific end surface 8CRa of the right-side middle decorative pattern 8CR become larger. , a part of the character body CRB can be visually recognized from a specific end surface 8CLa of the left-side medium decorative pattern 8CL, and a part of the character body CRA can be visually recognized from the specific end surface 8CRa of the right-side medium decorative pattern 8CR.

When the left center decorative pattern 8CL and the right center decorative pattern 8CR are opened wide in a double-door pattern, as shown in FIG. At the same time, the transparent area of the specific end face 8CRa of the right middle decorative pattern 8CR becomes large enough to make the presence of the character body CRA visible.

Following FIG. 101(E), as shown in FIG. 101(F), a flash image FH in which light is emitted from the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in all directions is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Then, as shown in FIG. 101(G), the character body CRB visually recognized through the transparent area of the specific end surface 8CLa of the left middle decorative pattern 8CL and the transparent region of the specific end surface 8CRa of the right middle decorative pattern 8CR are displayed. The character CRA visually recognized through the area is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and an action performance by the two characters CRA and CRB is developed. At this time, in addition to the character body CRB that is visually recognized through the transparent area of the specific end surface 8CLa of the left middle decorative pattern 8CL, and the character body CRA that is visually recognized through the transparent area of the specific end surface 8CRa of the right middle decorative pattern 8CR. , the background images of the two characters CRA and CRB are also displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

The action effect is developed, and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are all the same and are stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (in this case, the number "9"). Then, a jackpot game (jackpot performance) in which a jackpot is awarded and a profit is given to the player will be played.However, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L is the number "9", If the middle decorative pattern 8C is the number "8" and the right decorative pattern 8R is the number "9", and the same pattern (in this case, the number "9") is stopped and displayed without being aligned, the mismatch will be confirmed and displayed. Become.

[Specific end face production B of 3D images]
Next, specific edge effect B of a stereoscopic image will be explained with reference to FIG. 102. FIG. 102 is a diagram for explaining specific end face rendering B of a stereoscopic image. The specific edge effect B of the stereoscopic image is selected from among multiple types of reach effects when a reach is formed during the variable effect of the decorative pattern, and is performed as part of the reach effect. be. In other words, the plurality of types of reach effects include the specific edge effect B of the stereoscopic image.

In the specific edge effect B of the stereoscopic image, first, as shown in FIG. A variable display of decorative symbols (symbols: numbers "1" to "9") is started in a display mode in which the right decorative symbols 8R are rotated from the upper side of the display screen 7a to the lower side of the reel. When the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern is started, the decorative pattern that has been stopped and displayed changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed, resulting in a display mode that fluctuates at a high speed. Thereby, the background image placed behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. Immediately before stopping, the decorative pattern decelerates and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is then stopped and displayed. Here, as shown in FIG. 102(B), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same design (number) (temporarily stopped at the number "9" here), and the middle decoration is displayed. The symbol 8C is displayed in a variable manner to form a reach.

When the reach is formed, as shown in FIG. 102(C), the second movable accessory 15 having a rectangular shape with "OARO" written on the front is moved to the retracted position (home position) above the image display device 7. It advances (moves) downward from a stationary state to a position near the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (advance position (direction position)). When the second movable accessory 15 completes its advance (movement) to a position near the front (front) center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (advance position (direction position)), it moves clockwise from a horizontal state at a predetermined angle. It rotates by (for example, 30 degrees), stops, and becomes tilted.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 102(D), the character string "OARO" written on the front surface of the second movable accessory 15 is displayed as a colored opaque character string "OARO" in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. This is a display mode that appears as a character string image LG of a stereoscopic image. Note that the appearance and color of the character string image LG of the stereoscopic image may be the same as "OARO" written on the front of the second movable accessory 15, or may have the same appearance but a different color.

Thereafter, when the character string image LG of the stereoscopic image is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the second movable accessory 15 rotates counterclockwise by a predetermined angle (for example, 30 degrees). It stops, returns to its original horizontal state, and retreats (moves) upward from the advanced position (direction position) to the retracted position (home position).

The character string image LG of the stereoscopic image displayed at the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 rotates toward the rear while rotating (for example, rotating round and round from the upper side of the character string image LG of the stereoscopic image toward the lower side). When the display mode is set to move away and gradually become smaller, the display switches to another rotation (for example, rotation from the right side to the left side of the character string image LG of the stereoscopic image) and gradually approaches the front while rotating. As shown in FIG. 102(E), the rotation was stopped when it became larger than the size of the character string image LG of the stereoscopic image that finally appeared in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. This is the display mode. As will be described later, this is done in order to display in a large size the double-folding mode formed by the right side of the left side character string image LGL and the left side of the right side character string image LGR, which are obtained by dividing the character string image LG of the stereoscopic image into left and right parts.

Thereafter, the character string image LG of the stereoscopic image is divided left and right into two character string images of the stereoscopic image, with "OA" as the left-hand character string image LGL and "RO" as the right-hand character string image LGR. As shown in (F), the right side of the left character string image LGL and the left side of the right character string image LGR are displayed in a double-folded manner. Here, the right end surface of the character "A", which is the right end surface of the left character string image LGL, becomes the specific end surface LGLa of the left character string image LGL, which is a stereoscopic image that is the open end surface, and the left side of the right character string image LGR. The left end surface of the character "R" which is the end surface becomes the specific end surface LGRa of the right side character string image LGR which is a stereoscopic image which becomes the open side end surface.

The character string image LG is formed as colored and opaque, but when the left character string image LGL and the right character string image LGR are opened in a double-door display mode, the specific end face LGLa of the left character string image LGL and the right side A specific end face LGRa of the character string image LGR is represented in a transparent manner. Here, the specific end surface LGLa of the left character string image LGL and the specific end surface LGRa of the right character string image LGR are transparent regions, respectively.

When the left side character string image LGL and the right side character string image LGR are opened in a double-folded display mode, a predetermined image that should not exist in the background image is placed between the transparent area of the specific end face LGLa of the left side character string image LGL and the right side. It can be visually recognized through the transparent area of the specific end face LGRa of the character string image LGR.

Here, the "predetermined images" are two characters CRA and CRB, and are a still image of the two characters CRA and CRB facing each other holding swords, which shows the world view of the game machine 1. Yes, even if the left-hand character string image LGL and the right-hand character string image LGR are gradually opened in a double-folding manner, the positions of the two character bodies CRA and CRB do not change, and the distance and size from each other do not change. It has become. The character CRB can be visually recognized on the specific end surface LGLa of the left character string image LGL, and the character CRA can be visually recognized on the specific end surface LGRa of the right character string image LGR.

When the left side character string image LGL and the right side character string image LGR have just been opened in a double-folding manner, the transparent area of the specific end surface LGLa of the left side character string image LGL and the transparency of the specific end surface LGRa of the right side character string image LGR. Although it is difficult to notice that the transparent area of the specific end face LGLa of the left character string image LGL and the transparent area of the specific end face LGRa of the right character string image LGR are transparent, the left character string image As LGL and the right-hand character string image LGR are opened in a double-folding manner, the transparent area of the specific end face LGLa of the left-hand character string image LGL and the transparent area of the specific end face LGRa of the right-hand character string image LGR become larger. , a part of the character body CRB can be visually recognized from the specific end face LGLa of the left character string image LGL, and a part of the character body CRA can be visually recognized from the specific end face LGRa of the right character string image LGR.

When the left side character string image LGL and the right side character string image LGR are opened wide in a double-folding manner, as shown in FIG. At the same time, the transparent area of the specific end surface LGRa of the right character string image LGR increases to the extent that the presence of the character body CRA can be visually recognized.

Following FIG. 102(G), as shown in FIG. 102(H), a flash image FH in which light is emitted from the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in all directions is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Then, as shown in FIG. 102(I), the character body CRB visually recognized through the transparent area of the specific end surface LGLa of the left character string image LGL and the transparent region of the specific end surface LGRa of the right character string image LGR are displayed. The character CRA visually recognized through the area is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and an action performance by the two characters CRA and CRB is developed. At this time, in addition to the character body CRB that is visually recognized through the transparent area of the specific end face LGLa of the left character string image LGL, and the character body CRA that is visually recognized through the transparent area of the specific end face LGRa of the right character string image LGR, , the background images of the two characters CRA and CRB are also displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

The action effect is developed, and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are all the same and are stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (in this case, the number "9"). Then, a jackpot game (jackpot performance) in which a jackpot is awarded and a profit is given to the player will be played.However, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L is the number "9", If the middle decorative pattern 8C is the number "8" and the right decorative pattern 8R is the number "9", and the same pattern (in this case, the number "9") is stopped and displayed without being aligned, the mismatch will be confirmed and displayed. Become.

[Specific end face production C of stereoscopic images]
Next, the specific edge effect C of a stereoscopic image will be explained with reference to FIG. 103. FIG. 103 is a diagram for explaining a specific edge effect C of a stereoscopic image. The specific edge effect C of the stereoscopic image is selected from among multiple types of reach effects when a reach is formed during the variation effect of the decorative pattern, and is performed as part of the reach effect. be. In other words, the plurality of types of ready-to-reach effects include the specific edge effect C of the stereoscopic image.

In the specific edge rendering C of a stereoscopic image, first, as shown in FIG. A variable display of decorative symbols (symbols: numbers "1" to "9") is started in a display mode in which the right decorative symbols 8R are rotated from the upper side of the display screen 7a to the lower side of the reel. When the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern is started, the decorative pattern that has been stopped and displayed changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed, resulting in a display mode that fluctuates at a high speed. Thereby, the background image placed behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. Immediately before the decorative pattern stops, it decelerates, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state, and is then stopped and displayed. Here, as shown in FIG. 103(B), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same design (number) (temporarily stopped at the number "9" here), and the middle decoration is displayed. The symbol 8C is displayed in a variable manner to form a reach.

When the reach is formed, as shown in FIG. 103(C), the second movable accessory 15 having a rectangular shape with "OARO" written on the front is moved to the retracted position (home position) above the image display device 7. It advances (moves) downward from a stationary state to a position near the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (advance position (direction position)). When the second movable accessory 15 completes its advance (movement) to a position near the front (front) center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (advance position (direction position)), it moves clockwise from a horizontal state at a predetermined angle. It rotates by (for example, 30 degrees), stops, and becomes tilted.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 103(D), the character string "OARO" written on the front surface of the second movable accessory 15 is displayed as a colored opaque character string "OARO" in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. This is a display mode that appears as a character string image LG of a stereoscopic image. Note that the appearance and color of the character string image LG of the stereoscopic image may be the same as "OARO" written on the front of the second movable accessory 15, or may have the same appearance but a different color.

Thereafter, when the character string image LG of the stereoscopic image is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the second movable accessory 15 rotates counterclockwise by a predetermined angle (for example, 30 degrees). It stops, returns to its original horizontal state, and retreats (moves) upward from the advanced position (direction position) to the retracted position (home position).

The character string image LG of the stereoscopic image displayed at the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 rotates toward the rear while rotating (for example, rotating round and round from the upper side of the character string image LG of the stereoscopic image toward the lower side). When the display mode is set to move away and gradually become smaller, the display switches to another rotation (for example, rotation from the right side to the left side of the character string image LG of the stereoscopic image) and gradually approaches the front while rotating. As shown in FIG. 103(E), the rotation was stopped when it became larger than the size of the character string image LG of the stereoscopic image that finally appeared in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. This is the display mode. This is because, as will be described later, the front side of the left side character string image LGL and the front side of the right side character string image LGR, which are obtained by dividing the character string image LG of the stereoscopic image into left and right sides, are displayed in a large size in a closed display mode so that they face each other and overlap. It will be held in

After that, the character string image LG of the stereoscopic image is divided left and right into two character string images of the stereoscopic image, with "OA" as the left character string image LGL and "RO" as the right character string image LGR. As shown in (F), the left side of the left side character string image LGL rotates forward about the vertical direction of the right side of the left side character string image LGL, and the right side of the right side character string image LGR turns to the right side. The display mode is such that the character string image LGR rotates forward about the vertical direction to the left of the character string image LGR. Here, the side labeled "OA" of the left character string image LGL immediately before it is divided into two character string images (the character string image LG shown in FIG. 103(E)) is "left character string The front surface of the right character string image LGR immediately before it is divided into two character string images (the character string image LG shown in FIG. 103(E)), which is referred to as the "front surface of the image LGL," is divided into two character string images. , it is referred to as "the front side of the right side character string image LGR".

As the rotation of the left character string image LGL and the right character string LGR progresses, the left character string image LGL and the right character string image LGL are rotated so that the front surface of the left character string image LGL and the front surface of the right character string image LGR face each other and overlap. This is a display mode in which the column image LGR rotates (hereinafter referred to as a "display mode in which the front side of the left side character string image LGL and the front side of the right side character string image LGR are closed so that they face each other and overlap").

As a result, the right end surface of the character "A", which is the right end surface of the left character string image LGL, becomes the closed end surface, and the left end surface of the character "O", which is the left end surface of the left character string image LGL, becomes the open end surface. Further, the left side end surface of the letter "R" which is the left side end surface of the right side character string image LGR is the closed side end surface, and the right side end surface of the letter "O" which is the right side end surface of the right side character string image LGR is the open side end surface.

The left side end face of the letter “O” which is the left side end face of the left side character string image LGL is an open side end face, and here becomes the specific end face LGLa of the left side character string image LGL, which is a stereoscopic image, and also serves as the specific end face LGLa of the left side character string image LGL, which is a stereoscopic image. The right end surface of the letter "O", which is the right end surface, is an open side end surface, and here becomes a specific end surface LGRa of the right side character string image LGR, which is a stereoscopic image.

The character string image LG is formed as colored and opaque, but when the front side of the left side character string image LGL and the front side of the right side character string image LGR are closed so that they face each other and overlap, the identification of the left side character string image LGL becomes difficult. The end surface LGLa and the specific end surface LGRa of the right side character string image LGR are represented in a transparent manner. Here, the specific end surface LGLa of the left character string image LGL and the specific end surface LGRa of the right character string image LGR are transparent regions, respectively.

When the front side of the left side character string image LGL and the front side of the right side character string image LGR are closed so that they face each other and overlap, a predetermined image that should not exist in the background image is displayed on the transparent side of a specific end surface LGLa of the left side character string image LGL. It can be visually recognized through the transparent area of the specific end face LGRa of the right side character string image LGR.

Here, the "predetermined images" are two characters CRA and CRB, and are a still image of the two characters CRA and CRB facing each other holding swords, which shows the world view of the game machine 1. Even if the left side character string image LGL and the right side character string image LGR are gradually closed so that the front side of the left side character string image LGL and the right side character string image LGR are closed so that the front side of the left side character string image LGL and the right side character string image LGR face each other and overlap, The positions of the two character bodies CRA and CRB do not change, and the distance and size between them also do not change. The character CRB can be visually recognized on the specific end surface LGLa of the left character string image LGL, and the character CRA can be visually recognized on the specific end surface LGRa of the right character string image LGR.

When the left side character string image LGL and the right side character string image LGR have just been closed so that the front side of the left side character string image LGL and the front side of the right side character string image LGR are closed so that they face each other and overlap, The transparent area of the specific end face LGLa of the left character string image LGL and the transparent area of the specific end face LGRa of the right character string image LGR are small, and the transparent area of the specific end face LGLa of the left character string image LGL and the right character string image LGR are smaller. Although it is difficult to notice that the transparent area of the specific end surface LGRa of the left character string image LGL is transparent, as the left character string image LGL and the right character string image LGR are closed, the specific end surface LGLa of the left character string image LGL When the transparent area and the transparent area of the specific end face LGRa of the right character string image LGR become larger, a part of the character body CRB can be visually recognized from the specific end face LGLa of the left character string image LGL, and the right character string image LGR A part of the character body CRA can now be visually recognized from the specific end surface LGRa.

When the left side character string image LGL and the right side character string image LGR are closed until a display mode is reached in which the front side of the left side character string image LGL and the front side of the right side character string image LGR face each other and overlap, the left side character string image LGL and the right side character string image LGR are closed, as shown in FIG. 103(G). As shown in , the transparent area of the specific end face LGLa of the left character string image LGL becomes large enough to make the presence of the character body CRB visible, and the transparent area of the specific end face LGRa of the right character string image LGR increases. becomes large enough to make the presence of the character body CRA visible.

Following FIG. 103(G), as shown in FIG. 103(H), a flash image FH in which light is emitted from the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in all directions is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Then, as shown in FIG. 103(I), the character CRB visually recognized through the transparent area of the specific end surface LGLa of the left character string image LGL and the transparent region of the specific end surface LGRa of the right character string image LGR are displayed. The character CRA visually recognized through the area is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and an action performance by the two characters CRA and CRB is developed. At this time, in addition to the character body CRB that is visually recognized through the transparent area of the specific end face LGLa of the left character string image LGL, and the character body CRA that is visually recognized through the transparent area of the specific end face LGRa of the right character string image LGR, , the background images of the two characters CRA and CRB are also displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

The action effect is developed, and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are all the same and are stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (in this case, the number "9"). Then, a jackpot game (jackpot performance) in which a jackpot is awarded and a profit is given to the player will be played.However, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L is the number "9", If the middle decorative pattern 8C is the number "8" and the right decorative pattern 8R is the number "9", and the same pattern (in this case, the number "9") is stopped and displayed without being aligned, the mismatch will be confirmed and displayed. Become.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of specific end face rendering of a stereoscopic image will be shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 101(A) to 101(E) of a specific edge effect A of a stereoscopic image, an image display device 7 (display means) capable of displaying various images is provided. When displaying the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image on the image display device 7 (display means), the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image is divided. The specific end surface 8CLa of the left-side center decorative pattern 8CL, which has been divided, and the specific end surface 8CRa of the right-side center decorative pattern 8CR, into which the three-dimensional image center decorative pattern 8C is divided, are represented in a transparent manner, and the left-side center decorative pattern 8CL is transparent. A first performance in which the two character bodies CRA and CRB (predetermined images) become visible can be performed through the specific end surface 8CLa of the decorative pattern 8CL and the specific end surface 8CRa of the right-side middle decorative pattern 8CR. According to this configuration, the two character bodies CRA and CRB (predetermined images) are displayed through the specific end surface 8CLa of the left-side center decorative pattern 8CL and the specific end surface 8CRa of the right-side center decorative pattern 8CR, which are expressed in a transparent manner. Since it is possible to provide an unprecedented and novel performance that can be visually recognized, it is possible to visually entertain the players and improve their interest. In the specific edge rendering B of the stereoscopic image in FIGS. 102(A) to 102(G) and the specific edge rendering C of the stereoscopic image in FIGS. 103(A) to FIG. 103(G), the specific edge rendering LGLa of the left character string image LGL is Similarly, the two characters CRA and CRB (predetermined images) can be visually recognized through the transparent area of the character string image LGR and the transparent area of the specific end face LGRa of the right side character string image LGR.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 101(A) to 101(E) of specific edge effect A of the stereoscopic image, the first effect is expressed in a transparent manner. The medium decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image is divided so that the area between the specific end surface 8CLa of the left medium decorative pattern 8CL, which is present in the image, and the specific end surface 8CRa of the right medium decorative pattern 8CR, which is represented in a transparent manner, becomes larger. The left-side medium decorative pattern 8CL and the right-side medium decorative pattern 8CR are designed to open (rotate) in a double-door pattern. According to this configuration, the left-side center decorative pattern 8CL and the right-side center decorative pattern 8CR open (rotate) in a double-folding manner, so that the specific end surface 8CLa of the left-side center decorative pattern 8CL is represented in a transparent manner. , and the specific end face 8CRa of the right-side middle decorative pattern 8CR, which is represented in a transparent manner, are enlarged, thereby enlarging the area in which the two character bodies CRA and CRB (predetermined images) can be visually recognized. Therefore, it is possible to visually entertain the players and increase their interest.
In the specific edge rendering B of the three-dimensional images shown in FIGS. 102(A) to 102(G), the left side character string image LGL and the right side character string image LGR are opened (rotated) in a double-door pattern, so that they have transparency. The area of the specific end surface 8CLa of the left-side medium decorative pattern 8CL, which is expressed in a transparent manner, and the specific end surface 8CRa of the right-side medium decorative pattern 8CR, which is expressed in a transparent manner, becomes larger, and the two character bodies CRA, Similarly, the area where the CRB (predetermined image) can be viewed can be enlarged.
In the specific edge rendering C of the stereoscopic images shown in FIGS. 103(A) to 103(G), the left side character string image LGL and the right side character string image LGR are in front of the left side character string image LGL and in front of the right side character string image LGR. are rotated to a display mode in which they are closed so that they face each other and overlap, so that the specific end face 8CLa of the left center decorative pattern 8CL is shown in a transparent manner, and the right center decoration is shown in a transparent manner. Similarly, the area of the specific end face 8CRa of the symbol 8CR becomes larger, and the area where the two character bodies CRA and CRB (predetermined images) can be visually recognized can be enlarged.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 101(C) of the specific end surface effect A of the stereoscopic image, before the first effect, the number "8" which is the inner decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image is displayed. It is possible to execute a second effect of displaying the image in a larger size on the image display device 7 (display means). According to this configuration, before the first performance, the size of the number "8" which is the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image is displayed in a large size on the image display device 7 (display means), so that the decorative pattern 8CL Before and after the specific end surface 8CLa of the decorative pattern 8CL and the specific end surface 8CRa of the right middle decorative pattern 8CR are expressed in a transparent manner, the player Since the game can contribute to directing the eyes of the players, it is possible to visually entertain the players and improve their interest.
In the specific edge effect B of the stereoscopic image in FIG. 102(E), before the first effect, the image display device 7 ( display means), the specific end surface LGLa of the left character string image LGL and the specific end surface LGRa of the right character string image LGR are displayed in a transparent manner. It is possible to contribute to directing the player's line of sight to LGLa and the specific end surface LGRa of the right side character string image LGR, and so on.
In the specific edge effect C of the stereoscopic image in FIG. 103(E), before the first effect, the display mode is enlarged so that the front side of the left side character string image LGL and the front side of the right side character string image LGR face each other and overlap. By being able to display on the image display device 7 (display means), the left side character string is displayed before and after the specific end face LGLa of the left side character string image LGL and the specific end face LGRa of the right side character string image LGR are displayed in a transparent manner. Similarly, it can contribute to directing the player's line of sight to the specific end surface LGLa of the image LGL and the specific end surface LGRa of the right side character string image LGR.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 101(C) of the specific end surface effect A of the stereoscopic image, in the second effect, the number "8" which is the interior decoration pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image is By moving away toward the depth direction, the size of the number "8", which is the middle decorative pattern 8C in the stereoscopic image, is displayed smaller, and then by moving toward the front, the number "8", which is the middle decorative pattern 8C in the stereoscopic image, is displayed smaller. The size of "8" is displayed larger. According to this configuration, it is possible to display in a large size the form of double-folding formed by the right side of the left side medium decorative pattern 8CL and the left side of the right side medium decorative pattern 8CR, so that the player can be visually entertained and the interest is improved. can be achieved.
In the specific end face rendering B of the stereoscopic image in FIG. 102(E), the double-door pattern formed by the right side of the left side character string image LGL and the left side of the right side character string image LGR can be displayed in a large size, and is similar.
In the specific edge rendering C of the stereoscopic image shown in FIG. 103(E), a closed display mode can be displayed in a large size so that the front side of the left side character string image LGL and the front side of the right side character string image LGR face each other and overlap. .

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 101(C) to 101(E) of the specific edge effect A of the stereoscopic image, in the first effect, the inner decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image is on the left side. It is divided into a plurality of medium decorative patterns 8CL and right medium decorative patterns 8CR, and a specific end surface 8CLa of the divided left medium decorative pattern 8CL and a specific end surface 8CRa of the right medium decorative pattern 8CR (in each divided three-dimensional image It is possible to perform an effect in which the two character bodies CRA and CRB (predetermined images) are made visible through the specified end surface. According to this configuration, as a result of dividing the interior decoration pattern 8C of the three-dimensional image into a plurality of parts, the number of three-dimensional images increases, and the number of specific end faces in each divided three-dimensional image also increases. Since the player can be given many opportunities to visually recognize the two character bodies CRA and CRB (predetermined images) through a specific end face in the image, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be increased. You can improve your performance.
In the specific edge effect B of the stereoscopic image shown in FIGS. 102(E) to 102(G) and the specific edge effect C of the stereoscopic image shown in FIGS. 103(E) to 103(G), the character string image LG is "OA". As a result of being divided into two character string images, the left character string image LGL and "RO" as the right character string image LGR, the number of 3D images increases, and the number of specific end faces in each of the divided 3D images also increases. The same is true because the player can be given many opportunities to visually recognize the two character bodies CRA and CRB (predetermined images) through the specific end faces of each of the three-dimensional images that have increased in number.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 102(C) to 102(D) of the specific end surface effect B of the stereoscopic image, the front side of the image display device 7 (display means) A second movable accessory 15 (movable member) that can be moved to a position (predetermined position) is provided, and when the second movable accessory 15 (movable member) forms a reach during the fluctuating performance of the decorative pattern, When a reach effect including a specific end face effect of a stereoscopic image is performed from among multiple types of reach effects, a third effect that is activated (at a predetermined timing) and moves to an advance position (predetermined position) can be executed. , In the second performance, the character string "OARO" written on the front of the second movable accessory 15 (movable member) is changed so that the character string image LG of a colored opaque three-dimensional image "OARO" is displayed. It has become. According to this configuration, when the second movable accessory 15 (movable member) operates at a predetermined timing and moves to the advanced position (predetermined position), the second movable accessory 15 (movable member) Since the character string "OARO" written on the front side of the second movable accessory 15 (movable The character string "OARO" written on the front side of the second movable accessory 15 (movable member) is as if the character string "OARO" written on the front side of the second movable accessory 15 (movable member) has been shaken off to the image display device 7 (display means). Since it is possible to perform an innovative performance, it is possible to visually entertain the players and improve their interest. The same holds true for the specific edge rendering C of the stereoscopic images shown in FIGS. 103(C) to 103(D).

[Modified example]
Below, a modified example of specific end face rendering of a stereoscopic image will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In the specific end surface effect A of the stereoscopic image in FIG. 101, the specific end surface 8CLa of the left medium decorative pattern 8CL and the specific end surface 8CRa of the right medium decorative pattern 8CR are transparent areas, and the specific end surface effect B of the stereoscopic image in FIG. In the specific end surface rendering C of the stereoscopic image in FIG. 103, the specific end surface LGLa of the left character string image LGL and the specific end surface LGRa of the right character string image LGR are transparent regions. However, the specific end surfaces 8CLa and 8CRa in the specific end surface rendering A of the stereoscopic image in FIG. 101, the specific end surfaces LGLa and LGRa in the specific edge rendering B of the stereoscopic image in FIG. , LGRa need only have translucency, and may be a material having translucency such as frosted glass. In this way, for example, the specific end surface is represented in a translucent manner like frosted glass, and the specific end surface is gradually changed from a blurry aspect in which a predetermined image cannot be clearly seen through the particular end surface to a transparent area. The predetermined image may be made easier to view through the specific end face as the transparency becomes higher. Even with this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Modification 2]
In specific edge rendering A of a stereoscopic image in FIG. 101, specific edge rendering B of a stereoscopic image in FIG. 102, and specific edge rendering C of a stereoscopic image in FIG. , CRB could be seen, and it was a still image of two characters, CRA and CRB, facing each other holding swords. However, a moving image may be used instead of a still image. The video may be, for example, one that explains the flow of two characters CRA and CRB facing each other with swords, a three-dimensional CG video, an animation video, or a movie. It may be a one-shot scene.

[Modification 3]
In the specific edge rendering A of the stereoscopic image shown in FIG. 101, the specific edge rendering B of the stereoscopic image shown in FIG. 102, and the specific edge rendering C of the stereoscopic image shown in FIG. 103, the stereoscopic image is divided into two stereoscopic images. However, it may be divided into three or more stereoscopic images. In this way, as the number of 3D images increases due to the division, the number of specific end faces in each 3D image also increases, and as a result, there are many opportunities to view a given image through the transparent specific end faces. It can be given to the player.

[Modification 4]
In the specific edge effect A of the stereoscopic image in FIG. 101, the left center decorative pattern 8CL and the right center decorative pattern 8CR are gradually opened in a double-door pattern, and in the specific edge effect B of the stereoscopic image in FIG. 102, the left side character string image LGL and the right side The character string image LGR is gradually opened in a double-folding manner, and in the specific edge rendering C of the stereoscopic image in FIG. 103, the front side of the left side character string image LGL and the front side of the right side character string image LGR are closed so that they face and overlap. The left side character string image LGL and the right side character string image LGR were gradually closed so that. However, the stereoscopic images may be rotated in the same direction or in different directions. For example, in the specific end face effect A of the stereoscopic image in FIG. 101, the left center decorative pattern 8CL and the right center decorative pattern 8CR are rotated in the same direction (for example, a clockwise rotation mode, a counterclockwise rotation mode, For example, the left center decorative pattern 8CL may be rotated forward, while the right center decorative pattern 8CR may be rotated backwards. For example, the left side medium decorative pattern 8CL may be rotated backwards while the right side medium decorative pattern 8CR may be rotated clockwise. In addition, in the specific end face rendering B of the stereoscopic image in FIG. 102, the left side character string image LGL and the right side character string image LGR are rotated in the same direction (for example, a clockwise rotation mode, a counterclockwise rotation mode, For example, the left character string image LGL may be rotated forward, while the right character string image LGR may be rotated backwards. For example, the character string image LGL on the left side may be rotated backwards, while the character string image LGR on the right side may be rotated clockwise. In addition, in the specific edge rendering C of the stereoscopic image in FIG. 103, the left character string image LGL and the right character string image LGR are rotated in the same direction without closing the left character string image LGL and the right character string image LGR. (For example, a clockwise rotation mode, a counterclockwise rotation mode, a forward rotation mode, a backward rotation mode, etc.), or as rotations in mutually different directions, for example, a mode in which the left side character string image LGL is rotated forward. In contrast, the right character string image LGR may be rotated backwards, or the left character string image LGL may be rotated backwards, whereas the right character string image LGR may be rotated clockwise.

[Modification 5]
In the specific edge rendering A of the stereoscopic image in FIG. 101, the specific edge rendering B of the stereoscopic image in FIG. 102, and the specific edge rendering C of the stereoscopic image in FIG. It was a demonstration of his worldview. However, it may also be something that suggests where the reach performance will develop. Since there are multiple types of development destinations for reach effects, it is possible to suggest to the player the degree of expectation that a jackpot game will occur depending on the development destination that can be seen through a specific end face, and it is possible to indicate to the player the degree of expectation that a jackpot game will occur based on the development destination that can be seen through a specific end face. It can also contribute to the players themselves discovering the relationship between the degree of expectation that a game will occur.

[Modification 6]
The specific edge effect A of the stereoscopic image in FIG. 101, the specific edge effect B of the stereoscopic image in FIG. 102, and the specific edge effect C of the stereoscopic image in FIG. there were. For example, in addition to the two characters CRA and CRB holding swords, it may also be an item such as a sword or shield, a vehicle, or the two characters CRA and CRB may represent the worldview of the production. It may also be something that can be expressed with two kanji characters, such as the characters ``gekitsu'', ``ranbu'', and ``musou'', which indicate actions by CRA and CRB.

[Modification 7]
The specific edge effect A of the stereoscopic image shown in FIG. 101, the specific edge effect B of the stereoscopic image shown in FIG. 102, and the specific edge effect C of the stereoscopic image shown in FIG. A production may be added.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect D1-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying various images,
When displaying a stereoscopic image on the display means, a first effect can be executed in which a specific end face of the stereoscopic image is displayed in a transparent manner, and a predetermined image is visible through the specific end face. ,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect D1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect D1-1,
In the first effect, the stereoscopic image is rotated so that the area of the specific end face becomes larger.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect D1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect D1-1 or aspect D1-2,
Before the first effect, a second effect can be executed in which the size of the stereoscopic image is increased and displayed on the display means.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect D1-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect D1-3,
In the second effect, the size of the 3D image is displayed small as it moves away in the depth direction, and then the size of the 3D image increases as it moves toward the front. Is displayed,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect D1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D1-1 to D1-4,
In the first effect, the three-dimensional image is divided into a plurality of parts, and the predetermined image is made visible through the specific end face of each of the divided three-dimensional images.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect D1-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect D1-3 or aspect D1-4,
comprising a movable member movable to a predetermined position in front of the display means,
A third effect can be performed in which the movable member operates at a predetermined timing and moves to the predetermined position,
In the second performance, the three-dimensional image in which the movable member is three-dimensionally expressed is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The combination effects A to C of movable accessories will be explained below using FIGS. 104 to 106. 104 to 106, decorative patterns and various reserved images displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are omitted for ease of viewing the drawings, and are arranged around the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Some of the second movable accessories 15 are also omitted for ease of viewing the drawings.

This combined presentation of the movable accessories can be executed during the variation presentation of the decorative symbols (for example, during the period from the start of variation to the stop of variation of the decorative symbols). That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands (for example, a variable performance start command) received from the sub-control board 90, and if an instruction to execute a combined performance of movable characters is included, the corresponding command is sent from the ROM 103. The image data is read out and the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition, the lamp control board 107 analyzes various commands (for example, a variable performance start command) received from the sub-control board 90, and if an instruction to execute a combination performance of movable accessories is included, The position, inclination, and light emitting mode of the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R of the first movable accessory 14 provided on the game board 2 may be changed, and the position, inclination, and light emitting state of the second movable accessory 15 provided on the game board 2 may be changed. The light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 arranged around the left side of the opening of the front frame 53 and the frame lamp 66 arranged around the right side of the opening of the front frame 53 (hereinafter referred to as ``light emission mode of the frame lamp 66'') (referred to as "mode").

In addition, the left side movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 is equipped with a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light (a plurality of LEDs are provided), and the light emitting mode of the left side movable accessory 14L can be made into a multicolor light emitting mode. The right movable accessory 14R of the first movable accessory 14 is equipped with a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light (a plurality of LEDs are provided), and the light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R can be made into a multicolor light emitting mode. can. Further, the second movable accessory 15 is equipped with a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting light in multiple colors (a plurality of LEDs are provided), and the light emitting mode of the second movable accessory 15 can be made into a multicolor light emitting mode, and the front frame 53 The frame lamp 66 arranged around the left side of the opening of the front frame 53 and the frame lamp 66 arranged around the right side of the opening of the front frame 53 are each equipped with a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light. The light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 can be a multicolor light emitting mode.

Here, first, movable accessory combination performance A will be explained, then movable accessory combination performance B, and movable accessory combination performance C will be explained in order.

[Combined production of movable characters A]
First, the combination effect A of movable accessories will be explained with reference to FIG. 104. FIG. 104 is a diagram for explaining the combination effect A of movable accessories. As shown in FIG. 104(A), in the movable accessory combination production A, first, the left movable accessory 14L is moved to the left retracted position (home) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the left movable accessory light emitting mode. At the same time, the right side movable accessory 14R advances (moves) from the right side movable accessory light emitting mode (the left side movable accessory light emitting mode) to the front (front) center advance position of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. (in a different light emitting mode) from the retracted position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 toward the advanced position in the front (front) center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. . At this time, the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 is the light emission mode for the right side movable accessory, which is exactly the same light emission mode as the right side movable accessory 14R, and is the same as the light emission mode for the left side movable accessory of the left side movable accessory 14L. It's different.

The left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R each advance (move) toward the advancing position (in the direction of approaching each other) at the front (front) center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and as shown in FIG. As shown in B), at the front (front) central position (advance position (deployed position)) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a ring-shaped decorative part attached to the tip side of the left movable accessory 14L is displayed. The left side decorative part, which is a half, and the right side decorative part, which is a half of the annular decorative part attached to the tip side of the right side movable accessory 14R, are combined, and the left side decorative part and the right side movable part of the left side movable accessory 14L are combined. One decorative member (combined accessory) is formed in which the right side decorative portion of the accessory 14R has an annular shape.

When the left decorative part of the left movable accessory 14L and the right decorative part of the right movable accessory 14R are combined to form a combined accessory having an annular shape, the area formed within the annular shape is a circular area ( (hereinafter referred to as "circular area") 14D. An image expressing emotion is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to this circular area 14D. Here, an image of a person smiling with wide-open eyes is displayed, and then the image changes to an image of a person smiling with narrowed eyes. By supplementing the circular area 14D of the combined accessory with an image expressing emotion on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the combined accessory can be given emotion. This makes it possible to realize a rich variety of performances based on the emotions of the combined characters.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 104(C) and 104(D), the combined accessory tilts from the upper side to the lower side toward the front side (player side) and then returns to its original position. (The face of the person appears to be bowing.) At this time, images expressing emotions are also displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular area 14D, as the combined accessory tilts toward the front side (toward the player) and returns to its original position. The expressions of the combined accessories also change in a three-dimensional manner.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 104(E), the second movable accessory 15 having a rectangular shape with "OARO" written on the front surface stops at the retracted position (home position) above the image display device 7. Advance (move) downward to a position near the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (advance position (direction position)), and rotate clockwise by a predetermined angle (for example, 30 degrees). and comes to a stopped state. At this time, the second movable accessory 15 is arranged so as to advance forward of the combined left movable accessory 14L and right movable accessory 14R, so that the upper side of the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are This will cover part of the upper side. The second movable accessory 15 may be configured to cover either a part of the left movable accessory 14L or a part of the right movable accessory 14R (specific movable member).

When the second movable accessory 15 advances, the light emitting mode of the left side movable accessory 14L is controlled from the left side movable accessory light emitting mode to the light emitting mode of extinguishing, and the light emitting mode of the right side movable accessory 14R and the frame lamp 66 are controlled. The light emitting mode is controlled from the light emitting mode for the right movable accessory (the light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory) to the light emitting mode in which the light is turned off. On the other hand, the light emitting mode of the second movable accessory 15 is controlled to the light emitting mode for the second movable accessory when the second movable accessory 15 advances. The light emission mode for the second movable accessory is a light emission mode different from the light emission mode for the left side movable accessory and the light emission mode for the right side movable accessory (a light emission mode different from the light emission mode for the left side movable accessory).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 104(F), the light emission mode of the left side movable accessory 14L is controlled from the light emission mode of extinguishing to the left side movable accessory light emission mode again, and the light emission mode of the right side movable accessory 14R and the frame lamp The light emitting mode 66 is controlled from the light emitting mode where the light is turned off to the light emitting mode for the right movable accessory (a light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory). That is, the light emission mode of the left side movable accessory 14L becomes the light emission mode for the left side movable accessory, the light emission mode of the right side movable accessory 14R and the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 become the light emission mode for the right side movable accessory, and the second movable accessory Since the light emission mode of the object 15 becomes the light emission mode for the second movable accessory, the light emission mode of the left side movable accessory 14L and the light emission mode of the right side movable accessory 14R (the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 is the same as that of the right side movable accessory 14R). The same light emitting mode as the light emitting mode) and the light emitting mode of the second movable accessory 15 are respectively different light emitting modes.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 104(G), the second movable accessory 15 rotates counterclockwise by a predetermined angle (for example, 30 degrees) in the second movable accessory light emitting mode, stops, and returns to the original horizontal state. When the state is reached and the retreat (movement) is completed upward from the advance position (direction position) to the retreat position (home position), the light emitting mode of the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in the light emitting mode for the second movable accessory. or is controlled to another light emitting mode (a light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory and the light emitting mode for the right movable accessory), or controlled to a light emitting mode in which the light is turned off.

Subsequently, the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R move in the direction in which they are separated from each other, and the left side movable accessory 14L is displayed in the front side (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the left side movable accessory light emitting mode. ) The right movable accessory 14R retreats (moves) from the center advanced position to the left retreat position (home position) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the right movable accessory 14R changes to the light emitting mode for the right movable accessory (the left movable accessory). (a light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode for objects), the image display device 7 moves backward (backwards) from the advanced position at the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a to the retracted position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Moving. At this time, the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 is the same light emission mode as the light emission mode of the right side movable accessory 14R.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 104(H), the left side movable accessory 14L is displayed on the image display device 7 from the advancing position in the front (front) center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the left side movable accessory light emitting mode. When the retreat (movement) is completed toward the retreat position (home position) on the left side of the screen 7a, the light emitting mode of the left movable accessory 14L is controlled from the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory to the light emitting mode in which the light is turned off, and the light emitting mode of the left movable accessory 14L is controlled to the light emitting mode in which the light is turned off. The display screen of the image display device 7 is displayed when the accessory 14R is in a right-side movable accessory light-emitting mode (a light-emitting mode different from the left-side movable accessory light-emitting mode) from the forward center front (front) center position of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the retreat (movement) is completed toward the right side evacuation position (home position) of 7a, the light emission mode of the right side movable accessory 14R changes from the light emission mode for the right side movable accessory (the light emission mode different from the light emission mode for the left side movable accessory). The light emission mode is controlled to turn off. At this time, the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 becomes the same light emission mode as the light emission mode of the right side movable accessory 14R, and the light emission mode is turned off from the light emission mode for the right side movable accessory (the light emission mode different from the light emission mode for the left side movable accessory). controlled to.

In this way, the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 changes when the right side movable accessory 14R is activated (during the period during which the right side movable accessory 14R advances toward the advance position, retreats, and returns to the home position). Accordingly, the light emission mode is controlled to be the same as the light emission mode of the right side movable accessory 14R. In other words, the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 is such that when the right side movable accessory 14R is activated (during the period during which the right side movable accessory 14R advances toward the advancing position, retreats, and returns to the home position), In conjunction with the light emission mode of the right side movable accessory 14R, the light emission mode is controlled to be the same as the light emission mode of the right side movable accessory 14R.

In addition, the light emission mode of the second movable accessory 15 progresses according to the light emission pattern data for the second movable accessory 15 defined in chronological order, and the light emission mode of the left movable accessory 14L is defined in chronological order. The light emitting mode of the right side movable accessory 14R progresses according to the light emission pattern data for the left side movable accessory 14L, and the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 progresses according to the light emission pattern data for the right side movable accessory 14R defined in chronological order. The process progresses according to the light emission pattern data for the frame lamp 66 defined in chronological order. The light emission pattern data for the right side movable accessory 14R and the light emission pattern data for the frame lamp 66 are the same light emission pattern data.

The light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 changes depending on when the right side movable accessory 14R is activated (during the period from when the right side movable accessory 14R advances toward the advance position, retreats, and returns to the home position). Since the light emission mode is controlled to be the same as that of the right side movable accessory 14R, when the right side movable accessory 14R is activated, the light emission pattern data for the frame lamp 66 and the light emission pattern for the right side movable accessory 14R are controlled. The light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 and the light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R may be set separately according to the respective light emitting pattern data, or the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 and the light emitting mode of the right side movable accessory 14R may be set separately. The light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 and the light emitting mode of the right side movable accessory 14R may proceed according to the light emitting pattern data for the movable accessory 14R.

[Combined production of movable accessories B]
Next, the combination effect A of movable accessories will be explained with reference to FIG. 105. FIG. 105 is a diagram for explaining the combination effect B of movable accessories. In the movable accessory combination production B, first, as shown in FIG. The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 advances (moves) from the front (front) center position of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the right movable accessory 14R turns off in a light-emitting manner. It advances (moves) from the right side retreat position (home position) to the advance position at the front (front) center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. At this time, the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 is an extinguished light emission mode, which is exactly the same light emission mode as the light emission mode of the right side movable accessory 14R, and is the same as the light emission mode for the left side movable accessory of the left side movable accessory 14L. It's different.

The left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R each advance (move) toward the advancing position (in the direction of approaching each other) at the front (front) center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and as shown in FIG. As shown in B), at the front (front) central position (advance position (deployed position)) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a ring-shaped decorative part attached to the tip side of the left movable accessory 14L is displayed. The left side decorative part, which is a half, and the right side decorative part, which is a half of the annular decorative part attached to the tip side of the right side movable accessory 14R, are combined, and the left side decorative part and the right side movable part of the left side movable accessory 14L are combined. One decorative member (combined accessory) is formed in which the right side decorative portion of the accessory 14R has an annular shape.

When the left side decorative part of the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side decoration part of the right side movable accessory 14R are combined to form a ring-shaped combined accessory, the light emitting mode of the left side movable accessory 14L is changed to that for the left side movable accessory. The light emitting mode is controlled from the light emitting mode to the light emitting mode of extinguishing, and the area formed in the annular shape becomes a circular area (hereinafter referred to as a "circular area") 14D. An image expressing emotion is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to this circular area 14D. Here, an image of a person smiling with wide-open eyes is displayed, and then the image changes to an image of a person smiling with narrowed eyes. By supplementing the circular area 14D of the combined accessory with an image expressing emotion on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the combined accessory can be given emotion. This makes it possible to realize a rich variety of performances based on the emotions of the combined characters.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 105(C), the second movable accessory 15 having a rectangular shape with "OARO" written on the front surface stops at the retracted position (home position) above the image display device 7. Advance (move) downward to a position near the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (advance position (direction position)), and rotate clockwise by a predetermined angle (for example, 30 degrees). and comes to a stopped state. At this time, the second movable accessory 15 is arranged so as to advance forward of the combined left movable accessory 14L and right movable accessory 14R, so that the upper side of the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are This will cover part of the upper side. The second movable accessory 15 may be configured to cover either a part of the left movable accessory 14L or a part of the right movable accessory 14R (specific movable member).

When the second movable accessory 15 advances, the light emission mode of the left movable accessory 14L is maintained such that the light is turned off, and the light emission mode of the right side movable accessory 14R and the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 are both turned off. is maintained. On the other hand, the light emitting mode of the second movable accessory 15 is controlled to the light emitting mode for the second movable accessory when the second movable accessory 15 advances. The light emitting mode for the second movable accessory is different from the light emitting mode for the left side movable accessory, and the light emitting mode for the right side movable accessory (which is different from the light emitting mode for the left side movable accessory and the light emitting mode for the second movable accessory), which will be described later. The light emitting mode is different from the mode).

After that, in the combined accessory, as shown in FIGS. 105(D) and 105(E), the light emitting mode of the left movable accessory 14L is controlled from the light-emitting mode of extinguishing to the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory again, The light emission mode of the right side movable accessory 14R is controlled from the light emission mode of extinguishing to the right side movable accessory light emission mode (a light emission mode different from the light emission mode for the left side movable accessory and the light emission mode for the second movable accessory). At this time, the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 becomes exactly the same as the light emitting mode for the right side movable accessory of the right side movable accessory 14R, and is controlled from the light-emitting state of extinguishing to the light emitting mode for the right side movable accessory, and the left side movable accessory The light emitting mode for the left side movable accessory of the accessory 14L and the light emitting mode for the second movable accessory of the second movable accessory 15 are different. In other words, the light emission mode of the left side movable accessory 14L becomes the light emission mode for the left side movable accessory, the light emission mode of the right side movable accessory 14R and the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 become the light emission mode for the right side movable accessory, and the second movable accessory Since the light emitting mode of the object 15 becomes the second movable accessory light emitting mode, the light emitting mode of the left side movable accessory 14L and the light emitting mode of the right side movable accessory 14R (the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 is the same as that of the right side movable accessory 14R). The same light emitting mode as the light emitting mode) and the light emitting mode of the second movable accessory 15 are respectively different light emitting modes.

Then, the combined accessory performs a "nodding" motion (like a human face bowing) by tilting from the upper side to the lower side toward the front (to the player's side) and then returning to its original position. At this time, images expressing emotions are also displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular area 14D, as the combined accessory tilts toward the front side (toward the player) and returns to its original position. The expressions of the combined accessories also change in a three-dimensional manner.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 105(F), the second movable accessory 15 rotates counterclockwise by a predetermined angle (for example, 30 degrees) in the second movable accessory light emitting mode, stops, and returns to the original horizontal position. When the state is reached and the retreat (movement) is completed upward from the advance position (direction position) to the retreat position (home position), the light emitting mode of the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in the light emitting mode for the second movable accessory. or is controlled to another light emitting mode (a light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory and the light emitting mode for the right movable accessory), or controlled to a light emitting mode in which the light is turned off.

Subsequently, the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R move in the direction in which they are separated from each other, and the left side movable accessory 14L is displayed in the front side (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the left side movable accessory light emitting mode. ) The right movable accessory 14R retreats (moves) from the center advanced position to the left retreat position (home position) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the right movable accessory 14R changes to the light emitting mode for the right movable accessory (the left movable accessory). (a light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode for objects), the image display device 7 moves backward (backwards) from the advanced position at the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a to the retracted position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Moving. At this time, the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 is the same light emission mode as the light emission mode of the right side movable accessory 14R.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 105(G), the left side movable accessory 14L is displayed on the image display device 7 from the advanced position in the front (front) center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the left side movable accessory light emitting mode. When the retreat (movement) is completed toward the retreat position (home position) on the left side of the screen 7a, the light emitting mode of the left movable accessory 14L is controlled from the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory to the light emitting mode in which the light is turned off, and the light emitting mode of the left movable accessory 14L is controlled to the light emitting mode in which the light is turned off. The accessory 14R advances to the front (front) center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a light emitting mode for the right side movable accessory (a light emitting mode different from the light emitting mode for the left side movable accessory and the light emitting mode for the second movable accessory). When the retreat (movement) is completed from the position to the retreat position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the light emission mode of the right side movable accessory 14R changes to the light emission mode for the right side movable accessory (the left side movable accessory). (different light emission mode from the light emission mode for the second movable accessory) to the light emission mode in which the light is turned off. At this time, the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 also becomes the same light emission mode as the light emission mode of the right side movable accessory 14R, and the light emission mode for the right side movable accessory (the light emission mode for the left side movable accessory and the light emission mode for the second movable accessory) The light emitting mode is controlled from a different light emitting mode) to a light emitting mode in which the light is turned off.

In this way, the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 changes when the right side movable accessory 14R is activated (during the period during which the right side movable accessory 14R advances toward the advance position, retreats, and returns to the home position). Accordingly, the light emission mode is controlled to be the same as the light emission mode of the right side movable accessory 14R. In other words, the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 is such that when the right side movable accessory 14R is activated (during the period during which the right side movable accessory 14R advances toward the advancing position, retreats, and returns to the home position), In conjunction with the light emission mode of the right side movable accessory 14R, the light emission mode is controlled to be the same as the light emission mode of the right side movable accessory 14R.

In addition, the light emission mode of the second movable accessory 15 progresses according to the light emission pattern data for the second movable accessory 15 defined in chronological order, and the light emission mode of the left movable accessory 14L is defined in chronological order. The light emitting mode of the right side movable accessory 14R progresses according to the light emission pattern data for the left side movable accessory 14L, and the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 progresses according to the light emission pattern data for the right side movable accessory 14R defined in chronological order. The process progresses according to the light emission pattern data for the frame lamp 66 defined in chronological order. The light emission pattern data for the right side movable accessory 14R and the light emission pattern data for the frame lamp 66 are the same light emission pattern data.

The light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 changes depending on when the right side movable accessory 14R is activated (during the period from when the right side movable accessory 14R advances toward the advance position, retreats, and returns to the home position). Since the light emission mode is controlled to be the same as that of the right side movable accessory 14R, when the right side movable accessory 14R is activated, the light emission pattern data for the frame lamp 66 and the light emission pattern for the right side movable accessory 14R are controlled. The light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 and the light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R may be set separately according to the respective light emitting pattern data, or the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 and the light emitting mode of the right side movable accessory 14R may be set separately. The light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 and the light emitting mode of the right side movable accessory 14R may proceed according to the light emitting pattern data for the movable accessory 14R.

[Combined production of movable characters C]
Next, the combination effect C of movable accessories will be explained with reference to FIG. 106. FIG. 106 is a diagram for explaining the combination effect C of movable accessories. As shown in FIG. 106(A), in the movable accessory combination production C, first, the left movable accessory 14L is moved to the left retracted position (home At the same time, the right side movable accessory 14R advances (moves) from the right side movable accessory light emitting mode (the left side movable accessory light emitting mode) to the front (front) center advance position of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. (in a different light emitting mode) from the retracted position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 toward the advanced position in the front (front) center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. . At this time, the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 is the light emission mode for the right side movable accessory, which is exactly the same light emission mode as the right side movable accessory 14R, and is the same as the light emission mode for the left side movable accessory of the left side movable accessory 14L. It's different.

The left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R each advance (move) toward the advance position (in the direction of approaching each other) at the front (front) center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and as shown in FIG. As shown in B), at the front (front) central position (advance position (deployed position)) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a ring-shaped decorative part attached to the tip side of the left movable accessory 14L is displayed. The left side decorative part, which is a half, and the right side decorative part, which is a half of the annular decorative part attached to the tip side of the right side movable accessory 14R, are combined, and the left side decorative part and the right side movable part of the left side movable accessory 14L are combined. One decorative member (combined accessory) is formed in which the right side decorative portion of the accessory 14R has an annular shape.

When the left decorative part of the left movable accessory 14L and the right decorative part of the right movable accessory 14R are combined to form a combined accessory having an annular shape, the area formed within the annular shape is a circular area ( (hereinafter referred to as "circular area") 14D. An image expressing emotion is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to this circular area 14D. Here, an image of a person smiling with wide-open eyes is displayed, and then the image changes to an image of a person smiling with narrowed eyes. By supplementing the circular area 14D of the combined accessory with an image expressing emotion on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the combined accessory can be given emotion. This makes it possible to realize a rich variety of performances based on the emotions of the combined characters.

Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 106(C) and 106(D), the combined accessory tilts from the upper side to the lower side toward the front side (player side), and then returns to its original position. (The face of the person appears to be bowing.) At this time, images expressing emotions are also displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular area 14D, as the combined accessory tilts toward the front side (toward the player) and returns to its original position. The expressions of the combined accessories also change in a three-dimensional manner.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 106(E), the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R move toward the direction in which they are separated from each other, and the left side movable accessory 14L is displayed in the image display device in the left side movable accessory light emitting mode. At the same time, the right side movable accessory 14R moves back from the advance position at the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 toward the retreat position (home position) on the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In the lighting mode for accessory objects (the lighting mode different from the lighting mode for the left side movable accessory), from the advancing position at the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 to the retreating position on the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Retreat (move) toward (home position). At this time, the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 is the same light emission mode as the light emission mode of the right side movable accessory 14R.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 106(F), the left side movable accessory 14L is displayed on the image display device 7 from the advanced position in the front (front) center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the left side movable accessory light emitting mode. When the retreat (movement) is completed toward the retreat position (home position) on the left side of the screen 7a, the light emitting mode of the left movable accessory 14L is controlled from the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory to the light emitting mode in which the light is turned off, and the light emitting mode of the left movable accessory 14L is controlled to the light emitting mode in which the light is turned off. The display screen of the image display device 7 is displayed when the accessory 14R is in a right-side movable accessory light-emitting mode (a light-emitting mode different from the left-side movable accessory light-emitting mode) from the forward center front (front) center position of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the retreat (movement) is completed toward the right side evacuation position (home position) of 7a, the light emission mode of the right side movable accessory 14R changes from the light emission mode for the right side movable accessory (the light emission mode different from the light emission mode for the left side movable accessory). The light emission mode is controlled to turn off. At this time, the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 becomes the same light emission mode as the light emission mode of the right side movable accessory 14R, and the light emission mode is turned off from the light emission mode for the right side movable accessory (the light emission mode different from the light emission mode for the left side movable accessory). controlled to.

In this way, the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 changes when the right side movable accessory 14R is activated (during the period during which the right side movable accessory 14R advances toward the advance position, retreats, and returns to the home position). Accordingly, the light emission mode is controlled to be the same as the light emission mode of the right side movable accessory 14R. In other words, the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 is such that when the right side movable accessory 14R is activated (during the period during which the right side movable accessory 14R advances toward the advancing position, retreats, and returns to the home position), In conjunction with the light emission mode of the right side movable accessory 14R, the light emission mode is controlled to be the same as the light emission mode of the right side movable accessory 14R.

The light emission mode of the left side movable accessory 14L progresses according to the light emission pattern data for the left side movable accessory 14L defined in chronological order, and the light emission mode of the right side movable accessory 14R progresses according to the light emission pattern data for the left side movable accessory 14L defined in chronological order. The process proceeds according to the light emission pattern data for the accessory 14R, and the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 proceeds according to the light emission pattern data for the frame lamp 66 defined in chronological order. The light emission pattern data for the right side movable accessory 14R and the light emission pattern data for the frame lamp 66 are the same light emission pattern data.

The light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 changes depending on when the right side movable accessory 14R is activated (during the period from when the right side movable accessory 14R advances toward the advance position, retreats, and returns to the home position). Since the light emission mode is controlled to be the same as that of the right side movable accessory 14R, when the right side movable accessory 14R is activated, the light emission pattern data for the frame lamp 66 and the light emission pattern for the right side movable accessory 14R are controlled. The light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 and the light emitting mode of the right movable accessory 14R may be set separately according to the respective light emitting pattern data, or the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 and the light emitting mode of the right side movable accessory 14R may be set separately. The light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 and the light emitting mode of the right side movable accessory 14R may proceed according to the light emitting pattern data for the movable accessory 14R.

In addition, in the combination production A of movable accessories shown in FIG. 104 and the combination production B of movable accessories shown in FIG. The clock advances (moves) downward from a stationary state at the upper retracted position (home position) to a position near the front (front) center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (advance position (direction position)). The second movable accessory 15 rotates counterclockwise at a predetermined angle (for example, 30 degrees) and stops in the second movable accessory light emitting mode. ), then stopped and returned to its original horizontal state, and then retreated (moved) upward from the advancing position (direction position) to the retreating position (home position), whereas the movable accessory in Figure 106 In the combination effect C, there is no effect of the second movable accessory 15 appearing in front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. This is the expectation level that a jackpot game (jackpot performance) will occur when executed during the fluctuating performance of the decorative pattern (for example, the period from the start of the fluctuation of the decorative pattern to the stop of the fluctuation). This is because the combination effect A is the highest, followed by the combination effect B of the movable accessories in FIG. 105, and the lowest combination effect C of the movable accessories shown in FIG. 106.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the combination of movable accessories is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment described above, for example, as shown in FIGS. It includes a front frame 53 provided with LEDs capable of emitting color light, and a game board 2 provided with a game area 3 that is visible through an opening formed in the front frame 53, and displays various images. A displayable image display device 7 (display means) and a left movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 that can be moved to a forward position (predetermined position) in front of the image display device 7 (display means) and combined. and a right side movable accessory 14R (a plurality of movable members) of the first movable accessory 14 are provided on the game board 2, and a left side movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 and a right side movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14. The movable accessories 14R (a plurality of movable members) are each provided with a plurality of LEDs (second light emitting means: LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light), and the movable accessories 14R on the left side of the first movable accessory 14 and the first When the right movable accessory 14R (a plurality of movable members) of the first movable accessory 14 is combined, the left movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 and the right movable accessory 14R (a plurality of movable members) of the first movable accessory 14 are combined. Light emitting mode and front of a plurality of LEDs (second light emitting means: LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light) provided on the right side movable accessory 14R (specific movable member) of the first movable accessory 14 (member) The light emitting mode is the same as that of the frame lamp 66 (first light emitting means: a plurality of LEDs (LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light)) provided in the frame 53. According to this configuration, the left side movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 and the right side movable accessory 14R (a plurality of movable members) of the first movable accessory 14 move to the advanced position and can be combined. As a result, the player can be visually entertained, and a plurality of LEDs (second light emitting means: multicolor light emitting means) provided on the right side movable accessory 14R (specific movable member) of the first movable accessory 14 The light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 (first light emitting means: a plurality of LEDs (LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light)) is the same as the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 (first light emitting means: a plurality of LEDs (LEDs that can emit multicolor light)), which makes it difficult for the player to It is possible to visually entertain and improve interest. The same holds true for the combined presentation B of movable accessories in FIGS. 105(A) to 105(G) and the combined presentation C of movable accessories shown in FIGS. 106(A) to 106(F).

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment described above, for example, as shown in FIGS. 104(A) to 104(H) of the combination effect A of movable accessories, the left movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 and the first When the right side movable accessory 14R (a plurality of movable members) of the movable accessory 14 is combined, the left side movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 and the right side movable accessory 14R (a plurality of movable members) of the first movable accessory 14 are combined. ), a plurality of LEDs ( The light emitting mode of the second light emitting means: an LED capable of emitting multicolor light and the frame lamp 66 provided in the front frame 53 (the first light emitting means: a plurality of LEDs (LED capable of emitting multicolor light)) The light emission mode is different from the light emission mode. According to this configuration, the left side movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 and the right side movable accessory 14R (a plurality of movable members) of the first movable accessory 14 move to the advanced position and are combined. In addition to visually entertaining the player, a plurality of LEDs (second light emitting means: emit multicolor light) provided on the right side movable accessory 14R (specific movable member) of the first movable accessory 14 The light emitting mode of the LED that can emit light in different colors is different from the light emitting mode of the plurality of LEDs (second light emitting means: LEDs that can emit multicolor light) provided on the left movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14. By adopting the light emitting mode, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved. The same is true for the combined effects B of movable accessories in FIGS. 105(A) to 105(G) and the combined effects C of movable accessories shown in FIGS. 106(A) to 106(F).

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment described above, for example, as shown in FIGS. 104(E) to 104(F) of the combination effect A of movable accessories, the left movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 and the first A part of the right side movable accessory 14R (a specific movable member) of the first movable accessory 14 without being combined with the right side movable accessory 14R (a plurality of movable members) of the movable accessory 14 and the left side of the first movable accessory 14 It includes a second movable accessory 15 (non-combined movable member) that is movable so as to cover one or both of the movable accessory 14L (another movable member). According to this configuration, a new second movable accessory is added separately from the left movable accessory 14L of the combined first movable accessory 14 and the right movable accessory 14R (a plurality of movable members) of the first movable accessory 14. The object 15 (non-merging movable member) appears and does not combine with the left movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 and the right movable accessory 14R (a plurality of movable members) of the first movable accessory 14, so the game It is possible to visually entertain people and improve their interest. The same holds true for the combined effects B of movable accessories shown in FIGS. 105(C) to 105(E).

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 104(E) to 104(F) of the combined effect A of the movable accessory, the second movable accessory 15 (non-combined movable member) has a plurality of A plurality of LEDs (third light emitting means: LED capable of emitting multicolor light) are provided, and a plurality of LEDs (third light emitting means: LED capable of emitting multicolor light) are provided on the second movable accessory 15 (non-combined movable member). When the left movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 and the right movable accessory 14R (a plurality of movable members) of the first movable accessory 14 are combined, the first movable accessory A plurality of LEDs (second light emitting means: multicolor The light emitting mode is different between the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 (first light emitting means: a plurality of LEDs (LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light)) provided on the front frame 53. It is designed to be. According to this configuration, a new second movable accessory is added separately from the left movable accessory 14L of the combined first movable accessory 14 and the right movable accessory 14R (a plurality of movable members) of the first movable accessory 14. The object 15 (non-combined movable member) appears, and a plurality of LEDs (third light emitting means: LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light) provided on the second movable accessory 15 (non-combined movable member) emit light. The aspect is that a plurality of LEDs (the first The light emitting mode of the second light emitting means: an LED that can emit multicolor light and the frame lamp 66 provided on the front frame 53 (the first light emitting means: a plurality of LEDs (LEDs that can emit multicolor light)) Since the light emission modes are different from each other, it is possible to visually entertain the players and increase their interest. The same holds true for the combined effects B of movable accessories shown in FIGS. 105(C) to 105(E).

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment described above, for example, as shown in FIGS. means), a plurality of LEDs (second light emitting means) provided on the left movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 and the right movable accessory 14R of the first movable accessory 14, and the second movable accessory 15. The plurality of LEDs (third light emitting means) provided are LEDs (light emitting means) capable of emitting multicolor light. According to this configuration, the frame lamp 66 (first light emitting means) provided in the front frame 53, the left side movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14, and the right side movable accessory 14R of the first movable accessory 14 Since the plurality of LEDs (second light emitting means) provided on the second movable accessory 15 and the plurality of LEDs (third light emitting means) provided on the second movable accessory 15 can emit multicolor light, it is possible to visually You can entertain yourself and improve your interest. The same is true for the combined effects B of movable accessories in FIGS. 105(A) to 105(G) and the combined effects C of movable accessories shown in FIGS. 106(A) to 106(F).

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 104(A) to 104(H) of the combination effect A of movable accessories, a jackpot game state (jackpot effect) that provides a profit to the player is created. Before displaying the occurrence on the image display device 7 (display means) (that is, during the fluctuating performance of the decorative pattern (for example, during the period from the start of the fluctuation of the decorative pattern to the stop of the fluctuation)), the left side of the first movable accessory 14 The movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R (a plurality of movable members) of the first movable accessory 14 can be combined. According to this configuration, before the occurrence of the jackpot game state is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means) (during the fluctuating presentation of decorative symbols (for example, during the period from the start of fluctuating to the stop of fluctuating the decorative symbols)) , the left side movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 and the right side movable accessory 14R (a plurality of movable members) of the first movable accessory 14 move to the advanced position and become combined, thereby creating an impact on the player. It is possible to provide a certain performance, visually entertain the players, and improve their interest. The same is true for the combined effects B of movable accessories in FIGS. 105(A) to 105(G) and the combined effects C of movable accessories shown in FIGS. 106(A) to 106(F).

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 104(A) to 104(H) of the combination effect A of movable accessories, a jackpot game state (jackpot effect) that provides a profit to the player is created. During the period from occurrence to end (that is, during the jackpot performance), the left side movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 and the right side movable accessory 14R (a plurality of movable members) of the first movable accessory 14 It is now possible to combine. According to this configuration, during the period from when the jackpot game state (jackpot performance) occurs until it ends (during the jackpot performance), the left side movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 and the first movable accessory 14 By moving the right side movable accessory 14R (a plurality of movable members) to the advancing position and taking on a combined mode, it is possible to provide an impactful performance to the player and visually entertain the player. You can improve your interest. The same is true for the combined effects B of movable accessories in FIGS. 105(A) to 105(G) and the combined effects C of movable accessories shown in FIGS. 106(A) to 106(F).

[Modified example]
Below, a modified example of the combination of movable accessories is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the combination production A of movable accessories shown in FIG. 104, the combination production B of movable accessories shown in FIG. 105, and the combination production C of movable accessories shown in FIG. The right side movable accessory 14R (a plurality of movable members) of the accessory 14 moved to the advanced position and was in a combined state. However, any or all of the movable members among the left movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 and the right movable accessory 14R (a plurality of movable members) of the first movable accessory 14 move to the advanced position. You may return to the retreat position (home position) on the way and move to the advance position again, or move back and forth between the retreat position (home position) and the advance position, and perform a merging performance of movable characters that do not merge as a result. . In this case as well, the light emitting mode of the plurality of LEDs (second light emitting means: LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light) provided on the right side movable accessory 14R (specific movable member) of the first movable accessory 14 The light emission mode by the frame lamp 66 (first light emitting means: a plurality of LEDs (LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light)) is the same as the light emission mode, and the right side movable accessory 14R of the first movable accessory 14 (specific The light emitting mode of the plurality of LEDs (second light emitting means: LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light) provided on the movable member) and the plurality of LEDs provided on the left movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 The light emitting mode is different from the light emitting mode of the second light emitting means (LED capable of emitting multicolor light). In addition, the left movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 and the right movable accessory 14R (a plurality of movable members) of the first movable accessory 14 reciprocate between the retracted position (home position) and the advanced position, and as a result, Even if a new second movable accessory 15 (non-combined movable member) appears while performing a combination of movable accessories that do not combine with the second movable accessory 15 (non-combined movable member), The light emitting mode of the plurality of provided LEDs (third light emitting means: LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light) is different from that of the right side movable accessory 14R (specific movable member) of the first movable accessory 14 and the first movable accessory 14. Light emitting mode of a plurality of LEDs (second light emitting means: LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light) provided on the left movable accessory 14L (another movable member) of the object 14 and a frame provided on the front frame 53 The light emitting mode is different from that of the lamp 66 (first light emitting means: a plurality of LEDs (LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light)).

[Modification 2]
In the combination production A of the movable accessories shown in FIG. 104, the combination production B of the movable accessories shown in FIG. 105, and the combination production C of the movable accessories shown in FIG. Two movable accessories, the right side movable accessory 14R of the accessory 14, moved to the advanced position and were combined. However, a mode may be adopted in which three or more movable accessories move to their advanced positions and combine. In this case, the first movable accessory 14 is used as a specific movable accessory that has the same light emission mode as the frame lamp 66 (first light emitting means: a plurality of LEDs (LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light)). It may be the right side movable accessory 14R, or it may be replaced with another movable accessory different from the right side movable accessory 14R of the first movable accessory 14, or it may be a movable accessory selected from among all the movable accessories. It can also be used as a thing.

[Modification 3]
The left side movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 and the first When the right side movable accessory 14R of the movable accessory 14 is located (standby) at the retreat position (home position), a left side decorative member hides the presence of the left side movable accessory 14L and a left side decorative member hides the presence of the right side movable accessory 14R. A right side decorative member to be hidden is provided on the game board 2, and the left side decorative member is equipped with a plurality of full color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light, and the right side decorative member is equipped with a plurality of full color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light. good. In this case, when the left movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 and the right movable accessory 14R of the first movable accessory 14 are respectively located (standby) at the retreat position (home position), the first movable accessory The plurality of LEDs (second light emitting means: LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light) provided on the left movable accessory 14L of the object 14 and the right movable accessory 14R of the first movable accessory 14 are turned off. Even when the left side decorative member and the right side decorative member are equipped with light, the left side decorative member and the right side decorative member can produce a light emission effect by emitting light from a plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the left side decorative member and the right side decorative member, respectively. For example, the light emission mode of the left side decorative member, the light emission mode of one or both of the right side decorative members, the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66, and the light emission mode of the second movable accessory 15 may be the same. It can be a mode.

[Modification 4]
In the combination production A of movable accessories shown in FIG. 104, the combination production B of movable accessories shown in FIG. 105, and the combination production C of movable accessories shown in FIG. The light emitting mode of the plurality of LEDs (second light emitting means: LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light) provided on the frame lamp 66 (first light emitting means: LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light) The light emission mode was the same as that of the LED). However, the light emitting mode of the plurality of LEDs (second light emitting means: LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light) provided on the right side movable accessory 14R (specific movable member) of the first movable accessory 14 and the front frame 53 The frame lamp 66 disposed around the left side of the opening has the same light emission mode, whereas the plurality of lamps provided on the right side movable accessory 14R (specific movable member) of the first movable accessory 14 The light emitting mode of the LED (second light emitting means: an LED capable of emitting multicolor light) is different from the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 disposed around the right side of the opening of the front frame 53. Alternatively, the light emitting mode and front of the plurality of LEDs (second light emitting means: LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light) provided on the right side movable accessory 14R (specific movable member) of the first movable accessory 14 may be changed. While the frame lamp 66 disposed around the left side of the opening of the frame 53 has a different light emission mode, the plurality of lamps provided on the right side movable accessory 14R (specific movable member) of the first movable accessory 14 The light emitting mode of the LED (second light emitting means: an LED capable of emitting multicolor light) is the same as the light emitting mode of the frame lamp 66 disposed around the right side of the opening of the front frame 53. You may also do so.

[Modification 5]
In the combination production A of movable accessories shown in FIG. 104, the combination production B of movable accessories shown in FIG. 105, and the combination production C of movable accessories shown in FIG. The left side decorative part, which is half of the part, and the right side decorative part, which is half of the ring-shaped decorative part attached to the tip side of the right side movable accessory 14R, are combined to form the left side decoration part of the left side movable accessory 14L. When one decorative member (combined accessory) in which the right side decorative part of the right side movable accessory 14R has a ring shape is formed, the combined accessory moves from the upper side to the lower side toward the front side (player side). It was performing a ``nodding'' motion (like a human face bowing) by tilting and then returning to its original position. However, the combined accessory may rotate the left side and the right side toward the front side (the player's side) and return to its original position, ``like a person's face turning left and right''. . In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular area 14D, an image with crossed eyes (for example, see FIG. 54) is displayed as an image expressing emotion, and a sad It may also be an image expressing emotion.

[Modification 6]
The degree of expectation that a jackpot game (jackpot performance) will occur when executed during the variation production of decorative symbols (for example, the period from the start of variation to the stop of variation of decorative symbols) is expressed as the combination production A of movable accessories in Fig. 104. was set highest, followed by movable accessory combination effect B in FIG. 105, and movable accessory combination effect C in FIG. 106 the lowest. However, in a jackpot game (jackpot effect) in which a profit is given to the player, the combined effect of movable characters A in FIG. 104, the combined effect of movable characters in FIG. 105, and the combined effect of movable characters in FIG. It may also be executed as a performance. It may be executed based on the player's operation of the production button 63 (pressing operation), or may be executed based on the player's operation of the sword member 64 (downward pushing operation), The execution may be performed based on the player's operation (pressing operation) of the sword button 65 provided at the upper end portion of the sword member 64.

[Modified example 7]
The light emission mode for the left side movable accessory of the left side movable accessory 14L and the light emission mode for the right side movable accessory of the right side movable accessory 14R are completely different light emission modes. The light emitting mode for the right movable accessory was exactly the same as that of the object 14R, and was different from the light emitting mode for the left movable accessory of the left movable accessory 14L. However, during the period during which the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R operate, advance toward the advance position, retreat, and return to the home position, the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R to have the same light emission mode, the light emission mode of the frame lamp 66 and the light emission mode of the left side movable accessory 14L are different. The left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R are linked to have the same light emission mode, for example, lighting in red, flashing, or gradation lighting, while the frame lamp 66 is turned off. Alternatively, the light emitting mode may be different from that of the left side movable accessory 14L, such as lighting in white or gradation lighting.

[Modified example 8]
In the combined performance A of movable characters shown in FIG. 104, the combined performance B of mobile characters shown in FIG. 105, and the combined performance C of mobile characters shown in FIG. A production may be added.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect D2-1]
a front frame provided with a first light emitting means;
a display means that is visible through an opening formed in the front frame;
A gaming machine comprising a plurality of movable members that can be moved to and combined with a predetermined position in front of the display means,
The plurality of movable members are each provided with a second light emitting means,
When the plurality of movable members are combined, the light emitting mode of the second light emitting means provided on a specific movable member among the plurality of movable members and the light emitting mode of the first light emitting means provided on the front frame have the same luminescence mode,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect D2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect D2-1,
When the plurality of movable members are combined, the light emitting mode of the second light emitting means provided on the other movable members excluding the specific movable member among the plurality of movable members and the light emitting mode of the second light emitting means provided on the front frame are changed. The light emitting mode of the first light emitting means is different from the light emitting mode of the first light emitting means,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect D2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect D2-2,
comprising a non-combining movable member that does not combine with the plurality of movable members and is movable so as to cover either or both of a part of the specific movable member and a part of the other movable member;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect D2-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect D2-3,
a third light emitting means is provided on the non-combined movable member;
The light emitting mode of the third light emitting means provided on the non-combined movable member is such that when the plurality of movable members are combined, the second light emitting means provided on the specific movable member and the other movable member respectively The light emitting mode of the means is different from the light emitting mode of the first light emitting means provided in the front frame,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect D2-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D2-1 to D2-4,
The first light emitting means, the second light emitting means and the third light emitting means are light emitting means capable of emitting multicolor light;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect D2-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D2-1 to D2-5,
The plurality of movable members can be combined before displaying the occurrence of the winning game effect on the display means.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect D2-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D2-1 to D2-5,
The plurality of movable members can be combined during the period from when the performance of the winning game occurs to when it ends.
A gaming machine characterized by:

11. Operation of the first movable accessory 14 in other embodiments When performing the effects shown in FIGS. 175 to 182, which will be described later, the configuration of the first movable accessory 14 is different from that in FIGS. 1 and 49 to 58. The configuration of the first movable accessory 14 when performing the effects shown in FIGS. 175 to 182 will be described. The configuration of the first movable accessory 14 in another embodiment that executes the effects shown in FIGS. 175 to 182 will be described with reference to FIGS. 107 to 110.

FIG. 107 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a first aspect of the first movable accessory 14 in another embodiment. FIG. 108 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second aspect of the movable accessory 14 in another embodiment. FIG. 109 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a third aspect of the movable accessory 14 in another embodiment. FIG. 110 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a fourth aspect of the first movable accessory 14 in another embodiment.

The first movable accessory 14 in another embodiment includes a left fixed accessory 14L and a right movable accessory 14R, as shown in FIGS. 107 to 110. The left fixed accessory 14L is not configured to be movable, but remains stationary in front of the display screen 7a so as to cover a part of the display screen 7a. The right movable accessory 14R is configured to be movable in the left-right direction. The left side fixed accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R each have half of a ring-shaped decoration part (a left side decoration part and a right side decoration part) attached to the tip side. That is, the left side decorative portion and the right side decorative portion each have an arc shape that is half an annular shape. The right side movable accessory 14R can stand still at a retracted position (home position) stored on the right side of the display screen 7a (first mode). When the right movable accessory 14R is in the retracted position, all of it is located on the back side of other members, making it difficult to see.

As shown in FIG. 107, the left side fixed accessory 14L has a pair of movable members 14LP housed at the tip of the arc-shaped left side decoration part. FIG. 107 shows a state in which the pair of movable members 14LP are housed in the left side decorative portion (retracted state). In other embodiments, the state shown in FIG. 107 is also referred to as the first state of the movable accessory 14. The movable member 14LP is a rod-shaped member and is configured to be movable in the left-right direction. When the movable member 14LP is stored, it is located on the back side of the left decorative portion and is difficult to see, and when it is advanced, it protrudes to the right as shown in FIG. 108. FIG. 108 shows an advanced position (deployed position) in which the pair of movable members 14LP protrude to the right in parallel with each other. In other embodiments, the state shown in FIG. 108 is also referred to as the second state of the movable accessory 14.

As shown in FIG. 109, with the pair of movable members 14LP protruding from the tip of the left fixed accessory 14L, the right movable accessory 14R moves leftward, so that the pair of movable members 14LP move to the right side. In contact with the object 14R, one decorative member (combined accessory) is formed as a whole (third aspect). Then, as shown in FIG. 110, a face image is displayed on the display screen 7a corresponding to the opening formed in the center of the combined accessory, thereby completing the human face as a whole. In addition, by moving both the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 to the advanced position, the second movable accessory 15 becomes in a state where the upper part of the first movable accessory 14 is covered. In other words, the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 can stand still while partially overlapping and combined. The state in FIG. 110 is also referred to as the fourth mode of the movable accessory 14.

12. Other production examples, effect examples, modifications, and mode examples of the present embodiment Each production example (display production example, role object movable production example) of the present embodiment will be described below. In addition, examples of effects, modifications, and examples of aspects of the production example will also be explained. As mentioned above, the performance that will be described below is based on various information (win determination information, winning type information, fluctuation pattern information, advance determination information, etc.) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 81. This is an effect realized by the image control microcomputer 101). Note that the following display effect example is executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Furthermore, although the hold display (hold icon) may be omitted in the display performance examples, it is actually displayed unless otherwise specified.

The pending number-linked image display performances A to D will be explained below using FIGS. 111 to 114. This pending number-linked image display performance may be executed during a variation performance of decorative symbols. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable performance start command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the image display performance linked to the number of reservations, and the number of reservations reaches a predetermined number, The corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

[Pending number linked image display effect A]
FIG. 111 is a diagram for explaining the pending number-linked image display effect A. The pending number linked image display effect is an effect in which a pending number suggestion image HSG is displayed when the pending number reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3) due to winning during a specific fluctuation. In the pending number-linked image display effect A, first, as shown in FIGS. 111(A) and 111(B), the pending is exhausted as the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped, and the next new variation is started. In FIG. 111(A), the gaming state is normal, the lottery result of the first special symbol is a loss, and the decorative symbol is determined and stopped at the winning number "567". In conjunction with this confirmed stop, the pending icon (fluctuating icon) 9C disappears (discontinues pending). In addition, two pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol are displayed (the number of pending icons is 2).

In FIG. 111(B), by shifting the two hold icons 9A, the older (right side) hold icon 9A that was displayed first moves to the hold icon display area and becomes the hold icon. Here, the position of the pending icon display area can be specified by the rectangular image below. At the same time that one of the two pending icons 9A (on the right side) is put on hold, the variation effect of the decorative pattern is started. The variation of the decorative pattern shown in FIG. 111(B) falls under the "specific variation" of the claims. Here, whether or not the variation corresponds to a "specific variation" is randomly determined by the image control microcomputer 101. Note that the specific variation may be executed when the number of variations reaches a predetermined value (for example, the 100th time after the jackpot game), or when the gaming state changes (for example, from a time saving state to a normal state). May be executed at times. Whether or not it corresponds to a specific performance can be set as an arbitrary condition. An image indicating whether the variation corresponds to a specific variation may or may not be displayed on the display screen 7a.

After that, as shown in FIG. 111(C), due to the winning of the first special symbol, one pending icon 9A is added, resulting in a total of two. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 111(D), a state in which the number of pending icons 9A becomes three in total is shown due to the winning of the first special symbol. In conjunction with this, a pending number suggestion image HSG stating "3 pending now!!" is displayed. That is, the pending number suggestion image HSG is an image that notifies you when the pending number reaches 3, and is not displayed when the pending number is 2 or less. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 111(E), the pending number suggestion image HSG disappears during a specific fluctuation after a predetermined period of time has passed after being displayed. FIG. 111(F) further shows a state in which one pending icon 9A is added due to the winning of the first special symbol, resulting in a total of four. At this time, the pending number suggestion image HSG is not displayed. That is, the pending number suggestion image HSG is displayed for a certain period of time only when the pending number is 3, and is not displayed when the pending number is other than that. As shown in FIG. 111(G), the decorative pattern is then fixed and stopped. That is, the particular fluctuation ends. After this, FIGS. 112(H) to 112(J), which will be described later, are executed.

FIG. 111(H) shows a state in which there is no winning of the first special symbol after the start of the specific variation shown in FIG. 111(B). That is, the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after a specific change. In this way, even if there is a specific variation, if the number of reservations does not reach a predetermined value (here, 3), the decoration pattern is fixed and stopped without displaying the number of reservations suggestion image HSG.

FIG. 111(I) shows a state in which, as shown in FIG. 111(C), one pending icon 9A is added after a certain change, resulting in a total of 2, and after that, there is no winning of the first special symbol. There is. That is, a predetermined time (variation time) has elapsed after a specific variation, and the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped. In this way, even if there is a specific variation, if the number of reservations does not reach a predetermined value (here, 3), the decoration pattern is fixed and stopped without displaying the number of reservations suggestion image HSG.

As shown in FIG. 111(E), FIG. 111(J) shows a state in which there is no winning of the first special symbol after the pending number suggestion image HSG is displayed. That is, after the pending number suggestion image HSG is displayed, a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed and the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped. In this way, in a specific variation, after the reserved number suggestion image HSG is displayed once, the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped without being displayed again.

[Pending number linked image display effect B]
FIG. 112 is a diagram for explaining the pending number-linked image display effect B. The pending number linked image display effect is an effect in which a pending number suggestion image HSG is displayed when the pending number reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3) due to winning during a specific fluctuation. 112(A) to 112(D) of the pending number-linked image display effect B are the same as FIGS. 111(A) to 111(D) of the pending number-linked image display effect A. That is, as shown in FIGS. 112(A) and 112(B), when the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped, the suspension is extinguished and the next new variation is started. In FIG. 112(A), the gaming state is normal, the lottery result of the first special symbol is a loss, and the decorative symbol is determined and stopped at the winning number "567". In conjunction with this fixed stop, the pending icon (fluctuating icon) 9C disappears (discontinues pending). In addition, two pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol are displayed (the number of pending icons is 2).

In FIG. 112(B), by shifting the two hold icons 9A, the older (right side) hold icon 9A that was displayed first moves to the hold icon display area and becomes the hold icon. Here, the position of the pending icon display area can be specified by the rectangular image below. At the same time that one of the two pending icons 9A (on the right side) is put on hold, the variation effect of the decorative pattern is started. The variation of the decorative pattern shown in FIG. 112(B) corresponds to the "specific variation" in the claims. Here, whether or not a variation corresponds to a "specific variation" is randomly determined by the image control microcomputer 101. Note that the specific variation may be executed when the number of variations reaches a predetermined value (for example, the 100th time after the jackpot game), or when the gaming state changes (for example, from a time-saving state to a normal state). May be executed at times. Whether or not it corresponds to a specific performance can be set as an arbitrary condition. An image indicating whether the variation corresponds to a specific variation may or may not be displayed on the display screen 7a.

After that, as shown in FIG. 112(C), due to the winning of the first special symbol, one pending icon 9A is added, resulting in a total of two. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 111(D), a state in which the number of pending icons 9A becomes three in total is further shown due to the winning of the first special symbol. In conjunction with this, a pending number suggestion image HSG stating "3 pending now!!" is displayed. That is, the pending number suggestion image HSG is an image that notifies you when the pending number reaches 3, and is not displayed when the pending number is 2 or less. The pending number suggestion image HSG disappears after a predetermined period of time has elapsed.

Thereafter, the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped at a specific variation, and the next variation is started. FIG. 112(E) illustrates the state during a change following a particular change. Here, one hold icon 9A is consumed and two (number of hold icons 2) are displayed. FIG. 112(F) shows a state in which one pending icon 9A is added due to the winning of the first special symbol during this variation, resulting in a total of three. At this time, even though the number of reservations has become three, the number of reservations suggestion image HSG is not displayed. That is, in the next change after a specific change, even if the predetermined condition for the number of reservations (the number of reservations becomes 3) is met, the number of reservations suggestion image HSG is not displayed. In other words, the pending number suggestion image HSG is displayed only when there is a specific change. Thereby, the player can feel the excitement of whether or not the pending number suggestion image HSG will be displayed.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 112(G), the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped in the next variation after the specific variation. After that, the next variation is started. FIG. 112(H) illustrates the state during the next variation after a particular variation. Here, one hold icon 9A is consumed and two (number of hold icons 2) are displayed. In FIG. 112(I), a state is shown in which one pending icon 9A is added due to the winning of the first special symbol during this variation, resulting in a total of three. At this time, even though the number of reservations has become three, the number of reservations suggestion image HSG is not displayed. That is, in the next change after the specific change, even if the predetermined condition (the number of reservations becomes 3) is satisfied for the number of reservations, the number of reservations suggestion image HSG is not displayed. In other words, the pending number suggestion image HSG is displayed only when there is a specific change. Thereby, the player can feel the excitement of whether or not the pending number suggestion image HSG will be displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 112(J), the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped in the next variation after the specific variation.

[Image display performance linked to number of reservations C]
FIG. 113 is a diagram for explaining the pending number-linked image display effect C. The pending number linked image display effect is an effect in which a pending number suggestion image HSG is displayed when the pending number reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3) due to winning during a specific fluctuation. FIG. 113(A) of the pending number-linked image display performance C is the same as FIG. 111(A) of the pending number-linked image display performance A. That is, as shown in FIG. 112(A), the suspension is terminated at the same time as the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped, and the next new variation is started. In FIG. 112(A), the gaming state is normal, the lottery result of the first special symbol is a loss, and the decorative symbol is determined and stopped at the winning number "567". In conjunction with this fixed stop, the pending icon (fluctuating icon) 9C disappears (discontinues pending). In addition, two pending icons 9A corresponding to the first special symbol are displayed (the number of pending icons is 2).

In FIG. 113(B), by shifting the two hold icons 9A, the older (right side) hold icon 9A that was displayed first moves to the hold icon display area and becomes the hold icon. Here, the position of the pending icon display area can be specified by the rectangular image below. At the same time that one of the two pending icons 9A (on the right side) is put on hold, the variation effect of the decorative pattern is started. The variation of the decorative pattern shown in FIG. 113(B) falls under the "specific variation" of the claims. Here, whether or not the variation corresponds to a "specific variation" is randomly determined by the image control microcomputer 101. Note that the specific variation may be executed when the number of variations reaches a predetermined value (for example, the 100th time after the jackpot game), or when the gaming state changes (for example, from a time saving state to a normal state). May be executed at times. Whether or not it corresponds to a specific performance can be set as an arbitrary condition. An image indicating whether the variation corresponds to a specific variation may or may not be displayed on the display screen 7a. Timer image TM1 is displayed during this specific variation. Here, the timer image TM1 is written as "10 seconds left", and a countdown is started after the timer image TM1 is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 113(C), due to the winning of the first special symbol, one pending icon 9A is added, resulting in a total of two. The timer image TM1 continues to count down, and here indicates "8 seconds left." Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 113(D), a state in which the number of pending icons 9A becomes three in total is shown due to the winning of the first special symbol. In conjunction with this, a pending number suggestion image HSG stating "3 pending now!!" is displayed. That is, the pending number suggestion image HSG is an image that notifies you when the pending number reaches 3, and is not displayed when the pending number is 2 or less. While the pending number suggestion image HSG is displayed, the timer image TM1 continues to count down. Then, as shown in FIGS. 113(E) and 113(F), when the timer value of timer image TM1 becomes "0", the display of timer image TM1 disappears. At this time, the display of the pending number suggestion image HSG also disappears.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 113(G), the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped at a specific variation, and the next variation is started. The state during the change after a specific change is the same as in FIG. 112(G) to FIG. 112(J) of the pending number linked image display performance B in FIG. 113(G), so the description thereof will be omitted.

In FIGS. 113(H) to 113(J), as shown in FIG. 113(C), one hold icon 9A is added after a certain change, resulting in a total of 2, and after that, the winning of the first special symbol is It shows what was not there. That is, after a predetermined period of time (variation time) has elapsed after the specific variation, the timer value of the timer image TM1 becomes "0", and thereafter, the timer image TM1 disappears and the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped. In this way, even if there is a specific variation, if the number of reservations does not reach a predetermined value (here, 3), the decoration pattern is fixed and stopped without displaying the number of reservations suggestion image HSG.

[Image display effect linked to number of reservations D]
FIG. 114 is a diagram for explaining the pending number-linked image display effect D. The pending number linked image display effect is an effect in which a pending number suggestion image HSG is displayed when the pending number reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3) due to winning during a specific fluctuation. In FIG. 114 (A) of the pending number linked image display performance D, it is announced that the time saving game will start after the jackpot game. Specifically, "Start time saving mode!!" is displayed. Here, the explanation will be given on the assumption that the number of times of time saving is one, and that the normal state is returned to after one second special symbol is drawn. In addition, in the pending number-linked image display performance D, since the pending icon is not displayed, the current pending number is shown at the lower right of the display screen 7a. In FIG. 114(A), the hold of the second special symbol changes from 0 to 1 due to the right hit, and becomes 0 with the start of the lottery of the second special symbol in FIG. 114(B).

In FIG. 114(B), one reserve of the second special symbol is consumed, the remaining number becomes 0, and a variation effect of the decorative symbol is executed. The variation of the decorative pattern shown in FIG. 114(B) falls under the "specific variation" of the claims. Here, the "specific variation" refers to the first variation of the second special symbol executed in the time saving state after the jackpot game. In this embodiment, the number of time saving times is one time of the second special symbol lottery, and the first special symbol lottery is not included in the number of time saving times. Note that the number of time saving times can be set to an arbitrary number. In addition, not only the second special symbol lottery but also the first special symbol lottery may be included in the time saving count. Note that an image indicating whether or not the variation corresponds to a specific variation may or may not be displayed on the display screen 7a. Timer image TM1 is displayed during this specific variation. Here, the timer image TM1 is written as "10 seconds left", and a countdown is started after the timer image TM1 is displayed. In FIG. 114(B), the number of holds of the second special symbol changes from 0 to 2 due to the continuation of the right hit.

After that, as shown in FIG. 114(C), due to the continuation of the right hit, the number of pending second special symbols changes from 2 to 3. In conjunction with this, a pending number suggestion image HSG stating "3 pending now!!" is displayed. That is, the pending number suggestion image HSG is an image that notifies you when the pending number reaches 3, and is not displayed when the pending number is 2 or less. While the pending number suggestion image HSG is being displayed, the timer image TM1 continues to count down. Here, it says "5 seconds left". Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 114(D) and 114(E), when the timer value of timer image TM1 becomes "0", the display of timer image TM1 disappears. At this time, the display of the pending number suggestion image HSG also disappears.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 114(F), the decorative pattern stops fixed at "789" in a specific variation, and the number of reserved second special symbols changes from three to two. Then, the gaming state is switched from the time saving state to the normal state, and the second special symbol lottery is executed in the normal state. At this time, "Normal mode starts!!" is displayed before the variable display, as shown in FIG. 114(G). After that, a variable display is made.

In FIG. 114(H), the timer image TM2 is displayed together with the fluctuation display during the fluctuation following the specific fluctuation. This timer image TM2 merely represents the content of the timer "10 seconds left" and disappears after a predetermined time has elapsed without counting down. In this case, such images are also referred to as timer images. After the fixed stop, the number of pending changes changes from 2 to 1, and the next fluctuation starts. At this time, timer image TM3 is displayed. This timer image only shows the timer content of "5 seconds left" and disappears after a predetermined time has elapsed without counting down. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 114(J), a definite stop is made. The number of reserved second special symbols changes from 1 to 0. , In FIGS. 114(H) to 114(J), similarly to FIGS. 112(G) to 112(J) of pending number-linked image display effect B, in each variation, the pending number is a predetermined value (for example, 3). Even if the number of reservations is exceeded, the pending number suggestion image HSG is not displayed.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the image display effect linked to the number of reservations will be shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 111 to 114, when the number of reservations reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3) due to winning during a specific fluctuation, the first number of reservations suggestion image HSG is displayed. After the first performance, a second performance in which the pending number suggestion image HSG disappears during the same fluctuation in which the first performance was executed can be performed. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 111 to 114, in the first effect, the pending number suggestion image HSG is displayed when the pending number reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3) of 2 or more, It is not displayed before the number of pending items reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3). According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 111 and 113, if the number of reservations does not reach a predetermined number (for example, 3) during a specific fluctuation, the number of reservations suggestion image HSG is not displayed. According to this configuration, since the reservation number suggestion image HSG may not be displayed, it is possible to increase the impression when it is displayed. In this way, it is possible to visually entertain the players and increase their interest by providing an unprecedented and innovative performance.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 113 and 114, the timer image is displayed at the start of a specific fluctuation, and when the pending number suggestion image HSG is displayed during the specific variation, the pending number suggestion image HSG is displayed. Image HSG disappears together with the timer image. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 111 to 114, the pending number suggestion image HSG is an image that represents content suggesting that the pending number has reached a predetermined number (for example, 3). be. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved by an unprecedented and innovative effect in which a predetermined image that itself represents the number of reservations is suddenly displayed. .
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 112, the pending number suggestion image HSG is not displayed during the variation that is executed next to the specific variation. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by an unprecedented and novel effect in which, by surprise of the player, a predetermined image does not appear even if the number of reservations reaches a predetermined value in the next change. , it is possible to improve interest.
[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 114, the specific variation is executed in the time saving state, and the variation executed next to the specific variation is executed in the normal state. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

[Modified example]
Below, a modification of the number-of-retention image display performance will be shown.
[Modification 1]
The number of reservations for which the reservation number suggestion image HSG is displayed is not limited to three, but can be any number. Note that it is preferable that the number of reservations for which the number of reservations suggestion image HSG is displayed is plural. Further, the number of reservations for which the reservation number suggestion image HSG is displayed may be multiple times. For example, it may be configured to be displayed when the number of reservations is 2 and 4.

[Modification 2]
The content represented by the pending number suggestion image HSG is not limited to the above. For example, it may be "It's an even number now,""It's not there yet," or "It's almost full."

[Modification 3]
The above-mentioned timer image only needs to represent the contents of the timer, such as "10 seconds left" or "3:00." It is not necessary to perform a countdown. For example, even if "100 seconds left" is displayed and then disappears in the first variation, and "10 seconds left" is displayed and then disappears in the next variation, it is called a timer image.

[Modification 4]
The configurations of the pending number-linked image display effects A to D can be combined as appropriate. Further, the specific variation is not a particularly limited variation, and all variations may fall under the "specific variation."

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect E1-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a predetermined image,
A first effect in which the predetermined image is displayed when the number of reservations reaches a predetermined number due to winning during a specific fluctuation;
After the first effect, a second effect in which the predetermined image disappears during the same fluctuation in which the first effect was executed;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect E1-2]
The gaming machine according to claim 1,
In the first effect, the predetermined image is displayed when the number of reservations reaches a predetermined number of 2 or more, and is not displayed before the number of reservations reaches the predetermined number.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect E1-3]
The gaming machine according to claim 1 or claim 2,
If the number of reservations does not reach the predetermined number during the specific fluctuation, the predetermined image is not displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect E1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3,
One of the plurality of types of images is a timer image,
The timer image is displayed at the start of the specific fluctuation, and disappears when the timer value of the timer image reaches a predetermined value,
If the predetermined image is displayed during the specific fluctuation, the predetermined image disappears together with the timer image;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect E1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4,
The predetermined image is an image representing content suggesting that the number of reservations has reached a predetermined number;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect E1-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5,
the predetermined image is not displayed during a variation performed next to the specific variation;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect E1-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 6,
The specific variation is executed during a time saving state, and the variation executed next to the specific variation is executed during a normal state.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The pending number change linked effects A to D will be explained below using FIGS. 115 to 118. This holding number change-linked performance can be executed after a jackpot game or during a fluctuating display of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the ending effect start command and the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and determines that the instruction to execute the effect linked to the change in the number of reservations is included and that the number of reservations is a predetermined number. When a change is made, the corresponding image data is read out from the ROM 103 and the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

[Pending number change linked production A]
FIG. 115 is a diagram for explaining the reservation number change linked effect A. In the pending number change linked production, when the number of pending changes is a "predetermined change" while a "specific production" is being executed, a "predetermined image" will be displayed in the change that starts after the specific production ends. It is a performance that Here, the "specific performance" is a fluctuating display performance of decorative symbols in the normal state, and the "predetermined change" in the number of reservations means that the number of reservations increases by 3 or more during the specific performance, and the "predetermined The term "image" will be explained assuming that it is the expectation level suggestion image KSG. Note that in this embodiment, the "predetermined image" may be the timer image TM1.

In the pending number change linked production A, first, as shown in FIG. 115(A), a variation production of decorative symbols is executed. This fluctuating effect of the decorative pattern falls under the "specific effect" of the claims. Here, whether or not this variation corresponds to a "specific effect" is randomly determined by the image control microcomputer 101. Note that the specific performance may be a variable performance that is executed when the number of fluctuations reaches a predetermined value (for example, the 100th time after a jackpot game), or a change in the gaming state (for example, from a time-saving state to a normal state). It may also be a variation effect that is executed when the state changes. An image indicating whether or not the variable performance corresponds to a specific performance may or may not be displayed on the display screen 7a.

Here, the gaming state is the normal state, and the suspension is the suspension of the first special symbol lottery. During this variable performance (specific performance), as shown in FIG. 115(B), if the number of reservations changes (increases) from 1 to 4 due to winning three times, when the "specific performance" is being executed. This means that the number of reservations has undergone a "predetermined change." Then, after the fixed stop shown in FIG. 115(C), the expectation level suggestion image KSG is always displayed in the next fluctuation as shown in FIG. 115(D). Here, the expectation level suggestion image KSG is described as "chance" and suggests the expectation level of winning in the fluctuation. The next variation shown in FIG. 115(D) corresponds to the "first variation" in the claims. Note that in the previous variation shown in FIGS. 115(A) to 115(B), if the number of reservations has not changed in a predetermined manner, the expectation level suggestion image KSG is not displayed in the next variation.

In the next variation shown in FIG. 115(D), the expectation level suggestion image KSG and timer image TM1 are always displayed at the start of the variation. The timer image TM1 is written as "5 seconds left", and after being displayed, a countdown is started. As shown in FIG. 115(E), the expectation level suggestion image KSG is reduced and moved to the lower right of the display screen 7a at a predetermined timing (for example, 2 seconds after display) after being displayed. When the timer value of the timer image TM1 becomes "0", thereafter, as shown in FIG. 115(F), the display of both the reduced expectation level suggestion image KSG and the timer image TM1 disappear.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 115(G), the timer image TM2 is always displayed again in the same variation. The timer image TM2 is written as "3 seconds left", and after being displayed, a countdown is started. As shown in FIG. 115(H), when the timer value of the timer image TM2 becomes "0", the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped as shown in FIG. 115(I). Further, the timer image TM3 is always displayed in the next variation (the next variation after the specific effect) shown in FIG. 115(J). The next variation shown in FIG. 115(J) corresponds to the "second variation" in the claims. Note that the timer image TM3 may be counting down, or it may simply represent the content of the timer "3 seconds remaining", and it may disappear after a predetermined time has elapsed without counting down and leaving "3 seconds left". Good too. In this case, both are called timer images. After that, it will definitely stop.

[Pending number change linked production B]
FIG. 116 is a diagram for explaining the reservation number change linked effect B. In a performance linked to changes in the number of reservations, when the number of reservations undergoes a "predetermined change" while a "specific performance" is being executed, a "predetermined image" will be displayed in the change that starts after the end of the specific performance. It is a performance that Here, the "specific performance" is a fluctuating display performance of the first special symbol during the normal state, and the "predetermined change" in the number of reservations means that the second special symbol is displayed due to winning of the second special symbol during the specific performance. The explanation will be given assuming that the number of reserved symbols increases from 0 to 1, and that the "predetermined image" is the expectation level suggestion image KSG. Note that in this embodiment, the "predetermined image" may be the timer image TM1.

In the reservation number change linked production B, first, as shown in FIG. 116(A) and FIG. 116(B), after the first special symbol is confirmed and stopped, the reservation icon corresponding to the next first special symbol is displayed as the reservation is extinguished. is shifted and becomes the corresponding pending icon 9C, and the next change is started. This fluctuating effect of the decorative pattern falls under the "specific effect" of the claims. Here, whether or not this variation corresponds to a "specific effect" is randomly determined by the image control microcomputer 101. Note that the specific performance may be a variable performance that is executed when the number of fluctuations reaches a predetermined value (for example, the 100th time after a jackpot game), or a change in the gaming state (for example, from a time-saving state to a normal state). It may also be a variation effect that is executed when the state changes. Whether or not it corresponds to a specific performance can be set as an arbitrary condition. An image indicating whether or not the variable performance corresponds to a specific performance may or may not be displayed on the display screen 7a.

Here, the gaming state is the normal state, and the suspension is the suspension of the first special symbol lottery. During this variable performance (specific performance), as shown in Figure 116(B), when the number of reservations changes (increases) from 0 to 1 due to winning of the second special symbol, the "specific performance" is executed. The number of reservations has undergone a ``predetermined change.'' Then, after the fixed stop shown in FIG. 116(C), the expectation level suggestion image KSG is always displayed in the next variation in which the second special symbol lottery is performed as shown in FIG. 116(D). Here, the expectation level suggestion image KSG is described as "chance" and suggests the expectation level of winning in the fluctuation. The next variation shown in FIG. 116(D) corresponds to the "first variation" in the claims. Note that in the previous variation shown in FIGS. 116(B) to 116(C), if there is no winning of the second special symbol, the expectation level suggestion image KSG is not displayed in the next variation.

In the next variation shown in FIG. 116(D), the expectation level suggestion image KSG and timer image TM1 are always displayed at the start of the variation. The timer image TM1 is written as "5 seconds left", and after being displayed, a countdown is started. As shown in FIG. 116(E), the expectation level suggestion image KSG moves to the lower right of the display screen 7a while being reduced in size at a predetermined timing after being displayed. When the timer value of the timer image TM1 becomes "0", thereafter, as shown in FIG. 116(F), the display of both the reduced expectation level suggestion image KSG and the timer image TM1 disappear.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 116(G), the timer image TM2 is always displayed again in the same variation. The timer image TM2 is written as "3 seconds left", and after being displayed, a countdown is started. As shown in FIG. 116(H), when the timer value of the timer image TM2 becomes "0", the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped as shown in FIG. 116(I). Further, the timer image TM3 is always displayed in the next variation (the next variation after the specific effect) shown in FIG. 116(J). The next variation shown in FIG. 116(J) corresponds to the "second variation" in the claims. Note that the timer image TM3 may be counting down, or it may simply represent the content of the timer "3 seconds left", and it may disappear after a predetermined time has elapsed without counting down and leaving "3 seconds left". Good too. In this case, both are called timer images. After that, it will definitely stop.

[Holding number change linked production C]
FIG. 117 is a diagram for explaining the reservation number change linked effect C. In a performance linked to changes in the number of reservations, when the number of reservations undergoes a "predetermined change" while a "specific performance" is being executed, a "predetermined image" will be displayed in the change that starts after the end of the specific performance. It is a performance that Here, the "specific performance" is a fluctuating display performance of the first special symbol during the time saving state, and the "predetermined change" in the number of reservations means that the second special symbol is displayed due to the winning of the second special symbol during the specific performance. The explanation will be given assuming that the number of reserved symbols increases from 0 to 1, and that the "predetermined image" is the expectation level suggestion image KSG. Note that in this embodiment, the "predetermined image" may be the timer image TM1.

In the pending number change linked production C, first, as shown in FIG. 117(A), it is announced that the time-saving game will start after the jackpot game. Specifically, "Start time saving mode!!" is displayed. Here, the explanation will be given on the assumption that the number of times of time saving is one, and that the normal state is returned to after one second special symbol is drawn. In FIGS. 117(A) and 117(B), a variable performance corresponding to the suspension of the first special symbol obtained by winning a prize before the jackpot game is performed. This fluctuating effect of the decorative pattern falls under the "specific effect" of the claims. That is, here, the variation of the first special symbol during the time saving state corresponds to the "specific performance". During this specific performance, if the second special symbol is won by hitting right, a hold icon 9B is displayed as shown in FIG. 117(B). During this variable performance (specific performance), as shown in Figure 117(B), when the number of reservations changes (increases) from 0 to 1 due to winning of the second special symbol, the "specific performance" is executed. The number of reservations has undergone a ``predetermined change.'' After that, as shown in FIG. 117(C), after the fixed stop, a variable performance of the second special symbol in the time saving state is performed.

In the next variation of the specific performance, as shown in FIG. 117(D), the gaming state is a time saving state, and a variation performance is executed by holding and extinguishing the second special symbol lottery. At this time, as shown in FIG. 117(D), the expectation level suggestion image KSG is always displayed in the next change. Here, the expectation level suggestion image KSG is described as "chance" and suggests the expectation level of winning in the fluctuation. The next variation shown in FIG. 117(D) corresponds to the "first variation" in the claims. Note that in the previous variation shown in FIGS. 117(B) to 117(C), if there is no winning of the second special symbol, the expectation level suggestion image KSG is not displayed in the next variation.

In the next variation shown in FIG. 117(D), the expectation level suggestion image KSG and timer image TM1 are always displayed at the start of the variation. The timer image TM1 is written as "5 seconds left", and after being displayed, a countdown is started. As shown in FIG. 117(E), the expectation level suggestion image KSG moves to the lower right of the display screen 7a while being reduced in size at a predetermined timing after being displayed. When the timer value of the timer image TM1 becomes "0", thereafter, as shown in FIG. 117(F), the display of both the reduced expectation level suggestion image KSG and the timer image TM1 disappear. In FIG. 117(F), the second special symbol is won by right-handed hitting, and the pending icon 9B is newly displayed.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 117(G), the timer image TM2 is always displayed again in the same variation. The timer image TM2 is written as "3 seconds left", and after being displayed, a countdown is started. When the timer value of the timer image TM2 becomes "0", the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 117(H). Thereafter, the gaming state is switched from the time saving state to the normal state, and as shown in FIG. 117(I), "Normal mode start!!" is displayed, and the second special symbol begins to fluctuate in the normal state. Thereafter, in the next variation (the next variation after the specific production) shown in FIG. 117(J), the timer image TM3 is always displayed together with the variation production of the decorative pattern. The next variation shown in FIG. 117(J) corresponds to the "second variation" in the claims. Note that the timer image TM3 may be counting down, or it may simply represent the content of the timer "3 seconds left", and it may disappear after a predetermined time has elapsed without counting down and leaving "3 seconds left". Good too. In this case, both are called timer images. After that, it will definitely stop.

[Pending number change linked production D]
FIG. 118 is a diagram for explaining the reservation number change linked effect D. In the pending number change linked production, when the number of pending changes is a "predetermined change" while a "specific production" is being executed, a "predetermined image" will be displayed in the change that starts after the specific production ends. It is a performance that Here, the "specific performance" is the performance when waiting for the second special symbol to win in the time saving state, and the "predetermined change" in the number of reservations refers to the performance of the second special symbol during the specific performance. The explanation will be given assuming that the number of pending second special symbols increases from 0 to 1 due to winning, and that the "predetermined image" is the expectation level suggestion image KSG. Note that in this embodiment, the "predetermined image" may be the timer image TM1.

In the pending number change linked performance D, first, as shown in FIGS. 118(A) to 118(C), it is announced that the time-saving game will start after the jackpot game. Specifically, "Start time saving mode!!" is displayed. Here, the explanation will be given on the assumption that the number of times of time saving is one, and that the normal state is returned to after one second special symbol is drawn. FIG. 118(A) shows a state in which both the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not held after the jackpot game. Here, the performance when waiting for the winning of the second special symbol in the time saving state after the jackpot game corresponds to the "specific performance" in the claims. That is, here, a state in which no change is made in the time saving state or a display of "Start time saving mode!!" corresponds to the "specific effect". During this specific performance, if the second special symbol is won by hitting right, a hold icon 9B is displayed as shown in FIG. 118(B). While this "Start Time Saving Mode!!" is displayed (specific effect), if the number of reservations changes (increases) from 0 to 1 due to winning of the second special symbol, as shown in Figure 117 (B). , when the "specific effect" is being executed, the number of pending events has undergone a "predetermined change". After the fixed stop, a variable performance of the second special symbol is performed in the time saving state.

In the next variation of the specific performance, as shown in FIG. 118(D), the gaming state is a time saving state, and a variation performance is executed by holding and extinguishing the second special symbol lottery. At this time, as shown in FIG. 118(D), the expectation level suggestion image KSG is always displayed in the next variation of the specific performance. Here, the expectation level suggestion image KSG is described as "chance" and suggests the expectation level of winning in the fluctuation. The next variation shown in FIG. 118(D) corresponds to the "first variation" in the claims. Note that in the previous variation shown in FIGS. 118(B) to 118(C), if there is no winning of the second special symbol, the expectation level suggestion image KSG is not displayed in the next variation.

In the next variation shown in FIG. 118(D), the expectation level suggestion image KSG and timer image TM1 are always displayed at the start of the variation. The timer image TM1 is written as "5 seconds left", and after being displayed, a countdown is started. As shown in FIG. 118(E), the expectation level suggestion image KSG moves to the lower right of the display screen 7a while being reduced in size at a predetermined timing after being displayed. When the timer value of the timer image TM1 becomes "0", thereafter, as shown in FIG. 118(F), the display of both the reduced expectation level suggestion image KSG and the timer image TM1 disappear. In FIG. 118(F), the second special symbol is won by the right hit, and the pending icon 9B is newly displayed.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 118(G), the timer image TM2 is always displayed again in the same variation. The timer image TM2 is written as "3 seconds left", and after being displayed, a countdown is started. When the timer value of the timer image TM2 becomes "0", the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped, as shown in FIG. 118(H). Thereafter, the gaming state is switched from the time saving state to the normal state, and as shown in FIG. 118(I), "Normal mode start!!" is displayed, and the second special symbol begins to fluctuate in the normal state. Thereafter, in the next variation (the next variation after the specific production) shown in FIG. 118(J), the timer image TM3 is always displayed together with the variation production of the decorative pattern. The next variation shown in FIG. 118(J) corresponds to the "second variation" in the claims. Note that the timer image TM3 may be counting down, or it may simply represent the content of the timer "3 seconds remaining", and it may disappear after a predetermined time has elapsed without counting down and leaving "3 seconds left". Good too. In this case, both are called timer images. After that, it will definitely stop.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the performance linked to the change in the number of reservations will be shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 115 to 118, when the number of reservations changes by a predetermined value while a specific effect is being executed, the first A first effect in which a predetermined image (expectation level suggestion image KSG or timer image TM1) is displayed in the variation can be executed. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the predetermined image may be the timer image TM1, as shown in FIGS. 115 to 118. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance in which a timer image is always displayed when the number of reservations changes by a predetermined value while a specific performance is being executed. You can improve your interest.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 115 to 118, the timer image TM1 is displayed at the start of the first fluctuation, and in the first fluctuation, after the first timer image TM1 disappears. , it is possible to execute a second effect in which the second timer image TM2 is displayed during the same fluctuation. With this configuration, it is predetermined in advance that the timer image will always be displayed twice for the same fluctuation, which is an unprecedented and innovative effect that visually entertains the player and increases interest. can be achieved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 115 to 118, in the second variation executed after the first variation, the third effect in which the third timer image TM3 is displayed is executed. can do. With this configuration, it is predetermined in advance that the timer image will always be displayed even when the next change occurs, which is an unprecedented and innovative effect that visually entertains the players and improves their interest. be able to.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 115 to 118, the predetermined image (expectation level suggestion image KSG) is displayed at the start of the first fluctuation, and changes in size during the same fluctuation. According to this configuration, the expectation level suggestion image KSG that is always displayed in the first variation always changes in size, which is a novel and unprecedented effect that visually entertains the player. You can improve your interest.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 117, the specific performance is a variation production of either the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the first variation is the variation production of the first special symbol. Or, the predetermined image is a variation of the other of the second special symbols, and the predetermined image is a variation of the other of the first special symbol or the second special symbol during the variation of one of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. (Here, from 0 to 1), it will be displayed in the other symbol change. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.
[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 117 and 118, the specific effect and the first variation are executed during the time saving state, and the second variation is executed during the normal state. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

[Modified example]
Below, a modified example of the performance linked to the change in the number of reservations will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, the expectation level suggestion image KSG is displayed as the predetermined image, but the predetermined image is not limited to the above. For example, the predetermined image may be a timer image TM1, a character image, or an image showing a place to aim at a game ball.

[Modification 2]
The specific production in FIG. 117 is a variation production of the first special symbol, the first variation is a variation of the second special symbol, and the predetermined image is a variation production of the second special symbol during the variation of the first special symbol. When the number of reservations changes to a predetermined value (from 0 to 1 in this case), it is displayed as a change in the second special symbol. However, in the particular production shown in FIG. 117, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be reversed. That is, the specific production is a variation production of the second special symbol, the first variation is a variation of the first special symbol, and the predetermined image is a variation production of the first special symbol during the variation of the second special symbol. When the number of reservations undergoes a predetermined change (from 0 to 1 here), it may be displayed as a change in the first special symbol.

[Modification 3]
The timer image in the above embodiment has been described as counting down. However, the timer image is not limited to a digital display, and may represent the remaining period until the end point by a needle or an area. Furthermore, the timer image does not necessarily have to be moving as long as it represents a timer. For example, a timer image that is displayed multiple times and whose remaining period until the end point decreases each time it is displayed is also included in the timer image. Furthermore, if the image clearly represents a timer, it is included in the timer image even if the image is not moving.

[Modification 4]
The expectation level suggestion image KSG is moved to the lower right of the display screen 7a while being reduced in size at a predetermined timing after being displayed. However, the expectation level suggestion image KSG may become larger or may not move.

[Modification 5]
The contents of the pending number change linked effects A to D may be combined as appropriate.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect E2-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a predetermined image,
When the number of reservations changes by a predetermined value while a specific effect is being executed, a first effect can be executed in which the predetermined image is displayed in a first variation that starts after the end of the specific effect;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect E2-2]
The gaming machine according to claim 1,
the predetermined image is a first timer image;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect E2-3]
The gaming machine according to claim 2,
the first timer image is displayed at the start of the first fluctuation;
In the first variation, after the first timer image disappears, a second effect can be executed in which a second timer image is displayed during the same variation;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect E2-4]
The gaming machine according to claim 3,
In the second variation executed after the first variation, a third effect in which a third timer image is displayed can be executed;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect E2-5]
The gaming machine according to claim 1,
the predetermined image is displayed at the start of the first fluctuation and changes in size during the same fluctuation;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect E2-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5,
The specific production is a variation production of either the first special symbol or the second special symbol,
The first variation is the other variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol,
The predetermined image is displayed when the other symbol changes when the number of reservations of the first special symbol or the second special symbol changes in a predetermined manner while one of the first special symbol or the second special symbol changes. be done,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect E2-7]
The gaming machine according to claim 4,
The specific performance and the first variation are executed during a time saving state,
The second variation is performed in a normal state.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The pending icon movement change effects A to D will be explained below using FIGS. 119 to 122. This pending icon movement change effect may be executed during the variation effect of the decorative pattern. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the pending icon movement change effect, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image. The image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7.

[Pending icon movement change effect A]
FIG. 119 is a diagram for explaining the pending icon movement change effect A. The pending icon movement change effect is a presentation in which a plurality of pending icons are displayed during a specific variation, and the pending icon corresponding to the specific variation moves after the specific variation starts. In the hold icon movement change effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 119(A), four hold icons 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed while the decorative pattern is changing. The four pending icons 9A are displayed in a line horizontally, each corresponding to each fluctuation after the next fluctuation, and can suggest the expected degree of winning in each fluctuation after the next fluctuation. Here, the pending icon 9A can indicate the level of expectation by color.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 119(B), when the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped, the pending icon 9C disappears. Next, as shown in FIG. 119(C), the next variation is started. The variation shown in FIG. 119(C) corresponds to the "specific variation" in the claims. When the next variation (specific variation) is started, the four pending icons 9A do not move. That is, at the start of a change (specific variation) corresponding to the rightmost hold icon (mesh pattern) among the four hold icons 9A, the hold icon corresponding to the change (specific change) does not move. In other words, the four pending icons 9A are in the same state as when they were changed last time. After a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the four pending icons 9A shift to the right as shown in FIG. 119(D). At this time, the rightmost hold icon (mesh pattern) moves to the area where the hold icon is displayed and becomes the hold icon 9C, and the number of hold icons 9A becomes three.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 119(E), the decorative pattern is finalized and stopped, and the pending icon 9C disappears. Next, as shown in FIG. 119(F), the next variation is started. When the next variation is started, the three pending icons 9A do not move. That is, at the start of a change corresponding to the rightmost hold icon (white) among the three hold icons 9A, the hold icon corresponding to the change does not move. After a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the three pending icons 9A shift to the right as shown in FIG. 119(G). At this time, the rightmost hold icon (white) moves to the area where the hold icon is displayed and becomes the hold icon 9C, and there are now two hold icons 9A.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 119(H), the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped, and the pending icon 9C disappears. Next, as shown in FIG. 119(I), the next variation is started. When the next variation is started, the two pending icons 9A do not move. That is, at the start of a change corresponding to the rightmost hold icon (black) among the two hold icons 9A, the hold icon corresponding to the change does not move. After a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the two pending icons 9A shift to the right as shown in FIG. 119(J). At this time, the rightmost hold icon (black) moves to the area where the hold icon is displayed and becomes the hold icon 9C, leaving only one hold icon 9A.

[Pending icon movement change effect B]
FIG. 120 is a diagram for explaining the pending icon movement change effect B. The pending icon movement change effect is a presentation in which a plurality of pending icons are displayed during a specific variation, and the pending icon corresponding to the specific variation moves after the specific variation starts. In the hold icon movement change effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 120(A), four hold icons 9A are displayed while the decorative pattern is changing. The four pending icons 9A are displayed in a line horizontally, each corresponding to each fluctuation after the next fluctuation, and can suggest the expected degree of winning in each fluctuation after the next fluctuation. Here, the pending icon 9A can indicate the level of expectation by color.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 120(B), the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped. The four pending icons 9A disappear from the display screen 7a before the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped, and are not displayed when the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped. Next, as shown in FIG. 120(C), the next variation is started. The variation shown in FIG. 120(C) corresponds to the "specific variation" in the claims. When the next variation (specific variation) is started, the four pending icons 9A are not displayed. Thereafter, after a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) has passed since the start of the fluctuation, four hold icons 9A are displayed as shown in FIG. 120(D). At this time, the four pending icons 9A are in the same state as they were displayed during the previous change. That is, at the time of the current change (specific change) corresponding to the rightmost hold icon (mesh pattern) among the four hold icons 9A, the hold icon corresponding to the change (specific change) does not move. After a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) has passed since the four hold icons 9A are displayed, the rightmost hold icon (mesh pattern) moves to the right and the display screen Frame out from 7a. The other three pending icons 9A do not move. Thereby, there are three pending icons 9A.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 120(F), the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped. The three pending icons 9A disappear from the display screen 7a before the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped, and are not displayed when the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped. After that, the next variation starts. When the next variation is started, the three pending icons 9A are not displayed. Thereafter, after a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, three pending icons 9A are displayed as shown in FIG. 120(G). At this time, the three pending icons 9A are in the same state as they were displayed during the previous change. That is, at the time of the current change corresponding to the rightmost hold icon (white) among the three hold icons 9A, the hold icon corresponding to the change does not move. Thereafter, the three pending icons 9A disappear from the display screen 7a.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 120(H), the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped. The three pending icons 9A disappear from the display screen 7a before the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped, and are not displayed when the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped. After that, the next variation starts. When the next variation is started, the pending icon 9A is not displayed. Thereafter, after a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) has passed since the start of the fluctuation, two hold icons 9A are displayed as shown in FIG. 120(I). At this time, the number of the two pending icons 9A has decreased by one since the number displayed during the previous change. On the other hand, at the time of the current change corresponding to the rightmost hold icon (black) among the two hold icons 9A, the hold icon corresponding to the change does not move. Thereafter, the two pending icons 9A disappear from the display screen 7a. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 120(J), the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped. The two pending icons 9A disappear from the display screen 7a before the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped, and are not displayed when the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped. After that, the next variation corresponding to the leftmost hold icon 9A (white) is started.

[Pending icon movement change effect C]
FIG. 121 is a diagram for explaining the pending icon movement change effect C. The pending icon movement change effect is a presentation in which a plurality of pending icons are displayed during a specific variation, and the pending icon corresponding to the specific variation moves after the specific variation starts. In the hold icon movement change effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 121(A), four hold icons 9A are displayed while the decorative pattern is changing. The four pending icons 9A are displayed in a row horizontally, each corresponding to each fluctuation after the next fluctuation, and can suggest the expected degree of winning in each fluctuation after the next fluctuation. Here, the pending icon 9A can indicate the level of expectation by color.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 121(B), the character image CHA is displayed, and one of the hold icons 9A (here, the third from the right) changes to hold. Specifically, the color of the hold icon 9A changes from white to black. This suggests that the expectation of winning in the change corresponding to this change in reservation has increased.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 121(C), the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped. The four pending icons 9A disappear from the display screen 7a before the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped, and are not displayed when the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped. Next, as shown in FIG. 121(D), the next variation is started. The variation shown in FIG. 121(D) corresponds to the "specific variation" in the claims. When the next variation (specific variation) is started, the four pending icons 9A are not displayed. Thereafter, after a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) has passed since the start of the fluctuation, four hold icons 9A are displayed as shown in FIG. 121(E). At this time, the four pending icons 9A are in the same state as they were displayed during the previous change. That is, at the time of the current change (specific change) corresponding to the rightmost hold icon (mesh pattern) among the four hold icons 9A, the hold icon corresponding to the change (specific change) does not move. After a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) has passed since the four hold icons 9A are displayed, the rightmost hold icon (mesh pattern) is enlarged and moved to the left, as shown in FIG. 121(F). do. Then, as shown in FIG. 121(G), the enlarged hold icon stops at a position overlapping another hold icon 9C. Thereafter, these pending icons 9A disappear from the display screen 7a.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 121(H), the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped. The hold icon 9A disappears from the display screen 7a before the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped, and is not displayed when the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped. After that, the next variation starts. When the next variation is started, the pending icon 9A is not displayed. Thereafter, after a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) has passed since the start of the fluctuation, three pending icons 9A are displayed as shown in FIG. 121(I). At this time, the three pending icons 9A are in the same state as they were displayed during the previous change. That is, at the time of the current change corresponding to the rightmost hold icon (white) among the three hold icons 9A, the hold icon corresponding to the change does not move. Thereafter, the three pending icons 9A disappear from the display screen 7a.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 121(J), the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped. The pending icon 9A disappears from the display screen 7a before the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped, and is not displayed when the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped. FIG. 121(J) corresponds to FIG. 120(H) of the pending icon movement change effect B, and after this, FIGS. 120(I) and (J) of the pending icon movement change effect B are executed.

[Pending icon movement change effect D]
FIG. 122 is a diagram for explaining the pending icon movement change effect D. The pending icon movement change effect is a presentation in which a plurality of pending icons are displayed during a specific variation, and the pending icon corresponding to the specific variation moves after the specific variation starts. In the hold icon movement change effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 122(A), four hold icons 9A are displayed while the decorative pattern is changing. The four pending icons 9A are displayed in a row horizontally, each corresponding to each fluctuation after the next fluctuation, and can suggest the expected degree of winning in each fluctuation after the next fluctuation. Here, the pending icon 9A can indicate the level of expectation by color. In FIG. 122(A), the pending icon 9A does not yet indicate the level of expectation.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 122(B), the character image CHA is displayed, and two of the pending icons 9A (here, the rightmost and third from the right) change to be held. Specifically, the color of one of the hold icons 9A changes from white to a mesh pattern, and the other changes from white to black. This suggests that the expectation of winning in the change corresponding to this change in reservation has increased.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 122(C), the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped. The four pending icons 9A disappear from the display screen 7a before the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped, and are not displayed when the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped. Next, as shown in FIG. 122(D), the next variation is started. The variation shown in FIG. 122(D) corresponds to the "specific variation" in the claims. When the next variation (specific variation) is started, the four pending icons 9A are not displayed. Thereafter, after a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, four pending icons 9A are displayed as shown in FIG. 122(E). At this time, the four pending icons 9A are in the same state as they were displayed during the previous change. That is, at the time of the current change (specific change) corresponding to the rightmost hold icon (mesh pattern) among the four hold icons 9A, the hold icon corresponding to the change (specific change) does not move. After a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) has passed since the four hold icons 9A are displayed, the rightmost hold icon (mesh pattern) is enlarged and moved to the left, as shown in FIG. 122(F). do. Then, as shown in FIG. 122(G), the enlarged hold icon stops at a position overlapping another hold icon 9C. Thereafter, these pending icons 9A disappear from the display screen 7a.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 122(H), the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped. The pending icon 9A disappears from the display screen 7a before the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped, and is not displayed when the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped. After that, the next variation begins. When the next variation is started, the pending icon 9A is not displayed. Thereafter, after a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds) has passed since the start of the fluctuation, three pending icons 9A are displayed as shown in FIG. 122(I). At this time, the three pending icons 9A are in the same state as they were displayed during the previous change. That is, at the time of the current change corresponding to the rightmost hold icon (white) among the three hold icons 9A, the hold icon corresponding to the change does not move. Thereafter, the three pending icons 9A disappear from the display screen 7a.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 122(J), the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped. The pending icon 9A disappears from the display screen 7a before the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped, and is not displayed when the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped. 122(J) corresponds to FIG. 120(H) of the pending icon movement change effect B, and thereafter, FIGS. 120(I) and (J) of the pending icon movement change effect B are executed.

[Effect example]
An example of the effects of the pending icon movement change effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 119(C) to 119(E), a first effect is executed in which a plurality of predetermined images (four pending icons 9C) are displayed during a specific fluctuation. It is possible, and each of the plurality of predetermined images corresponds to each variation after the specific variation, and it is possible to suggest the expected degree of winning in each variation. The predetermined image corresponding to the variation can perform a second effect of starting a predetermined movement after the specific variation starts. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by the unprecedented and innovative effect of shifting after the start of the fluctuation, and it is possible to improve the player's interest. The same applies to FIGS. 120 to 122.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 119(C), in the first effect, a plurality of predetermined images (four pending icons 9C) are displayed in a line. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by the unprecedented and novel performance of the hold icon that shifts after the start of the fluctuation, and it is possible to improve the player's interest. The same applies to FIGS. 120 to 122.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 119(C), the predetermined image (pending icon 9C) suggests the degree of expectation by color. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by the unprecedented and novel performance of the hold icon that shifts after the start of the fluctuation, and it is possible to improve the player's interest. The same applies to FIGS. 120 to 122.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 119(A), a plurality of predetermined images (four pending icons 9C) are displayed during a fluctuation before a specific fluctuation. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest. The same applies to FIGS. 120 to 122.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 121(F) to 122(G) and 122(F) to 122(G), in the second performance, the predetermined image corresponding to the specific variation is move to a position overlapping the predetermined image. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 119(F), FIG. 120(G), FIG. 121(I), and FIG. 122(I), a plurality of predetermined It is possible to perform a third effect in which predetermined images other than the predetermined image corresponding to a specific variation are displayed among the images. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

[Modified example]
A modified example of the pending icon movement change effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the embodiment described above, it is assumed that four pending icons 9A as predetermined images are displayed in a line at the time of a specific change. However, the reservation icon 9A as a predetermined image does not necessarily have to be configured to be able to display four (4) as long as it is configured to be able to display a plurality (two or more) at the time of a specific change.

[Modification 2]
In the above embodiment, the reservation icon 9A corresponding to the first special symbol is exemplified as a predetermined image that corresponds to each fluctuation after the next fluctuation and suggests the expected degree of winning in each fluctuation after the next fluctuation, The predetermined image is not limited to this. For example, the predetermined image may be the reservation icon 9B corresponding to the second special symbol, or may be another image. That is, the predetermined image can be any image that corresponds to each fluctuation after the next fluctuation and suggests the expected degree of winning in each fluctuation after the next fluctuation.

[Modification 3]
The configurations of the pending icon movement change effects A to D may be combined as appropriate. Furthermore, the specific variation is not a particularly limited variation, and all variations may fall under the "specific variation."

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect E3-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a predetermined image,
It is possible to execute a first effect in which a plurality of the predetermined images are displayed during a specific variation,
Each of the plurality of predetermined images corresponds to each variation after the specific variation, and can suggest the expected degree of winning in each variation,
Among the plurality of predetermined images, the predetermined image corresponding to the specific variation can perform a second effect of starting a predetermined movement after the specific variation starts.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect E3-2]
The gaming machine according to claim 1,
In the first effect, the plurality of predetermined images are displayed in a line;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect E3-3]
The gaming machine according to claim 1 or claim 2,
The predetermined image suggests the level of expectation by color.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect E3-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3,
the plurality of predetermined images are displayed during a variation before the specific variation;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect E3-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4,
In the second effect, the predetermined image corresponding to the specific variation is moved to a position overlapping another predetermined image.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect E3-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5,
A third effect can be executed in which predetermined images other than the predetermined image corresponding to the specific variation among the plurality of predetermined images are displayed during a variation subsequent to the specific variation;
A gaming machine characterized by:

The variable medium and next mode start display effects A to D will be explained below using FIGS. 123 to 126. This fluctuating intermediate mode start display performance can be executed during the fluctuating display of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the variable intermediate mode start display effect, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

[Fluctuating intermediate mode start display effect A]
FIG. 123 is a diagram for explaining the variable intermediate mode start display effect A. During the fluctuation, the next mode start display effect is, during a specific fluctuation, if the special drawing lottery result corresponding to this particular fluctuation (the fluctuation) is a loss, even before the end of this fluctuation (confirmed stop), This is an effect that notifies the start of a mode to be advanced when the special drawing lottery result corresponding to the fluctuation is a loss. Here, "specific variation" refers to a variation in which a progression mode selection effect is executed in which the mode to proceed after the variation is determined (selected) according to the lottery result (win or loss) of the variation. say. Here, the term "mode" refers to a state in which images such as backgrounds, decorative patterns, characters, etc. are displayed in a predetermined manner, or a predetermined effect is executed.

In the fluctuating next mode start display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 123(A), four pending icons 9A and the corresponding pending icon 9C are displayed during the variable display of decorative symbols. The variation shown in FIG. 123(A) corresponds to the "specific variation" in the claims. The gaming state when the variation shown in FIG. 123(A) is being executed is a normal state (non-time saving state), and the first special symbol lottery is being executed. In this variation, if the lottery result is a jackpot, a jackpot game is executed after the variation ends, and then a "success mode" of a time-saving game is entered. On the other hand, if the lottery result is a loss, the game state remains normal and enters a "failure mode." In both success mode and failure mode, the background image switches to a dedicated screen.

After a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 lines) has elapsed after the fluctuation display in FIG. 123(A), the fluctuation display disappears and "Success Mode" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 123(B). The selected mode image MDG is displayed. Furthermore, a button image BTN is displayed below the mode image MDG. When the player operates the performance button 63, a different performance is executed depending on whether the fluctuation is a hit or a loss.

If the change is a failure, in response to the operation of the effect button 63, as shown in FIG. 123(C), a failure mode entry image LMG in which "Failure mode entry" is written is displayed. This notifies you that you have entered failure mode. That is, even before the end of this specific variation (determined stop), the start of the mode to proceed when the lottery result corresponding to this specific variation is a loss is announced. In conjunction with the display of this failure mode entry image LMG, the background image is switched to a predetermined background image. Here, the image switches to a diagonally lined background image. The background image here includes not only a moving image such as a specific character image, but also a single color, a pattern, and the like.

After that, the failure mode entry image LMG disappears, and as shown in FIG. 123(D), the variable display, the four pending icons 9A, and the pending icon 9C are displayed again. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 123(E), the pending icon 9C disappears with the final stop (end of the specific variation). Here, it is fixed and stopped at "567". At this time, since the failure mode has already been entered, the background image, etc. is already in the failure mode, and continues to be in the failure mode. After the hold icon 9A is shifted, the next variation (the next variation after the specific variation) is started as shown in FIG. 123(F). In the next variation, the gaming state is also the normal state (non-time saving state), and the first special symbol lottery is executed. The background image continues to be in failure mode.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 123(G), the pending icon 9C disappears with the final stop. Here, it is fixed and stopped at "721". After the hold icon 9A is shifted, the next variation (the next variation after the specific variation) is started as shown in FIG. 123(H). In the next variation, the gaming state is also the normal state (non-time saving state), and the first special symbol lottery is executed. The background image continues to be in failure mode.

Returning to FIG. 123(B), if the lottery result corresponding to the variation (specific variation) in FIG. 123(A) is a jackpot, the decoration will be displayed as shown in FIG. The pattern is confirmed and stops in a jackpot manner. Here, it is fixed and stopped at "333". After that, a jackpot game is started. After the jackpot game is over, the game state is switched to the time saving state, and as shown in FIG. 123(J), a success mode entry image WMG in which "entering success mode" is written is displayed. This notifies you that you have entered the success mode. At the same time as the success mode entry image WMG is displayed, the background image is switched to a predetermined background image. Here, the image switches to a background image that shows many fine cross patterns. After this, a variable display of the second special symbol lottery is executed.

[Fluctuating intermediate mode start display effect B]
FIG. 124 is a diagram for explaining the variable intermediate mode start display effect B. During the fluctuation, the next mode start display effect is, during a specific fluctuation, if the special drawing lottery result corresponding to this particular fluctuation (the fluctuation) is a loss, even before the end of this fluctuation (confirmed stop), This is an effect that notifies the start of a mode to be advanced when the special drawing lottery result corresponding to the fluctuation is a loss. Here, "specific variation" refers to a variation in which a progression mode selection effect is executed in which the mode to proceed after the variation is determined (selected) according to the lottery result (win or loss) of the variation. say. Here, the term "mode" refers to a state in which images such as backgrounds, decorative patterns, characters, etc. are displayed in a predetermined manner, or a predetermined effect is executed.

In the fluctuating next mode start display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 124(A), four pending icons 9A and the corresponding pending icon 9C are displayed during the variable display of decorative symbols. The variation shown in FIG. 124(A) corresponds to "specific variation" in the claims. The gaming state when the variation shown in FIG. 124(A) is being executed is a normal state (non-time saving state), and the first special symbol lottery is being executed. In this variation, if the lottery result is a jackpot, a jackpot game is executed after the variation ends, and then a "time saving mode" of a time saving game is entered. On the other hand, if the lottery result is a loss, the game enters the "battle mode" while remaining in the normal state. In both time saving mode and battle mode, the background image switches to a dedicated screen.

After a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 lines) has elapsed after the fluctuation display in FIG. 124(A), the fluctuation display disappears and "Time saving mode" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 124(B). The selected mode image MDG is displayed. Furthermore, a button image BTN is displayed below the mode image MDG. When the player operates the performance button 63, a different performance is executed depending on whether the fluctuation is a hit or a loss.

If the change is a loss, a battle mode entry image LMG in which "battle mode entry" is written in text is displayed in response to the operation of the effect button 63, as shown in FIG. 124(C). This notifies you that you have entered battle mode. That is, even before the end of this specific variation (determined stop), the start of the mode to proceed when the lottery result corresponding to this specific variation is a loss is announced. In conjunction with the display of this battle mode entry image LMG, the background image is switched to a predetermined background image. Here, the background image is switched to a diagonal lined background image. The background image here includes not only a moving image such as a specific character image, but also a single color, a pattern, and the like.

After that, the battle mode entry image LMG disappears, and as shown in FIG. 124(D), a movie image of a battle between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB is displayed. In addition, a total of four hold icons 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 124(E), the ally character CRA is defeated, the loss is confirmed and the game stops, and the pending icon 9C disappears. Although the decorative pattern is not displayed, it may be displayed. At this time, since the battle mode has already entered, the background image etc. are already in the battle mode, and this continues. After the hold icon 9A is shifted, the next variation (the next variation after the specific variation) is started as shown in FIG. 124(F). In the next variation, the gaming state is also the normal state (non-time saving state), and the first special symbol lottery is executed. The background image continues to be from Battle Mode.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 124(G), the ally character CRA is defeated, the loss is confirmed and the game stops, and the pending icon 9C disappears. After the hold icon 9A is shifted, the next variation (the next variation after the specific variation) is started as shown in FIG. 124(H). In the next variation, the gaming state is also the normal state (non-time saving state), and the first special symbol lottery is executed. The background image continues to be from Battle Mode.

Returning to FIG. 124(B), if the lottery result corresponding to the variation (specific variation) in FIG. 124(A) is a jackpot, the decoration will be displayed as shown in FIG. The pattern is confirmed and stops in a jackpot manner. Here, it is fixed and stopped at "333". After that, a jackpot game is started. After the jackpot game is over, the game state is switched to the time saving state, and as shown in FIG. 124(J), a time saving mode entry image WMG is displayed in which "entering the time saving mode" is written in text. This notifies you that you have entered the time saving mode. In conjunction with the display of this time-saving mode entry image WMG, the background image is switched to a predetermined background image. Here, the image switches to a background image that shows many fine cross patterns. After this, a variable display of the second special symbol lottery is executed.

[Fluctuating intermediate mode start display effect C]
FIG. 125 is a diagram for explaining the variable intermediate mode start display effect C. During the fluctuation, the next mode start display effect is, during a specific fluctuation, if the special drawing lottery result corresponding to this particular fluctuation (the fluctuation) is a loss, even before the end of this fluctuation (confirmed stop), This is an effect that notifies the start of a mode to be advanced when the special drawing lottery result corresponding to the fluctuation is a loss. Here, "specific variation" refers to a variation in which a progression mode selection effect is executed in which the mode to proceed after the variation is determined (selected) according to the lottery result (win or loss) of the variation. say. Here, the term "mode" refers to a state in which images such as backgrounds, decorative patterns, characters, etc. are displayed in a predetermined manner, or a predetermined effect is executed.

In the fluctuating next mode start display effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 125(A), four pending icons 9B and the corresponding pending icon 9C are displayed during the variable display of decorative symbols. The variation shown in FIG. 125(A) corresponds to the "specific variation" in the claims. The gaming state when the variation shown in FIG. 125(A) is being executed is a time saving state, and the second special symbol lottery is being executed. In this variation, if the lottery result is a jackpot, a jackpot game is executed after the variation ends, and then a "time saving mode" of a time saving game is entered. On the other hand, if the lottery result is a loss, the game enters the normal "battle mode". In both time saving mode and battle mode, the background image switches to a dedicated screen.

After a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 lines) has elapsed after the fluctuation display in FIG. 125(A), the fluctuation display disappears and "Time saving mode" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 125(B). The selected mode image MDG is displayed. Furthermore, a button image BTN is displayed below the mode image MDG. When the player operates the performance button 63, a different performance is executed depending on whether the variation (specific variation) is a hit or a loss.

If the change is a loss, a battle mode entry image LMG in which "battle mode entry" is written in text is displayed in response to the operation of the effect button 63, as shown in FIG. 125(C). This notifies you that you have entered battle mode. That is, even before the end of this specific variation (determined stop), the start of the mode to proceed when the lottery result corresponding to this specific variation is a loss is announced. In conjunction with the display of this battle mode entry image LMG, the background image is switched to a predetermined background image. Here, the image switches to a diagonally lined background image. The background image here includes not only a moving image such as a specific character image, but also a single color, a pattern, and the like.

After that, the battle mode entry image LMG disappears, and as shown in FIG. 125(D), an expectation image KG indicating the expectation of a jackpot after the next change is displayed. Here, at the time of the change (specific change), there are four holds (hold icon 9B) of the second special symbol lottery, so four expectations are shown. The one corresponding to the first reservation to be executed next is "1st round...10%", which suggests that the jackpot probability in the next lottery is 10%. The one corresponding to the second hold held next is "2nd round...15%", which suggests that the probability of winning the jackpot in the next lottery is 15%. The one corresponding to the third reservation is "Third round...18%", and the one corresponding to the fourth reservation is "Fourth round...21%". While this expectation level image KG is being displayed, the specific variation ends and the symbols are fixed and stopped. After the confirmed stop, the gaming state switches from the time saving state to the normal state. Since we are already in battle mode, the background image etc. is already in battle mode, and it continues.

After that, as shown in FIG. 125(E), at the start of the next variation (the next variation after the specific variation), the words "First round begins!" are displayed, and the battle between the friendly character CRA and the enemy character CRB is displayed. A movie image of the process will be displayed. The gaming state is a normal state (non-time saving state). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 125(F), the ally character CRA is defeated and the symbol is determined to be a loss and stops. Although the decorative pattern is not displayed, it may be displayed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 125(G), as the next variation (the next variation after the specific variation) begins, the text "Second round begins!" is displayed, and the friendly character CRA and enemy character A movie image of CRB fighting is displayed. The gaming state is a normal state (non-time saving state). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 125(H), the ally character CRA is defeated and the symbol is determined to be a loss and stops. Although the decorative pattern is not displayed, it may be displayed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 125(I), as the next variation (the next variation after the specific variation) starts, the text "Third round begins!" is displayed, and the friendly character CRA and A movie image in which the enemy character CRB engages in a battle is displayed. The gaming state is a normal state (non-time saving state). Here, as shown in FIG. 125(J), the ally character CRA wins and the symbol is determined to be a jackpot and stops. Although the decorative pattern is not displayed, it may be displayed. The background image continues to be from Battle Mode.

Returning to FIG. 125(B), if the lottery result corresponding to the fluctuation (specific fluctuation) in FIG. 125(A) is a jackpot, the above-mentioned fluctuation intermediate mode start display effect B in FIG. The same effect as in 124(J) is executed.

[Fluctuating intermediate mode start display effect D]
FIG. 126 is a diagram for explaining the variable intermediate mode start display effect D. During the fluctuation, the next mode start display effect is, during a specific fluctuation, if the special drawing lottery result corresponding to this particular fluctuation (the fluctuation) is a loss, even before the end of this fluctuation (confirmed stop), This is an effect that notifies the start of a mode to be advanced when the special drawing lottery result corresponding to the fluctuation is a loss. Here, "specific variation" refers to a variation in which a progression mode selection effect is executed in which the mode to proceed after the variation is determined (selected) according to the lottery result (win or loss) of the variation. say. Here, the term "mode" refers to a state in which images such as backgrounds, decorative patterns, characters, etc. are displayed in a predetermined manner, or a predetermined effect is executed.

In the fluctuating next mode start display effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 126(A), four pending icons 9B and the corresponding pending icon 9C are displayed during the variable display of decorative symbols. The variation shown in FIG. 126(A) corresponds to "specific variation" in the claims. The gaming state when the variation shown in FIG. 126(A) is being executed is a time saving state, and the second special symbol lottery is being executed. In this variation, if the lottery result is a jackpot, a jackpot game is executed after the variation ends, and then a "time saving mode" of a time saving game is entered. On the other hand, if the lottery result is a loss, the game enters the normal "battle mode". In both time saving mode and battle mode, the background image switches to a dedicated screen.

After a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 lines) has elapsed after the fluctuation display in FIG. 126(A), the fluctuation display disappears and "Time saving mode" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 126(B). The selected mode image MDG is displayed. Furthermore, a button image BTN is displayed below the mode image MDG. When the player operates the performance button 63, a different performance is executed depending on whether the variation (specific variation) is a hit or a loss.

If the change is a loss, in response to the operation of the effect button 63, as shown in FIG. 126(C), a battle mode entry image LMG in which "battle mode entry" is written is displayed. This notifies you that you have entered battle mode. That is, even before the end of this specific variation (determined stop), the start of the mode to proceed when the lottery result corresponding to this specific variation is a loss is announced. In conjunction with the display of this battle mode entry image LMG, the background image is switched to a predetermined background image. Here, the background image is switched to a diagonal lined background image. The background image here includes not only a moving image such as a specific character image, but also a single color, a pattern, and the like.

After that, the battle mode entry image LMG disappears, and as shown in FIG. 126(D), an expectation level image KG indicating the level of expectation of a jackpot after the next change and a timer image TM1 are displayed. Here, at the time of the fluctuation (specific fluctuation), there are four suspensions (suspension icons 9B) of the second special symbol lottery, so four expectations are shown in the expectation image KG. The one corresponding to the first hold held next is "1st round...10%", which suggests that the jackpot probability in the next lottery is 10%. The one corresponding to the second hold held next is "2nd round...15%", which suggests that the jackpot probability in the next lottery is 15%. The one corresponding to the third reservation is "Third round...18%", and the one corresponding to the fourth reservation is "Fourth round...21%". When the timer value reaches "0" due to the countdown of the timer image TM1, both the expectation image KG and the timer image TM1 disappear from the screen, and then the symbols are fixed and stopped (the specific fluctuation ends). After the confirmed stop, the gaming state switches from the time saving state to the normal state. Since we are already in battle mode, the background image etc. is already in battle mode, and it continues.

After that, as shown in FIG. 126(E), at the start of the next variation (the next variation after the specific variation), the words "First round begins!" are displayed, and the battle between the friendly character CRA and the enemy character CRB is displayed. A movie image of the process will be displayed. The gaming state is a normal state (non-time saving state). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 126(F), the expectation level image KG is displayed again. Here, four expectations are shown as in the previous change (specific change). After that, as shown in FIG. 126(G), the part "1st round...10%" corresponding to the current change moves to the right and goes out of frame.

After that, as shown in FIG. 126(H), the ally character CRA is defeated and the symbol is determined to be a loss and stops. Although the decorative pattern is not displayed, it may be displayed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 126(I), as the next variation (the next variation after the specific variation) begins, the text "Second round begins!" is displayed, and the friendly character CRA and enemy character A movie image of CRB fighting is displayed. The gaming state is a normal state (non-time saving state). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 126(J), the expectation level image KG is displayed again. Here, unlike the previous change, three levels of expectation are shown, with "1st round...10%" no longer included. Thereafter, the "2nd round...15%" portion corresponding to the current change may move to the right and go out of frame, or may not move.

Returning to FIG. 126(B), if the lottery result corresponding to the fluctuation (specific fluctuation) in FIG. 126(A) is a jackpot, the above-mentioned fluctuation intermediate mode start display effect B in FIG. 124(I) and FIG. The same effect as in 124(J) is executed.

[Effect example]
An example of the effects of the variable intermediate mode start display effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 123(C), if the lottery result corresponding to a particular fluctuation is a loss during a particular fluctuation, even before the end of the fluctuation, the lottery result corresponding to the fluctuation is a loss. A first effect (display of failure mode entry image LMG) can be executed to notify the start of the mode (failure mode) to which the corresponding lottery result is a loss. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest. Moreover, according to this configuration, it is possible to further enhance the sense of unity of the performance spanning multiple variations. The same applies to FIGS. 124 to 126.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 123(B), an operating means image (button image BTN) is displayed before notification in a specific variation. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest. The same applies to FIGS. 124 to 126.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 123(B), in a specific variation, before the notification, an image representing the mode (success mode) to proceed when the lottery result corresponding to the variation is won is displayed. (mode image MDG) is displayed. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest. The same applies to FIGS. 124 to 126.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 125(D), in a specific variation, after notification, a specific image (expected degree image KG) is displayed. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest. The same applies to FIG. 126.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 125, the gaming state (time saving state) at the time of a specific fluctuation and the gaming state (normal state) in the mode in which you proceed when you lose, are different from each other. The gaming state at the time of a specific change is more advantageous for the player. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest. The same applies to FIG. 126.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 125, the gaming state (time saving state) at the time of a specific change and the gaming state (time saving state) in the mode that advances when there is a win are the same gaming state. , are both in a state more advantageous for the player than the gaming state (normal state) in the mode that advances when the player loses. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest. The same applies to FIG. 126.

[Modified example]
Below, a modified example of the variable intermediate mode start display effect will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, the effects that notify the start of the mode to proceed when the lottery result corresponding to the fluctuation is a loss include "entering failure mode" (fluctuation intermediate mode start display production A) and "entering battle mode" (fluctuation It is assumed that images LMG expressed as intermediate mode start display effects B to D) are displayed. However, the content of the image LMG is not limited to these and may be any content. Further, the characters "enter" and "start" are not necessarily required to notify the start of a mode, and only the mode name may be used. Even in this case, the start of the mode can be notified.

[Modification 2]
In the above embodiment, in the area where the decorative pattern is displayed, the decorative pattern may not be displayed or may be displayed with a different size (for example, smaller). If the decorative pattern is made small or not displayed, it is difficult to tell whether the fluctuation is continuing at the start of the mode, and the sense of unity of the performance spanning multiple fluctuations can be further enhanced.

[Modification 3]
The configurations of the variable intermediate mode start display effects A to D may be combined as appropriate. Furthermore, the specific variation is not a particularly limited variation, and all variations may fall under the "specific variation."

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect E4-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
During a specific fluctuation, if the lottery result corresponding to the fluctuation is a loss, the first mode that notifies the start of the mode to proceed when the lottery result corresponding to the fluctuation is a loss, even before the end of the fluctuation. capable of performing
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect E4-2]
The gaming machine according to claim 1 further includes:
Equipped with operation means that can be operated by the player,
One of the plurality of types of images is an operating means image representing the operating means,
In the specific variation, the operating means image is displayed before the notification;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect E4-3]
The gaming machine according to claim 1 or claim 2,
In the specific variation, before the notification, an image representing a mode to be proceeded to when the lottery result corresponding to the variation is won is displayed;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect E4-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3,
In the specific variation, after the notification, a specific image suggesting the expected degree of success of each variation executed after the specific variation is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect E4-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4,
The gaming state at the time of the specific variation and the gaming state in the mode in which the game advances when the game loses are different from each other, and the gaming state at the time of the specific variation is more advantageous for the player.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect E4-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5,
The gaming state at the time of the specific fluctuation and the gaming state in the mode that advances when the win is the same, and both are more advantageous for the player than the gaming state in the mode that advances when the loss occurs. is in a state,
A gaming machine characterized by:

The predetermined image continuous display effects A to D will be explained below using FIGS. 127 to 130. This predetermined image continuous display effect may be executed after a jackpot game or during a variation effect of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the ending effect start command or command variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if an instruction to execute a predetermined image continuous display effect is included, the corresponding image data is stored from the ROM 103. is read out and the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

[Predetermined image continuous display effect A]
FIG. 127 is a diagram for explaining the predetermined image continuous display effect A. The predetermined image continuous display effect is a effect in which a predetermined image is continuously displayed over a plurality of fluctuations, and when a specific change starts after the plurality of fluctuations, the predetermined image disappears. Here, a description will be given assuming that a predetermined image CHA representing a character is displayed as the predetermined image.

In the predetermined image continuous display effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 127(A), the pending icon 9C is displayed during the variable display of decorative symbols. The gaming state when the variation shown in FIG. 127(A) is being executed is a normal state (non-time saving state), and the first special symbol lottery is being executed. As shown in FIG. 127(B), the first special symbol is won during this variation, and one new pending icon 9A is displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 127(C), the first special symbol is further won during this variation, and one new pending icon 9A is displayed, making the total number two. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 127(D), the decorative pattern is finalized and stopped at "567", and the pending icon 9C disappears.

When the next change starts, as shown in FIG. 127(E), the pending icons 9A are shifted to the right one by one, and the oldest pending icon 9A located on the right side is It moves to the hold display area and becomes the hold icon 9C. Further, as shown in FIG. 127(E), a predetermined image CHA representing the character is displayed at the start of this variation. This predetermined image CHA is an image representing a specific object, and here, as an example, it is configured as a character image representing a smiley face. Specific objects are not limited to characters, creatures, and objects, but also include abstract objects such as letters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose meaning is unclear. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist. Whether or not this predetermined image CHA is displayed is randomly determined by the image control microcomputer 101. Note that the predetermined image CHA may be displayed when the number of fluctuations reaches a predetermined value (for example, the 100th time after a jackpot game), or when the gaming state changes (for example, from a time saving state to a normal state). May be displayed at times. The condition for whether or not to display the predetermined image CHA can be any condition.

Naturally, this variation corresponds to the suspension due to winning before the predetermined image CHA is displayed (the suspension icon 9A). Here, the predetermined image CHA is continuously displayed during the fluctuation corresponding to the suspension due to winning before the predetermined image CHA is displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 127(F), the variation is completed, the decorative pattern is finalized and stopped at "789", and the pending icon 9C disappears. The predetermined image CHA is continuously displayed. That is, the predetermined image CHA is displayed at the start of this variation, and continues to be displayed even when it is fixed and stopped.

When the next change is started, as shown in FIG. 127(G), the hold icon 9A moves to the hold display area on the right side and becomes the hold icon 9C. The predetermined image CHA is continuously displayed. This variation also corresponds to the hold (hold icon 9A) due to winning before the predetermined image CHA is displayed. As described above, the predetermined image CHA is continuously displayed during the fluctuation corresponding to the suspension due to winning before the predetermined image CHA is displayed. As shown in FIG. 127(H), during this variation, a new pending icon 9A is displayed due to the winning of the first special symbol. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 127(I), the variation is completed, the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped at "123", and the pending icon 9C disappears. The predetermined image CHA is continuously displayed. That is, the predetermined image CHA is displayed at the start of this variation, and continues to be displayed even when it is fixed and stopped.

As shown in FIG. 127(J), the next variation is further started. This variation falls under the "specific variation" of the claims. When the next change (specific change) is started, the hold icon 9A moves to the hold display area on the right side and becomes the hold icon 9C. The predetermined image CHA disappears at the same time as the start of this variation. This variation (specific variation) is because it corresponds to the suspension due to winning after the predetermined image CHA is displayed (the suspension icon 9A).

[Predetermined image continuous display effect B]
FIG. 128 is a diagram for explaining the predetermined image continuous display effect B. The predetermined image continuous display effect is a effect in which a predetermined image is continuously displayed over a plurality of fluctuations, and when a specific change starts after the plurality of fluctuations, the predetermined image disappears. Here, a description will be given assuming that a predetermined image CHA representing a character is displayed as the predetermined image.

In the predetermined image continuous display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 128(A), the pending icon 9C is displayed during the variable display of decorative symbols. The gaming state when the variation shown in FIG. 128(A) is being executed is a normal state (non-time saving state), and the first special symbol lottery is being executed. As shown in FIG. 128(B), the first special symbol is won during this variation, and one new pending icon 9A is displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 128(C), the first special symbol is further won during this variation, and one new pending icon 9A is displayed, making the total number two. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 128(D), the decorative pattern is finalized and stopped at "567", and the pending icon 9C disappears.

When the next change starts, as shown in FIG. 128(E), the pending icons 9A are shifted to the right one by one, and the oldest pending icon 9A located on the right side is moved to the right. It moves to the hold display area and becomes the hold icon 9C. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 128(E), a predetermined image CHA representing the character is displayed at the start of this variation. This predetermined image CHA is an image representing a specific object, and here, as an example, it is configured as a character image representing a smiley face. Specific objects are not limited to characters, creatures, and objects, but also include abstract objects such as letters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose meaning is unclear. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist. Whether or not this predetermined image CHA is displayed is randomly determined by the image control microcomputer 101. Note that the predetermined image CHA may be displayed when the number of fluctuations reaches a predetermined value (for example, the 100th time after a jackpot game), or when the gaming state changes (for example, from a time saving state to a normal state). May be displayed at times. The condition for whether or not to display the predetermined image CHA can be any condition.

Naturally, this variation corresponds to the suspension due to winning before the predetermined image CHA is displayed (the suspension icon 9A). Here, the predetermined image CHA is continuously displayed during the fluctuation corresponding to the suspension due to winning before the predetermined image CHA is displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 128(F), the variation is completed, the decorative pattern is finalized and stopped at "789", and the pending icon 9C disappears. The predetermined image CHA is continuously displayed. That is, the predetermined image CHA is displayed at the start of this variation, and continues to be displayed even when it is fixed and stopped.

When the next change is started, as shown in FIG. 128(G), the hold icon 9A moves to the hold display area on the right side and becomes the hold icon 9C. The predetermined image CHA is continuously displayed. This variation also corresponds to the hold (hold icon 9A) due to winning before the predetermined image CHA is displayed. As described above, the predetermined image CHA is continuously displayed during the fluctuation corresponding to the suspension due to winning before the predetermined image CHA is displayed. As shown in FIG. 128(H), during this variation, a new pending icon 9B is displayed due to the winning of the second special symbol. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 128(I), the variation is completed, the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped at "123", and the pending icon 9C disappears. The predetermined image CHA is continuously displayed. That is, the predetermined image CHA is displayed at the start of this variation, and continues to be displayed even when it is fixed and stopped.

As shown in FIG. 128(J), the next variation is further started. This variation falls under the "specific variation" of the claims. When the next variation (specific variation) is started, the hold icon 9B moves to the corresponding hold display area on the left side and becomes the corresponding hold icon 9C. The predetermined image CHA disappears at the same time as the start of this variation. This variation (specific variation) is because it corresponds to the suspension due to winning after the predetermined image CHA is displayed (the suspension icon 9B).

[Predetermined image continuous display effect C]
FIG. 129 is a diagram for explaining the predetermined image continuous display effect C. The predetermined image continuous display effect is a effect in which a predetermined image is continuously displayed over a plurality of changes, and when a specific change starts after the plurality of changes, the predetermined image disappears. Here, a description will be given assuming that a predetermined image CHA representing a character is displayed as the predetermined image.

In the predetermined image continuous display effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 129(A), two pending icons 9A and the corresponding pending icon 9C are displayed during the variable display of decorative symbols. The gaming state when the variation shown in FIG. 129(A) is being executed is a normal state (non-time saving state), and the first special symbol lottery is being executed. As shown in FIG. 129(B), the decorative pattern is finalized and stopped at the jackpot roll of "333", and the pending icon 9C disappears.

Next, as shown in FIG. 129(C), a jackpot opening performance is started. Here, a character image "Start jackpot game" is displayed. After that, a jackpot game is executed. When the predetermined jackpot game ends, a jackpot ending effect is executed as shown in FIG. 129(D). Here, a text image of "Jackpot Game Ended" and a predetermined image CHA representing a character are displayed. This predetermined image CHA is an image representing a specific object, and here, as an example, it is configured as a character image representing a smiley face. Specific objects are not limited to characters, creatures, and objects, but also include abstract objects such as letters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose meaning is unclear. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist. When the jackpot game ends, here, the game state is switched to the time saving state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 129(E), variable display of decorative patterns is started. At this time, one hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed. The gaming state when the variation shown in FIG. 129(E) is being executed is a time saving state, and the first special symbol lottery corresponding to the reservation won before the jackpot shown in FIG. 129(B) is executed. The predetermined image CHA is continuously displayed. The predetermined image CHA is continuously displayed during the fluctuation corresponding to the hold that won before the jackpot in FIG. 129(B).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 129(F), the variation is completed, the decorative pattern is finalized and stopped at "789", and the pending icon 9C disappears. The predetermined image CHA is continuously displayed. That is, the predetermined image CHA is displayed before the fluctuation starts, and continues to be displayed even when the fluctuation is fixed and stopped.

When the next change is started, as shown in FIG. 129(G), the hold icon 9A moves to the hold display area on the right side and becomes the hold icon 9C. The predetermined image CHA is continuously displayed. This variation also corresponds to the reservation that was won before the jackpot in FIG. 129(B). As described above, the predetermined image CHA is continuously displayed during the fluctuation corresponding to the suspension due to winning before the jackpot in FIG. 129(B). As shown in FIG. 129(H), during this variation, a new pending icon 9B is displayed due to the winning of the second special symbol. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 129(I), the variation is completed, the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped at "123", and the pending icon 9C disappears. The predetermined image CHA is continuously displayed. That is, the predetermined image CHA is displayed before the start of this fluctuation, and continues to be displayed even when the fluctuation is fixed and stopped.

As shown in FIG. 129(J), the next variation is further started. This variation falls under the "specific variation" of the claims. The gaming state continues to be in a time saving state. When the next variation (specific variation) is started, the hold icon 9B moves to the corresponding hold display area on the left side and becomes the corresponding hold icon 9C. The predetermined image CHA disappears at the same time as the start of this variation. This is because this variation (specific variation) corresponds to the suspension (retention icon 9B) due to winning before the jackpot in FIG. 129(B).

[Predetermined image continuous display effect D]
FIG. 130 is a diagram for explaining the predetermined image continuous display effect D. The predetermined image continuous display effect is a effect in which a predetermined image is continuously displayed over a plurality of changes, and when a specific change starts after the plurality of changes, the predetermined image disappears. Here, a description will be given assuming that a predetermined image CHA representing a character is displayed as the predetermined image.

In the predetermined image continuous display effect D, a variable display of decorative symbols is performed in accordance with the first special symbol lottery in the normal state (non-time-saving state), and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 130(A), the decorative symbol is "333". The game is confirmed and stopped when the jackpot result (form) is reached, and the pending icon 9C disappears.

Next, as shown in FIG. 130(B), a jackpot opening performance is started. Here, a character image "Start jackpot game" is displayed. After that, a jackpot game is executed. When the predetermined jackpot game ends, a jackpot ending effect is executed as shown in FIG. 130(C). Here, a text image of "Jackpot Game Ended" and a predetermined image CHA representing a character are displayed. This predetermined image CHA is an image representing a specific object, and here, as an example, it is configured as a character image representing a smiley face. Specific objects are not limited to characters, creatures, and objects, but also include abstract objects such as letters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose meaning is unclear. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist.

After a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the predetermined image CHA is displayed, the specific image CHB is displayed so as to partially cover the predetermined image CHA. Here, the specific image CHB, like the predetermined image CHA, is an image representing a specific object, and here is configured as a character image representing a smiling face wearing sunglasses. After that, the jackpot game ends, and here the game state is switched to the time saving state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 130(E), variable display of decorative patterns is started. At this time, one hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed. The gaming state when the variation shown in FIG. 130(E) is being executed is a time saving state, and the first special symbol lottery corresponding to the reservation won before the jackpot shown in FIG. 130(A) is executed. The predetermined image CHA and the specific image CHB are continuously displayed. The predetermined image CHA and the specific image CHB are continuously displayed during the fluctuation corresponding to the hold that won before the jackpot in FIG. 130(A).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 130(F), the variation is completed, the decorative pattern is finalized and stopped at "789", and the pending icon 9C disappears. The predetermined image CHA and the specific image CHB are continuously displayed. That is, the predetermined image CHA and the specific image CHB are displayed before the fluctuation starts, and continue to be displayed even when the fluctuation is fixed and stopped.

When the next change is started, as shown in FIG. 130(G), the hold icon 9A moves to the hold display area on the right side and becomes the hold icon 9C. The predetermined image CHA and the specific image CHB are continuously displayed. This variation also corresponds to the reservation that was won before the jackpot in FIG. 130(A). As described above, the predetermined image CHA and the specific image CHB are continuously displayed during the fluctuation corresponding to the suspension due to winning before the jackpot in FIG. 130(A). As shown in FIG. 130(H), during this variation, a new pending icon 9B is displayed due to the winning of the second special symbol. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 130(I), the variation is completed, the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped at "123", and the pending icon 9C disappears. The predetermined image CHA and the specific image CHB are continuously displayed. That is, the predetermined image CHA and the specific image CHB are displayed before the start of the fluctuation, and are continuously displayed even when the fluctuation is fixed and stopped.

As shown in FIG. 130(J), the next variation is further started. This variation falls under the "specific variation" of the claims. The gaming state continues to be in a time saving state. When the next variation (specific variation) is started, the hold icon 9B moves to the corresponding hold display area on the left side and becomes the corresponding hold icon 9C. The predetermined image CHA and the specific image CHB disappear at the same time as the start of this variation. This is because this variation (specific variation) corresponds to the hold (hold icon 9B) due to winning before the jackpot in FIG. 130(A).

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the predetermined image continuous display effect will be shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 127(E) to (I), the first effect is such that the predetermined image CHA is continuously displayed over a plurality of fluctuations, and the first effect is as shown in FIG. 127(J). As shown in , it is possible to perform a second effect in which the predetermined image CHA disappears when a specific change starts after a plurality of changes. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest. The same applies to FIGS. 128 to 130.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 127, the multiple fluctuations are fluctuations corresponding to a plurality of reservations that were won before the predetermined image CHA was displayed, and the specific fluctuations are: This is a fluctuation corresponding to a hold that was won during multiple fluctuations. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest. The same applies to FIGS. 128 to 130.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 129, the multiple fluctuations are executed after the winning game, and the predetermined image CHA is displayed during the winning game, and after the winning game. , is displayed continuously during multiple fluctuations. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest. The same applies to FIG. 130.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 130, after the predetermined image CHA is displayed during the winning game, the specific image CHB is displayed overlapping the predetermined image CHA, and after the winning game, the specific image CHB is displayed multiple times. Continuously displayed in fluctuations. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 129, the multiple variations are variations in either the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the specific variation is the variation in the first special symbol or the second special symbol. This is the other variation of the second special symbol. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and innovative performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest. The same applies to FIG. 130.

[Modified example]
Below, a modification of the predetermined image continuous display effect will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above description, it is assumed that a character image is displayed as the predetermined image CHA. However, the predetermined image CHA may have any content. For example, the predetermined image CHA may be a character image expressing a specific content, an image to alert people not to drop the ball, or a message to alert the player to the game ball entering a specific position. It may also be an image that encourages. Alternatively, it may be a right-handed image.

[Modification 2]
In the predetermined image continuous display effect C, the multiple fluctuations shown in FIGS. 129(E) to (I) are the fluctuations of the first special symbol lottery, and the specific fluctuations shown in FIG. 129(J) are the fluctuations of the second special symbol lottery. It is assumed that this is a variation in the drawing of symbols. However, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be opposite to each other. That is, even if the multiple fluctuations shown in FIGS. 129(E) to (I) are fluctuations in the second special symbol lottery, and the specific fluctuations shown in FIG. 129(J) are fluctuations in the first special symbol lottery. good.

[Modification 3]
The configurations of the predetermined image continuous display effects A to D can be combined as appropriate.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect E5-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a predetermined image,
a first effect in which the predetermined image is continuously displayed over a plurality of fluctuations;
a second effect in which the predetermined image disappears when a specific change starts after the plurality of changes;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect E5-2]
The gaming machine according to claim 1,
The multiple fluctuations are fluctuations corresponding to a plurality of reservations that were won before the predetermined image was displayed,
The specific fluctuation is a fluctuation corresponding to a reservation that was won during the plurality of fluctuations,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect E5-3]
The gaming machine according to claim 2,
The multiple fluctuations are performed after the winning game,
The predetermined image is displayed during the winning game, and is continuously displayed during the plurality of fluctuations after the winning game.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect E5-4]
The gaming machine according to claim 3,
One of the plurality of types of images is a specific image different from the predetermined image,
During the winning game, after the predetermined image is displayed, the specific image is displayed overlapping the predetermined image, and after the winning game, the specific image is continuously displayed during the plurality of fluctuations.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect E5-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4,
The multiple fluctuations are fluctuations of either the first special symbol or the second special symbol,
The specific variation is a variation of the other of the first special symbol or the second special symbol,
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect E5-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5,
The predetermined image is an image that encourages the ball to enter a specific position.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Background image switching effects A to D will be explained below using FIGS. 131 to 134. This background image switching effect may be executed after a jackpot game or during a variation effect of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the ending effect start command or command variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if an instruction to execute a background image switching effect is included, the image control microcomputer 101 reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103. The image is read out and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

[Background image switching effect A]
FIG. 131 is a diagram for explaining background image switching effect A. The background image switching performance is a performance that switches the background image (background display) when the symbol is fixed and stopped, and maintains the display of the switched background image while the pattern is fixed and stopped. In the background image switching effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 131(A), the background image becomes the first background image HG1 while the decorative patterns (8L, 8C, 8R) are being displayed in a variable manner. Four hold icons 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a. The gaming state is a normal state (non-time saving state).

The first background image HG1 includes a predetermined image CHA representing a specific object. Here, the predetermined image CHA is configured as a character image representing a smiley face, for example. Specific objects are not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also include abstract things such as letters, figures, and symbols, as well as single colors, patterns, and conceptual things whose meaning is unclear. A background image is an image displayed on the back side of a decorative pattern, etc., and includes not only a moving image such as a specific character image, but also a single color, a pattern, and the like. In the first background image HG1, the predetermined image CHA may be displayed at the same position without moving, or the displayed position may be changed by movement. It may also disappear or appear. Here, other parts of the predetermined image CHA are expressed in a single color in the first background image HG1, but the first background image HG1 may have diagonal lines or patterns.

When a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the timer image TM1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 131(B). Here, it says "3 seconds left". At this time, the background image remains the first background image HG1. As shown in FIG. 131(C), when the timer value of the timer image TM1 becomes "0", as shown in FIG. 131(D), the fluctuation of the decorative patterns (8L, 8C, 8R) decelerates, Temporarily stop with "789". The term "temporary stop" here refers to a state in which the decorative patterns are displayed side by side in a slightly raised and lowered state.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 131(E), the decorative patterns (8L, 8C, 8R) are fixed and stopped, and the background image is switched from the first background image HG1 to the second background image HG2. In the second background image HG2, diagonal lines are shown across the entire display screen 7a. The second background image HG2 may include an image representing a specific target. Thereafter, the decorative pattern that has been fixed and stopped disappears, and the telop image TRP appears from the right side of the display screen 7a (frames in), as shown in FIG. 131(F). The telop image TRP consists of the words "Soon". As shown in FIGS. 131(G) and (H), the telop image TRP moves from the right side toward the left side and disappears (frames out) from the left side of the display screen 7a. The design is currently fixed and stopped. As shown in FIGS. 131(E) to (H), the display of the second background image HG2 is maintained while the symbol is being determined and stopped.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 131(I), the background image switches from the second background image HG2 to the third background image HG3 at the same time as the start of the next variation. The third background image HG3 includes a specific image CHB representing a specific object. Here, the specific image CHB is configured as a graphic image representing a star shape. Although the other parts of the specific image CHB are expressed in a single color, the third background image HG3 may have diagonal lines or patterns. With the start of the next variation, the decorative patterns (8L, 8C, 8R) are displayed in a variable manner.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 131(J), the character image MLG of "It's Spring" is displayed during the change. The character content of this character image MLG is configured to correspond to the character content of the telop image TRP. Here, the telop image TRP is "It's almost spring" and the character image MLG is "It's spring." Together, they form one sentence: "It's almost spring." The decorative patterns (8L, 8C, 8R) are maintained in variable display.

[Background image switching effect B]
FIG. 132 is a diagram for explaining background image switching effect B. The background image switching performance is a performance that switches the background image (background display) when the symbol is fixed and stopped, and maintains the display of the switched background image while the pattern is fixed and stopped. In background image switching performance B, first, as shown in FIG. 132(A), the background image becomes the first background image HG1 while the decorative patterns (8L, 8C, 8R) are being displayed in a variable manner. Here, symbols (8l, 8c, 8r) are displayed at the upper left of the display screen 7a. Moreover, four hold icons 9A and the hold icon 9C are displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a. The gaming state is in a time saving state.

The first background image HG1 includes a predetermined image CHA representing a specific object. Here, the predetermined image CHA is configured as a character image representing a smiley face, for example. Specific objects are not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also include abstract things such as letters, figures, and symbols, as well as single colors, patterns, and conceptual things whose meaning is unclear. A background image is an image displayed on the back side of a decorative pattern, etc., and includes not only a moving image such as a specific character image but also a single color, a pattern, etc. In the first background image HG1, the predetermined image CHA may be displayed at the same position without moving, or the displayed position may be changed by movement. It may also disappear or appear. Here, other parts of the predetermined image CHA are expressed in a single color in the first background image HG1, but the first background image HG1 may have diagonal lines or patterns.

When a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the timer image TM1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 132(B). Here, it says "3 seconds left". At this time, the background image remains the first background image HG1. As shown in FIG. 132(C), when the timer value of the timer image TM1 becomes "0", as shown in FIG. 132(D), the fluctuation of the decorative patterns (8L, 8C, 8R) decelerates, Temporarily stop with "789". The term "temporary stop" here refers to a state in which the decorative patterns are displayed side by side in a slightly raised and lowered state. The symbols (8l, 8c, 8r) continue to be displayed in a variable manner.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 132(E), the decorative patterns (8L, 8C, 8R) and the patterns (8l, 8c, 8r) are fixed and stopped, and the background image changes from the first background image HG1 to the second background image HG2. Switch to . In the second background image HG2, diagonal lines are shown across the entire display screen 7a. The second background image HG2 may include an image representing a specific target. Thereafter, the decorative symbols (8L, 8C, 8R) that are in the final stop disappear, and the telop image TRP appears from the right side of the display screen 7a (frames in), as shown in FIG. 132(F). The telop image TRP consists of the words "Soon". At this time, the symbols (8l, 8c, 8r) are maintained in a fixed and stopped state. As shown in FIGS. 132(G) and (H), the telop image TRP moves from the right side toward the left side and disappears (frames out) from the left side of the display screen 7a. The symbols (8l, 8c, 8r) are fixed and stopped. The design is currently fixed and stopped. As shown in FIGS. 132(E) to (H), the display of the second background image HG2 is maintained while the symbol is being determined and stopped.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 132(I), the background image switches from the second background image HG2 to the third background image HG3 at the same time as the start of the next variation. The third background image HG3 includes a specific image CHB representing a specific object. Here, the specific image CHB is configured as a graphic image representing a star shape. Although the other parts of the specific image CHB are expressed in a single color, the third background image HG3 may have diagonal lines or patterns. With the start of the next variation, decorative patterns (8L, 8C, 8R) and patterns (8l, 8c, 8r) are displayed in a variable manner.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 132(J), the character image MLG of "It's Spring" is displayed during the change. The character content of this character image MLG is configured to correspond to the character content of the telop image TRP. Here, the telop image TRP is "It's almost spring" and the character image MLG is "It's spring." Together, they form one sentence: "It's almost spring." The decorative patterns (8L, 8C, 8R) and the patterns (8l, 8c, 8r) are maintained in variable display.

[Background image switching effect C]
FIG. 133 is a diagram for explaining background image switching effect C. The background image switching performance is a performance that switches the background image (background display) when the symbol is fixed and stopped, and maintains the display of the switched background image while the pattern is fixed and stopped. In the background image switching effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 133(A), the background image becomes the first background image HG1 while the symbols (8l, 8c, 8r) are being displayed in a variable manner. Here, the gaming state is a time saving state, and the second special symbol lottery is being executed. The decorative patterns (8L, 8C, 8R), the pending icon 9B, and the pending icon 9C are not displayed on the display screen 7a.

The first background image HG1 includes a predetermined image CHA representing a specific object. Here, the predetermined image CHA is configured as a character image representing a smiley face, for example. Specific objects are not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also include abstract things such as letters, figures, and symbols, as well as single colors, patterns, and conceptual things whose meaning is unclear. A background image is an image displayed on the back side of a decorative pattern, etc., and includes not only a moving image such as a specific character image but also a single color, a pattern, etc. In the first background image HG1, the predetermined image CHA may be displayed at the same position without moving, or the displayed position may be changed by movement. It may also disappear or appear. Here, other parts of the predetermined image CHA are expressed in a single color in the first background image HG1, but the first background image HG1 may have diagonal lines or patterns.

When a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the timer image TM1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 133(B). Here, it says "3 seconds left". At this time, the first background image HG1 is continuously displayed. As shown in FIG. 133(C), when the timer value of the timer image TM1 becomes "0", the predetermined image CHA disappears from the first background image HG1, as shown in FIG. 133(D). The symbols (8l, 8c, 8r) continue to be displayed in a variable manner.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 133(E), the symbols (8l, 8c, 8r) are fixed and stopped, and the background image is switched from the first background image HG1 to the second background image HG2. In the second background image HG2, diagonal lines are shown across the entire display screen 7a. The second background image HG2 may include an image representing a specific target. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 133(F), the telop image TRP appears (frames in) from the right side of the display screen 7a. The telop image TRP consists of the words "Soon". At this time, the symbols (8l, 8c, 8r) are maintained in a fixed and stopped state. As shown in FIGS. 133(G) and (H), the telop image TRP moves from the right side toward the left side and disappears (frames out) from the left side of the display screen 7a. The symbols (8l, 8c, 8r) are fixed and stopped. The design is currently fixed and stopped. As shown in FIGS. 133(E) to (H), the display of the second background image HG2 is maintained while the symbol is being determined and stopped.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 133(I), the background image switches from the second background image HG2 to the third background image HG3 at the same time as the start of the next variation. The third background image HG3 includes a specific image CHB representing a specific object. Here, the specific image CHB is configured as a graphic image representing a star shape. Although the other parts of the specific image CHB are expressed in a single color, the third background image HG3 may have diagonal lines or patterns. With the start of the next variation, the symbols (8l, 8c, 8r) are displayed in a variable manner. From this fluctuation, the gaming state is switched to the normal state.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 133(J), the character image MLG of "It's Spring" is displayed during the change. The character content of this character image MLG is configured to correspond to the character content of the telop image TRP. Here, the telop image TRP is "It's almost spring" and the character image MLG is "It's spring." Together, they form one sentence: "It's almost spring." The symbols (8l, 8c, 8r) are maintained in variable display.

[Background image switching effect D]
FIG. 134 is a diagram for explaining background image switching effect D. The background image switching performance is a performance that switches the background image (background display) when the symbol is fixed and stopped, and maintains the display of the switched background image while the pattern is fixed and stopped. In the background image switching effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 134(A), the background image becomes the first background image HG1 during the variable display of the symbols (8l, 8c, 8r). Here, at the lower left of the display screen 7a, a reservation promotion image "Hold your reservation!!" and a reservation number image representing the current number of reservations of the second special symbol "No. of reservations 0" are displayed. The gaming state is a time saving state, and the second special symbol lottery is being executed. The decorative patterns (8L, 8C, 8R), the pending icon 9A, and the pending icon 9C are not displayed.

The first background image HG1 includes a predetermined image CHA representing a specific object. Here, the predetermined image CHA is configured as a character image representing a smiley face, for example. Specific objects are not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also include abstract things such as letters, figures, and symbols, as well as single colors, patterns, and conceptual things whose meaning is unclear. A background image is an image displayed on the back side of a decorative pattern, etc., and includes not only a moving image such as a specific character image but also a single color, a pattern, etc. In the first background image HG1, the predetermined image CHA may be displayed at the same position without moving, or the displayed position may be changed by movement. It may also disappear or appear. Here, other parts of the predetermined image CHA are expressed in a single color in the first background image HG1, but the first background image HG1 may have diagonal lines or patterns.

When a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the timer image TM1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 134(B). Here, it says "3 seconds left". Due to the winning of the second special symbol, the pending number image becomes "pending number 2". As shown in FIG. 134(C), when the timer value of the timer image TM1 reaches "0", the end images of "That's it!!", "First hold...10%", "Second hold...・An image suggesting the expectation level of ``20%'' is displayed. The expectation level suggestion image shows the expectation level of the jackpot for each of these two reservations. Specifically, it shows that the degree of expectation for the next change is 10%, and the degree of expectation for the next change is 20%.

After that, as shown in FIG. 134(D), the predetermined image CHA disappears from the first background image HG1. Then, an image of the words ``It's finally starting'' is displayed. This suggests that the fluctuations corresponding to the two holds will begin soon. The symbols (8l, 8c, 8r) continue to be displayed in a variable manner.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 134(E), the symbols (8l, 8c, 8r) are fixed and stopped, and the background image is switched from the first background image HG1 to the second background image HG2. In the second background image HG2, diagonal lines are shown across the entire display screen 7a. The second background image HG2 may include an image representing a specific target. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 134(F), the telop image TRP appears (frames in) from the right side of the display screen 7a. The telop image TRP consists of the words "Soon". At this time, the symbols (8l, 8c, 8r) are maintained in a fixed and stopped state. As shown in FIGS. 134(G) and (H), the telop image TRP moves from the right side toward the left side and disappears (frames out) from the left side of the display screen 7a. The symbols (8l, 8c, 8r) are fixed and stopped. The design is currently fixed and stopped. As shown in FIGS. 134(E) to (H), the display of the second background image HG2 is maintained while the symbol is being determined and stopped.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 134(I), the background image switches from the second background image HG2 to the third background image HG3 at the same time as the start of the next variation. The third background image HG3 includes a specific image CHB representing a specific object. Here, the specific image CHB is configured as a graphic image representing a star shape. Although the other parts of the specific image CHB are expressed in a single color, the third background image HG3 may have diagonal lines or patterns. With the start of the next variation, the symbols (8l, 8c, 8r) are displayed in a variable manner. From this fluctuation, the gaming state is switched to the normal state.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 134(J), a character image MLG "might win" is displayed during the fluctuation. The character content of this character image MLG is configured to correspond to the character content of the telop image TRP. Here, the telop image TRP is "soon" and the text image MLG is "might be a hit", which together form one sentence "might be a hit soon". The symbols (8l, 8c, 8r) are maintained in variable display.

[Effect example]
Examples of effects of background image switching effects are shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 131(A) to 131(D), the first effect is such that the decorative patterns (8L, 8C, 8R) are varied while the first background image HG1 is displayed. After the first effect, as shown in FIG. 131(E), a second effect is performed in which the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped and the background image is switched from the first background image HG1 to the second background image HG2, and the second effect is performed. After the effect, as shown in FIGS. 131(E) to (H), it is possible to perform a third effect in which the display of the second background image HG2 is maintained while the decoration pattern is fixed and stopped. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest. The same applies to FIGS. 132 to 134.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 131(I), after the third performance, the background image is changed from the second background image HG2 to the third background image HG3 at the start of the next variation of the decorative pattern. A fourth switching effect can be executed. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest. The same applies to FIGS. 132 to 134.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 131(B), in the first effect, the timer image TM1 is displayed while the first background image HG1 is displayed, and the timer value of the timer image TM1 is set to a predetermined value. (Here, 0), the second effect is executed. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest. The same applies to FIGS. 132 to 134.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 131(F) to (H), in the third effect, the subtitle image TRP enters the frame while the display of the second background image HG2 is maintained. A fifth effect of frame-out can be executed. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest. The same applies to FIGS. 132 to 134.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 131(F) to (H), in the third effect, the telop image TRP is played while the display of the second background image HG2 is maintained. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and novel performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest. The same applies to FIGS. 132 to 134.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 131(J), in the fourth effect, the character image MLG is displayed while the third background image HG3 is displayed, and in the third effect, the telop image TRP The characters represented by , and the characters represented by character image MLG in the fourth effect are continuous in content so that when combined, they form one sentence. According to this configuration, it is possible to visually entertain the player with an unprecedented and innovative performance, and it is possible to improve the player's interest. The same applies to FIGS. 132 to 134.

[Modified example]
Below, a modified example of the background image switching effect will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, when the background image switches from the first background image HG1 to the second background image HG2, the entire background image may be switched in an instant, or it may be partially switched gradually. Further, both background images may be displayed in a superimposed manner for a predetermined period.

[Modification 2]
The configurations of background image switching effects A to D can be combined as appropriate.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect E6-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern,
Some of the plurality of types of images are plural types of background images,
a first effect of changing the decorative pattern while displaying a first background image;
After the first performance, a second performance in which the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped and the background image is switched from the first background image to a second background image;
After the second performance, a third performance of maintaining the display of the second background image while the decorative pattern is fixed and stopped;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect E6-2]
The gaming machine according to claim 1,
After the third performance, a fourth performance can be performed in which the background image is switched from the second background image to the third background image at the start of the next variation of the decorative pattern.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect E6-3]
The gaming machine according to claim 1 or claim 2,
One of the plurality of types of images is a timer image,
In the first effect, the timer image is displayed while the first background image is being displayed;
When the timer value of the timer image reaches a predetermined value, the second effect is executed;
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect E6-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3,
One of the plurality of types of images is a predetermined image,
In the third effect, it is possible to execute a fifth effect in which the predetermined image enters the frame and out of the frame while the display of the second background image is maintained.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect E6-5]
The gaming machine according to claim 4,
The predetermined image is a telop image,
In the third effect, the telop image is played while the second background image is maintained.
A gaming machine characterized by:
◇[Aspect E6-6]
The gaming machine according to claim 5 dependent on claim 2,
One of the plurality of types of images is a character image,
In the fourth effect, the character image is displayed while the third background image is displayed,
In the third effect, the characters represented by the telop image and in the fourth effect, the characters represented by the character image are continuous in content so that when combined, they form one sentence. ing,
A gaming machine characterized by:

Image blur effects A to D will be explained below using FIGS. 135 to 138. 135 to 138, various reserved images displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are omitted for ease of viewing the drawings, and decorative patterns displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are also omitted from the drawings. Some items are omitted for the sake of simplicity, and the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 arranged around the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are also omitted for ease of viewing the drawing. There is something that has been done.

This image blurring effect can be executed during the variation effect of the decorative pattern (for example, during the period from the start of the variation to the stop of the variation of the decorative pattern). That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands (for example, a variable effect start command) received from the sub-control board 90, and if an instruction to execute an image blurring effect is included, the corresponding image data is extracted from the ROM 103. is read out and the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition, the lamp control board 107 analyzes various commands (for example, a variable production start command) received from the sub-control board 90, and analyzes the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory of the first movable accessory 14 provided on the game board 2. The position of 14R and the light emission mode may be changed.

Here, image blurring effect A will be explained first, image blurring effect B, image blurring effect C, and image blurring effect D will be explained in order.

[Image blur effect A]
First, image blur effect A will be explained with reference to FIG. 135. FIG. 135 is a diagram for explaining image blur effect A. The image blur effect A is performed during the variation effect of the decorative pattern.

In image blur effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 135(A), a hold icon 9A displayed at a first hold display position 9Ad, which will be described later, moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C. This is an effect performed when the hold icon 9A no longer exists in the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad.

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a left decorative pattern 8L of a stereoscopic image, a middle decorative pattern 8C of a stereoscopic image, and a right decorative pattern 8R of a stereoscopic image are displayed as the reels are rotated from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variable display of decorative patterns (designs: numbers "1" to "9") is started in the display mode. When the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern is started, the decorative pattern that has been stopped and displayed changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed, resulting in a display mode that fluctuates at a high speed. Thereby, the background image placed behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. Immediately before stopping, the decorative pattern decelerates, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed in a stopped state (temporarily stopped and then stopped). In addition, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, it is displayed in a display mode in which it slowly moves slowly in the vertical direction.

Although not shown in the upper right side of the display screen 7a, there is provided a sub-fluctuation area in which small decorative symbols corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed. The small decorative pattern is always in an opaque state, does not become translucent even when it starts to fluctuate, does not disappear from the display screen 7a, and is always clearly in focus. It becomes. When the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R start to be displayed in a variable manner, small-sized objects corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, respectively, are displayed in the sub-variable area. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are all stopped and displayed, and at the same time, all the corresponding small-sized decorative patterns are also stopped and displayed. A state in which one or more of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are the same pattern, temporarily stopped, and displayed, and reach is reached. Even if the corresponding small decorative pattern (for example, the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed), the small decorative pattern corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed. Even if the right decorative pattern 8R and the corresponding small decorative pattern) are all kept in a variable display state. In addition, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed and they are not aligned in the same pattern and are out of alignment, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern Each of the small decorative patterns corresponding to 8C and right decorative pattern 8R may be the same pattern as each of the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, or may be a completely different pattern. good. In addition, if the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and if they are aligned in the same pattern and it is a jackpot, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C , the small decorative patterns corresponding to the right decorative pattern 8R are aligned to the same pattern as the left decorative pattern 8L, the medium decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R.

The pending icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, which are currently being changed as the first special pattern pending, are not displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the corresponding pending display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the hold display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as a first special figure hold. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed at four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), so that a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. The four hold display positions 9Ad are arranged from a position close to the hold display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a: a first hold display position 9Ad, a second hold display position 9Ad, a third hold display position 9Ad, and a fourth hold display position 9Ad. They are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a in order of pending display position 9Ad.

Note that when the hold icon displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the size of the hold icon 9C is the same as that of the hold icon immediately before the movement. It is about 1.5 times the size of the pending icon 9C, and the shape and color of the pending icon 9C indicate to the player the level of expectation for the pending icon 9C. On the other hand, when the hold icon displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad moves to the third hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad moves to the second hold display position 9Ad. , and when the hold icon displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A changes to another shape. The size of the pending icon is the same as the size of the pending icon immediately before the movement.

Here, the white spherical hold icon 9C is displayed at the hold display position 9Cd, and no hold icon is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad. In other words, there is no stock of pending icons that have not been consumed.

In addition, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, which was displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 during the variable display of decorative patterns. In addition to the holding icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure holding based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, the holding icon 9B corresponds to the first special drawing holding based on the entering of the game ball into the first starting port 20. The second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is displayed as a number HMG arranged at the upper left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The numbers HMG are always clearly in focus, regardless of the gaming state of the gaming machine 1. Here, the first special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 is zero and the blue number "0" is on the left, and the second special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is shown on the left. The number of reserved special drawings is zero, and the red numbers "0" are arranged and displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a, spaced apart from each other on the right side.

Here, to briefly explain the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "pending icon"), the difference in shape and color determines the expectation of winning at the time of lottery corresponding to the pending icon. represents the difference between For example, among the four hold icons: a yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon, a black spherical hold icon, a smiling sphere hold icon, and a white spherical hold icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon is the most The expectation of winning is high, the black spherical pending icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling sphere pending icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical pending icon has the lowest expectation of winning. It has become a thing. The smiling sphere pending icon is further set with a high expectation of winning a jackpot in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (rich jackpot)).

In addition, in the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 after the decorative pattern starts changing in FIG. 135(A).

The variable display of the decorative patterns in FIG. 135(A) is started, and as shown in FIG. 135(B), the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed at the pattern (number) (here, it is temporarily stopped at the number "3"). Is displayed). The left decorative pattern 8L displayed in a temporary stop is clearly in focus, and is displayed on the display screen 7a immediately before being displayed in a temporary stop (or when decelerating to display a temporary stop). It is displayed large in the left half of the area. At this time, the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a. In addition, the number HMG (here, "0 0") is displayed following FIG. 135(A).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 135(C), the right decorative pattern 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed as a pattern (number) (here, it is temporarily stopped and displayed as the number "2"). At this time, the right decorative pattern 8R displayed as a temporary stop is clearly in focus, and immediately before being displayed as a temporary stop (or when decelerating to display a temporary stop). It is displayed in the center area of the display screen 7a in the same (or almost the same) size as the left decorative pattern 8L which has already been temporarily stopped and displayed. Since the focus is on the right decorative pattern 8R that is temporarily stopped and displayed, the focus of the left decorative pattern 8L that is already temporarily stopped and displayed is out of focus (so-called "out of focus"). ) has become unclear.

The clearly focused right decorative pattern 8R that is temporarily stopped and displayed is at least a part of the out-of-focus and unclear left decorative pattern 8L that is temporarily stopped and displayed (the left decorative pattern 8L (here, the number " It is displayed overlapping the approximately right side of ``3'').

The number HMG (in this case, “0 0'') continues to be displayed in FIG. 135(B). Further, the state in which the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd have disappeared from the display screen 7a is maintained as in FIG. 135(B).

The blurred and unclear image is created by blur image processing (for example, Gaussian blur is used to blur the image by varying the standard deviation using a Gaussian function). This blurring image processing is performed in real time by the image control microcomputer 101 on a target image (or a sprite configuring the image) or on a target layer among a plurality of layers. In other words, the blurred and unclear image is not stored in the ROM 103 in advance, but the image control microcomputer 101 performs blurring image processing in real time from a focused and clear image (image data) read out from the ROM 103. It has been created by doing. Hereinafter, a blurred and unclear image is created by the image control microcomputer 101 performing blurring image processing in real time.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 135(D), the size of the left decorative pattern 8L temporarily stopped and displayed returns to the size at the time of change and becomes smaller, and becomes clear and in focus. The left decorative pattern 8L starts to move into its own variable display area and is temporarily stopped and displayed again. In addition, the size of the right decorative pattern 8R that is temporarily stopped and displayed returns to the size at the time of fluctuation and becomes smaller, and it becomes clear and in focus (the size of the right decorative pattern 8R and the left decorative pattern 8L). becomes the same size, the right decorative pattern 8R and the left decorative pattern 8L both become clearly in focus), and the right decorative pattern 8R begins to move into its own variable display area. The display will be temporarily stopped again. In addition, the number HMG (here, "0 0") continues to be displayed in FIG. 135(C). Further, the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd reappear on the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 135(E), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are arranged close to the upper side of the display screen 7a in parallel with the upper side and are temporarily stopped and displayed. The left decorative pattern 8L (hereinafter simply referred to as the "upper left decorative pattern 8La". Here, the number "3") is temporarily stopped and displayed within the variable display area of the left decorative pattern 8L on the side, and the upper right of the display screen 7a A right decorative pattern 8R (hereinafter simply referred to as "upper right decorative pattern 8Ra"; here, the number "2") is temporarily stopped and displayed within the variable display area of the right decorative pattern 8R on the side. Further, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are arranged in parallel to the lower side of the display screen 7a and temporarily stopped, and are temporarily stopped and displayed within the variable display area of the left decorative pattern 8L on the lower left side of the display screen 7a. , a left decorative pattern 8L (hereinafter simply referred to as "lower left decorative pattern 8Lb") that is the same as the upper right decorative pattern 8Ra (here, the number "2") is temporarily stopped and displayed, and the display screen 7a is In the variable display area of the right decorative pattern 8R on the lower right side, the right decorative pattern 8R (hereinafter simply referred to as "lower right decorative pattern 8Rb") is the same pattern as the upper left decorative pattern 8La (herein, the number "3"). ) will be temporarily stopped.

As a result, the upward-rightward pattern alignment line L1 connecting the lower left decorative pattern 8Lb and the upper right decorative pattern 8Ra becomes the same pattern (here, the number "2"), forming a first reach, and the upper left A pattern alignment line L2 downward to the right connecting the decorative pattern 8La and the lower right decorative pattern 8Rb becomes the same pattern (here, the number "3") to form a second reach. In other words, a so-called "double reach" is formed by the symbol alignment line rising to the right due to the first reach and the symbol alignment line falling to the right due to the second reach. Note that the medium decorative pattern 8C is still changing at high speed in a semi-transparent state within its own changing display area. In addition, a number HMG (here, "0 0") continues to be displayed in FIG. 135(D). Furthermore, the state in which the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd are displayed on the display screen 7a continues to be maintained as in FIG. 135(D).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 135(F), the variation speed of the medium decorative pattern 8C is reduced within its own variation display area, and the variation display continues by changing from the translucent state to the opaque state again. The medium decorative symbol 8C (in this case, the number "1") is displayed variably at a low speed in a display mode in which the reels are rotated from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. In the medium decorative pattern 8C, the number "9" preceding the number "1" is displayed fluctuating at a low speed in a display mode in which the reels are rotated from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, starting from the bottom of the number "9". While the reels disappear toward the bottom of the display screen 7a, the number "2" following this number "1" is displayed in a display mode in which the reels rotate from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a at low speed. The lower part of the number "2" is displayed in a variable manner and appears from the upper side of the display screen 7a. Note that the medium decorative pattern 8C is displayed in a variable manner on the back side of the pending icon 9C, the four pending display positions 9Ad, and the pending display position 9Cd, so even if the medium decorative pattern 8C is displayed in a variable manner, the pending icon 9C , the four pending display positions 9Ad and the corresponding pending display position 9Cd are covered with the medium decorative pattern 8C so that visibility is not obstructed.

The number HMG (in this case, “0 0'') continues to be displayed in FIG. 135(E). Further, the state in which the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd are displayed on the display screen 7a continues to be maintained as in FIG. 135(E).

As shown in FIG. 135(G), the medium decorative symbol 8C has a number "2" following the number "1" in its own variable display area, and the reels rotate from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. The lower left decorative symbol 8Lb, the middle decorative symbol 8c, and the upper right decorative symbol are displayed in a low-speed variable manner in a display mode that temporarily stops at the center of the display screen 7a, and is displayed on the upper right symbol alignment line by the first reach. Symbols with the same 8Ra (here, the number "2") are lined up. In addition, the number HMG (here, "0 0") continues to be displayed in FIG. 135(F). Further, the state in which the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd are displayed on the display screen 7a continues to be maintained as in FIG. 135(F).

As shown in FIG. 135(H), the upper left decorative pattern 8La and the lower right decorative pattern 8Rb on the downward rightward pattern alignment line due to the second reach are out of focus and blurred (so-called , "out of focus"). In addition, the number HMG (here, "0 0") continues to be displayed in FIG. 135(G). Further, the state in which the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd are displayed on the display screen 7a continues to be maintained as in FIG. 135(G).

A jackpot is achieved by aligning the same lower left decorative symbol 8Lb, middle decorative symbol 8c, and upper right decorative symbol 8Ra on the upward-rightward symbol alignment line due to the first reach (here, the number "2"). As shown in 135(I), the size of each of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8c, and right decorative pattern 8R is increased so that the center point of the left side of the display screen 7a and the center point of the left side of the display screen 7a are increased. They are stopped and displayed lined up in a straight line (center line in the left-right direction) connecting the midpoint of the right side, the fluctuating display ends, and then a jackpot game (jackpot performance) is started.

The number HMG (in this case, “0 0'') continues to be displayed in FIG. 135(H). Furthermore, the state in which the four pending display positions 9Ad and the corresponding pending display positions 9Cd are displayed on the display screen 7a is maintained as in FIG. 135(H). Moreover, with the end of the variable display, the hold icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

The size of the middle decorative pattern 8C in FIGS. 135(F) and (G) is the same as the size at the time of variation (for example, the size of the left decorative pattern 8L and right decorative pattern 8R in FIG. 135(D)). Therefore, it is larger than the sizes of the upper left decorative pattern 8La, the lower left decorative pattern 8Lb, the upper right decorative pattern 8Ra, and the lower right decorative pattern 8Rb. In addition, the sizes of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R in FIG. 135(I) are the normal size (for example, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R in FIG. 135(D) 135(B), (C), and the right decorative pattern in FIG. 135(C).

In this way, in image blur effect A, the right decorative pattern 8R is a clear image that is in focus, and the image that is unclear and out of focus (an unclear image that is out of focus). Since it is possible to realize an expression that gives a sense of depth to the arrangement of decorative patterns by using a certain left decorative pattern 8L, the player can be visually entertained and the interest can be improved.

In addition, as the performance progresses, the order of the images that the player wants the player to focus on (in other words, first the left decorative pattern 8L, then the right decorative pattern 8R, and so on) is determined. It can contribute to conveying the creator's thoughts)) to the players.

In addition, in image blur effect A, for example, the right decorative pattern 8R is a clear image that is in focus, and the image that is unclear (out of focus) is that of the right decorative pattern 8R. 135(A) to FIG. 135(I), the number HMG corresponds to the number HMG of the gaming machine 1. Regardless of the condition, it is always in focus and clear. As a result, the player can grasp the first special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21. It can be made easier.

[Image blur effect B]
Next, image blur effect B will be explained with reference to FIG. 136. FIG. 136 is a diagram for explaining image blur effect B. The image blur effect B is performed during the variation effect of the decorative pattern.

In image blur effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 136(A), the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, which will be described later, moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C. This is an effect performed when the hold icon 9A no longer exists in the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad.

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a left decorative pattern 8L of a stereoscopic image, a middle decorative pattern 8C of a stereoscopic image, and a right decorative pattern 8R of a stereoscopic image are displayed as the reels are rotated from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variable display of decorative patterns (designs: numbers "1" to "9") is started in the display mode. When the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern is started, the decorative pattern that has been stopped and displayed changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed, resulting in a display mode that fluctuates at a high speed. Thereby, the background image placed behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. Immediately before stopping, the decorative pattern decelerates, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed in a stopped state (temporarily stopped and then stopped). In addition, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, it is displayed in a display mode in which it slowly moves slowly in the vertical direction.

Although not shown in the upper right side of the display screen 7a, there is provided a sub-fluctuation area in which small decorative symbols corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed. The small decorative pattern is always in an opaque state, does not become translucent even when it starts to fluctuate, does not disappear from the display screen 7a, and is always clearly in focus. It becomes. When the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R start to be displayed in a variable manner, small-sized objects corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, respectively, are displayed in the sub-variable area. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are all stopped and displayed, and at the same time, all the corresponding small-sized decorative patterns are also stopped and displayed. A state in which one or more of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are the same pattern, temporarily stopped, and displayed, and reach is reached. Even if the corresponding small decorative pattern (for example, the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed), the small decorative pattern corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed. Even if the right decorative pattern 8R and the corresponding small decorative pattern) are all kept in a variable display state. In addition, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed and they are not aligned in the same pattern and are out of alignment, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern Each small decorative pattern corresponding to 8C and right decorative pattern 8R may be the same pattern as each of the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, or may be a completely different pattern. good. In addition, if the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and if they are aligned in the same pattern and it is a jackpot, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C , the small decorative patterns corresponding to the right decorative pattern 8R are aligned to the same pattern as the left decorative pattern 8L, the medium decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R.

The pending icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, which are currently being changed as the first special pattern pending, are not displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the corresponding pending display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the hold display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as a first special figure hold. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed at four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), so that a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. The four hold display positions 9Ad are arranged from a position close to the hold display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a: a first hold display position 9Ad, a second hold display position 9Ad, a third hold display position 9Ad, and a fourth hold display position 9Ad. They are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a in order of pending display position 9Ad.

Note that when the hold icon displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the size of the hold icon 9C is the same as that of the hold icon immediately before the movement. It is about 1.5 times the size of the pending icon 9C, and the shape and color of the pending icon 9C indicate to the player the level of expectation for the pending icon 9C. On the other hand, when the hold icon displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad moves to the third hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad moves to the second hold display position 9Ad. , and when the hold icon displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A changes to another shape. The size of the pending icon is the same as the size of the pending icon immediately before the movement.

Here, the white spherical hold icon 9C is displayed at the hold display position 9Cd, and no hold icon is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad. In other words, there is no stock of pending icons that have not been consumed.

In addition, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, which was displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 during the variable display of decorative patterns. In addition to the holding icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure holding based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, there is also a holding icon 9B corresponding to the first special drawing holding based on the entering of the game ball into the first starting port 20. The second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is displayed as a number HMG arranged on the upper left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The numbers HMG are always clearly in focus, regardless of the gaming state of the gaming machine 1. Here, the first special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 is zero and the blue number "0" is on the left, and the second special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is shown on the left. The number of reserved special drawings is zero, and the red numbers "0" are arranged and displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a, spaced apart from each other on the right side.

Here, to briefly explain the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "pending icon"), the difference in shape and color determines the expectation of winning at the time of drawing corresponding to the pending icon. represents the difference between For example, among the four hold icons: a yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon, a black spherical hold icon, a smiling sphere hold icon, and a white spherical hold icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon is the most The expectation of winning is high, the black spherical pending icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling spherical pending icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical pending icon has the lowest expectation of winning. It has become a thing. The smiling sphere pending icon is further set with a high expectation of winning a jackpot in the following order: blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (strong jackpot)).

In addition, in the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 after the decorative pattern starts changing in FIG. 136(A).

The variable display of the decorative symbols in FIG. 136(A) is started, and as shown in FIG. 136(B), a production button imitating the production button 63 is pressed to prompt the player to operate (press) the production button 63. The image BTN is placed in the center of the display screen 7a and displayed in a predetermined light emitting manner (in this case, blinking white). The English word "PUSH" is engraved in the part of the production button image corresponding to the pressing operation surface of the production button 63. This effect button image BTN is clear and in focus, and is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a. At this time, the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a. In addition, the number HMG (here, "0 0") is displayed following FIG. 136(A).

In addition, the "predetermined lighting mode" may be based on the expectation of a jackpot (variable performance start command), for example, white flashing → blue flashing → green flashing → red flashing → gold flashing (yellow flashing) → seven-color flashing (rainbow flashing). The expectation level of winning the jackpot is set high in the order of blinking (high chance of jackpot).

Next, as shown in FIG. 136(C), a sword image KG imitating the sword member 64 is placed in the center of the display screen 7a and displayed in a predetermined position in order to prompt the player to operate (push) the sword member 64. It is displayed in a light emission mode (in this case, white blinking). At this time, the already displayed performance button image BTN is moved from the center of the display screen 7a to the left side, and the sword image KG is clearly in focus and is placed in the center area of the display screen 7a. Is displayed. Since the sword image KG is in focus, the already displayed production button image BTN is out of focus and becomes blurred (so-called "out of focus") and unclear. There is.

The sword image KG, which is clearly in focus, is displayed superimposed on the front side of at least a part of the out-of-focus and unclear performance button image BTN (the right side of the performance button image BTN).

The number HMG (in this case, 0 0'') continues to be displayed in FIG. 136(B). Further, the state in which the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a is maintained as in FIG. 136(B).

Note that the out-of-focus and unclear production button image BTN is a still image, and is displayed in a predetermined lighting mode (in the video, it is blinking, so in the still image, it is either lit or turned off). state). Further, when the performance button image BTN is moved from the center to the left side of the display screen 7a, the size of the performance button image BTN does not change.

The blurred and unclear image is created by blur image processing (for example, Gaussian blur is used to blur the image by varying the standard deviation using a Gaussian function). This blurring image processing is performed in real time by the image control microcomputer 101 on a target image (or a sprite configuring the image) or on a target layer among a plurality of layers. In other words, the blurred and unclear image is not stored in the ROM 103 in advance, but the image control microcomputer 101 performs blurring image processing in real time from a focused and clear image (image data) read out from the ROM 103. It has been created by doing. Hereinafter, a blurred and unclear image is created by the image control microcomputer 101 performing blurring image processing in real time.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 136(D), the production button image BTN displayed in an out-of-focus state changes (or changes while changing) into a clearly focused image on the display screen. It is moved from the left side of screen 7a to the center again, and is placed at the center of display screen 7a and displayed in a predetermined light emitting manner. At this time, the already displayed sword image KG is moved from the center of the display screen 7a to the right side and displayed, and the production button image BTN is clearly in focus and is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. displayed in the area. Since the production button image BTN is in focus, the sword image KG that is already displayed is out of focus and becomes blurry (so-called "out of focus"). There is.

The clearly focused performance button image BTN is displayed in a state overlapping with at least a part of the out-of-focus and unclear sword image KG (the left side of the guard of the sword image KG).

The number HMG (in this case, “0 0'') continues to be displayed in FIG. 136(C). Further, the state in which the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a is maintained as in FIG. 136(C).

Note that the out-of-focus sword image KG is a still image, and is displayed in a predetermined lighting mode (in the video, it is blinking, so in the still image, it is either lit or turned off). ). Moreover, when the sword image KG is moved from the center of the display screen 7a to the right side, the size of the sword image KG does not change.

The predetermined light emission mode of the performance button image BTN in FIG. 136(D) may be the same as the predetermined light emission mode of the production button image BTN in FIG. 136(B), or may be set to one with high expectation of becoming a jackpot. It may be changed (for example, from white blinking to blue blinking).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 136(E), the sword image KG displayed in an out-of-focus state changes (or continues to change) into a clearly focused image on the display screen 7a. is moved from the right side to the center again, and is placed in the center of the display screen 7a and displayed in a predetermined light emitting manner. At this time, the already displayed production button image BTN is moved from the center of the display screen 7a to the right side and is displayed, and the sword image KG is clearly in focus and is displayed at the center of the display screen 7a. displayed in the area. Since the sword image KG is in focus, the already displayed production button image BTN is out of focus and becomes blurred (so-called "out of focus") and unclear. There is.

The sword image KG, which is clearly in focus, is displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the out-of-focus and unclear performance button image BTN (the left side of the performance button image BTN).

The number HMG (in this case, “0 0'') continues to be displayed in FIG. 136(D). Further, the state in which the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd have disappeared from the display screen 7a is maintained as in FIG. 136(D).

Note that the out-of-focus and unclear production button image BTN is a still image, and is displayed in a predetermined lighting mode (in the video, it is blinking, so in the still image, it is either lit or turned off). state). Furthermore, when the performance button image BTN is moved from the center of the display screen 7a to the right side, the size of the sword image KG remains unchanged.

The predetermined light emission mode of the production button image BTN in FIG. 136(E) may be the same as the predetermined light emission mode of the production button image BTN in FIG. 136(D), or may be set to one with high expectation of becoming a jackpot. It may be changed (for example, from blinking blue to blinking green).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 136(F), the production button image BTN displayed in an out-of-focus state changes (or changes while changing) into a clearly focused image on the display screen. It is moved from the right side to the left side of 7a without changing its size, and is displayed in a predetermined light emitting manner. Further, the sword image KG, which is clearly displayed in focus, is moved from the center of the display screen 7a to the right side without changing its size, and is displayed in a predetermined light emitting manner. At this time, the number HMG (here "0 0") is displayed continuously in FIG. 136(E). Furthermore, the state in which the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a is maintained as in FIG. 136(E).

Note that the predetermined light emission mode of the performance button image BTN in FIG. 136(F) may be the same as the predetermined light emission mode of the production button image BTN in FIG. 136(E), and the expectation level of a jackpot is high. It may be changed to something different (for example, from blinking green to blinking red). Further, the predetermined light emitting mode of the sword image KG in FIG. 136(F) may be the same as the predetermined light emitting mode of the sword image KG in FIG. 136(E), or the predetermined light emitting mode of the sword image KG in FIG. It may be changed (for example, from blinking green to blinking red).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 136(G), the production button image BTN that is clearly displayed in focus is moved from the left side of the display screen 7a to the center again without changing its size. and is displayed in a predetermined light emitting manner. In the performance button image BTN, a downward arrow image that prompts the player to operate (press) the performance button 63 is displayed in a manner that moves slightly in the vertical direction so as to overlap with the upper part of the front surface thereof, and overlap with the lower part of the front face of the performance button image BTN. A timer bar TB indicating the valid period (for example, 3 seconds) for accepting the operation of the production button 63 is displayed. Further, above the performance button image BTN, a message MG saying "Press!!" is displayed to urge the user to operate (press) the performance button 63. At this time, the sword image KG that is clearly displayed in focus disappears from the display screen 7a. In addition, the number HMG (here, "0 0") continues to be displayed in FIG. 136(F). Furthermore, the state in which the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a is maintained as in FIG. 136(F).

Note that the predetermined light emission mode of the production button image BTN in FIG. 136(G) may be the same as the predetermined light emission mode of the production button image BTN in FIG. 136(F), and the expectation level of a jackpot is high. It may be changed to something different (for example, from blinking red to blinking gold (blinking yellow)).

When the player operates (presses) the production button 63, or when the operation reception valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the production button 63 has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 136(H), the left decorative pattern 8L, middle The decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed in line with a line (center line in the left-right direction) connecting the midpoint of the left side and the midpoint of the right side of the display screen 7a in their respective variable display areas, The variable display ends. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "1", the middle decorative pattern is stopped and displayed with the number "2", and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed with the number "3", resulting in a miss.

Even if the variable display ends, the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special chart reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are respectively performed. The numbers HMG (here, "0 0") shown in FIG. 136(G) are displayed continuously. Furthermore, when the variable display ends, the four hold display positions 9Ad and the hold display position 9Cd reappear on the display screen 7a, but the hold icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a as the change display ends.

On the other hand, following FIG. 136(F), as shown in FIG. 136(I), the sword image KG displayed in a clear and focused state moves from the right side of the display screen 7a to the center again. It is moved without changing its size and is displayed in a predetermined light emitting manner. On the front left side of the sword image KG, a downward arrow image that prompts the player to operate (push) the sword member 64 is displayed in a manner that moves little by little in the vertical direction, and overlaps with the lower front surface of the sword image KG. A timer bar TB indicating a valid period for accepting operation of the sword member 64 (for example, 3 seconds) is displayed. Further, a message MG "Push!!" urging the user to operate (push) the sword member 64 is displayed so as to overlap the upper front surface of the sword image KG. At this time, the effect button image BTN, which is displayed in a clear and focused state, disappears from the display screen 7a. In addition, the number HMG (here, "0 0") continues to be displayed in FIG. 136(F). Furthermore, the state in which the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a is maintained as in FIG. 136(F).

Note that the predetermined light emitting mode of the sword image KG in FIG. 136(I) may be the same as the predetermined light emitting mode of the sword image KG in FIG. 136(F), or the predetermined light emitting mode of the sword image KG in FIG. It may be changed (for example, from red flashing to gold flashing (yellow flashing) or seven-color flashing (rainbow flashing (high probability of winning)).

When the player operates (presses down) the sword member 64, or when the valid period for accepting the operation of the sword member 64 (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 136(J), the left decorative pattern 8L, middle The decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed in line with a line (center line in the left-right direction) connecting the midpoint of the left side and the midpoint of the right side of the display screen 7a in their respective variable display areas, The variable display ends. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed at the number "1", the middle decorative pattern is stopped and displayed at the number "1", and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed at the number "1", so that the same pattern can be displayed. The game is stopped and displayed, resulting in a jackpot, and then a jackpot game (jackpot performance) is started.

Even if the variable display ends, the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special chart reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are respectively performed. The indicated numbers HMG (here, "0 0") are displayed continuously in FIG. 136(I). Furthermore, even when the variable display ends, the state in which the four pending display positions 9Ad and the corresponding pending display positions 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a continues to be maintained as shown in FIG. 136(I). Note that the pending icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a as the variable display ends.

Note that when the performance button image BTN in FIG. 136(G) is selected and displayed from the state in which the performance button image BTN and the sword image KG are displayed in FIG. 136(F), and the sword image in FIG. 136(I) KG may be selected and displayed, and compared to the case where the production button image BTN of FIG. 136(G) is selected and displayed, the sword image KG of FIG. 136(I) may be selected and displayed. The probability of occurrence of a jackpot game (jackpot performance) is higher when

In this way, in image blurring effect B, there are clear, in-focus images such as the effect button image BTN and sword image KG, and out-of-focus, unclear images (out-of-focus, unclear images). It is possible to create an expression that gives a sense of depth to the arrangement of the production button image BTN and the sword image KG, which are (images), and the production button image BTN and the sword image KG, which are images that are similar to the production button image BTN and the sword image KG. It is possible to improve the interest of the player.

In addition, as the performance progresses, the images that the player wants to focus on (in other words, first, focus on the performance button image BTN, the sword image KG, the performance button image BTN, and then the sword image KG in this order and have the player look at them) This can contribute to conveying to the player the desired order of images (the intention of the creator of the effect).

In addition, in image blur effect B, for example, the effect button image BTN or sword image KG, which is a clear image that is in focus, and the unclear image that is out of focus (unclear image, which is out of focus) 136(A) to 136(A) to 136(A) to 136(A). In 136(J), the numbers HMG are always clearly in focus, regardless of the gaming state of the gaming machine 1. As a result, the player can grasp the first special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21. It can be made easier.

[Image blur effect C]
Next, image blur effect C will be explained with reference to FIG. 137. FIG. 137 is a diagram for explaining image blurring effect C. The image blur effect C is selected from among a plurality of types of reach effects when a reach is formed during a variation effect of decorative symbols.

In the image blur effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 137(A), the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, which will be described later, moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C. This is an effect performed when the hold icon 9A no longer exists in the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad.

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a left decorative pattern 8L of a stereoscopic image, a middle decorative pattern 8C of a stereoscopic image, and a right decorative pattern 8R of a stereoscopic image are displayed as the reels are rotated from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variable display of decorative patterns (designs: numbers "1" to "9") is started in the display mode. When the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern is started, the decorative pattern that has been stopped and displayed changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed, resulting in a display mode that fluctuates at a high speed. Thereby, the background image placed behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. Immediately before stopping, the decorative pattern decelerates, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed in a stopped state (temporarily stopped and then stopped). In addition, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, it is displayed in a display mode in which it slowly moves slowly in the vertical direction.

Here, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same pattern (number) (temporarily stopped at the number "1" here), and the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed in a variable manner to form a reach. ing.

Although not shown in the upper right side of the display screen 7a, there is provided a sub-fluctuation area in which small decorative symbols corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed. The small decorative pattern is always in an opaque state, does not become translucent even when it starts to fluctuate, does not disappear from the display screen 7a, and is always clearly in focus. It becomes. When the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R start to be displayed in a variable manner, small-sized objects corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, respectively, are displayed in the sub-variable area. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are all stopped and displayed, and at the same time, all the corresponding small-sized decorative patterns are also stopped and displayed. A state in which one or more of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are the same pattern, temporarily stopped, and displayed, and reach is reached. Even if the corresponding small decorative pattern (for example, the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed), the small decorative pattern corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed. Even if the right decorative pattern 8R and the corresponding small decorative pattern) are all kept in a variable display state. In addition, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed and they are not aligned in the same pattern and are out of alignment, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern Each small decorative pattern corresponding to 8C and right decorative pattern 8R may be the same pattern as each of the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, or may be a completely different pattern. good. In addition, if the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and if they are aligned in the same pattern and it is a jackpot, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C , the small decorative patterns corresponding to the right decorative pattern 8R are aligned to the same pattern as the left decorative pattern 8L, the medium decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R.

The pending icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, which are currently being changed as the first special pattern pending, are not displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the corresponding pending display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the hold display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as a first special figure hold. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed at four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), so that a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. The four hold display positions 9Ad are arranged from a position close to the hold display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a: a first hold display position 9Ad, a second hold display position 9Ad, a third hold display position 9Ad, and a fourth hold display position 9Ad. They are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a in order of pending display position 9Ad.

Note that when the hold icon displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the size of the hold icon 9C is the same as that of the hold icon immediately before the movement. It is about 1.5 times the size of the pending icon 9C, and the shape and color of the pending icon 9C indicate to the player the level of expectation for the pending icon 9C. On the other hand, when the hold icon displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad moves to the third hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad moves to the second hold display position 9Ad. , and when the hold icon displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A changes to another shape. The size of the pending icon is the same as the size of the pending icon immediately before the movement.

Here, the white spherical hold icon 9C is displayed at the hold display position 9Cd, and no hold icon is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad. In other words, there is no stock of pending icons that have not been consumed.

In addition, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, which was displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 during the variable display of decorative patterns. In addition to the holding icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure holding based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, the holding icon 9B corresponds to the first special drawing holding based on the entering of the game ball into the first starting port 20. The second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is displayed as a number HMG arranged at the upper left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The numbers HMG are always clearly in focus, regardless of the gaming state of the gaming machine 1. Here, the first special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 is zero and the blue number "0" is on the left, and the second special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is shown on the left. The number of reserved special drawings is zero, and the red numbers "0" are arranged and displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a, spaced apart from each other on the right side.

Here, to briefly explain the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "pending icon"), the difference in shape and color determines the expectation of winning at the time of lottery corresponding to the pending icon. represents the difference between For example, among the four hold icons: a yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon, a black spherical hold icon, a smiling sphere hold icon, and a white spherical hold icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon is the most The expectation of winning is high, the black spherical pending icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling sphere pending icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical pending icon has the lowest expectation of winning. It has become a thing. The smiling sphere pending icon is further set with a high expectation of winning a jackpot in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (rich jackpot)).

In addition, in the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 after the decorative pattern starts changing in FIG. 137(A).

When a reach is formed in FIG. 137(A), as shown in FIG. 137(B), a performance button image BTN imitating the performance button 63 is created to prompt the player to operate (press) the performance button 63. is placed in the center of the display screen 7a and displayed in a predetermined light emitting manner (in this case, blinking white). The English word "PUSH" is engraved in the part of the production button image corresponding to the pressing operation surface of the production button 63. This effect button image BTN is clear and in focus, and is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a. In the performance button image BTN, a downward arrow image that prompts the player to operate (press) the performance button 63 is displayed in a manner that moves slightly in the vertical direction so as to overlap with the upper part of the front surface thereof, and overlap with the lower part of the front face of the performance button image BTN. A timer bar TB indicating the valid period (for example, 3 seconds) for accepting the operation of the production button 63 is displayed. At this time, the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a. In addition, the number HMG (here, "0 0") is displayed following FIG. 137(A).

In addition, the "predetermined lighting mode" may be based on the expectation of a jackpot (variable performance start command), for example, white flashing → blue flashing → green flashing → red flashing → gold flashing (yellow flashing) → seven-color flashing (rainbow flashing) The expectation level of winning the jackpot is set high in the order of blinking (high chance of jackpot).

When the player operates (presses) the production button 63, or when the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the production button 63 has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 137(C), almost the right side of the display screen 7a The upper body of the character CRA holding a sword is placed and displayed in the entire area. This character CRA is clearly in focus and is displayed in a large size over almost the entire right side area of the display screen 7a. At this time, the effect button image BTN and the timer bar TB, which were displayed clearly in focus, disappear from the display screen 7a. In addition, the number HMG (here, "0 0") continues to be displayed in FIG. 137(B). Further, the state in which the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a is maintained as in FIG. 137(B). Note that the character CRA may be a still image or a moving image.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 137(D), in order to prompt the player to operate (press) the performance button 63, a performance button image BTN imitating the performance button 63 is placed again at the center of the display screen 7a. is displayed in a predetermined lighting manner. The English word "PUSH" is engraved in the part of the production button image corresponding to the pressing operation surface of the production button 63. At this time, the effect button image BTN is placed in front of the already displayed character CRA and is clearly in focus, and is displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a (Fig. 137(B) ). Since the focus is on the production button image BTN, the character CRA that is already displayed is out of focus and becomes blurry (so-called "out of focus"). .

The clearly focused production button image BTN is displayed overlapping at least a portion of the out-of-focus and unclear character CRA (the right shoulder, right arm, and sword part of the character CRA). There is.

The number HMG (in this case, “0 0'') continues to be displayed in FIG. 137(C). Further, the state in which the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a is maintained as in FIG. 137(C).

The blurred and unclear image is created by blur image processing (for example, Gaussian blur is used to blur the image by varying the standard deviation using a Gaussian function). This blurring image processing is performed in real time by the image control microcomputer 101 on a target image (or a sprite configuring the image) or on a target layer among a plurality of layers. In other words, the blurred and unclear image is not stored in the ROM 103 in advance, but the image control microcomputer 101 performs blurring image processing in real time from a focused and clear image (image data) read out from the ROM 103. It has been created by doing. Hereinafter, a blurred and unclear image is created by the image control microcomputer 101 performing blurring image processing in real time.

In the performance button image BTN, a downward arrow image that prompts the player to operate (press) the performance button 63 is displayed in a manner that moves slightly in the vertical direction so as to overlap with the upper part of the front surface thereof, and overlap with the lower part of the front face of the performance button image BTN. A timer bar TB indicating the valid period (for example, 3 seconds) for accepting the operation of the production button 63 is displayed. Note that the out-of-focus and unclear character CRA is a still image. Further, the predetermined light emission mode of the production button image BTN in FIG. 137(D) may be the same as the predetermined light emission mode of the production button image BTN in FIG. 137(B), and the expectation level of a jackpot is high. The light may be changed to something different (for example, from white blinking to blue blinking or gold blinking (yellow blinking)).

When the player operates (presses) the production button 63, or when the operation reception valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the production button 63 has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 137(E), approximately the center of the display screen 7a. The upper body of character CRB holding a sword is displayed facing and approaching character CRA. This character CRB is clearly in focus and is displayed in a large size over almost the entire left side area of the display screen 7a. At this time, the effect button image BTN and the timer bar TB, which were displayed clearly in focus, disappear from the display screen 7a. Also, since the character CRB is in focus, the character CRA that is already displayed remains out of focus and becomes blurry (so-called "out of focus"). There is.

The clearly focused character CRB is displayed overlapping at least a portion of the out-of-focus and unclear character CRA (the right shoulder, right chest, right arm, and sword part of the character CRA). ing.

The number HMG (in this case, “0 0'') continues to be displayed in FIG. 137(D). Further, the state in which the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display positions 9Cd have disappeared from the display screen 7a is maintained as in FIG. 137(D). Note that the character CRB may be a still image or a moving image.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 137(F), the character CRA, which was displayed in an out-of-focus and unclear state, changes to a clearly focused character, and the character CRA is displayed over almost the entire right side area of the display screen 7a. A clearly focused character CRA is displayed, and a clearly focused character CRB is displayed in almost the entire left area of the display screen 7a (that is, the character CRB is not the same as the character CRA). (It is displayed moved from approximately the center of the display screen 7a to the left in order to provide space). At this time, the number HMG (here "0 0") is displayed continuously in FIG. 137(E). Further, the state in which the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a is maintained as in FIG. 137(E).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 137(G), a vertically written image message MG "Battle Start" is displayed in an area extending from the center to the top of the display screen 7a. This vertically written image message MG is clearly in focus, and the two characters CRA and CRB that are already displayed are out of focus and blurry (so-called "out of focus"). ”) has become unclear.

The message MG, which is a vertically written image that is clearly in focus and says "Battle Begins", is displayed overlapping at least a part of the out-of-focus and unclear character CRA (the sword part of the character CRA). It is also displayed in a state where it overlaps with at least a part of the out-of-focus and unclear character CRB (the right shoulder and the sword part of the character CRB).

The number HMG (in this case, “0 0'') continues to be displayed in FIG. 137(F). Furthermore, the state in which the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a is maintained as in FIG. 137(F).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 137(H), the two characters CRA and CRB, which were displayed in an out-of-focus state, are changed to a clearly focused one and displayed on the display screen 7a, and An action performance (battle performance) by the characters CRA and CRB is developed (started). At this time, the number HMG (here "0 0") is displayed continuously in FIG. 137(G). Further, the state in which the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a is maintained as in FIG. 137(G).

In the action performance (battle performance), an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB appear. After this, a battle takes place between the friendly character CRA and the enemy character CRB, and when the friendly character CRA finally defeats the enemy character CRB, it becomes a jackpot.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 137(I), an enlarged motion blur in which the alphabet V approaches from the center of the display screen 7a toward the front is displayed. The enlarged motion blur of the remaining alphabetic letter V is also created to be unclear due to a shift in its focus (so-called "out of focus"). This out-of-focus, unclear image is created using magnified motion blur image processing, which spreads from the center to the target image (or the sprites that make up the image) or to the target layer of multiple layers. The blurring becomes stronger from the center toward the outer periphery as the distance increases from the center. In other words, the blurred and unclear image is not stored in the ROM 103 in advance, but the image control microcomputer 101 performs blurring image processing in real time from a focused and clear image (image data) read out from the ROM 103. It has been created by doing.

When a player looks at the image of the letter V that has been processed with this enlarged motion blur image processing, it is possible to give the player the impression that the player is moving towards the image of the letter V, and also to move toward the center of the image of the letter V. It is possible to get a sense of the speed of progress, and it is possible to suggest that the friendly character CRA will soon defeat the enemy character CRB. At this time, the number HMG (here "0 0") is displayed continuously in FIG. 137(H). Further, the state in which the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a is maintained as in FIG. 137(H).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 137 (J), an action performance (battle performance) is developed (started), and at the end of the action performance (battle performance), here, a performance announcing the victory of the ally character CRA is performed. Friendly character CRA is displayed in the center, and a message MG saying "Victory" is placed and displayed to the left of ally character CRA. In addition, if a performance is performed to announce the victory of the enemy character CRB at the end of the action performance (battle performance), the enemy character CRB will be displayed in the center and the message MG "defeat" will be displayed to the left of the enemy character CRB. placed and displayed.

The number HMG (in this case, “0 0'') continues to be displayed in FIG. 137(I). Further, the state in which the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd have disappeared from the display screen 7a is maintained as in FIG. 137(I).

Thereafter, although not shown, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are all the same (in this case, the number "1") and are stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a, and when the variable display ends, A jackpot game (jackpot performance) in which a jackpot is achieved and a profit is given to the player will be played. Even if the variable display ends, the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special chart reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are respectively performed. The indicated numbers HMG (here, "0 0") are displayed continuously in FIG. 137(J). Furthermore, even when the variable display ends, the state in which the four pending display positions 9Ad and the corresponding pending display positions 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a continues to be maintained as shown in FIG. 137(J). Note that the pending icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a upon completion of the variable display.

On the other hand, on the display screen 7a, the left decorative pattern 8L is the number "1," the middle decorative pattern 8C is the number "2," and the right decorative pattern 8R is the number "1," which are the same designs (here, the number "1"). ) are not aligned and are stopped and displayed, and when the fluctuating display ends, the deviation is determined and displayed. When the variable display ends, the four pending display positions 9Ad and the corresponding pending display position 9Cd reappear on the display screen 7a, but the pending icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a as the variable display ends.

In this way, in image blur effect C, the character CRA and effect button image BTN, which are clear images that are in focus, and the unclear images that are out of focus (out-of-focus, unclear images) It is possible to realize expressions that give a sense of depth to the arrangement of the character CRB, which is an image), and the two characters CRA and CRB, as well as the arrangement of the character CRA and the production button image BTN. You can entertain yourself and improve your interest.

Also, as the performance progresses, you want the player to focus on the images (in other words, you want the player to focus on the performance button image BTN, character CRA, performance button image BTN, and character CRB in that order first). This can contribute to conveying the order of images (the thoughts of the production creator) to the player.

In addition, in the image blur effect C, for example, the character CRA or the effect button image BTN, which is a clear image that is in focus, and the unclear image that is out of focus (out of focus, unclear image) 137(A) to 137(A). In FIG. 137(J), the numbers HMG are always clearly in focus, regardless of the gaming state of the gaming machine 1. As a result, the player can grasp the first special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21. It can be made easier.

[Image blur effect D]
Next, image blur effect D will be explained with reference to FIG. 138. FIG. 138 is a diagram for explaining image blur effect D. The image blur effect D is selected from among a plurality of types of reach effects when a reach is formed during a variation effect of decorative symbols.

In the image blur effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 138(A), the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, which will be described later, moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C. This is an effect performed when the hold icon 9A no longer exists in the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad.

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a left decorative pattern 8L of a stereoscopic image, a middle decorative pattern 8C of a stereoscopic image, and a right decorative pattern 8R of a stereoscopic image are displayed as the reels are rotated from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variable display of decorative patterns (designs: numbers "1" to "9") is started in the display mode. When the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern is started, the decorative pattern that has been stopped and displayed changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed, resulting in a display mode that fluctuates at a high speed. Thereby, the background image placed behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. Immediately before stopping, the decorative pattern decelerates, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed in a stopped state (temporarily stopped and then stopped). In addition, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, it is displayed in a display mode in which it slowly moves slowly in the vertical direction.

Here, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same pattern (number) (temporarily stopped at the number "1" here), and the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed in a variable manner to form a reach. ing.

Although not shown in the upper right side of the display screen 7a, there is provided a sub-fluctuation area in which small decorative symbols corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed. The small decorative pattern is always in an opaque state, does not become translucent even when it starts to fluctuate, does not disappear from the display screen 7a, and is always clearly in focus. It becomes. When the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R start to be displayed in a variable manner, small-sized objects corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, respectively, are displayed in the sub-variable area. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are all stopped and displayed, and at the same time, all the corresponding small-sized decorative patterns are also stopped and displayed. A state in which one or more of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are the same pattern, temporarily stopped, and displayed, and reach is reached. Even if the corresponding small decorative pattern (for example, the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed), the small decorative pattern corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed. Even if the right decorative pattern 8R and the corresponding small decorative pattern) are all kept in a variable display state. In addition, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed and they are not aligned in the same pattern and are out of alignment, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern Each small decorative pattern corresponding to 8C and right decorative pattern 8R may be the same pattern as each of the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, or may be a completely different pattern. good. In addition, if the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and if they are aligned in the same pattern and it is a jackpot, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C , the small decorative patterns corresponding to the right decorative pattern 8R are aligned to the same pattern as the left decorative pattern 8L, the medium decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R.

The pending icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, which are currently being changed as the first special pattern pending, are not displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the corresponding pending display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the hold display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as a first special figure hold. In this hold display area, hold icons can be displayed at four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), so that a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. The four hold display positions 9Ad are arranged from a position close to the hold display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a: a first hold display position 9Ad, a second hold display position 9Ad, a third hold display position 9Ad, and a fourth hold display position 9Ad. They are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a in order of pending display position 9Ad.

Note that when the hold icon displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the size of the hold icon 9C is the same as that of the hold icon immediately before the movement. It is about 1.5 times the size of the pending icon 9C, and the shape and color of the pending icon 9C indicate to the player the level of expectation for the pending icon 9C. On the other hand, when the hold icon displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad moves to the third hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad moves to the second hold display position 9Ad. , and when the hold icon displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A changes to another shape. The size of the pending icon is the same as the size of the pending icon immediately before the movement.

Here, the white spherical hold icon 9C is displayed at the hold display position 9Cd, and no hold icon is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad. In other words, there is no stock of pending icons that have not been consumed.

In addition, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, which was displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 during the variable display of decorative patterns. In addition to the holding icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure holding based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, the holding icon 9B corresponds to the first special drawing holding based on the entering of the game ball into the first starting port 20. The second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is displayed as a number HMG arranged at the upper left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The numbers HMG are always clearly in focus, regardless of the gaming state of the gaming machine 1. Here, the first special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 is zero and the blue number "0" is on the left, and the second special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is shown on the left. The number of reserved special drawings is zero, and the red numbers "0" are arranged and displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a, spaced apart from each other on the right side.

Here, to briefly explain the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "pending icon"), the difference in shape and color determines the expectation of winning at the time of lottery corresponding to the pending icon. represents the difference between For example, among the four hold icons: a yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon, a black spherical hold icon, a smiling sphere hold icon, and a white spherical hold icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon is the most The expectation of winning is high, the black spherical pending icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling sphere pending icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical pending icon has the lowest expectation of winning. It has become a thing. The smiling sphere pending icon is further set with a high expectation of winning a jackpot in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (rich jackpot)).

In addition, in the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 after the decorative pattern starts changing in FIG. 138(A).

When a reach is formed in FIG. 138(A), the upper body of the character CRA holding a sword is displayed arranged almost over the entire right side area of the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 138(B). This character CRA is clearly in focus and is displayed in a large size over almost the entire right side area of the display screen 7a. At this time, the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a. In addition, the number HMG (here, "0 0") is displayed following FIG. 138(A). Note that the character CRA may be a still image or a moving image.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 138(C), the upper body of the character CRB holding a sword is displayed in the approximate center of the display screen 7a, facing and approaching the character CRA. This character CRB is clearly in focus and is displayed in a large size over almost the entire left side area of the display screen 7a. At this time, since the character CRB is in focus, the character CRA that is already displayed becomes out of focus and becomes blurry (so-called "out of focus"). There is.

The clearly focused character CRB is displayed overlapping at least a portion of the out-of-focus and unclear character CRA (the right shoulder, right chest, right arm, and sword part of the character CRA). ing.

The number HMG (in this case, “0 0'') continues to be displayed in FIG. 138(B). Further, the state in which the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a is maintained as in FIG. 138(B).

Note that the clearly focused character CRB may be a still image or a moving image. Furthermore, the out-of-focus and unclear character CRA is a still image.

The blurred and unclear image is created by blur image processing (for example, Gaussian blur is used to blur the image by varying the standard deviation using a Gaussian function). This blurring image processing is performed in real time by the image control microcomputer 101 on a target image (or a sprite configuring the image) or on a target layer among a plurality of layers. In other words, the blurred and unclear image is not stored in the ROM 103 in advance, but the image control microcomputer 101 performs blurring image processing in real time from a focused and clear image (image data) read out from the ROM 103. It has been created by doing. Hereinafter, a blurred and unclear image is created by the image control microcomputer 101 performing blurring image processing in real time.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 138(D), the character CRB is displayed moving from approximately the center of the display screen 7a to the left in order to maintain a distance with the character CRA, and is also displayed in an out-of-focus state. The character CRA changes into a clearly focused object, and almost the entire bodies of the two characters CRA and CRB are displayed on the display screen 7a, and an action production (battle production) by the two characters CRA and CRB develops ( started). At this time, the number HMG (here , "0 0") is displayed continuously from FIG. 137(C). Further, the state in which the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a is maintained as in FIG. 137(C).

In the action performance (battle performance), an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB appear. After this, a battle takes place between the friendly character CRA and the enemy character CRB, and when the friendly character CRA finally defeats the enemy character CRB, it becomes a jackpot.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 138(E), a message MG is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a saying, "It's a jackpot with a win for your ally character!!". At this time, the number HMG (here "0 0") is displayed continuously in FIG. 138(D). Further, the state in which the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a is maintained as in FIG. 138(D).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 138(F), the initial stage of action performance (battle performance) is performed. At the beginning of the action performance (battle performance), the enemy character CRB has the upper hand, and a performance is performed in which the ally character CRA is cornered to the right. At this time, the number HMG (here "0 0") is displayed continuously in FIG. 138(E). Further, the state in which the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd have disappeared from the display screen 7a is maintained as in FIG. 138(E).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 138(G), in the middle stage of the action performance (battle performance), the ally character CRA becomes dominant and the enemy character CRB is cornered to the left. At this time, the number HMG (here "0 0") is displayed continuously in FIG. 138(F). Further, the state in which the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a is maintained as in FIG. 138(F).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 138(H), the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R each move toward the advanced position at the front (front) center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (close to each other). At the front (front) central position (advance position (deployed position)) of the display screen 7a, half of the annular decorative part attached to the tip side of the left movable accessory 14L and The left side decorative part and the right side decorative part, which is half of the ring-shaped decorative part attached to the tip side of the right side movable accessory 14R, are combined, and the left side decoration part of the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory are combined. One decorative member (combined accessory) having an annular shape with the right side decorative portion of 14R is formed.

When the left decorative part of the left movable accessory 14L and the right decorative part of the right movable accessory 14R are combined to form a combined accessory having an annular shape, the area formed within the annular shape is a circular area ( (hereinafter referred to as "circular area") 14D. An ally character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular area 14D. At this time, the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R have a predetermined light emission mode (for example, a white light emission mode), so that the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R have a white light emission mode. At the same time, the alphabet "V" appears from the front of the left side movable accessory 14L and from the front of the right side movable accessory 14R, and an effect suggesting victory for the ally character CRA is performed. Note that when the enemy character CRB is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular area 14D, the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R emit light in a predetermined manner (for example, Due to the fact that the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R have a red light emission mode that is different from the white light emission mode (for example, a red light emission mode), the alphabet "V" does not appear. , no performance is performed that suggests victory for the ally character CRA.

A light guide plate (not shown) is provided on the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R, and the English letter "V" is formed on this light guide plate, and the outer periphery excluding the front and back surfaces of the light guide plate is When the plurality of first decorative LEDs (LEDs capable of emitting light in a single color or in multiple colors) arranged in a surrounding manner emit light (e.g., white), the light incident from around the light guide plate illuminates the letter "V" formed on the light guide plate. '', the letter ``V'' appears due to the diffused reflection. In addition, the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R include a plurality of second decorative LEDs (LEDs capable of emitting a single color or multicolor ) emits light (for example, red), it passes through the light guide plate and is emitted toward the front of the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R, but the alphabet "V" does not appear.

Subsequently, the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R move away from each other in the direction in which the left side movable accessory 14L displays an image from the advanced position at the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. At the same time as the display screen 7a of the device 7 retreats (moves) toward the left side retreat position (home position), the right movable accessory 14R moves the image from the forward position at the front (front) center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It retreats (moves) toward the retreat position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a of the display device 7.

The number HMG (in this case, “0 0'') continues to be displayed in FIG. 138(G). Furthermore, the state in which the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd have disappeared from the display screen 7a is maintained as in FIG. 138(G).

After that, as shown in FIG. 138(I), at the end of the action production (battle production), a production is performed to announce the victory of the ally character CRA, and the ally character CRA is displayed in the center, indicating "victory". The message MG is placed and displayed to the left of the ally character CRA. In addition, if a performance is performed to announce the victory of the enemy character CRB at the end of the action performance (battle performance), the enemy character CRB will be displayed in the center and the message MG "defeat" will be displayed to the left of the enemy character CRB. placed and displayed.

The number HMG (in this case, “0 0'') continues to be displayed in FIG. 138(H). Further, the state in which the hold icon 9C, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd have disappeared from the display screen 7a is maintained as in FIG. 138(H).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 138(J), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all the same patterns (here, the number "1") and are stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a. When the variable display ends, a jackpot game (jackpot performance) is performed in which a jackpot is awarded and a profit is given to the player. Even if the variable display ends, the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special chart reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are respectively performed. The indicated numbers HMG (here "0 0") are displayed continuously in FIG. 138(I). Furthermore, even when the variable display ends, the state in which the four pending display positions 9Ad and the corresponding pending display positions 9Cd disappear from the display screen 7a continues to be maintained as shown in FIG. 138(I). Note that the pending icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a upon completion of the variable display.

On the other hand, when a performance is performed to notify the victory of the enemy character CRB at the end of the action performance (battle performance), the left decorative pattern 8L is the number "1" and the middle decorative pattern 8C is the number "1" on the display screen 7a. ``2'', the right decorative pattern 8R becomes the number ``1'', the same pattern (here, the number ``1'') is stopped and displayed without being aligned, and when the fluctuating display ends, the mismatch is confirmed and displayed. When the variable display ends, the four pending display positions 9Ad and the corresponding pending display position 9Cd reappear on the display screen 7a, but the pending icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a as the variable display ends.

In this way, in image blur effect D, there is a character CRB (enemy character CRB) that is a clear image that is in focus, and an unclear image that is out of focus (an unclear image that is out of focus). It is possible to realize an expression that gives a sense of depth to the arrangement of the character CRA (ally character CRA), which is an image), and the two characters CRA and CRB, so that the player can be visually entertained. You can improve your interest.

In addition, as the performance progresses, images that you want the player to focus on (in other words, images that you want the player to focus on in the order of character CRA (ally character CRA), then character CRB (enemy character CRB)) This can contribute to conveying to the players the order of production (the thoughts of the production creator).

In addition, in image blur effect D, for example, a character CRB (enemy character CRB) is a clear image that is in focus, and an unclear image that is out of focus (an unclear image that is out of focus). 138(A) to 138(J). , numbers HMG are always clearly in focus, regardless of the gaming state of the gaming machine 1. As a result, the player can grasp the first special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21. It can be made easier.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of image blurring is shown below.
[Effect 1]
The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment includes an image display device 7 (display means) capable of displaying a plurality of types of images, as shown in FIGS. 135(B) to 135(C) for image blur effect A, for example. , a first effect that displays the left decorative pattern 8L of FIG. 135(B), which is a clear first image, and a first effect of FIG. 135(B), which is a first image clearly displayed by the first effect. A second effect in which the left decorative pattern 8L is displayed indistinctly like the left decorative pattern 8L in FIG. 135(C), and FIG. 135(C) which is the first image displayed indistinctly due to the second presentation 135(C), which is the second image, in a position different from the left decorative pattern 8L shown in FIG. According to this configuration, the right decorative pattern 8R of FIG. 135(C), which is a clear second image, and the left decorative pattern 8L of FIG. 135(C), which is an unclear first image, make the first Since it is possible to realize an expression that gives a sense of depth to the arrangement of the image and the second image, it is possible to visually entertain the player and improve his/her interest.
In the image blur effect B of FIGS. 136(B) to 136(C), the sword image KG of FIG. 136(C) is a clear second image, and the sword image KG of FIG. 136(C) is an unclear first image. ) effect button image BTN, it is possible to realize an expression that gives a sense of depth to the arrangement of the first image and the second image, so it is possible to visually entertain the player and increase the interest. You can improve your performance.
In the image blur effect C shown in FIGS. 137(C) to 137(E), for example, the character CRB in FIG. 137(E), which is a clear second image, and the character CRB in FIG. 137(E), which is an unclear first image, are By using the character CRA in E), it is possible to realize an expression that gives a sense of depth to the arrangement of the first image and the second image, thereby visually entertaining the player and improving interest. can be achieved.
In the image blur effect D shown in FIGS. 138(B) to 138(C), the character CRB in FIG. 138(C) is a clear second image, and the character CRB in FIG. 138(C) is an unclear first image. By using the character CRA, it is possible to realize an expression that gives a sense of depth to the arrangement of the first image and the second image, thereby visually entertaining the player and improving interest. be able to.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 135(C) of image blur effect A, the clear second image clearly displayed by the third effect is shown in FIG. 135(C). The right decorative pattern 8R overlaps at least a portion of the left decorative pattern 8L in FIG. 135(C), which is the first image that is displayed unclearly due to the second effect. Specifically, in FIG. 135(C), the focused and clear right decorative pattern 8R that is temporarily stopped and displayed is at least as large as the out-of-focus and unclear left decorative pattern 8L that is temporarily stopped and displayed. It is displayed in a state where it overlaps with a part (approximately the right side of the left decorative pattern 8L (here, the number "3")). According to this configuration, it is possible to express the image as if it were taken with a single-lens reflex camera with a shallow depth of field.
In image blur effect B in FIG. 136(C), the second image, which is a clear, focused sword image KG, is at least one part of the first image, which is an out-of-focus, unclear effect button image BTN. (the right side of the performance button image BTN). According to this configuration, it is possible to express the image as if it were taken with a single-lens reflex camera with a shallow depth of field.
In the image blur effect C in FIG. 137(E), the second image, which is a clear, focused character CRB, is at least part of the out-of-focus, unclear character CRA, which is the first image (character It is displayed overlapping the front side of CRA's right shoulder, right chest, right arm, and sword. According to this configuration, it is possible to express the image as if it were taken with a single-lens reflex camera with a shallow depth of field.
In the image blur effect D of FIG. 138(C), the second image, which is a clear, focused character CRB, is at least part of the out-of-focus, unclear character CRA, which is the first image (character It is displayed overlapping the front side of CRA's right shoulder, right chest, right arm, and sword. According to this configuration, it is possible to express the image as if it were taken with a single-lens reflex camera with a shallow depth of field.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 135(A) to 135(C) of image blurring effect A, the image display device 7 (display means) can display the pending icon 9C. Then, when the third effect is executed, the hold icon 9C is hidden in FIG. 135(C). According to this configuration, the left decorative pattern 8L of FIG. 135(C), which is an unclear first image, and the right decorative pattern of FIG. 135(C), which is a clear second image, are created by the third effect. 8R is not obstructed by the hold icon 9C, the left decorative pattern 8L in FIG. 135(C), which is an unclear first image, and the left decorative pattern 8L in FIG. 135(C), which is a clear second image, are ) can be displayed in a large size on the image display device 7 (display means). As a result, the effects of the left decorative pattern 8L in FIG. 135(C), which is a powerful and unclear first image, and the right decorative pattern 8R in FIG. 135(C), which is a clear second image, are created. It can be provided to players.
In the image blur effect B shown in FIGS. 136(A) to 136(C), the effect button image BTN of FIG. 136(C), which is an unclear first image, and the clear second Since the visibility of the sword image KG of FIG. 136(C), which is an image, is not obstructed by the hold icon 9C, the effect button image BTN of FIG. 136(C), which is an unclear first image, and the clear The sword image KG of FIG. 136(C), which is the second image, can be displayed in a large size on the image display device 7 (display means). This allows the game to create effects based on the powerful and unclear first image, the effect button image BTN of FIG. 136(C), and the clear second image, the sword image KG of FIG. 136(C). can be provided to
In the image blurring effect C shown in FIGS. 137(A) to 137(E), the character CRA in FIG. 137(E), which is an unclear first image, and the clear second image are Since the visibility of the character CRB in FIG. 137(E) is not obstructed by the hold icon 9C, the character CRA in FIG. 137(E), which is the unclear first image, and the clear second image The character CRB of FIG. 137(E) and the character CRB of FIG. 137(E) can be displayed in a large size on the image display device 7 (display means). As a result, the player is provided with an effect based on the character CRA shown in FIG. 137(E), which is a powerful and unclear first image, and the character CRB shown in FIG. 137(E), which is a clear second image. can do.
In the image blurring effect D shown in FIGS. 138(A) to 138(C), the character CRA of FIG. 138(C), which is an unclear first image, and the clear second image are Since the visibility of the character CRB in FIG. 138(C) is not obstructed by the hold icon 9C, the character CRA in FIG. 138(C), which is the unclear first image, and the clear second image The character CRB in FIG. 138(C) can be displayed in a large size on the image display device 7 (display means). This provides the player with an effect based on the character CRA shown in FIG. 138(C), which is a powerful and unclear first image, and the character CRB shown in FIG. 138(E), which is a clear second image. can do.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 135(A) to 135(I) of image blur effect A, the image display device 7 (display means) displays a numerical value indicating the number of pending icons. The numbers HMG (here, "0 0") are always displayed, and even when the second effect is executed, the numbers HMG (here, "0 0"), which are numerical images, are clearly displayed. According to this configuration, the left decorative pattern 8L in FIG. 135(C) is displayed from clear to indistinct due to the second effect, while the number HMG which is a numerical image (here "0"0'') is always clearly displayed, making it easy for the player to grasp the number of pending icons.
Image blurring B in Figures 136(A) to 136(J), Image blurring C in Figures 137(A) to 137(J), Image blurring D in Figures 138(A) to 138(J) The same applies to

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 135(A) to 135(D) of image blurring effect A, after the third effect, the image is displayed indistinctly by the second effect. The left decorative pattern 8L of FIG. 135(C) which is the first image is made clear again like the left decorative pattern 8L of FIG. 135(D), and furthermore, the left decorative pattern 8L of FIG. 135(D) which is the first image A fourth effect can be executed in which the symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R of FIG. 135(D), which is the second image, are displayed so as not to overlap. According to this configuration, when arranging the left decorative pattern 8L of FIG. 135(D), which is the first image, and the right decorative pattern 8R of FIG. 135(D), which is the second image, they overlap each other. 135(D), which is the first image, and the right decorative pattern 8R, which is the second image, in FIG. 135(D). It is possible to suggest to the player that a related performance will be developed from now on.
In the image blur effect B shown in FIGS. 136(A) to 136(F), for example, the effect button image BTN of FIG. 136(F), which is the first image, and the effect button image BTN of FIG. 136(F), which is the second image, are When arranging the sword image KG, the effect button image BTN of FIG. 136(F), which is the first image, and the second image are It is possible to suggest to the player that an effect related to a certain sword image KG in FIG. 136(F) will be developed from now on.
In the image blur effect C shown in FIGS. 137(A) to 137(F), for example, the character CRA in FIG. 137(F) which is the first image, and the character CRB in FIG. 137(F) which is the second image When arranging , the character CRA of FIG. 137(F), which is the first image, and the character CRA of FIG. 137(F), which is the second image, are displayed as clear images without overlapping each other. ) It is possible to suggest to the player that an effect related to the character CRB will be developed from now on.
In the image blur effect D shown in FIGS. 138(A) to 138(D), for example, the character CRA in FIG. 138(D) which is the first image and the character CRB in FIG. 138(D) which is the second image When arranging , the character CRA in FIG. 138(D), which is the first image, and the character CRA in FIG. 138(D), which is the second image, are displayed as clear images without overlapping each other. ) It is possible to suggest to the player that an effect related to the character CRB will be developed from now on.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 135(B) to 135(D) of image blur effect A, the first image clearly displayed in FIGS. The left decorative pattern 8L in D) and the right decorative pattern 8R in FIGS. 135(C) and (D), which are the second images, are focused images, and the first image is displayed unclearly. The left decorative pattern 8L in FIG. 135(C) is an out-of-focus image. According to this configuration, it is possible to express the image as if it were taken with a single-lens reflex camera with a shallow depth of field.
In the image blur effect B shown in FIGS. 136(B) to 136(F), for example, the effect button image BTN of FIGS. 136(B) and (F), which is the first image clearly displayed, and the second image The sword images KG in FIGS. 136(C) and (F) are in-focus images, and the production button image BTN in FIG. 136(C), which is the first image that is displayed unclearly, is a focused image. , the image is out of focus. According to this configuration, it is possible to express the image as if it were taken with a single-lens reflex camera with a shallow depth of field.
In the image blur effect C shown in FIGS. 137(A) to 137(F), for example, the character CRA shown in FIGS. 137(C) and 137(F), which is the first image clearly displayed, and the second image The character CRB in FIGS. 137(E) and (F) is an in-focus image, and the character CRA in FIG. 137(E), which is the first image that is displayed unclearly, is an in-focus image. It is an image that does not exist. According to this configuration, it is possible to express the image as if it were taken with a single-lens reflex camera with a shallow depth of field.
In the image blur effect D shown in FIGS. 138(A) to 138(D), the character CRA shown in FIGS. 138(B) and 138(D), which is the first image, and the character CRA shown in FIG. 138, which is the second image, are clearly displayed. The characters CRB in (C) and (D) are in-focus images, and the character CRA in FIG. 138 (C), which is the first image that is displayed unclearly, is an out-of-focus image. It is. According to this configuration, it is possible to express the image as if it were taken with a single-lens reflex camera with a shallow depth of field.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 135(A) of image blurring effect A, the first effect, the second effect, and the third effect are pattern variations based on the pending icon 9C. This can be executed when there are no pending icons when the display starts. In other words, in image blur effect A, as shown in FIG. 135(A), the pending icon displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the corresponding pending display position 9Cd and becomes the corresponding pending icon 9C. This is an effect performed when there are no pending icons in the first to fourth pending display positions 9Ad to 9Ad.
The same applies to image blurring effect B in FIG. 136(A), image blurring effect C in FIG. 137(A), and image blurring effect D in FIG. 138(A).

[Modified example]
Below, a modification of the image blur effect will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In image blurring effect A in FIG. 135, image blurring effect B in FIG. 136, image blurring effect C in FIG. 137, and image blurring effect D in FIG. This is an effect performed when the hold icon no longer exists in the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad as the hold icon moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C. there were. However, as the hold icon 9B displayed at the first hold display position as the second special figure hold moved to the hold display position 9Cd and became the hold icon 9C, The effect may be performed when the hold icon 9B no longer exists at the hold display position. To briefly explain the first to fourth pending display positions where the pending icon 9B is displayed as the second special figure pending, the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern are currently changing as the second special pattern pending. 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed at the pending display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image) which is displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A hold display area is provided as a second special figure hold in the area of the display screen 7a on the right side of the hold display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In this hold display area, hold icons 9B can be displayed at four hold display positions (above the rectangular image), so that a maximum of four hold icons 9B can be stocked. The four pending display positions are a first pending display position, a second pending display position, a third pending display position, and a fourth pending display position, from a position close to the pending display position 9Cd toward the right side of the display screen 7a. They are arranged and displayed linearly in order along the lower side of the display screen 7a.

[Modification 2]
In image blurring effect A in FIG. 135, image blurring effect B in FIG. 136, image blurring effect C in FIG. 137, and image blurring effect D in FIG. 138, the focus ( By making the image blurry (so-called "out of focus") and unclear (so-called "out of focus"), the second image placed in the foreground is made clear and in focus. It was now possible to create images that looked like images taken with a single-lens reflex camera with a shallow depth of field. This is because an out-of-focus and unclear image is created by blur image processing (for example, Gaussian blur is used to blur the image by varying the standard deviation using a Gaussian function). This blurring image processing is performed in real time by the image control microcomputer 101 on a target image (or a sprite configuring the image) or on a target layer among a plurality of layers. Therefore, the depth of field may be freely adjusted to create an image shot with a shallower depth or an image shot with a deeper depth of field. In this way, you can expand the expression of your performance.

[Modification 3]
In image blurring effect A in FIG. 135, image blurring effect B in FIG. 136, image blurring effect C in FIG. 137, and image blurring effect D in FIG. 138, the focus ( The image is out of focus (so-called "out of focus") and unclear, while the second image placed on the front side is clearly in focus. However, in a completely opposite relationship, the first image placed on the back side should be in focus, and the second image placed on the front side should be clear. It may also be an unclear image that is out of focus (so-called "out of focus"). By using a so-called zoom lens, it is possible to provide the player with the effect of focusing on one subject from among an image of multiple subjects existing in the depth direction, increasing the variety of effects. can. Note that the blurred and unclear image is created by blur image processing (for example, a process performed by Gaussian blur, in which the image is blurred by varying the standard deviation using a Gaussian function). This blurring image processing is performed in real time by the image control microcomputer 101 on a target image (or a sprite configuring the image) or on a target layer among a plurality of layers. In other words, the blurred and unclear image is not stored in the ROM 103 in advance, but is processed by the image control microcomputer 101 in real time from a clear, focused image (image data) read out from the ROM 103. The image that is blurred and unclear is created by the image control microcomputer 101 performing blurring image processing in real time.

[Modification 4]
In image blurring effect A in FIG. 135, image blurring effect B in FIG. 136, image blurring effect C in FIG. 137, and image blurring effect D in FIG. 138, the focus ( The image is out of focus (so-called "out of focus") and unclear, while the second image placed on the near side is clearly in focus. However, among the multiple objects that exist in the depth direction, images of some objects with different distance dimensions in the depth direction should be clearly in focus, and images of other objects should be clearly focused. It may be an unclear image that is out of focus (so-called "out of focus"). If this is done, the image will give a sense of discomfort, so it will be possible to provide the player with a sense of discomfort and suggest to the player that there is a possibility that the player has a chance with a high expectation of winning. Note that the blurred and unclear image is created by blurred image processing (for example, Gaussian blurring is performed, and the image is blurred by varying the standard deviation using a Gaussian function). This blurring image processing is performed in real time by the image control microcomputer 101 on a target image (or a sprite configuring the image) or on a target layer among a plurality of layers. In other words, the blurred and unclear image is not stored in the ROM 103 in advance, but the image control microcomputer 101 performs blurring image processing in real time from a focused and clear image (image data) read out from the ROM 103. The image that is blurred and unclear is created by the image control microcomputer 101 performing blurring image processing in real time.

[Modification 5]
In image blurring effect A in FIG. 135, image blurring effect B in FIG. 136, image blurring effect C in FIG. 137, and image blurring effect D in FIG. This is an effect performed when the hold icon no longer exists in the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad as the hold icon moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C. there were. However, the game state may be a time saving state and a limit on the number of times the game can be played may be set. For example, the number of variations of the special symbol executed during the time saving state may be only once or up to seven times.

[Modification 6]
In image blur effect A in FIG. 135, image blur effect B in FIG. 136, image blur effect C in FIG. 137, and image blur effect D in FIG. This blurred image processing is performed on the target image (or sprites that make up the image) or on multiple layers. This was performed in real time for the target layer by the image control microcomputer 101. However, in addition to the clearly focused image (image data), a blurred and unclear image (image data) may be stored in the ROM 103 in advance and read from the ROM 103 as needed. In this case, if there is sufficient free space in the ROM 103, it is possible to save out-of-focus, unclear images (image data) in addition to clear, in-focus images (image data). This eliminates the need for the image control microcomputer 101 to perform blurring image processing in real time, which can contribute to reducing the load on the image control microcomputer 101.

[Modification 7]
In image blur effect A in FIG. 135, image blur effect B in FIG. 136, image blur effect C in FIG. 137, and image blur effect D in FIG. This blurred image processing is performed on the target image (or sprites that make up the image) or on multiple layers. This was performed in real time for the target layer by the image control microcomputer 101. This blurred image processing may be performed, for example, by displaying numbers one after another on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 to count down. In this countdown performance, for example, when displaying the number "5" → number "4" → number "3" → number "2" → number "1" → number "0" one after another on the display screen 7a, First, the number "5" is displayed as a clear, focused image, and then the number "5" is displayed as an out-of-focus, unclear image, with the number "5" in focus on the front side. The number "4" is displayed on the display screen 7a as a clear and matching image. Next, the number "5" is erased from the display screen 7a, the number "4" is displayed as a blurred and unclear image, and the number "4" is displayed as a clear image that is focused on the front side of the number "4". 3" is displayed on the display screen 7a. Next, the number "4" is erased from the display screen 7a, the number "3" is displayed as a blurred and unclear image, and the number "3" is displayed as a clear image that is focused on the front side of the number "3". 2'' is displayed on the display screen 7a. Next, the number "3" is erased from the display screen 7a, the number "2" is displayed as a blurred and unclear image, and the number "2" is displayed as a clear image that is focused on the front side of the number "2". 1'' is displayed on the display screen 7a. Next, the number "2" is erased from the display screen 7a, the number "1" is displayed as a blurred and unclear image, and the number "1" is displayed as a clear image that is focused on the front side of the number "1". 0'' is displayed on the display screen 7a. Next, the number "1" is erased from the display screen 7a, and then the number "0" is erased from the display screen 7a, and a super reach effect is developed.

[Modification 8]
In the image blurring effect B in FIG. 136 and the image blurring effect C in FIG. 137, a effect button image BTN imitating the effect button 63 was displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. However, instead of the performance button image BTN that imitates the performance button 63, a performance button image that imitates the sword button 65 of the sword member 64 may be used. Even with this configuration, the same effect as the operation (pressing operation) of the production button 63 can be achieved by operating the sword button 65 (pressing operation or pressing operation).

[Modification 9]
In image blurring effect A in FIG. 135, image blurring effect B in FIG. 136, image blurring effect C in FIG. 137, and image blurring effect D in FIG. This is an effect performed when the hold icon no longer exists in the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad as the hold icon moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C. there were. However, as the hold icon displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad as the first special figure hold moved to the hold display position 9Cd and became the hold icon 9C, the first hold display position 9Ad~ 4 When the pending icon no longer exists at the pending display position 9Ad, variable display of the left decorative pattern 9L, middle decorative pattern 9C, and right decorative pattern 9R is started, and image blurring effect A of 135 and image blurring effect of FIG. 136 are performed. B, image blurring effect C in Fig. 137 and image blurring effect D in Fig. 138 are not performed, and the left decorative pattern 9L, middle decorative pattern 9C, and right decorative pattern 9R are not aligned to the same pattern (for example, the number "7"). It may be stopped and displayed. In this case, other reach effects (for example, winning (big hit, small hit) that are different from image blurring effect A in FIG. 135, image blurring effect B in FIG. 136, image blurring effect C in FIG. 137, and image blurring effect D in FIG. 138) It may be possible to lose through the so-called "normal reach", which has the lowest expectation level, or it may be lost without using other reach effects.

[Modification 10]
Image blurring effect A in FIG. 135, image blurring effect B in FIG. 136, image blurring effect C in FIG. 137, and image blurring effect D in FIG. A performance may be added.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect E7-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
a first effect that clearly displays the first image;
a second effect that displays the first image clearly displayed by the first effect;
A third effect that clearly displays a second image in a different position from the first image that is displayed unclearly due to the second effect,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect E7-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect E7-1,
The second image that is clearly displayed by the third effect overlaps at least a part of the first image that is displayed unclearly by the second effect.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect E7-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect E7-1 or aspect E7-2,
The display means is capable of displaying the pending icon,
the said hold icon is hidden when the third effect is executed;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect E7-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E7-1 to E7-3,
The display means always displays a numerical image indicating the number of pending icons,
Even when the second effect is executed, the numerical image is clearly displayed;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect E7-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E7-1 to E7-4,
After the third effect, the first image that was displayed unclearly due to the second effect is made clear again, and further, the first image and the second image are displayed so that they do not overlap. It is possible to execute the fourth performance of
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect E7-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E7-1 to E7-5,
the first image and the second image that are clearly displayed are focused images;
the first image that is displayed unclearly is an out-of-focus image;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect E7-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E7-1 to E7-6,
The first performance, the second performance, and the third performance can be executed when there is no pending icon when the symbol variation display based on the pending icon is started.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The winning/losing notification performances A to D will be explained below using FIGS. 139 to 142. This winning/losing notification performance can be executed during the fluctuating performance of the performance symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable performance start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the winning/losing notification performance, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays it on the main display device. This is an effect that displays an image on the display screen 7a of 7. Note that the winning/losing notification effect is executed for a predetermined period across multiple fluctuations.

[Win/Low Announcement Performance A]
FIG. 139 is a diagram for explaining the winning/losing notification effect A.
First, as shown in FIG. 139(A), a loss notification effect is executed. The loss notification performance is a performance that notifies that the change is a loss. This loss notification performance is executed when the final change is a loss when the gaming state is in the time saving state (“time saving state and high base state”). In the loss notification effect, a message image MSG "loss" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, two pending images 9B corresponding to the second special figure pending are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 139(B), a right-handed hitting promotion effect is executed. The right-handed hitting promotion performance is a performance that encourages the player to play what is called "right-handed hitting." Here, a message image MSG "Right-handed" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. It should be noted that the right hitting promotion performance is a performance performed following the loss notification performance, and is performed in the final variation when the gaming state is in the time saving state (“time saving state and high base state”). When the player "hits right", the number of second reserved special figures increases to the upper limit (four), and four reserved images 9B corresponding to the second reserved special figures are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 139(C), a final battle preview effect is executed. The final battle preview performance is executed in a variation corresponding to the first suspension of the second special symbol suspension mentioned above. In the final battle preview performance, a message image MSG reading "Final battle begins" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Incidentally, up to the defeat performance to be explained later, the performance is a variation corresponding to the first reservation of the second special figure reservation, and is a look-ahead performance including three reservations corresponding to the reservation image 9B.

Next, as shown in FIG. 139(D), an enemy character appearance effect is executed. The enemy character appearance performance is a performance in which an enemy character who becomes an opponent of the ally character appears. Here, the enemy character CRD appears in the center of the display screen 7a.
Next, as shown in FIG. 139(E), a battle effect is performed. The battle performance is a performance in which an ally character and an enemy character fight each other, and if the ally character wins this battle performance, a win (big win or small win) is determined. Here, an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRD are shown fighting.

Next, as shown in FIG. 139(F), a defeat effect is executed. The defeat performance is a performance when all of the fluctuations and three holds are losses. Here, the enemy character CRD is displayed, and the words "defeat" are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 139(G), a hold-extinguishing effect is executed. Here, a message image MSG saying "Look forward to the next time" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, a performance pattern is displayed at the lower left portion of the display screen 7a. Here, it is shown that the fluctuation corresponding to the first of the remaining three holds stops fixed at "565", resulting in a loss.

Next, as shown in FIG. 139(H), a pending consumption effect is executed. Here, a message image MSG saying "Look forward to the next time" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, a performance pattern is displayed at the lower left portion of the display screen 7a. Here, it is shown that the fluctuation corresponding to the last hold is confirmed and stopped at "565", resulting in a loss. After the defeat performance is executed, the remaining pending losses, which are losses, are exhausted at high speed.

[Win/Low Notification Performance B]
FIG. 140 is a diagram for explaining the winning/losing notification performance B.
First, as shown in FIG. 140(A), a loss notification effect is executed. The loss notification performance is a performance that notifies that the change is a loss. This loss notification performance is executed when the final change is a loss when the gaming state is in the time saving state ("time saving state and high base state"). In the loss notification effect, a message image MSG "loss" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, two pending images 9B corresponding to the second special figure pending are displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 140(B), a right-handed hitting promotion effect is executed. The right-handed hitting promotion performance is a performance that encourages the player to play what is called "right-handed hitting." Here, a message image MSG "Right-handed" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. It should be noted that the right hitting promotion performance is a performance performed following the loss notification performance, and is performed in the final variation when the gaming state is in the time saving state (“time saving state and high base state”). When the player "hits right", the number of second reserved special figures increases to the upper limit (four), and four reserved images 9B corresponding to the second reserved special figures are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 140(C), a final battle preview effect is executed. The final battle preview performance is executed in a variation corresponding to the first suspension of the second special symbol suspension mentioned above. In the final battle preview performance, a message image MSG reading "Final battle begins" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Incidentally, up to the defeat performance to be explained later, the performance is a variation corresponding to the first reservation of the second special figure reservation, and is a look-ahead performance including three reservations corresponding to the reservation image 9B.

Next, as shown in FIG. 140(D), an enemy character appearance effect is executed. The enemy character appearance performance is a performance in which an enemy character who becomes an opponent of the ally character appears. Here, an enemy character CRB appears in the center of the display screen 7a.
Next, as shown in FIG. 140(E), a battle effect is performed. The battle performance is a performance in which an ally character and an enemy character fight each other, and if the ally character wins this battle performance, a win (big win or small win) is determined. Here, a battle is depicted between an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB.

Next, as shown in FIG. 140(F), a victory effect is executed. The winning performance is a performance when there is a hit among the fluctuations and the three holds. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed, and the words "Victory" are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 140(G), a pending extinguishment effect is executed. Here, a message image MSG saying "Congratulations" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, a performance pattern is displayed at the lower left portion of the display screen 7a. Here, it is shown that the fluctuation corresponding to the first of the remaining three holds stops fixed at "565", resulting in a loss. It is assumed that the next hold is the winning hold AT.

Next, as shown in FIG. 140(H), a pending consumption effect is executed. Here, a message image MSG saying "Congratulations" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, a performance pattern is displayed at the lower left portion of the display screen 7a. Here, it is shown that the fluctuation corresponding to the hit pending AT stops fixed at "555" and becomes a win. Note that the last reservation will not be exhausted.

[Win/Low Notification Performance C]
FIG. 141 is a diagram for explaining the winning/losing notification effect C.
First, as shown in FIG. 141(A), a loss notification effect is executed. The loss notification performance is a performance that notifies that the change is a loss. This loss notification performance is executed when the final change is a loss when the gaming state is in the time saving state ("time saving state and high base state"). In the loss notification effect, a message image MSG "loss" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, two pending images 9B corresponding to the second special figure pending are displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 141(B), a right-handed hitting promotion effect is executed. The right-handed hitting promotion performance is a performance that encourages the player to play what is called "right-handed hitting." Here, a message image MSG "Right-handed" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. It should be noted that the right hitting promotion performance is a performance performed following the loss notification performance, and is performed in the final variation when the gaming state is in the time saving state (“time saving state and high base state”). When the player "hits right", the number of second reserved special figures increases to the upper limit (four), and four reserved images 9B corresponding to the second reserved special figures are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 141(C), a first battle effect is executed. The first battle performance is a performance in which an ally character and an enemy character fight. Here, in the case of a hit, the ally character wins. Here, the explanation will be continued assuming that the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fought, and the ally character CRA was defeated. Note that the first battle performance is a performance with fluctuations corresponding to the first reservation of the second special symbol reservation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 141(D), a second battle effect is executed. The second battle performance is a performance in which an ally character and an enemy character fight. Here, in the case of a hit, the ally character wins. Here, the explanation will be continued assuming that the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRD fought, and the ally character CRA was defeated. Note that the second battle performance is a performance with fluctuations corresponding to the second reservation of the second special symbol reservation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 141(E), a third battle effect is executed. The third battle performance is a performance in which an ally character and an enemy character fight. Here, in the case of a hit, the ally character wins. Here, the explanation will be continued assuming that the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRC fought, and the ally character CRA was defeated. Note that the third battle performance is a performance with fluctuations corresponding to the third reservation of the second special symbol reservation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 141(F), a fourth battle effect is executed. The fourth battle performance is a performance in which an ally character and an enemy character fight. Here, in the case of a hit, the ally character wins. Here, the explanation will be continued assuming that the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRD fought, and the ally character CRA was defeated. In addition, the fourth battle performance is a performance with fluctuations corresponding to the last reservation of the second special symbol reservation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 141(G), a defeat effect is executed. The defeat performance is a performance that indicates defeat in the fourth battle performance. Here, the enemy character CRD is displayed, and the words "defeat" are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 141(H), a confirmed stop effect (loss) is executed. The fixed stop performance (loss) is a performance that performs a fixed stop of fluctuation. Here, the message image MSG "Unfortunate" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, a performance pattern is displayed at the lower left portion of the display screen 7a. Here, it is shown that the fluctuation corresponding to the last reservation of the second special symbol reservation stops at "565" and becomes a loss.

[Win/Low Notification Performance D]
FIG. 142 is a diagram for explaining the winning/losing notification performance D.
First, as shown in FIG. 142(A), a loss notification effect is executed. The loss notification performance is a performance that notifies that the change is a loss. This loss notification performance is executed when the final change is a loss when the gaming state is in the time saving state (“time saving state and high base state”). In the loss notification effect, a message image MSG "loss" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, two pending images 9B corresponding to the second special figure pending are displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 142(B), a right-handed hitting promotion effect is executed. The right-handed hitting promotion performance is a performance that encourages the player to play what is called "right-handed hitting." Here, a message image MSG "Right-handed" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. It should be noted that the right hitting promotion performance is a performance performed following the loss notification performance, and is performed in the final variation when the gaming state is in the time saving state (“time saving state and high base state”). When the player "hits right", the number of second reserved special figures increases to the upper limit (four), and four reserved images 9B corresponding to the second reserved special figures are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 142(C), a first battle effect is executed. The first battle performance is a performance in which an ally character and an enemy character fight. Here, in the case of a hit, the ally character wins. Here, the explanation will be continued assuming that the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fought, and the ally character CRA was defeated. Note that the first battle performance is a performance with fluctuations corresponding to the first reservation of the second special symbol reservation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 142(D), a second battle effect is executed. The second battle performance is a performance in which an ally character and an enemy character fight. Here, in the case of a hit, the ally character wins. Here, the explanation will be continued assuming that the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRD fought, and the ally character CRA was defeated. Note that the second battle performance is a performance with fluctuations corresponding to the second reservation of the second special symbol reservation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 142(E), a third battle effect is executed. The third battle performance is a performance in which an ally character and an enemy character fight. Here, in the case of a hit, the ally character wins. Here, the explanation will be continued assuming that the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRC fought, and the ally character CRA was defeated. Note that the third battle performance is a performance with fluctuations corresponding to the third reservation of the second special symbol reservation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 142(F), a fourth battle effect is executed. The fourth battle performance is a performance in which an ally character and an enemy character fight. Here, in the case of a hit, the ally character wins. Here, the explanation will be continued assuming that the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRD fought and the ally character CRA won. In addition, the fourth battle performance is a performance with fluctuations corresponding to the last reservation of the second special symbol reservation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 142(G), a victory effect is executed. The victory performance is a performance that indicates victory in the fourth battle performance. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed, and the words "Victory" are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 142(H), a confirmed stop effect (win) is executed. The fixed stop performance (hit) is a performance that performs a fixed stop of fluctuation. Here, a message image MSG saying "Congratulations" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, a performance pattern is displayed at the lower left portion of the display screen 7a. Here, it is shown that the fluctuation corresponding to the last hold of the second special figure hold is confirmed and stopped at "555", resulting in a win.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the win/lose notification effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment described above, when there are a predetermined number (4) of pending special symbols in the second reserved special symbols, a look-ahead is performed to determine in advance whether or not there is a hit in the second reserved special symbols. This is carried out to notify whether or not there is a win as a look-ahead effect (FIGS. 139(C)(D)(E)(F), FIG. 140(C)(D)(E)(F)). According to this configuration, the results of wins and losses in a plurality of fluctuations can be executed as a series of performances, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment described above, when there are a predetermined number (4) of pending special symbols in the second reserved special symbols, a look-ahead is performed to determine in advance whether or not there is a hit in the second reserved special symbols. As a look-ahead effect, it is announced whether or not there is a hit in the variation corresponding to the first reservation of the second special symbol reservation (Fig. 139 (C) (D) (E) (F), Fig. 140 (C) (D) (E) (F)). According to this configuration, the results of wins and losses in a plurality of fluctuations can be executed as a series of performances, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when there are a predetermined number (4) of pending special figures in the second special figure pending, the second special figure Notify whether there is a hit in each variation corresponding to the hold (Fig. 141(C)(D)(E)(F)(G)(H), Fig. 142(C)(D)(E)( F) (G) (H)). According to this configuration, since it becomes clear in order whether or not there is a hit among the predetermined number of pending games, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment described above, when the gaming state is in the time-saving state ("time-saving state and high base state"), by executing the right-hand hitting promotion effect, the second special figure reservation is at the upper limit (four). (FIG. 139(B), FIG. 140(B), FIG. 141(B), FIG. 142(B)). According to this configuration, it is possible to easily create a state in which a predetermined number of reservations exist, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a win is notified by the look-ahead effect, and after the win is announced, the unused reservations in the past than the reservation that became a win are used (FIGS. 140 (G) and (H)). . According to this configuration, after a series of performances, the player does not feel uncomfortable and can improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, a loss is notified by the pre-read effect, and after the loss is notified, the unused reservations are consumed (FIGS. 139(G) and (H)). According to this configuration, after a series of performances, the player does not feel uncomfortable and can improve the interest of the game.

[Modified example]
A modified example of the winning/losing notification effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
Although not specifically mentioned above, the enemy character that appears after the final battle preview presentation may be selected depending on the degree of expectation that the enemy character will be a hit (FIG. 139(D), FIG. 140(D)).

[Modification 2]
Although not specifically mentioned above, the enemy characters that appear in the first, second, third, and fourth battles may be selected depending on the degree of expectation that they will win (Figure 141 ( C) (D) (E) (F), Figure 142 (C) (D) (E) (F)).

[Modification 3]
In the above, a defeat effect, a victory effect, a confirmed stop effect (loss), and a confirmed stop effect (win) were performed for the fourth battle effect (Figures 141 (G) (H), Figure 142 (G)) (H)). On the other hand, for the first battle performance, second battle performance, and third battle performance, a defeat performance, a victory performance, a guaranteed stop performance (loss), and a guaranteed stop performance (win) may be performed. .

[Modification 4]
In the above example, the ally character wins in the fourth battle performance, but if the ally character wins in the first battle performance, if the ally character wins in the second battle performance, and if the ally character wins in the third battle performance, the ally character wins in the third battle performance. There may be cases where the player wins. When an ally character wins in the first battle performance, it is conceivable to perform a victory performance and a confirmed stop performance (win) following the first battle performance. Similarly, if an ally character wins in the second battle performance, a victory performance and a confirmed stop performance (hit) may be performed following the second battle performance, and if an ally character wins in the third battle performance, It is conceivable to perform a victory performance and a confirmed stop performance (win) following the third battle performance.

[Modification 5]
In the above, an example was given of the performance regarding the second special figure reservation, but it may also be a performance regarding the first special figure reservation.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect E8-1]
It is possible to suspend the winning lottery that is held when the ball enters the starting slot, performs a look-ahead to determine in advance whether or not the ball is a hit when the ball enters the start slot, and performs a look-ahead effect based on the result of the look-ahead. , a gaming machine that can be executed prior to expiration of the suspension,
When there is a predetermined number of reservations, it is possible to execute a pre-read notification performance that executes and notifies whether or not there is a hit among the predetermined number of reservations.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect E8-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect E8-1,
The pre-read notification performance is a performance that notifies whether or not there is a hit among the predetermined number of reservations in the variation of exhausting the first reservation when the predetermined number of reservations exist.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect E8-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect E8-1 or aspect E8-2,
When there is a predetermined number of holds, it is possible to execute a variation notification effect that notifies whether there is a hit among the predetermined number of holds in each variation corresponding to the predetermined number of holds;
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect E8-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E8-1 to E8-3,
The predetermined number of reservations occur due to the ball entering the starting port in an advantageous game where the ball entering the starting port is easy.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect E8-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E8-1 to E8-4,
If there is a hit among the predetermined number of holds, the win is announced in the pre-read notification effect, and the unused holds that are past the hit hold are consumed after the win is announced.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect E8-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects E8-1 to E8-5,
If there is no hit among the predetermined number of reservations, the loss is notified by the pre-read notification effect, and the unused reservations are consumed after the notification of the loss.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The decorative pattern display area productions A to D will be explained below using FIGS. 143 to 146. This decorative pattern display area presentation may be performed during a decorative pattern variation presentation or the like. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the decorative pattern display area effect, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the display device 7.

[Decorative pattern display area production A]
FIG. 143 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern display area effect A. In the decorative pattern display area production A, first, as shown in FIG. It is stopped and displayed at the symbol "128"). The decorative patterns include image images of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, and are a set of symbols that can notify whether or not it is a hit based on the combination of these stop patterns.

The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a first display area R11 (first area) surrounded by a rectangular frame on the display screen 7a. The first display area R11 is located at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The first display area R11 is included in a second display area R21 (second area) that is larger than the first display area R11. In this embodiment, the second display area R21 is the display screen 7a of the display device 7.

Further, a specific image TG1 (specific image) is displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a. Specific image TG1 represents a specific target. Here, the specific image TG1 represents the face of a character wearing sunglasses. Note that the specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose meaning is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist.

Next, as shown in FIG. 143(B), in the first display area R11 of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner. Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a fluctuating manner in which they move vertically at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 143(C), in the first display area R11 of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L (the pattern image of the number "3") is stopped and displayed at the stop display position. be done. Specifically, the number pattern image, which is the left decorative pattern 8L, is displayed in a fluctuating manner that moves from top to bottom at high speed, and the number "3" pattern image slowly slows down and stops at the stop display position. Is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 143(D), in the first display area R11 of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the right decorative pattern 8R (the pattern image of the number "3") is stopped and displayed at the stop display position. be done. Specifically, the number pattern image, which is the right decorative pattern 8R, is displayed in a fluctuating manner that moves from top to bottom at high speed, and the number "3" pattern image slowly slows down and stops at the stop display position. Is displayed. As a result, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R form a reach state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 143(E), the specific image TG1 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 so as to move from the upper right position to the upper center position of the display screen 7a. The specific image TG1 is displayed above the first display area R11, more specifically above the medium decorative pattern 8C that is variably displayed within the first display area R11.

Next, as shown in FIG. 143(F), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the medium decorative pattern 8C is changed according to the specific image TG1. Specifically, the specific image TG1 is placed on the medium decorative pattern 8C (the pattern image of the number "1") of the first display area R11, and the medium decorative pattern is partially overlapped with the first display area R11. Try to change it by pushing 8C from top to bottom. As a result, a stirring effect is performed to determine whether the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed in a losing manner.

Next, as shown in FIG. 143(G), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the specific image TG1 displays the inner decorative pattern 8C (the pattern image of the number "1") of the first display area R11 from above. By pushing downward, the middle decorative pattern 8C is pushed out below (outside) the first display area R11. This prevents the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R from being stopped and displayed in a losing manner.

Next, as shown in FIG. 143(H), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the medium decorative pattern 8C is changed according to the specific image TG1. Specifically, the specific image TG1 is placed on the medium decorative pattern 8C (the pattern image of the number "2") of the first display area R11, and the medium decorative pattern is partially overlapped with the first display area R11. Try to change it by pushing 8C from top to bottom. As a result, a stirring effect is performed to determine whether the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed in a losing manner. The medium decorative pattern 8C that is varied by the specific image TG1 is an image of the number "2" symbol that is one position before the number "3" symbol that is the winning pattern, and is the image of the number "2" symbol that is one position before the number "3" symbol that is the winning symbol. It corresponds to a specific pattern.

Next, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, as shown in FIG. By pushing downward, the middle decorative pattern 8C is pushed out below (outside) the first display area R11. This prevents the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R from being stopped and displayed in a losing manner. At the same time, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed while being expanded so as to protrude from the first display area R11 and to move from the first display area R11 to the second display area R21.

Next, as shown in FIG. 143(J), the enlarged left decorative pattern 8L and right decorative pattern 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, in the second display area R21, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R in the ready-to-reach state are displayed in a larger size than when displayed in the first display area R11. The left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed so as to partially overlap with the first display area R11. After that, a predetermined performance such as a reach performance is performed.

[Decorative pattern display area production B]
FIG. 144 is a diagram for explaining decorative pattern display area rendering B. In the decorative pattern display area presentation B, first, as shown in FIG. It is stopped and displayed at the symbol "128"). The decorative patterns include a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R, and are a set of symbols that can notify whether or not it is a hit based on the combination of these stop patterns.

The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a first display area R11 (first area) surrounded by a rectangular frame on the display screen 7a. The first display area R11 is located at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The first display area R11 is included in a second display area R21 (second area) that is larger than the first display area R11. In this embodiment, the second display area R21 is the display screen 7a of the display device 7.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144(B), in the first display area R11 of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner. Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a fluctuating manner in which they move vertically at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144(C), in the first display area R11 of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L (the pattern image of the number "3") is stopped and displayed at the stop display position. be done. Specifically, the number pattern image, which is the left decorative pattern 8L, is displayed in a fluctuating manner that moves from top to bottom at high speed, and the number "3" pattern image slowly slows down and stops at the stop display position. Is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144(D), in the first display area R11 of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the right decorative pattern 8R (the pattern image of the number "3") is stopped and displayed at the stop display position. be done. Specifically, the number pattern image, which is the right decorative pattern 8R, is displayed in a fluctuating manner that moves from top to bottom at high speed, and the number "3" pattern image slowly slows down and stops at the stop display position. Is displayed. As a result, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R form a reach state.

Then, when the ready-to-reach state of the decorative pattern is formed, a specific image TG (specific image) is displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a. Specific image TG1 represents a specific target. Here, the specific image TG1 represents the face of a character wearing sunglasses. Note that the specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose meaning is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144(E), the specific image TG1 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, moving from the upper right position to the upper center position of the display screen 7a. The specific image TG1 is displayed above the first display area R11, more specifically above the medium decorative pattern 8C that is variably displayed within the first display area R11.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144(F), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the medium decorative pattern 8C is changed according to the specific image TG1. Specifically, the specific image TG1 is placed on the medium decorative pattern 8C (the pattern image of the number "1") of the first display area R11, and the medium decorative pattern is partially overlapped with the first display area R11. Try to change it by pushing 8C from top to bottom. As a result, a stirring effect is performed to determine whether the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed in a losing manner.

Next, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, as shown in FIG. By pushing downward, the middle decorative pattern 8C is pushed out below (outside) the first display area R11. This prevents the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R from being stopped and displayed in a losing manner.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144(H), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the medium decorative pattern 8C is changed according to the specific image TG1. Specifically, the specific image TG1 is placed on the medium decorative pattern 8C (the pattern image of the number "2") of the first display area R11, and the medium decorative pattern is partially overlapped with the first display area R11. Try to change it by pushing 8C from top to bottom. As a result, a stirring effect is performed to determine whether the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed in a losing manner. The medium decorative pattern 8C that is varied by the specific image TG1 is an image of the number "2" symbol that is one position before the number "3" symbol that is the winning pattern, and is the image of the number "2" symbol that is one position before the number "3" symbol that is the winning symbol. It corresponds to a specific pattern.

Next, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, as shown in FIG. By pushing downward, the middle decorative pattern 8C is pushed out below (outside) the first display area R11. This prevents the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R from being stopped and displayed in a losing manner. At the same time, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed while being expanded so as to protrude from the first display area R11 and to move from the first display area R11 to the second display area R21. Then, on the display screen 7a, the display of the first display area R11 disappears (the first display area R11 becomes non-display).

Next, as shown in FIG. 144(J), the enlarged left decorative pattern 8L and right decorative pattern 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, in the second display area R21, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R in the ready-to-reach state are displayed in a larger size than when displayed in the first display area R11. After that, a predetermined performance such as a reach performance is performed.

[Decorative pattern display area production C]
FIG. 145 is a diagram for explaining decorative pattern display area production A. In the decorative pattern display area production A, first, as shown in FIG. It is stopped and displayed at the symbol "128"). The decorative patterns include image images of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, and are a set of symbols that can notify whether or not it is a hit based on the combination of these stop patterns.

The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a first display area R11 (first area) surrounded by a rectangular frame on the display screen 7a. The first display area R11 is located at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The first display area R11 is included in a second display area R21 (second area) that is larger than the first display area R11. In this embodiment, the second display area R21 is the display screen 7a of the display device 7.

Further, a specific image TG (specific image) is displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a. Specific image TG1 represents a specific target. Here, the specific image TG1 represents the face of a character wearing sunglasses. Note that the specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose meaning is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist.

Next, as shown in FIG. 145(B), in the first display area R11 of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner. Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a fluctuating manner in which they move vertically at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 145(C), in the first display area R11 of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L (the pattern image of the number "3") is stopped and displayed at the stop display position. be done. Specifically, the number pattern image, which is the left decorative pattern 8L, is displayed in a fluctuating manner that moves from top to bottom at high speed, and the number "3" pattern image slowly slows down and stops at the stop display position. Is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 145(D), in the first display area R11 of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the right decorative pattern 8R (the pattern image of the number "3") is stopped and displayed at the stop display position. be done. Specifically, the number pattern image, which is the right decorative pattern 8R, is displayed in a fluctuating manner that moves from top to bottom at high speed, and the number "3" pattern image slowly slows down and stops at the stop display position. Is displayed. As a result, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R form a reach state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 145(E), the specific image TG1 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 so as to move from the upper right position to the upper center position of the display screen 7a. The specific image TG1 is displayed above the first display area R11, more specifically above the medium decorative pattern 8C that is variably displayed within the first display area R11. In addition, the first display area R11 and the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R in the ready state displayed in the first display area R11 are enlarged and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 145(F), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the medium decorative pattern 8C is changed according to the specific image TG1. Specifically, the specific image TG1 is placed on the medium decorative pattern 8C (the pattern image of the number "1") of the first display area R11, and the medium decorative pattern is partially overlapped with the first display area R11. Try to change it by pushing 8C from top to bottom. As a result, a stirring effect is performed to determine whether the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed in a losing manner.

Next, as shown in FIG. 145(G), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the specific image TG1 displays the inner decorative pattern 8C (the pattern image of the number "1") of the first display area R11 from above. By pushing downward, the middle decorative pattern 8C is pushed out below (outside) the first display area R11. This prevents the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R from being stopped and displayed in a losing manner.

Next, as shown in FIG. 145(H), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the medium decorative pattern 8C is changed according to the specific image TG1. Specifically, the specific image TG1 is placed on the medium decorative pattern 8C (the pattern image of the number "2") of the first display area R11, and the medium decorative pattern is partially overlapped with the first display area R11. Try to change it by pushing 8C from top to bottom. As a result, a stirring effect is performed to determine whether the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed in a losing manner. The medium decorative pattern 8C that is varied by the specific image TG1 is an image of the number "2" symbol that is one position before the number "3" symbol that is the winning pattern, and is the image of the number "2" symbol that is one position before the number "3" symbol that is the winning symbol. It corresponds to a specific pattern.

Next, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, as shown in FIG. The specific image TG1 cannot be moved by pushing it downward, and on the contrary, the specific image TG1 is pushed back from the bottom to the top by the medium decorative pattern 8C in the first display area R11. As a result, in the first display area R11, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed in a losing mode (losing pattern "323").

[Decorative pattern display area production D]
FIG. 146 is a diagram for explaining the decorative pattern display area effect D. In the decorative pattern display area production D, first, as shown in FIG. It is stopped and displayed at the symbol "128"). The decorative patterns include image images of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, and are a set of symbols that can notify whether or not it is a hit based on the combination of these stop patterns.

The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a first display area (first area) R11 surrounded by a rectangular frame on the display screen 7a. The first display area R11 is located at the bottom of the display screen 7a. Further, on the display screen 7a, a second display area (second area) R21 surrounded by a rectangular frame is displayed. The second display area R21 is larger than the first display area R11. The second display area R21 is located at the top of the display screen 7a.

Further, a specific image (specific image) TG is displayed in the second display area R21 at the upper right side of the display screen 7a. Specific image TG1 represents a specific target. Here, the specific image TG1 represents the face of a character wearing sunglasses. Note that the specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose meaning is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist.

Next, as shown in FIG. 146(B), in the first display area R11 of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner. Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a fluctuating manner in which they move vertically at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 146(C), in the first display area R11 of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L (the pattern image of the number "3") is stopped and displayed at the stop display position. be done. Specifically, the number pattern image, which is the left decorative pattern 8L, is displayed in a fluctuating manner that moves from top to bottom at high speed, and the number "3" pattern image slowly slows down and stops at the stop display position. Is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 146(D), in the first display area R11 of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the right decorative pattern 8R (the pattern image of the number "3") is stopped and displayed at the stop display position. be done. Specifically, the number pattern image, which is the right decorative pattern 8R, is displayed in a fluctuating manner that moves from top to bottom at high speed, and the number "3" pattern image slowly slows down and stops at the stop display position. Is displayed. As a result, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R form a reach state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 146(E), in the second display area R21 of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the specific image TG1 is moved from the upper right position of the display screen 7a to the upper center position. will be displayed. The specific image TG1 is displayed above the first display area R11, more specifically above the medium decorative pattern 8C that is variably displayed within the first display area R11.

Next, as shown in FIG. 146(F), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the medium decorative pattern 8C is changed according to the specific image TG1. Specifically, the specific image TG1 is placed on the medium decorative pattern 8C (the pattern image of the number "1") of the first display area R11, and the medium decorative pattern is partially overlapped with the first display area R11. Try to change it by pushing 8C from top to bottom. As a result, a stirring effect is performed to determine whether the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed in a losing manner.

Next, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, as shown in FIG. By pushing downward, the middle decorative pattern 8C is pushed out below (outside) the first display area R11. This prevents the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R from being stopped and displayed in a losing manner.

Next, as shown in FIG. 146(H), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the medium decorative pattern 8C is changed according to the specific image TG1. Specifically, the specific image TG1 is placed on the medium decorative pattern 8C (the pattern image of the number "2") of the first display area R11, and the medium decorative pattern is partially overlapped with the first display area R11. Try to change it by pushing 8C from top to bottom. As a result, a stirring effect is performed to determine whether the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed in a losing manner. The medium decorative pattern 8C that is varied by the specific image TG1 is an image of the number "2" symbol that is one position before the number "3" symbol that is the winning pattern, and is the image of the number "2" symbol that is one position before the number "3" symbol that is the winning symbol. It corresponds to a specific pattern.

Next, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, as shown in FIG. By pushing downward, the middle decorative pattern 8C is pushed out below (outside) the first display area R11. This prevents the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R from being stopped and displayed in a losing manner. At the same time, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed while being expanded so as to protrude from the first display area R11 and to move from the first display area R11 to the second display area R21.

Next, as shown in FIG. 146(J), the enlarged left decorative pattern 8L and right decorative pattern 8R are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, in the second display area R21, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R in the ready-to-reach state are displayed in a larger size than when displayed in the first display area R11. After that, a predetermined performance such as a reach performance is performed.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the decorative pattern display area effect will be shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 143 to 146, decorations are displayed in a variable manner in the first display area R11 (first area) of the display screen 7a (display means) of the image display device 7. A first effect in which symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R (a set of decorative symbols) form a ready-to-reach state, and decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in a ready-to-reach state in the first display area R11 of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 Among them, it is possible to perform a second effect in which the medium decorative pattern 8C is varied depending on the specific image TG1 (specific image) displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 143, 144, and 146, a specific pattern (this embodiment When the pattern image of the number "2" in the form is varied by the specific image TG1, the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, in the reach state are displayed in the second display area R21 (second area) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A third effect of displaying 8R can be further executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 143, 144, and 146, in the third effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the ready-to-reach state are moved from the first display area R11 to the second display area R21. appears to move up to. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 143, 144, and 146, in the third effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the ready-to-reach state displayed in the second display area R21 are The image is displayed larger than when displayed in the display area. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 143, 144, and 146, in the third effect, when displaying 8L, 8C, and 8R in the ready state in the second display area R21, the first The display area R11 is hidden. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 145, in the first effect, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R form a ready-to-reach state in the first display area R11, the first display area R11 and A set of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in a ready-to-reach state displayed in the first display area R11 is enlarged and displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 143 to 145, the first display area R11 of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is included in the second display area R21. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.

[Modified example]
Below, a modified example of the decorative pattern display area presentation will be shown.
[Modification 1]
143 to 146, among the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the reach state in the first display area R11 of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the medium decorative symbol 8C is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Although it is made to vary according to the displayed specific image TG1, it is also possible to vary all the decorative symbols instead of a part of the set of decorative symbols according to the specific image.
[Modification 2]
In FIGS. 143 to 146, the medium decorative pattern 8C is moved by pushing it from top to bottom using the specific image TG1, but for example, the decorative pattern may be crushed and moved, lifted from the bottom to the top to be moved, or collided with and broken. It may be changed as follows. That is, the decorative pattern may be varied in any manner depending on the specific image.
[Modification 3]
In FIGS. 143, 144, and 146, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the reach state are displayed so as to move from the first display area R11 to the second display area R21. The displayed decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may be temporarily hidden and then displayed in the second display area R21.
[Modification 4]
In FIGS. 143 to 146, a specific pattern among the medium decorative patterns 8C is an image of the number "2" symbol that is one position before the number "3" symbol that is the winning symbol. The symbol may be used as the specific symbol here. For example, it may be a different number pattern or a special pattern other than numbers.
[Modification 5]
In FIGS. 143, 144, and 146, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the ready-to-reach state displayed in the second display area R21 are displayed in a larger size than when displayed in the first display area. , the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the ready-to-reach state displayed in the second display area R21 may be displayed in a manner different from the manner in which they are displayed in the first display area. For example, it may be displayed in different colors, shapes, different types of designs, etc.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect F1-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a set of decorative patterns,
a first effect in which the set of decorative symbols variably displayed form a ready-to-win state in a first area of the display means;
performing a second effect of varying at least one decorative pattern among the set of decorative patterns in a reach state in the first area of the displaying device according to a specific image displayed on the displaying device; It is possible,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect F1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect F1-1,
When a specific pattern among the at least one decorative pattern in the first area of the display means is changed according to the specific image, the set of decorative patterns in a reach state is displayed in the second area of the display device. It is further possible to execute a third effect of displaying the
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect F1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect F1-2,
In the third performance, the set of decorative symbols in a ready-to-reach state are displayed so as to move from the first area to the second area.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect F1-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect F1-2 or aspect F1-3,
In the third performance, the set of decorative symbols in the ready state displayed in the second area are displayed in a larger size than when displayed in the first area.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect F1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects F1-2 to F1-4,
In the third performance, when displaying the set of decorative symbols in a reach state in the second region, the first region is hidden.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect F1-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects F1-1 to F1-5,
In the first effect, when the set of decorative symbols forms a ready-to-reach state in the first region, the first region and the set of decorative symbols in the ready-to-reach state displayed in the first region Decorative designs are enlarged and displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect F1-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects F1-1 to F1-6,
The first area of the display means is included in the second area,
A gaming machine characterized by:

The hold-compatible image productions A to D will be explained below using FIGS. 147 to 150. This suspension-compatible image performance can be executed during the variation performance of the performance symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a hold-compatible image effect, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays it on the main display. This is an effect that displays an image on the display screen 7a of the device 7.

[Image production A that supports hold]
FIG. 147 is a diagram for explaining the hold-compatible image production A.
First, as shown in FIG. 147(A), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, it is shown how the left performance symbol 8L, the middle performance symbol 8C, and the right performance symbol 8R start to fluctuate. Further, at the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending images 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending and the corresponding pending image 9C corresponding to the variation are displayed. Furthermore, a pedestal image 9AT that makes it easy to recognize the display position of the reserved image 9A corresponding to the first special figure reservation, and a pedestal image 9CT that makes it easy to recognize the display position of the reserved image 9C are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 147(B), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation performance is a performance in which the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R temporarily stop at the same number. Here, it is shown that both the left presentation symbol 8L and the right presentation symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at "7". In addition, the pending image 9C changes from white to blue (indicated by hatching).

Next, as shown in FIG. 147(C), a chance-up effect is executed. The chance-increasing performance is a performance that informs that the level of expectation for winning has increased. Here, a message image MSG reading "Opportunity up" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.
Next, as shown in FIG. 147(D), a pedestal change effect is executed. The pedestal change performance is a performance in which the pedestal image changes. Here, the display color of the pedestal images 9AT and 9CT is red (shown by hatching). For example, expectations are higher for blue than for white, and higher for red than for blue.

Next, as shown in FIG. 147(E), a development effect is executed. The development performance is a performance that notifies the development from normal reach to SP reach. Here, a message image MSG "Development" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.
Next, as shown in FIG. 147(F), a battle effect is executed. The battle performance is a performance in which an ally character and an enemy character fight, and in the case of a hit, the ally character wins. Here, an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB are displayed. In particular, the pending image 9A and the pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the pending image 9A are not displayed, and only the pending image 9C and the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the pending image 9C are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 147(G), a victory effect is executed. The victory performance is a performance that notifies that an ally character has won the battle performance. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the words "Victory" are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 147(H), a confirmed stop effect (win) is displayed. The guaranteed stop effect (hit) is an effect in which the effect pattern is confirmed to stop when the number is zero. Here, the left presentation pattern 8L, the middle presentation pattern 8C, and the right presentation pattern 8R are all "7". Further, a pending image 9A, a pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the pending image 9A, and a pedestal image 9CT are displayed. It should be noted that the pending image 9C becomes non-display when the effect pattern is fixed and stopped.

[Image production B that supports hold]
FIG. 148 is a diagram for explaining the hold-compatible image production B.
First, as shown in FIG. 148(A), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, it is shown how the left performance symbol 8L, the middle performance symbol 8C, and the right performance symbol 8R start to fluctuate. Further, at the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending images 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending and the corresponding pending image 9C corresponding to the variation are displayed. Furthermore, a pedestal image 9AT that makes it easy to recognize the display position of the reserved image 9A corresponding to the first special figure reservation, and a pedestal image 9CT that makes it easy to recognize the display position of the reserved image 9C are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 148(B), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation performance is a performance in which the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R temporarily stop at the same number. Here, it is shown that both the left presentation symbol 8L and the right presentation symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at "7". In addition, the pending image 9C changes from white to blue (indicated by hatching).

Next, as shown in FIG. 148(C), a chance-up effect is executed. The chance-increasing performance is a performance that informs that the level of expectation for winning has increased. Here, a message image MSG reading "Opportunity up" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.
Next, as shown in FIG. 148(D), a pedestal change effect is executed. The pedestal change performance is a performance in which the pedestal image changes. Here, the display color of the pedestal images 9AT and 9CT is red (shown by hatching). For example, the level of expectation is higher for blue than for white, and the level of expectation for red is higher than for blue.

Next, as shown in FIG. 148(E), a development effect is executed. The development performance is a performance that notifies the development from normal reach to SP reach. Here, a message image MSG "Development" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.
Next, as shown in FIG. 148(F), a battle effect is executed. The battle performance is a performance in which an ally character and an enemy character fight, and in the case of a hit, the ally character wins. Here, an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB are displayed. In particular, the pending image 9A, the pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the pending image 9A, and the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the pending image 9C are not displayed, and only the pending image 9C is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 148(G), a victory effect is executed. The victory performance is a performance that notifies that an ally character has won the battle performance. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the words "Victory" are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 148(H), a confirmed stop effect (win) is displayed. The guaranteed stop effect (hit) is an effect in which the effect pattern is confirmed to stop when the number is zero. Here, the left presentation pattern 8L, the middle presentation pattern 8C, and the right presentation pattern 8R are all "7". Further, a pending image 9A and a pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the pending image 9A are displayed. It should be noted that the pending image 9C becomes non-display when the effect pattern is fixed and stopped.

[Image production C that supports hold]
FIG. 149 is a diagram for explaining the hold-compatible image production C.
First, as shown in FIG. 149(A), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, it is shown how the left performance symbol 8L, the middle performance symbol 8C, and the right performance symbol 8R start to fluctuate. Further, at the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending images 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending and the corresponding pending image 9C corresponding to the variation are displayed. Furthermore, a pedestal image 9AT that makes it easy to recognize the display position of the reserved image 9A corresponding to the first special figure reservation, and a pedestal image 9CT that makes it easy to recognize the display position of the reserved image 9C are displayed. Note that the pedestal image 9AT is a horizontally long image that corresponds to the four pending images 9A.

Next, as shown in FIG. 149(B), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation performance is a performance in which the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R temporarily stop at the same number. Here, it is shown that both the left presentation symbol 8L and the right presentation symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at "7".

Next, as shown in FIG. 149(C), a chance-up effect is executed. The chance-increasing performance is a performance that informs that the level of expectation for winning has increased. Here, a message image MSG reading "Opportunity up" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.
Next, as shown in FIG. 149(D), a pedestal change effect is executed. The pedestal change performance is a performance in which the pedestal image changes. Here, the display color of the pedestal images 9AT and 9CT is red (shown by hatching). For example, the level of expectation is higher for blue than for white, and the level of expectation for red is higher than for blue.

Next, as shown in FIG. 149(E), a development effect is executed. The development performance is a performance that notifies the development from normal reach to SP reach. Here, a message image MSG "Development" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.
Next, as shown in FIG. 149(F), a battle effect is executed. The battle performance is a performance in which an ally character and an enemy character fight, and in the case of a hit, the ally character wins. Here, an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB are displayed. In particular, the pending image 9A and the pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the pending image 9A are not displayed, and only the pending image 9C and the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the pending image 9C are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 149(G), a victory effect is executed. The victory performance is a performance that notifies that an ally character has won the battle performance. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the words "Victory" are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 149(H), a confirmed stop effect (win) is displayed. The guaranteed stop effect (hit) is an effect in which the effect pattern is confirmed to stop when the number is zero. Here, the left presentation pattern 8L, the middle presentation pattern 8C, and the right presentation pattern 8R are all "7". Further, a pending image 9A and a pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the pending image 9A are displayed. It should be noted that the pending image 9C and the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the pending image 9C become non-displayed almost at the same time as the performance symbol and the fixed stop.

[Image production D that supports hold]
FIG. 150 is a diagram for explaining the hold-compatible image effect D.
First, as shown in FIG. 150(A), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, it is shown how the left performance symbol 8L, the middle performance symbol 8C, and the right performance symbol 8R start to fluctuate. Further, at the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending images 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending and the corresponding pending image 9C corresponding to the variation are displayed. Furthermore, a pedestal image 9AT that makes it easy to recognize the display position of the reserved image 9A corresponding to the first special figure reservation, and a pedestal image 9CT that makes it easy to recognize the display position of the reserved image 9C are displayed. Note that the pedestal image 9AT is a horizontally long image that corresponds to the four pending images 9A.

Next, as shown in FIG. 150(B), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation performance is a performance in which the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R temporarily stop at the same number. Here, it is shown that both the left presentation symbol 8L and the right presentation symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at "7".

Next, as shown in FIG. 150(C), a chance-up effect is executed. The chance-up performance is a performance that informs that the expectation level for winning has increased. Here, a message image MSG reading "Opportunity up" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.
Next, as shown in FIG. 150(D), a pedestal change effect is executed. The pedestal change performance is a performance in which the pedestal image changes. Here, the display color of the pedestal images 9AT and 9CT is blue (shown by hatching). The display colors of the pedestal images 9AT and 9CT are changed based on the expectation of winning. For example, the level of expectation is higher for blue than for white, and the level of expectation for red is higher than for blue.

Next, as shown in FIG. 150(E), a development effect is executed. The development performance is a performance that notifies the development from normal reach to SP reach. Here, a message image MSG "Development" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.
Next, as shown in FIG. 150(F), a battle effect is executed. The battle performance is a performance in which an ally character and an enemy character fight, and in the case of a hit, the ally character wins. Here, an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB are displayed. In particular, the pending image 9A, the pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the pending image 9A, and the pending image 9C are not displayed, and only the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the pending image 9C is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 150(G), a defeat effect is executed. The defeat performance is a performance that notifies that an ally character has been defeated in a battle performance. Here, the enemy character CRB is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the words "defeat" are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 150(H), a confirmed stop effect (loss) is displayed. The confirmed stop performance (loss) is a performance in which the performance pattern is determined to stop in a losing manner. Here, both the left presentation pattern 8L and the right presentation pattern 8R are "7", and the middle presentation pattern 8C is "8". Further, a pending image 9A and a pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the pending image 9A are displayed. It should be noted that the pending image 9C and the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the pending image 9C become non-displayed almost at the same time as the performance symbol and the fixed stop.

[Effect example]
An example of the effects of the hold-compatible image production is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the pedestal images 9AT and 9CT can be displayed in correspondence with the pending images (the pending image 9A and the pending image 9C). The display color of the pedestal images 9AT and 9CT can be changed based on the expectation of winning (Fig. 147 (D), Fig. 148 (D), Fig. 149 (D), Fig. 150 (D)). ). According to this configuration, it is possible to surprise the player and improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the pedestal images 9AT and 9CT can be displayed in correspondence with the pending images (the pending image 9A and the pending image 9C). According to this configuration, the pending image 9A and the pending image 9C can be easily recognized, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment described above, the display colors of the pedestal images 9AT and 9CT change based on the degree of expectation of winning in the variation. According to this configuration, it is possible to make the player have a sense of expectation of winning, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the display colors of the pedestal images 9AT and 9CT are changed when the chance up effect is executed (FIG. 147(C), FIG. 148(C), FIG. 149(C), Figure 150(C)). According to this configuration, expectations for the chance-up effect increase, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the battle performance, the pending image 9A and the pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the pending image 9A are hidden, and the pending image 9C and the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the pending image 9C are displayed ( 147(F) and 149(F). According to this configuration, the pending image 9C and the pedestal image 9CT stand out, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the battle performance, the pending image 9A, the pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the pending image 9A, and the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the pending image are hidden, and the pending image 9C is displayed (Fig. 148(F)). According to this configuration, the pending image 9C stands out, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the battle performance, the pending image 9A, the pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the pending image 9A, and the pending image 9C are hidden, and the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the pending image 9C is displayed ( Figure 150(F)). According to this configuration, it is possible to make the player feel uncomfortable, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 8]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the victory presentation or the defeat presentation, the pending image 9A, the pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the pending image 9A, the pending image 9C, and the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the pending image 9C are not displayed. (FIG. 147(G), FIG. 148(G), FIG. 149(G), FIG. 150(G)). According to this configuration, there is a high possibility that the player will be able to pay attention to the victory or defeat of the ally character, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Modified example]
A modified example of the hold-compatible image production is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the above, following the chance-up effect, the pedestal change effect is executed in which the display colors of the pedestal images 9AT and 9CT change. On the other hand, the pedestal change performance may be performed using another performance as an opportunity. Furthermore, the pedestal change effect may be executed at a timing unrelated to other effects.

[Modification 2]
In the above, the display colors of the pedestal images 9AT and 9CT were changed as the pedestal change effect. Instead of or in addition to such a change in display color, the shape of the pedestal images 9AT, 9CT, etc. may be changed.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect G1-1]
A gaming machine capable of displaying a held image and changing the held image to another held image based on the degree of expectation of winning,
It is possible to display a holding corresponding image that makes it easy to recognize the display position of the holding image in correspondence with the display position of the holding image,
Based on the expectation level of winning, it is possible to execute a hold-compatible image change effect that changes the hold-compatible image to another hold-compatible image;
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect G1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect G1-1,
The pending image is a pedestal image displayed below the pending image.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect G1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect G1-1 or aspect G1-2,
The hold-compatible image change performance is executed based on the expectation level of the hit in the current variation, which is the variation.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect G1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects G1-1 to G1-3,
The suspension compatible image change performance is executed in response to execution of a specific performance,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect G1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects G1-1 to G1-4,
The pending images include a pending image corresponding to the current variation, and a pending storage image indicating the pending number.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect G1-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect G1-5,
The pending image includes a pending image corresponding to the pending image, and a pending storage image corresponding to the pending storage image.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect G1-7]
The gaming machine according to aspect G1-6,
In a predetermined effect, it is possible to perform a first display effect in which the held storage image and the held storage corresponding image are hidden, and the held image and the held corresponding image are displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect G1-8]
The gaming machine according to aspect G1-6 or aspect G1-7,
In a predetermined effect, it is possible to perform a second display effect in which the held storage image, the held storage corresponding image, and the held corresponding image are hidden, and the held image is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect G1-9]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects G1-6 to G1-8,
In a predetermined effect, it is possible to perform a third display effect in which the held storage image, the held storage corresponding image, and the held image are hidden, and the held corresponding image is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect G1-10]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects G1-6 to G1-9,
In a predetermined effect, it is possible to execute a fourth display effect in which the suspended storage image, the suspended storage compatible image, the suspended image, and the suspended compatible image are hidden;
A gaming machine characterized by:

The pending image effects A to D will be explained below using FIGS. 151 to 154. This pending image performance can be executed during the variation performance of the performance symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a pending image effect, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays it on the main display device. This is an effect that displays an image on the display screen 7a of 7.

[Holding image production A]
FIG. 151 is a diagram for explaining the suspended image production A.
First, as shown in FIG. 151(A), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, it is shown how the left performance symbol 8L, the middle performance symbol 8C, and the right performance symbol 8R start to fluctuate. Further, at the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending images 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending and the corresponding pending image 9C corresponding to the variation are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 151(B), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation performance is a performance in which the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R temporarily stop at the same number. Here, it is shown that both the left presentation symbol 8L and the right presentation symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at "7".

Next, as shown in FIG. 151(C), a pseudo-continuous notification effect is executed. The pseudo-coupling notification performance is a production that announces the occurrence of a pseudo-coupling. Here, a message image MSG "NEXT" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.
Next, as shown in FIG. 151(D), a re-fluctuation effect is executed. The re-fluctuation performance is a performance in which the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R, which have been temporarily stopped, start to fluctuate at high speed again.

Next, as shown in FIG. 151(E), a development effect is executed. The development performance is a performance that announces the development to SP reach. Here, a message image MSG "Development" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. In particular, the pending image 9A regarding the first special figure pending is not displayed, and only the pending image 9C is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 151(F), a battle effect is executed. The battle performance is a performance in which an ally character and an enemy character fight, and in the case of a hit, the ally character wins. Here, a battle takes place between an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB. Also here, the pending image 9A regarding the first special figure pending is hidden, and only the pending image 9C is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 151(G), a victory effect is executed. The victory performance is a performance that announces that an ally character has won. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the words "Victory" are displayed. In particular, both the pending image 9A regarding the first special figure pending and the pending image 9C are not displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 151(H), a confirmed stop effect (win) is executed. The guaranteed stop effect (hit) is an effect in which the effect pattern is confirmed to stop when the number is zero. Here, the left presentation pattern 8L, the middle presentation pattern 8C, and the right presentation pattern 8R are all "7". Also here, both the pending image 9A regarding the first special figure pending and the pending image 9C are hidden.

[Hold image production B]
FIG. 152 is a diagram for explaining the pending image effect B.
First, as shown in FIG. 152(A), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, it is shown how the left performance symbol 8L, the middle performance symbol 8C, and the right performance symbol 8R start to fluctuate. Further, at the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending images 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending and the corresponding pending image 9C corresponding to the variation are displayed. Furthermore, a pedestal image 9AT that makes it easy to recognize the display position of the reserved image 9A corresponding to the first special figure reservation, and a pedestal image 9CT that makes it easy to recognize the display position of the reserved image 9C are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 152(B), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation performance is a performance in which the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R temporarily stop at the same number. Here, it is shown that both the left presentation symbol 8L and the right presentation symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at "7".

Next, as shown in FIG. 152(C), a pseudo linked notification effect is executed. The pseudo-coupling notification performance is a production that announces the occurrence of a pseudo-coupling. Here, a message image MSG "NEXT" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.
Next, as shown in FIG. 152(D), a re-fluctuation effect is executed. The re-fluctuation performance is a performance in which the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R, which have been temporarily stopped, start to fluctuate at high speed again.

Next, as shown in FIG. 152(E), a development effect is executed. The development performance is a performance that announces the development to SP reach. Here, a message image MSG "Development" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. In particular, the pending image 9A regarding the first special figure pending and the pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the pending image 9A are not displayed, and the pending image 9C and the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the pending image 9C are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 152(F), a battle effect is executed. The battle performance is a performance in which an ally character and an enemy character fight, and in the case of a hit, the ally character wins. Here, a battle takes place between an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB. Also here, the pending image 9A regarding the first special figure pending and the pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the pending image 9A are hidden, and the pending image 9C and the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the pending image 9C are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 152(G), a victory effect is executed. The victory performance is a performance that announces that an ally character has won. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the words "Victory" are displayed. In particular, the pending image 9A related to the first special figure pending, the pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the pending image 9A, the pending image 9C, and the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the pending image 9C are not displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 152(H), a confirmed stop effect (win) is executed. The guaranteed stop effect (hit) is an effect in which the effect pattern is confirmed to stop when the number is zero. Here, the left presentation pattern 8L, the middle presentation pattern 8C, and the right presentation pattern 8R are all "7". Also here, the pending image 9A regarding the first special figure pending, the pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the pending image 9A, the pending image 9C, and the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the pending image 9C are hidden.

[Hold image production C]
FIG. 153 is a diagram for explaining the pending image production C.
First, as shown in FIG. 153(A), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, it is shown how the left performance symbol 8L, the middle performance symbol 8C, and the right performance symbol 8R start to fluctuate. Further, at the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending images 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending and the corresponding pending image 9C corresponding to the variation are displayed. Furthermore, a pedestal image 9AT that makes it easy to recognize the display position of the reserved image 9A corresponding to the first special figure reservation, and a pedestal image 9CT that makes it easy to recognize the display position of the reserved image 9C are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 153(B), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation performance is a performance in which the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R temporarily stop at the same number. Here, it is shown that both the left presentation symbol 8L and the right presentation symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at "7".

Next, as shown in FIG. 153(C), a pseudo linked notification effect is executed. The pseudo-coupling notification performance is a production that announces the occurrence of a pseudo-coupling. Here, a message image MSG "NEXT" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.
Next, as shown in FIG. 153(D), a re-fluctuation effect is executed. The re-fluctuation performance is a performance in which the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R, which have been temporarily stopped, start to fluctuate at high speed again.

Next, as shown in FIG. 153(E), a development effect is executed. The development performance is a performance that announces the development to SP reach. Here, a message image MSG "Development" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. In particular, the pending image 9A regarding the first special figure pending, the pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the pending image 9A, and the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the pending image 9C are hidden, and the pending image 9C is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 153(F), a battle effect is executed. The battle performance is a performance in which an ally character and an enemy character fight, and in the case of a hit, the ally character wins. Here, a battle takes place between an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB. Also here, the pending image 9A regarding the first special figure pending, the pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the pending image 9A, and the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the pending image 9C are hidden, and the pending image 9C is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 153(G), a victory effect is executed. The victory performance is a performance that announces that an ally character has won. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the words "Victory" are displayed. In particular, the pending image 9A related to the first special figure pending, the pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the pending image 9A, the pending image 9C, and the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the pending image 9C are not displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 153(H), a confirmed stop effect (win) is executed. The guaranteed stop effect (hit) is an effect in which the effect pattern is confirmed to stop when the number is zero. Here, the left presentation pattern 8L, the middle presentation pattern 8C, and the right presentation pattern 8R are all "7". Also here, the pending image 9A regarding the first special figure pending, the pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the pending image 9A, the pending image 9C, and the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the pending image 9C are hidden.

[Hold image production D]
FIG. 154 is a diagram for explaining the suspended image effect D.
First, as shown in FIG. 154(A), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, it is shown how the left performance symbol 8L, the middle performance symbol 8C, and the right performance symbol 8R start to fluctuate. Further, at the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending images 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending and the corresponding pending image 9C corresponding to the variation are displayed. Furthermore, a pedestal image 9AT that makes it easy to recognize the display position of the reserved image 9A corresponding to the first special figure reservation, and a pedestal image 9CT that makes it easy to recognize the display position of the reserved image 9C are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 154(B), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation performance is a performance in which the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R temporarily stop at the same number. Here, it is shown that both the left presentation symbol 8L and the right presentation symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at "7".

Next, as shown in FIG. 154(C), a pseudo linked notification effect is executed. The pseudo-coupling notification performance is a production that announces the occurrence of a pseudo-coupling. Here, a message image MSG "NEXT" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.
Next, as shown in FIG. 154(D), a re-fluctuation effect is executed. The re-fluctuation performance is a performance in which the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R, which have been temporarily stopped, start to fluctuate at high speed again.

Next, as shown in FIG. 154(E), a development effect is executed. The development performance is a performance that announces the development to SP reach. Here, a message image MSG "Development" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. In particular, the pending image 9A regarding the first special figure pending and the pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the pending image 9A are not displayed, and the pending image 9C and the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the pending image 9C are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 154(F), a ring effect is performed. The ring performance is a performance performed during a battle performance in which an ally character and an enemy character fight. Specifically, a band-shaped ring image RG rotates around the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB as shown by an arrow YG. Here, the words "very hot" are displayed on the ring image RG, and as the ring image RG rotates, the words "very hot" also move. In particular, the reserved image 9C is displayed on the front side of the ring image RG. On the other hand, the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the pending image 9C is located on the back side of the ring image RG and is not displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 154(G), a victory effect is executed. The victory performance is a performance that announces that an ally character has won. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the words "Victory" are displayed. In particular, the pending image 9A related to the first special figure pending, the pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the pending image 9A, the pending image 9C, and the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the pending image 9C are not displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 154(H), a confirmed stop effect (win) is executed. The guaranteed stop effect (hit) is an effect in which the effect pattern is confirmed to stop when the number is zero. Here, the left presentation pattern 8L, the middle presentation pattern 8C, and the right presentation pattern 8R are all "7". Also here, the pending image 9A regarding the first special figure pending, the pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the pending image 9A, the pending image 9C, and the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the pending image 9C are hidden.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the suspended image effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the first period (FIGS. 151(A), (B), (C), and D) in which the pending image 9A and the pending image 9C are displayed in the fluctuating presentation of the presentation symbol, the pending image 9A 151 (E) and (F)) in which only the pending image 9C is displayed. According to this configuration, it is possible to make the pending image stand out, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the variation performance of the performance symbols includes a third period (FIGS. 151(G) and 151(H)) in which both the pending image 9A and the pending image 9C are hidden. According to this configuration, the player does not have to pay attention to the pending information during this period, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the pedestal image 9AT can be displayed in correspondence with the reserved image 9A, and the pedestal image 9CT can be displayed in correspondence with the reserved image 9C (FIGS. 152, 153, and 154). ). According to this configuration, the display position of the pending image 9A and the pending image 9C can be easily recognized, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the pending image 9A and the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the pending image 9C can be displayed during the first period in which the pending image 9A and the pending image 9C are displayed. (Fig. 152(A)(B)(C)(D), Fig. 153(A)(B)(C)(D), Fig. 154(A)(B)(C)(D))). According to this configuration, the display position of the pending image 9A and the pending image 9C can be easily recognized, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the pending image 9C can be displayed during the second period in which the pending image 9A is hidden and only the pending image 9C is displayed (see FIG. 152). E) (F), Figure 154 (E)). According to this configuration, it is possible to make the pending image 9C stand out, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, during the second period in which the pending image 9A is hidden and only the pending image 9C is displayed, the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the pending image 9C is hidden and only the pending image 9C is displayed. It can be displayed (FIGS. 153(E)(F) and 154(F)). According to this configuration, it is possible to make the reserved image 9C stand out, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, it is possible to execute a ring effect that displays a ring image RG that is displayed on the back side of the pending image 9C and displayed on the front side of the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the held image 9C. (FIG. 154(F)). According to this configuration, the reserved image 9C can be made even more conspicuous, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modified example]
Below, a modified example of the suspended image effect will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above, the order is first period → second period → third period, but each period may appear in any order during the variable performance. Further, it may be included two or more times during the variable performance.

[Modification 2]
In the above, it was possible to execute a ring effect in which the ring image RG is displayed on the back side of the pending image 9C and displayed on the front side of the pedestal image 9CT corresponding to the pending image 9C. In this ring effect, the pending image 9A and the pedestal image 9AT corresponding to the pending image 9A may be displayed. At this time, it is conceivable to display the ring image on the back side of the reserved image 9A and on the front side of the pedestal image 9AT.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect G2-1]
A gaming machine capable of displaying, as a pending image, a pending image corresponding to the current variation, and a pending memory image indicating the number of pending changes,
During the variation of the effect design, it is possible to execute a pending image change effect including a first period in which both the pending image and the pending memory image are displayed, and a second period in which only the pending image is displayed. ,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect G2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect G2-1,
The held image change effect further includes a third period in which both the held image and the held stored image are not displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect G2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect G2-1 or aspect G2-2,
It is possible to display a holding corresponding image that makes it easy to recognize the display position of the holding image in correspondence with the display position of the holding image,
The pending image includes a pending image corresponding to the pending image, and a pending storage image corresponding to the pending storage image.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect G2-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect G2-3,
The pending image is a pedestal image displayed below the pending image.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect G2-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect G2-3 or aspect G2-4,
In the first period, the pending image can be displayed in correspondence with the pending image, and the pending storage compatible image can be displayed in correspondence with the pending storage image.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect G2-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects G2-3 to G2-5,
In the second period, the pending image can be displayed in correspondence with the pending image;
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect G2-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects G2-3 to G2-6,
In the second period, only the pending image can be displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect G2-8]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects G2-3 to G2-7,
A special image display effect that displays a special image that is displayed on the back side of the held image when it overlaps with the held image, and displayed on the front side of the held compatible image when it overlaps with the held image. is practicable,
A gaming machine characterized by:

The disappearing effects A to D of the pending icon will be explained below using FIGS. 155 to 158. In FIGS. 155 to 158, some decorative patterns displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are omitted for the sake of legibility. Some of the first movable accessory 14 and second movable accessory 15 arranged in the figure are also omitted for ease of viewing the drawings.

This display of disappearance of the pending icon can be executed during the variation production of the decorative symbols (for example, during the period from the start of variation to the stop of variation of the decorative symbols). That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands (for example, a variable effect start command, a preliminary determination command) received from the sub-control board 90, and if an instruction to execute the disappearing effect of the pending icon is included. , reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition, the lamp control board 107 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90 (for example, a variable performance start command, a preliminary determination command), and analyzes the left side movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 provided on the game board 2, The position and light emission mode of the right movable accessory 14R may be changed.

Here, first, the pending icon disappearing effect A will be explained, followed by the pending icon disappearing effect B, the pending icon disappearing effect C, and the pending icon disappearing effect D. In addition, in the display of the pending icon disappearing A to the display D of the pending icon disappearing, as will be described later, the pending icon is hidden (disappeared), resulting in a display that gives a strange feeling to the player. This is an effect that suggests to the player that there is a possibility that the player has a chance with a high expectation of winning.

[Disappearance effect A of the relevant pending icon]
First, the disappearance effect A of the pending icon will be explained with reference to FIG. 155. FIG. 155 is a diagram for explaining the disappearing effect A of the pending icon. The display of the pending icon disappearing is performed during the variation display of the decorative pattern.

In the disappearance effect A of the pending icon, first, as shown in FIG. 155(A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the stereoscopic image. A variable display of decorative symbols (symbols: numbers "1" to "9") is started in a display mode in which the right decorative symbols 8R are rotated from the upper side of the display screen 7a to the lower side of the reel. When the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern is started, the decorative pattern that has been stopped and displayed changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed, resulting in a display mode that fluctuates at a high speed. Thereby, the background image placed behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. Immediately before stopping, the decorative pattern decelerates, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed in a stopped state (temporarily stopped and then stopped). In addition, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, it is displayed in a display mode in which it slowly moves slowly in the vertical direction.

Although not shown in the upper right side of the display screen 7a, there is provided a sub-fluctuation area in which small decorative symbols corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed. The small decorative pattern is always in an opaque state, does not become translucent even when fluctuation starts, and does not disappear from the display screen 7a. When the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R start to be displayed in a variable manner, small-sized objects corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, respectively, are displayed in the sub-variable area. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are all stopped and displayed, and at the same time, all the corresponding small-sized decorative patterns are also stopped and displayed. A state in which one or more of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are the same pattern, temporarily stopped, and displayed, and reach is reached. Even if the corresponding small decorative pattern (for example, the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed), the small decorative pattern corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed. Even if the right decorative pattern 8R and the corresponding small decorative pattern) are all kept in a variable display state. In addition, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed and they are not aligned in the same pattern and are out of alignment, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern Each small decorative pattern corresponding to 8C and right decorative pattern 8R may be the same pattern as each of the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, or may be a completely different pattern. good. In addition, if the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and if they are aligned in the same pattern and it is a jackpot, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C , the small decorative patterns corresponding to the right decorative pattern 8R are aligned to the same pattern as the left decorative pattern 8L, the medium decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R.

The pending icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, which are currently being changed as the first special pattern pending, are not displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the corresponding pending display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the hold display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as a first special figure hold. In this hold display area, hold icons 9A can be displayed at four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), so that a maximum of four hold icons 9A can be stocked. The four hold display positions 9Ad are arranged from a position close to the hold display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a: a first hold display position 9Ad, a second hold display position 9Ad, a third hold display position 9Ad, and a fourth hold display position 9Ad. They are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a in order of pending display position 9Ad.

Note that when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the size of the hold icon 9C is the same as the hold icon immediately before the movement. The size is approximately 1.5 times the size of the pending icon 9A, and the shape and color of the pending icon 9C indicate to the player the degree of expectation of winning for the pending icon 9C. On the other hand, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad moves to the third hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad moves to the second hold display position 9Ad. When moving to position 9Ad, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, except when the shape of the hold icon 9A changes to another shape. Therefore, the size of each pending icon 9A is the same as the size of the pending icon 9A immediately before the movement.

Here, at the hidden pending display position 9Cd, the smiling sphere-shaped pending icon 9C (blue here) is displayed, and at the first pending display position 9Ad and the second pending display position 9Ad, a white spherical pending icon 9C is displayed. The icons are respectively displayed, and no pending icon is displayed at the third pending display position 9Ad and the fourth pending display position 9Ad. In other words, the two pending icons 9A, 9A are in a stocked state without being digested.

In addition, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, which was displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 during the variable display of decorative patterns. In addition to the holding icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure holding based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, the holding icon 9B corresponds to the first special drawing holding based on the entering of the game ball into the first starting port 20. The second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is displayed as a number HMG arranged at the upper left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Here, the first special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 is two, and the blue number "2" is on the left, and the second special drawing based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is shown on the left. The number of reserved special drawings is zero, and the red numbers "0" are arranged and displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a, spaced apart from each other on the right side.

Here, to briefly explain the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "pending icon"), the difference in shape and color determines the expectation of winning at the time of lottery corresponding to the pending icon. represents the difference between For example, among the four hold icons: a yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon, a black spherical hold icon, a smiling sphere hold icon, and a white spherical hold icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon is the most The expectation of winning is high, the black spherical pending icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling sphere pending icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical pending icon has the lowest expectation of winning. It has become a thing. The smiling sphere pending icon is further set with a high expectation of winning a jackpot in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (rich jackpot)).

In addition, in the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 after the decorative pattern starts changing in FIG. 155(A).

When the decorative pattern in FIG. 155(A) starts to fluctuate, as shown in FIG. 155(B), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R temporarily stop display with the same pattern (number) (here, the number " 3), and the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed in a variable manner to form a reach. The hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9C are continuously displayed as in FIG. 155(A), the hold display position 9Ad is also displayed as in FIG. 155(A), and the hold display position 9Cd is also hidden as in FIG. 155(A). has been done. In addition, the number HMG (here, "2 0") is also displayed following FIG. 155(A).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 155(C), the first special symbol is reserved based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, and the second special symbol is held based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21. The numbers HMG (in this case, "2 0") each indicating a figure pending are displayed continuously in FIGS. 155(A) and (B), and the two pending icons that were displayed in FIGS. 155(A) and (B) are 9A, the hold icon 9C and the four hold display positions 9Ad disappear, and the hold display position 9Cd newly appears and is displayed. In other words, regarding the hold, the number HMG (here "2 0") and the hold display position 9Cd are displayed, corresponding to the currently changing left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R. When the hold icon 9C disappears, the hold display position 9Cd appears.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 155(D), a message MG saying "It's a jackpot with a win for an ally character!!" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and following on from FIG. 155(C), a number HMG (here "2" is displayed). 0'') and the corresponding hold display position 9Cd are displayed.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 155(E), almost the entire bodies of the two characters CRA and CRB are displayed on the display screen 7a, and an action performance (battle performance) by the two characters CRA and CRB is developed (started). In the action performance (battle performance), an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB appear. After this, a battle takes place between the friendly character CRA and the enemy character CRB, and when the friendly character CRA finally defeats the enemy character CRB, it becomes a jackpot.

Here, the initial stages of action production (battle production) are performed. At the beginning of the action performance (battle performance), the enemy character CRB has the upper hand and is shown cornering the ally character CRA to the right. Regarding the hold, the number HMG (here "2 0") and the relevant hold display position 9Cd are displayed. continues to be displayed in FIG. 155(D).

Next, as shown in Figure 155 (F), in the middle stage of the action performance (battle performance), the friendly character CRA gains the upper hand and corners the enemy character CRB to the left. The HMG (here, "2 0") and the pending display position 9Cd are displayed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 155(G), at the end of the action performance (battle performance), a performance is performed to announce the victory of the ally character CRA, and the ally character CRA is displayed in the center and a "victory" message is displayed. ” is placed and displayed to the left of the ally character CRA, and regarding the hold, the number HMG (here “2 0”) continues to be displayed as shown in FIG. 155(F), while the hold The display position 9Cd is in a non-displayed (disappeared) state. In addition, if a performance is performed to announce the victory of the enemy character CRB at the end of the action performance (battle performance), the enemy character CRB will be displayed in the center and the message MG "defeat" will be displayed to the left of the enemy character CRB. placed and displayed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 155(H), the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, which are the same pattern (in this case, the number "3"), are all stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a. , a jackpot game (jackpot performance) in which a jackpot is won and a profit is given to the player is played. Regarding the hold, the number HMG (here, "2 0") continues to be displayed in FIG. 155(G), and the hold display position 9Cd disappears from the display screen 7a (is not displayed).

In addition, when a performance is performed to announce the victory of the enemy character CRB at the end of the action performance (battle performance), the left decorative pattern 8L is the number "3" and the middle decorative pattern 8C is the number "2" on the display screen 7a. If the right decorative pattern 8R becomes the number "3" and the same pattern (here, the number "3") is stopped and displayed without being aligned, the misalignment will be determined and displayed. In this case, regarding the hold, the number HMG (here, "2 0") is displayed continuously in FIG. 9Ad, and a fourth hold display position 9Ad are displayed, white spherical hold icons are displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad and second hold display position 9Ad, and the third hold display position 9Ad and the fourth hold display position 9Ad are displayed. The hold icon is not displayed at position 9Ad. Furthermore, in response to the confirmed display of failure, the pending display position 9Cd becomes hidden (disappears) from the display screen 7a due to the expiration of the pending icon.

In this way, in the disappearance effect A of the pending icon, although the pending icon 9C is displayed for a while after the decorative pattern starts changing (FIGS. 155 (A) and (B)), the specific effect 155 (C) to (G)), the pending icon 9C is hidden. This provides the player with a novel effect of displaying/hiding the pending icon, which is unprecedented. You can improve your interest.

[Disappearance effect B of the relevant pending icon]
Next, the disappearance effect B of the pending icon will be explained with reference to FIG. 156. FIG. 156 is a diagram for explaining the disappearing effect B of the pending icon. The display of the pending icon disappearing is performed during the variation display of the decorative pattern.

In the disappearance effect B of the pending icon, first, as shown in FIG. 156(A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the stereoscopic image. A variable display of decorative symbols (symbols: numbers "1" to "9") is started in a display mode in which the right decorative symbols 8R are rotated from the upper side of the display screen 7a to the lower side of the reel. When the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern is started, the decorative pattern that has been stopped and displayed changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed, resulting in a display mode that fluctuates at a high speed. Thereby, the background image placed behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. Immediately before stopping, the decorative pattern decelerates, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed in a stopped state (temporarily stopped and then stopped). In addition, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, it is displayed in a display mode in which it slowly moves slowly in the vertical direction.

Although not shown in the upper right side of the display screen 7a, there is provided a sub-fluctuation area in which small decorative symbols corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed. When the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R start to be displayed in a variable manner, small-sized objects corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, respectively, are displayed in the sub-variable area. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are all stopped and displayed, and at the same time, all the corresponding small-sized decorative patterns are also stopped and displayed. A state in which one or more of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are the same pattern, temporarily stopped, and displayed, and reach is reached. Even if the corresponding small decorative pattern (for example, the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed), the small decorative pattern corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed. Even if the right decorative pattern 8R and the corresponding small decorative pattern) are all kept in a variable display state. In addition, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed and they are not aligned in the same pattern and are out of alignment, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern Each small decorative pattern corresponding to 8C and right decorative pattern 8R may be the same pattern as each of the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, or may be a completely different pattern. good. In addition, if the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and if they are aligned in the same pattern and it is a jackpot, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C , the small decorative patterns corresponding to the right decorative pattern 8R are aligned to the same pattern as the left decorative pattern 8L, the medium decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R.

The pending icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, which are currently being changed as the first special pattern pending, are not displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the corresponding pending display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the hold display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as a first special figure hold. In this hold display area, hold icons 9A can be displayed at four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), so that a maximum of four hold icons 9A can be stocked. The four hold display positions 9Ad are arranged from a position close to the hold display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a: a first hold display position 9Ad, a second hold display position 9Ad, a third hold display position 9Ad, and a fourth hold display position 9Ad. They are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a in order of pending display position 9Ad.

Note that when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the size of the hold icon 9C is the same as the hold icon immediately before the movement. The size is approximately 1.5 times the size of the pending icon 9A, and the shape and color of the pending icon 9C indicate to the player the degree of expectation of winning for the pending icon 9C. On the other hand, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad moves to the third hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad moves to the second hold display position 9Ad. When moving to position 9Ad, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, except when the shape of the hold icon 9A changes to another shape. Therefore, the size of each pending icon 9A is the same as the size of the pending icon 9A immediately before the movement.

Here, at the hidden pending display position 9Cd, the smiling sphere-shaped pending icon 9C (blue here) is displayed, and at the first pending display position 9Ad and the second pending display position 9Ad, a white spherical pending icon 9C is displayed. The icons are respectively displayed, and no pending icon is displayed at the third pending display position 9Ad and the fourth pending display position 9Ad. In other words, the two pending icons 9A, 9A are in a stocked state without being digested.

In addition, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, which was displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 during the variable display of decorative patterns. In addition to the holding icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure holding based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, the holding icon 9B corresponds to the first special drawing holding based on the entering of the game ball into the first starting port 20. The second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is displayed as a number HMG arranged at the upper left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Here, the first special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 is two, and the blue number "2" is on the left, and the second special drawing based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is shown on the left. The number of reserved special drawings is zero, and the red numbers "0" are arranged and displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a, spaced apart from each other on the right side.

Here, to briefly explain the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "pending icon"), the difference in shape and color determines the expectation of winning at the time of lottery corresponding to the pending icon. represents the difference between For example, among the four hold icons: a yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon, a black spherical hold icon, a smiling sphere hold icon, and a white spherical hold icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon is the most The expectation of winning is high, the black spherical pending icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling sphere pending icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical pending icon has the lowest expectation of winning. It has become a thing. The smiling sphere pending icon is further set with a high expectation of winning a jackpot in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (rich jackpot)).

In addition, in the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 after the decorative pattern starts changing in FIG. 156(A).

When the decorative pattern in FIG. 156(A) starts to fluctuate, as shown in FIG. 156(B), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R temporarily stop display with the same pattern (number) (here, the number " 3), and the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed in a variable manner to form a reach. The hold icon 9A continues to be displayed as in FIG. 156(A), the hold display position 9Ad continues to be displayed as in FIG. 156(A), and the hold display position 9Cd continues to be hidden as in FIG. 156(A). In addition, the number HMG (here, "2 0") is also displayed following FIG. 156(A). Note that the hold icon 9C is displayed continuously from FIG. 156(A), and is displayed in such a manner that light is also emitted in all directions from the outer circumference of the hold icon 9C.

The pending icon 9C in FIG. 156(B) may be the same as the pending icon 9C (blue here) in FIG. (changes from green to green) may also be used.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 156(C), the first special symbol is reserved based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, and the second special symbol is held based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21. The numbers HMG (in this case, "2 0") each indicating a pending figure are displayed continuously in FIGS. 156(A) and (B), and the two pending icons that were displayed in FIGS. 156(A) and (B) are 9A and the four hold display positions 9Ad disappear, and the hold icon 9C and the light emitted in all directions from the outer circumference of the hold icon 9C continue to be displayed as shown in FIG. 156(B). That is, regarding the hold, the number HMG (here, "2 0") and light are displayed in all directions from the outer circumference of the hold display position 9Cd and the hold icon 9C.

Note that the pending icon 9C in FIG. 156(C) may be the same as the pending icon 9C in FIG. 156(B) (in this case, blue or green), or may change to one with a high expectation of a jackpot. (For example, it may change from blue to green or from green to red).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 156(D), the first special symbol is reserved based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, and the second special symbol is held based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21. The numbers HMG (here, "2 0") indicating the respective pending figures are displayed continuously from FIG. The light emitted in all directions is displayed in such a manner that the size increases as it moves from the hold display position 9Cd to the display screen 7a (or, as it moves from the hold display position 9Cd to the display screen 7a, it rotates in the front and rear directions). (Displayed in such a way that the size increases as it rotates). In addition, in the center of the inner area of the outer frame of the hold icon 9C displayed in a large size, a production button 63 is placed so as to overlap the front surface of the hold icon 9C in order to prompt the player to operate (press) the production button 63. A performance button image BTN imitating is arranged and displayed in a predetermined light emitting manner (in this case, blinking white). The English word "PUSH" is engraved in the part of the production button image corresponding to the pressing operation surface of the production button 63. In addition, below the production button image BTN within the inner area of the outer frame of the large displayed hold icon 9C, the effective period for operation acceptance of the production button 63 (for example, A timer bar TB indicating 3 seconds) is displayed. In addition, the "predetermined lighting mode" may be based on the expectation of a jackpot (variable performance start command), for example, white flashing → blue flashing → green flashing → red flashing → gold flashing (yellow flashing) → seven-color flashing (rainbow flashing) The expectation level of winning the jackpot is set high in the order of blinking (high chance of jackpot).

Furthermore, in FIG. 156(D), the pending display position 9Cd appears and is displayed. In other words, regarding the hold, the number HMG (here "2 0"), the large displayed hold icon 9C, and the light emitted in all directions from the outer circumference of the hold icon 9C are shown in FIG. ), and furthermore, the pending display position 9Cd newly appears and is displayed. In other words, the pending display position 9Cd and the pending icons 9C corresponding to the currently changing left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R appear.

When the player operates (presses) the performance button 63, or when the valid period for accepting the operation of the performance button 63 (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 156(E), the left side movable accessory 14L and The right side movable accessory 14R advances (moves) toward the advance position (in the direction of approaching each other) at the front (front) center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and moves toward the front (front) center of the display screen 7a. In the position (advance position (deployment position)), the left side decorative part, which is half of the ring-shaped decorative part attached to the tip side of the left side movable accessory 14L, and the ring attached to the tip side of the right side movable accessory 14R. The right side decorative part which is half of the decorative part of the shape is combined, and the left side decoration part of the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side decoration part of the right side movable accessory 14R have a ring shape (combined accessory). is formed.

In addition, in FIG. 156(E), regarding the hold, the number HMG (here "2 0"), the hold display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9C displayed in large size, and the outer circumference of the hold icon 9C. The light emitted in all directions continues to be displayed as shown in FIG. 156(D), and corresponds to the pending display position 9Cd and the currently changing left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R. The pending icon 9C appears.

When the left side decoration part of the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side decoration part of the right side movable accessory 14R are combined to form a combined accessory having an annular shape, as shown in FIG. The area to be displayed is a circular area (hereinafter referred to as a "circular area") 14D. On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to this circular area 14D, the hold icon 9C of the smiling sphere displayed in a large size is already arranged in FIG. Since the icon 9C becomes an image expressing the emotion of a smile on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 for the circular area 14D of the combined accessory (that is, the pending icon 9C becomes an image expressing the emotion of the combined accessory). ), it is possible to imbue the combined accessory with emotions. This makes it possible to realize a rich variety of performances based on the emotions of the combined characters.

In addition, in FIG. 156(F), regarding the hold, the number HMG (here "2 0") and the hold display position 9Cd are displayed continuously from FIG. 156(E), and the left decoration which is currently changing. The pending icon 9C corresponding to the pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R becomes an image expressing the emotion of the combined accessory and disappears.

Further, the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R each advance (move) toward the advance position (in the direction of approaching each other) at the front (front) center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and When the left decorative part of the movable accessory 14L and the right decorative part of the right movable accessory 14R are combined to form a ring-shaped combined accessory, the combined accessory is displayed on the display screen 7a at the pending display position. Since a part of the hold display position 9Cd (the upper part of the hold display position 9Cd) is covered, it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the hold display position 9Cd.

Subsequently, the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R move away from each other in the direction in which the left side movable accessory 14L displays an image from the advanced position at the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. As the display screen 7a of the device 7 retreats (moves) toward the left retracted position (home position), the right movable accessory 14R moves the image from the advanced position at the front (front) center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It retreats (moves) toward the retreat position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a of the display device 7.

Note that when the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R move respectively, the pending display position 9Cd is displayed on the display screen 7a, as shown in FIGS. 156(E) and (F). It looks like this.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 156(G), a message MG saying "It's a jackpot with the victory of an ally character!!" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and regarding the hold, a number HMG (here, "2 0") is displayed. ) and the pending display position 9Cd are displayed continuously from FIG. 156(F).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 156(H), almost the entire bodies of the two characters CRA and CRB are displayed on the display screen 7a, and an action performance (battle performance) by the two characters CRA and CRB is developed (started). In the action performance (battle performance), an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB appear. After this, a battle takes place between the friendly character CRA and the enemy character CRB, and when the friendly character CRA finally defeats the enemy character CRB, it becomes a jackpot.

Here, the initial stages of action production (battle production) are performed. At the beginning of the action performance (battle performance), the enemy character CRB has the upper hand and is shown cornering the ally character CRA to the right. Regarding the hold, the number HMG (here, "2 0") and the relevant hold display position 9Cd are displayed. is displayed following FIG. 156(G).

Next, although not shown, in the middle stage of the action performance (battle performance), the friendly character CRA becomes dominant and the enemy character CRB is cornered to the left. 20'') and the pending display position 9Cd continue to be displayed in FIG. 156(H).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 156(I), at the end of the action performance (battle performance), a performance is performed to announce the victory of the enemy character CRB, and the enemy character CRB is displayed in the center with the message "defeat". ” message MG is placed and displayed to the left of the enemy character CRB, and regarding the hold, the number HMG (here, “2 0”) and the corresponding hold display position are displayed following the middle stage of the action performance (battle performance) not shown. 9Cd is displayed. In addition, if a performance is performed to notify the victory of the ally character CRA at the end of the action performance (battle performance), the ally character CRA will be displayed in the center and the message MG "Victory" will be displayed to the left of the ally character CRA. placed and displayed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 156(J), the left decorative pattern 8L is the number "3", the middle decorative pattern 8C is the number "4", and the right decorative pattern 8R is the number "3" on the display screen 7a, and the same symbols are displayed. (Here, the number "3") is stopped and displayed without being aligned, the misalignment is confirmed and displayed. At this time, regarding the hold, the number HMG (here, "2 0") is continuously displayed in FIG. 9Ad, and a fourth hold display position 9Ad are displayed, white spherical hold icons are displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad and second hold display position 9Ad, and the third hold display position 9Ad and the fourth hold display position 9Ad are displayed. The hold icon is not displayed at position 9Ad. Furthermore, in response to the confirmed display of failure, the pending display position 9Cd becomes hidden (disappears) from the display screen 7a due to the expiration of the pending icon.

In addition, when a performance is performed to notify the victory of the ally character CRA at the end of the action performance (battle performance), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are the same pattern ( Here, a jackpot game (jackpot performance) is performed in which the numbers "3" are all stopped and displayed, resulting in a jackpot and a profit being awarded to the player. In this case, regarding the hold, the number HMG (here, "2 0") is displayed continuously from FIG. 156(I), and the hold display position 9Cd disappears from the display screen 7a (is not displayed).

In this way, in the disappearing effect B of the pending icon, although the pending icon 9C is displayed for a while after the decorative pattern starts changing (FIGS. 156(A) to 156(E)), the specific effect 156 (F) to (I)), the pending icon 9C is hidden. This provides the player with a novel effect of displaying/hiding the pending icon, which is unprecedented. You can improve your interest.

[Disappearance effect C of the relevant pending icon]
Next, the disappearance effect C of the pending icon will be explained with reference to FIG. 157. FIG. 157 is a diagram for explaining the disappearing effect C of the pending icon. The display of the pending icon disappearing is performed during the variation display of the decorative pattern.

In the disappearance effect C of the pending icon, first, as shown in FIG. 157(A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the stereoscopic image. A variable display of decorative symbols (symbols: numbers "1" to "9") is started in a display mode in which the right decorative symbols 8R are rotated from the upper side of the display screen 7a to the lower side of the reel. When the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern is started, the decorative pattern that has been stopped and displayed changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed, resulting in a display mode that fluctuates at a high speed. Thereby, the background image placed behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. Immediately before stopping, the decorative pattern decelerates, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed in a stopped state (temporarily stopped and then stopped). In addition, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, it is displayed in a display mode in which it slowly moves slowly in the vertical direction.

Although not shown in the upper right side of the display screen 7a, there is provided a sub-fluctuation area in which small decorative symbols corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed. When the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R start to be displayed in a variable manner, small-sized objects corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, respectively, are displayed in the sub-variable area. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are all stopped and displayed, and at the same time, all the corresponding small-sized decorative patterns are also stopped and displayed. A state in which one or more of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are the same pattern, temporarily stopped, and displayed, and reach is reached. Even if the corresponding small decorative pattern (for example, the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed), the small decorative pattern corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed. Even if the right decorative pattern 8R and the corresponding small decorative pattern) are all kept in a variable display state. In addition, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed and they are not aligned in the same pattern and are out of alignment, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern Each small decorative pattern corresponding to 8C and right decorative pattern 8R may be the same pattern as each of the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, or may be a completely different pattern. good. In addition, if the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and if they are aligned in the same pattern and it is a jackpot, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C , the small decorative patterns corresponding to the right decorative pattern 8R are aligned to the same pattern as the left decorative pattern 8L, the medium decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R.

The pending icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, which are currently being changed as the first special pattern pending, are not displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the corresponding pending display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the hold display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as a first special figure hold. In this hold display area, hold icons 9A can be displayed at four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), so that a maximum of four hold icons 9A can be stocked. The four hold display positions 9Ad are arranged from a position close to the hold display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a: a first hold display position 9Ad, a second hold display position 9Ad, a third hold display position 9Ad, and a fourth hold display position 9Ad. They are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a in order of pending display position 9Ad.

Note that when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the size of the hold icon 9C is the same as the hold icon immediately before the movement. The size is approximately 1.5 times the size of the pending icon 9A, and the shape and color of the pending icon 9C indicate to the player the degree of expectation of winning for the pending icon 9C. On the other hand, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad moves to the third hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad moves to the second hold display position 9Ad. When moving to position 9Ad, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, except when the shape of the hold icon 9A changes to another shape. Therefore, the size of each pending icon 9A is the same as the size of the pending icon 9A immediately before the movement.

Here, the white spherical hold icon 9C is displayed at the hold display position 9Cd, white spherical hold icons are displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad and the second hold display position 9Ad, and the third hold icon is displayed at the hold display position 9Cd. No pending icon is displayed at the pending display position 9Ad and the fourth pending display position 9Ad. In other words, the two pending icons 9A, 9A are in a stocked state without being digested.

In addition, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, which was displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 during the variable display of decorative patterns. In addition to the holding icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure holding based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, the holding icon 9B corresponds to the first special drawing holding based on the entering of the game ball into the first starting port 20. The second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is displayed as a number HMG arranged at the upper left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Here, the first special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 is two, and the blue number "2" is on the left, and the second special drawing based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is shown on the left. The number of reserved special drawings is zero, and the red numbers "0" are arranged and displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a, spaced apart from each other on the right side.

Here, to briefly explain the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "pending icon"), the difference in shape and color determines the expectation of winning at the time of lottery corresponding to the pending icon. represents the difference between For example, among the four hold icons: a yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon, a black spherical hold icon, a smiling sphere hold icon, and a white spherical hold icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon is the most The expectation of winning is high, the black spherical pending icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling sphere pending icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical pending icon has the lowest expectation of winning. It has become a thing. The smiling sphere pending icon is further set with a high expectation of winning a jackpot in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (rich jackpot)).

In addition, in the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 after the decorative pattern starts changing in FIG. 157(A).

When the decorative pattern in FIG. 157(A) starts to change, light is emitted from the center of the white spherical holding icon 9C in all directions for a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times), as shown in FIG. 157(B). , the flash image FH is displayed, and the hold icon 9C disappears (disappears). At this time, the number HMG (here 157(A), and the two hold icons 9A, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd continue to be displayed as shown in FIG. 157(A).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 157(C), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same design (number) (temporarily stopped at the number "3" here), and the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed. is displayed in a fluctuating manner, forming a reach. At this time, the number HMG (here "2 0") will continue to be displayed in FIG. 157(B), and the two pending icons 9A and four pending display positions 9Ad that were displayed in FIG. 157(B) will be newly hidden, and the pending icon 9C is in a hidden state following FIG. 157(B). That is, regarding the hold, the number HMG (here, "2 0") and the hold display position 9Cd are displayed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 157(D), the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R each move toward the advanced position at the front (front) center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (close to each other). At the front (front) center position (advance position (deployed position)) of the display screen 7a, half of the annular decorative part attached to the tip side of the left movable accessory 14L The left side decorative part and the right side decorative part, which is half of the ring-shaped decorative part attached to the tip side of the right side movable accessory 14R, are combined, and the left side decoration part and the right side movable accessory of the left side movable accessory 14L are combined. One decorative member (combined accessory) having an annular shape with the right side decorative portion of 14R is formed.

When the left decorative part of the left movable accessory 14L and the right decorative part of the right movable accessory 14R are combined to form a combined accessory having an annular shape, the area formed within the annular shape is a circular area ( (hereinafter referred to as "circular area") 14D. An image expressing emotion is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to this circular area 14D. Here, an image of the user smiling with his eyes wide open is displayed, and then, although not shown, the image changes to an image of him smiling with his eyes narrowed. By supplementing the circular area 14D of the combined accessory with an image expressing emotion on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the combined accessory can be given emotion. This makes it possible to realize a rich variety of performances based on the emotions of the combined characters.

In addition, in FIG. 157(D), regarding the reservation, the number HMG (here "2 0") is displayed continuously from FIG. 157(C), and the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory are displayed to form a combined accessory. When the accessories 14R start to move, the reserved display position 9Cd that was displayed in FIG. 157(C) is newly hidden.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 157(E), the left side movable accessory 14L moves in the direction in which the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R move away from each other, so that the left side movable accessory 14L moves toward the front side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. (Front) As the movable accessory 14R retreats (moves) from the central advance position to the retreat position (home position) on the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the right movable accessory 14R moves on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It retreats (moves) from the advanced position at the center of the front (front) toward the retracted position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. At this time, when the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R start moving in order to release the formed combined accessory, the corresponding pending display that was hidden in FIG. 157(D) The state is such that position 9Cd appears again. In addition, in FIG. 157(E), regarding the hold, the number HMG (here, "2 0") is displayed continuously from FIG. 157(D).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 157(F), in order to prompt the player to operate (press) the performance button 63, a performance button image BTN imitating the performance button 63 is placed in the center of the display screen 7a. It is displayed in a predetermined light emission mode (in this case, white blinking). The English word "PUSH" is engraved in the part of the production button image corresponding to the pressing operation surface of the production button 63. This effect button image BTN is displayed in a large size at the center of the display screen 7a. In the performance button image BTN, a timer bar TB indicating a valid period for accepting operation of the performance button 63 (for example, 3 seconds) is displayed so as to overlap the lower front surface thereof. At this time, the hold display position 9Cd displayed in FIG. 157(E) disappears (disappears) again. Further, in FIG. 157(F), regarding the hold, the number HMG (here, "2 0") is displayed continuously from FIG. 157(E). In addition, the "predetermined lighting mode" may be based on the expectation of a jackpot (variable performance start command), for example, white flashing → blue flashing → green flashing → red flashing → gold flashing (yellow flashing) → seven-color flashing (rainbow flashing) The expectation level of winning the jackpot is set high in the order of blinking (high chance of jackpot).

When the player operates (presses) the performance button 63, or when the valid period for accepting the operation of the performance button 63 (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 157(G), the left side movable accessory 14L and The right movable accessory 14R advances (moves) toward the advancing position (in a direction close to each other) at the front (front) center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and moves toward the front (front) center of the display screen 7a. At the position (advance position (deployment position)), the left side decoration part of the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side decoration part of the right side movable accessory 14R are combined to form a combined accessory having a ring shape, and a ring shape is formed within the ring shape. An image expressing emotion is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular area 14D. Here, an image of a smiling person wearing sunglasses is displayed. By supplementing the circular area 14D of the combined accessory with an image expressing emotion on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the combined accessory can be given emotion. This makes it possible to realize a rich variety of performances based on the emotions of the combined characters.

In addition, in FIG. 157(G), regarding the hold, the number HMG (here "2 0") is displayed as in FIG. 157(F), and the hold display position 9Cd is not displayed as in FIG. 157(F). The state will be as follows.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 157(H), the left side movable accessory 14L moves in the direction in which the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R move away from each other, so that the left side movable accessory 14L moves toward the front side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. (Front) As the movable accessory 14R retreats (moves) from the central advance position to the retreat position (home position) on the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the right movable accessory 14R moves on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It retreats (moves) from the advanced position at the center of the front (front) toward the retracted position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. At this time, when the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R start moving in order to release the formed combined accessory, the corresponding pending display that was hidden in FIG. 157(G) The state is such that position 9Cd appears again. In addition, in FIG. 157(H), regarding the hold, the number HMG (here, "2 0") is displayed following FIG. 157(G).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 157(I), in order to prompt the player to operate (press) the performance button 63, a performance button image BTN imitating the performance button 63 is placed in the center of the display screen 7a. Displayed in a predetermined lighting manner. The English word "PUSH" is engraved in the part of the production button image corresponding to the pressing operation surface of the production button 63. This effect button image BTN is displayed in a large size at the center of the display screen 7a. In the performance button image BTN, a timer bar TB indicating a valid period for accepting operation of the performance button 63 (for example, 3 seconds) is displayed so as to overlap the lower front surface thereof. At this time, the hold display position 9Cd displayed in FIG. 157(H) disappears (disappears) again. Further, in FIG. 157(I), regarding the hold, the number HMG (here, "2 0") is displayed continuously from FIG. 157(H). Note that the predetermined light emission mode of the performance button image BTN in FIG. 157(I) may be the same as the predetermined light emission mode of the production button image BTN in FIG. 157(F), and the expectation level of a jackpot is high. The light may be changed to something different (for example, from white blinking to blue blinking or gold blinking (yellow blinking)).

When the player operates (presses) the performance button 63, or when the valid period for accepting the operation of the performance button 63 (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, a left decoration is displayed on the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 157(J). When the pattern 8L is the number "3", the middle decorative pattern 8C is the number "4", and the right decorative pattern 8R is the number "3", and the same pattern (here, the number "3") is not aligned and is stopped and displayed, The deviation is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the number HMG (here, "2 0") is displayed following FIG. 157(I), and again the first pending display position 9Ad, second pending display position 9Ad, third pending display position 9Ad, and 4 hold display position 9Ad is displayed, a white spherical hold icon is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad and the second hold display position 9Ad, and a white spherical hold icon is displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad and the fourth hold display position 9Ad. , the hold icon is not displayed, and the hold display position 9Cd reappears. Along with the confirmed display of failure, the pending icon 9C is consumed and the pending icon 9C becomes hidden (disappears).

In addition, in FIG. 157 (J), when the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are all the same (in this case, the number "3") and are stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a, and it becomes a jackpot. , a jackpot game (jackpot performance) in which a profit is given to the player will be played. In this case, regarding the hold, in FIG. 157(J), the number HMG (here "2 0") is displayed continuously as in FIG. 157(I), and the said hold display position 9Cd disappears as in FIG. 157(I) (disappear) state.

In this way, in the disappearing effect C of the pending icon, although the pending icon 9C is displayed for a while after the decorative pattern starts changing (FIGS. 157(A) and 157(B)), the specific effect 157 (C) to (I)), the pending icon 9C is hidden. This provides the player with a novel effect of displaying/hiding the pending icon, which is unprecedented. You can improve your interest.

[Disappearance effect D of the relevant pending icon]
Next, the disappearance effect D of the pending icon will be explained with reference to FIG. 158. FIG. 158 is a diagram for explaining the disappearing effect D of the pending icon. The display of the pending icon disappearing is performed during the variation display of the decorative pattern.

In the disappearance effect D of the pending icon, first, as shown in FIG. 158(A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the stereoscopic image. A variable display of decorative symbols (symbols: numbers "1" to "9") is started in a display mode in which the right decorative symbols 8R are rotated from the upper side of the display screen 7a to the lower side of the reel. When the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern is started, the decorative pattern that has been stopped and displayed changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed, resulting in a display mode that fluctuates at a high speed. Thereby, the background image placed behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. Immediately before stopping, the decorative pattern decelerates, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed in a stopped state (temporarily stopped and then stopped). In addition, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, it is displayed in a display mode in which it slowly moves slowly in the vertical direction.

Although not shown in the upper right side of the display screen 7a, there is provided a sub-fluctuation area in which small decorative symbols corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R are variably displayed. When the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R start to be displayed in a variable manner, small-sized objects corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, respectively, are displayed in the sub-variable area. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are all stopped and displayed, and at the same time, all the corresponding small-sized decorative patterns are also stopped and displayed. A state in which one or more of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are the same pattern, temporarily stopped, and displayed, and reach is reached. Even if the corresponding small decorative pattern (for example, the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed), the small decorative pattern corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed. Even if the right decorative pattern 8R and the corresponding small decorative pattern) are all kept in a variable display state. In addition, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed and they are not aligned in the same pattern and are out of alignment, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern Each small decorative pattern corresponding to 8C and right decorative pattern 8R may be the same pattern as each of the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, or may be a completely different pattern. good. In addition, if the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and if they are aligned in the same pattern and it is a jackpot, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C , the small decorative patterns corresponding to the right decorative pattern 8R are aligned to the same pattern as the left decorative pattern 8L, the medium decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R.

The pending icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, which are currently being changed as the first special pattern pending, are not displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the corresponding hold display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the hold display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as a first special figure hold. In this hold display area, hold icons 9A can be displayed at four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), so that a maximum of four hold icons 9A can be stocked. The four hold display positions 9Ad are arranged from a position close to the hold display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a: a first hold display position 9Ad, a second hold display position 9Ad, a third hold display position 9Ad, and a fourth hold display position 9Ad. They are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a in order of pending display position 9Ad.

Note that when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the size of the hold icon 9C is the same as the hold icon immediately before the movement. The size is approximately 1.5 times the size of the pending icon 9A, and the shape and color of the pending icon 9C indicate to the player the degree of expectation of winning for the pending icon 9C. On the other hand, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad moves to the third hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad moves to the second hold display position 9Ad. When moving to position 9Ad, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, except when the shape of the hold icon 9A changes to another shape. Therefore, the size of each pending icon 9A is the same as the size of the pending icon 9A immediately before the movement.

Here, the yellow (gold) star-shaped pending icon 9C is displayed at the pending display position 9Cd, and the white spherical pending icon is displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad and the second pending display position 9Ad, respectively. The hold icon is not displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad and the fourth hold display position 9Ad. In other words, the two pending icons 9A, 9A are in a stocked state without being digested.

In addition, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, which was displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 during the variable display of decorative patterns. In addition to the holding icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure holding based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, the holding icon 9B corresponds to the first special drawing holding based on the entering of the game ball into the first starting port 20. The second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is displayed as a number HMG arranged at the upper left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Here, the first special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 is two, and the blue number "2" is on the left, and the second special drawing based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is shown on the left. The number of reserved special drawings is zero, and the red numbers "0" are arranged and displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a, spaced apart from each other on the right side.

Here, to briefly explain the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "pending icon"), the difference in shape and color determines the expectation of winning at the time of lottery corresponding to the pending icon. represents the difference between For example, among the four hold icons: a yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon, a black spherical hold icon, a smiling sphere hold icon, and a white spherical hold icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon is the most The expectation of winning is high, the black spherical pending icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling sphere pending icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical pending icon has the lowest expectation of winning. It has become a thing. The smiling sphere pending icon is further set with a high expectation of winning a jackpot in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (rich jackpot)).

In addition, in the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 after the decorative pattern starts changing in FIG. 158(A).

When the decorative pattern in FIG. 158(A) starts to change, as shown in FIG. 158(B), a flash image in which light is emitted from the center of the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon 9C in all directions. FH is displayed and the pending icon 9C disappears (disappears). At this time, the number HMG (here 158(A), and the two hold icons 9A, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display position 9Cd continue to be displayed as shown in FIG. 158(A).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 158(C), the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same pattern (number) (temporarily stopped at the number "3" here), and the middle decorative pattern 8C is displayed. is displayed in a fluctuating manner, forming a reach. At this time, the number HMG (here 158(B), and the two hold icons 9A, the four hold display positions 9Ad, and the hold display positions 9Cd continue to be displayed as shown in FIG. 158(B).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 158(D), the area of the display screen 7a becomes a pseudo abnormal display mode. "Pseudo-abnormal display modes" include, for example, a display mode that looks like a sandstorm, a display mode where the screen is disturbed due to noise, a display mode where the image is not displayed normally due to a processing delay, a display mode where the image cannot be displayed normally due to a processing delay, and a display mode where an alternative screen cannot be returned to the original screen. Examples include a display mode in which a message indicating the performance is displayed.

In FIG. 158(D), when the area of the display screen 7a is in a pseudo abnormal display mode, the first special symbol is held based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, and the second starting port 21 The numbers HMG (in this case, "2 0") respectively indicating the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the game ball are displayed continuously from FIG. 158(C), and are displayed in FIG. The two hold icons 9A and the four hold display positions 9Ad are newly hidden, and furthermore, the hold display position 9Cd that was displayed in FIG. 158(C) is also newly hidden. In other words, regarding the hold, only the number HMG (here, "2 0") is displayed. In addition, in the pseudo abnormality display mode, the position where the number HMG (here, "2 0") is displayed and the area around it may be avoided. In this way, the visibility of the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is ensured. be able to.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 158(E), the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R each move toward the advanced position at the front (front) center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (close to each other). At the front (front) center position (advance position (deployed position)) of the display screen 7a, half of the annular decorative part attached to the tip side of the left movable accessory 14L The left side decorative part and the right side decorative part, which is half of the ring-shaped decorative part attached to the tip side of the right side movable accessory 14R, are combined, and the left side decoration part and the right side movable accessory of the left side movable accessory 14L are combined. One decorative member (combined accessory) having an annular shape with the right side decorative portion of 14R is formed.

When the left decorative part of the left movable accessory 14L and the right decorative part of the right movable accessory 14R are combined to form a combined accessory having an annular shape, the area formed within the annular shape is a circular area ( (hereinafter referred to as "circular area") 14D. An image expressing emotion is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to this circular area 14D. Here, an image of the person smiling with wide-open eyes is displayed, and then, although not shown, the image changes to an image of the person smiling with narrowed eyes. By supplementing the circular area 14D of the combined accessory with an image expressing emotion on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the combined accessory can be given emotion. This makes it possible to realize a rich variety of performances based on the emotions of the combined characters.

In addition, in FIG. 158(E), regarding the hold, the number HMG (here, "2 0") is displayed continuously from FIG. 158(D).

Thereafter, although not shown, the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R move toward the direction in which they are separated from each other, so that the left side movable accessory 14L advances to the center front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. At the same time, the right movable accessory 14R moves back to the front (front) center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It retreats (moves) from this position toward a retreat position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. At this time, when the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R start moving in order to release the formed combined accessory, the corresponding pending display position 9Cd, which was not shown, is moved accordingly. will appear again. That is, regarding the hold, the number HMG (here, "2 0") and the hold display position 9Cd are displayed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 158(F), a message MG saying "It's a jackpot with the victory of an ally character!!" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and regarding the hold, a number HMG (here, "2 0") is displayed. ) and the pending display position 9Cd are displayed continuously in FIG. 158(E).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 158(G), almost the entire bodies of the two characters CRA and CRB are displayed on the display screen 7a, and an action performance (battle performance) by the two characters CRA and CRB is developed (started). In the action performance (battle performance), an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB appear. After this, a battle takes place between the friendly character CRA and the enemy character CRB, and when the friendly character CRA finally defeats the enemy character CRB, it becomes a jackpot.

Here, the initial stages of action production (battle production) are performed. At the beginning of the action performance (battle performance), the enemy character CRB has the upper hand and is shown cornering the ally character CRA to the right. Regarding the hold, the number HMG (here "2 0") and the relevant hold display position 9Cd are displayed. continues to be displayed in FIG. 158(F).

Next, although not shown, in the middle stage of the action performance (battle performance), the friendly character CRA becomes dominant and the enemy character CRB is cornered to the left. 20'') and the corresponding hold display position 9Cd continue to be displayed in FIG. 156(F).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 158(H), at the end of the action performance (battle performance), in order to prompt the player to operate (press) the performance button 63, a performance button image BTN imitating the performance button 63 is displayed. is placed in the center of the display screen 7a and displayed in a predetermined light emitting manner (in this case, blinking white). The English word "PUSH" is engraved in the part of the performance button image corresponding to the pressing operation surface of the performance button 63. This effect button image BTN is displayed in a large size at the center of the display screen 7a. In the performance button image BTN, a timer bar TB indicating a valid period for accepting operation of the performance button 63 (for example, 3 seconds) is displayed so as to overlap the lower front surface thereof. At this time, the hold display position 9Cd displayed in FIG. 158(G) disappears (disappears) again. Further, in FIG. 158(H), regarding the hold, the number HMG (here, "2 0") is displayed continuously from FIG. 158(G). In addition, the "predetermined lighting mode" may be based on the expectation of a jackpot (variable performance start command), for example, white flashing → blue flashing → green flashing → red flashing → gold flashing (yellow flashing) → seven-color flashing (rainbow flashing). The expectation level for a jackpot is set high in the order of blinking (high chance of jackpot).

When the player operates (presses) the performance button 63, or when the valid period for accepting the operation of the performance button 63 (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. A notification effect is performed, and the ally character CRA is displayed in the center, and the message MG "Victory" is placed and displayed to the left of the ally character CRA. Regarding the hold, the number HMG (here "2 0") is displayed. is displayed following FIG. 158(H), and the pending display position 9Cd becomes hidden (disappears) following FIG. 158(H). In addition, if the effect to notify the victory of the enemy character CRB is performed without the effect of announcing the victory of the ally character CRA, the enemy character CRB is displayed in the center and the message MG saying "defeat" is displayed as the enemy character CRB. is displayed to the left of the

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 158 (J), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, which are the same pattern (in this case, the number "3"), are all stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a. , a jackpot game (jackpot performance) in which a jackpot is won and a profit is given to the player is played. Regarding the hold, the number HMG (here, "2 0") continues to be displayed as in FIG. 158(I), and the hold display position 9Cd disappears (is not displayed) as in FIG. 158(I).

In addition, if the effect to notify the victory of the enemy character CRB is performed without the effect to notify the victory of the ally character CRA, the left decorative pattern 8L is the number "3" and the middle decorative pattern 8C is the number "3" on the display screen 7a. If the number "2" and the right decorative pattern 8R become the number "3" and the same symbols (here, the number "3") are stopped and displayed without being aligned, the mismatch will be determined and displayed. In this case, regarding the hold, the number HMG (here, "2 0") is continuously displayed in FIG. 9Ad, and a fourth hold display position 9Ad are displayed, white spherical hold icons are displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad and second hold display position 9Ad, and the third hold display position 9Ad and the fourth hold display position 9Ad are displayed. The hold icon is not displayed at position 9Ad. Furthermore, in conjunction with the confirmed display of failure, the hold display position 9Cd is displayed on the display screen 7a by extinguishing the hold icon 9C.

In this way, in the disappearance effect D of the pending icon, although the pending icon 9C is displayed for a while after the decorative pattern starts changing (FIGS. 158 (A) and (B)), the specific effect 158 (C) to (I)), the pending icon 9C is hidden. This provides the player with a novel effect of displaying/hiding the pending icon, which is unprecedented. You can improve your interest.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the disappearance effect of the pending icon is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 155(A) to 155(H) of the disappearance effect A of the pending icon, the image display device 7 (display means ), and when a variable display of a plurality of decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R) based on the pending icon 9C is started, the pending icon 9C is displayed, and then a plurality of When a specific effect in FIGS. 155(C) to 155(G) is started before the variable display of decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R) is started, the hold icon 9C is pressed. It is possible to perform the first effect of hiding. According to this configuration, although the pending icon 9C is displayed for a while after the decorative pattern starts changing (FIGS. 155(A) and 155(B)), FIGS. 155(C) to 155(G) ), the pending icon 9C is hidden during the period when a specific effect is performed. This makes it possible to provide the player with an innovative effect of displaying/hiding the pending icon, which has not been seen before, and increases the interest. You can improve your performance.
In the disappearance effect B of the pending icon in FIGS. 156(A) to 156(J), the pending icon 9C appears for a while after the decorative pattern starts changing (FIGS. 156(A) to 156(E)). is displayed, but the pending icon 9C is hidden during the period when the specific effects shown in FIGS. 156(F) to 156(I) are performed. It is possible to provide the player with a novel performance called display, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.
In the disappearance effect C of the pending icon in FIGS. 157(A) to 157(J), the pending icon 9C appears for a while after the decorative pattern starts changing (FIGS. 157(A) to 157(B)). is displayed, but the pending icon 9C is hidden during the period when a specific performance is performed (FIG. 157(C) to FIG. 157(I)), which is an unprecedented display of the pending icon. It is possible to provide the player with an innovative performance of non-display, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.
In the disappearing effect D of the pending icon in FIGS. 158(A) to 158(J), although the pending icon 9C is displayed, the period during which a specific effect is performed (FIGS. 158(C) to 158(I) )), it is possible to provide the player with a novel effect of displaying/hiding the pending icon 9C, which has not been seen in the past, and to improve the player's interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 155(A) to 155(H) of the disappearing effect A of the pending icon, a pending display position 9Ad indicating the display position of the pending icon 9A can be displayed. 155(A) to FIG. 155(B) when variable display of a plurality of decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R) is started. Position 9Ad is displayed, and the pending display position 9Ad is hidden during the period from the start to the end of the specific performance in FIGS. 155(C) to 155(G). According to this configuration, by hiding the pending display position 9Ad during the period in which a specific performance is performed (FIGS. 155(C) to 155(G)), the visibility of the specific performance is reduced to the pending display position 9Ad. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the impact of a particular performance from being impaired.
156(F) to 156(I), disappearance effect B of the relevant pending icon, FIG. 157(C) to 157(I), disappearing effect C of the relevant pending icon, and FIG. 158(C) to 158(I ) The same applies to the disappearance effect D of the pending icon.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 155(H) of the disappearance effect A of the pending icon, the first effect includes a plurality of decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, When starting and stopping the variable display of the right decorative pattern 8R), a winning or losing result in a specific lottery is announced (the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are the same pattern (here, , the number "3") are all stopped and displayed.) In some cases, after finishing the specific effects in FIGS. 155(C) to 155(G), the reserved display position 9Ad is continued to be hidden in FIG. 155(H). On the other hand, winners and losers in specific drawings in FIGS. 155(C) to 155(G) are announced (the left decorative pattern 8L is the number "3", the middle decorative pattern 8C is the number "2", and the right decorative pattern 8R is the number "3"). When the number "3" is displayed and the same symbols (in this case, the number "3") are not aligned and are stopped and displayed, a pending display position 9Ad (not shown) is displayed after the specific performance is finished. According to this configuration, when a win or loss in a specific lottery is announced after a specific performance is finished, and a winning game (winning performance) is started, the winning game (winning performance) is displayed at the pending display position 9Ad. Since it is not hindered, it is possible to prevent the impact of the winning game (winning performance) from being lost. Furthermore, even if a player is disappointed due to notification of winning or losing in a particular lottery, the pending display position 9Ad will be displayed, so for example, if there is a pending icon 9A displayed at the pending display position 9Ad, In addition, the color and shape of the pending icon 9A can quickly convey to the player the expectation of winning the pending icon 9A, contributing to an increase in the player's desire to play.
The same applies to the disappearance effect B of the pending icon in FIG. 156(J), the disappearance effect C of the pending icon in FIG. 157(J), and the disappearing effect D of the pending icon in FIG. 158(J).

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 155(C) to 155(H) of the disappearance effect A of the pending icon, the first effect includes a plurality of decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L). , the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R), the pending icon 9A is also hidden during the period in which the pending display position 9Ad is hidden during the period from the start of the variable display until the stopped display. According to this configuration, the hold icon 9A is displayed at the hold display position 9Ad since this is the period in which the specific effects shown in FIGS. 155(C) to 155(G) are performed. By hiding 9A, the visibility of the specific production is not obstructed by the pending display position 9Ad as well as the pending icon 9A, so that it is possible to further prevent the impact of the specific production from being impaired. can.
156(F) to 156(I), disappearance effect B of the pending icon, disappearance effect C of the pending icon shown in FIGS. 157(C) to 157(I), and FIG. 158(C) to 158(I) ) The same applies to the disappearance effect D of the pending icon.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 155(C) to 155(G) of the disappearance effect A of the pending icon, the pending display position 9Cd indicating the display position of the pending icon 9C is The first effect is to display the pending icon during the period from the start of variable display of a plurality of decorative patterns (left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R) to the stop display. During the period in which 9C is hidden (periods in FIGS. 155(C) to 155(F)), the pending display position 9Cd can be displayed. According to this configuration, although the pending icon 9C has started variable display using a plurality of decorative patterns, the pending icon 9C is displayed while the pending icon 9C is hidden. Since the hold display position 9Cd is displayed and the display looks strange, it is possible to provide the player with a sense of discomfort and to suggest to the player that there is a possibility that this is a chance with a high expectation of winning. .
156(F) to 156(I), disappearance effect B of the relevant pending icon, FIG. 157(C) to 157(I), disappearing effect C of the relevant pending icon, and FIG. 158(C) to 158(I ) The same applies to the disappearance effect D of the pending icon.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 155(A) to 155(G) of the disappearance effect A of the pending icon, the specific effect in FIGS. 155(C) to 155(G) can be executed after the variable display of a plurality of decorative symbols (the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R) is started and a reach is formed. According to this configuration, the player is aware that the first effect is such that the hold icon 9C is hidden, triggered by the formation of a reach as the time for playing the game increases. Since the player can discover it by himself/herself, the user can expect to experience a sense of discomfort every time a reach occurs, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distressed even if the playing time becomes long.
156(F) to 156(I), disappearance effect B of the relevant pending icon, FIG. 157(C) to 157(I), disappearing effect C of the relevant pending icon, and FIG. 158(C) to 158(I ) The same applies to the disappearance effect D of the pending icon.

[Modified example]
Below, a modified example of the rendering of the pending icon disappearing will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In the disappearing effect A of the pending icon in FIG. 155, the disappearing effect B of the pending icon in FIG. 156, the disappearing effect C of the pending icon in FIG. 157, and the disappearing effect D of the pending icon in FIG. 158, the pending icon 9C is It was hidden (disappeared) from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the hold icon 9C is hidden (disappeared) from the display screen 7a, a special sound may be played from the speaker 67 to inform the player that the hold icon 9C is hidden (disappeared) from the display screen 7a. . In this way, the player can prevent the player from inadvertently overlooking that the pending icon 9C has become hidden (disappeared) from the display screen 7a. Thereby, it is possible to inform the player that the pending icon 9C is hidden (disappeared) and is displayed in a strange manner.

[Modification 2]
In the disappearing effect A of the pending icon in FIG. 155, the disappearing effect B of the pending icon in FIG. 156, the disappearing effect C of the pending icon in FIG. 157, and the disappearing effect D of the pending icon in FIG. 158, the pending icon 9C is It was hidden (disappeared) from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the display screen 7a becomes hidden (disappears), a countdown effect may be performed on the display screen 7a. As a countdown effect, for example, the number "5", the number "4", the number "3", the number "2", the number "1", and the number "0" are displayed on the display screen 7a. At this time, the sound of numbers being read out (announcement) may be played from the speaker 67. In this way, the player can grasp the timing at which the pending icon 9C becomes hidden (disappears) from the display screen 7a, and can prevent the player from accidentally missing it. Thereby, the timing at which the hold icon 9C is hidden (disappears) can inform the player of the timing at which the display becomes uncomfortable.

[Modification 3]
In the disappearance effect B of the pending icon in FIG. 156(D) and the disappearing effect D in FIG. 158(H), the effect button 63 is pressed to prompt the player to operate (press) the effect button 63. A simulated performance button image BTN was arranged on the display screen 7a and displayed in a predetermined light emitting manner. However, instead of the BTN followed by the production button, a sword image imitating the sword member 64 is placed on the display screen 7a and displayed in a predetermined light emitting manner in order to prompt the player to operate (push) the sword member 64. Alternatively, the performance button image BTN and the sword image may be arranged on the display screen 7a and displayed in a predetermined light emitting manner. In this way, variations can be added to the performance by varying the type of operation method, so even if the playing time becomes long, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's desire to operate the game.

[Modification 4]
In the disappearing effect B of the pending icon in FIG. 156, the disappearing effect C in FIG. 157, and the disappearing effect D in FIG. It was displayed on the display screen 7a. However, instead of the performance button image BTN that imitates the performance button 63, a performance button image that imitates the sword button 65 of the sword member 64 may be used. Even with this configuration, the same effect as the operation (pressing operation) of the production button 63 can be achieved by operating the sword button 65 (pressing operation or pressing operation).

[Modification 5]
In the disappearing effect A of the pending icon in FIG. 155, the disappearing effect C in FIG. 157, and the disappearing effect D in FIG. 158, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R vary. When displayed and a reach is formed, the hold display position 9Ad indicating the display position of the hold icon 9A, the hold display position 9Cd indicating the display position of the hold icon 9A, the hold icon 9C, and the hold icon 9C are displayed on the image display device. 7 may disappear from the display screen 7a. However, once the reach is formed, only the hold display position 9Cd may be always displayed on the display screen 7a.
[Modification 6]
In the disappearing effect A of the pending icon in FIG. 155, the disappearing effect B in FIG. 156, the disappearing effect C in FIG. 157, and the disappearing effect D in FIG. 158, the left decorative pattern 8L, When the middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner, the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C may disappear from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. At this time, either one or both of the hold display position 9Ad indicating the display position of the hold icon 9A and the hold display position 9Cd indicating the display position of the hold icon 9C may be displayed on the display screen 7a. good.

[Modification 7]
Disappearance effect A of the relevant hold icon in FIG. 155, disappearing effect B of the relevant hold icon in FIG. 156, disappearing effect C of the relevant hold icon in FIG. 157, and disappearing effect D of the relevant hold icon in FIG. It is not necessary to include the section, or other effects may be added.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect G3-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
When the variable display of a plurality of decorative symbols based on the pending icon is started, the pending icon is displayed, and if a specific effect is started before the variable display of the plurality of decorative symbols is stopped, the pending icon is displayed. It is possible to execute a first effect of hiding the icon,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect G3-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect G3-1,
It is possible to display the hold display position indicating the display position of the hold icon,
The first performance displays the suspended display position when the variable display of the plurality of decorative symbols is started, and hides the suspended display position during a period from the start to the end of the specific performance. do,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect G3-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect G3-1 or aspect G3-2,
The first performance includes, when starting and stopping the variable display of the plurality of decorative symbols, when announcing a win or loss in a specific lottery, continuing the suspended display position after finishing the specific performance. while displaying the reserved display position after completing the specific performance when notifying winners and losers in a specific lottery;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect G3-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect G3-2 or aspect G3-3,
The first performance is such that the pending icon is also hidden during a period in which the pending display position is hidden during a period from when the fluctuating display of the plurality of decorative symbols starts to when they are stopped and displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect G3-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects G3-1 to G3-4,
It is possible to display the hold display position indicating the display position of the hold icon,
The first performance is capable of displaying the pending display position during a period in which the pending icon is hidden from the period from when the variable display of the plurality of decorative symbols starts until the display stops.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect G3-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects G3-1 to G3-5,
The specific performance is executable after the variable display of the plurality of decorative patterns is started and a reach is formed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The pending icon image display effects A to D will be explained below using FIGS. 159 to 162. This pending icon image display effect may be executed during a variation effect of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute the pending icon image display effect, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the display device 7.

[Pending icon image display effect A]
FIG. 159 is a diagram for explaining the pending icon image display effect A. In the pending icon image display performance A, first, as shown in FIG. 159(A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner. Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a fluctuating manner in which they move vertically at high speed. The decorative patterns include a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R, and are a set of symbols that can notify whether or not it is a hit based on the combination of these stop patterns. A diamond-shaped hold icon 9C is displayed at the hold display position (above the rectangular image) at the lower center of the display screen 7a. Four diamond-shaped hold icons 9A are displayed in the first hold display area on the left side of the hold display position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 159(B), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the variable display of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R disappears. Note that the subsequent performance may be performed in a state in which the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner without erasing the variable display.

Next, as shown in FIG. 159(C), a specific effect is performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the specific image TG2 is displayed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a. The specific image TG2 is displayed on the right side of the pending icon 9C. Specific image TG2 represents a specific target. Here, the specific image TG2 represents a smiley face. Note that the specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose meaning is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist.

Next, as shown in FIG. 159(D), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a hold icon image HAG imitating the hold icon 9C displayed at the hold display position is displayed. The hold icon image HAG is a diamond-shaped image similarly to the hold icon 9C. The hold icon image HAG is displayed above the center of the display screen 7a. The hold icon image HAG is displayed at a position above the hold icon 9C displayed at the hold display position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 159(E), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the hold icon image HAG is displayed so as to move within the display screen 7a. Specifically, the pending icon image HAG displayed at the upper center of the display screen 7a rotates clockwise once so as to draw an ellipse within the display screen 7a. At this time, the display of the specific image TG2 has disappeared on the display screen 7a. Note that during the pending icon image display performance, the specific image TG2 may remain displayed without disappearing after being displayed, or may be made to disappear at an appropriate timing.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 159(F) to (H), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the pending icon image HAG is displayed as if it were moved from within the display screen 7 to the outside of the display screen 7a. be done. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 159(F), the hold icon image HAG displayed above the center of the display screen 7a is displayed so as to move to the right. Then, as shown in FIG. 159(G), the pending icon image HAG further moves to the right and is displayed so as to pop out outside the display screen 7a. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 159(H), the display of the pending icon image HAG disappears on the display screen 7a, as if the pending icon image HAG had jumped out to the right side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 159(I) and 159(J), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the pending icon image HAG is displayed as if moving from outside the display screen 7a into the inside of the display screen 7a. be done. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 159(I), the pending icon image HAG is displayed moving rightward and jumping into the display screen 7a from outside the display screen 7a. Then, as shown in FIG. 159(J), the hold icon image HAG further moves to the right and is displayed at a position above the center of the display screen 7a.

[Pending icon image display effect B]
FIG. 160 is a diagram for explaining the pending icon image display effect B. In the pending icon image display effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 160(A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are variably displayed. Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a fluctuating manner in which they move vertically at high speed. The decorative patterns include image images of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, and are a set of symbols that can notify whether or not it is a hit based on the combination of these stop patterns. A diamond-shaped hold icon 9C is displayed at the hold display position (above the rectangular image) at the lower center of the display screen 7a. Four diamond-shaped hold icons 9A are displayed in the first hold display area on the left side of the hold display position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 160(B), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are in the stopped display position (losing pattern "128"). ”) will be stopped and displayed. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed side by side along the horizontal direction. Here, "lined up horizontally" includes not only lines lined up strictly horizontally but also lines lined up generally horizontally. That is, all the items that a person skilled in the art can recognize as being lined up in the horizontal direction of the display screen 7a are included in the items lined up in the horizontal direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 160(C), a specific effect is performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the display of the hold icon 9C disappears, and the rightmost hold icon 9A in the first hold display area moves to the hold display position and is displayed as the hold icon 9C. Further, the remaining pending icons 9A are also shifted to the right one by one. This completes the variation of the decorative pattern and starts the next variation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 160(D), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a hold icon image HAG imitating the hold icon 9C displayed at the hold display position is displayed. The hold icon image HAG is a diamond-shaped image similarly to the hold icon 9C. The hold icon image HAG is displayed above the center of the display screen 7a. The hold icon image HAG is displayed at a position above the hold icon 9C displayed at the hold display position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 160(E), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the pending icon image HAG is displayed so as to move within the display screen 7a. Specifically, the pending icon image HAG displayed at the upper center of the display screen 7a rotates clockwise once so as to draw an ellipse within the display screen 7a. At this time, the display of the specific image TG2 has disappeared on the display screen 7a. Note that during the pending icon image display performance, the specific image TG2 may remain displayed without disappearing after being displayed, or may be made to disappear at an appropriate timing.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 160(F) to (H), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the pending icon image HAG is displayed as if it were moved from within the display screen 7 to the outside of the display screen 7a. be done. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 160(F), the hold icon image HAG displayed above the center of the display screen 7a is displayed so as to move to the right. Then, as shown in FIG. 160(G), the pending icon image HAG further moves to the right and is displayed so as to pop out outside the display screen 7a. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 160(H), the display of the pending icon image HAG disappears on the display screen 7a, as if the pending icon image HAG had jumped out to the right side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 160(I) and (J), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the pending icon image HAG is displayed as if moving from outside the display screen 7a into the display screen 7a. be done. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 160(I), the pending icon image HAG is displayed so as to jump into the display screen 7a from outside the display screen 7a while moving rightward. Then, as shown in FIG. 160(J), the pending icon image HAG further moves to the right and is displayed at a position above the center of the display screen 7a.

[Pending icon image display effect C]
FIG. 161 is a diagram for explaining the pending icon image display effect C. In the pending icon image display performance C, first, as shown in FIG. 161(A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are variably displayed. Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a fluctuating manner in which they move vertically at high speed. The decorative patterns include image images of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, and are a set of symbols that can notify whether or not it is a hit based on the combination of these stop patterns. A diamond-shaped hold icon 9C is displayed at the hold display position (above the rectangular image) at the lower center of the display screen 7a. Four diamond-shaped hold icons 9A are displayed in the first hold display area on the left side of the hold display position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 161(B), the variable display of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R disappears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Note that the subsequent performance may be performed in a state in which the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner without erasing the variable display.

Next, as shown in FIG. 161(C), a specific effect is performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the specific image TG2 is displayed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a. The specific image TG2 is displayed on the right side of the hold icon 9C. Specific image TG2 represents a specific target. Here, the specific image TG2 represents a smiley face. Note that the specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose meaning is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 161(D) and (E), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a pending icon image HAG imitating the pending icon 9C displayed at the pending display position is displayed. . The hold icon image HAG is a diamond-shaped image similarly to the hold icon 9C. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 161(D), the hold icon image HAG is displayed so as to move upward from the position of the hold icon 9C displayed at the hold display position. The hold icon image HAG is displayed so as to pop out upward from behind (back side) of the hold icon 9C. Then, as shown in FIG. 161(E), the hold icon image HAG moves to a position above the center of the display screen 7a. The hold icon image HAG is displayed at a position above the hold icon 9C displayed at the hold display position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 161(F), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the pending icon image HAG is displayed so as to move within the display screen 7a. Specifically, the pending icon image HAG displayed at the upper center of the display screen 7a rotates clockwise once so as to draw an ellipse within the display screen 7a. At this time, the display of the specific image TG2 has disappeared on the display screen 7a. Note that during the pending icon image display performance, the specific image TG2 may remain displayed without disappearing after being displayed, or may be made to disappear at an appropriate timing.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 161(G) to (I), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the pending icon image HAG is displayed as if it were moved from within the display screen 7 to the outside of the display screen 7a. be done. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 161(G), the hold icon image HAG displayed above the center of the display screen 7a is displayed so as to move to the right. Then, as shown in FIG. 161(H), the pending icon image HAG further moves to the right and is displayed so as to pop out outside the display screen 7a. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 161(I), the display of the pending icon image HAG disappears on the display screen 7a, as if the pending icon image HAG had jumped out to the right side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 161(J), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the pending icon image HAG is displayed as if moving from outside the display screen 7a into the inside of the display screen 7a. Specifically, a coat of arms image EG imitating a circular emblem including a diamond-shaped pending icon image HAG is displayed so as to jump into the display screen 7a from outside the display screen 7a while moving rightward.

[Pending icon image display effect D]
FIG. 162 is a diagram for explaining the pending icon image display effect D. In the pending icon image display performance D, first, as shown in FIG. 162(A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are variably displayed. Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a fluctuating manner in which they move vertically at high speed. The decorative patterns include image images of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, and are a set of symbols that can notify whether or not it is a hit based on the combination of these stop patterns. A diamond-shaped hold icon 9C is displayed at the hold display position (above the rectangular image) at the lower center of the display screen 7a. Four diamond-shaped hold icons 9A are displayed in the first hold display area on the left side of the hold display position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 162(B), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the variable display of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R disappears. Note that the subsequent performance may be performed in a state in which the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner without erasing the variable display.

Next, as shown in FIG. 162(C), a specific effect is performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the specific image TG2 is displayed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a. The specific image TG2 is displayed on the right side of the hold icon 9C. Specific image TG2 represents a specific target. Here, the specific image TG2 represents a smiley face. Note that the specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose meaning is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 162(D) and (E), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position from the right of the first hold display area is modeled. The pending icon image HAG is displayed. The hold icon image HAG is a diamond-shaped image similarly to the hold icon 9A. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 162(D), the hold icon image HAG is moved diagonally upward to the right from the position of the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position from the right in the first hold display area. will be displayed. The hold icon image HAG is displayed so as to pop out diagonally upward to the right from behind (back side) of the hold icon 9A. Then, as shown in FIG. 162(E), the hold icon image HAG moves to a position above the center of the display screen 7a. The hold icon image HAG is displayed at a position above the hold icon 9C displayed at the hold display position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 162(F), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the pending icon image HAG is displayed so as to move within the display screen 7a. Specifically, the pending icon image HAG displayed at the upper center of the display screen 7a rotates clockwise once so as to draw an ellipse within the display screen 7a. At this time, the display of the specific image TG2 has disappeared on the display screen 7a. Note that during the pending icon image display performance, the specific image TG2 may remain displayed without disappearing after being displayed, or may be made to disappear at an appropriate timing.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 162(G) to (I), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the pending icon image HAG is displayed as if it were moved from within the display screen 7 to the outside of the display screen 7a. be done. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 162(G), the hold icon image HAG displayed above the center of the display screen 7a is displayed so as to move to the right. Then, as shown in FIG. 162(H), the pending icon image HAG further moves to the right and is displayed so as to pop out outside the display screen 7a. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 162(I), the display of the pending icon image HAG disappears on the display screen 7a, as if the pending icon image HAG had jumped out to the right side of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 162(J), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the pending icon image HAG is displayed as if moving from outside the display screen 7a into the inside of the display screen 7a. Specifically, a coat of arms image EG imitating a circular emblem including a diamond-shaped pending icon image HAG is displayed so as to jump into the display screen 7a from outside the display screen 7a while moving rightward.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the hold icon image display effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 159 to 162, on the display screen 7a, the first hold icon 9A (the hold icon 9C) is displayed at the hold display position (the hold display position). After the first performance, a second hold icon image HAG that imitates the hold icon 9A (the hold icon 9C) displayed at the hold display position (the hold icon 9C) is displayed on the display screen 7a. It is possible to perform the following. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 161 and 162, in the second effect, the hold icon image HAG is displayed at the hold display position (the hold display position) and the hold icon 9A (the hold icon It is displayed as if moving from the position 9C). According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 159 to 162, after the second effect, a third effect is further executed in which the pending icon image HAG is displayed as moving within the display screen 7a. It is possible. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 159 to 162, after the third effect, the pending icon image HAG is displayed as if moving from within the display screen 7a to the outside of the display screen 7a. It is further possible to perform a fourth effect. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 159 to 162, after the fourth effect, the pending icon image HAG is displayed as if moving from outside the display screen 7a into the inside of the display screen 7a. It is further possible to perform a fifth effect. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 159 to 161, the hold display position is the hold display position, and the hold icon is the hold icon 9C. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 159 to 162, the second effect is performed when a specific effect (for example, display of a specific image TG2, start of the next variation of decorative symbols, etc.) is executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.

[Modified example]
Below, a modified example of the pending icon image display performance will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In FIGS. 159 to 162, the hold icon 9A (the hold icon 9C) has a diamond shape, but the hold icon 9A (the hold icon 9C) may have various other shapes, patterns, colors, etc. The same applies to the hold icon image HAG that imitates the hold icon 9A (the hold icon 9C).
[Modification 2]
In FIGS. 159 to 162, when a specific effect (for example, displaying a specific image TG2, starting the next variation of a decorative pattern, etc.), a pending icon image HAG is displayed on the display screen 7a. The performance may be various other performances. For example, it may occur when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R form a ready-to-reach state, when a specific image is displayed, when a movable member or the like moves, etc.
[Modification 3]
In FIGS. 159 to 162, one pending icon image HAG imitating the pending icon 9A (the pending icon 9C) is displayed on the display screen 7a, but a plurality of pending images HAG may be displayed. . In addition, a hold icon image HAG having the same size as the hold icon 9A (the hold icon 9C) is displayed, but may be larger, smaller, or different in size than the hold icon 9A (the hold icon 9C). may be done.
[Modification 4]
In FIGS. 159 to 162, the pending icon image HAG displayed at the upper center of the display screen 7a moves clockwise around the display screen 7a in an elliptical manner, but the pending icon image HAG The mode of movement within the display screen 7a is not limited to this, and may be moved in various modes. For example, the pending icon image HAG may be moved while rotating.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect G4-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
One of the plurality of types of images is a hold icon,
a first effect in which the hold icon is displayed at a predetermined hold display position in the display means;
After the first effect, a second effect can be performed in which a hold icon image imitating the hold icon displayed at the hold display position is displayed in the display means.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect G4-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect G4-1,
In the second effect, the hold icon image is displayed so as to move from the position of the hold icon displayed at the hold display position.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect G4-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect G4-1 or aspect G4-2,
After the second performance, it is further possible to perform a third performance in which the pending icon image is displayed as moving within the display means;
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect G4-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect G4-3,
After the third effect, it is further possible to perform a fourth effect in which the pending icon image is displayed as if it were moved from within the display means to the outside of the display means.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect G4-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect G4-4,
After the fourth effect, it is further possible to perform a fifth effect in which the pending icon image is displayed as if it were moved from outside the display means into the display means,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect G4-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects G4-1 to G4-5,
The hold display position is the hold display position,
The hold icon is the hold icon,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect G4-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects G4-1 to G4-6,
The second performance is executed when a specific performance is performed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The operation state suggestion effects A to D will be explained below using FIGS. 163 to 166. This operation state suggestion display performance may be executed during a variation performance of decorative symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the fluctuation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if an instruction to execute the operation state suggestion effect is included, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image. The image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7.

[Operation status suggestion display effect A]
FIG. 163 is a diagram for explaining operation section state suggestion production A. In operation section state suggestion performance A, first, as shown in FIG. 163(A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner. Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a fluctuating manner in which they move vertically at high speed. The decorative patterns include image images of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, and are a set of symbols that can notify whether or not it is a hit based on the combination of these stop patterns. A white spherical pending icon 9C is displayed at the pending display position (above the rectangular image) below the center of the display screen 7a. Four white spherical hold icons 9A are displayed in the first hold display area on the left side of the hold display position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 163(B), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are in the stopped display position (the losing pattern "835 ”) will be stopped and displayed. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed side by side along the horizontal direction. Here, "lined up horizontally" includes not only lines lined up strictly horizontally but also lines lined up generally horizontally. That is, all the items that a person skilled in the art can recognize as being lined up in the horizontal direction of the display screen 7a are included in the items lined up in the horizontal direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 163(C), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display of the hold icon 9C disappears, and the rightmost hold icon 9A in the first hold display area is moved to the hold display position. The icon is moved and displayed as the corresponding hold icon 9C. Further, the remaining pending icons 9A are also shifted to the right one by one. This completes the variation of the decorative pattern and starts the next variation. Then, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner. Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a fluctuating manner in which they move vertically at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 163(D), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L (in this embodiment, the pattern image of the number "3") is stopped and displayed at the stop display position. . Specifically, the number pattern image, which is the left decorative pattern 8L, is displayed in a fluctuating manner that moves from top to bottom at high speed, and the number "3" pattern image slowly slows down and stops at the stop display position. Is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 163(E), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the medium decorative pattern 8C (in this embodiment, the pattern image of the number "6") is stopped and displayed at the stop display position. . Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8C, a number pattern image, is displayed in a fluctuating manner that moves from top to bottom at high speed, and the number "6" pattern image slowly slows down and stops at the stop display position. Is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 163(F) and (G), the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed at the stop display position on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the right decorative pattern 8R, which is a number pattern image, is displayed in a fluctuating manner that moves from top to bottom at high speed, and as shown in FIG. 163(F), the right decorative pattern 8R, which is a normal number pattern image The operation state suggestion image SSG, which is a special symbol image other than the symbol image, approaches the stop display position while slowly reducing its moving speed. Then, as shown in FIG. 163(G), the operation state suggestion image SSG, which is the right decorative pattern 8R, is stopped and displayed at the stop display position. As a result, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed at the stop display position in a losing manner. That is, the operation state suggestion image SSG is displayed as at least a part (in this embodiment, the right decorative pattern 8R) of the decorative symbols (left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R) in a losing state.

In the present embodiment, the operation state suggestion image SSG includes a button image BG (operation section image) representing the appearance of the production button 63 (operation section), and is an image that suggests the operation state of the production button 63. Specifically, the operation state suggestion image SSG is an image representing a state in which the production button 63 is in a capsule. The operation state suggestion image SSG suggests that the production button 63 cannot be pressed because the production button 63 is inside the capsule, that is, the operation of the production button 63 is not valid. Aspect 1). At this time, even if the production button 63 is actually pressed, the operation is not valid.

Next, as shown in FIG. 163(H), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display of the hold icon 9C disappears, and the rightmost hold icon 9A in the first hold display area is moved to the hold display position. The icon is moved and displayed as the corresponding hold icon 9C. Further, the remaining pending icons 9A are also shifted to the right one by one. This completes the variation of the decorative pattern and starts the next variation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 163(I), the operation state suggestion image SSG, which is the right decorative pattern 8R, is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The operation state suggestion image SSG is an image representing that the capsule covering the production button 63 is broken and the production button 63 is exposed. The operation state suggestion image SSG changes from a state where the production button 63 cannot be pressed to a state where it can be pressed because the capsule covering the production button 63 is broken, that is, from a state where the production button 63 operation is not valid to a state where the production button 63 operation is valid. (second aspect).

Next, as shown in FIG. 163(J), the operation state suggestion image SSG is displayed as the right decorative pattern 8R on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The operation state suggestion image SSG suggests that since the production button 63 is not inside the capsule, the production button 63 can be pressed, that is, the operation of the production button 63 is valid (third aspect). At this time, when the production button 63 is actually pressed, the operation becomes valid.

In this embodiment, a button image BG and a timer bar TB are displayed as the operation state suggestion image SSG. The timer bar TB indicates the valid period for accepting the operation of the production button 63. The timer bar TB is displayed at a position below the button image BG. Note that the operation state suggestion image SSG includes, in addition to the button image BG and the timer bar TB, an operation promotion image (for example, a text image of "Press!!!") that prompts the player to operate the production button 63. It's okay.

[Operation status suggestion display performance B]
FIG. 164 is a diagram for explaining the operation section state suggestion effect B. In operation section state suggestion performance B, first, as shown in FIG. 164(A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner. Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a fluctuating manner in which they move vertically at high speed. The decorative patterns include image images of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, and are a set of symbols that can notify whether or not it is a hit based on the combination of these stop patterns. A white spherical pending icon 9C is displayed at the pending display position (above the rectangular image) below the center of the display screen 7a. Four white spherical hold icons 9A are displayed in the first hold display area on the left side of the hold display position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 164(B), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are in the stopped display position (losing pattern "835 ”) will be stopped and displayed. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed side by side along the horizontal direction. Here, "lined up horizontally" includes not only lines lined up strictly horizontally but also lines lined up generally horizontally. That is, all the items that a person skilled in the art can recognize as being lined up in the horizontal direction of the display screen 7a are included in the items lined up in the horizontal direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 164(C), the display of the hold icon 9C disappears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the rightmost hold icon 9A in the first hold display area is moved to the hold display position. The icon is moved and displayed as the corresponding hold icon 9C. Further, the remaining pending icons 9A are also shifted to the right one by one. This completes the variation of the decorative pattern and starts the next variation. Then, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner. Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a fluctuating manner in which they move vertically at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 164(D), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L (in this embodiment, the pattern image of the number "3") is stopped and displayed at the stop display position. . Specifically, the number pattern image, which is the left decorative pattern 8L, is displayed in a fluctuating manner that moves from top to bottom at high speed, and the number "3" pattern image slowly slows down and stops at the stop display position. Is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 164(E), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the medium decorative pattern 8C (in this embodiment, the pattern image of the number "6") is stopped and displayed at the stop display position. . Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8C, the number pattern image, is displayed in a fluctuating manner that moves from top to bottom at high speed, and the number "6" pattern image slowly slows down and stops at the stop display position. Is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 164(F) and (G), the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed at the stop display position on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the right decorative pattern 8R, which is a number pattern image, is displayed in a fluctuating manner that moves from top to bottom at high speed, and as shown in FIG. 164(F), the right decorative pattern 8R, which is a normal number pattern image The operation state suggestion image SSG, which is a special symbol image other than the symbol image, approaches the stop display position while slowly reducing its moving speed. Then, as shown in FIG. 164(G), the operation state suggestion image SSG, which is the right decorative pattern 8R, is stopped and displayed at the stop display position. As a result, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed at the stop display position in a losing manner. That is, the operation state suggestion image SSG is displayed as at least a part (in this embodiment, the right decorative pattern 8R) of the decorative symbols (left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R) in a losing state.

In the present embodiment, the operation state suggestion image SSG includes a sword image KG (operation section image) representing the appearance of the sword member 64 (operation section), and is an image that suggests the operation state of the sword member 64. The sword image KG includes a sword button image KBG representing the appearance of the sword button 65. Specifically, the operation state suggestion image SSG shows a state in which the surface of the sword member 64 is covered with ice (the sword member 64 is frozen). The operation state suggestion image SSG shows a state in which the sword member 64 cannot be pushed in because the surface of the sword member 64 is covered with ice (the sword member 64 is frozen), that is, a state in which the operation of the sword member 64 is not effective. It suggests that. At this time, even if the sword member 64 is actually pushed in, the operation is not effective.

Next, as shown in FIG. 164(H), the display of the hold icon 9C disappears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the rightmost hold icon 9A in the first hold display area is moved to the hold display position. The icon is moved and displayed as the corresponding hold icon 9C. Further, the remaining pending icons 9A are also shifted to the right one by one. This completes the variation of the decorative pattern and starts the next variation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 164(I), the operation state suggestion image SSG, which is the right decorative pattern 8R, is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The operation state suggestion image SSG is an image representing that the ice covering the surface of the sword member 64 has melted, leaving the sword member 64 exposed. The operation state suggestion image SSG changes from a state in which the sword member 64 cannot be pushed in because the ice covering the sword member 64 has melted to a state in which it can be pushed in, that is, a state in which the operation of the sword member 64 is not effective. It is suggested that the operation of 64 is switched to a valid state (second aspect).

Next, as shown in FIG. 164(J), the operation state suggestion image SSG is displayed as the right decorative pattern 8R on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The operation state suggestion image SSG suggests that the surface of the sword member 64 is not covered with ice, so the sword member 64 can be pushed in, that is, the operation of the sword member 64 is effective (see Aspect 3). At this time, when the sword member 64 is actually pushed in, the operation becomes effective.

In this embodiment, a sword image KG and a timer bar TB are displayed as the operation state suggestion image SSG. The timer bar TB indicates the valid period for accepting operation of the sword member 64. The timer bar TB is displayed in front of the sword image KG, overlapping the lower part of the sword image KG. Note that the operation state suggestion image SSG includes, in addition to the sword image KG and the timer bar TB, an operation promotion image (for example, a text image of "Push in!!!") that prompts the player to operate the sword member 64. It's okay.

[Operation status suggestion display performance C]
FIG. 165 is a diagram for explaining the operation section state suggestion production C. In the operation section state suggestion production C, first, as shown in FIG. 165(A), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a fluctuating manner in which they move vertically at high speed. The decorative patterns include a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R, and are a set of symbols that can notify whether or not it is a hit based on the combination of these stop patterns. A white spherical pending icon 9C is displayed at the pending display position below the center of the display screen 7a (above the rectangular image). Four white spherical hold icons 9A are displayed in the first hold display area on the left side of the hold display position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 165(B), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are in the stopped display position (the losing pattern "835 ”) will be stopped and displayed. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed side by side along the horizontal direction. Here, "lined up horizontally" includes not only lines lined up strictly horizontally but also lines lined up generally horizontally. That is, all the items that a person skilled in the art can recognize as being lined up in the horizontal direction of the display screen 7a are included in the items lined up in the horizontal direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 165(C), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display of the hold icon 9C disappears, and the rightmost hold icon 9A in the first hold display area is moved to the hold display position. The icon is moved and displayed as the corresponding hold icon 9C. Further, the remaining pending icons 9A are also shifted to the right one by one. This completes the variation of the decorative pattern and starts the next variation. Then, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner. Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a fluctuating manner in which they move vertically at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 165(D), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L (in this embodiment, the pattern image of the number "3") is stopped and displayed at the stop display position. . Specifically, the number pattern image, which is the left decorative pattern 8L, is displayed in a fluctuating manner that moves from top to bottom at high speed, and the number "3" pattern image slowly slows down and stops at the stop display position. Is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 165(E), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the medium decorative pattern 8C (in this embodiment, the pattern image of the number "6") is stopped and displayed at the stop display position. . Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8C, the number pattern image, is displayed in a fluctuating manner that moves from top to bottom at high speed, and the number "6" pattern image slowly slows down and stops at the stop display position. Is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 165(F) and (G), the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed at the stop display position on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the right decorative pattern 8R, which is a number pattern image, is displayed in a fluctuating manner that moves from top to bottom at high speed, and as shown in FIG. 165(F), the right decorative pattern 8R, which is a normal number pattern image The operation state suggestion image SSG, which is a special symbol image other than the symbol image, approaches the stop display position while slowly slowing down its movement speed. Then, as shown in FIG. 165(G), the operation state suggestion image SSG, which is the right decorative pattern 8R, is stopped and displayed at the stop display position. As a result, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed at the stop display position in a losing manner. That is, the operation state suggestion image SSG is displayed as at least a part (in the present embodiment, the right decorative pattern 8R) of the losing decorative patterns (the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R).

In this embodiment, the operation state suggestion image SSG includes a button image BG (operation section image) representing the appearance of the production button 63 (operation section), and is an image that suggests the operation state of the production button 63. Specifically, the operation state suggestion image SSG is an image representing a state in which the production button 63 is in a capsule. The operation state suggestion image SSG suggests that the production button 63 cannot be pressed because the production button 63 is inside the capsule, that is, the operation of the production button 63 is not valid. Aspect 1). At this time, even if the production button 63 is actually pressed, the operation is not valid.

Next, as shown in FIG. 165(H), a specific effect is performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the specific image TG is displayed on the lower right side of the display screen 7a. The specific image TG is displayed on the right side of the hold icon 9C. The specific image TG represents a specific target. Here, the specific image TG represents a smiley face. Note that the specific object is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose meaning is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist.

Next, as shown in FIG. 165(I), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, after the specific image TG is displayed, the operation state suggestion image SSG, which is the right decorative pattern 8R, is displayed. The operation state suggestion image SSG is an image representing that the capsule covering the production button 63 is broken and the production button 63 is exposed. The operation state suggestion image SSG changes from a state where the production button 63 cannot be pressed because the capsule covering the production button 63 is broken to a state where it can be pressed, that is, from a state where the production button 63 operation is not valid to a state where the production button 63 operation is valid. (second aspect).

Next, as shown in FIG. 165(J), the operation state suggestion image SSG is displayed as the right decorative pattern 8R on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The operation state suggestion image SSG suggests that since the production button 63 is not inside the capsule, the production button 63 can be pressed, that is, the operation of the production button 63 is valid (third aspect). At this time, when the production button 63 is actually pressed, the operation becomes valid.

In this embodiment, a button image BG and a timer bar TB are displayed as the operation state suggestion image SSG. The timer bar TB indicates the valid period for accepting the operation of the production button 63. The timer bar TB is displayed at a position below the button image BG. Note that the operation state suggestion image SSG includes, in addition to the button image BG and the timer bar TB, an operation promotion image (for example, a text image of "Press!!!") that prompts the player to operate the production button 63. It's okay.

[Operation status suggestion display effect D]
FIG. 166 is a diagram for explaining the operation section state suggestion effect D. In the operation section state suggestion production D, first, as shown in FIG. 166(A), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a fluctuating manner in which they move vertically at high speed. The decorative patterns include a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R, and are a set of symbols that can notify whether or not it is a hit based on the combination of these stop patterns. A white spherical pending icon 9C is displayed at the pending display position below the center of the display screen 7a (above the rectangular image). Four white spherical hold icons 9A are displayed in the first hold display area on the left side of the hold display position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 166(B), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are in the stopped display position (losing pattern "835"). ”) will be stopped and displayed. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed side by side along the horizontal direction. Here, "lined up horizontally" includes not only lines lined up strictly horizontally but also lines lined up generally horizontally. That is, all the items that a person skilled in the art can recognize as being lined up in the horizontal direction of the display screen 7a are included in the items lined up in the horizontal direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 166(C), the display of the hold icon 9C disappears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the rightmost hold icon 9A in the first hold display area is moved to the hold display position. The icon is moved and displayed as the corresponding hold icon 9C. Further, the remaining pending icons 9A are also shifted to the right one by one. This completes the variation of the decorative pattern and starts the next variation. Then, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner. Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a fluctuating manner in which they move vertically at high speed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 166(D), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L (in this embodiment, the pattern image of the number "3") is stopped and displayed at the stop display position. . Specifically, the number pattern image, which is the left decorative pattern 8L, is displayed in a fluctuating manner that moves from top to bottom at high speed, and the number "3" pattern image slowly slows down and stops at the stop display position. Is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 166(E), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the medium decorative pattern 8C (in this embodiment, the pattern image of the number "6") is stopped and displayed at the stop display position. . Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8C, the number pattern image, is displayed in a fluctuating manner that moves from top to bottom at high speed, and the number "6" pattern image slowly slows down and stops at the stop display position. Is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 166(F) and (G), the right decorative pattern 8R is stopped and displayed at the stop display position on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the right decorative pattern 8R, which is a number pattern image, is displayed in a fluctuating manner that moves from top to bottom at high speed, and as shown in FIG. 166(F), the right decorative pattern 8R, which is a normal number pattern image The operation state suggestion image SSG, which is a special symbol image other than the symbol image, approaches the stop display position while slowly reducing its moving speed. Then, as shown in FIG. 166(G), the operation state suggestion image SSG, which is the right decorative pattern 8R, is stopped and displayed at the stop display position. As a result, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed at the stop display position in a losing manner. That is, the operation state suggestion image SSG is displayed as at least a part (in this embodiment, the right decorative pattern 8R) of the decorative symbols (left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, right decorative pattern 8R) in a losing state.

In this embodiment, the operation state suggestion image SSG includes a button image BG (operation section image) representing the appearance of the production button 63 (operation section), and is an image that suggests the operation state of the production button 63. Specifically, the operation state suggestion image SSG is an image representing a state in which the production button 63 is inside a capsule. The operation state suggestion image SSG suggests that the production button 63 cannot be pressed because the production button 63 is inside the capsule, that is, the operation of the production button 63 is not valid. Aspect 1). At this time, even if the production button 63 is actually pressed, the operation is not valid.

Next, as shown in FIG. 166(H), the display of the hold icon 9C disappears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the rightmost hold icon 9A in the first hold display area is moved to the hold display position. The icon is moved and displayed as the corresponding hold icon 9C. Further, the remaining pending icons 9A are also shifted to the right one by one. This completes the variation of the decorative pattern and starts the next variation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 166(I), the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C are displayed in a variable manner on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C are displayed in a fluctuating manner in which they move at high speed in the vertical direction. On the other hand, the operation state suggestion image SSG is displayed on the right decorative pattern 8R following the previous variation. The operation state suggestion image SSG is an image representing that the capsule covering the production button 63 is broken and the production button 63 is exposed. The operation state suggestion image SSG changes from a state where the production button 63 cannot be pressed because the capsule covering the production button 63 is broken to a state where it can be pressed, that is, from a state where the production button 63 operation is not valid to a state where the production button 63 operation is valid. (second aspect).

Next, as shown in FIG. 166(J), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L and the middle decorative pattern 8C are displayed in a variable manner, and the operation state suggestion image SSG is displayed as the right decorative pattern 8R. Ru. The operation state suggestion image SSG suggests that since the production button 63 is not inside the capsule, the production button 63 can be pressed, that is, the operation of the production button 63 is valid (third aspect). At this time, when the production button 63 is actually pressed, the operation becomes valid.

In this embodiment, a button image BG and a timer bar TB are displayed as the operation state suggestion image SSG. The timer bar TB indicates the valid period for accepting the operation of the production button 63. The timer bar TB is displayed at a position below the button image BG. Note that the operation state suggestion image SSG includes, in addition to the button image BG and the timer bar TB, an operation promotion image that prompts the player to operate the production button 63 (for example, a text image of "Press!!!"), etc. It's okay.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the operation state suggestion display effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 163 to 166, operation section images (button image BG, sword image KG) representing the operation section (operation button 63, sword member 64) are included, and the operation section (operation button 63, sword member 64). After the first presentation, the operation state suggestion image SSG is displayed in the first manner. a second effect displayed in a second mode different from the mode; and after the second effect, the operation state suggestion image SSG is displayed in a third mode different from the first mode and the second mode. It is possible to perform the third performance. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 163 to 166, the first aspect of the operation state suggestion image SSG is when the operation of the operation section (operation button 63, sword member 64) is not valid. The second aspect of the operation state suggestion image SSG indicates that the operation of the operation unit (operation button 63, sword member 64) is changed from a state where the operation of the operation unit (operation button 63, sword member 64) is not valid. The third aspect of the operation state suggestion image SSG suggests that the operation of the operation section (operation button 63, sword member 64) is in a valid state. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 163 to 166, the first effect is a first aspect in which the operation state suggestion image SSG is set as at least a part of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R in the losing state. is displayed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 163, 164, and 166, the first effect, the second effect, and the third effect are the following from the fluctuation of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. Executed across fluctuations. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 163, 164, and 166, the first effect is executed when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R change, and the second effect and the third effect are The performance is executed at the next variation of the decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 163, 164, and 166, the second performance is executed when the next variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R starts. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.

[Modified example]
A modified example of the operation state suggestion display performance is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In FIGS. 163 to 166, the operation part images are the button image BG and the sword image KG representing the operation button 63 and the sword member 64, but are not images representing other operation parts (levers, handles, touch panels, etc.). It's okay.
[Modification 2]
In FIGS. 163 to 166, the operation state suggestion image SSG is displayed as the right decorative pattern 8R among the losing decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, but it may be displayed as the left decorative pattern 8L, or as the middle decorative pattern. It may be displayed as 8C.
[Modification 3]
In FIGS. 163 to 166, the operation state suggestion image SSG is displayed as the right decorative pattern 8R among the losing decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R, but there are multiple decorative patterns such as the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R. or may be displayed as all decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R.
[Modification 4]
In FIGS. 163 to 166, the three aspects of the operation state suggestion image SSG are the effectiveness of the operation of the operation unit (state in which the operation is not valid, switching from a state in which the operation is not valid to a state in which the operation is valid, and the state in which the operation is valid). Although this is a mode that suggests the state of operation), it may also be a mode that suggests, for example, how to operate the operation unit, the direction of operation, etc.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect H1-1]
a display means capable of displaying multiple types of images;
A gaming machine comprising an operation section that can be operated by a player,
One of the plurality of types of images is a decorative pattern,
One of the plurality of types of images is an operation state suggestion image that includes an operation unit image representing the operation unit and suggests an operation state of the operation unit,
a first effect in which the operation state suggestion image is displayed in a first manner;
a second presentation in which, after the first presentation, the operation state suggestion image is displayed in a second mode different from the first mode;
After the second effect, a third effect can be performed in which the operation state suggestion image is displayed in a third mode different from the first mode and the second mode.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect H1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect H1-1,
The first aspect of the operation state suggestion image suggests that the operation of the operation unit is not valid,
The second aspect of the operation state suggestion image suggests that the operation of the operation unit is switched from a state where the operation is not valid to a state where the operation of the operation unit is valid,
The third aspect of the operation state suggestion image suggests that the operation of the operation unit is in a valid state.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect H1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect H1-1 or aspect H1-2,
The first effect is such that the operation state suggestion image is displayed in the first manner as at least a part of the decorative pattern in the losing state.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect H1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects H1-1 to H1-3,
The first performance, the second performance, and the third performance are executed from the said variation of the decorative pattern to the next variation,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect H1-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect H1-4,
The first performance is executed at the time of the variation of the decorative pattern,
The second performance and the third performance are executed when the decorative pattern changes next time.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect H1-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect H1-5,
The second performance is executed when the next variation of the decorative pattern starts.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The operation image stock effects A to D will be explained below using FIGS. 167 to 170. 167 to 170, various reserved images displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are omitted for ease of viewing the drawings, and drawings of decorative patterns displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are also omitted. Some items are omitted for the sake of simplicity, and the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 arranged around the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are also omitted for ease of viewing the drawing. There is something that has been done.

This operation image stock performance can be executed during the variation performance of the decorative symbols (for example, during the period from the start of variation to the stop of variation of the decorative symbols). That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands (for example, a variable effect start command) received from the sub-control board 90, and if an instruction to execute an operation image stock effect is included, the corresponding image is extracted from the ROM 103. The data is read out and an image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition, the lamp control board 107 analyzes various commands (for example, a variable production start command) received from the sub-control board 90, and analyzes the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory of the first movable accessory 14 provided on the game board 2. The position of 14R and the light emission mode may be changed.

Here, the operation image stock effect A will be explained first, followed by the operation image stock effect B, the operation image stock effect C, and the operation image stock effect D in order.

[Operation image stock production A]
First, the operation image stock effect A will be explained with reference to FIG. 167. FIG. 167 is a diagram for explaining the operation image stock effect A. The operation image stock performance A is performed during the variation performance of decorative symbols.

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a left decorative pattern 8L of a stereoscopic image, a middle decorative pattern 8C of a stereoscopic image, and a right decorative pattern 8R of a stereoscopic image are displayed as the reels are rotated from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variable display of decorative patterns (designs: numbers "1" to "9") is started in the display mode. When the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern is started, the decorative pattern that has been stopped and displayed changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed, resulting in a display mode that fluctuates at a high speed. Thereby, the background image placed behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. Immediately before stopping, the decorative pattern decelerates, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed in a stopped state (temporarily stopped and then stopped). In addition, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, it is displayed in a display mode in which it slowly moves slowly in the vertical direction.

In the operation image stock performance A, after the variable display of decorative symbols starts, an action performance (battle performance) is developed (started) as shown in FIG. 167(A). In the action performance (battle performance), an ally character CRA holding a sword and an enemy character CRB holding a sword appear. Here, an effect is developed in which the attack of the friendly character CRA hits the enemy character CRB. In the action performance (battle performance), a battle takes place between an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB, and when the ally character CRA finally defeats the enemy character CRB, it results in a win (big win or small win).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 167(B), in FIG. 167(A), when the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB, a button get effect is developed (started). In the button get performance, a button image BG imitating the performance button 63 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and this displayed button image BG becomes a reward for the action performance (battle performance). The obtained button images BG are displayed and stocked in a pile on the right side of the display screen 7a. Here, two button images BG are obtained, one of which has a character image "long press" attached to it. Above the normal button image BG placed at the bottom (that is, the button image BG that simply imitates the production button 63), a button image BG with a text image of "long press" attached as the second button from the bottom is placed. In this state, two button images BG are stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 167(C), the action performance (battle performance) is developed (started) again. Here, an effect is developed in which the attack of the friendly character CRA hits the enemy character CRB.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 167(D), in FIG. 167(C), when the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB, a button get effect is developed (started). In the button get performance, a button image BG imitating the performance button 63 and a sword image KG imitating the sword member 64 are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the displayed button image BG and sword image KG are used for action performance. (battle performance) reward. The obtained button images BG and sword images KG are displayed and stocked in a pile on the right side of the display screen 7a. The character image "sword" is attached to the handle of the sword image KG. On the other hand, the normal button image BG and the button image BG to which the character image "long press" is attached do not have the character image "button" attached at all. Here, a normal button image is displayed as the third button image from the bottom above the button image BG with the character image "long press" placed second from the bottom, which is already stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a. BG is placed, and above this normal button image BG, a sword image KG is placed as the fourth from the bottom.

In this way, on the right side of the display screen 7a, there are three button images BG (two normal button images BG, one button image BG with a text image of "long press") and one sword. Image KG is arranged. The number of stocked various images (button image BG and sword image KG) (that is, the total number of stocked various images (stock number)) suggests the degree of expectation for a win (big win or small win). In other words, the more the number of stocked images (button image BG and sword image KG) (in other words, the total number of stocked images (stock number)), the higher the expectation of winning (big win or small win). It's supposed to be.

The button image BG with the text image "Long press" has higher expectations for a hit (big hit or small hit) than a normal button image BG (that is, a button image BG that simply imitates the production button 63). It is set high. Furthermore, the sword image KG is set to have a higher expectation of winning (big hit or small hit) than the button image BG to which the character image "long press" is attached. In other words, the degree of expectation for a win (big win or small win) set in the sword image KG is higher than that set in a normal button image BG, and furthermore, compared to this normal button image BG, It is higher than the button image BG with the character image "Long press" which is set high. Furthermore, three button images BG (two normal button images BG, one button image BG with a text image of "long press") and one sword image are arranged on the right side of the display screen 7a. KG is a predetermined light emission mode (in this case, white lighting). The "predetermined lighting mode" is based on the expectation level (variable performance start command) of winning (big hit or small win), for example, white lighting → blue lighting → green lighting → red lighting → gold lighting (yellow lighting) → In addition to the high expectation of winning (big win or small win) in the order of seven colors lighting (rainbow lighting (high chance of winning)), there are also lights blinking white → blinking blue → blinking green → blinking red → blinking gold → blinking yellow )→7-color flashing (Rainbow flashing (high chance of winning)) The expectation level for winning (big hit or small win) is set high.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 167(E), a press promotion effect is developed (started). In the push promotion effect, various images (button images BG and sword images KG) stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a are digested in order from the bottom, and first the normal button image BG arranged at the bottom disappears from the display screen 7a. Along with this, a normal button image BG (that is, a button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63) is displayed in a predetermined light emitting manner as a large button image BG in the center of the display screen 7a. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image that prompts the player to operate (press) the production button 63 moves in small increments in the vertical direction so as to overlap with the upper front part of the button image BG, and overlap with the lower front part of the button image BG. A timer bar TB indicating the valid period (for example, 3 seconds) for accepting the operation of the production button 63 is displayed. Further, above the button image BG, a message MG saying "Press" is displayed to prompt the user to operate (press) the production button 63. Note that the predetermined light emission mode of the large button image BG displayed in the center of the display screen 7a in FIG. It may be the same as the mode, or it may change to something with a high expectation of winning (big win or small win) (for example, from white lighting to white flashing, white lighting to blue lighting (blue flashing), or green lighting (green flashing) ) may be used.

When the player operates (presses) the production button 63, a first normal operation sound (press operation sound) is produced from the speaker 67.

When the player operates (presses) the performance button 63, or when the valid period for accepting the operation of the performance button 63 (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, the display screen 7a is displayed as shown in FIG. 167(F). When the button image BG with the character image ``long press'' stocked on the right side of is digested and the button image BG with the character image ``long press'' disappears from the display screen 7a, the button image BG with the character image ``long press'' disappears from the display screen 7a, and accordingly `` A button image BG with a text image of "Long press" is displayed in a predetermined light emitting manner as a large button image BG in the center of the display screen 7a. This button image BG has a downward arrow image displayed on the upper left side thereof in a manner that moves slightly in the vertical direction to prompt the player to operate (press) the production button 63, and is displayed so as to overlap the front lower part of the button image BG. , a timer bar TB indicating the valid period for accepting operation of the production button 63 (for example, 3 seconds) is displayed. Moreover, above the button image BG, a message MG of "long press" is displayed that urges a long press operation (continuation of the press operation) of the production button 63. Note that the predetermined lighting mode of the large button image BG displayed in the center of the display screen 7a in FIG. It may be the same as the predetermined lighting mode of the button image BG, or it may change to one with a high expectation of winning (big hit or small hit) (for example, from lit white to blinking white, from lit white to lit green ( (blinking green) or lit red (blinking red)) may also be used.

When the player presses and holds the production button 63 (continuation of the press operation) during the valid operation acceptance period (for example, 3 seconds), a first normal operation sound (press operation sound) is generated as a long press operation sound. The music is played continuously from the speaker 67.

When the player presses and holds the production button 63 (continuation of the pressing operation) during the operation reception valid period (for example, 3 seconds), or when the operation reception validity period of the production button 63 has elapsed (for example, 3 seconds), the As shown in 167(G), the normal button image BG stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a is subsequently digested, and when this normal button image BG disappears from the display screen 7a, the normal button image BG disappears from the display screen 7a. An image BG (that is, a button image BG simply imitating the effect button 63) is displayed in a predetermined light emitting manner as a large button image BG in the center of the display screen 7a. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image that prompts the player to operate (press) the production button 63 moves in small increments in the vertical direction so as to overlap with the upper front surface of the button image BG, and overlap with the lower front surface of the button image BG. A timer bar TB indicating the valid period (for example, 3 seconds) for accepting the operation of the production button 63 is displayed. Further, above the button image BG, a message MG saying "Press" is displayed to prompt the user to operate (press) the production button 63. Note that the predetermined light emission mode of the large button image BG displayed in the center of the display screen 7a in FIG. It may be the same as the mode, or it may change to something with a high expectation of winning (big win or small win) (for example, from white lighting to white flashing, white lighting to blue lighting (blue flashing), or green lighting (green flashing) ) may be used.

When the player operates (presses) the production button 63, a first normal operation sound (press operation sound) is produced from the speaker 67.

When the player operates (presses) the production button 63, or when the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the production button 63 has elapsed, the display screen 7a is displayed as shown in FIG. 167(H). When the sword image KG stocked on the right side (arranged on the top row) is digested and this sword image KG disappears from the display screen 7a, the sword image KG is displayed as a large sword image KG in the center of the display screen 7a. Displayed in a predetermined lighting manner. This sword image KG has a downward arrow image displayed on the left side of the front surface in a manner that moves slightly in the vertical direction, prompting the player to operate (pushing) the sword member 64, and is displayed so as to overlap with the lower part of the front surface of the sword image KG. , a timer bar TB indicating a valid period for accepting operation of the sword member 64 (for example, 3 seconds) is displayed. Further, a message MG "Push!!" urging the user to operate (push) the sword member 64 is displayed so as to overlap the upper front surface of the sword image KG. Note that the predetermined light emission mode of the large sword image KG displayed in the center of the display screen 7a in FIG. It may be the same, or it may change to something with a high expectation of winning (big win or small win) (for example, from lit white to blinking white, from lit white to lit green (blinking green) or lit red (blinking red) (change) may also be used.

When the player operates (pushing operation) the sword member 64, or when the valid period for accepting operation of the sword member 64 (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, a first normal operation sound (pushing operation sound) is emitted. A specific sound, which is a different sound and announces the confirmation of winning, is played from the speaker 67, and as shown in FIG. 7a, and a win confirmation effect is performed in which the ally character CRA is displayed in a large size in the center of the display screen 7a. This win confirmation performance is a performance that notifies the player that a win (big win or small win) will occur thereafter. The rainbow image BKH is a background image that announces a confirmed win.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 167(J), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R move between the midpoint of the left side and the midpoint of the right side of the display screen 7a within their own variable display areas. They are lined up and displayed in a line (center line in the left-right direction) connecting them. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed at the number "7", the middle decorative pattern is stopped and displayed at the number "7", and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed at the number "7", so that the same pattern can be displayed. The game is stopped and displayed, resulting in a win (big win or small win), and then a performance (big win performance or small win performance) based on the winning game (big win game or small win game) is started.

Note that when the player operates (pushing) the sword member 64 in FIG. 167(H), or when the valid period for accepting the operation of the sword member 64 (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 167(I). When the rainbow image BKH is not displayed on the display screen 7a as the background image shown in , and the ally character CRA is not displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a, when the player operates the sword member 64 (pushing operation). Along with this, a second normal operation sound (pushing operation sound) is played from the speaker 67, and following FIG. 167(H), the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R each display their own variable display. Within the area, the same symbols (in this case, the number "7") are stopped and displayed in a line connecting the midpoint of the left side and the midpoint of the right side of the display screen 7a (center line in the left-right direction) without being aligned. The deviation will be confirmed and displayed. The second normal operation sound (push operation sound) may be the same sound as the first normal operation sound (push operation sound), or may be a different sound (of course, a sound different from the specific sound). .

In this way, in the operation image stock effect A, the sword image KG is stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a in addition to the button image BG (normal button image BG, button image BG with the character image "long press" attached). When digesting these one by one, the player can operate the production button 63 or the sword member 64, and furthermore, a win (big hit or small hit) occurs. Since the result of winning or not (a win confirmation effect is displayed on the display screen 7a only when a win occurs) can be displayed on the display screen 7a, it is possible to improve the interest. can.

[Operation image stock production B]
Next, the operation image stock effect B will be explained with reference to FIG. 168. FIG. 168 is a diagram for explaining the operation image stock performance B. The operation image stock performance B is performed during the variation performance of decorative symbols.

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, a middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and a right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed as the reels are rotated from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variable display of decorative patterns (designs: numbers "1" to "9") is started in the display mode. When the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern is started, the decorative pattern that has been stopped and displayed changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed, resulting in a display mode that fluctuates at a high speed. Thereby, the background image placed behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. Immediately before stopping, the decorative pattern decelerates and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed (temporarily stopped and then stopped). In addition, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, it is displayed in a display mode in which it slowly moves slowly in the vertical direction.

In the operation image stock performance B, after the variable display of decorative symbols starts, an action performance (battle performance) is developed (started) as shown in FIG. 168(A). In the action performance (battle performance), an ally character CRA holding a sword and an enemy character CRB holding a sword appear. Here, an effect is developed in which the attack of the friendly character CRA hits the enemy character CRB. In the action performance (battle performance), a battle takes place between an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB, and when the ally character CRA finally defeats the enemy character CRB, it becomes a win (big win or small win).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 168(B), in FIG. 168(A), when the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB, a button get effect is developed (started). In the button get performance, a button image BG imitating the performance button 63 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and this displayed button image BG becomes a reward for the action performance (battle performance). The obtained button images BG are displayed and stocked in a pile on the right side of the display screen 7a. Here, we have obtained two button images BG, and above the normal button image BG placed at the bottom (that is, the button image BG that simply imitates the production button 63), there is a normal button as the second from the bottom. Two button images BG are stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a with the image BG (that is, the button image BG simply imitating the production button 63) arranged.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 168(C), the action performance (battle performance) is developed (started) again. Here, an effect is developed in which the attack of the friendly character CRA hits the enemy character CRB.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 168(D), in FIG. 168(C), when the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB, a button get effect is developed (started). In the button get effect, two button images BG imitating the effect button 63 and a sword image KG imitating the sword member 64 are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the displayed button images BG and sword image KG are This is a reward for action production (battle production). The obtained button images BG and sword images KG are displayed and stocked in a pile on the right side of the display screen 7a. One button image BG of the two button images BG that was obtained has a character image "repeat hit" attached thereto. Also, the handle of the obtained sword image KG has an image of the word "sword" attached to it. On the other hand, the normal button image BG and the button image BG to which the character image "Continuous Hit" is attached do not have the character image "Button" attached at all. Here, the third normal button image BG from the bottom is placed above the normal button image BG placed second from the bottom, which is already stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a, and this normal button Above the image BG, a button image BG with the text image "Continuous Hit" is placed, and above the button image BG, with the text image "Continuous Hit" attached, a sword image KG is placed as the fourth from the bottom. be done.

In this way, on the right side of the display screen 7a, there are four button images BG (three normal button images BG, one button image BG with the character image "Continuous Hit") and one sword image. KG and are arranged. The number of stocked various images (button image BG and sword image KG) (that is, the total number of stocked various images (stock number)) suggests the degree of expectation for a win (big win or small win). In other words, the more the number of stocked images (button image BG and sword image KG) (in other words, the total number of stocked images (stock number)), the higher the expectation of winning (big hit or small win). It's supposed to be.

The button image BG with the text image "Continuous Hit" has higher expectations for a hit (big hit or small hit) than a normal button image BG (that is, a button image BG that simply imitates the production button 63). The expectation level is the same as the expectation level for a hit (big hit or small hit) set in the button image BG with the character image “Continuous Hit” shown in FIG. 167(B), or the same level of expectation The expectation level is a slightly lower or a slightly higher expectation level than the expectation level for a hit (big hit or small hit) set in the button image BG with the character image ``sequential hit'' attached. Furthermore, the sword image KG is set to have a higher expectation of winning (big hit or small hit) than the button image BG to which the character image "Continuous Hit" is attached. In other words, the degree of expectation for a win (big win or small win) set in the sword image KG is higher than that set in a normal button image BG, and furthermore, compared to this normal button image BG, It is higher than the button image BG with the character image "Continuous Hit" which is set high. Furthermore, four button images BG (three normal button images BG, one button image BG with a text image of "Continuous Hit") and one sword image KG are arranged on the right side of the display screen 7a. is a predetermined light emission mode (in this case, white lighting). The "predetermined lighting mode" is based on the expectation level (variable performance start command) of winning (big hit or small win), for example, white lighting → blue lighting → green lighting → red lighting → gold lighting (yellow lighting) → In addition to the high expectation of winning (big win or small win) in the order of seven colors lighting (rainbow lighting (high chance of winning)), there are also lights blinking white → blinking blue → blinking green → blinking red → blinking gold → blinking yellow )→7-color flashing (Rainbow flashing (high chance of winning)) The expectation level for winning (big hit or small win) is set high.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 168(E), a press promotion effect is developed (started). In the push promotion effect, various images (button images BG and sword images KG) stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a are digested in order from the bottom, and first, the normal button image BG arranged at the bottom disappears from the display screen 7a. Along with this, a normal button image BG (that is, a button image BG simply imitating the effect button 63) is displayed in a predetermined light emitting manner as a large button image BG in the center of the display screen 7a. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image that prompts the player to operate (press) the production button 63 moves in small increments in the vertical direction so as to overlap with the upper front surface of the button image BG, and overlap with the lower front surface of the button image BG. A timer bar TB indicating the valid period (for example, 3 seconds) for accepting the operation of the production button 63 is displayed. Further, above the button image BG, a message MG saying "Press" is displayed to prompt the user to operate (press) the production button 63. Note that the predetermined light emission mode of the large button image BG displayed in the center of the display screen 7a in FIG. It may be the same as the mode, or it may be changed to something with a high expectation of winning (big win or small win) (for example, from white lighting to white flashing, white lighting to blue lighting (blue flashing)). But that's fine.

When the player operates (presses) the production button 63, a first normal operation sound (press operation sound) is produced from the speaker 67.

When the player operates (presses) the performance button 63, or when the valid period for accepting the operation of the performance button 63 (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 168(F), In D), when the normal button image BG stocked on the right side (arranged second from the bottom) is digested and this normal button image BG disappears from the display screen 7a, the normal button image BG (that is, the effect A button image BG that simply imitates the button 63 is displayed in a predetermined light emitting manner as a large button image BG in the center of the display screen 7a. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image that prompts the player to operate (press) the production button 63 moves in small increments in the vertical direction so as to overlap with the upper front surface of the button image BG, and overlap with the lower front surface of the button image BG. A timer bar TB indicating the valid period for accepting the operation of the production button 63 (for example, 3 seconds) is displayed. Further, above the button image BG, a message MG saying "Press" is displayed to prompt the user to operate (press) the production button 63. Note that the predetermined light emission mode of the large button image BG displayed in the center of the display screen 7a in FIG. It may be the same as the mode, or it may be changed to something with a high expectation of winning (big win or small win) (for example, from white lighting to white flashing, white lighting to blue lighting (blue flashing)). But that's fine.

When the player operates (presses) the production button 63, a first normal operation sound (press operation sound) is produced from the speaker 67.

When the player operates (presses) the performance button 63, or when the valid period for accepting the operation of the performance button 63 (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 168(G), In D), when the normal button image BG stocked on the right side (third place from the bottom) is digested and this normal button image BG disappears from the display screen 7a, the normal button image BG (that is, the effect A button image BG that simply imitates the button 63 is displayed in a predetermined light emitting manner as a large button image BG in the center of the display screen 7a. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image that prompts the player to operate (press) the production button 63 moves in small increments in the vertical direction so as to overlap with the upper front part of the button image BG, and overlap with the lower front part of the button image BG. A timer bar TB indicating the valid period for accepting the operation of the production button 63 (for example, 3 seconds) is displayed. Further, above the button image BG, a message MG saying "Press" is displayed to prompt the user to operate (press) the production button 63. Note that the predetermined light emitting mode of the large button image BG displayed in the center of the display screen 7a in FIG. It may be the same as the mode, or it may be changed to something with a high expectation of winning (big win or small win) (for example, from white lighting to white flashing, white lighting to blue lighting (blue flashing)). But that's fine.

When the player operates (presses) the production button 63, a first normal operation sound (press operation sound) is produced from the speaker 67.

When the player operates (presses) the production button 63, or when the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the production button 63 has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 168(H), the display screen 7a is then displayed. When the button image BG with the character image "Continuous Hit" which is stocked on the right side of is digested and the button image BG with the character image "Continuous Hit" disappears from the display screen 7a, the button image BG with the character image "Continuous Hit" disappears from the display screen 7a. A button image BG with a character image attached thereto is displayed in a predetermined light emitting manner as a large button image BG in the center of the display screen 7a. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image that prompts the player to operate (press) the production button 63 moves in small increments in the vertical direction so as to overlap with the upper front surface of the button image BG, and overlap with the lower front surface of the button image BG. A timer bar TB indicating the valid period (for example, 3 seconds) for accepting the operation of the production button 63 is displayed. Further, above the button image BG, a message MG of "Continuous Hit" is displayed that urges the user to repeatedly press the production button 63 (continuous press operation). Note that the predetermined lighting mode of the large button image BG displayed in the center of the display screen 7a in FIG. It may be the same as the predetermined lighting mode of the button image BG, or it may change to one with a high expectation of winning (big hit or small hit) (for example, from white lighting to white blinking, white lighting to blue lighting (blue (blinking) or lit green (changed to blinking green)).

When the player repeatedly presses the production button 63 (continuous press operation) during the operation reception valid period (for example, 3 seconds), a continuous press operation sound is generated each time the production button 63 is operated (press operation). A first normal operation sound (push operation sound) is made to flow from the speaker 67.

When the player repeatedly presses the performance button 63 (continuous pressing operation), or when the valid period for accepting the operation of the performance button 63 (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 168(I), , when the sword image KG stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a (arranged on the top row) is digested and this sword image KG disappears from the display screen 7a, the sword image KG is displayed in a large size in the center of the display screen 7a. The sword image KG is displayed in a predetermined light emitting manner. This sword image KG has a downward arrow image displayed on the left side of the front surface in a manner that moves slightly in the vertical direction, prompting the player to operate (pushing) the sword member 64, and an image that overlaps with the lower part of the front surface of the sword image KG. , a timer bar TB indicating a valid period for accepting operation of the sword member 64 (for example, 3 seconds) is displayed. Further, a message MG "Push!!" urging the user to operate (push operation) the sword member 64 is displayed so as to overlap the upper front surface of the sword image KG. Note that the predetermined light emission mode of the large sword image KG displayed in the center of the display screen 7a in FIG. 168(I) is different from the predetermined light emission mode of the sword image KG when it is stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a It may be the same, or it may change to something with a high expectation of winning (big win or small win) (for example, from lit white to blinking white, from lit white to lit green (blinking green) or lit red (blinking red) (change) may also be used.

When the player operates the sword member 64 (pushing operation), a second normal operation sound (pushing operation sound) is produced from the speaker 67. Note that the second normal operation sound (push operation sound) may be the same sound as the first normal operation sound (push operation sound), or may be a different sound (a sound different from the specific sound that announces the winning confirmation). ).

When the player operates (pushes) the sword member 64, or when the valid period for accepting the operation of the sword member 64 (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 168(J), the left decorative pattern 8L, middle The decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed in their respective variable display areas in line with a line (center line in the left-right direction) connecting the midpoint of the left side and the midpoint of the right side of the display screen 7a. . Here, the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed at the number "7", the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed at the number "8", and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed at the number "7", so that the same pattern (Here, the number "7") is stopped and displayed without being aligned, and the misalignment is confirmed and displayed.

Note that in FIG. 168(I), if the player operates (pushing) the sword member 64, or if the valid period for accepting the operation of the sword member 64 (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, A specific sound that is different from the first normal operation sound (press operation sound) and that announces a confirmed win is played from the speaker 67, and an image having seven colors as a background image (so-called "rainbow image") is displayed on the display screen. 7a, and a winning confirmation effect may be performed in which the ally character CRA is displayed in a large size in the center of the display screen 7a. This win confirmation performance is a performance that notifies the player that a win (big win or small win) will occur thereafter. The rainbow image is a background image that announces a confirmed win. When the rainbow image and the ally character CRA are displayed on the display screen 7a, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are placed at the midpoint of the left side of the display screen 7a within their own variable display areas. The same symbol (in this case, the number 7) is lined up in a line connecting the right side and the midpoint of the right side (center line in the left and right direction), and the same symbol (in this case, the number "7") is displayed in a fixed state, and the win (big hit or small hit) is confirmed and displayed. After that, a performance (big win performance or small win performance) based on a winning game (big win game or small win game) will be started.

In this way, in the operation image stock effect B, the sword image KG is stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a in addition to the button image BG (the normal button image BG, the button image BG with the character image "Continuous Hit"). , When digesting these one by one, the player can operate the production button 63 or the sword member 64, and furthermore, a win (big win or small win) occurs. Since it is possible to display the result of whether or not the game is successful (a winning confirmation effect is displayed on the display screen 7a only when a win occurs) on the display screen 7a, it is possible to improve the interest. .

[Operation image stock production C]
Next, the operation image stock effect C will be explained with reference to FIG. 169. FIG. 169 is a diagram for explaining the operation image stock effect C. The operation image stock performance C is performed during the variation performance of decorative symbols.

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a left decorative pattern 8L of a stereoscopic image, a middle decorative pattern 8C of a stereoscopic image, and a right decorative pattern 8R of a stereoscopic image are displayed as the reels are rotated from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variable display of decorative patterns (designs: numbers "1" to "9") is started in the display mode. When the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern is started, the decorative pattern that has been stopped and displayed changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed, resulting in a display mode that fluctuates at a high speed. Thereby, the background image placed behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. Immediately before stopping, the decorative pattern decelerates, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed in a stopped state (temporarily stopped and then stopped). In addition, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, it is displayed in a display mode in which it slowly moves slowly in the vertical direction.

In operation image stock performance C, after the variable display of decorative symbols starts, an action performance (battle performance) is developed (started) as shown in FIG. 169(A). In the action performance (battle performance), an ally character CRA holding a sword and an enemy character CRB holding a sword appear. Here, an effect is developed in which the attack of the friendly character CRA hits the enemy character CRB. In the action performance (battle performance), a battle takes place between an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB, and when the ally character CRA finally defeats the enemy character CRB, it results in a win (big win or small win).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 169(B), in FIG. 169(A), when the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB, a button get effect is developed (started). In the button get performance, a button image BG imitating the performance button 63 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and this displayed button image BG becomes a reward for the action performance (battle performance). The obtained button images BG are displayed and stocked in a pile on the right side of the display screen 7a. Here, we have obtained three button images BG, and above the normal button image BG placed at the bottom (that is, the button image BG that simply imitates the production button 63), there is a normal button as the second from the bottom. An image BG (that is, a button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63) is placed above the second normal button image BG from the bottom, and a normal button image BG (that is, a button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63) as the third from the bottom. Three button images BG are stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a, with the imitated button images BG) arranged.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 169(C), the action performance (battle performance) is developed (started) again. Here, an effect is developed in which the attack of the friendly character CRA hits the enemy character CRB. Note that an effect may be developed in which the ally character CRA retreats due to an attack from the enemy character CRB.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 169(D), in FIG. 169(C), when the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB, a button get effect is developed (started). In the button get performance, a button image BG imitating the performance button 63 and a sword image KG imitating the sword member 64 are displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the displayed button image BG and sword image KG are used for action performance. (battle performance) reward. The obtained button images BG and sword images KG are displayed and stocked in a pile on the right side of the display screen 7a. The character image "sword" is attached to the handle of the sword image KG. On the other hand, the normal button image BG does not have the character image "button" attached at all. Here, the fourth normal button image BG from the bottom is placed above the third normal button image BG from the bottom, which is already stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a, and this normal button A sword image KG is placed above the image BG as the fifth sword image from the bottom. In addition, in FIG. 169(C), when the button loss effect described later is developed (started) as the ally character CRA retreats due to the attack from the enemy character CRB, the already obtained (obtained) effect button 63 is imitated. The button image BG and the sword image KG imitating the sword member 64 are lost, and the various images (button image BG and sword image KG) stacked up on the right side of the display screen 7a are moved from the bottom to the top. Only one or more of them will disappear from the display screen 7a.

In this way, four button images BG (four normal button images BG and one sword image KG) are arranged on the right side of the display screen 7a. Various stock images ( The number of button images BG and sword images KG (in other words, the total number of stocked images (stock number)) suggests the degree of expectation for a win (big win or small win).In other words, the number of stocked images ( The more the number of button images BG and sword images KG (that is, the total number of stocked images (stock number)) increases, the higher the expectation for winning (big win or small win).

The sword image KG is set to have a higher expectation of winning (big hit or small hit) than the normal button image BG. Furthermore, four button images BG (four normal button images BG) and one sword image KG arranged on the right side of the display screen 7a have a predetermined light emission mode (in this case, white lighting). The "predetermined lighting mode" is based on the expectation level (variable performance start command) of winning (big win or small win), for example, white lighting → blue lighting → green lighting → red lighting → gold lighting (yellow lighting) → In addition to the high expectation of winning (big win or small win) in the order of seven colors lighting (rainbow lighting (high chance of winning)), there are also lights flashing white → flashing blue → flashing green → flashing red → flashing gold → flashing yellow (blinking yellow) )→7-color flashing (Rainbow flashing (high chance of winning)) The expectation of winning (big hit or small win) is set high.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 169(E), the action performance (battle performance) is developed (started) again. Here, an effect is developed in which the ally character CRA retreats due to an attack from the enemy character CRB.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 169(F), a button loss effect is developed (started) as the ally character CRA retreats due to the attack from the enemy character CRB in FIG. 169(E). In the button loss effect, the button image BG imitating the effect button 63 obtained (obtained) through the button get effect and the sword image KG imitating the sword member 64 are lost and displayed in a pile on the right side of the display screen 7a. One or more of the various images (button image BG and sword image KG) disappear from the display screen 7a from the bottom to the top and are forcibly digested. Here, the button image BG placed at the bottom and the button image BG placed second from the bottom in FIG. 169(D) disappear.

Note that the action performance (battle performance) may not be developed again in FIG. 169(E). In this case, a press promotion effect is developed (started). In the press promotion effect, the two button images BG stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a are digested in order from the bottom, and when the normal button image BG placed at the bottom disappears from the display screen 7a, the normal button image BG is A button image BG (that is, a button image BG simply imitating the production button 63) is displayed as a large button image BG in a predetermined light emitting manner in the center of the display screen 7a. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image that prompts the player to operate (press) the production button 63 moves in small increments in the vertical direction so as to overlap with the upper front surface of the button image BG, and overlap with the lower front surface of the button image BG. A timer bar indicating the valid period for accepting the operation of the production button 63 (for example, 3 seconds) is displayed. Furthermore, above the button image BG, a message "Press" is displayed that prompts the user to operate (press) the production button 63. The predetermined light emitting mode of the large button image BG displayed in the center of the display screen 7a may be the same as the predetermined light emitting mode of the normal button image BG when it is stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a. However, even if it changes to something that has a high expectation of winning (big win or small win) (for example, from white lighting to white blinking, white lighting to blue lighting (blue blinking) or green lighting (green blinking)) good. When the player operates (presses) the production button 63, a first normal operation sound (press operation sound) is produced from the speaker 67. When the player operates (presses) the performance button 63, or when the valid period for accepting the operation of the performance button 63 (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, the above-described pressing promotion performance is developed (started) again, and the player When the operator operates (presses) the effect button 63, or when the valid period for accepting the operation of the effect button 63 (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, the process proceeds to FIG. 169(G).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 169(G), the action performance (battle performance) is developed (started) again. Here, an effect is developed in which the ally character CRA retreats due to an attack from the enemy character CRB. Note that an effect may be developed in which the attack of the friendly character CRA hits the enemy character CRB.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 169(H), a button loss effect is developed (started) as the ally character CRA retreats due to the attack from the enemy character CRB in FIG. 169(G). Here, the button image BG placed third from the bottom and the button image BG placed fourth from the bottom in FIG. 169(D) disappear and are forcibly digested. Thereafter, the sword image KG arranged at the top in FIG. 169(D) changes from a predetermined light emission mode to another light emission mode (for example, from white lighting to seven-color lighting or seven-color blinking). In addition, in FIG. 169(G), when the effect in which the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB is developed, the button get effect will be developed (started) accordingly.

In addition, in FIG. 169(H), the sword image KG does not change from a predetermined light emission mode to another light emission mode (for example, from white lighting to seven-color lighting or seven-color flashing), and the press promotion effect may be developed (started). be. In this case, when the sword image KG stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a (disposed on the top row) is digested and this sword image KG disappears from the display screen 7a, the sword image KG is moved to the center of the display screen 7a. is displayed as a large sword image KG in a predetermined light emitting manner. This sword image KG has a downward arrow image displayed on the left side of the front surface in a manner that moves slightly in the vertical direction, prompting the player to operate (pushing) the sword member 64, and an image that overlaps with the lower part of the front surface of the sword image KG. , a timer bar indicating the valid period for accepting operation of the sword member 64 (for example, 3 seconds) is displayed. Further, a message "Push!!" is displayed on the upper front surface of the sword image KG to urge the user to operate (push) the sword member 64. The predetermined light emitting mode of the large sword image KG displayed in the center of the display screen 7a may be the same as the predetermined light emitting mode of the sword image KG when it is stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a, It may also be one that has been changed (for example, from white lighting to seven-color lighting or seven-color blinking) with a high expectation of winning (big win or small win). When the player operates (pushing) the sword member 64, or when the valid period for accepting the operation of the sword member 64 (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, the process advances to FIG. 169(I).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 169(I), an image BKH having seven colors as a background image (so-called "rainbow image BKH") is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. A win confirmation effect that is displayed in a large size will be performed. At this time, a specific sound notifying the winner is played from the speaker 67. This win confirmation performance is a performance that notifies the player that a win (big win or small win) will occur thereafter. The rainbow image BKH is a background image that announces a confirmed win.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 169(J), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are located at the midpoint of the left side and the midpoint of the right side of the display screen 7a within their own variable display areas. They are lined up and displayed in a line (center line in the left-right direction) connecting them. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed at the number "7", the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed at the number "7", and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed at the number "7", so that the same pattern The game is stopped and displayed, resulting in a win (big win or small win), and then a performance (big win performance or small win performance) based on the winning game (big win game or small win game) is started.

Note that when the rainbow image BKH is not displayed on the display screen 7a as the background image shown in FIG. 167(I) and the ally character CRA is not displayed large in the center of the display screen 7a, that is, in FIG. 169(H) The sword image KG does not change from a predetermined lighting mode to another lighting mode (for example, from white lighting to seven-color lighting or seven-color flashing), and the sword image KG that is stocked (arranged at the top row) is displayed on the right side of the display screen 7a. When the sword image KG disappears from the screen 7a, the specific sound notifying the winning confirmation is not played from the speaker 67 at all, and furthermore, the sword image KG is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a as a large sword image KG in a predetermined light emitting manner. Ru. This sword image KG has a downward arrow image displayed on the left side of the front surface in a manner that moves slightly in the vertical direction, prompting the player to operate (pushing) the sword member 64, and is displayed so as to overlap with the lower part of the front surface of the sword image KG. , a timer bar indicating the valid period for accepting operation of the sword member 64 (for example, 3 seconds) is displayed. Further, a message "Push!!" urging the user to operate (push operation) the sword member 64 is displayed so as to overlap the upper front surface of the sword image KG. The predetermined light emitting mode of the large sword image KG displayed in the center of the display screen 7a may be the same as the predetermined light emitting mode of the sword image KG when it is stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a, It may be changed to something with a high expectation of winning (big win or small win) (for example, from white lighting to white flashing, white lighting to green lighting (green flashing) or red lighting (red flashing)). When the player operates the sword member 64 (pushing operation), or when the valid period for accepting the operation of the sword member 64 (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, this occurs when the player operates the sword member 64 (pushing operation). Along with this, a second normal operation sound (push operation sound) is played from the speaker 67, and the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are located at the midpoint of the left side of the display screen 7a within their own variable display areas. There are cases where the same symbol (in this case, the number "7") is lined up in a line connecting the center point of the right side (center line in the left-right direction) and stopped and displayed without aligning, and the misalignment is confirmed. be. Even if the second normal operation sound (push operation sound) is the same as the first normal operation sound (push operation sound) in the operation image stock performance A of FIG. 167 and the operation image stock performance B of FIG. 168, Alternatively, it may be a different sound (of course, a different sound from the specific sound).

In this way, in the operation image stock production C, in addition to the button image BG (normal button image BG) on the right side of the display screen 7a, the sword image KG (the lighting mode of the sword image KG changes from white lighting to seven-color lighting or seven-color flashing). Changes) are stored, and when they are consumed one by one, the player can operate the production button 63 or the sword member 64, and can also win (big or small). The result of whether or not a win (win) will occur (a winning confirmation effect is displayed on the display screen 7a only when a win occurs) can be displayed on the display screen 7a, improving interest. can be achieved.

In addition, in operation image stock effect C, various images (button image BG and sword image KG) are obtained by button get effect, and the number of various images (button image BG and sword image KG) (that is, the total number of various images stocked) The stock number)) can be increased, and button images BG and sword images KG can be lost by button loss effects. In other words, in the operation image stock effect C, the number of stocked various images (button image BG and sword image KG) (that is, the total number of stocked various images (stock number)) can be increased or decreased. ing. As a result, the number of various images (button image BG and sword image KG) stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a (that is, the total number of various images stocked (stock number)) is determined to be a hit (big win or small win). The level of expectation can be varied to eliminate monotony.

[Manipulation image stock production D]
Next, the operation image stock effect D will be explained with reference to FIG. 170. FIG. 170 is a diagram for explaining the operation image stock effect D. The operation image stock performance D is performed during the variation performance of decorative symbols.

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a left decorative pattern 8L of a stereoscopic image, a middle decorative pattern 8C of a stereoscopic image, and a right decorative pattern 8R of a stereoscopic image are displayed as the reels are rotated from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variable display of decorative patterns (designs: numbers "1" to "9") is started in the display mode. When the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern is started, the decorative pattern that has been stopped and displayed changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed, resulting in a display mode that fluctuates at a high speed. Thereby, the background image placed behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. Immediately before stopping, the decorative pattern decelerates, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed in a stopped state (temporarily stopped and then stopped). In addition, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, it is displayed in a display mode in which it slowly moves slowly in the vertical direction.

In the operation image stock performance D, after the variable display of decorative symbols starts, an action performance (battle performance) is developed (started) as shown in FIG. 170(A). In the action performance (battle performance), an ally character CRA holding a sword and an enemy character CRB holding a sword appear. Here, an effect is developed in which the attack of the friendly character CRA hits the enemy character CRB. In the action performance (battle performance), a battle takes place between an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB, and when the ally character CRA finally defeats the enemy character CRB, it becomes a win (big win or small win).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 170(B), in FIG. 170(A), when the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB, a button get effect is developed (started). In the button get performance, a button image BG imitating the performance button 63 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and this displayed button image BG becomes a reward for the action performance (battle performance). The obtained button images BG are displayed and stocked in a pile on the right side of the display screen 7a. Here, we have obtained two button images BG, and above the normal button image BG placed at the bottom (that is, the button image BG that simply imitates the production button 63), there is a normal button as the second from the bottom. Two button images BG are stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a with the image BG (that is, the button image BG simply imitating the production button 63) arranged.

In this way, two button images BG (two normal button images BG) are arranged on the right side of the display screen 7a. The stocked two-button image BG suggests the degree of expectation for a win (big win or small win). In other words, as the number of stocked button images BG (that is, the total number of stocked button images BG (stock number)) increases, the expectation level for winning (big win or small win) increases.

The two button images BG (normal button images BG have a predetermined lighting mode (in this case, white lighting) are placed on the right side of the display screen 7a. Based on the expectation level (variable effect start command) of a small hit), for example, in the order of white lighting → blue lighting → green lighting → red lighting → gold lighting (yellow lighting) → seven colors lighting (rainbow lighting (high chance of winning)) In addition to the high expectation of winning (big win or small win), there are also white flashing → blue flashing → green flashing → red flashing → gold flashing (yellow flashing) → seven-color flashing (rainbow flashing (high probability of winning)). The expectation level of winning (big hit or small hit) is set high.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 170(C), a press promotion effect is developed (started). In the push promotion effect, the two button images BG stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a are digested in order from the bottom, and when the normal button image BG placed at the bottom disappears from the display screen 7a, the normal button image BG is A button image BG (that is, a button image BG simply imitating the production button 63) is displayed as a large button image BG in a predetermined light emitting manner in the center of the display screen 7a. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image that prompts the player to operate (press) the production button 63 moves in small increments in the vertical direction so as to overlap with the upper front part of the button image BG, and overlap with the lower front part of the button image BG. A timer bar TB indicating the valid period (for example, 3 seconds) for accepting the operation of the production button 63 is displayed. Further, above the button image BG, a message MG saying "Press" is displayed to prompt the user to operate (press) the production button 63. Note that the predetermined light emitting mode of the large button image BG displayed in the center of the display screen 7a in FIG. It may be the same as the mode, or it may change to something with a high expectation of winning (big win or small win) (for example, from white lighting to white flashing, white lighting to blue lighting (blue flashing), or green lighting (green flashing) ) may be used.

When the player operates (presses) the production button 63, a first normal operation sound (press operation sound) is produced from the speaker 67.

When the player operates (presses) the production button 63, or when the operation acceptance valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the production button 63 has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 170(D), In B), when the normal button image BG stocked on the right side (placed second from the bottom) is digested and this normal button image BG disappears from the display screen 7a, the normal button image BG (that is, the effect A button image BG that simply imitates the button 63 is displayed in a predetermined light emitting manner as a large button image BG in the center of the display screen 7a. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image that prompts the player to operate (press) the production button 63 moves in small increments in the vertical direction so as to overlap with the upper front part of the button image BG, and overlap with the lower front part of the button image BG. A timer bar TB indicating the valid period for accepting the operation of the production button 63 (for example, 3 seconds) is displayed. Further, above the button image BG, a message MG saying "Press" is displayed to prompt the user to operate (press) the production button 63. Note that the predetermined light emission mode of the large button image BG displayed in the center of the display screen 7a in FIG. It may be the same as the mode, or it may change to something with a high expectation of winning (big win or small win) (for example, from white lighting to white flashing, white lighting to green lighting (green flashing), or red lighting (red flashing) ) may be used.

When the player operates (presses) the production button 63, a first normal operation sound (press operation sound) is produced from the speaker 67.

When the player operates (presses) the production button 63, or when the operation reception valid period (for example, 3 seconds) of the production button 63 has elapsed, as shown in FIG. , an action performance (battle performance) is developed, and a button get performance is developed (started) when the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB. In the button get effect, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 and a sword image KG imitating the sword member 64 are each displayed in a large manner in the center of the display screen 7a, and the displayed button image BG and sword image KG are This is a reward for action production (battle production). The obtained button images BG and sword images KG are displayed and stocked in a pile on the right side of the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 170(F). The character image "sword" is attached to the handle of the sword image KG. On the other hand, the normal button image BG does not have the character image "button" attached at all. Here, since the two button images BG that were already stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a have been digested, the sword image KG is displayed as the second from the bottom above the normal button image BG placed at the bottom. Placed.

In addition, in FIG. 170(E), when the player operates (presses) the performance button 63, or when the valid period for accepting the operation of the performance button 63 (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, the action performance (battle performance) is activated. The button image BG imitating the production button 63 and the sword image KG imitating the sword member 64 are each displayed in the center of the display screen 7a in a large size without being expanded, and as shown in FIG. 170(F), the display screen They may be displayed and stocked in a pile on the right side of 7a.

In this way, one normal button image BG and one sword image KG are arranged on the right side of the display screen 7a. The various stocked images (button image BG and sword image KG) suggest the degree of expectation for a win (big win or small win). In other words, the more the number of stocked images (button image BG and sword image KG) (in other words, the total number of stocked images (stock number)), the higher the expectation of winning (big hit or small win). It's supposed to be.

The sword image KG is set to have a higher expectation of winning (big hit or small hit) than the normal button image BG. Furthermore, the normal button image BG and one sword image KG arranged on the right side of the display screen 7a have a predetermined light emission mode (in this case, white lighting). The "predetermined lighting mode" is based on the expectation level (variable performance start command) of winning (big hit or small win), for example, white lighting → blue lighting → green lighting → red lighting → gold lighting (yellow lighting) → In addition to the high expectation of winning (big win or small win) in the order of seven colors lighting (rainbow lighting (high chance of winning)), there are also lights blinking white → blinking blue → blinking green → blinking red → blinking gold → blinking yellow )→7-color flashing (Rainbow flashing (high chance of winning)) The expectation level for winning (big hit or small win) is set high.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 170(G), the press promotion effect is developed (started) again. In the push promotion effect, various images (button images BG and sword images KG) stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a are digested in order from the bottom, and first, the normal button image BG arranged at the bottom disappears from the display screen 7a. Along with this, a normal button image BG (that is, a button image BG simply imitating the effect button 63) is displayed in a predetermined light emitting manner as a large button image BG in the center of the display screen 7a. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image that prompts the player to operate (press) the production button 63 moves in small increments in the vertical direction so as to overlap with the upper front surface of the button image BG, and overlap with the lower front surface of the button image BG. A timer bar TB indicating the valid period (for example, 3 seconds) for accepting the operation of the production button 63 is displayed. Further, above the button image BG, a message MG saying "Press" is displayed to prompt the user to operate (press) the production button 63. Note that the predetermined light emission mode of the large button image BG displayed in the center of the display screen 7a in FIG. It may be the same as the mode, or it may change to something with a high expectation of winning (big win or small win) (for example, from white lighting to white flashing, white lighting to red lighting (red flashing), or yellow lighting (yellow flashing) ) may be used.

When the player operates (presses) the production button 63, a first normal operation sound (press operation sound) is produced from the speaker 67.

When the player operates (presses) the performance button 63, or when the valid period for accepting the operation of the performance button 63 (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, the display screen 7a is displayed as shown in FIG. 170(H). When the sword image KG stocked on the right side (arranged on the top row) is digested and this sword image KG disappears from the display screen 7a, the sword image KG is displayed as a large sword image KG in the center of the display screen 7a. Displayed in a predetermined lighting manner. This sword image KG has a downward arrow image displayed on the left side of the front surface in a manner that moves slightly in the vertical direction, prompting the player to operate (pushing) the sword member 64, and is displayed so as to overlap with the lower part of the front surface of the sword image KG. , a timer bar TB indicating a valid period for accepting operation of the sword member 64 (for example, 3 seconds) is displayed. Further, a message MG "Push!!" urging the user to operate (push) the sword member 64 is displayed so as to overlap the upper front surface of the sword image KG. Note that the predetermined light emitting mode of the large sword image KG displayed in the center of the display screen 7a in FIG. It may be the same, or it may change to something with a high expectation of winning (big win or small win) (for example, from lit white to blinking white, from lit white to lit yellow (flashing yellow), or lit rainbow (blinking rainbow) (change) may also be used.

When the player operates (pushing operation) the sword member 64, or when the valid period for accepting operation of the sword member 64 (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, a first normal operation sound (pushing operation sound) is emitted. A specific sound that is a different sound and announces the winning confirmation is played from the speaker 67, and furthermore, as shown in FIG. 170(I), a winning confirmation effect is performed. Here, as a win confirmation performance, the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R each advance toward the advancing position at the front (front) center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (in a direction in which they approach each other). (moves), and at the front (front) center position (advance position (deployment position)) of the display screen 7a, a left side decorative part that is half of the ring-shaped decorative part attached to the tip side of the left side movable accessory 14L. , the right side decorative part, which is half of the ring-shaped decorative part attached to the tip side of the right side movable accessory 14R, are combined to form the left side decoration part of the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side decoration part of the right side movable accessory 14R. One decorative member (combined accessory) having annular shapes is formed.

When the left decorative part of the left movable accessory 14L and the right decorative part of the right movable accessory 14R are combined to form a combined accessory having an annular shape, the area formed within the annular shape is a circular area ( (hereinafter referred to as "circular area") 14D. An ally character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular area 14D. At this time, the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R have a predetermined light emission mode (for example, a white light emission mode), so that the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R have a white light emission mode. At the same time, the alphabet "V" appears from the front of the left side movable accessory 14L and from the front of the right side movable accessory 14R, and an effect suggesting victory for the ally character CRA is performed. Note that when the enemy character CRB is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular area 14D, the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R emit light in a predetermined manner (for example, Due to the fact that the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R have a red light emission mode that is different from the white light emission mode (for example, a red light emission mode), the alphabet "V" does not appear. , no performance is performed that suggests victory for the ally character CRA.

A light guide plate (not shown) is provided on the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R, and the English letter "V" is formed on this light guide plate, and the outer periphery excluding the front and back surfaces of the light guide plate is When the plurality of first decorative LEDs (LEDs that can emit light in a single color or in multiple colors) arranged in a surrounding manner emit light (e.g., white), the light incident from around the light guide plate illuminates the letter "V" formed on the light guide plate. ”, the letter “V” appears due to the diffused reflection. In other words, the front side of the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R is a display screen on which the alphabet "V" appears due to the light guide plate. In addition, the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R include a plurality of second decorative LEDs (LEDs capable of emitting a single color or multicolor ) emits light (for example, red), it passes through the light guide plate and is emitted toward the front of the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R, but the alphabet "V" does not appear.

Subsequently, the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R move away from each other in the direction in which the left side movable accessory 14L displays an image from the advanced position at the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. As the display screen 7a of the device 7 retreats (moves) toward the left retracted position (home position), the right movable accessory 14R moves the image from the advanced position at the front (front) center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It retreats (moves) toward the retreat position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a of the display device 7.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 170(J), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are arranged in their respective variable display areas between the midpoint of the left side and the midpoint of the right side of the display screen 7a. They are displayed in a line that connects them (center line in the left-right direction). Here, the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed at the number "7", the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed at the number "7", and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed at the number "7", so that the same pattern The game is stopped and displayed, resulting in a win (big win or small win), and then the performance (big win performance or small win performance) based on the winning game (big win game or small win game) is started.

Note that when the player operates (pushing) the sword member 64 in FIG. 170(H), or when the valid period for accepting the operation of the sword member 64 (for example, 3 seconds) has passed, In this case, the left side decorative part of the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side decoration part of the right side movable accessory 14R do not form one decorative member (combined accessory) having an annular shape, and the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular area 14D is When the ally character CRA is not displayed on the display screen 7a, when the player operates the sword member 64 (pushing operation), a second normal operation sound (pushing operation sound) is output from the speaker 67, and the 170 (H), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R each form a line (left and right) connecting the midpoint of the left side and the midpoint of the right side of the display screen 7a within their own variable display areas. In some cases, the same symbols (number "7" in this case) are lined up in the same direction (the center line of the direction) and are stopped and displayed without being aligned, and the misalignment is determined to be displayed. The second normal operation sound (push operation sound) may be the same sound as the first normal operation sound (push operation sound), or may be a different sound (of course, a sound different from the specific sound). .

In this way, in the operation image stock effect D, the sword image KG is stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a in addition to the button image BG (normal button image BG), and when digesting these one by one, the player The production button 63 can be operated, the player can operate the sword member 64, and the result of whether or not a hit (big hit or small hit) will occur (the win is confirmed only when a hit occurs) As a performance, an ally character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular area 14D formed by combining the left side decoration part of the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side decoration part of the right side movable accessory 14R. ) can be displayed on the display screen 7a, making it more interesting.

In addition, in the operation image stock performance D, even if the various images (button image BG and sword image KG) obtained by the button get performance are digested by the press promotion performance, the various images (obtained) by the button get performance are used again. Since it is now possible to increase the number of button images BG and sword images KG, the various images that are stocked again give players joy and create a sense of expectation that a win (big win or small win) will occur. can contribute to this.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the operation image stock effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 167(A) to 167(J) of the operation image stock effect A, the effect button 63 (first operating means) that can be operated by the player; A button image BG (first operating means image) imitating the production button 63 (first operating means) is provided on the image display device 7 and includes a sword member 64 (second operating means) that can be operated by the player. A first effect stocked on the display screen 7a and a sword image KG (second operating means image) imitating the sword member 64 (second operating means) are stocked on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A second effect, a third effect in which the button image BG (first operating means image) stocked by the first effect is digested by operation of the effect button 63 (first operating means), and a second effect. A fourth performance in which the sword image KG (second operation means image) stocked by the performance is digested by operation of the sword member 64 (second operation means), and a third performance or a fourth performance. A fifth effect can be executed in which the winning/losing result of a specific lottery (result of whether a winning (big win or small win) occurs) can be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 during the lottery. . According to this configuration, button images BG and sword images KG are stocked on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and when digesting these, the player operates the effect button 63, or the player operates the sword member 64. In addition, the winning/losing results of a particular lottery (results of whether or not a winning (big win or small win) occurs) can be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. This makes it possible to increase interest.
Operational image stock rendering B in Figures 168(A) to 168(J), operational image stock rendering C in Figures 169(A) to 169(J), and operational images in Figures 170(A) to 170(J) The same applies to stock performance D.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the first performance and the second performance can be executed simultaneously, for example, as shown in FIGS. 167(A) to 167(J) of the operation image stock performance A. . According to this configuration, in addition to the button image BG (first operating means image), the sword image KG (second operating means image) is stocked on the display screen, so that the player can operate the sword image KG (second operating means image). Since it is possible to increase the number of objects that can be played (in other words, it is possible to increase the number of objects on which the player's intentions are reflected), it is possible to contribute to improving the player's desire to operate. The degree of expectation of transition to a gaming state advantageous to the player (the degree of expectation of winning (big win or small win)) set in the sword image KG (second operating means image) is the same as that of the button image BG (second operating means image). It is preferable that the value be higher than that set in (operation means image 1). According to this configuration, in a state where button images BG are stocked, the player is disappointed because he or she cannot expect to transition to a gaming state advantageous to the player (expectation for winning (big win or small win)). However, when the sword image KG is stocked, the player can expect the level of expectation of transition to a gaming state advantageous to the player (the level of expectation of winning (big win or small win)) set in the sword image KG. Therefore, it can contribute to improving the player's desire to play.
Operational image stock rendering B in Figures 168(A) to 168(J), operational image stock rendering C in Figures 169(A) to 169(J), and operational images in Figures 170(A) to 170(J) The same applies to stock performance D.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 167(I) of operation image stock effect A, the fifth effect is a winning confirmation effect that announces a confirmed win, and a rainbow image as a background image. BKH (first confirmed win image) and a background image of a rainbow image BKH (first confirmed win image) and a different ally character CRA (second confirmed win image) are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. to be displayed. According to this configuration, by suddenly switching to a winning effect using the rainbow image BKH (first confirmed winning image) and the ally character CRA (second confirmed winning image), an impact is given to the player and a confirmed winning is announced. can do. As a result, the combination of the rainbow image BKH (first confirmed winning image) and the teammate character CRA (second confirmed winning image) can be impressed on the player as an effect that has an impact on the player. Therefore, the player actively operates the performance button 63 (first operating means) and the sword member 64 (second operating means) because he/she has seen an impactful winning performance. The winning effect produced by the rainbow image BKH (first confirmed winning image) and the ally character CRA (second confirmed winning image) can contribute to increasing the player's desire to play.
The same applies to the operation image stock effects B in FIGS. 168(A) to 168(J) and the operation image stock effects C in FIGS. 169(A) to 169(J).
In the operation image stock production D shown in FIGS. 170(A) to 170(J), the front sides of the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R appear as the English letter "V" (first winning confirmed image) due to the light guide plate. , the teammate character CRA (second winning confirmation image) displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and by suddenly switching to the winning confirmation effect, it is possible to give an impact to the player and notify the player that the winning has been confirmed. . As a result, the front side of the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R appears in the game with the combination of the alphabet "V" (first winning confirmed image) and the ally character CRA (second winning confirmed image). It is possible to make an impression on the players as a performance that has an impact on the players. Therefore, the player actively operates the performance button 63 (first operating means) and the sword member 64 (second operating means) because he/she has seen an impactful winning performance. The front side of the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R appears through the light guide plate as the English letter "V" (first winning confirmation image) and the ally character CRA (second winning confirmation image) play the game. This can contribute to improving the player's desire to play.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 167(I) of the operation image stock effect A, the rainbow image BKH (first confirmed winning image) and the ally character CRA (second confirmed winning image) Since one of them, the rainbow image BKH (first confirmed hit image), is a background image, it is placed at the rear, and the other, the ally character CRA (second confirmed hit image), is placed forward. It is displayed on the display screen 7a of the display device 7. According to this configuration, by suddenly switching to a winning effect using the rainbow image BKH (first confirmed winning image) and the ally character CRA (second confirmed winning image), an impact is given to the player and a confirmed winning is announced. can do.
The same applies to the operation image stock effects B in FIGS. 168(A) to 168(J) and the operation image stock effects C in FIGS. 169(A) to 169(J).
In the operation image stock production D shown in FIGS. 170(A) to 170(J), the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R appear in front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and are combined. , an ally whose front side of the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R is one of the English letter "V" (first winning confirmed image) appearing by the light guide plate and the ally character CRA (second winning confirmed image). The character CRA (second confirmed winning image) is placed backward and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, while the other alphabetic character "V" (first confirmed winning image) is placed forward. The front sides of the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are exposed by the light guide plate. According to this configuration, the front sides of the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R are formed by the English letter "V" (first hit confirmed image) appearing by the light guide plate and the ally character CRA (second hit confirmed image). By suddenly switching to the winning confirmation performance, it is possible to give an impact to the player and notify the winning confirmation.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 167(A) to 167(J) of the operation image stock effect A, the effect button 63 is included in the button image BG (first operation means image). Some include a character image (operation instruction image) of "Long Press" that instructs "Long Press Operation (Specific Operation)" to (first operating means). According to this configuration, it is possible to increase variations in the operation method of the production button 63 (first operation means), so that it is possible to increase variations in the operation method of the production button 63 (first operation means), so that the monotonous operation of the production button 63 (first operation means) is not required for the player. By making it difficult to feel, it is possible to contribute to increasing the desire to operate the performance button 63 (first operation means).
In the operation image stock effect B shown in FIGS. 168(A) to 168(J), the button image BG (first operating means image) includes a "repeat operation (specific There are some that include a character image (operation instruction image) of ``continuously hit'' that instructs ``operation)''. According to this configuration, it is possible to increase variations in the operation method of the production button 63 (first operation means), so that it is possible to increase variations in the operation method of the production button 63 (first operation means), so that the monotonous operation of the production button 63 (first operation means) is not required for the player. By making it difficult to feel, it is possible to contribute to increasing the desire to operate the performance button 63 (first operation means).

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 167(H) to 167(I) of the operation image stock effect A, the fifth effect is a win/loss result (win (jackpot) or When the result of whether or not a small win (small win) occurs is a win (a jackpot or small win), a specific sound is output to notify the winning confirmation. According to this configuration, by playing a specific sound from the speaker 67 to announce the confirmation of a win, it is possible to notify the surroundings of the player that he or she has won (a big win or a small win). people can enjoy a sense of superiority.
The same applies to the operation image stock effect B in FIG. 168, the operation image stock effect C in FIG. 169, and the operation image stock effect D in FIG. 170.

[Modified example]
Below, a modified example of the operation image stock performance is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the operation image stock effect A of FIG. 167(D), the operation image stock effect B of FIG. 168(D), the operation image stock effect C of FIG. 169(D), and the operation image stock effect D of FIG. 170(E), the button The sword image KG was displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 together with the image BG (at the same time as the button image BG). However, only the sword image KG may be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In this case, one sword image KG may be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and stocked, or a plurality of sword images KG may be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and stocked. It is also possible to do so. Since the sword image KG is set to have a higher expectation of winning (big hit or small hit) than the button image BG, the player feels that the sword image KG is displayed alone on the display screen 7a. The player can expect a shift to a gaming state advantageous to the player (expectation level of winning (big win or small win)).

[Modification 2]
In the operation image stock performance A of FIG. 167, the operation image stock performance B of FIG. 168, the operation image stock performance C of FIG. 169, and the operation image stock performance D of FIG. The confirmation sound may continue to be played from the speaker 67. In this way, the winning confirmation sound continues to be played from the speaker 67, thereby informing those around the player that a winning effect is being performed, so that the player does not feel a sense of superiority. can. The winning confirmation sound may be the same as the specific sound that announces the winning confirmation, or it may be a different sound (of course, the first normal operation sound (pushing operation sound) and the second normal operation sound (pushing operation sound)) different sounds).

[Modification 3]
In the operation image stock effect A in FIG. 167, the operation image stock effect B in FIG. 168, the operation image stock effect C in FIG. 169, and the operation image stock effect D in FIG. It was intended to inform players of their expectations for winning (big or small wins). However, for example, when announcing the winning or losing result of a lottery for the number of rounds in a jackpot performance (jackpot game), an operation image stock performance may be incorporated to notify the number of rounds that is the winning or losing result, or the jackpot performance (Jackpot game) When announcing the winning/losing result in the lottery after transition to a high-probability state, an operation image stock effect may be incorporated to notify the presence/absence of a transition to a high-probability state which is a winning/losing result.

[Modification 4]
In the operation image stock effect A of FIG. 167(D), the operation image stock effect B of FIG. 168(D), the operation image stock effect C of FIG. 169(D), and the operation image stock effect D of FIG. 170(E), 1 One sword image KG was displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 along with the two button images BG (at the same time as the one button image BG). However, a plurality of sword images KG may be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 together with one button image BG (simultaneously with one button image BG), or a plurality of sword images KG may be displayed together with a plurality of button images BG (simultaneously with one button image BG). One sword image KG (simultaneously with BG) may be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In this way, a plurality of button images BG and sword images KG will be displayed on the display screen 7a at the same time, and by increasing the number of stocks, expectations for a win (big win or small win) as a result of a particular lottery will be increased. It can be made higher.

[Modification 5]
In the operation image stock effect A of FIG. 167(D), the operation image stock effect B of FIG. 168(D), the operation image stock effect C of FIG. 169(D), and the operation image stock effect D of FIG. 170(E), the image The button images BG and the sword images KG stored on the right side of the display screen 7a of the display device 7 were sequentially digested one by one from the bottom row to the top row. However, the button images BG and sword images KG stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a may be digested one by one from the top row to the bottom row, or the button images BG and sword images KG stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a may be digested one by one from the top row to the bottom row. The button images BG and sword images KG placed at any position from the top to the bottom may be digested arbitrarily, or the button images BG and sword images KG may be digested by combining them. You can also do this.

[Modification 6]
In the operation image stock effect A in FIG. 167, the operation image stock effect B in FIG. 168, the operation image stock effect C in FIG. 169, and the operation image stock effect D in FIG. BG and sword image KG were in stock. However, instead of the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the button images BG and the sword images KG may be stocked at the top, left, or bottom of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. good. In this case, on the upper and lower sides of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the button images BG and the sword images KG are stocked in a band-like area extending in the left-right direction of the display screen 7a, and Here, button images BG and sword images KG are stocked in a strip-shaped area extending in the vertical direction of the display screen 7a. Further, the button images BG and the sword images KG may be stocked in a strip-shaped area that is in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and extends in the vertical direction. By doing this, the band-shaped area in which the button images BG and the sword images KG are stocked is not fixed to the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and for example, the display position is determined by lottery every time the operation image stock effect is started. Once determined, the relationship between the stocked display position and the degree of expectation of transition to a gaming state advantageous to the player (degree of expectation of winning (big win or small win)) is discovered by the player himself ( This makes it possible to make it difficult for the manipulated image stock performance to lose its freshness.

[Modification 7]
In the operation image stock effect D shown in FIGS. 170(B) to 170(G), a plurality of normal button images BG are stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. However, among the multiple normal button images BG, you can get and stock button images BG with one or more "long press" text images attached by the button get effect, or one or more "repeated press" button images. You may also obtain and stock the button image BG with the text image attached.

[Modification 8]
In the operation image stock effect A in FIG. 167(B), two button images BG are obtained and stocked in the button get effect, and one of the button images BG has a character image "long press" attached. Ta. However, instead of this, in the button get effect, you may get only one or more normal button images BG and stock them, or only the button images BG with the text image "long press" attached. You may get one or more and stock them. Furthermore, in the operation image stock effect B of FIG. 168(B), two normal button images BG were obtained and stocked in the button get effect. However, instead of this, in the button get effect, only one or a plurality of button images BG to which the character image "Continuous Hit" is attached may be obtained and stocked.

[Modification 9]
In the operation image stock effect A in FIG. 167, the operation image stock effect B in FIG. 168, the operation image stock effect C in FIG. 169, and the operation image stock effect D in FIG. The button image BG is digested by operating the production button 63 (pressing operation), and the sword image KG is digested by operating the sword member 64 (pushing operation), so that the button image BG and the sword image KG are converted into images one by one. It had disappeared from the display screen 7a of the display device 7. However, the remaining number of stocked button images BG and sword images KG, that is, the message "X remaining (X is the stock number)" as the stock number is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in a predetermined display mode. You may also do so. At this time, an announcement may be made from the speaker 67 that "X items remaining (X is the number in stock)". In this way, the player can accurately grasp the number of remaining stocks. In addition, the "predetermined display mode" includes, for example, a specific sound and a specific image in the order of white lighting → blue lighting → green lighting → red lighting → gold lighting (yellow lighting) → seven colors lighting (rainbow lighting (high probability of winning)). , and the appearance expectations of special sounds and special images are set high.

[Modification 10]
In the operation image stock effect A of FIG. 167(D), the operation image stock effect B of FIG. 168(D), the operation image stock effect C of FIG. 169(D), and the operation image stock effect D of FIG. 170(E), A button image BG imitating the button 63 was displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. However, instead of the button image BG imitating the production button 63, a button image imitating the sword button 65 of the sword member 64 may be used. Even with this configuration, the same effect as the operation (pressing operation) of the production button 63 can be achieved by operating the sword button 65 (pressing operation or pressing operation).

[Modification 11]
The operation image stock effect A in FIG. 167, the operation image stock effect B in FIG. 168, the operation image stock effect C in FIG. 169, and the operation image stock effect D in FIG. 170 may not include some of the effects described. However, other effects may be added.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect H2-1]
A gaming machine comprising a first operating means and a second operating means operable by a player,
a first effect in which a first operating means image imitating the first operating means is stocked on a display screen;
a second effect in which a second operating means image imitating the second operating means is stocked on a display screen;
a third effect in which the first operation means image stocked by the first effect is digested by operation of the first operation means;
a fourth effect in which the second operation means image stocked by the second effect is digested by operation of the second operation means;
A fifth performance that can display the winning or losing results of a specific lottery on a display screen during the third performance or the fourth performance,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect H2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect H2-1,
The first performance and the second performance can be performed simultaneously;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect H2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect H2-1 or aspect H2-2,
The fifth performance is a win confirmation performance that announces a win confirmation, and displays a first win confirmation image and a second win confirmation image different from the first win confirmation image on the display screen.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect H2-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects H2-1 to H2-3,
One of the first confirmed winning image and the second confirmed winning image is placed rearward and the other is placed forward and displayed on the display screen;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect H2-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects H2-1 to H2-4,
Some of the first operating means images include an operation instruction image that instructs the first operating means to perform a specific operation;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect H2-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects H2-1 to H2-5,
The fifth effect is to output a specific sound when the winning/losing result in the specific lottery is a winning result.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The winning/losing announcement possible effects A to D will be explained below using FIGS. 171 to 174. 171 to 174, various reserved images displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are omitted for ease of viewing the drawings, and drawings of decorative patterns displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are also omitted. Some items are omitted for the sake of simplicity, and the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 arranged around the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are also omitted for ease of viewing the drawing. There is something that has been done.

This winning/losing notification performance can be executed during the fluctuating display of decorative symbols (for example, during the period from the start of fluctuating to the stop of fluctuating the decorative symbols). That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands (for example, a variable performance start command) received from the sub-control board 90, and if an instruction to execute a performance that can notify winnings or losses is included, the corresponding image is extracted from the ROM 103. The data is read out and an image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition, the lamp control board 107 analyzes various commands (for example, a variable production start command) received from the sub-control board 90, and analyzes the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory of the first movable accessory 14 provided on the game board 2. The position of 14R and the light emission mode may be changed.

Here, first, the performance A that can be announced will be explained, followed by the performance B that can be announced, the performance C that can be announced, and the performance D that can be announced.

[Win/lose announcement possible production A]
First, the winning/losing notification performance A will be explained with reference to FIG. 171. FIG. 171 is a diagram for explaining the performance A that allows notification of winning or losing. The performance A in which winning or losing can be announced is performed during the fluctuating performance of decorative symbols.

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a left decorative pattern 8L of a stereoscopic image, a middle decorative pattern 8C of a stereoscopic image, and a right decorative pattern 8R of a stereoscopic image are displayed as the reels are rotated from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variable display of decorative patterns (designs: numbers "1" to "9") is started in the display mode. When the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern is started, the decorative pattern that has been stopped and displayed changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed, resulting in a display mode that fluctuates at a high speed. Thereby, the background image placed behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. Immediately before stopping, the decorative pattern decelerates, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed in a stopped state (temporarily stopped and then stopped). In addition, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, it is displayed in a display mode in which it slowly moves slowly in the vertical direction.

In the winning/losing notification performance A, after the variable display of decorative symbols starts, an action performance (battle performance) is developed (started) as shown in FIG. 171(A). In the action performance (battle performance), an ally character CRA holding a sword and an enemy character CRB holding a sword appear. Here, an effect is developed in which the attack of the friendly character CRA hits the enemy character CRB. In the action performance (battle performance), a battle takes place between an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB, and when the ally character CRA finally defeats the enemy character CRB, it becomes a win (big win or small win).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 171(B), in FIG. 171(A), when the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB, a button get effect is developed (started). In the button get performance, a button image BG imitating the performance button 63 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and this displayed button image BG becomes a reward for the action performance (battle performance). The obtained button images BG are displayed and stocked in a pile on the right side of the display screen 7a. Here, we have obtained four button images BG, and above the normal button image BG placed at the bottom (that is, the button image BG that simply imitates the production button 63), there is a normal button as the second from the bottom. An image BG (that is, a button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63) is placed above the second normal button image BG from the bottom, and a normal button image BG (that is, a button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63) as the third from the bottom. A normal button image BG (that is, a button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63) is placed above the third normal button image BG from the bottom, and a normal button image BG (that is, a button image BG that simply imitates the production button 63) is placed as the fourth button image from the bottom. In this state, four button images BG are stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a.

In this way, four button images BG (normal button images BG) are arranged on the right side of the display screen 7a. The stocked button image BG suggests the degree of expectation for a win (big win or small win).

Note that the four button images BG arranged on the right side of the display screen 7a have a predetermined light emission mode (in this case, white lighting). The "predetermined lighting mode" is based on the expectation level (variable performance start command) of winning (big hit or small win), for example, white lighting → blue lighting → green lighting → red lighting → gold lighting (yellow lighting) → In addition to the high expectation of winning (big win or small win) in the order of seven colors lighting (rainbow lighting (high chance of winning)), there are also lights blinking white → blinking blue → blinking green → blinking red → blinking gold → blinking yellow )→7-color flashing (Rainbow flashing (high chance of winning)) The expectation level for winning (big hit or small win) is set high.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 171(C), a press promotion effect is developed (started). In the push promotion effect, the four button images BG stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a are digested in order from the bottom, and when the normal button image BG placed at the bottom disappears from the display screen 7a, the normal button image BG is A button image BG (that is, a button image BG simply imitating the production button 63) is displayed as a large button image BG in a predetermined light emitting manner in the center of the display screen 7a. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image that prompts the player to operate (press) the production button 63 moves in small increments in the vertical direction so as to overlap with the upper front surface of the button image BG, and overlap with the lower front surface of the button image BG. A timer bar TB indicating the valid period (for example, 3 seconds) for accepting the operation of the production button 63 is displayed. Further, above the button image BG, a message MG saying "Press" is displayed to prompt the user to operate (press) the production button 63. Note that the predetermined light emitting mode of the large button image BG displayed in the center of the display screen 7a in FIG. It may be the same as the mode, or it may change to something with a high expectation of winning (big win or small win) (for example, from white lighting to white flashing, white lighting to blue lighting (blue flashing), or green lighting (green flashing) ) may be used.

When the player operates (presses) the performance button 63, a specific sound announcing the winning is played from the speaker 67, and then, as shown in FIG. 171(D), a background image with seven colors is played. A winning effect is performed in which an image BKH (so-called "rainbow image BKH") is displayed on the display screen 7a. This win confirmation performance is a performance that notifies the player that a win (big win or small win) will occur thereafter. The rainbow image BKH is a specific image, and is a background image that announces a confirmed win.

In FIG. 171(D), when the normal button image BG stocked on the right side (placed second from the bottom) in FIG. 171(B) disappears from the display screen 7a, the normal button image BG (that is, the effect A button image BG that simply imitates the button 63 is displayed in a predetermined light emitting manner as a large button image BG in the center of the display screen 7a. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image that prompts the player to operate (press) the production button 63 moves in small increments in the vertical direction so as to overlap with the upper front surface of the button image BG, and overlap with the lower front surface of the button image BG. A timer bar TB indicating the valid period (for example, 3 seconds) for accepting the operation of the production button 63 is displayed. Further, above the button image BG, a message MG saying "Press" is displayed to prompt the user to operate (press) the production button 63. Note that the predetermined light emission mode of the large button image BG displayed in the center of the display screen 7a in FIG. It may be the same as the mode, or it may change to something with a high expectation of winning (big win or small win) (for example, from white lighting to white flashing, white lighting to green lighting (green flashing), or red lighting (red flashing) ) may be used.

When the player operates (presses) the production button 63, a special sound that is different from the specific sound and that announces the display of the premium image is played from the speaker 67, and then, as shown in FIG. 171(E), A premiere image PMG1 having a rectangular shape smaller than the outer shape of the display screen 7a is arranged so as to overlap with the front surface of the rainbow image BKH and displayed on the display screen 7a, and a rainbow effect is performed by the premiere image PMG1. In other words, the rainbow effect is performed while the winning effect is being performed. This premium image PMG1 is a special image that becomes displayable after the rainbow image BKH, which is a specific image, is displayed on the display screen 7a, and is a rare image with an extremely low appearance rate (an image that appears in a rare effect). )one of. Here, a rainbow image different from the rainbow image BKH displayed as the background image of the display screen 7a is displayed as the background image of the premiere image PMG1, and the ally character CRA is displayed large in the center of the rectangular premier image PMG1. has been done. Note that the ally character CRA displayed in a large size in the center of the rectangular premier image PMG1 may be a still image or a moving image.

The first condition for the appearance of the premiere image PMG1 is that the press promotion effect shown in FIG. ) is satisfied, and then, as a second condition, the player performs the performance again within the operation reception validity period of the performance button 63 with the rainbow image BKH shown in FIG. 171(D) being displayed on the display screen 7a. The condition that the button 63 is operated (pressed) needs to be satisfied.

After that, the premium image PMG1 disappears from the display screen 7a, and then, as shown in FIG. 171(F), the normal button image BG that is stocked on the right side (positioned third from the bottom) in FIG. 171(B) appears. When it disappears from the display screen 7a, a normal button image BG (that is, a button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63) is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a as a large button image BG in a predetermined light emitting manner. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image that prompts the player to operate (press) the production button 63 moves in small increments in the vertical direction so as to overlap with the upper front surface of the button image BG, and overlap with the lower front surface of the button image BG. A timer bar TB indicating the valid period (for example, 3 seconds) for accepting the operation of the production button 63 is displayed. Further, above the button image BG, a message MG saying "Press" is displayed to prompt the user to operate (press) the production button 63. Note that the predetermined light emitting mode of the large button image BG displayed in the center of the display screen 7a in FIG. It may be the same as the mode, or it may change to something with a high expectation of winning (big win or small win) (for example, from white lighting to white flashing, white lighting to red lighting (red flashing), or yellow lighting (yellow flashing) ) may be used.

When the player operates (presses) the production button 63, a special sound that is different from the specific sound and that announces the display of the premium image is played from the speaker 67, and then, as shown in FIG. 171(G), A premiere image PMG2 having a rectangular shape smaller than the outer shape of the display screen 7a is arranged so as to overlap with the front surface of the rainbow image BKH and displayed on the display screen 7a, and a rainbow effect is performed by the premiere image PMG2. In other words, the rainbow effect is performed while the winning effect is being performed. This premium image PMG2 is a special image that becomes displayable after the rainbow image BKH, which is a specific image, is displayed on the display screen 7a, and is a rare image with an extremely low appearance rate (an image that appears in a rare effect). )one of. Here, as a background image of premier image PMG2, a rainbow image BKH displayed as a background image of display screen 7a and a rainbow image displayed as a background image of premiere image PMG1 in FIG. 171(E) are different. The image is displayed, and the character images "Victory" are displayed one after another from the right side to the left side of the rectangular premier image PMG2. The character image "Victory" is displayed in multiple rows (here, two rows each) on the upper and lower sides of the rectangular premium image PMG2. Note that the outer size of premier image PMG2 having a rectangular shape is the same as the outer size of premier image PMG1 in FIG. 171(E).

The first condition for the appearance of the premiere image PMG2 is that the press promotion effect shown in FIG. ) is satisfied, and then, as a second condition, the player performs the performance again within the operation reception validity period of the performance button 63 with the rainbow image BKH shown in FIG. 171(D) being displayed on the display screen 7a. The condition of operating (pressing) the button 63 is satisfied, and then the player presses the production button 63 again with the rainbow image BKH shown in FIG. 171(F) being displayed on the display screen 7a as a third condition. The condition that the production button 63 is operated (pressed) within the operation reception validity period needs to be satisfied.

Note that the premier image PMG1 appearing in FIG. 171(E) and the premier image PMG2 appearing in FIG. 171(G) may be replaced. In this case, the first condition for the appearance of the premium image PMG2 in FIG. 171(E) is that the push promotion effect shown in FIG. The condition of operating (pressing) the effect button 63 is satisfied, and then the player presses the effect button again with the rainbow image BKH shown in FIG. 171(D) being displayed on the display screen 7a as a second condition. It is necessary to satisfy the condition that the production button 63 is operated (pressing operation) within the operation reception validity period of 63, and the first condition for the appearance of the premiere image PMG1 in FIG. 171(G) is as shown in FIG. The push promotion effect shown in C) is started, and the condition that the player operates (press operation) the effect button 63 within the valid period for accepting the operation of the effect button 63 is established, and then the second condition shown in FIG. 171 ( With the rainbow image BKH shown in D) being displayed on the display screen 7a, the condition is satisfied that the player operates (presses) the production button 63 again within the operation reception validity period of the production button 63, and then The third condition is that the player operates (presses) the production button 63 again within the operational acceptance period of the production button 63 while the rainbow image BKH shown in FIG. 171(F) is displayed on the display screen 7a. A condition must be met.

After that, the premium image PMG2 disappears from the display screen 7a, and then, as shown in FIG. 171(H), it is stocked on the right side (placed fourth from the bottom, that is, placed on the top row) in FIG. 171(B). When the normal button image BG disappears from the display screen 7a, the normal button image BG (that is, the button image BG that simply imitates the production button 63) is displayed as a large button image BG in the center of the display screen 7a, and a predetermined light is emitted. displayed in the following manner. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image that prompts the player to operate (press) the production button 63 moves in small increments in the vertical direction so as to overlap with the upper front surface of the button image BG, and overlap with the lower front surface of the button image BG. A timer bar TB indicating the valid period (for example, 3 seconds) for accepting the operation of the production button 63 is displayed. Further, above the button image BG, a message MG saying "Press" is displayed to prompt the user to operate (press) the production button 63. Note that the predetermined light emission mode of the large button image BG displayed in the center of the display screen 7a in FIG. It may be the same as the mode, or it may change to something with a high expectation of winning (big win or small win) (for example, from white lighting to white flashing, white lighting to yellow lighting (yellow flashing), or rainbow lighting (rainbow flashing). ) may be used.

When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, a specific sound is played from the speaker 67, and as shown in FIG. 171(I), the rainbow image BKH disappears from the display screen 7a, but is displayed on the left side as a winning effect. The movable accessory 14L and the right-side movable accessory 14R each advance (move) toward the advancing position (in the direction of approaching each other) at the front (front) center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. At the front (front) center position (advance position (deployment position)), the left side decorative part, which is half of the ring-shaped decorative part attached to the tip side of the left side movable accessory 14L, and the tip side of the right side movable accessory 14R. The right side decorative part, which is half of the annular decorative part attached to the , are combined, and the left side decorative part of the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side decoration part of the right side movable accessory 14R form one decorative member having an annular shape. (combined accessory) is formed.

When the left decorative part of the left movable accessory 14L and the right decorative part of the right movable accessory 14R are combined to form a combined accessory having an annular shape, the area formed within the annular shape is a circular area ( (hereinafter referred to as "circular area") 14D. An ally character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular area 14D. At this time, the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R have a predetermined light emission mode (for example, a white light emission mode), so that the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R have a white light emission mode. At the same time, the alphabetic character "V" appears from the front of the left movable accessory 14L and from the front of the right movable accessory 14R, respectively.

A light guide plate (not shown) is provided on the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R, and the English letter "V" is formed on this light guide plate, and the outer periphery excluding the front and back surfaces of the light guide plate is When the plurality of first decorative LEDs (LEDs capable of emitting light in a single color or in multiple colors) arranged in a surrounding manner emit light (e.g., white), the light incident from around the light guide plate illuminates the letter "V" formed on the light guide plate. ”, the letter “V” appears due to the diffused reflection. In addition, the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R include a plurality of second decorative LEDs (LEDs capable of emitting a single color or multicolor ) emits light (for example, red), it passes through the light guide plate and is emitted toward the front of the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R, but the alphabet "V" does not appear.

Subsequently, the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R move away from each other in the direction in which the left side movable accessory 14L displays an image from the advanced position at the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. As the display screen 7a of the device 7 retreats (moves) toward the left retracted position (home position), the right movable accessory 14R moves the image from the advanced position at the front (front) center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It retreats (moves) toward the retreat position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a of the display device 7.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 171(J), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are arranged in their respective variable display areas at the midpoint of the left side and the midpoint of the right side of the display screen 7a. They are lined up and displayed in a line connecting them (center line in the left and right direction). Here, the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed at the number "7", the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed at the number "7", and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed at the number "7", so that the same pattern The game is stopped and displayed, resulting in a win (big win or small win), and then the performance (big win performance or small win performance) based on the winning game (big win game or small win game) is started.

In this way, in FIG. 171(D), after the rainbow image BKH is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 to notify the player that a win (big win or small win) will occur (in other words, the winning confirmation effect is If the number of operations of the production button 63 does not reach the upper limit number of operations (after the operation has been performed), the player is prompted to operate the production button 63, so that there is something that is profitable for the player. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that further information may be provided, and it is possible to improve interest in the game.

In addition, in the winning/losing notification performance A, after the rainbow image BKH is displayed on the display screen 7a and the winning confirmation performance is performed in FIG. 171(D), the player operates (presses) the performance button 63 at a predetermined timing. operation), the premium images PMG1 and PMG2, which are rare images with an extremely low appearance rate (images that appear in rare effects), can appear, which contributes to increasing the motivation to operate the effect button 63. be able to.

Furthermore, in the winning/losing notification performance A, after the rainbow image BKH is displayed on the display screen 7a and the winning confirmation performance is performed in FIG. 171(D), the player operates (presses) the performance button 63 at a predetermined timing. operation), and accordingly, premium images that are rare images (images that appear in rare effects) with an extremely low appearance rate are displayed one after another on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 without duplication. ing. For this reason, conventionally, when it has been determined that a win (big win or small win) will occur, the player does not have to operate (press) the performance button 63 at all and simply watches the progress of the performance. However, in the performance A that can announce winnings and losses, when the performance button 63 is operated (pressed), the premier images are displayed one after another on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is possible to make it difficult to lose the freshness of the performance during the fluctuation in a state where it is certain that a big hit or a small win will occur.

[Win/lose announcement possible performance B]
Next, the winning/losing announcement possible presentation B will be explained with reference to FIG. 172. FIG. 172 is a diagram for explaining performance B that allows notification of winning or losing. The winning/losing announcement possible performance B is performed during the fluctuating performance of decorative symbols.

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a left decorative pattern 8L of a stereoscopic image, a middle decorative pattern 8C of a stereoscopic image, and a right decorative pattern 8R of a stereoscopic image are displayed as the reels are rotated from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variable display of decorative patterns (designs: numbers "1" to "9") is started in the display mode. When the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern is started, the decorative pattern that has been stopped and displayed changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed, resulting in a display mode that fluctuates at a high speed. Thereby, the background image placed behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. Immediately before stopping, the decorative pattern decelerates, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed in a stopped state (temporarily stopped and then stopped). In addition, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, it is displayed in a display mode in which it slowly moves slowly in the vertical direction.

In the winning/losing notification performance B, after the variable display of decorative symbols starts, an action performance (battle performance) is developed (started) as shown in FIG. 172(A). In the action performance (battle performance), an ally character CRA holding a sword and an enemy character CRB holding a sword appear. Here, an effect is developed in which the attack of the friendly character CRA hits the enemy character CRB. In the action performance (battle performance), a battle takes place between an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB, and when the ally character CRA finally defeats the enemy character CRB, it becomes a win (big win or small win).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 172(B), in FIG. 172(A), when the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB, a button get effect is developed (started). In the button get performance, a button image BG imitating the performance button 63 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and this displayed button image BG becomes a reward for the action performance (battle performance). The obtained button images BG are displayed and stocked in a pile on the right side of the display screen 7a. Here, we have obtained two button images BG, and above the normal button image BG placed at the bottom (that is, the button image BG that simply imitates the production button 63), there is a normal button as the second from the bottom. Four button images BG are stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a with the image BG (that is, the button image BG simply imitating the production button 63) arranged.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 172(C), the action performance (battle performance) is developed (started) again. Here, an effect is developed in which the attack of the friendly character CRA hits the enemy character CRB.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 172(D), in FIG. 172(C), when the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB, a button get effect is developed (started). In the button get performance, a button image BG imitating the performance button 63 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and this displayed button image BG becomes a reward for the action performance (battle performance). The obtained button images BG are displayed and stocked in a pile on the right side of the display screen 7a. Here, two more button images BG are obtained, and they are placed above the normal button image BG placed second from the bottom, which is already stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a, and the normal button image BG is placed as the third button image from the bottom. The fourth button image BG from the bottom is placed above the normal button image BG.

In this way, four button images BG (normal button images BG) are arranged on the right side of the display screen 7a. The stocked button image BG suggests the degree of expectation for a win (big win or small win).

Note that the four button images BG arranged on the right side of the display screen 7a have a predetermined light emission mode (in this case, white lighting). The "predetermined lighting mode" is based on the expectation level (variable performance start command) of winning (big hit or small win), for example, white lighting → blue lighting → green lighting → red lighting → gold lighting (yellow lighting) → In addition to the high expectation of winning (big win or small win) in the order of seven colors lighting (rainbow lighting (high chance of winning)), there are also lights blinking white → blinking blue → blinking green → blinking red → blinking gold → blinking yellow )→7-color flashing (Rainbow flashing (high chance of winning)) The expectation level for winning (big hit or small win) is set high.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 172(E), a press promotion effect is developed (started). In the push promotion effect, the four button images BG stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a are digested in order from the bottom, and when the normal button image BG placed at the bottom disappears from the display screen 7a, the normal button image BG is A button image BG (that is, a button image BG simply imitating the production button 63) is displayed as a large button image BG in a predetermined light emitting manner in the center of the display screen 7a. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image that prompts the player to operate (press) the production button 63 moves in small increments in the vertical direction so as to overlap with the upper front surface of the button image BG, and overlap with the lower front surface of the button image BG. A timer bar TB indicating the valid period (for example, 3 seconds) for accepting the operation of the production button 63 is displayed. Further, above the button image BG, a message MG saying "Press" is displayed to prompt the user to operate (press) the production button 63. Note that the predetermined light emission mode of the large button image BG displayed in the center of the display screen 7a in FIG. It may be the same as the mode, or it may change to something with a high expectation of winning (big win or small win) (for example, from white lighting to white flashing, white lighting to blue lighting (blue flashing), or green lighting (green flashing) ) may be used.

When the player operates (presses) the production button 63, a specific sound announcing the winning is played from the speaker 67, and then, as shown in FIG. 172(F), a background image with seven colors is played. A winning effect is performed in which an image BKH (so-called "rainbow image BKH") is displayed on the display screen 7a. This win confirmation performance is a performance that notifies the player that a win (big win or small win) will occur thereafter. The rainbow image BKH is a specific image, and is a background image that announces a confirmed win.

In FIG. 172(F), when the normal button image BG stocked on the right side (arranged second from the bottom) in FIG. 172(D) disappears from the display screen 7a, the normal button image BG (that is, the effect A button image BG that simply imitates the button 63 is displayed in a predetermined light emitting manner as a large button image BG in the center of the display screen 7a. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image that prompts the player to operate (press) the production button 63 moves in small increments in the vertical direction so as to overlap with the upper front surface of the button image BG, and overlap with the lower front surface of the button image BG. A timer bar TB indicating the valid period (for example, 3 seconds) for accepting the operation of the production button 63 is displayed. Further, above the button image BG, a message MG saying "Press" is displayed to prompt the user to operate (press) the production button 63. Note that the predetermined light emitting mode of the large button image BG displayed in the center of the display screen 7a in FIG. It may be the same as the mode, or it may change to something with a high expectation of winning (big win or small win) (for example, from white lighting to white flashing, white lighting to green lighting (green flashing), or red lighting (red flashing) ) may be used.

When the player operates (presses) the production button 63, a special sound that is different from the specific sound and that announces the display of the premium image is played from the speaker 67, and then, as shown in FIG. 172(G), A premiere image PMG having a rectangular shape smaller than the outer shape of the display screen 7a is arranged so as to overlap with the front surface of the rainbow image BKH and displayed on the display screen 7a, and a rainbow effect is performed by the premiere image PMG. In other words, the rainbow effect is performed while the winning effect is being performed. This premium image PMG is a special image that can be displayed after the rainbow image BKH, which is a specific image, is displayed on the display screen 7a, and is a rare image with an extremely low appearance rate (an image that appears in a rare effect). )one of. Here, a rainbow image different from the rainbow image BKH displayed as the background image of the display screen 7a is displayed as the background image of the premiere image PMG, and the ally character CRA is displayed large in the center of the rectangular premiere image PMG. has been done. Note that the ally character CRA, which is displayed largely in the center of the rectangular premier image PMG, may be a still image or a moving image.

The first condition for the appearance of the premiere image PMG is that the press promotion effect shown in FIG. 172(E) is started, and the player operates the production button 63 (press operation ) is satisfied, and then the second condition is that the player performs the performance again within the valid period for accepting the operation of the performance button 63 while the rainbow image BKH shown in FIG. 172(F) is displayed on the display screen 7a. The condition that the button 63 is operated (pressed) needs to be satisfied.

After that, the premium image PMG disappears from the display screen 7a, and then, as shown in FIG. 172(H), the normal button image BG stocked on the right side (positioned third from the bottom) in FIG. 172(D) appears. When it disappears from the display screen 7a, a normal button image BG (that is, a button image BG that simply imitates the effect button 63) is displayed as a large button image BG in a predetermined light emitting manner in the center of the display screen 7a. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image that prompts the player to operate (press) the production button 63 moves in small increments in the vertical direction so as to overlap with the upper front part of the button image BG, and overlap with the lower front part of the button image BG. A timer bar TB indicating the valid period for accepting the operation of the production button 63 (for example, 3 seconds) is displayed. Further, above the button image BG, a message MG saying "Press" is displayed to prompt the user to operate (press) the production button 63. Note that the predetermined light emitting mode of the large button image BG displayed in the center of the display screen 7a in FIG. It may be the same as the mode, or it may change to something with a high expectation of winning (big win or small win) (for example, from white lighting to white flashing, white lighting to red lighting (red flashing), or yellow lighting (yellow flashing) ) may be used.

In FIG. 172(H), when the valid period for accepting the operation of the presentation button 63 (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed without the player operating (pressing) the presentation button 63, the operation shown in FIG. 172(I) continues. As shown in FIG. 172(D), when the normal button image BG stocked on the right side (placed fourth from the bottom, that is, placed at the top) is digested and this normal button image BG disappears from the display screen 7a. Accordingly, a normal button image BG (that is, a button image BG simply imitating the effect button 63) is displayed as a large button image BG in a predetermined light emitting manner in the center of the display screen 7a. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image that prompts the player to operate (press) the production button 63 moves in small increments in the vertical direction so as to overlap with the upper front surface of the button image BG, and overlap with the lower front surface of the button image BG. A timer bar TB indicating the valid period for accepting the operation of the production button 63 (for example, 3 seconds) is displayed. Further, above the button image BG, a message MG saying "Press" is displayed to prompt the user to operate (press) the production button 63. Note that the predetermined light emission mode of the large button image BG displayed in the center of the display screen 7a in FIG. It may be the same as the mode, or it may change to something with a high expectation of winning (big win or small win) (for example, from white lighting to white flashing, white lighting to yellow lighting (yellow flashing), or rainbow lighting (rainbow flashing). ) may be used.

In addition, in FIG. 172(H), when the player operates (presses) the performance button 63, a premium image, which is one of the rare images with an extremely low appearance rate (images that appear in rare performances), is displayed on the display screen 7a. will be displayed. Here, a premiere image different from the premiere image already displayed in FIG. 172(G) will be displayed on the display screen 7a. Thereafter, the process will proceed to FIG. 172(I) described above.

In FIG. 172(I), if the valid period for accepting the operation of the presentation button 63 (for example, 3 seconds) elapses without the player operating (pressing) the presentation button 63, then the operation shown in FIG. 172(J) continues. As shown in FIG. ) are stopped and displayed in a line. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed at the number "7", the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed at the number "7", and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed at the number "7", so that the same pattern The game is stopped and displayed, resulting in a win (big win or small win), and then a performance (big win performance or small win performance) based on the winning game (big win game or small win game) is started.

In addition, in FIG. 172(I), when the player operates (presses) the performance button 63, a premium image, which is one of the rare images with an extremely low appearance rate (images that appear in rare performances), is displayed on the display screen 7a. will be displayed. Here, a premiere image different from the premiere image already displayed in FIG. 172(G) will be displayed on the display screen 7a. Thereafter, the process will proceed to FIG. 172(J) described above.

In this way, in FIG. 172(F), after the rainbow image BKH is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 to notify the player that a win (big win or small win) will occur (in other words, the winning confirmation effect is If the number of operations of the production button 63 does not reach the upper limit number of operations (after the operation has been performed), the player is prompted to operate the production button 63, so there is something that will benefit the player. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that further notification may be made, and it is possible to improve interest in the game.

In addition, in the winning/losing notification performance B, after the rainbow image BKH is displayed on the display screen 7a in FIG. 172(F) and the winning confirmation performance is performed, the player's When the user does not operate (press) the effect button 63 within the valid period for accepting the operation of the effect button 63, no other premier image than the premier image PMG that appears in FIG. 172(G) will appear. In other words, in the winning/losing notification performance B, after the rainbow image BKH is displayed on the display screen 7a and the winning confirmation performance is performed in FIG. By operating (pressing) the effect button 63, the player can be given an opportunity for a premium image (image) to appear, thereby contributing to an increase in the player's desire to operate the effect button 63. I can do it.

In addition, in the winning/losing notification effect B, after the rainbow image BKH is displayed on the display screen 7a in FIG. 172(F) and the winning confirmation effect is performed, in FIG. 172(H) or FIG. 172(I), if , when the player operates (presses) the performance button 63 within the valid period for accepting the operation of the performance button 63, the premium in the performance A that can notify winnings or losses shown in FIG. Premium images such as image PMG2 and other premium images (premium images PMG2 in performance A that can announce winning or losing in FIG. 171(G) and premium images in performance B that can announce winning or losing in FIG. 172(G), respectively) are The images are displayed one after another on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

In this way, in the winning/losing notification performance B, after the rainbow image BKH is displayed on the display screen 7a in FIG. 172(F) and the winning confirmation performance is performed, in FIG. 172(H) or FIG. 172(I), , if the player operates (presses) the performance button 63 within the operational acceptance period of the performance button 63, a rare image with an extremely low appearance rate (an image that appears in a rare performance) will be created without duplication. ) are displayed one after another on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. For this reason, conventionally, when it has been determined that a win (big win or small win) will occur, the player does not have to operate (press) the performance button 63 at all and simply watches the progress of the performance. However, in the performance B that can notify the winner, when the performance button 63 is operated (pressed), the premium images are displayed one after another on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is possible to make it difficult to lose the freshness of the performance during the fluctuation in a state where it is certain that a big hit or a small win will occur.

[Win/lose announcement possible performance C]
Next, the winning/losing announcement possible performance C will be explained with reference to FIG. 173. FIG. 173 is a diagram for explaining the performance C that allows for notification of winning or losing. The winning/losing announcement possible performance C is performed during the fluctuating performance of decorative symbols.

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, a middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and a right decorative pattern 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed as the reels are rotated from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variable display of decorative patterns (designs: numbers "1" to "9") is started in the display mode. When the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern is started, the decorative pattern that has been stopped and displayed changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed, resulting in a display mode that fluctuates at a high speed. Thereby, the background image placed behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. Immediately before stopping, the decorative pattern decelerates and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed (temporarily stopped and then stopped). It should be noted that when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, it is displayed in a display mode in which it slowly moves slowly in the vertical direction.

In the winning/losing notification performance C, after the variable display of decorative symbols starts, an action performance (battle performance) is developed (started) as shown in FIG. 173(A). In the action performance (battle performance), an ally character CRA holding a sword and an enemy character CRB holding a sword appear. Here, an effect is developed in which the attack of the friendly character CRA hits the enemy character CRB. In the action performance (battle performance), a battle takes place between an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB, and when the ally character CRA finally defeats the enemy character CRB, it becomes a win (big win or small win).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 173(B), in FIG. 173(A), when the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB, a button get effect is developed (started). In the button get performance, a button image BG imitating the performance button 63 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and this displayed button image BG becomes a reward for the action performance (battle performance). The obtained button images BG are displayed and stocked in a pile on the right side of the display screen 7a. Here, we have obtained two button images BG, and above the normal button image BG placed at the bottom (that is, the button image BG that simply imitates the production button 63), there is a normal button as the second from the bottom. Two button images BG are stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a with the image BG (that is, the button image BG simply imitating the production button 63) arranged.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 173(C), the action performance (battle performance) is developed (started) again. Here, an effect is developed in which the attack of the friendly character CRA hits the enemy character CRB.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 173(D), in FIG. 173(C), the attack of the ally character CRA hits the enemy character CRB, and a button get effect is developed (started). In the button get performance, a button image BG imitating the performance button 63 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and this displayed button image BG becomes a reward for the action performance (battle performance). The obtained button images BG are displayed and stocked in a pile on the right side of the display screen 7a. Here, three more button images BG have been obtained, and they are placed above the normal button image BG placed second from the bottom, which is already stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a, and the normal button image BG is placed as the third button image from the bottom. A button image BG is placed above the normal button image BG, a normal button image BG is placed as the fourth button from the bottom, and a normal button image BG is placed above the normal button image BG as the fifth button from the bottom. Image BG is arranged.

In this way, five button images BG (normal button images BG) are arranged on the right side of the display screen 7a. The stocked button image BG suggests the degree of expectation for a win (big win or small win).

Note that the five button images BG arranged on the right side of the display screen 7a have a predetermined light emission mode (in this case, white lighting). The "predetermined lighting mode" is based on the expectation level (variable performance start command) of winning (big win or small win), for example, white lighting → blue lighting → green lighting → red lighting → gold lighting (yellow lighting) → In addition to the high expectation of winning (big win or small win) in the order of seven colors lighting (rainbow lighting (high chance of winning)), there are also lights flashing white → flashing blue → flashing green → flashing red → flashing gold → flashing yellow (blinking yellow) )→7-color flashing (Rainbow flashing (high chance of winning)) The expectation of winning (big hit or small win) is set high.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 173(E), a press promotion effect is developed (started). In the push promotion effect, the five button images BG stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a are digested in order from the bottom, and when the normal button image BG placed at the bottom disappears from the display screen 7a, the normal button image BG is A button image BG (that is, a button image BG simply imitating the production button 63) is displayed as a large button image BG in a predetermined light emitting manner in the center of the display screen 7a. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image that prompts the player to operate (press) the production button 63 moves in small increments in the vertical direction so as to overlap with the upper front surface of the button image BG, and overlap with the lower front surface of the button image BG. A timer bar TB indicating the valid period (for example, 3 seconds) for accepting the operation of the production button 63 is displayed. Further, above the button image BG, a message MG saying "Press" is displayed to prompt the user to operate (press) the production button 63. Note that the predetermined light emission mode of the large button image BG displayed in the center of the display screen 7a in FIG. It may be the same as the mode, or it may be changed to something with a high expectation of winning (big win or small win) (for example, from white lighting to white flashing, white lighting to blue lighting (blue flashing)). But that's fine.

When the player operates (presses) the production button 63, a specific sound announcing a confirmed win is played from the speaker 67, and then, as shown in FIG. 173(F), a background image with seven colors is played. A winning effect is performed in which an image BKH (so-called "rainbow image BKH") is displayed on the display screen 7a. This win confirmation performance is a performance that notifies the player that a win (big win or small win) will occur thereafter. The rainbow image BKH is a specific image, and is a background image that announces a confirmed win.

In FIG. 173(F), when the normal button image BG stocked on the right side (arranged second from the bottom) in FIG. 173(D) disappears from the display screen 7a, the normal button image BG (that is, the effect A button image BG that simply imitates the button 63 is displayed in a predetermined light emitting manner as a large button image BG in the center of the display screen 7a. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image that prompts the player to operate (press) the production button 63 moves in small increments in the vertical direction so as to overlap with the upper front surface of the button image BG, and overlap with the lower front surface of the button image BG. A timer bar TB indicating the valid period for accepting the operation of the production button 63 (for example, 3 seconds) is displayed. Further, above the button image BG, a message MG saying "Press" is displayed to prompt the user to operate (press) the production button 63. Note that the predetermined light emitting mode of the large button image BG displayed in the center of the display screen 7a in FIG. It may be the same as the mode, or it may be changed to one with a high expectation of winning (big win or small win) (for example, from white lighting to white blinking, or from white lighting to green lighting).

In FIG. 173(F), when the valid period for accepting the operation of the presentation button 63 (e.g., 3 seconds) elapses without the player operating (pressing) the presentation button 63, the operation shown in FIG. 173(G) continues. As shown in FIG. 173(D), when the normal button image BG stocked on the right side (third from the bottom) is digested and this normal button image BG disappears from the display screen 7a, the normal button image BG disappears from the display screen 7a. A button image BG (that is, a button image BG simply imitating the production button 63) is displayed in a predetermined light emitting manner as a large button image BG in the center of the display screen 7a. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image that prompts the player to operate (press) the production button 63 moves in small increments in the vertical direction so as to overlap with the upper front surface of the button image BG, and overlap with the lower front surface of the button image BG. A timer bar TB indicating the valid period for accepting the operation of the production button 63 (for example, 3 seconds) is displayed. Further, above the button image BG, a message MG saying "Press" is displayed to prompt the user to operate (press) the production button 63. Note that the predetermined light emitting mode of the large button image BG displayed in the center of the display screen 7a in FIG. It may be the same as the mode, or it may be changed to something with a high expectation of winning (big win or small win) (for example, from white lighting to white flashing, white lighting to red lighting (red flashing)). But that's fine.

In addition, in FIG. 173(F), when the player operates (presses) the performance button 63, a premium image, which is one of the rare images with an extremely low appearance rate (images that appear in rare performances), is displayed on the display screen 7a. will be displayed. Thereafter, the process will proceed to FIG. 173(G) described above.

In FIG. 173 (G), when the valid period for accepting the operation of the performance button 63 (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed without the player operating (pressing) the performance button 63, the operation shown in FIG. 173 (H) continues. As shown in FIG. 173(D), when the normal button image BG stocked on the right side (fourth from the bottom) is digested and this normal button image BG disappears from the display screen 7a, the normal button image BG disappears from the display screen 7a. A button image BG (that is, a button image BG simply imitating the production button 63) is displayed in a predetermined light emitting manner as a large button image BG in the center of the display screen 7a. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image that prompts the player to operate (press) the production button 63 moves in small increments in the vertical direction so as to overlap with the upper front surface of the button image BG, and overlap with the lower front surface of the button image BG. A timer bar TB indicating the valid period (for example, 3 seconds) for accepting the operation of the production button 63 is displayed. Further, above the button image BG, a message MG saying "Press" is displayed to prompt the user to operate (press) the production button 63. Note that the predetermined light emitting mode of the large button image BG displayed in the center of the display screen 7a in FIG. It may be the same as the mode, or it may be changed to something with a high expectation of winning (big win or small win) (for example, from white lighting to white flashing, white lighting to yellow lighting (yellow flashing)). But that's fine.

In addition, in FIG. 173(G), when the player operates (presses) the performance button 63, a premium image, which is one of the rare images with an extremely low appearance rate (images that appear in rare performances), is displayed on the display screen 7a. will be displayed. Here, in the case where the player operates (presses) the production button 63 and a premiere image is displayed on the display screen 7a in FIG. 173(F), a premiere image different from the already displayed premiere image is displayed. It will be displayed on the screen 7a. Thereafter, the process will proceed to FIG. 173(H) described above.

In FIG. 173(H), if the valid period for accepting the operation of the presentation button 63 (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed without the player operating (pressing) the presentation button 63, then the operation shown in FIG. 173(I) will continue. As shown in FIG. 173(D), when the normal button image BG stocked on the right side (fifth from the bottom, that is, placed at the top) is digested and this normal button image BG disappears from the display screen 7a. Accordingly, a normal button image BG (that is, a button image BG simply imitating the effect button 63) is displayed as a large button image BG in a predetermined light emitting manner in the center of the display screen 7a. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image that prompts the player to operate (press) the production button 63 moves in small increments in the vertical direction so as to overlap with the upper front surface of the button image BG, and overlap with the lower front surface of the button image BG. A timer bar TB indicating the valid period (for example, 3 seconds) for accepting the operation of the production button 63 is displayed. Further, above the button image BG, a message MG saying "Press" is displayed to prompt the user to operate (press) the production button 63. Note that the predetermined light emitting mode of the large button image BG displayed in the center of the display screen 7a in FIG. It may be the same as the mode, or it may be changed to something with a high expectation of winning (big win or small win) (for example, from white lighting to white flashing, white lighting to rainbow lighting (rainbow flashing)). But that's fine.

In addition, in FIG. 173(H), when the player operates (presses) the performance button 63, a premium image, which is one of the rare images with an extremely low appearance rate (images that appear in rare performances), is displayed on the display screen 7a. will be displayed. Here, if the player operates (presses) the production button 63 in FIG. 173(F) or FIG. 173(G) and the premier image is displayed on the display screen 7a, the previously displayed premium image A different premiere image will be displayed on the display screen 7a. Thereafter, the process will proceed to FIG. 173(I) described above.

In FIG. 173(I), if the valid period for accepting the operation of the presentation button 63 (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed without the player operating (pressing) the presentation button 63, then as shown in FIG. 173(J) As shown in FIG. ) are stopped and displayed in a line. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed at the number "7", the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed at the number "7", and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed at the number "7", so that the same pattern The game is stopped and displayed, resulting in a win (big win or small win), and then the performance (big win performance or small win performance) based on the winning game (big win game or small win game) is started.

In addition, in FIG. 173(I), when the player operates (presses) the performance button 63, a premium image, which is one of the rare images with an extremely low appearance rate (images that appear in rare performances), is displayed on the display screen 7a. will be displayed. Here, if the player operates (presses) the production button 63 in FIG. 173(F), FIG. 173(G), or FIG. 173(H) and the premium image is displayed on the display screen 7a, A premiere image different from the already displayed premiere image will be displayed on the display screen 7a. Thereafter, the process will proceed to FIG. 173(J) described above.

In this way, in FIG. 173(F), after the rainbow image BKH is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 to notify the player that a win (big win or small win) will occur (in other words, the win confirmation effect is If the number of operations of the production button 63 does not reach the upper limit number of operations (after the operation has been performed), the player is prompted to operate the production button 63, so there is something that will benefit the player. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that further notification may be made, and it is possible to improve interest in the game.

In addition, in the winning/losing notification performance C, after the rainbow image BKH is displayed on the display screen 7a in FIG. 173(F) and the winning confirmation performance is performed, the player in FIG. 173(F) to FIG. If the production button 63 is not operated (pressed) within the operation reception validity period of the production button 63, the premium image, which is one of the rare images (images that appear in rare production) with an extremely low appearance rate, will not appear at all. There is no. In other words, in the winning/losing notification performance C, after the rainbow image BKH is displayed on the display screen 7a and the winning confirmation performance is performed in FIG. By operating (pressing) the effect button 63, the player can be given an opportunity for a premium image (image) to appear, contributing to an increase in the player's desire to operate the effect button 63. I can do it.

In addition, in the winning/losing notification performance C, after the rainbow image BKH is displayed on the display screen 7a in FIG. 173(F) and the winning confirmation performance is performed, in FIG. 173(G) to FIG. 172(I), if , when the player operates (presses) the performance button 63 within the operation acceptance validity period of the performance button 63, the winning/losing notification as shown in FIGS. 171(E) and (G) can be made without duplication. Premium images such as premium images PMG1 and PMG2 in performance A and other premium images (premium images different from premium images PMG1 and PMG2 in performance A that can notify winners and losers in FIGS. 171(E) and 171(G)) are displayed one after another on the image display device. 7 on the display screen 7a.

In this way, in the winning/losing notification effect C, after the rainbow image BKH is displayed on the display screen 7a in FIG. 173(F) and the winning confirmation effect is performed, in FIG. 173(G) to FIG. 172(I), , if the player operates (presses) the performance button 63 within the operational acceptance period of the performance button 63, a rare image with an extremely low appearance rate (an image that appears in a rare performance) will be created without duplication. ) are displayed one after another on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. For this reason, conventionally, when it has been determined that a win (big win or small win) will occur, the player does not have to operate (press) the performance button 63 at all and simply watches the progress of the performance. However, in the performance C that can notify the winner, when the performance button 63 is operated (pressed), the premier images are displayed one after another on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is possible to make it difficult to lose the freshness of the performance during the fluctuation in a state where it is certain that a big hit or a small win will occur.

[Win/lose announcement possible performance D]
Next, the winning/losing announcement possible performance D will be explained with reference to FIG. 174. FIG. 174 is a diagram for explaining the performance D that allows notification of winning or losing. The winning/losing announcement possible performance D is performed during the fluctuating performance of decorative symbols.

On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a left decorative pattern 8L of a stereoscopic image, a middle decorative pattern 8C of a stereoscopic image, and a right decorative pattern 8R of a stereoscopic image are displayed as the reels are rotated from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variable display of decorative patterns (designs: numbers "1" to "9") is started in the display mode. When the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern is started, the decorative pattern that has been stopped and displayed changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed, resulting in a display mode that fluctuates at a high speed. Thereby, the background image placed behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. Immediately before stopping, the decorative pattern decelerates and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed (temporarily stopped and then stopped). In addition, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, it is displayed in a display mode in which it slowly moves slowly in the vertical direction.

In the winning/losing notification performance D, after the variable display of decorative symbols starts, an action performance (battle performance) is developed (started) as shown in FIG. 174(A). In the action performance (battle performance), an ally character CRA holding a sword and an enemy character CRB holding a sword appear. Here, an effect is developed in which the attack of the friendly character CRA hits the enemy character CRB. In the action performance (battle performance), a battle takes place between an ally character CRA and an enemy character CRB, and when the ally character CRA finally defeats the enemy character CRB, it results in a win (big win or small win).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 174(B), in FIG. 174(A), when the attack of the friendly character CRA hits the enemy character CRB, a button get effect is developed (started). In the button get performance, a button image BG imitating the performance button 63 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and this displayed button image BG becomes a reward for the action performance (battle performance). The obtained button images BG are displayed and stocked in a pile on the right side of the display screen 7a. Here, we have obtained two button images BG, and above the normal button image BG placed at the bottom (that is, the button image BG that simply imitates the production button 63), there is a normal button as the second from the bottom. Two button images BG are stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a with the image BG (that is, the button image BG simply imitating the production button 63) arranged.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 174(C), the action performance (battle performance) is developed (started) again. Here, an effect is developed in which the attack of the friendly character CRA hits the enemy character CRB.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 174(D), a button get effect is developed (started) in response to the attack of the friendly character CRA hitting the enemy character CRB in FIG. 174(C). In the button get performance, a button image BG imitating the performance button 63 is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and this displayed button image BG becomes a reward for the action performance (battle performance). The obtained button images BG are displayed and stocked in a pile on the right side of the display screen 7a. Here, two more button images BG are obtained, and they are placed above the normal button image BG placed second from the bottom, which is already stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a, and are placed as the third button image from the bottom. The fourth button image BG from the bottom is placed above the normal button image BG.

In this way, four button images BG (normal button images BG) are arranged on the right side of the display screen 7a. The stocked button image BG suggests the degree of expectation for a win (big win or small win).

Note that the four button images BG arranged on the right side of the display screen 7a have a predetermined light emission mode (in this case, white lighting). The "predetermined lighting mode" is based on the expectation level (variable performance start command) of winning (big hit or small win), for example, white lighting → blue lighting → green lighting → red lighting → gold lighting (yellow lighting) → In addition to the high expectation of winning (big win or small win) in the order of seven colors lighting (rainbow lighting (high chance of winning)), there are also lights blinking white → blinking blue → blinking green → blinking red → blinking gold → blinking yellow )→7-color flashing (Rainbow flashing (high chance of winning)) The expectation level for winning (big hit or small win) is set high.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 174(E), a press promotion effect is developed (started). In the push promotion effect, the four button images BG stocked on the right side of the display screen 7a are digested in order from the bottom, and when the normal button image BG placed at the bottom disappears from the display screen 7a, the normal button image BG is A button image BG (that is, a button image BG simply imitating the production button 63) is displayed as a large button image BG in a predetermined light emitting manner in the center of the display screen 7a. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image that prompts the player to operate (press) the production button 63 moves in small increments in the vertical direction so as to overlap with the upper front surface of the button image BG, and overlap with the lower front surface of the button image BG. A timer bar TB indicating the valid period (for example, 3 seconds) for accepting the operation of the production button 63 is displayed. Further, above the button image BG, a message MG saying "Press" is displayed to prompt the user to operate (press) the production button 63. Note that the predetermined light emission mode of the large button image BG displayed in the center of the display screen 7a in FIG. It is the same as the mode (white lighting here).

In FIG. 174(E), when the valid period for accepting the operation of the presentation button 63 (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed without the player operating (pressing) the presentation button 63, the operation shown in FIG. 174(F) continues. As shown in FIG. 174(D), when the normal button image BG stocked on the right side (arranged second from the bottom) is digested and this normal button image BG disappears from the display screen 7a, the normal button image BG disappears from the display screen 7a. A button image BG (that is, a button image BG simply imitating the production button 63) is displayed in a predetermined light emitting manner as a large button image BG in the center of the display screen 7a. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image that prompts the player to operate (press) the production button 63 moves in small increments in the vertical direction so as to overlap with the upper front surface of the button image BG, and overlap with the lower front surface of the button image BG. A timer bar TB indicating the valid period (for example, 3 seconds) for accepting the operation of the production button 63 is displayed. Further, above the button image BG, a message MG saying "Press" is displayed to prompt the user to operate (press) the production button 63. Note that the predetermined light emitting mode of the large button image BG displayed in the center of the display screen 7a in FIG. 174(F) changes from the predetermined light emitting mode (white lighting) of the button image BG to blue lighting in FIG. 174(E). This indicates to the player that there is a high expectation of winning (big win or small win).

The reason why the predetermined light emitting mode of the button image BG changes from white lighting to blue lighting is as follows: In FIG. 174(E), the player does not operate (press) the performance button 63, but When the operation reception validity period (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, an image having seven colors (so-called "rainbow image") appears as a background image, that is, a rainbow image is displayed on the display screen 7a to confirm the win. This is because they were unable to do so. This win confirmation performance is a performance that notifies the player that a win (big win or small win) will occur thereafter. The rainbow image is a background image that announces a confirmed win.

In FIG. 174(F), when the valid period for accepting the operation of the presentation button 63 (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed without the player operating (pressing) the presentation button 63, the operation shown in FIG. 174(G) continues. As shown in FIG. 174(D), when the normal button image BG stocked on the right side (third from the bottom) is digested and this normal button image BG disappears from the display screen 7a, the normal button image BG disappears from the display screen 7a. A button image BG (that is, a button image BG simply imitating the production button 63) is displayed in a predetermined light emitting manner as a large button image BG in the center of the display screen 7a. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image that prompts the player to operate (press) the production button 63 moves in small increments in the vertical direction so as to overlap with the upper front surface of the button image BG, and overlap with the lower front surface of the button image BG. A timer bar TB indicating the valid period (for example, 3 seconds) for accepting the operation of the production button 63 is displayed. Further, above the button image BG, a message MG saying "Press" is displayed to prompt the user to operate (press) the production button 63. Note that the predetermined light emission mode of the large button image BG displayed in the center of the display screen 7a in FIG. 174(G) changes from blue lighting to green lighting, which is the predetermined light emission mode of the button image BG in FIG. 174(F). This indicates to the player that there is a high expectation of winning (big win or small win).

The reason why the predetermined light emitting mode of the button image BG changes from blue lighting to green lighting is as follows: In FIG. 174(F), the player does not operate (press) the performance button 63, but When the operation reception validity period (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, an image having seven colors (so-called "rainbow image") appears as a background image, that is, a rainbow image is displayed on the display screen 7a to confirm the win. This is because they were unable to do so. This win confirmation performance is a performance that notifies the player that a win (big win or small win) will occur thereafter. The rainbow image is a background image that announces a confirmed win.

In FIG. 174(G), when the valid period for accepting the operation of the presentation button 63 (e.g., 3 seconds) passes without the player operating (pressing) the presentation button 63, the operation shown in FIG. 174(H) continues. As shown in FIG. 174(D), when the normal button image BG stocked on the right side (placed fourth from the bottom, that is, placed at the top) is digested and this normal button image BG disappears from the display screen 7a. Accordingly, a normal button image BG (that is, a button image BG simply imitating the effect button 63) is displayed as a large button image BG in a predetermined light emitting manner in the center of the display screen 7a. This button image BG is displayed in such a manner that a downward arrow image that prompts the player to operate (press) the production button 63 moves in small increments in the vertical direction so as to overlap with the upper front surface of the button image BG, and overlap with the lower front surface of the button image BG. A timer bar TB indicating the valid period (for example, 3 seconds) for accepting the operation of the production button 63 is displayed. Further, above the button image BG, a message MG saying "Press" is displayed to prompt the user to operate (press) the production button 63. Note that the predetermined light emission mode of the large button image BG displayed in the center of the display screen 7a in FIG. 174(H) changes from green lighting to red lighting, which is the predetermined light emission mode of the button image BG in FIG. 174(G). This indicates to the player that there is a high expectation of winning (big win or small win).

The reason why the predetermined light emitting mode of the button image BG changes from green lighting to red lighting is as follows: In FIG. 174(G), the player did not operate (press) the performance button 63, but When the operation reception validity period (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, an image having seven colors (so-called "rainbow image") appears as a background image, that is, a rainbow image is displayed on the display screen 7a to confirm the win. This is because they were unable to do so. This win confirmation performance is a performance that notifies the player that a win (big win or small win) will occur thereafter. The rainbow image is a background image that announces a confirmed win.

In FIG. 174(H), when the valid period for accepting the operation of the presentation button 63 (e.g., 3 seconds) passes without the player operating (pressing) the presentation button 63, the operation shown in FIG. 174(I) continues. As shown, the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R each advance (move) toward the front (front) center advanced position of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (in the direction of approaching each other), At the front (front) center position (advance position (deployment position)) of the display screen 7a, the left side decorative part, which is half of the ring-shaped decorative part attached to the tip side of the left side movable accessory 14L, and the right side movable accessory The right side decorative part which is half of the annular decorative part attached to the tip side of 14R is combined, and the left side decorative part of the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side decoration of the right side movable accessory 14R have an annular shape. One decorative member (combined accessory) is formed.

When the left decorative part of the left movable accessory 14L and the right decorative part of the right movable accessory 14R are combined to form a combined accessory having an annular shape, the area formed within the annular shape is a circular area ( (hereinafter referred to as "circular area") 14D. An ally character CRA is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 corresponding to the circular area 14D. At this time, the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R have a predetermined light emission mode (for example, a white light emission mode), so that the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R have a white light emission mode. At the same time, the alphabet "V" appears from the front of the left movable accessory 14L and from the front of the right movable accessory 14R, respectively.

A light guide plate (not shown) is provided on the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R, and the English letter "V" is formed on this light guide plate, and the outer periphery excluding the front and back surfaces of the light guide plate is When the plurality of first decorative LEDs (LEDs capable of emitting light in a single color or in multiple colors) arranged in a surrounding manner emit light (e.g., white), the light incident from around the light guide plate illuminates the letter "V" formed on the light guide plate. '', the letter ``V'' appears due to the diffused reflection. In addition, the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R include a plurality of second decorative LEDs (LEDs capable of emitting a single color or multicolor ) emits light (for example, red), it passes through the light guide plate and is emitted toward the front of the left movable accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R, but the alphabet "V" does not appear.

Subsequently, the left side movable accessory 14L and the right side movable accessory 14R move away from each other in the direction in which the left side movable accessory 14L displays an image from the advanced position at the center of the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. At the same time as the display screen 7a of the device 7 retreats (moves) toward the left side retreat position (home position), the right movable accessory 14R moves the image from the forward position at the front (front) center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It retreats (moves) toward the retreat position (home position) on the right side of the display screen 7a of the display device 7.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 174(J), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are aligned with the midpoint of the left side and the midpoint of the right side of the display screen 7a within their own variable display areas. They are displayed in a line that connects them (center line in the left-right direction). Here, the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed at the number "7", the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed at the number "7", and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed at the number "7", so that the same pattern The game is stopped and displayed, resulting in a win (big win or small win), and then a performance (big win performance or small win performance) based on the winning game (big win game or small win game) is started.

In this way, in the winning/losing notification performance D, if the player does not operate (press) the performance button 63 at a predetermined timing, the center of the display screen 7a in FIGS. 174(E) to 174(H) By changing the predetermined lighting mode of the large button image BG displayed in the section, the player is prompted to operate (press) the performance button 63 by indicating to the player that there is a high expectation of winning (big hit or small hit). By prompting the player, the player can have an opportunity to have a rainbow image appear, which is a background image that confirms a win (big win or small win), and can improve the player's interest.

In addition, in FIGS. 174(E) to 174(H), if the player operates (presses) the production button 63, a specific sound announcing the winning confirmation will be played from the speaker 67, and the background image will be A winning effect is performed in which an image having seven colors (so-called "rainbow image") is displayed on the display screen 7a. This win confirmation performance is a performance that notifies the player that a win (big win or small win) will occur thereafter. The rainbow image is a specific image and is a background image that announces a confirmed win. Further, for example, in FIG. 174(E), if the player operates (presses) the production button 63, a specific sound announcing a confirmed win will be played from the speaker 67, and a rainbow image will be displayed as the background image. A win confirmation effect displayed on the display screen 7a is performed, and in FIG. 174(F), if the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, a premium sound that is different from the specific sound is generated. A special sound announcing the display of the image is played from the speaker 67, and a premiere image having a rectangular shape that is smaller than the outer size of the display screen 7a is displayed on the display screen 7a so as to overlap with the front of the rainbow image. A rainbow performance will be held. In other words, the rainbow effect is performed while the winning effect is being performed. This premium image is a special image that can be displayed after the specific image rainbow image is displayed on the display screen 7a, and is one of the rare images (images that appear in rare effects) that have an extremely low appearance rate. There is one. Here, as the background image of the premiere image, another rainbow image different from the rainbow image displayed as the background image of the display screen 7a is displayed, and the ally character is displayed large in the center of the rectangular premiere image. There is. Note that the ally character displayed in a large size in the center of the rectangular premier image may be a still image or a moving image. Furthermore, if the player operates (presses) the performance button 63 after the winning confirmation performance has been performed, for example, as shown in FIGS. 171(E) and 171(G), In addition to the premium images PMG1 and PMG2, which are rare images (images that appear in rare effects) that have an extremely low appearance rate in production A where winnings or losses can be announced, other premium images (FIGS. 171 (E) and (G)) can be announced. Premium images such as other premium images (different from the premium images PMG1 and PMG2 in presentation A) are displayed one after another on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

In this way, in FIGS. 174(E) to 174(H), if the player operates (presses) the production button 63, a specific sound announcing the winning confirmation will be played from the speaker 67, After a winning effect is performed in which an image having seven colors as a background image (a so-called "rainbow image") is displayed on the display screen 7a, suppose that the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 at a predetermined timing. ), a premium image that is a rare image (an image that appears in a rare performance) with an extremely low appearance rate can appear, which can contribute to increasing the user's desire to operate the performance button 63.

In addition, in the winning/losing notification performance D, in FIGS. 174(E) to 174(H), if the player operates (presses) the performance button 63, a specific sound announcing the confirmation of winning is produced. After the winning effect is played from the speaker 67 and an image having seven colors as a background image (so-called "rainbow image") is displayed on the display screen 7a, if the player presses the effect button 63 at a predetermined timing. When operated (pressing operation), premium images, which are rare images with an extremely low appearance rate (images that appear in rare effects) without duplication, are displayed one after another on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It has become so. For this reason, conventionally, when it has been determined that a win (big win or small win) will occur, the player does not have to operate (press) the performance button 63 at all and simply watches the progress of the performance. However, in the effect D that can notify the winner, when the effect button 63 is operated (pressed), the premier images are displayed one after another on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, so it is possible to notify the winner. It is possible to make it difficult to lose the freshness of the performance during the fluctuation in a state where it is certain that a big hit or a small win will occur.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of image blurring is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example,

[Effect example]
Below is an example of the effect of the performance that allows for announcement of winning or losing.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 171(A) to 171(J) of performance A that can notify winnings or losses, a performance button 63 (operation means) that can be operated by the player is provided, and In the winning confirmation performance in which the winning result (win (big win or small win)) from the lottery is announced by operating the performance button 63 (operating means), the winning result (by operating the performance button 63 (operating means) in 171 (C) A first effect in which the rainbow image BKH (specific image) shown in FIG. 171(D) is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 to notify of a win (big win or small win), and a effect following the first effect. When the number of operations of the button 63 (operation means) has not reached the upper limit number of operations, the operation of the production button 63 (operation means) is prompted, for example, as shown in FIG. 171(D) or FIG. 171(F). The second performance can be performed. According to this configuration, after the rainbow image BKH (specific image) is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 to notify the player that a hit (big hit or small hit) will occur, the effect button 63 (operation When the number of operations of the operation means (means) does not reach the upper limit number of operations, the player is prompted to operate the production button 63 (operation means), so that the player is further informed of something that will be beneficial to the player. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the game may be played, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.
The same applies to the effect B in which winning or losing can be announced in FIG. 172, the effect C in which winning or losing can be announced in FIG. 173, and the effect D in which winning or losing can be announced in FIG.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 171(A) to FIG. 171(J) of the winning/losing announcement possible performance A, before the first performance is executed, the A third effect is executed in which a button image BG (operating means image) imitating the effect button 63 (operating means) is stocked on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the image is displayed as shown in FIG. 171(B). By storing four button images BG (normal button images BG) arranged on the right side of the display screen 7a of the device 7, the upper limit number of operations is the number of button images BG (operation means images) in stock. According to this configuration, the stock number of 4 is the number of times the production button 63 (operation means) can be operated, so the winning result (win (big win or small win)) can be generated within this number of times. ), it is possible to suggest to the player that the rainbow image BKH (specific image) that notifies the player that there is a possibility that the rainbow image BKH (specific image) will be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.
The same is true for the effect B in which winning or losing can be announced in FIG. 172, the effect C in which winning or losing can be announced in FIG. 173, and the effect D in which winning or losing can be announced in FIG.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 171(D) to 171(G) of the performance A that can notify winnings and losses, when the second performance is being performed, the performance button 63 (operation means ) is operated, the fourth effect displays the premiere image PMG1 (special image) in FIG. 171(E) and the premiere image PMG2 (special image) in FIG. 171(G) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. can be executed. According to this configuration, after the rainbow image BKH (specific image) is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 to notify the player that a hit (big hit or small hit) will occur, the effect button is pressed. When the production button 63 (operating means) is operated when the number of operations of 63 (operating means) has not reached the upper limit number of operations remaining, premier image PMG1 (special image) or premiere image PMG2 (special image) is displayed. is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. As a result, the player actively operates the production button 63 (operating means) to see the special images such as the premium image PMG1 and the premium image PMG2 displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In other words, conventionally, when it was determined that a win (big win or small win) would occur, the player did not need to operate the performance button 63 (operating means) and simply watched the progress of the performance. However, the win/loss notification performance A includes a performance that makes the player want to further operate the performance button 63 (operation means) even when it is certain that a win (big win or small win) will occur.
The same is true for the effect B in which winning or losing can be announced in FIG. 172, the effect C in which winning or losing can be announced in FIG. 173, and the effect D in which winning or losing can be announced in FIG.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment described above, for example, as shown in FIGS. 171(A) to 171(J) of performance A that can notify winnings and losses, the special images are the premium image PMG1 and the premium image PMG2. According to this configuration, the premiere image PMG1 and the premiere image PMG2 are rare images (images that appear in rare effects) that have an extremely low appearance rate, and the player actively presses the effect button to see these premium images. 63 (operating means), it can contribute to increasing the player's desire to operate the production button 63 (operating means).
The same is true for the effect B in which winning or losing can be announced in FIG. 172, the effect C in which winning or losing can be announced in FIG. 173, and the effect D in which winning or losing can be announced in FIG.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 171(E) and 171(G) of the winning/losing announcement possible performance A, the third performance is a rare image with an extremely low appearance rate (in a rare performance). A special sound is output to announce the display of a premiere image corresponding to a special image called a premiere image PMG1 or a premiere image PMG2, which are one of the images that appear (images that appear). In the case where the special sound is not played, even if the special images such as the premium image PMG1 and the premium image PMG2 are suddenly displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the player can automatically (sequentially) simply due to the progress of the performance. ) There is a risk that the special image will be recognized as a normally appearing image that is only displayed, but due to the special sound being played, the special image will be recognized as a rare image (an image that appears in rare effects), and the special image may be recognized as a rare image (an image that appears in rare effects) You can prevent yourself from missing something.
The same is true for the effect B in which winning or losing can be announced in FIG. 172, the effect C in which winning or losing can be announced in FIG. 173, and the effect D in which winning or losing can be announced in FIG.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 171(D) of the effect A that can notify a win, the first effect is a specific sound for announcing a confirmed win, which corresponds to a specific image called a rainbow image BKH. Output. In the case where the specific sound is not played, even if the specific image called the rainbow image BKH is suddenly displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the player may be aware that even if a specific image called the rainbow image BKH is suddenly displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, it is simply displayed automatically (sequentially) as the performance progresses. However, by playing a specific sound, the specific image can be recognized as an image that announces a confirmed win, and it is possible to prevent people from accidentally missing it without noticing. .
The same applies to the effect B in which winning or losing can be announced in FIG. 172, the effect C in which winning or losing can be announced in FIG. 173, and the effect D in which winning or losing can be announced in FIG.

[Modified example]
Below, a modified example of the effect that can be used to announce the winner or loser is shown.
[Modification 1]
In the performance A that can be announced in FIG. 171, the performance B that can be announced in FIG. 172, the performance C that can be announced in FIG. 173, and the performance D that can be announced in FIG. 7 is displayed on the display screen 7a, and when the player operates (presses) the production button 63, a specific sound announcing the confirmation of winning is played from the speaker 67, and a rainbow image is displayed as a specific image on the image display device 7. The premium image may be displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as a special image, or a special sound announcing the display of the premiere image as a specific image may be played from the speaker 67. However, instead of the button image BG imitating the production button 63, a sword image imitating the sword member 64 may be used as appropriate. In this case, the expectation level of the winning result of the specific lottery set in the sword image (in other words, the expectation level of a win (big win or small win) set in the sword image) is set in the button image BG. It is preferable that it is higher than what is currently available. Since the button image BG is set to have a low expectation of winning (big hit or small win), the player cannot expect to win (big hit or small win) by displaying the button image BG on the display screen 7a. Even if the player is disappointed, the sword image is set to have higher expectations for winning (big hit or small hit) than the button image BG, so the player will be disappointed when the sword image is displayed on the display screen 7a. You can expect to win (big or small).

[Modification 2]
171, the effect B that can notify the winner of FIG. 172, the effect C that can notify the winner of FIG. 173, and the effect D that can notify the winner of FIG. is displayed on the display screen 7a, and when the player operates (presses) the performance button 63, a specific sound announcing the winning confirmation is played from the speaker 67, and a rainbow image is displayed as a specific image announcing the winning confirmation. It was displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. However, a specific sound that announces a confirmed win is played by the lottery in the performance control microcomputer 91 (image control microcomputer 101) from the speaker 67, and a rainbow image is displayed as a specific image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. You may also do so. In this way, it is possible to increase the variations in performance by operating (pressing) the performance button 63.

[Modification 3]
171, the effect B that can notify the winner of FIG. 172, the effect C that can notify the winner of FIG. 173, and the effect D that can notify the winner of FIG. is displayed on the display screen 7a, and when the player operates (presses) the production button 63, a special sound announcing the display of the premiere image as a special image is played from the speaker 67, and the premiere image is displayed as the special image. It was displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. However, by lottery in the performance control microcomputer 91 (image control microcomputer 101), a special sound announcing the display of the premiere image as a special image is played from the speaker 67, and the premiere image is displayed as a special image on the image display device 7. It may also be displayed on the display screen 7a. In this way, it is possible to increase the variations in performance by operating (pressing) the performance button 63.

[Modification 4]
Premier image PMG1 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as a special image in performance A that can announce winnings or losses in FIG. It was displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In other words, a different premium image was displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 each time. However, the same premium image may be displayed in the performances A to D that can notify winners or losers. For example, one of the premiere images PMG1 and PMG2 may be displayed on the display screen 7a as a common premiere image. This can contribute to reducing the number of images (image data) stored in the ROM 103, and can also contribute to reducing the cost of the ROM 13 by reducing the capacity of the ROM 103.

[Modification 5]
In the performance A that can announce a win or loss in FIG. 171, the performance B that can announce a win or loss in FIG. 172, the performance C that can announce a win or loss in FIG. The button images BG disappeared one by one from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as the button images BG were digested by the operation (pressing operation) of the production button 63. However, the remaining number of stocked button images BG, that is, the stock number, is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, with the message "X remaining (X is the stock number)" in a predetermined display mode. Good too. At this time, an announcement may be made from the speaker 67 that "X items remaining (X is the number in stock)". In this way, the player can accurately grasp the number of remaining stocks. Note that the "predetermined display mode" includes, for example, a specific sound and a specific image in the order of white lighting → blue lighting → green lighting → red lighting → gold lighting (yellow lighting) → seven colors lighting (rainbow lighting (high probability of winning)). The expectation level for the appearance of the special sound and the appearance expectation level for the special image are set high.

[Modification 6]
In the performance A that can be announced in FIG. 171, the performance B that can be announced in FIG. 172, the performance C that can be announced in FIG. 173, and the performance D that can be announced in FIG. 7 was displayed on the display screen 7a. However, instead of the button image BG imitating the production button 63, a button image imitating the sword button 65 of the sword member 64 may be used. Even with this configuration, the same effect as the operation (pressing operation) of the production button 63 can be achieved by operating the sword button 65 (pressing operation or pressing operation).

[Modification 7]
Performance A that can announce winning or losing in FIG. 171, performance B that can announce winning or losing in FIG. 172, performance C that can announce winning or losing in FIG. 173, and performance D that can announce winning or losing in FIG. However, other effects may be added.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇[Aspect H3-1]
A gaming machine equipped with an operation means that can be operated by a player,
In the performance of notifying the winning result of a specific lottery by operating the operating means,
a first effect of displaying a specific image on a display screen to notify the winning result;
Following the first performance, a second performance that prompts the user to operate the operating device when the number of operations of the operating device remains without reaching the upper limit number of operations can be performed;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect H3-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect H3-1,
Before the first performance is executed, a third performance is executed in which an operation means image imitating the operation means is stocked on the display screen,
The upper limit number of operations is the number of stock images of the operation means,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect H3-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect H3-1 or aspect H3-2,
When the operating means is operated while the second effect is being executed, a fourth effect of displaying a special image on the display screen can be executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect H3-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect H3-3,
the special image is a premium image;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect H3-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect H3-3 or aspect H3-4,
The third effect outputs a special sound corresponding to the special image.
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect H3-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects H3-1 to H3-5,
The first effect is to output a specific sound corresponding to the specific image.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Specific object display effects A to D will be explained below using FIGS. 175 to 178. This specific target display effect may be executed during a variation effect of a decorative pattern or the like. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a specific target display effect, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image. The image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7. Further, the lamp control board 107 analyzes the variable performance start command received from the sub-control board 90, and drives the second movable accessory 15 etc. if it includes an instruction to execute a variable timing change performance.

[Specific target display effect A]
FIG. 175 is a diagram for explaining specific target display effect A. In the specific target display performance A, first, as shown in FIG. 175(A), the second movable accessory (movable member) 15 is located at the retracted position (home position) in front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. are doing. The second movable accessory 15 is placed adjacent to the display screen 7a. The second movable accessory 15 has a specific target display section TH that represents a specific target, and is configured to be movable in the vertical direction or the like. The specific target display section TH represents the characters "OARO". The specific target display section TH is configured so that each character of "OARO" emits light. In this embodiment, each character of "OARO" on the specific target display section TH emits blue light. The specific target display section TH may emit light of any color.

Further, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner. Specifically, at a position below the second movable accessory 15, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a fluctuating manner in which they move vertically at high speed. The decorative patterns include image images of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, and are a set of symbols that can notify whether or not it is a hit based on the combination of these stop patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 175(B), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R hit the stop display position (winning pattern "777") ) is stopped and displayed. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed side by side along the horizontal direction. Here, "lined up horizontally" includes not only lines lined up strictly horizontally but also lines lined up generally horizontally. That is, all the items that a person skilled in the art can recognize as being lined up in the horizontal direction of the display screen 7a are included in the items lined up in the horizontal direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 175(C), the display of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R disappears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Then, the second movable accessory 15 performs a predetermined performance (movement). Specifically, the second movable accessory 15 (specific target display section TH) located at the retreat position (home position) rotates clockwise and tilts from the horizontal state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 175(D), the second movable accessory 15 further rotates clockwise and tilts at a predetermined angle, and at the same time, the second movable accessory 15 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A display section image HG imitating the specific target display section TH is displayed. The display unit image HG is a character image imitating the characters “OARO” on the specific target display unit TH. Although the character image of "OARO" is blue, it may be of any color. Furthermore, it may be the same color as the specific target display section TH that emits light, or may be a different color.

In this embodiment, at the same time as the second movable accessory 15 tilts, the display unit image HG is displayed as if moving from the second movable accessory 15 to the display screen 7a. Specifically, at the same time as the second movable accessory 15 is tilted, the display unit image HG is moved diagonally downward to the left from the back (back side) of the second movable accessory 15 from the position of the second movable accessory 15 in the tilted state. It appears as if it pops out.

Next, as shown in FIG. 175(E), with the second movable accessory 15 tilted at a predetermined angle, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display part image HG is diagonally downward to the left, Specifically, it is displayed so as to move toward the lower left position of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 175(F), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display unit image HG is displayed at the lower left position of the display screen 7a. At this time, the second movable accessory 15 is tilted at a predetermined angle, and the display unit image HG is displayed in a tilted state similar to the second movable accessory 15. The display unit image HG is displayed tilted at the same angle as the second movable accessory 15. That is, the character "OARO" on the specific target display part TH and the character image "OARO" on the display part image HG in the second movable accessory 15 are arranged parallel to each other while being inclined at the same angle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 175(G), with the second movable accessory 15 tilted at a predetermined angle, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display unit image HG is diagonally upward to the right. Specifically, it is displayed so as to move toward the position of the second movable accessory 15 in an inclined state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 175(H), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display unit image HG is displayed as if moving from the display screen 7a to the second movable accessory 15. Specifically, the display unit image HG is displayed so as to jump behind (back side) the second movable accessory 15 in a tilted state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 175(I), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display part image HG is displayed as if moving from the display screen 7a to the second movable accessory 15, and at the same time , the second movable accessory 15 tilted at a predetermined angle performs an operation of returning to its original position. Specifically, the second movable accessory 15 rotates to the left in order to return to its original position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 175(J), the second movable accessory 15 further rotates to the left and returns to its original retracted position (home position). That is, the second movable accessory 15 returns to the horizontal state from the state tilted at a predetermined angle.

[Specific target display effect B]
FIG. 176 is a diagram for explaining specific target display effect B. In the specific target display performance B, first, as shown in FIG. 176(A), the second movable accessory (movable member) 15 is located at the retracted position (home position) in front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. are doing. The second movable accessory 15 is placed adjacent to the display screen 7a. The second movable accessory 15 has a specific target display section TH that represents a specific target, and is configured to be movable in the vertical direction or the like. The specific target display section TH represents the characters "OARO". The specific target display section TH is configured so that each character of "OARO" emits light. In this embodiment, each character of "OARO" on the specific target display section TH emits blue light. The specific target display section TH may emit light of any color.

Further, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner. Specifically, at a position below the second movable accessory 15, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a fluctuating manner in which they move vertically at high speed. The decorative patterns include image images of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, and are a set of symbols that can notify whether or not it is a hit based on the combination of these stop patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 176(B), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R hit the stop display position (winning pattern "777") ) is stopped and displayed. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed side by side along the horizontal direction. Here, "lined up horizontally" includes not only lines lined up strictly horizontally but also lines lined up generally horizontally. That is, all the items that a person skilled in the art can recognize as being lined up in the horizontal direction of the display screen 7a are included in the items lined up in the horizontal direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 176(C), among the letters "OARO" on the specific target display section TH of the second movable accessory 15, the two letters "RO" that were emitting light disappear, and the previous two letters "RO" disappear. Only the two letters "OA" are illuminated. Further, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R disappears. Then, the second movable accessory 15 performs a predetermined performance (movement). Specifically, the second movable accessory 15 (specific target display section TH) located at the retreat position (home position) rotates clockwise and tilts from the horizontal state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 176(D), the second movable accessory 15 further rotates clockwise and tilts at a predetermined angle, and at the same time, the second movable accessory 15 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A display section image HG imitating the specific target display section TH is displayed. The display section image HG is a character image imitating the letters "OA" which is a part of the specific target display section TH. Although the character image of "OA" is blue, it may be of any color. Furthermore, it may be the same color as the specific target display section TH that emits light, or may be a different color.

In this embodiment, at the same time as the second movable accessory 15 tilts, the display unit image HG is displayed as if moving from the second movable accessory 15 to the display screen 7a. Specifically, at the same time as the second movable accessory 15 is tilted, the display unit image HG is moved diagonally downward to the left from the back (back side) of the second movable accessory 15 from the position of the second movable accessory 15 in the tilted state. It appears as if it pops out.

Next, as shown in FIG. 176(E), with the second movable accessory 15 tilted at a predetermined angle, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display part image HG is diagonally downward to the left, Specifically, it is displayed so as to move toward the lower left position of the display screen 7a. Then, the display unit image HG is displayed at the lower left position of the display screen 7a. At this time, the second movable accessory 15 is tilted at a predetermined angle, and the display unit image HG is displayed in a tilted state similar to the second movable accessory 15. The display unit image HG is displayed tilted at the same angle as the second movable accessory 15. That is, the characters "OA" emitting light on the specific target display part TH in the second movable accessory 15 and the character image "OA" in the display part image HG are arranged parallel to each other while being tilted at the same angle. Ru.

Next, as shown in FIG. 176(F), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display of the character image "OA" in the display unit image HG disappears. Then, the second movable accessory 15 tilted at a predetermined angle returns to its original position. Specifically, the second movable accessory 15 rotates counterclockwise to return to its original position, and returns to its original retracted position (home position). That is, the second movable accessory 15 returns to the horizontal state from the state tilted at a predetermined angle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 176(G), among the letters "OARO" on the specific target display section TH of the second movable accessory 15, the previous two letters "OA" that were emitting light disappear. The last two letters "RO" will light up. Then, the second movable accessory 15 performs a predetermined performance (movement). Specifically, the second movable accessory 15 (specific target display section TH) located at the retreat position (home position) rotates clockwise and tilts from the horizontal state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 176(H), the second movable accessory 15 further rotates clockwise and tilts at a predetermined angle, and at the same time, the second movable accessory 15 is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A display section image HG imitating the specific target display section TH is displayed. The display unit image HG is a character image imitating the characters “RO” which is a part of the specific target display unit TH. Although the character image of "RO" is blue, it may be of any color. Furthermore, it may be the same color as the specific target display section TH that emits light, or may be a different color.

In this embodiment, at the same time as the second movable accessory 15 tilts, the display unit image HG is displayed as if moving from the second movable accessory 15 to the display screen 7a. Specifically, at the same time as the second movable accessory 15 is tilted, the display unit image HG is moved diagonally downward to the left from the back (back side) of the second movable accessory 15 from the position of the second movable accessory 15 in the tilted state. It appears as if it pops out.

Next, as shown in FIG. 176(I), with the second movable accessory 15 tilted at a predetermined angle, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display part image HG is diagonally downward to the left, Specifically, it is displayed so as to move toward the lower left position of the display screen 7a. Then, the display unit image HG is displayed at the lower left position of the display screen 7a. At this time, the second movable accessory 15 is tilted at a predetermined angle, and the display unit image HG is displayed in a tilted state similar to the second movable accessory 15. The display unit image HG is displayed tilted at the same angle as the second movable accessory 15. That is, the character "RO" that is emitting light on the specific target display part TH in the second movable accessory 15 and the character image "RO" in the display part image HG are arranged parallel to each other while being tilted at the same angle. Ru.

Next, as shown in FIG. 176(J), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display of the character image "RO" in the display section image HG disappears. Then, the second movable accessory 15 tilted at a predetermined angle returns to its original position. Specifically, the second movable accessory 15 rotates counterclockwise to return to its original position, and returns to its original retracted position (home position). That is, the second movable accessory 15 returns to the horizontal state from the state tilted at a predetermined angle.

[Specific target display effect C]
FIG. 177 is a diagram for explaining specific target display effect C. In the specific target display effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 177(A), the second movable accessory (movable member) 15 is located at the retracted position (home position) in the front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. are doing. The second movable accessory 15 is placed adjacent to the display screen 7a. The second movable accessory 15 has a specific target display section TH that represents a specific target, and is configured to be movable in the vertical direction or the like. The specific target display section TH represents the characters "OARO". The specific target display section TH is configured so that each character of "OARO" emits light. In this embodiment, each character of "OARO" on the specific target display section TH emits blue light. The specific target display section TH may emit light of any color.

Further, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner. Specifically, at a position below the second movable accessory 15, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a fluctuating manner in which they move vertically at high speed. The decorative patterns include image images of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, and are a set of symbols that can notify whether or not it is a hit based on the combination of these stop patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 177(B), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R hit the stop display position (winning pattern "777") ) is stopped and displayed. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed side by side along the horizontal direction. Here, "lined up horizontally" includes not only lines lined up strictly horizontally but also lines lined up generally horizontally. That is, all the items that a person skilled in the art can recognize as being lined up in the horizontal direction of the display screen 7a are included in the items lined up in the horizontal direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 177(C), the display of the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R disappears on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Then, the second movable accessory 15 performs a predetermined performance (movement). Specifically, the second movable accessory 15 (specific target display section TH) located at the retreat position (home position) rotates clockwise and tilts from the horizontal state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 177(D), the second movable accessory 15 further rotates clockwise and tilts at a predetermined angle, and at the same time, "OARO" on the specific target display section TH of the second movable accessory 15 is displayed. Among the letters, the previous two letters "OA" that were glowing disappear. Then, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a display section image HG imitating the specific target display section TH of the second movable accessory 15 is displayed. The display section image HG is a character image imitating the letters "OA" which is a part of the specific target display section TH. Although the character image of "OA" is blue, it may be of any color. Furthermore, it may be the same color as the specific target display section TH that emits light, or may be a different color.

In this embodiment, at the same time as the second movable accessory 15 tilts, the display unit image HG is displayed as if moving from the second movable accessory 15 to the display screen 7a. Specifically, at the same time as the second movable accessory 15 is tilted, the display unit image HG is moved diagonally downward to the left from the back (back side) of the second movable accessory 15 from the position of the second movable accessory 15 in the tilted state. It appears as if it pops out.

Next, as shown in FIG. 177(E), with the second movable accessory 15 tilted at a predetermined angle, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display unit image HG is diagonally downward to the left, Specifically, it is displayed so as to move toward the lower left position of the display screen 7a. Then, the display unit image HG is displayed at the lower left position of the display screen 7a. At this time, the second movable accessory 15 is tilted at a predetermined angle, and the display unit image HG is displayed in a tilted state similar to the second movable accessory 15. The display unit image HG is displayed tilted at the same angle as the second movable accessory 15. That is, the characters "OA" emitting light on the specific target display part TH in the second movable accessory 15 and the character image "OA" in the display part image HG are arranged parallel to each other while being tilted at the same angle. Ru.

Next, as shown in FIG. 177(F), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display of the character image "OA" in the display section image HG disappears. Then, the second movable accessory 15 tilted at a predetermined angle returns to its original position. Specifically, the second movable accessory 15 rotates counterclockwise to return to its original position, and returns to its original retracted position (home position). That is, the second movable accessory 15 returns to the horizontal state from the state tilted at a predetermined angle.

Next, as shown in FIG. 177(G), the second movable accessory 15 performs a predetermined performance (movement). Specifically, the second movable accessory 15 (specific target display section TH) located at the retreat position (home position) rotates clockwise and tilts from the horizontal state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 177(H), the second movable accessory 15 further rotates clockwise and tilts at a predetermined angle, and at the same time, "OARO" on the specific target display section TH of the second movable accessory 15 is displayed. Among the letters, the last two letters "RO" that were glowing disappear. Then, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a display section image HG imitating the specific target display section TH of the second movable accessory 15 is displayed. The display unit image HG is a character image imitating the characters “RO” which is a part of the specific target display unit TH. Although the character image of "RO" is blue, it may be of any color. Furthermore, it may be the same color as the specific target display section TH that emits light, or may be a different color.

In this embodiment, at the same time as the second movable accessory 15 tilts, the display unit image HG is displayed as if moving from the second movable accessory 15 to the display screen 7a. Specifically, at the same time as the second movable accessory 15 is tilted, the display unit image HG is moved diagonally downward to the left from the back (back side) of the second movable accessory 15 from the position of the second movable accessory 15 in the tilted state. It appears as if it pops out.

Next, as shown in FIG. 177(I), with the second movable accessory 15 tilted at a predetermined angle, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display unit image HG is diagonally downward to the left, Specifically, it is displayed so as to move toward the lower left position of the display screen 7a. Then, the display unit image HG is displayed at the lower left position of the display screen 7a. At this time, the second movable accessory 15 is tilted at a predetermined angle, and the display unit image HG is displayed in a tilted state similar to the second movable accessory 15. The display unit image HG is displayed tilted at the same angle as the second movable accessory 15. That is, the character "RO" that is emitting light on the specific target display part TH in the second movable accessory 15 and the character image "RO" in the display part image HG are arranged parallel to each other while being tilted at the same angle. Ru.

Next, as shown in FIG. 177(J), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display of the character image "RO" in the display section image HG disappears. Then, the second movable accessory 15 tilted at a predetermined angle returns to its original position. Specifically, the second movable accessory 15 rotates counterclockwise to return to its original position, and returns to its original retracted position (home position). That is, the second movable accessory 15 returns to the horizontal state from the state tilted at a predetermined angle.

[Specific target display effect D]
FIG. 178 is a diagram for explaining specific target display effect D. In the specific target display effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 178(A), the second movable accessory (movable member) 15 is located at the retracted position (home position) in front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. are doing. The second movable accessory 15 is placed adjacent to the display screen 7a. The second movable accessory 15 has a specific target display section TH that represents a specific target, and is configured to be movable in the vertical direction or the like. The specific target display section TH represents the characters "OARO". The specific target display section TH is configured so that each character of "OARO" emits light. In this embodiment, each character of "OARO" on the specific target display section TH emits blue light, but at this stage, each character does not emit light. The specific target display section TH may emit light of any color.

Further, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner. Specifically, at a position below the second movable accessory 15, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a fluctuating manner in which they move vertically at high speed. The decorative patterns include image images of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, and are a set of symbols that can notify whether or not it is a hit based on the combination of these stop patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 178(B), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display of the changing left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R disappears. Then, the second movable accessory 15 performs a predetermined effect (light emission). Specifically, among the characters "OARO" on the specific target display section TH of the second movable accessory 15, only the second character "A" from the front emits blue light.

Next, as shown in FIG. 178(C), among the letters "OARO" on the specific target display section TH of the second movable accessory 15, the emitted light of the letter "A" disappears. Then, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a display section image HG imitating the specific target display section TH of the second movable accessory 15 is displayed. The display unit image HG is a character image imitating the letter “A” which is a part of the specific target display unit TH. Although the character image of "A" is blue, it may be of any color. Furthermore, it may be the same color as the specific target display section TH that emits light, or may be a different color.

In this embodiment, the display unit image HG is displayed as if moving from the second movable accessory 15 to the display screen 7a. Specifically, from the position of the letter “A” on the specific target display portion TH of the second movable accessory 15, the display portion image HG (a character image imitating the letter “A”) is moved behind the second movable accessory 15. It is displayed so that it pops out downward from the (back side). The display unit image HG is displayed slightly smaller than the size of the letter “A” on the specific target display unit TH of the second movable accessory 15.

Next, as shown in FIG. 178(D), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display unit image HG is displayed so as to move downward while being enlarged. The display unit image HG is displayed in the same size as the letter “A” on the specific target display unit TH of the second movable accessory 15.

Next, as shown in FIG. 178(E), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display unit image HG is displayed moving downward while being further enlarged. The display unit image HG is displayed slightly larger than the size of the letter “A” on the specific target display unit TH of the second movable accessory 15.

Next, as shown in FIG. 178(F), the display section image HG disappears from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Then, the second movable accessory 15 performs a predetermined effect (light emission). Specifically, among the characters "OARO" in the specific target display section TH of the second movable accessory 15, only the third character "R" from the front emits blue light.

Next, as shown in FIG. 178(G), among the letters "OARO" on the specific target display section TH of the second movable accessory 15, the emitted light of the letter "R" disappears. Then, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a display section image HG imitating the specific target display section TH of the second movable accessory 15 is displayed. The display unit image HG is a character image imitating the letter “R” which is a part of the specific target display unit TH. Although the character image of "R" is blue, it may be of any color. Furthermore, it may be the same color as the specific target display section TH that emits light, or may be a different color.

In this embodiment, the display unit image HG is displayed as if moving from the second movable accessory 15 to the display screen 7a. Specifically, from the position of the letter “R” on the specific target display portion TH of the second movable accessory 15, the display portion image HG (a character image imitating the letter “R”) is moved behind the second movable accessory 15. It is displayed so that it pops out downward from the (back side).

Next, as shown in FIG. 178(H), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display unit image HG is displayed so as to move downward while being enlarged. The display unit image HG is displayed in the same size as the letter “R” on the specific target display unit TH of the second movable accessory 15.

Next, as shown in FIG. 178(I), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display unit image HG is displayed moving downward while being further enlarged. The display unit image HG is displayed slightly larger than the size of the letter “R” on the specific target display unit TH of the second movable accessory 15.

Next, as shown in FIG. 178(J), the display section image HG disappears from the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

[Effect example]
Examples of effects of specific target display effects are shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 175 to 178, the specific target display section TH representing a specific target performs a predetermined first performance, and the specific target display section TH performs a predetermined performance. Based on this, a second effect is executed in which a display unit image HG imitating at least a portion of the specific target display unit TH is displayed on the display screen 7a (display means) of the image display device 7. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 175 and 176, the second movable accessory 15 (movable member), which includes the specific target display section TH and is configured to be movable, performs a predetermined operation, In the second performance, the display unit image HG is displayed on the display screen 7a based on a predetermined movement of the second movable accessory 15. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 175 and 176, the second movable accessory 15 is arranged adjacent to the display screen 7a, and in the first performance, the second movable accessory 15 is An action of tilting at a predetermined angle is performed, and in the second production, the display unit image HG is displayed as if moving from the second movable accessory 15 to the display screen 7a based on the movement of the second movable accessory 15. be done. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 175 and 176, after the second performance, the display unit image HG is displayed in the second movable state with the second movable accessory 15 tilted at a predetermined angle. A third effect is performed in which the object is displayed in a tilted state in the same way as the accessory 15. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 175 and 176, after the second effect, the display unit image HG is displayed as if moving from the display screen 7a to the second movable accessory 15. At the same time, a fourth effect is executed in which the second movable accessory 15 tilted at a predetermined angle returns to its original position. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 177 and 178, in the first effect, the specific target display section TH emits light, and in the second effect, based on the light emission of the specific target display section TH. , the display unit image HG is displayed on the display screen 7a. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 177 and 178, in the second effect, the display image HG is changed from the specific target display part TH to the display screen 7a based on the light emission from the specific target display part TH. The display unit image HG is displayed on the display screen 7a as if moving to . According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.

[Modified example]
Below, a modification of the specific target display effect will be shown.
[Modification 1]
175 to 178, the display unit image HG is displayed based on a predetermined effect of the specific target display unit TH of the second movable accessory 15 (here, an effect in which the specific target display unit TH operates or emits light). Although displayed on the screen 7a, the predetermined effect of the specific target display section TH is not limited to movement or light emission, and may be various other effects. For example, the specific target display section TH may be transformed, moved in a predetermined direction, or emitted light may be turned off.
[Modification 2]
In FIGS. 175 to 178, the specific target display section TH is provided on the movable member (second movable accessory 15), but it may be provided on a fixed member, or it may be displayed on the display screen 7a. It may be something that has been done. That is, any mode may be used as long as it displays a specific object.
[Modification 3]
In FIG. 178, the display unit image HG is displayed on the display screen 7a based on the light emission of the specific target display unit TH of the second movable accessory 15, but the specific target display unit TH of the second movable accessory 15 blinks. The display unit image HG may be displayed on the display screen 7a based on. Further, the display unit image HG may also be displayed in a blinking manner, repeatedly displaying and non-displaying.
[Modification 4]
In FIG. 178, a blue display part image HG is displayed on the display screen 7a based on the light emission of the specific target display part TH of the second movable accessory 15. For example, the display part image displayed on the display screen 7a The degree of expectation of a jackpot may be indicated by the aspect of HG. For example, the expectation level of a jackpot may be suggested by the color, size, number of times of display, number of blinks, etc. of the display image HG displayed on the display screen 7a.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect I1-1]
a display means capable of displaying multiple types of images;
A gaming machine comprising a specific target display section representing a specific target,
a first performance in which the specific target display section performs a predetermined performance;
a second effect in which a display unit image imitating at least a portion of the specific target display unit is displayed on the display means based on the predetermined effect of the specific target display unit;
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect I1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect I1-1,
further comprising a movable member that includes the specific target display section and is configured to be movable;
In the first performance, the movable member performs a predetermined action,
In the second effect, the display unit image is displayed on the display means based on the predetermined operation of the movable member.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect I1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect I1-2,
The movable member is arranged adjacent to the display means,
In the first performance, the movable member performs an action of tilting at a predetermined angle,
In the second effect, the display unit image is displayed as if moving from the movable member to the display means based on the operation of the movable member.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect I1-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect I1-3,
After the second effect, it is further possible to perform a third effect in which the movable member is tilted at a predetermined angle and the display unit image is displayed in a tilted state similar to the movable member.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect I1-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect I1-3 or aspect I1-4,
After the second effect, the display unit image is displayed as if moving from the display means to the movable member, and the movable member tilted at a predetermined angle returns to its original position. It is further possible to execute the fourth performance,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect I1-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect I1-1,
In the first effect, the specific target display section emits light;
In the second effect, the display unit image is displayed on the display means based on the light emission of the specific target display unit.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect I1-7]
The gaming machine according to aspect I1-6,
In the second effect, the display unit image is displayed on the display means as if the display unit image were moved from the specific target display unit to the display unit based on the light emission from the specific target display unit. be done,
A gaming machine characterized by:

The multiple role object combination performances A to D will be explained below using FIGS. 179 to 182. This combination of multiple role objects may be performed during a fluctuating display of decorative symbols and the like. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable production start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a combination production of multiple role objects, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays the image. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the display device 7. Further, the lamp control board 107 analyzes the fluctuating performance start command received from the sub-control board 90, and when the instruction to execute the fluctuating timing change performance is included, the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15 etc. is driven.

[Multiple roles combined production A]
FIG. 179 is a diagram for explaining multiple role object combination production A. In the multi-accessory object combination performance A, first, as shown in FIG. is fixed at a position near the center of the display screen 7a, and the entirety is visible. Although not shown in FIG. 179(A), the right side movable accessory 14R (second movable member) of the first movable accessory 14 is retracted in front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. position (home position). In the retracted position, the right movable accessory 14R is entirely hidden behind the right side of the front frame 53 (the right side of the game area 3 in the front frame 53) and is difficult to see.

Further, in the front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the second movable accessory 15 (first movable member) is located at a retreat position (home position). The second movable accessory 15 is in a state where a lower part 151 (first part) is visible, and an upper part 152 (second part) to be described later is the upper part of the front frame 53 (the part of the game area 3 in the front frame 53). It is difficult to see because it is hidden behind the upper part). That is, the second movable accessory 15 is arranged such that a part of it is visible (a part of it is difficult to see) in the retreated position.

Further, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner. Specifically, at the position on the right side of the left fixed accessory 14L, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a fluctuating manner in which they move vertically at high speed. The decorative patterns include image images of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, and are a set of symbols that can notify whether or not it is a hit based on the combination of these stop patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 179(B), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R hit the stop display position (winning pattern "777") ) is stopped and displayed. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed side by side along the horizontal direction. Here, "lined up horizontally" includes not only lines lined up strictly horizontally but also lines lined up generally horizontally. That is, all the items that a person skilled in the art can recognize as being lined up in the horizontal direction of the display screen 7a are included in the items lined up in the horizontal direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 179(C), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R disappear (become non-displayed). Note that the subsequent performance may be performed while the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are displayed without being hidden.

Next, as shown in FIG. 179(D), the right movable accessory 14R moves toward the advanced position (deployed position) in the front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the right side movable accessory 14R moves leftward from a position behind the right side portion of the front frame 53 (retracted position) toward the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a. Further, the second movable accessory 15 moves toward the advanced position (deployed position). Specifically, the second movable accessory 15 moves downward from the retracted position toward the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 179(E), the left fixed accessory 14L, the right movable accessory 14R, and the second movable accessory 15 are combined on the front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the right movable accessory 14R moves to an advanced position near the center of the display screen 7a. As a result, the left fixed accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are combined to form an annular decorative member. Further, the second movable accessory 15 moves to an advanced position near the center of the display screen 7a. Thereby, the lower part 151 and the upper part 152 of the second movable accessory 15 become visible. Then, the second movable accessory 15 is in a state where it covers a part of the upper part of the left fixed accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R. That is, the left fixed accessory 14L, the right movable accessory 14R, and the second movable accessory 15 are in a combined state, partially overlapping. Note that merging here includes directly merging, indirectly merging, arranging at a position close to but not in contact with each other, and combining.

Next, as shown in FIG. 179(F), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the opening of the annular decorative member formed by combining the left fixed accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R. , a face image 14G is displayed. As a result, the left fixed accessory 14L, the right movable accessory 14R, the second movable accessory 15, and the face image 14G are combined to represent a specific object including a human face.

Next, as shown in FIG. 179(G), the face image 14G disappears (is not displayed) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Then, in the front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the right movable accessory 14R moves toward the retracted position. Specifically, the right side movable accessory 14R moves rightward from an advanced position near the center of the display screen 7a toward a position behind the right side portion of the front frame 53 (retracted position). Further, the second movable accessory 15 moves toward the retracted position. Specifically, the second movable accessory 15 moves upward from the advanced position near the center of the display screen 7a toward the retracted position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 179(H), the right movable accessory 14R and the second movable accessory 15 return to the retracted position in the front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, in the retracted position, the right side movable accessory 14R is entirely hidden behind the right side portion of the front frame 53, making it difficult to see. Further, in the retracted position, the second movable accessory 15 is in a state where the lower part 151 is visible, and the upper part 152 is hidden behind the upper part of the front frame 53 and becomes difficult to see.

[Multiple roles combined production B]
FIG. 180 is a diagram for explaining multiple role object combination performance B. In the multiple role object combination performance B, first, as shown in FIG. is fixed at a position near the center of the display screen 7a, and the entirety is visible. Although not shown in FIG. 180(A), the right movable accessory 14R (second movable member) of the first movable accessory 14 is retracted in front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. position (home position). In the retracted position, the right movable accessory 14R is entirely hidden behind the right side of the front frame 53 (the right side of the game area 3 in the front frame 53) and is difficult to see.

Further, in the front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the second movable accessory 15 (first movable member) is located at a retreat position (home position). In the retracted position, the second movable accessory 15 is not hidden in the upper part of the front frame 53 (the upper part of the game area 3 in the front frame 53), but is arranged so that its entirety can be visually recognized.

Further, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner. Specifically, at the position on the right side of the left fixed accessory 14L, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a fluctuating manner in which they move vertically at high speed. The decorative patterns include image images of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, and are a set of symbols that can notify whether or not it is a hit based on the combination of these stop patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 180(B), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R hit the stop display position (winning pattern "777") ) is stopped and displayed. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed side by side along the horizontal direction. Here, "lined up horizontally" includes not only lines lined up strictly horizontally but also lines lined up generally horizontally. That is, all the items that a person skilled in the art can recognize as being lined up in the horizontal direction of the display screen 7a are included in the items lined up in the horizontal direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 180(C), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R disappear (become non-displayed). Note that the subsequent performance may be performed while the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are displayed without being hidden.

Next, as shown in FIG. 180(D), the right movable accessory 14R moves toward the advanced position (deployed position) in the front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the right side movable accessory 14R moves leftward from a position behind the right side portion of the front frame 53 (retracted position) toward the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a. Further, the second movable accessory 15 moves toward the advanced position (deployed position). Specifically, the second movable accessory 15 moves downward from the retracted position toward the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 180(E), the left fixed accessory 14L, the right movable accessory 14R, and the second movable accessory 15 are combined on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the right movable accessory 14R moves to an advanced position near the center of the display screen 7a. As a result, the left fixed accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are combined to form an annular decorative member. Further, the second movable accessory 15 moves to an advanced position near the center of the display screen 7a. Then, the second movable accessory 15 is in a state where it covers a part of the upper part of the left fixed accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R. That is, the left fixed accessory 14L, the right movable accessory 14R, and the second movable accessory 15 are in a combined state, partially overlapping. Note that merging here includes directly merging, indirectly merging, arranging at a position close to but not in contact with each other, and combining.

Next, as shown in FIG. 180(F), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the opening of the annular decorative member formed by combining the left fixed accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R. , a face image 14G is displayed. As a result, the left fixed accessory 14L, the right movable accessory 14R, the second movable accessory 15, and the face image 14G are combined to represent a specific object including a human face.

Next, as shown in FIG. 180(G), the face image 14G disappears (is not displayed) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Then, in the front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the right movable accessory 14R moves toward the retracted position. Specifically, the right side movable accessory 14R moves rightward from an advanced position near the center of the display screen 7a toward a position behind the right side portion of the front frame 53 (retracted position). Further, the second movable accessory 15 moves toward the retracted position. Specifically, the second movable accessory 15 moves upward from the advanced position near the center of the display screen 7a toward the retracted position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 180(H), the right side movable accessory 14R and the second movable accessory 15 return to the retracted position in the front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, in the retracted position, the right side movable accessory 14R is entirely hidden behind the right side portion of the front frame 53, making it difficult to see. Furthermore, in the retracted position, the second movable accessory 15 is not hidden behind the upper part of the front frame 53, and is stationary in a state where the entirety is visible.

[Multiple roles combined production C]
FIG. 181 is a diagram for explaining the multiple role object combination performance C. In the multi-accessory object combination performance C, first, as shown in FIG. is fixed at a position near the center of the display screen 7a, and the entirety is visible. Although not shown in FIG. 181(A), the right side movable accessory 14R (second movable member) of the first movable accessory 14 is retracted in front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. position (home position). In the retracted position, the right movable accessory 14R is entirely hidden behind the right side of the front frame 53 (the right side of the game area 3 in the front frame 53) and is difficult to see.

Further, in the front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the second movable accessory 15 (first movable member) is located at a retreat position (home position). The second movable accessory 15 is in a state where the lower part 151 (first part) is difficult to see, and the upper part 152 (second part) to be described later is the upper part of the front frame 53 (the part of the game area 3 in the front frame 53). It is difficult to see because it is hidden behind the upper part). That is, the second movable accessory 15 is arranged such that a part of it is visible (a part of it is difficult to see) in the retreated position.

Further, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner. Specifically, at the position on the right side of the left fixed accessory 14L, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a fluctuating manner in which they move vertically at high speed. The decorative patterns include image images of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, and are a set of symbols that can notify whether or not it is a hit based on the combination of these stop patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 181(B), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R hit the stop display position (winning pattern "777") ) is stopped and displayed. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed side by side along the horizontal direction. Here, "lined up horizontally" includes not only lines lined up strictly horizontally but also lines lined up generally horizontally. That is, all the items that a person skilled in the art can recognize as being lined up in the horizontal direction of the display screen 7a are included in the items lined up in the horizontal direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 181(C), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R disappear (become non-displayed). Note that the subsequent performance may be performed while the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are displayed without being hidden. Then, a suggestion image SG is displayed that suggests that an effect in which the left fixed accessory 14L, the right movable accessory 14R, and the second movable accessory 15 are combined will be performed. Specifically, a suggestion image SG that is a lightning-like image connecting the left fixed accessory 14L, the right movable accessory 14R, and the second movable accessory 15 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 181(D), the right movable accessory 14R moves toward the advanced position (deployed position) in the front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the right side movable accessory 14R moves leftward from a position behind the right side portion of the front frame 53 (retracted position) toward the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a. Further, the second movable accessory 15 moves toward the advanced position (deployed position). Specifically, the second movable accessory 15 moves downward from the retracted position toward the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 181(E), the left fixed accessory 14L, the right movable accessory 14R, and the second movable accessory 15 are combined on the front surface of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the right movable accessory 14R moves to an advanced position near the center of the display screen 7a. As a result, the left fixed accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R are combined to form an annular decorative member. Further, the second movable accessory 15 moves to an advanced position near the center of the display screen 7a. Thereby, the lower part 151 and the upper part 152 of the second movable accessory 15 become visible. Then, the second movable accessory 15 is in a state where it covers a part of the upper part of the left fixed accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R. That is, the left fixed accessory 14L, the right movable accessory 14R, and the second movable accessory 15 are in a combined state, partially overlapping. Note that merging here includes directly merging, indirectly merging, arranging at a position close to but not in contact with each other, and combining.

Next, as shown in FIG. 181(F), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the opening of the annular decorative member formed by combining the left fixed accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R. , a face image 14G is displayed. As a result, the left fixed accessory 14L, the right movable accessory 14R, the second movable accessory 15, and the face image 14G are combined to represent a specific object including a human face.

Next, as shown in FIG. 181(G), the face image 14G disappears (is not displayed) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Then, in the front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the right movable accessory 14R moves toward the retracted position. Specifically, the right side movable accessory 14R moves rightward from an advanced position near the center of the display screen 7a toward a position behind the right side portion of the front frame 53 (retracted position). Further, the second movable accessory 15 moves toward the retracted position. Specifically, the second movable accessory 15 moves upward from the advanced position near the center of the display screen 7a toward the retracted position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 181(H), the right side movable accessory 14R and the second movable accessory 15 return to the retracted position in the front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, in the retracted position, the right side movable accessory 14R is entirely hidden behind the right side portion of the front frame 53, making it difficult to see. Further, in the retracted position, the second movable accessory 15 is in a state where the lower part 151 is visible, and the upper part 152 is hidden behind the upper part of the front frame 53 and becomes difficult to see.

[Multiple roles combined production D]
FIG. 182 is a diagram for explaining the multiple role object combination performance D. In the multi-accessory object combination production D, first, as shown in FIG. is fixed at a position near the center of the display screen 7a, and the entirety is visible. Although not shown in FIG. 182(A), the right side movable accessory 14R (second movable member) of the first movable accessory 14 is retracted in front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. position (home position). In the retracted position, the right movable accessory 14R is entirely hidden behind the right side of the front frame 53 (the right side of the game area 3 in the front frame 53) and is difficult to see.

Further, in the front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the second movable accessory 15 (first movable member) is located at a retreat position (home position). The second movable accessory 15 is in a state where the lower part 151 (first part) is difficult to see, and the upper part 152 (second part) to be described later is the upper part of the front frame 53 (the part of the game area 3 in the front frame 53). It is difficult to see because it is hidden behind the upper part). That is, the second movable accessory 15 is arranged such that a part of it is visible (a part of it is difficult to see) in the retreated position.

Further, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a left decorative pattern 8L, a middle decorative pattern 8C, and a right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a variable manner. Specifically, at the position on the right side of the left fixed accessory 14L, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are displayed in a fluctuating manner in which they move vertically at high speed. The decorative patterns include image images of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R, and are a set of symbols that can notify whether or not it is a hit based on the combination of these stop patterns.

Next, as shown in FIG. 182(B), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R hit the stop display position (winning pattern "777") ) is stopped and displayed. The left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are stopped and displayed side by side along the horizontal direction. Here, "lined up horizontally" includes not only lines lined up strictly horizontally but also lines lined up generally horizontally. That is, all the items that a person skilled in the art can recognize as being lined up in the horizontal direction of the display screen 7a are included in the items lined up in the horizontal direction.

Next, as shown in FIG. 182(C), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R disappear (become non-displayed). Note that the subsequent performance may be performed while the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are displayed without being hidden.

Next, as shown in FIG. 182(D), the right movable accessory 14R moves toward the advanced position (deployed position) in the front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the right side movable accessory 14R moves leftward from a position behind the right side portion of the front frame 53 (retracted position) toward the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a. Further, the second movable accessory 15 moves toward the advanced position (deployed position). Specifically, the second movable accessory 15 moves downward from the retracted position toward the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 182(E), the left fixed accessory 14L, the right movable accessory 14R, and the second movable accessory 15 are combined on the front side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the right movable accessory 14R moves to an advanced position near the center of the display screen 7a. The right movable accessory 14R is arranged with a predetermined distance from the left fixed accessory 14L. Further, the second movable accessory 15 moves to an advanced position near the center of the display screen 7a. Thereby, the lower part 151 and the upper part 152 of the second movable accessory 15 become visible. Then, the second movable accessory 15 is in a state where it covers a part of the upper part of the left fixed accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R. That is, the left fixed accessory 14L, the right movable accessory 14R, and the second movable accessory 15 are in a combined state, partially overlapping. Note that merging here includes directly merging, indirectly merging, arranging at a position close to but not in contact with each other, and combining.

Next, as shown in FIG. 182(F), in the front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a pair of movable members 14LP are hidden behind the upper and lower ends of the left fixed accessory 14L. protrudes and moves rightward toward the right movable accessory 14R. In addition, illustration of the movable member 14LP hidden behind the upper end part of the left fixed accessory 14L is omitted here.

Next, as shown in FIG. 182(G), a pair of movable members 14LP protrude from the front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the left fixed accessory 14L, the right movable accessory 14R, and the pair of movable members 14LP An annular decorative member is formed by this. Then, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the face image 14G is displayed in the opening of the annular decorative member formed by combining the left fixed accessory 14L and the right movable accessory 14R. As a result, the left fixed accessory 14L, the right movable accessory 14R, the second movable accessory 15, the movable member 14LP, and the face image 14G are combined to represent a specific object including a human face.

Next, as shown in FIG. 182(H), the face image 14G disappears (is not displayed) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Then, the pair of movable members 14LP move to the left so as to return to positions behind the upper and lower ends of the left fixed accessory 14L, respectively. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 182(I), the pair of movable members 14LP return to positions behind the upper and lower ends of the left fixed accessory 14L, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 182(J), the right movable accessory 14R moves toward the retracted position in the front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Specifically, the right side movable accessory 14R moves rightward from an advanced position near the center of the display screen 7a toward a position behind the right side portion of the front frame 53 (retracted position). Further, the second movable accessory 15 moves toward the retracted position. Specifically, the second movable accessory 15 moves upward from the advanced position near the center of the display screen 7a toward the retracted position.

Then, in the front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the right side movable accessory 14R and the second movable accessory 15 return to the retracted position. Specifically, in the retracted position, the right side movable accessory 14R is entirely hidden behind the right side portion of the front frame 53, making it difficult to see. Further, in the retracted position, the second movable accessory 15 is in a state where the lower part 151 is visible, and the upper part 152 is hidden behind the upper part of the front frame 53 and becomes difficult to see.

[Effect example]
Below, an example of the effect of the combination of multiple role objects is shown.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 179 to 182, there is a left fixed accessory 14L (fixed member) that is arranged so that the entire part is visible, and a second movable accessory that is partially arranged so that it is visible. It includes an accessory 15 (first movable member) and a right movable accessory 14R (second movable member) that is arranged so as to be difficult to see as a whole. Then, the left fixed accessory 14L, the second movable accessory 15 that has moved to a predetermined position (advance position) in front of the display screen 7a (display means) of the image display device 7, and the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 The right movable accessory 14R that has moved to a predetermined position (advancement) in front of the right side movable accessory 14R can be combined to perform a combined effect representing a specific object. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 179, 181, and 182, the second movable accessory 15 has a lower part 151 (first part) arranged so as to be visible and a lower part 151 (first part) arranged so as to be difficult to see. and an upper portion 152 (second portion). According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 179, 181, and 182, in the combined performance, the second movable accessory 15 is moved to a predetermined position (advance position) in front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. ), the lower part 151 and upper part 152 of the second movable accessory 15 are arranged so as to be visible. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 181, it is suggested that, before the combination effect, an effect in which the left fixed accessory 14L, the second movable accessory 15, and the right movable accessory 14R are combined is performed. It is further possible to perform a combined suggestion effect (in this embodiment, an effect in which a suggestion SG is displayed). According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 182, further includes a movable member 14LP (third movable member) arranged in a manner difficult to see due to the left fixed accessory 14L, and in the combined performance, the image display device 7 The movable member 14LP, which has moved to a visible position in front of the display screen 7a, is combined with the left fixed accessory 14L, the second movable accessory 15, and the right movable accessory 14R, representing a part of a specific object. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 179 to 182, in the combined effect, a face image 14G representing a part of a specific target is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. According to the configuration, the player can be visually entertained and the player's interest can be increased.

[Modified example]
Below, a modified example of the combination of multiple role objects is shown.
[Modification 1]
In FIGS. 179 to 182, the left fixed accessory 14L, the second movable accessory 15, and the right movable accessory 14R are combined to represent a human face as a specific object. It is not limited to living things or objects, but also includes abstract things such as letters, figures, and symbols, as well as conceptual things whose meaning is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist.
[Modification 2]
In FIGS. 179 to 182, the second movable accessory 15 and the right movable accessory 14R are combined with the left fixed accessory 14L at the advanced position (deployed position) near the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7; They may be combined at any position other than the advancing position.
[Modification 3]
In FIG. 181, the suggestion image SG is displayed as a combination suggestion performance that suggests that the left fixed accessory 14L, the second movable accessory 15, and the right movable accessory 14R are combined. The display may be other than the display of an image, for example, it may be an effect in which the role objects move with each other or emit light.
[Modification 4]
In FIGS. 179 to 182, the left fixed accessory 14L is fixed at a position near the center of the display screen 7a, but it may be fixed at any location. For example, it may be fixed to the front frame 53 or the like. Further, it may be provided as a part of the front frame 53 or the like.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect I2-1]
a display means capable of displaying multiple types of images;
A fixed member arranged so that the whole is visible,
a first movable member, at least a portion of which is arranged so as to be visible;
A gaming machine comprising: a second movable member arranged so as to be difficult to see as a whole;
At least the fixed member, the first movable member that has moved to a predetermined position in front of the display means, and the second movable member that has moved to a predetermined position in front of the display means are combined. , it is possible to perform a combined performance that represents a specific object,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect I1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect I2-1,
The first movable member includes a first portion arranged to be visible and a second portion arranged to be difficult to see.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect I1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect I2-2,
In the combined effect, the first movable member moves to a predetermined position in front of the display means, so that the first part and the second part of the first movable member are arranged so as to be visible. be done,
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect I1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects I2-1 to I2-3,
Before the combination effect, it is further possible to perform a combination suggestion effect that suggests that the fixed member, the first movable member, and the second movable member are combined.
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect I1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects I2-1 to I2-4,
further comprising a third movable member arranged so as to be difficult to see due to the fixed member,
In the combination effect, the third movable member, which has moved to a predetermined position in front of the display means, combines with the fixed member, the first movable member, and the second movable member, and displays the specific target. represents a part of
A gaming machine characterized by:
[Aspect I1-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects I2-1 to I2-5,
In the combined effect, an image representing a part of the specific object is displayed on the display means.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The winning/losing notification tilt effects A to D will be explained below using FIGS. 183 to 186. 183 to 186, various reserved images displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are omitted for ease of viewing the drawings, and drawings of decorative patterns displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are also omitted. Some items are omitted for the sake of simplicity, and the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 arranged around the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are also omitted for ease of viewing the drawing. There is something that has been done.

This winning/losing announcement tilt performance can be executed during the fluctuating performance of decorative symbols (for example, during the period from the start of fluctuating the decorative symbols to the stop of fluctuating them). That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90 (for example, a variable performance start command, a pre-judgment command), and if an instruction to execute a winning/losing announcement tilting performance is included, the ROM 103 The corresponding image data is read out from the image display device 7, and the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition, the lamp control board 107 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90 (for example, a variable performance start command, a preliminary determination command), and analyzes the left side movable accessory 14L of the first movable accessory 14 provided on the game board 2, The position and light emission mode of the right movable accessory 14R may be changed.

Here, the winning/losing announcement tilting performance A will be explained first, then the winning/losing announcement tilting performance B, the winning/losing announcement tilting performance C, and the winning/losing announcement tilting performance D will be explained in order.

[Win/Low Announcement Aori Performance A]
First, the winning/losing notification tilt effect A will be explained with reference to FIG. 183. FIG. 183 is a diagram for explaining win/loss announcement tilt effect A. The winning/losing announcement tilt performance A is performed during the fluctuating performance of the decorative pattern.

In the winning/losing announcement tilt effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 183(A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern of the stereoscopic image. A variable display of decorative symbols (symbols: numbers "1" to "9") is started in a display mode in which the reels rotate from the upper side of the display screen 7a to the lower side of the display screen 7a. When the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern is started, the decorative pattern that has been stopped and displayed changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed, resulting in a display mode that fluctuates at a high speed. Thereby, the background image placed behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. Immediately before stopping, the decorative pattern decelerates, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed in a stopped state (temporarily stopped and then stopped). In addition, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, it is displayed in a display mode in which it slowly moves slowly in the vertical direction.

Although not shown in the upper center of the display screen 7a, a sub-variation area is provided in which small decorative symbols corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a varying manner. The small decorative pattern is always in an opaque state, does not become translucent even when fluctuation starts, and does not disappear from the display screen 7a. When the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R start to be displayed in a variable manner, small-sized objects corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, respectively, are displayed in the sub-variable area. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are all stopped and displayed, and at the same time, all the corresponding small-sized decorative patterns are also stopped and displayed. A state in which one or more of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are the same pattern, temporarily stopped, and displayed, and reach is reached. Even if the corresponding small decorative pattern (for example, the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed), the small decorative pattern corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed. Even if the right decorative pattern 8R and the corresponding small decorative pattern) are all kept in a variable display state. In addition, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed and they are not aligned in the same pattern and are out of alignment, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern Each small decorative pattern corresponding to 8C and right decorative pattern 8R may be the same pattern as each of the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, or may be a completely different pattern. good. In addition, if the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and if they are aligned in the same pattern and it is a jackpot, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C , the small decorative patterns corresponding to the right decorative pattern 8R are aligned to the same pattern as the left decorative pattern 8L, the medium decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R.

The pending icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, which are currently being changed as the first special pattern pending, are not displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the corresponding pending display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the hold display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as a first special figure hold. In this hold display area, hold icons 9A can be displayed at four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), so that a maximum of four hold icons 9A can be stocked. The four hold display positions 9Ad are arranged from a position close to the hold display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a: a first hold display position 9Ad, a second hold display position 9Ad, a third hold display position 9Ad, and a fourth hold display position 9Ad. They are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a in order of pending display position 9Ad.

Note that when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the size of the hold icon 9C is the same as the hold icon immediately before the movement. The size is approximately 1.5 times the size of the pending icon 9A, and the shape and color of the pending icon 9C indicate to the player the degree of expectation of winning for the pending icon 9C. On the other hand, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad moves to the third hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad moves to the second hold display position 9Ad. When moving to position 9Ad, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, except when the shape of the hold icon 9A changes to another shape. Therefore, the size of each pending icon 9A is the same as the size of the pending icon 9A immediately before the movement.

Here, the white spherical pending icon 9C is displayed at the pending display position 9Cd, and the first pending display position 9Ad, second pending display position 9Ad, third pending display position 9Ad, and fourth pending display position 9Ad are displayed. , a white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed. In other words, the four pending icons 9A, 9A, 9A, and 9A are in a stocked state without being consumed.

In addition, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, which was displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 during the variable display of decorative patterns. In addition to the holding icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure holding based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, the holding icon 9B corresponds to the first special drawing holding based on the entering of the game ball into the first starting port 20. The second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is displayed as a number HMG arranged at the upper left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Here, the first special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 is 4 and the blue number "4" is on the left, and the second special drawing based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is shown on the left. The number of reserved special drawings is zero, and the red numbers "0" are arranged and displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a, spaced apart from each other on the right side.

Here, to briefly explain the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "pending icon"), the difference in shape and color determines the expectation of winning at the time of lottery corresponding to the pending icon. represents the difference between For example, among the four hold icons: a yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon, a black spherical hold icon, a smiling sphere hold icon, and a white spherical hold icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon is the most The expectation of winning is high, the black spherical pending icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling sphere pending icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical pending icon has the lowest expectation of winning. It has become a thing. The smiling sphere pending icon is further set with a high expectation of winning a jackpot in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (rich jackpot)).

In addition, in the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 after the decorative pattern starts changing in FIG. 183(A).

On the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a selection section SEL is arranged and displayed that allows the user to select the production mode. In the selection section SEL, production modes consisting of A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode are displayed in a manner in which the reels rotate, and each time the production button 63 is operated (pressed), the reels rotate. By doing so, the production mode that has reached the specific area is displayed larger than other production modes. The performance mode located in this specific area becomes the selected performance mode. Here, since the performance mode selected before winning/losing announcement tilting performance A was performed was B mode, which will be described later, the theme image of this B mode (here, an image imitating a "cloud") is an image, although not shown. It is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the display device 7.

In addition, the period during which the selection mode can be selected is limited to the period when the decorative pattern starts to fluctuate, and the "Change mode with production button" notification that the production mode can be changed by operating (pressing) the production button 63 is displayed. Although this message is displayed at a predetermined position (e.g., lower left side) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 for a predetermined period (e.g., 3 seconds), the winning/losing announcement effect A is performed. In this state, the selection mode cannot be selected at all. That is, when the winning/losing announcement tilting performance A is performed, the performance mode selected before the winning/losing announcing tilting performance A is continued in the winning/losing announcement tilting performance A.

Here, the A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode that constitute the production mode will be briefly explained.

In mode A, a performance with the theme of "sun" is performed, and a theme image imitating the "sun" is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the player operates (presses) the production button 63 while the A mode is located in the specific area of the selection part SEL, the A mode located in the specific area of the selection part SEL moves downward, and the A mode is activated. The D mode, which is placed below the , is displayed in a manner in which the reels rotate from the bottom to the top, and the B mode, which is placed above the A mode, is displayed in a manner in which the reels rotate from the top toward a specific area. Is displayed.

In mode B, a performance with the theme of "clouds" is performed, and a theme image imitating "clouds" is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the player operates (presses) the production button 63 while the B mode is located in the specific area of the selection part SEL, the B mode located in the specific area of the selection part SEL moves downward, and the B mode is activated. The A mode placed below is displayed in a manner in which the reels rotate from the bottom to the top, and the C mode placed above the B mode is displayed in a manner in which the reels rotate from above toward a specific area. Is displayed.

In the C mode, a performance with the theme of "rain" is performed, and a theme image imitating "rain" is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the player operates (presses) the production button 63 in a state where the C mode is located in a specific area of the selection part SEL, the C mode located in the specific area of the selection part SEL moves downward, thereby changing to the C mode. B mode, which is placed below, is displayed with the reels rotating from the bottom to the top, and D mode, which is placed above the C mode, is displayed with the reels rotating from above toward a specific area. Is displayed.

In the D mode, a performance with the theme of "snow" is advanced, and a theme image imitating "snow" is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the player operates (presses) the production button 63 in a state where D mode is located in a specific area of the selection part SEL, the D mode located in the specific area of the selection part SEL moves downward, thereby changing to D mode. The C mode, which is placed below the , is displayed in such a manner that the reels rotate from the bottom to the top, and the A mode, which is placed above the D mode, is displayed in such a manner that the reels rotate from above toward a specific area. The A mode is displayed again in a display mode located in the specific area.

In addition, the winning/losing announcement tilt effect A is the three effect modes (multiple effects This is a performance that is commonly performed in all modes. On the other hand, win/loss announcement tilt effect B, which will be described later, is an effect that is performed only in one effect mode (single effect mode) that is mode A only.

When the decorative pattern in FIG. 183(A) starts to fluctuate and there is a hit (big hit or small hit) on the four pending icons 9A, 9A, 9A, 9A, there is a hit (big hit or small hit). A winning suggestion image ASG having a three-dimensional W-shape suggesting a win is displayed in a large size at the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, whether or not there is a hit (big hit or small hit) for the four pending icons 9A, 9A, 9A, 9A is determined by the jackpot preliminary judgment result included in the preliminary judgment command (in the case of a jackpot, It is determined based on the jackpot type preliminary determination result) and the fluctuation pattern preliminary determination result.

The winning suggestion image ASG is first displayed in a large size at the center of the display screen 7a with its front side facing forward of the gaming machine 1, and then the left side and the right side of the winning suggestion image ASG become the upper side of the winning suggestion image ASG. and a straight line passing through the midpoints of the lower sides as the central axis, and swings repeatedly in the front and rear directions (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "swing motion of the winning suggestion image ASG"). When such a swinging movement of the hit suggestion image ASG is suddenly stopped, a display mode in which the hit suggestion image ASG moves toward the front from the center of the display screen 7a and pops out while emitting flashing light is repeatedly performed. A winning performance will be held. This win confirmation performance is a performance that notifies the player that a win (big win or small win) will occur after the end of the fluctuation. Therefore, when the swing motion of the winning suggestion image ASG starts, a winning confirmation effect can suddenly occur, giving the player a sense of expectation that a winning (big hit or small win) will occur. It is now possible to fan the flames.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 183(B), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are arranged in their respective variable display areas at the midpoint of the left side and the midpoint of the right side of the display screen 7a. They are displayed in a line that connects them (center line in the left-right direction). Here, the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed at the number "1", the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed at the number "2", and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed at the number "3", resulting in a miss. . Note that even in the state where the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, the swinging motion of the winning suggestion image ASG continues. As a result, even if the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed and a loss is confirmed, a winning effect is performed due to the swinging movement of the hit suggestion image ASG, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right It is possible to arouse a sense of expectation in the player that a performance in which all the decorative symbols 8R are the same and results in a win (big win or small win) may be developed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 183(C), when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the second hold icon 9A moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C. The hold icon 9A displayed at the hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad moves to the second hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad moves to the fourth hold display position 9Ad. The hold icon 9A displayed at the hold display position 9Ad moves to the third hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A disappears from the fourth hold display position 9Ad. Furthermore, the number HMG represents the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special chart reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, respectively. The first special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port 20 becomes three and changes to the blue number "3", and the second special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21. Zero pieces will continue to be a red number "0".

Even in the state where the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the corresponding pending display position 9Cd and becomes the corresponding pending icon 9C, the swinging movement of the winning suggestion image ASG is performed. Since the game continues and the win confirmation effect can suddenly occur, it is possible to create a sense of expectation in the player that a win (big win or small win) will occur.

After that, as shown in FIG. 183(D), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are arranged in their respective variable display areas to match the midpoint of the left side and the midpoint of the right side of the display screen 7a. They are lined up and displayed in a line connecting them (center line in the left and right direction). Here, the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed at the number "2", the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed at the number "3", and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed at the number "4", resulting in a miss. . Note that even in the state where the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, the swinging motion of the winning suggestion image ASG continues. As a result, even if the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed and a loss is confirmed, a winning effect is performed by the swinging movement of the hit suggestion image ASG, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right It is possible to arouse a sense of expectation in the player that a performance in which all the decorative symbols 8R are the same and result in a win (big win or small win) may be developed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 183(E), when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the second hold icon 9A moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C. The hold icon 9A displayed at the hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad moves to the second hold display position 9Ad, and then moves to the third hold display position 9Ad. The hold icon 9A disappears from the hold display position 9Ad. Furthermore, the number HMG represents the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special chart reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, respectively. The first special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port 20 becomes two and changes to the blue number "2", and the second special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21. Zero pieces will continue to be a red number "0".

Even in the state where the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the corresponding pending display position 9Cd and becomes the corresponding pending icon 9C, the swinging movement of the winning suggestion image ASG is performed. Since the game is continued and a win confirmation effect can suddenly occur, it is possible to create a sense of expectation in the player that a win (big win or small win) will occur.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 183(F), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are arranged in their own variable display areas, at the midpoint of the left side and the midpoint of the right side of the display screen 7a. They are lined up and displayed in a line connecting them (center line in the left and right direction). Here, the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed at the number "3", the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed at the number "4", and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed at the number "5", resulting in a miss. . Note that even in the state where the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, the swinging motion of the winning suggestion image ASG continues. As a result, even if the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed and a loss is confirmed, a winning effect is performed due to the swinging movement of the hit suggestion image ASG, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right It is possible to arouse a sense of expectation in the player that a performance in which all the decorative symbols 8R are the same and results in a win (big win or small win) may be developed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 183(G), when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the second hold icon 9A moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C. The hold icon 9A displayed at the hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, and disappears from the second hold display position 9Ad. Furthermore, the number HMG represents the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special chart reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, respectively. The first special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port 20 becomes one and changes to the blue number "1", and the second special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21. Zero pieces will continue to be a red number "0".

When the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, when the variable display of decorative symbols starts, as shown in FIG. 183(H), During the fluctuation, a winning confirmation effect suddenly occurs, and a display mode in which the winning suggestion image ASG flashes and moves toward the front from the center of the display screen 7a and pops out is repeatedly performed. When this winning confirmation effect occurs, the first pending display position 9Ad, the second pending display position 9Ad, the third pending display position 9Ad, the fourth pending display position 9Ad, and the corresponding pending display position 9Cd all disappear from the display screen 7a, The hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad and the hold icon 9C displayed at the hold display position 9Cd also disappear from the display screen 7a. Further, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R also disappear from the display screen 7a, and the selection section SEL from which the production mode can be selected disappears from the display screen 7a. On the other hand, in the sub-fluctuation area where a small decorative pattern (not shown) provided in the upper center of the display screen 7a is displayed in a variable manner, the small decorative pattern does not disappear from the display screen 7a, and furthermore, the small decorative pattern does not disappear from the display screen 7a, and The first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 provided on the side and the second special pattern reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are respectively indicated by the numbers HMG (here In this case, the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 is one blue number "1", and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21. The red number "0" (zero) does not disappear from the display screen 7a.

Thereafter, the winning suggestion image ASG disappears from the display screen 7a, and as shown in FIG. are lined up and displayed in a line (left-right center line) connecting the midpoint of the left side and the midpoint of the right side. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed at the number "7", the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed at the number "7", and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed at the number "7", so that the same pattern The game is stopped and displayed, resulting in a win (big win or small win), and then the performance (big win performance or small win performance) based on the winning game (big win game or small win game) is started.

In FIG. 183(I), the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are each indicated by a number. HMG (Here, the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 is one, and the blue number is "1", and the second number is based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21. If there are zero special drawings on hold, the red number "0") is displayed as shown in FIG. 183(H). In addition, in FIG. 183(I), the state in which the first pending display position 9Ad, the second pending display position 9Ad, the third pending display position 9Ad, the fourth pending display position 9Ad, and the corresponding pending display position 9Cd have all disappeared is shown in FIG. FIG. 183(H) shows a state in which the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad and the pending icon 9C displayed at the corresponding pending display position 9Cd have also disappeared. continues to be maintained. Further, in FIG. 183(I), the state in which the selection section SEL for selecting the production mode has disappeared is maintained as in FIG. 183(H).

In this way, the winning suggestion image ASG that suggests the existence of a win in the winning/losing information of the pending icon 9A is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the swinging movement of the winning suggestion image ASG is repeated. This can arouse the player's expectation that a win (big win or small win) will occur when the swinging movement of the win suggestion image ASG starts, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

In addition, at the first pending display position 9Ad, second pending display position 9Ad, third pending display position 9Ad, and fourth pending display position 9Ad, there are white spherical pending icons with the lowest expectation of winning (big hit or small hit). Even if are displayed, when the swinging movement of the winning suggestion image ASG starts, a winning confirmation effect that notifies the player that a winning (big win or small win) will occur after the fluctuation ends. Since this can occur suddenly, it is possible to create a sense of expectation in the player that a win (big win or small win) will occur.

In addition, the winning/losing announcement tilt effect A can be applied to three effect modes (multiple effects Since this is a performance that is commonly performed in all three performance modes (a plurality of performance modes), the display mode of the swinging motion of the winning suggestion image ASG is a common display mode in the three production modes (a plurality of production modes). On the other hand, win/loss announcement tilting performance B, which will be described later, is a performance that is performed only in one performance mode (single performance mode), which is mode A only, so in one performance mode (single performance mode). The display mode of expansion motion of the winning suggestion image ASG, which will be described later, is a dedicated display mode that is different from the common display mode.

[Win/Lose Announcement B]
Next, the winning/losing notification tilt effect B will be explained with reference to FIG. 184. FIG. 184 is a diagram for explaining win/loss announcement tilt effect B. The winning/losing announcement tilt performance B is performed during the fluctuating performance of the decorative pattern.

In the winning/losing announcement tilt effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 184(A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern of the stereoscopic image. A variable display of decorative symbols (symbols: numbers "1" to "9") is started in a display mode in which the reels rotate from the upper side of the display screen 7a to the lower side of the display screen 7a. When the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern is started, the decorative pattern that has been stopped and displayed changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed, resulting in a display mode that fluctuates at a high speed. Thereby, the background image placed behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. Immediately before stopping, the decorative pattern decelerates, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed in a stopped state (temporarily stopped and then stopped). It should be noted that when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, it is displayed in a display mode in which it slowly moves slowly in the vertical direction.

Although not shown in the upper center of the display screen 7a, a sub-variation area is provided in which small decorative symbols corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a varying manner. The small decorative pattern is always in an opaque state, does not become translucent even when fluctuation starts, and does not disappear from the display screen 7a. When the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R start to be displayed in a variable manner, small-sized objects corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, respectively, are displayed in the sub-variable area. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are all stopped and displayed, and at the same time, all the corresponding small-sized decorative patterns are also stopped and displayed. A state in which one or more of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are the same pattern, temporarily stopped, and displayed, and reach is reached. Even if the corresponding small decorative pattern (for example, the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed), the small decorative pattern corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed. Even if the right decorative pattern 8R and the corresponding small decorative pattern) are all kept in a variable display state. In addition, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed and they are not aligned in the same pattern and are out of alignment, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern Each small decorative pattern corresponding to 8C and right decorative pattern 8R may be the same pattern as each of the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, or may be a completely different pattern. good. In addition, if the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and if they are aligned in the same pattern and it is a jackpot, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C , the small decorative patterns corresponding to the right decorative pattern 8R are aligned to the same pattern as the left decorative pattern 8L, the medium decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R.

The pending icons 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, which are currently being changed as the first special pattern pending, are not displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the corresponding hold display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the hold display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as a first special figure hold. In this hold display area, hold icons 9A can be displayed at four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), so that a maximum of four hold icons 9A can be stocked. The four hold display positions 9Ad are arranged from a position close to the hold display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a: a first hold display position 9Ad, a second hold display position 9Ad, a third hold display position 9Ad, and a fourth hold display position 9Ad. They are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a in order of pending display position 9Ad.

Note that when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the size of the hold icon 9C is the same as the hold icon immediately before the movement. The size is approximately 1.5 times the size of the pending icon 9A, and the shape and color of the pending icon 9C indicate to the player the degree of expectation of winning for the pending icon 9C. On the other hand, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad moves to the third hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad moves to the second hold display position 9Ad. When moving to position 9Ad, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, except when the shape of the hold icon 9A changes to another shape. Therefore, the size of each pending icon 9A is the same as the size of the pending icon 9A immediately before the movement.

Here, the white spherical pending icon 9C is displayed at the pending display position 9Cd, and the first pending display position 9Ad, second pending display position 9Ad, third pending display position 9Ad, and fourth pending display position 9Ad are displayed. , a white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed. In other words, the four pending icons 9A, 9A, 9A, and 9A are in a stocked state without being consumed.

In addition, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, which was displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 during the variable display of decorative patterns. In addition to the holding icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure holding based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, the holding icon 9B corresponds to the first special drawing holding based on the entering of the game ball into the first starting port 20. The second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is displayed as a number HMG arranged at the upper left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Here, the first special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 is 4 and the blue number "4" is on the left, and the second special drawing based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is shown on the left. The number of reserved special drawings is zero, and the red numbers "0" are arranged and displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a, spaced apart from each other on the right side.

Here, to briefly explain the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "pending icon"), the difference in shape and color determines the expectation of winning at the time of lottery corresponding to the pending icon. represents the difference between For example, among the four hold icons: a yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon, a black spherical hold icon, a smiling sphere hold icon, and a white spherical hold icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon is the most The expectation of winning is high, the black spherical pending icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling sphere pending icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical pending icon has the lowest expectation of winning. It has become a thing. The smiling sphere pending icon is further set with a high expectation of winning a jackpot in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (rich jackpot)).

In addition, in the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 after the decorative pattern starts changing in FIG. 184(A).

On the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a selection section SEL is arranged and displayed that allows the user to select the production mode. In the selection section SEL, production modes consisting of A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode are displayed in a manner in which the reels rotate, and each time the production button 63 is operated (pressed), the reels rotate. By doing so, the production mode that has reached the specific area is displayed larger than other production modes. The performance mode located in this specific area becomes the selected performance mode. Here, since the performance mode selected before winning/losing announcement tilting performance A was performed was A mode, which will be described later, the theme image of this A mode (here, an image imitating a "sun") is an image, although not shown. It is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the display device 7.

In addition, the period during which the selection mode can be selected is limited to the period when the decorative pattern starts to fluctuate, and the "Change mode with production button" notification that the production mode can be changed by operating (pressing) the production button 63 is displayed. Although this message is placed and displayed at a predetermined position (e.g., lower left side) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 for a predetermined period (e.g., 3 seconds), winning/losing announcement effect B is not performed. In this state, the selection mode cannot be selected at all. That is, when the winning/losing announcement tilting performance B is performed, the performance mode selected before the winning/losing announcing tilting performance B is continued in the winning/losing announcement tilting performance B as well.

Here, the A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode that constitute the production mode will be briefly explained.

In mode A, a performance with the theme of "sun" is performed, and a theme image imitating the "sun" is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the player operates (presses) the production button 63 while the A mode is located in the specific area of the selection part SEL, the A mode located in the specific area of the selection part SEL moves downward, and the A mode is set. The D mode, which is placed below the , is displayed in such a manner that the reels rotate from the bottom to the top, and the B mode, which is placed above the A mode, is displayed in such a manner that the reels rotate from above toward a specific area. Is displayed.

In mode B, a performance with the theme of "clouds" is carried out, and a theme image imitating "clouds" is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the player operates (presses) the production button 63 in a state where B mode is located in a specific area of the selection part SEL, the B mode located in the specific area of the selection part SEL moves downward, thereby changing to B mode. The A mode placed below is displayed in a manner in which the reels rotate from the bottom to the top, and the C mode placed above the B mode is displayed in a manner in which the reels rotate from above towards a specific area. Is displayed.

In the C mode, a performance with a theme of "rain" is performed, and a theme image imitating "rain" is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the player operates (presses) the production button 63 in a state where the C mode is located in a specific area of the selection part SEL, the C mode located in the specific area of the selection part SEL moves downward, thereby changing to the C mode. B mode, which is placed below, is displayed with the reels rotating from the bottom to the top, and D mode, which is placed above the C mode, is displayed with the reels rotating from above toward a specific area. Is displayed.

In the D mode, a performance with the theme of "snow" is advanced, and a theme image imitating "snow" is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the player operates (presses) the production button 63 while the D mode is located in a specific area of the selection part SEL, the D mode located in the specific area of the selection part SEL moves downward, and the D mode is activated. The C mode located below is displayed in a manner in which the reels rotate from the bottom to the top, and the A mode located above the D mode is displayed in a manner in which the reels rotate from above toward a specific area. The A mode is displayed again in a display mode located in the specific area.

In addition, the winning/losing announcement tilt performance B is a performance that is performed only in one performance mode (single performance mode) that is only the A mode among the performance modes A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode. . On the other hand, the above-mentioned win/loss announcement tilt performance A is a performance that is commonly performed in three performance modes (a plurality of performance modes), excluding A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode.

When the decorative pattern in FIG. 184(A) starts to fluctuate and there is a hit (big hit or small hit) on the four pending icons 9A, 9A, 9A, 9A, there is a hit (big hit or small hit). A winning suggestion image ASG having a three-dimensional W-shape suggesting a win is displayed in a large size at the center of the display screen 7a. In addition, whether or not there is a hit (big hit or small hit) for the four pending icons 9A, 9A, 9A, 9A is determined by the jackpot preliminary judgment result included in the preliminary judgment command (in the case of a jackpot, It is determined based on the jackpot type preliminary determination result) and the fluctuation pattern preliminary determination result.

The winning suggestion image ASG is first displayed in a large size in the center of the display screen 7a with its front side facing forward of the gaming machine 1, and then during the fluctuation, the winning suggestion image ASG expands to its original size. This is a mode in which the return motion is repeated (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "expansion motion of the winning suggestion image ASG"). When the expanding movement of the winning suggestion image ASG is suddenly stopped, the winning suggestion image ASG moves from the center of the display screen 7a toward the front and pops out while emitting flashes. A final performance will be held. This win confirmation performance is a performance that notifies the player that a win (big win or small win) will occur after the end of the fluctuation. For this reason, when the expansion movement of the winning suggestion image ASG starts, a winning confirmation effect can suddenly occur, giving the player a sense of expectation that a winning (big win or small win) will occur. It is now possible to fan the flames.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 184(B), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are arranged in their respective variable display areas to match the midpoint of the left side and the midpoint of the right side of the display screen 7a. They are displayed in a line that connects them (center line in the left-right direction). Here, the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed at the number "1", the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed at the number "2", and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed at the number "3", resulting in a miss. . In addition, since the winning suggestion image ASG is displayed even when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, even if the decorative pattern is stopped and a loss is confirmed, the expansion movement of the winning suggestion image ASG is is started, and after that, a winning confirmation effect is performed, so that an effect may develop in which the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R all have the same pattern and become a hit (big hit or small hit). It is possible to create a sense of expectation in the players that there will be no such thing.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 184(C), when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the second hold icon 9A moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C. The hold icon 9A displayed at the hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad moves to the second hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad moves to the fourth hold display position 9Ad. The hold icon 9A displayed at the hold display position 9Ad moves to the third hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A disappears from the fourth hold display position 9Ad. Furthermore, the number HMG represents the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special chart reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, respectively. The first special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port 20 becomes three and changes to the blue number "3", and the second special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21. Zero pieces will continue to be a red number "0".

Even when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the winning suggestion image ASG continues to be displayed even when the variable display of decorative symbols has started. be done.

During the fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 184(D), the expansion movement of the winning suggestion image ASG is started. As a result, it is possible for a winning effect to suddenly occur during the fluctuation, and it is now possible to create a sense of expectation in the player that a win (big win or small win) will occur. There is.

After that, as shown in FIG. 184(E), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are arranged in their respective variable display areas to match the midpoint of the left side and the midpoint of the right side of the display screen 7a. They are lined up and displayed in a line connecting them (center line in the left and right direction). Here, the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed at the number "2", the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed at the number "3", and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed at the number "4", resulting in a miss. . Note that by the time the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the expansion movement of the winning suggestion image ASG has finished and the winning suggestion image ASG has returned to its original size. As a result, even if the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed and a win is confirmed, the winning suggestion image ASG is displayed, so the expansion movement of the winning suggestion image ASG is started, and then the winning confirmation effect is performed. To arouse the expectation in the player that by being hit, an effect may be developed in which the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all the same pattern and hit (big hit or small hit). I can do it.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 184(F), when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the second hold icon 9A moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C. The hold icon 9A displayed at the hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad moves to the second hold display position 9Ad, and then moves to the third hold display position 9Ad. The hold icon 9A disappears from the hold display position 9Ad. Furthermore, the number HMG represents the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special chart reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, respectively. The first special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port 20 becomes two and changes to the blue number "2", and the second special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21. Zero pieces will continue to be a red number "0".

When the pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad in FIG. 184(F) moves to the corresponding pending display position 9Cd and becomes the corresponding pending icon 9C, the variable display of the decorative pattern starts. ) to FIG. 184(H), the expansion movement of the hit suggestion image ASG is performed. As a result, it is possible for a winning effect to occur suddenly during the fluctuation, and it is possible to create a sense of expectation in the player that a win (big win or small win) will occur. There is.

After that, as shown in FIG. 184(I), during the fluctuation, a winning confirmation effect suddenly occurs, and the winning suggestion image ASG moves from the center of the display screen 7a toward the front while emitting a flash and pops out. The following display mode is repeated. When this winning confirmation effect occurs, the first pending display position 9Ad, the second pending display position 9Ad, the third pending display position 9Ad, the fourth pending display position 9Ad, and the corresponding pending display position 9Cd all disappear from the display screen 7a, The hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9C displayed at the hold display position 9Cd also disappear from the display screen 7a. . Further, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R also disappear from the display screen 7a, and the selection section SEL from which the production mode can be selected disappears from the display screen 7a. On the other hand, in the sub-fluctuation area where a small decorative pattern (not shown) provided in the upper center of the display screen 7a is displayed in a variable manner, the small decorative pattern does not disappear from the display screen 7a, and furthermore, the small decorative pattern does not disappear from the display screen 7a, and The first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 provided on the side and the second special pattern reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are respectively indicated by the numbers HMG (here In this case, the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 is 2, which is the blue number "2", and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21. The red number "0" (zero) does not disappear from the display screen 7a.

Thereafter, the winning suggestion image ASG disappears from the display screen 7a, and as shown in FIG. are lined up and displayed in a line (left-right center line) connecting the midpoint of the left side and the midpoint of the right side. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed at the number "7", the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed at the number "7", and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed at the number "7", so that the same pattern The game is stopped and displayed, resulting in a win (big win or small win), and then a performance (big win performance or small win performance) based on the winning game (big win game or small win game) is started.

In FIG. 184 (J), the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are each indicated by a number. HMG (here, the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 is 2 and the blue number "2", and the second number based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21). If there are zero special drawings on hold, the red number "0") is displayed as shown in FIG. 184(I). In addition, in FIG. 184(J), the state in which the first pending display position 9Ad, the second pending display position 9Ad, the third pending display position 9Ad, the fourth pending display position 9Ad, and the corresponding pending display position 9Cd have all disappeared is shown in FIG. (I), and the hold icon 9A that was displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A that was displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A that was displayed at the hold display position 9Cd. The state in which the hold icon 9C has also disappeared is maintained as in FIG. 184(I). Further, in FIG. 184(J), the state in which the selection section SEL for selecting the production mode has disappeared is maintained as in FIG. 184(I).

In addition, in A mode, even if the decorative pattern starts to fluctuate in FIG. 184(A) and there is a hit (big hit or small hit) on the four pending icons 9A, 9A, 9A, 9A, The win suggestion image ASG having a three-dimensional W-shape that suggests the existence of a win (big win or small win) may not be displayed at all on the display screen 7a. In this case, while the decorative pattern is changing, the effect button image imitating the effect button 63 is not displayed on the display screen 7a at all, and the announcement "Please operate the effect button" is not heard from the speaker 67 at all. In other words, when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 a predetermined number of times even though no effect is performed to prompt the user to operate (press) the effect button 63, the background image is displayed. An image having seven colors (a so-called "rainbow image") is displayed on the display screen 7a, and a "win confirmation effect using the effect button" is performed in which a character is displayed in a large size in the center of the display screen 7a. In other words, the "win confirmation performance using the performance button" is such that when the number of operations (pressing operations) of the performance button 63 reaches a predetermined number of times in a state where no performance that prompts the operation (pressing operation) of the performance button 63 is performed, So-called "hidden commands" can be generated and executed. This "winning confirmation performance using the performance button" is a performance that notifies the player that a win (big win or small win) will occur thereafter. The rainbow image is a specific image and is a background image that announces a confirmed win.

The "predetermined number of times" includes 1 time, 3 times, 5 times, 7 times, 9 times, 11 times, 13 times, 15 times, 17 times, 19 times, 21 times, and 23 times. It is set by lottery in (image control microcomputer 101). In other words, even if the number of times the player operates (presses) the performance button 63 reaches 23 times, if the "win-confirming performance using the performance button" is not performed, the game becomes a loss. For example, when the hold icon 9A is displayed at each of the first hold display position 9Ad to the fourth hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad (win/loss information is ) becomes the pending icon 9C, even if the player operates (presses) the performance button 63, the "win-confirming performance using the performance button" will not be performed and the result will be a loss. When the hold icon 9A (win/loss information is a hit (big hit or small win)) displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad becomes the hold icon 9C, the performance control microcomputer 91 (image control microcomputer 101) is set to 17 times, and when the number of times the player operates (presses) the performance button 63 reaches 17 times, a "win confirmation performance using the performance button" is performed, It becomes a hit (big hit or small hit).

The "win confirmation performance using the performance button" is a special performance that is performed only when the A mode is selected, and the decorative pattern starts to fluctuate in FIG. 184(A), and the four pending icons 9A, 9A, 9A, 9A Even if there is a win (big win or small win), the win suggestion image ASG having a three-dimensional W-shape that suggests the existence of a win (big win or small win) is not displayed on the display screen 7a. In addition to the case where it is not done, there is a case where it is done when the four holding icons 9A, 9A, 9A, 9A are digested as the holding icon 9C and the game ball enters the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21. be.

In other words, in the A mode, even if the decorative pattern starts to fluctuate in FIG. , If the winning suggestion image ASG having a three-dimensional W-shape that suggests the existence of a winning (big win or small win) is not displayed at all on the display screen 7a, when the player operates (presses) the production button 63. , while the "win confirmation performance using the performance button" is performed, the decorative pattern in FIG. If there is a winning suggestion image ASG having a three-dimensional W-shape that suggests the existence of a winning (big win or small win), the game No matter how many times the person operates (presses) the performance button 63, the "winning confirmation performance using the performance button" is blocked and the win/loss announcement tilt performance B is proceeded.

In addition, in the C mode, the decorative pattern starts to fluctuate in FIG. Even if the winning suggestion image ASG, which has a three-dimensional W-shape that suggests the existence of a winning (or small winning), is displayed on the display screen 7a or is not displayed at all, although it is not shown, , a performance that prompts the user to operate (press) the performance button 63 is performed in which a performance button image imitating the performance button 63 is displayed on the display screen 7a. This point differs from mode A. When the player operates (presses) the production button 63, an image having seven colors as a background image (a so-called "rainbow image") is displayed on the display screen 7a, and a character is displayed in a large size in the center of the display screen 7a. In some cases, a ``win confirmation effect using the effect button'' may be performed. This "winning confirmation performance using the performance button" is a performance that notifies the player that a win (big win or small win) will occur thereafter. The rainbow image is a specific image and is a background image that announces a confirmed win.

In this way, the win suggestion image ASG that suggests the existence of a win in the win/loss information of the pending icon 9A is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the expansion movement of the win suggestion image ASG is repeated. This can arouse the player's sense of expectation that a win (big win or small win) will occur when the expansion movement of the win suggestion image ASG starts, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

In addition, at the first hold display position 9Ad, second hold display position 9Ad, third hold display position 9Ad, and fourth hold display position 9Ad, white spherical hold icons with the lowest expectation of winning (big hit or small hit) are placed. Even if these are displayed, when the expansion movement of the winning suggestion image ASG starts, a winning confirmation effect will be performed to notify the player that a winning (big win or small win) will occur after the fluctuation ends. Since it can occur suddenly, it is possible to create a sense of expectation in the player that a win (big win or small win) will occur.

In addition, as described above, the winning/losing announcement tilt effect A shown in FIG. Since this is a performance that is performed in common in three production modes (multiple production modes) called modes, the display mode of the swinging movement of the winning suggestion image ASG is a common display mode in the three production modes (multiple production modes). ing. On the other hand, win/lose announcement trick performance B is a performance that is performed only in one performance mode (single performance mode) that is only mode A, so it is a performance that is performed only in one performance mode (single performance mode). The display mode of the expansion motion of the image ASG is a dedicated display mode that is different from the common display mode.

[Win/lose announcement direction C]
Next, the winning/losing announcement tilt effect C will be explained with reference to FIG. 185. FIG. 185 is a diagram for explaining the winning/losing announcement tilt effect C.

In the winning/losing announcement trick effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 185(A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays the effect of each round game in the jackpot effect (jackpot game) and when all of them are completed. At the end of the game performance period and, accordingly, at the beginning of the notification period, a message MG "Continue right-handed hitting" is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in order to continue playing right-handed. In addition, the image display device displays the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special pattern reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 as numbers HMG. 7 is arranged and displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a. Here, the first special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 is zero and the blue number "0" is on the left, and the second special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is shown on the left. There are four reserved special drawings, and the red number "4" is arranged and displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a with the red number "4" spaced apart from each other on the right side.

In addition, in the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 after the display starts in FIG. 185(A).

In FIG. 185(A), when the notification period in which the message MG "Continue right-handed batting" is displayed comes to an end and the specific period begins, here, as described above, the game ball enters the first starting port 20. The number of first special symbols reserved based on entering the ball is zero, which is the number "0", and the number of second special symbols reserved based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is four, so the second starting port If there is a hit (big hit or small hit) in the reservation information corresponding to the four second special symbol reservations based on the game ball entering the ball into the 21, the display will be displayed as shown in FIG. 185(B). A flash image FH in which light is emitted from the center of the screen 7a in all directions is displayed on the display screen 7a, and then, as shown in FIG. A W-shaped winning suggestion image ASG is displayed in a large size at the center of the display screen 7a. The winning suggestion image ASG is displayed in a large size in the center of the display screen 7a with its front side facing forward of the gaming machine 1. In addition, whether or not there is a hit (big hit or small hit) in the hold information corresponding to the four second special figure holds based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is determined by the advance judgment command. The determination is made based on the jackpot preliminary determination result (in the case of a jackpot, the jackpot type preliminary determination result), and the fluctuation pattern preliminary determination result, which are included in the.

In addition, in the specific period, if there is no hit (big hit or small hit) in the hold information corresponding to the four second special figure holds based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21. , the flash image FH shown in FIG. 185(B) is not displayed on the display screen 7a, and furthermore, the hit suggestion image ASG shown in FIG. 185(C) is not displayed on the display screen 7a. In this case (that is, during the specific period, there is no hit (big hit or small hit) in the reservation information corresponding to the four second special symbol reservations based on the entry of game balls into the second starting port 21. In this case), the winning/losing announcement tilt effect C is not performed and the decorative symbols start changing.

Thereafter, at the end of the specific period, as shown in FIG. 185(D), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern of the stereoscopic image. A variable display of decorative symbols (symbols: numbers "1" to "9") is started in a display mode in which the reels rotate from the upper side of the display screen 7a to the lower side of the display screen 7a. When the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern is started, the decorative pattern that has been stopped and displayed changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed, resulting in a display mode that fluctuates at a high speed. Thereby, the background image placed behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. Immediately before stopping, the decorative pattern decelerates, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed in a stopped state (temporarily stopped and then stopped). In addition, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, it is displayed in a display mode in which it slowly moves slowly in the vertical direction.

When the variable display of decorative patterns (designs: numbers "1" to "9") starts in FIG. 185(D), they are displayed in a large size in the center of the display screen 7a in FIG. 185(C). The hit suggestion image ASG that has been displayed is displayed in a small size in a rectangular area on the lower left side of the display screen 7a. The size of the rectangular area on the lower left side of this display screen 7a is larger than the size of the white spherical pending icon 9C displayed at the pending display position 9Cd, and includes the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern. It is small compared to the size of each pattern 8R. At this time, within the rectangular area on the lower left side of the display screen 7a, the left side and the right side of the hit suggestion image ASG move forward and backward with a straight line passing through the midpoints of the upper and lower sides of the hit suggestion image ASG as the central axis. This is a mode of repeatedly rocking and swaying (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "swinging motion of the winning suggestion image ASG"). When such swinging motion of the hit suggestion image ASG is suddenly stopped, the hit suggestion image ASG jumps out of the rectangular area on the lower left side of the display screen 7a and moves to the center of the display screen 7a. Then, a winning confirmation effect is performed in which a display mode in which the winning suggestion image ASG flashes and moves toward the front from the center of the display screen 7a and pops out is repeated. This win confirmation performance is a performance that notifies the player that a win (big win or small win) will occur after the end of the fluctuation. Therefore, when the swing motion of the winning suggestion image ASG starts, a winning confirmation effect can suddenly occur, giving the player a sense of expectation that a winning (big hit or small win) will occur. It is now possible to fan the flames.

Although not shown in the upper center of the display screen 7a, a sub-variation area is provided in which small decorative symbols corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a varying manner. The small decorative pattern is always in an opaque state, does not become translucent even when fluctuation starts, and does not disappear from the display screen 7a. When the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R start to be displayed in a variable manner, small-sized objects corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, respectively, are displayed in the sub-variable area. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are all stopped and displayed, and at the same time, all the corresponding small-sized decorative patterns are also stopped and displayed. A state in which one or more of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are the same pattern, temporarily stopped, and displayed, and reach is reached. Even if the corresponding small decorative pattern (for example, the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed), the small decorative pattern corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed. Even if the right decorative pattern 8R and the corresponding small decorative pattern) are all kept in a variable display state. In addition, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed and they are not aligned in the same pattern and are out of alignment, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern Each small decorative pattern corresponding to 8C and right decorative pattern 8R may be the same pattern as each of the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, or may be a completely different pattern. good. In addition, if the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and if they are aligned in the same pattern and it is a jackpot, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C , the small decorative patterns corresponding to the right decorative pattern 8R are aligned to the same pattern as the left decorative pattern 8L, the medium decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R.

The pending icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R that are currently changing as the second special pattern pending is displayed at the bottom center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. is displayed at the corresponding hold display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the right side of the hold display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as a second special figure hold. In this hold display area, hold icons 9B can be displayed at four hold display positions 9Bd (above the rectangular image), so that a maximum of four hold icons 9B can be stocked. The four hold display positions 9Bd are arranged from a position close to the hold display position 9Cd toward the right side of the display screen 7a: a first hold display position 9Bd, a second hold display position 9Bd, a third hold display position 9Bd, and a fourth hold display position 9Bd. They are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of pending display position 9Bd.

Note that when the hold icon 9B displayed at the first hold display position 9Bd moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the size of the hold icon 9C is the same as the hold icon immediately before the movement. It is about 1.5 times the size of the pending icon 9B, and the shape and color of the pending icon 9C indicate to the player the degree of expectation of winning for the pending icon 9C. On the other hand, when the hold icon 9B displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Bd moves to the third hold display position 9Bd, the hold icon 9B displayed at the third hold display position 9Bd moves to the second hold display position 9Bd. When moving to position 9Bd, when the hold icon 9B displayed at the second hold display position 9Bd moves to the first hold display position 9Bd, except when the shape of the hold icon 9A changes to another shape. Therefore, the size of each pending icon 9B is the same as the size of the pending icon 9B immediately before the movement.

Here, the white spherical hold icon 9C is displayed at the hold display position 9Cd, and the white spherical hold icon is displayed at the first hold display position 9Bd, the second hold display position 9Bd, and the third hold display position 9Bd. 9B are displayed, and the hold icon 9B is not displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Bd. In other words, the three pending icons 9B, 9B, and 9B are in a stocked state without being consumed.

In addition, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, which was displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 during the variable display of decorative patterns. In addition to the holding icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure holding based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, as described above, the holding icon 9B corresponding to the second special drawing holding based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, The first special figure reservation and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are respectively arranged and displayed as numbers HMG on the upper left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Here, the number HMG represents the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special pattern reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, respectively. The first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 continues to be zero and becomes the blue number "0", and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21. becomes 3 and changes to the red number "3".

Here, to briefly explain the pending icon 9B and the corresponding pending icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "pending icon"), the difference in shape and color determines the expectation of winning at the lottery corresponding to the pending icon. represents the difference between For example, among the four hold icons: a yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon, a black spherical hold icon, a smiling sphere hold icon, and a white spherical hold icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon is the most The expectation of winning is high, the black spherical pending icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling sphere pending icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical pending icon has the lowest expectation of winning. It has become a thing. The smiling sphere pending icon is further set with a high expectation of winning a jackpot in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (rich jackpot)).

In FIG. 185(D), when the variable display of decorative patterns (designs: numbers "1" to "9") starts, the display mode is displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A selection section SEL is arranged and displayed. In the selection section SEL, production modes consisting of A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode are displayed in a manner in which the reels rotate, and each time the production button 63 is operated (pressed), the reels rotate. By doing so, the production mode that has reached the specific area is displayed larger than other production modes. The performance mode located in this specific area becomes the selected performance mode. Here, since the performance mode selected during the fluctuation of the decorative symbols before winning/losing announcement tilting performance C is performed, that is, before the jackpot performance (jackpot game) is B mode, which will be described later, this B mode theme image Although not shown in the figure, a cloud (here imitating a "cloud") is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

In addition, the period during which the selection mode can be selected is limited to the period when the decorative pattern starts to fluctuate, and the "Change mode with production button" notification that the production mode can be changed by operating (pressing) the production button 63 is displayed. Although this message is placed and displayed at a predetermined position (e.g., lower right side) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 for a predetermined period (e.g., 3 seconds), the winning/losing announcement tilt effect C is not performed. In this state, the selection mode cannot be selected at all. In other words, when the winning/losing announcement tilting performance C is performed, the performance mode selected during the fluctuation of the decorative symbols before winning/losing announcing tilting performance C is performed, that is, before the jackpot performance (jackpot game) is performed, is the winning/losing announcement tilting performance C. The situation will continue even in .

Here, the A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode that constitute the production mode will be briefly explained.

In mode A, a performance with the theme of "sun" is performed, and a theme image imitating the "sun" is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the player operates (presses) the production button 63 while the A mode is located in the specific area of the selection part SEL, the A mode located in the specific area of the selection part SEL moves downward, and the A mode is activated. The D mode, which is placed below the , is displayed in a manner in which the reels rotate from the bottom to the top, and the B mode, which is placed above the A mode, is displayed in a manner in which the reels rotate from the top toward a specific area. Is displayed.

In mode B, a performance with the theme of "clouds" is performed, and a theme image imitating "clouds" is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the player operates (presses) the production button 63 while the B mode is located in the specific area of the selection part SEL, the B mode located in the specific area of the selection part SEL moves downward, and the B mode is activated. The A mode placed below is displayed in a manner in which the reels rotate from the bottom to the top, and the C mode placed above the B mode is displayed in a manner in which the reels rotate from above toward a specific area. Is displayed.

In the C mode, a performance with the theme of "rain" is performed, and a theme image imitating "rain" is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the player operates (presses) the production button 63 in a state where the C mode is located in a specific area of the selection part SEL, the C mode located in the specific area of the selection part SEL moves downward, thereby changing to the C mode. B mode, which is placed below, is displayed with the reels rotating from the bottom to the top, and D mode, which is placed above the C mode, is displayed with the reels rotating from above toward a specific area. Is displayed.

In the D mode, a performance with the theme of "snow" is advanced, and a theme image imitating "snow" is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the player operates (presses) the production button 63 in a state where D mode is located in a specific area of the selection part SEL, the D mode located in the specific area of the selection part SEL moves downward, thereby changing to D mode. The C mode, which is placed below the , is displayed in such a manner that the reels rotate from the bottom to the top, and the A mode, which is placed above the D mode, is displayed in such a manner that the reels rotate from above toward a specific area. The A mode is displayed again in a display mode located in the specific area.

In addition, the winning/losing announcement tilt effect C is applicable to the three effect modes (multiple effects This is a performance that is commonly performed in all modes. On the other hand, in the winning/losing announcement tilting performance D, which will be described later, it is a performance that is performed only in one performance mode (single performance mode) that is only mode A.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 185(E), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are arranged in their respective variable display areas to match the midpoint of the left side and the midpoint of the right side of the display screen 7a. They are displayed in a line that connects them (center line in the left-right direction). Here, the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed at the number "1", the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed at the number "2", and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed at the number "3", resulting in a miss. . Note that even in the state where the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, the swinging motion of the winning suggestion image ASG continues. As a result, even if the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed and a loss is confirmed, a winning effect is performed due to the swinging movement of the hit suggestion image ASG, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right It is possible to arouse a sense of expectation in the player that a performance in which all the decorative symbols 8R are the same and results in a win (big win or small win) may be developed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 185(F), when the hold icon 9B displayed at the first hold display position 9Bd moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the second hold icon 9B moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C. The hold icon 9B displayed at the hold display position 9Bd moves to the first hold display position 9Bd, the hold icon 9B displayed at the third hold display position 9Bd moves to the second hold display position 9Bd, and the hold icon 9B displayed at the third hold display position 9Bd moves to the third hold display position 9Bd. The hold icon 9B disappears from the hold display position 9Bd. Furthermore, the number HMG represents the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special chart reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, respectively. The first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port 20 is zero and continues to be the blue number "0", and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is 2. The number becomes RO and changes to the red number "2".

Even in the state in which the hold icon 9B displayed at the first hold display position 9Bd moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the swing movement of the hit suggestion image ASG is performed. Since the game is continued and a win confirmation effect can suddenly occur, it is possible to create a sense of expectation in the player that a win (big win or small win) will occur.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 185(G), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are arranged in their respective variable display areas between the midpoint of the left side and the midpoint of the right side of the display screen 7a. They are displayed in a line that connects them (center line in the left-right direction). Here, the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed at the number "2", the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed at the number "3", and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed at the number "4", resulting in a miss. . Note that even in the state where the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, the swinging motion of the winning suggestion image ASG continues. As a result, even if the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed and a loss is confirmed, a winning effect is performed due to the swinging movement of the hit suggestion image ASG, and the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right It is possible to arouse a sense of expectation in the player that a performance in which all the decorative symbols 8R are the same and results in a win (big win or small win) may be developed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 185(H), when the hold icon 9B displayed at the first hold display position 9Bd moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the second hold icon 9B moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C. The hold icon 9B displayed at the hold display position 9Bd moves to the first hold display position 9Bd, and disappears from the second hold display position 9Bd. Furthermore, the number HMG represents the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special chart reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, respectively. The first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port 20 is zero and continues to be the blue number "0", and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is 1. The number changes to red number "1".

Even when the hold icon 9B displayed at the first hold display position 9Bd moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the swinging movement of the hit suggestion image ASG occurs. Since the game continues and the win confirmation effect can suddenly occur, it is possible to create a sense of expectation in the player that a win (big win or small win) will occur.

When the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, when the variable display of decorative symbols starts, as shown in FIG. 185(I), During the fluctuation, a winning confirmation effect suddenly occurs, and the winning suggestion image ASG jumps out of the rectangular area on the lower left side of the display screen 7a and moves to the center of the display screen 7a. Then, a display mode in which the winning suggestion image ASG flashes and moves toward the front from the center of the display screen 7a and pops out is repeatedly performed. When this winning confirmation effect occurs, the first hold display position 9Bd, the second hold display position 9Bd, the third hold display position 9Bd, the fourth hold display position 9Bd, and the hold display position 9Cd all disappear from the display screen 7a, The hold icon 9B displayed at the first hold display position 9Bd and the hold icon 9C displayed at the hold display position 9Cd also disappear from the display screen 7a. Further, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R also disappear from the display screen 7a, and the selection section SEL from which the production mode can be selected disappears from the display screen 7a. On the other hand, in the sub-fluctuation area where a small decorative pattern (not shown) provided in the upper center of the display screen 7a is displayed in a variable manner, the small decorative pattern does not disappear from the display screen 7a, and furthermore, the small decorative pattern does not disappear from the display screen 7a, and The first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 provided on the side and the second special pattern reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are respectively indicated by the numbers HMG (here In this case, the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 is zero and the blue number is "0", and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21. The red number "1") does not disappear from the display screen 7a.

Thereafter, the winning suggestion image ASG disappears from the display screen 7a, and as shown in FIG. are lined up and displayed in a line (left-right center line) connecting the midpoint of the left side and the midpoint of the right side. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed at the number "7", the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed at the number "7", and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed at the number "7", so that the same pattern The game is stopped and displayed, resulting in a win (big win or small win), and then a performance (big win performance or small win performance) based on the winning game (big win game or small win game) is started.

In FIG. 185 (J), the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are each indicated by numbers. HMG (Here, the first special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 is zero and the blue number is "0", and the second number based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is "0"). There is only one special drawing on hold, and the red number "1") is displayed as shown in FIG. 185(I). In addition, in FIG. 185 (J), the state in which the first hold display position 9Bd, the second hold display position 9Bd, the third hold display position 9Bd, the fourth hold display position 9Bd, and the hold display position 9Cd have all disappeared is shown in FIG. The figure shows a state in which the hold icon 9B that was displayed at the first hold display position 9Bd and the hold icon 9C that was displayed at the hold display position 9Cd have disappeared from the display screen 7a. 185(I). Further, in FIG. 185(J), the state in which the selection section SEL for selecting the production mode has disappeared is maintained as in FIG. 185(I).

In this way, the winning suggestion image ASG that suggests the existence of a win in the winning information of the pending icon 9B is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and then is displayed in a small size in the rectangular area on the lower left side of the display screen 7a, and the winning suggestion image ASG is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The rocking motion of the ASG is repeated. This can arouse the player's expectation that a win (big win or small win) will occur when the swing motion of the win suggestion image ASG starts within the rectangular area on the lower left side of the display screen 7a. You can improve your interest.

In addition, the first hold display position 9Bd, the second hold display position 9Bd, the third hold display position 9Bd, and the fourth hold display position 9Bd have white spherical hold icons with the lowest expectation of winning (big hit or small hit). Even if are displayed, when the swinging movement of the winning suggestion image ASG starts, a winning confirmation effect that notifies the player that a winning (big win or small win) will occur after the fluctuation ends. Since this can occur suddenly, it is possible to create a sense of expectation in the player that a win (big win or small win) will occur.

In addition, the winning/losing announcement tilt effect C is available in three effect modes (multiple effects Since this is a performance that is commonly performed in all three performance modes (a plurality of performance modes), the display mode of the swinging motion of the winning suggestion image ASG is a common display mode in the three production modes (a plurality of production modes). On the other hand, win/loss announcement tilting effect D, which will be described later, is an effect that is performed only in one effect mode (single effect mode), which is mode A only, so in one effect mode (single effect mode) The display mode of expansion motion of the winning suggestion image ASG, which will be described later, is a dedicated display mode that is different from the common display mode.

[Win/lose announcement direction D]
Next, the winning/losing announcement tilt effect D will be explained with reference to FIG. 186. FIG. 186 is a diagram for explaining the winning/losing announcement tilt effect D.

In the win/loss announcement tilt effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 186(A), on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a message is displayed on the display screen 7a of the jackpot effect (jackpot game) by performing the effects of each round game and completing all of them. At the end of the game production period and, accordingly, at the beginning of the notification period, a message MG "Continue right-handed hitting" is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in order to continue playing right-handed. In addition, the image display device displays the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special pattern reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 as numbers HMG. 7 is arranged and displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a. Here, the first special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 is zero and the blue number "0" is on the left, and the second special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is shown on the left. There are four reserved special drawings, and the red number "4" is arranged and displayed on the upper left side of the display screen 7a with the number "4" spaced apart from each other on the right side.

In addition, in the following description, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 after the display starts in FIG. 186(A).

In FIG. 186(A), when the notification period in which the message MG "Continue right-handed batting" is displayed comes to an end and the specific period begins, here, as described above, the game ball is not sent to the first starting port 20. The number of first special symbols reserved based on entering the ball is zero, which is the number "0", and the number of second special symbols reserved based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is four, so the second starting port If there is a hit (big hit or small hit) in the reservation information corresponding to the four second special figure reservations based on the game ball entering the ball into the 21, the display will be displayed as shown in FIG. 186(B). A flash image FH in which light is emitted from the center of the screen 7a in all directions is displayed on the display screen 7a, and then, as shown in FIG. A W-shaped winning suggestion image ASG is displayed in a large size at the center of the display screen 7a. The winning suggestion image ASG is displayed in a large size in the center of the display screen 7a with its front side facing forward of the gaming machine 1. In addition, whether or not there is a hit (big hit or small hit) in the hold information corresponding to the four second special figure holds based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is determined by the advance judgment command. The determination is made based on the jackpot preliminary determination result (in the case of a jackpot, the jackpot type preliminary determination result), and the fluctuation pattern preliminary determination result, which are included in the.

In addition, if there is no hit (big hit or small hit) in the hold information corresponding to the four second special figure holds based on the entry of game balls into the second starting port 21 during the specific period, the figure The flash image FH shown in FIG. 186(B) is not displayed on the display screen 7a, and furthermore, the hit suggestion image ASG shown in FIG. 186(C) is not displayed on the display screen 7a. In this case (that is, when there is no hit (big hit or small hit) in the reservation information corresponding to the four second special figure reservations based on the entry of game balls into the second starting port 21 during the specific period, ), the winning/losing announcement tilting effect D is not performed, and the decorative symbols start to fluctuate.

Thereafter, at the end of the specific period, as shown in FIG. 186(D), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern of the stereoscopic image. A variable display of decorative symbols (symbols: numbers "1" to "9") is started in a display mode in which the reels rotate from the upper side of the display screen 7a to the lower side of the display screen 7a. When the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern is started, the decorative pattern that has been stopped and displayed changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed, resulting in a display mode that fluctuates at a high speed. Thereby, the background image placed behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. Immediately before stopping, the decorative pattern decelerates and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed (temporarily stopped and then stopped). In addition, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, it is displayed in a display mode in which it slowly moves slowly in the vertical direction.

When the variable display of decorative patterns (designs: numbers "1" to "9") starts in FIG. 186(D), they are displayed in a large size in the center of the display screen 7a in FIG. 186(C). The hit suggestion image ASG that has been displayed is displayed in a small size in a rectangular area on the lower left side of the display screen 7a. The size of the rectangular area on the lower left side of this display screen 7a is larger than the size of the white spherical pending icon 9C displayed at the pending display position 9Cd, and includes the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern. It is small compared to the size of each pattern 8R. At this time, the winning suggestion image ASG is first displayed in a rectangular area on the lower left side of the display screen 7a with its front side facing forward of the gaming machine 1, and then, during the fluctuation, the winning suggestion image ASG expands. This is a mode in which the action of returning to the original size is repeated (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "expansion movement of the winning suggestion image ASG"). When the expansion movement of the hit suggestion image ASG is suddenly stopped, the hit suggestion image ASG jumps out of the rectangular area on the lower left side of the display screen 7a and moves to the center of the display screen 7a. Then, a winning confirmation effect is performed in which a display mode in which the winning suggestion image ASG flashes and moves toward the front from the center of the display screen 7a and pops out is repeated. This win confirmation performance is a performance that notifies the player that a win (big win or small win) will occur after the end of the fluctuation. For this reason, when the expansion movement of the winning suggestion image ASG starts, a winning confirmation effect can suddenly occur, giving the player a sense of expectation that a winning (big win or small win) will occur. It is now possible to fan the flames.

Although not shown in the upper center of the display screen 7a, a sub-variation area is provided in which small decorative symbols corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R are displayed in a varying manner. The small decorative pattern is always in an opaque state, does not become translucent even when fluctuation starts, and does not disappear from the display screen 7a. When the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R start to be displayed in a variable manner, small-sized objects corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, respectively, are displayed in the sub-variable area. The decorative patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are all stopped and displayed, and at the same time, all the corresponding small-sized decorative patterns are also stopped and displayed. A state in which one or more of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are the same pattern, temporarily stopped, and displayed, and reach is reached. Even if the corresponding small decorative pattern (for example, the left decorative pattern 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed), the small decorative pattern corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L and the right decorative pattern 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed. Even if the right decorative pattern 8R and the corresponding small decorative pattern) are all kept in a variable display state. In addition, when the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed and they are not aligned in the same pattern and are out of alignment, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern Each small decorative pattern corresponding to 8C and right decorative pattern 8R may be the same pattern as each of the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R, or may be a completely different pattern. good. In addition, if the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R are all stopped and displayed, and if they are aligned in the same pattern and it is a jackpot, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C , the small decorative patterns corresponding to the right decorative pattern 8R are aligned to the same pattern as the left decorative pattern 8L, the medium decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R.

The pending icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R that are currently changing as the second special pattern pending is displayed at the bottom center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. is displayed at the corresponding pending display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the right side of the hold display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as a second special figure hold. In this hold display area, hold icons 9B can be displayed at four hold display positions 9Bd (above the rectangular image), so that a maximum of four hold icons 9B can be stocked. The four hold display positions 9Bd are arranged from a position close to the hold display position 9Cd toward the right side of the display screen 7a: a first hold display position 9Bd, a second hold display position 9Bd, a third hold display position 9Bd, and a fourth hold display position 9Bd. They are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a in the order of pending display position 9Bd.

Note that when the hold icon 9B displayed at the first hold display position 9Bd moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the size of the hold icon 9C is the same as the hold icon immediately before the movement. It is about 1.5 times the size of the pending icon 9B, and the shape and color of the pending icon 9C indicate to the player the degree of expectation of winning for the pending icon 9C. On the other hand, when the hold icon 9B displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Bd moves to the third hold display position 9Bd, the hold icon 9B displayed at the third hold display position 9Bd moves to the second hold display position 9Bd. When moving to position 9Bd, when the hold icon 9B displayed at the second hold display position 9Bd moves to the first hold display position 9Bd, except when the shape of the hold icon 9A changes to another shape. Therefore, the size of each pending icon 9B is the same as the size of the pending icon 9B immediately before the movement.

Here, the white spherical hold icon 9C is displayed at the hold display position 9Cd, and the white spherical hold icon 9C is displayed at the first hold display position 9Bd, the second hold display position 9Bd, and the third hold display position 9Bd. 9B are displayed, and the hold icon 9B is not displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Bd. In other words, the three pending icons 9B, 9B, and 9B are in a stocked state without being consumed.

In addition, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, which was displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 during the variable display of decorative patterns. , in addition to the holding icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure holding based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, as described above, the holding icon 9B corresponding to the second special drawing holding based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20. The first special figure reservation and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are respectively arranged and displayed as numbers HMG on the upper left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Here, the number HMG represents the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special pattern reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, respectively. The first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 continues to be zero and becomes the blue number "0", and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21. becomes 3 and changes to the red number "3".

Here, to briefly explain the pending icon 9B and the pending icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "pending icon"), the difference in shape and color determines the expectation of winning at the lottery corresponding to the pending icon. represents the difference between For example, among the four hold icons: a yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon, a black spherical hold icon, a smiling sphere hold icon, and a white spherical hold icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon is the most The expectation of winning is high, the black spherical pending icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling spherical pending icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical pending icon has the lowest expectation of winning. It has become a thing. The smiling sphere pending icon is further set with a high expectation of winning a jackpot in the following order: blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (strong jackpot)).

In FIG. 186(D), when the variable display of the decorative patterns (designs: numbers "1" to "9") starts, the display mode is displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. A selection section SEL is arranged and displayed. In the selection section SEL, production modes consisting of A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode are displayed in a manner in which the reels rotate, and each time the production button 63 is operated (pressed), the reels rotate. By doing so, the production mode that has reached the specific area is displayed larger than other production modes. The performance mode located in this specific area becomes the selected performance mode. Here, since the performance mode selected during the fluctuation of the decorative symbols before winning/losing announcement tilting performance D is performed, that is, before the jackpot performance (jackpot game) is A mode, which will be described later, the theme image of this A mode is shown. Although not shown in the figure, it is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

In addition, the period during which the selection mode can be selected is limited to the period when the decorative pattern starts to fluctuate, and the "Change mode with production button" notification that the production mode can be changed by operating (pressing) the production button 63 is displayed. Although this message is placed and displayed at a predetermined position (e.g., lower right side) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 for a predetermined period (e.g., 3 seconds), the winning/losing announcement tilt effect D is not performed. In this state, the selection mode cannot be selected at all. In other words, when the winning/losing announcement tilting performance D is performed, the performance mode selected during the fluctuation of the decorative symbols before the winning/losing announcing tilting performance D is performed, that is, before the jackpot performance (jackpot game) is performed, is the winning/losing announcement tilting performance D. The situation will continue even in .

Here, the A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode that constitute the production mode will be briefly explained.

In mode A, a performance with the theme of "sun" is performed, and a theme image imitating the "sun" is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the player operates (presses) the production button 63 while the A mode is located in the specific area of the selection part SEL, the A mode located in the specific area of the selection part SEL moves downward, and the A mode is activated. The D mode, which is placed below the , is displayed in a manner in which the reels rotate from the bottom to the top, and the B mode, which is placed above the A mode, is displayed in a manner in which the reels rotate from the top toward a specific area. Is displayed.

In mode B, a performance with the theme of "clouds" is performed, and a theme image imitating "clouds" is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the player operates (presses) the production button 63 while the B mode is located in the specific area of the selection part SEL, the B mode located in the specific area of the selection part SEL moves downward, and the B mode is activated. The A mode placed below is displayed in a manner in which the reels rotate from the bottom to the top, and the C mode placed above the B mode is displayed in a manner in which the reels rotate from above toward a specific area. Is displayed.

In the C mode, a performance with the theme of "rain" is performed, and a theme image imitating "rain" is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the player operates (presses) the production button 63 in a state where the C mode is located in a specific area of the selection part SEL, the C mode located in the specific area of the selection part SEL moves downward, thereby changing to the C mode. B mode, which is placed below, is displayed with the reels rotating from the bottom to the top, and D mode, which is placed above the C mode, is displayed with the reels rotating from above toward a specific area. Is displayed.

In the D mode, a performance with the theme of "snow" is advanced, and a theme image imitating "snow" is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. When the player operates (presses) the production button 63 while the D mode is located in a specific area of the selection part SEL, the D mode located in the specific area of the selection part SEL moves downward, and the D mode is activated. The C mode located below is displayed in a manner in which the reels rotate from the bottom to the top, and the A mode located above the D mode is displayed in a manner in which the reels rotate from above toward a specific area. The A mode is displayed again in a display mode located in the specific area.

In addition, the winning/losing announcement tilt effect D is an effect that is performed only in one effect mode (single effect mode) that is only A mode among the A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode that constitute the effect modes. . On the other hand, the above-mentioned winning/losing announcement tilting performance C is a performance that is performed in common in three performance modes (a plurality of performance modes), excluding A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 186(E), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are arranged in their respective variable display areas to match the midpoint of the left side and the midpoint of the right side of the display screen 7a. They are lined up and displayed in a line connecting them (center line in the left and right direction). Here, the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed at the number "1", the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed at the number "2", and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed at the number "3", resulting in a miss. . Note that even in the state where the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed, the expansion movement of the winning suggestion image ASG continues. As a result, even if the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed and a win is confirmed, the winning suggestion image ASG is displayed, so the expansion movement of the winning suggestion image ASG is started, and then the winning confirmation effect is performed. To arouse the expectation in the player that by being hit, an effect may be developed in which the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all the same pattern and hit (big hit or small hit). I can do it.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 186(F), when the hold icon 9B displayed at the first hold display position 9Bd moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the second hold icon 9B moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C. The hold icon 9B displayed at the hold display position 9Bd moves to the first hold display position 9Bd, the hold icon 9B displayed at the third hold display position 9Bd moves to the second hold display position 9Bd, and the hold icon 9B displayed at the third hold display position 9Bd moves to the third hold display position 9Bd. The hold icon 9B disappears from the hold display position 9Bd. Furthermore, the number HMG represents the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special chart reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, respectively. The first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port 20 is zero and continues to be the blue number "0", and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is 2. The number becomes RO and changes to the red number "2".

When the hold icon 9B displayed at the first hold display position 9Bd moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the variable display of decorative symbols starts, the expansion movement of the hit suggestion image ASG is performed. . This makes it possible for a win confirmation effect to suddenly occur, thereby creating a sense of expectation in the player that a win (big win or small win) will occur.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 186(G), the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are arranged in their respective variable display areas at the midpoint of the left side and the midpoint of the right side of the display screen 7a. They are lined up and displayed in a line connecting them (center line in the left and right direction). Here, the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed at the number "2", the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed at the number "3", and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed at the number "4", resulting in a miss. . Note that by the time the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the expansion movement of the winning suggestion image ASG has finished and the winning suggestion image ASG has returned to its original size. As a result, even if the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed and a win is confirmed, the winning suggestion image ASG is displayed, so the expansion movement of the winning suggestion image ASG is started, and then the winning confirmation effect is performed. To arouse the expectation in the player that by being hit, an effect may be developed in which the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R are all the same pattern and hit (big hit or small hit). I can do it.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 186(H), when the hold icon 9B displayed at the first hold display position 9Bd moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the second hold icon 9B moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C. The hold icon 9B displayed at the hold display position 9Bd moves to the first hold display position 9Bd, and disappears from the second hold display position 9Bd. Furthermore, the number HMG represents the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special chart reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, respectively. The first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port 20 is zero and continues to be the blue number "0", and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is 1. The number changes to red number "1".

When the hold icon 9B displayed at the first hold display position 9Bd moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the variable display of decorative symbols starts, the expansion movement of the hit suggestion image ASG is performed. . This makes it possible for a win confirmation effect to suddenly occur, thereby creating a sense of expectation in the player that a win (big win or small win) will occur.

When the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, when the variable display of decorative symbols starts, as shown in FIG. 186(I), During the fluctuation, a winning confirmation effect suddenly occurs, and the winning suggestion image ASG jumps out of the rectangular area on the lower left side of the display screen 7a and moves to the center of the display screen 7a. Then, a display mode in which the winning suggestion image ASG flashes and moves toward the front from the center of the display screen 7a and pops out is repeatedly performed. When this winning confirmation effect occurs, the first hold display position 9Bd, the second hold display position 9Bd, the third hold display position 9Bd, the fourth hold display position 9Bd, and the hold display position 9Cd all disappear from the display screen 7a, The hold icon 9B displayed at the first hold display position 9Bd and the hold icon 9C displayed at the hold display position 9Cd also disappear from the display screen 7a. Further, the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R also disappear from the display screen 7a, and the selection section SEL from which the production mode can be selected disappears from the display screen 7a. On the other hand, in the sub-fluctuation area where a small decorative pattern (not shown) provided in the upper center of the display screen 7a is displayed in a variable manner, the small decorative pattern does not disappear from the display screen 7a, and furthermore, the small decorative pattern does not disappear from the display screen 7a, and The first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 provided on the side and the second special pattern reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are respectively indicated by the numbers HMG (here In this case, the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 is zero and the blue number is "0", and the second special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21. The red number "1") does not disappear from the display screen 7a.

Thereafter, the winning suggestion image ASG disappears from the display screen 7a, and as shown in FIG. are lined up and displayed in a line (left-right center line) connecting the midpoint of the left side and the midpoint of the right side. Here, the left decorative pattern 8L is stopped and displayed at the number "7", the middle decorative pattern 8C is stopped and displayed at the number "7", and the right decorative pattern 8R is displayed at the number "7", so that the same pattern The game is stopped and displayed, resulting in a win (big win or small win), and then a performance (big win performance or small win performance) based on the winning game (big win game or small win game) is started.

In FIG. 186 (J), the first special figure reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the second special pattern reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are each indicated by a number. HMG (Here, the first special symbol reservation based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 is zero and the blue number is "0", and the second number based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 is "0"). There is only one special drawing on hold, and the red number "1") is displayed as shown in FIG. 186(I). In addition, in FIG. 186(J), the state in which the first hold display position 9Bd, the second hold display position 9Bd, the third hold display position 9Bd, the fourth hold display position 9Bd, and the hold display position 9Cd have all disappeared is shown in FIG. The figure shows a state in which the hold icon 9B that was displayed at the first hold display position 9Bd and the hold icon 9C that was displayed at the hold display position 9Cd have disappeared from the display screen 7a. 186(I). Further, in FIG. 186(J), the state in which the selection section SEL for selecting the production mode has disappeared is maintained as in FIG. 186(I).

In addition, in A mode, when the end of the notification period in which the message MG "Continue right-handed hitting" is displayed in FIG. Even if there is a hit (big hit or small hit) in the reservation information (four reservation icons 9B, 9B, 9B, 9B) corresponding to the four second special figure reservations based on the ball, there will be no hit (jackpot). There are cases where the winning suggestion image ASG having a three-dimensional W-shape suggesting the existence of a small winning or a small winning is not displayed at all on the display screen 7a. In this case, while the decorative pattern is changing, the effect button image imitating the effect button 63 is not displayed on the display screen 7a at all, and the announcement "Please operate the effect button" is not heard from the speaker 67 at all. In other words, when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 a predetermined number of times even though no effect is performed to prompt the user to operate (press) the effect button 63, the background image is displayed. An image having seven colors (a so-called "rainbow image") is displayed on the display screen 7a, and a "win confirmation effect using the effect button" is performed in which a character is displayed in a large size in the center of the display screen 7a. In other words, the "win confirmation performance using the performance button" is such that when the number of operations (pressing operations) of the performance button 63 reaches a predetermined number of times in a state where no performance that prompts the operation (pressing operation) of the performance button 63 is performed, So-called "hidden commands" can be generated and executed. This "winning confirmation performance using the performance button" is a performance that notifies the player that a win (big win or small win) will occur thereafter. The rainbow image is a specific image and is a background image that announces a confirmed win.

The "predetermined number of times" includes 1 time, 3 times, 5 times, 7 times, 9 times, 11 times, 13 times, 15 times, 17 times, 19 times, 21 times, and 23 times. It is set by lottery in (image control microcomputer 101). In other words, even if the number of times the player operates (presses) the performance button 63 reaches 23 times, if the "win-confirming performance using the performance button" is not performed, the game becomes a loss. For example, when the hold icon 9B is displayed at each of the first hold display position 9Bd to the fourth hold display position 9Bd, the hold icon 9B displayed at the first hold display position 9Bd (win/loss information is ) becomes the pending icon 9C, even if the player operates (presses) the performance button 63, the "win-confirming performance using the performance button" will not be performed and the result will be a loss. When the pending icon 9B (win/loss information is a hit (big win or small win)) displayed at the third pending display position 9Bd becomes the pending icon 9C, the performance control microcomputer 91 (image control microcomputer 101) is set to 17 times, and when the number of times the player operates (presses) the performance button 63 reaches 17 times, a "win confirmation performance using the performance button" is performed, It becomes a hit (big hit or small hit).

The "hit confirmation performance using the performance button" is a special performance that is performed only when the A mode is selected, and is the end of the notification period in which the message MG "Continue hitting right" is displayed in Fig. 186 (A). At the start of the specific period, the player hits the reservation information (four reservation icons 9B, 9B, 9B, 9B) corresponding to the four second special symbol reservations based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 (jackpot). Even if there is a win (big win or small win), the win suggestion image ASG having a three-dimensional W-shape that suggests the existence of a win (big win or small win) is not displayed on the display screen 7a at all. In addition, the reservation information (four reservation icons 9B, 9B, 9B, 9B) corresponding to the four second special figure reservations is digested as the corresponding reservation icon 9C, and the game is sent to the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21. This may be done when the ball enters the ball.

In other words, in the A mode, when the end of the notification period in which the message MG "Continue right-handed hitting" is displayed in FIG. Even if there is a hit (big hit or small hit) in the reservation information (four reservation icons 9B, 9B, 9B, 9B) corresponding to the four second special figure reservations based on the ball entry, the winning ( If the winning suggestion image ASG, which has a three-dimensional W-shape that suggests the existence of a jackpot or small win, is not displayed at all on the display screen 7a, when the player operates (presses) the production button 63, the But when the end of the notification period and the beginning of the specific period in which the message MG "Continue hitting right" is displayed in FIG. 186(A), the second starting gate When there is a hit (big hit or small hit) in the hold information (4 hold icons 9B, 9B, 9B, 9B) corresponding to the 4 second special figure hold based on the game ball entering the ball into 21. If the winning suggestion image ASG, which has a three-dimensional W-shape that suggests the existence of a winning (big win or small win), is displayed in a large size in the center of the display screen 7a, the player presses the performance button 63. No matter how many times you operate (press the button), the ``winning confirmation effect using the effect button'' is blocked and the winning/losing announcement tailgating effect D is proceeded.

In addition, in the C mode, when the end of the notification period in which the message MG "Continue right-handed hitting" is displayed in FIG. If there is a hit (big hit or small hit) in the hold information (four hold icons 9B, 9B, 9B, 9B) corresponding to the four second special figure holds based on the ball, a hit (big hit or small hit) ) is displayed on the display screen 7a or is not displayed at all, even if the winning suggestion image ASG having a three-dimensional W-shape suggesting the existence of An effect is performed in which an effect button image imitating the effect button 63 is displayed on the display screen 7a to prompt the user to operate (press) the effect button 63. This point differs from mode A. When the player operates (presses) the production button 63, an image having seven colors as a background image (a so-called "rainbow image") is displayed on the display screen 7a, and a character is displayed in a large size in the center of the display screen 7a. In some cases, a ``win confirmation effect using the effect button'' may be performed. This "winning confirmation performance using the performance button" is a performance that notifies the player that a win (big win or small win) will occur thereafter. The rainbow image is a specific image and is a background image that announces a confirmed win.

In this way, the winning suggestion image ASG that suggests the existence of a win in the winning information of the pending icon 9B is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and then is displayed in a small size in the rectangular area on the lower left side of the display screen 7a, and the winning suggestion image ASG is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The expansion movement of the ASG is repeated. This can arouse the player's expectation that a hit (big hit or small hit) will occur when the expansion movement of the winning suggestion image ASG starts within the rectangular area on the lower left side of the display screen 7a. It is possible to improve the

In addition, the first hold display position 9Bd, the second hold display position 9Bd, the third hold display position 9Bd, and the fourth hold display position 9Bd have white spherical hold icons with the lowest expectation of winning (big hit or small hit). Even if these are displayed, when the expansion movement of the winning suggestion image ASG starts, a winning confirmation effect will be performed to notify the player that a winning (big win or small win) will occur after the fluctuation ends. Since it can occur suddenly, it is possible to create a sense of expectation in the player that a win (big win or small win) will occur.

In addition, as described above, the winning/losing announcement tilt effect C shown in FIG. Since this is a performance that is performed in common in the three performance modes (multiple performance modes), the display mode of the swinging movement of the winning suggestion image ASG is the common display mode in the three performance modes (multiple performance modes). ing. On the other hand, the winning/losing announcement trick effect D is an effect that is performed only in one effect mode (single effect mode) that is only mode A, so it is possible to suggest a win in one effect mode (single effect mode). The display mode of the expansion motion of the image ASG is a dedicated display mode that is different from the common display mode.

[Effect example]
Below is an example of the effect of the win/lose announcement effect.
[Effect 1]
The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment includes an image display device 7 (display means) capable of displaying a plurality of types of images, as shown in FIGS. In preparation, the win/win suggestion image ASG (win/win image) having a three-dimensional W-shape that suggests the existence of a win (including a win) is displayed on the image display device 7 in the win/win information (prior judgment command) of the pending icon 9A. A first effect is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a (a predetermined position of the display means), and after the first effect, the display mode of the winning suggestion image ASG (win/loss image) is repeatedly varied (the display mode of the winning suggestion image ASG is changed). A second effect of starting a rocking movement) can be executed. According to this configuration, the winning suggestion image ASG (winning/losing image) that suggests the existence of a winning in the winning/losing information of the pending icon 9A is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the winning suggesting image ASG (winning/losing image) The display mode of is repeatedly varied. This can arouse the player's expectation that a win (big win or small win) will occur when the swing motion of the win suggestion image ASG starts in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. , it is possible to improve interest.
In the winning/losing announcement tilt effect B of FIG. 184, a winning/losing suggestion image ASG (winning/losing image) that suggests the existence of a winning in the winning/losing information of the pending icon 9A is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and a winning/losing suggestion image ASG The display mode of (winning/losing images) is repeatedly varied. This can arouse the player's sense of expectation that a win (big win or small win) will occur when the expansion movement of the win suggestion image ASG starts, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.
The winning/losing announcement tilt effect C in FIG. 185 is equipped with an image display device 7 (display means) capable of displaying a plurality of types of images, and the winning/losing information (pre-judgment command) of the pending icon 9B indicates the existence of a winning (a winning is included). After displaying a winning suggestion image ASG (winning/losing image) having a three-dimensional W-shape suggesting that A first effect that is displayed in a small size (at a predetermined position on the display means) within a rectangular area of A second effect of starting a rocking movement) can be executed. According to this configuration, after the winning suggestion image ASG (winning/losing image) suggesting the existence of a winning in the winning/losing information of the pending icon 9B is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the display screen of the image display device 7 is displayed. It is displayed in a small size in a rectangular area on the lower left side of 7a, and the display mode of the winning suggestion image ASG (winning/losing image) is repeatedly varied. This gives the player a sense of expectation that a hit (big hit or small hit) will occur when the swing motion of the hit suggestion image ASG starts within the rectangular area on the lower left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is possible to stimulate the audience and improve interest.
In the winning/losing announcement tilt effect D in FIG. 186, a winning/losing suggestion image ASG (winning/losing image) suggesting the existence of a winning in the winning/losing information of the pending icon 9B is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and then the image display device 7 is displayed in a small rectangular area on the lower left side of the display screen 7a, and the display mode of the winning suggestion image ASG (winning/losing image) is repeatedly varied. This arouses the player's expectation that a hit (big win or small win) will occur as the expansion movement of the hit suggestion image ASG starts within the rectangular area on the lower left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. You can improve your interest.

[Effect 2]
The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment is provided with a performance button 63 (operating means) that can be operated by the player in, for example, the win/loss announcement tilt performance A in FIG. 183 and the win/loss announcement tilt performance B in FIG. One of the multiple types of presentation modes (A mode, B mode, C mode, D mode) can be selected by operating (pressing) the operating means). B mode, C mode, D mode), the display mode of the winning suggestion image ASG (winning/losing image) that is varied by the second effect in a specific effect mode (A mode) (in the winning/losing announcement tilting effect B in FIG. 184) The expansion movement of the winning suggestion image ASG) and the second effect in other production modes (B mode, C mode, D mode) excluding a specific production mode (A mode) ) is different from the display mode (oscillating movement of the winning suggestion image ASG in the winning/losing announcement tilt effect A in FIG. 183). According to this configuration, among the plurality of types of presentation modes (A mode, B mode, C mode, D mode), it is variable by the second presentation in other presentation modes (B mode, C mode, D mode). The display mode of the winning suggestion image ASG (winning/losing image) is a commonly used common display mode, whereas the display mode of the winning suggestion image ASG (win/loss image) is changed by the second production in a specific production mode (A mode). The display mode of the ASG (winning/losing image) is a dedicated display mode that is different from the common display mode. As a result, the display mode of the winning suggestion image ASG (win/loss image) can be set to a dedicated display mode only in a specific production mode among multiple types of production modes, so that it is provided to the player as a rare production that rarely appears. be able to.
The same applies to the win/loss announcement tilt effect C in FIG. 185 and the win/loss announcement tilt effect D in FIG. 186.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the win/loss announcement tilt effect A shown in FIG. 183 and the win/loss announcement twist effect B shown in FIG. The display mode of the ASG (winning/losing image) is to repeat the action of expanding in a predetermined direction as a specific action and then returning to the original state (the expansion movement of the winning/losing suggestion image ASG in the winning/losing notification tilt effect B in FIG. 184). The display mode of the winning suggestion image ASG (winning/losing image), which is changed by the second performance in the performance mode (B mode, C mode, D mode), is a reciprocating rotation in a predetermined direction (in a predetermined direction) as an action different from a specific action. This is to repeat the movement of the winning/losing suggestion image ASG in the winning/losing notification tilt effect A of FIG. 183). According to this configuration, the display mode of the winning suggestion image ASG (winning/losing image) in the specific presentation mode (A mode) is such that the expansion movement (specific motion) of the winning suggestion image ASG is repeated. It is possible to repeatedly give the player the opportunity to visually confirm the expansion movement (specific motion) of the winning suggestion image ASG, and the display mode of the winning suggestion image ASG (win/loss image) in other performance modes is similar to that of the winning suggestion image. By using a display mode that repeats the rocking motion of the ASG (an action different from a specific action), the player is given an opportunity to visually check the rocking motion of the winning suggestion image ASG (an action different from a specific action). Can be given repeatedly. Thereby, the player can easily confirm the display mode of the winning suggestion image ASG (winning/losing image) in each selection mode.
The same applies to the winning/losing announcement tilting performance C in FIG. 185 and the winning/losing announcement tilting performance D in FIG. 186.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in a specific performance mode (A mode) in the win/loss announcement tilt performance B shown in FIG. It is possible to execute a "winning confirmation effect using the effect button" (third effect) in which a rainbow image (specific image) announcing the winning is displayed on the image display device 7 (display means), and a winning suggestion image ASG (win/loss image) is executed. After the first effect of displaying on the image display device 7 (display means), the "win confirmation effect using the effect button" (third effect) is blocked and the expansion movement of the winning suggestion image ASG (second effect) is stopped. executed. According to this configuration, in a state in which the winning suggestion image ASG (winning/losing image) is displayed on the image display device 7 in a specific performance mode (A mode), the player operates (presses) the performance button 63 (operation means) Even if the winning suggestion image ASG is expanded (the second effect), the player feels uneasy because the "win confirmation effect using the effect button" is not performed even if the player presses the effect button. It is possible to create a sense of expectation in the player that a win (big win or small win) will occur.
The same applies to the winning/losing announcement tilt effect D in FIG. 186.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the winning/losing announcement tilt effect A shown in FIG. Selection of one of the multiple types of presentation modes (A mode, B mode, C mode, D mode) by operation of 63 (operating means) is prevented. According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent a change in the performance mode in the second performance that is performed after the first performance and repeatedly changes the display mode of the winning/losing image.
The same applies to the winning/losing announcement tilting performance B in FIG. 184, the winning/losing announcing tilting performance C in FIG. 185, and the winning/losing announcement tilting performance D in FIG. 186.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, in the win/loss announcement tilt performance A in FIG. 183 and the win/loss announcement tilt performance B in FIG. 184, the second The image display device 7 displays the winning/losing image that is varied by the performance or the winning/losing image that is varied by the second performance in other performance modes (B mode, C mode, D mode) in the winning/losing announcement tilting performance A in FIG. 183. It is possible to execute a fourth performance in which the winning notification display mode is changed by moving the (display means) from a predetermined position to another position to notify a winning. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 183(H) of winning/losing announcement tilting effect A, the winning suggestion image is changed by the second effect in another effect mode (B mode (the same applies to C mode and D mode)). The ASG (winning/losing image) is a display that pops out from the center (predetermined position) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 toward the front (another position) while emitting flashing light as a winning notification display mode. Repeat the process. As shown in FIG. 184(I) of winning/losing announcement tilt effect B, the winning/losing suggestion image ASG (winning/losing image) that is varied by the second effect in a specific presentation mode (A mode) is a flashing light as a winning/losing announcement display mode. A display mode in which the robot moves from the center (predetermined position) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 toward the front (another position) and pops out while emitting is repeatedly performed. According to this configuration, the display mode can be such that a win (big win or small win) suddenly occurs, so the sudden display mode that announces a win (big win or small win) can prevent the player from feeling shocked. can.
In the winning/losing announcement tilting performance C of FIG. 185 and the winning/losing announcement tilting performance D of FIG. 186, as shown in FIG. 185(H) and FIG. The winning suggestion image ASG (winning/losing image), which is varied by the second effect in the mode and D mode), is displayed in a rectangular area (the first (predetermined position), moves to the center of the display screen 7a, and moves toward the front (another position) from the center (second predetermined position) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 while emitting a flash of light. The display mode moves and pops out repeatedly. As shown in FIGS. 186 (H) and 186 (I) of the winning/losing announcement tilt effect D, the winning/losing suggestion image ASG (winning/losing image) that is varied by the second effect in a specific presentation mode (A mode) is As a notification display mode, the display screen of the image display device 7 jumps out from the rectangular area (first predetermined position) on the lower left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, moves to the center of the display screen 7a, and emits a flash. A display mode in which the display moves from the center (second predetermined position) of 7a toward the front (another position) and pops out is repeatedly performed. According to this configuration, the display mode can be such that a win (big win or small win) suddenly occurs, so the sudden display mode that announces a win (big win or small win) can prevent the player from feeling shocked. can.

[Modified example]
A modified example of the winning/losing announcement presentation is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the winning/losing announcement tilting effect A of FIG. 183, the winning/losing announcement tilting effect B of FIG. 184, the winning/losing announcement tilting effect C of FIG. ) was repeatedly changed. At this time, a period may be provided in which the display mode is repeatedly varied while the win suggestion image ASG (win or loss image) flashes. Making the player always aware of the winning suggestion image ASG (winning/losing image) may make the player tired. On the other hand, when the timing (period) to turn your eyes to the winning suggestion image ASG (winning/losing image) has arrived, the winning suggesting image ASG (winning/losing image) repeatedly changes the display mode while emitting a flash to indicate that. Since it is possible to suggest to the player, there is no need to constantly make the player conscious of the winning suggestion image ASG (win/loss image), and fatigue for the player can be suppressed.

[Modification 2]
In the winning/losing announcement tilting effect A of FIG. 183, the winning/losing announcement tilting effect B of FIG. 184, the winning/losing announcement tilting effect C of FIG. As a winning notification display mode, a display mode in which a winning/losing image) flashes and moves toward the front from the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and pops out is repeatedly performed. However, even when not announcing a win (big win or small win), a display mode in which a flash of light is emitted while moving toward the front from the center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and pops out is displayed once or multiple times. The display mode may be returned to the original display mode after repeating the process only once (for example, 3 to 5 times). For example, in the winning/losing announcement tilting effect A of FIG. 183, the winning/losing suggestion image ASG (winning/losing image) is returned from the display mode of FIG. , In the winning/losing announcement tilt effect B of FIG. 184, the winning/losing suggestion image ASG (winning/losing image) is returned from the display mode of FIG. 185, in the winning/losing announcement tilting effect C, the winning/losing suggestion image ASG (winning/losing image) is returned from the display mode of FIG. In the winning/losing announcement tilt effect D, the winning suggesting image ASG (winning/losing image) is returned from the display mode of FIG. 186(I) to that of FIG. 186(D), and the expansion movement of the winning suggesting image ASG is restarted. In this way, the player can be made to think for a moment that it is an announcement of a win (big win or small win).

[Modification 3]
In the winning/losing announcement tilting effect C in FIG. 185 and the winning/losing announcement tilting effect D in FIG. On the upper right side of 7a, a selection section SEL from which a performance mode can be selected was arranged and displayed. However, in FIGS. 185(A) and 186(A), at the end of the notification period in which the message MG "Continue right-handed hitting" is displayed and at the beginning of the specific period, the game ball will not enter the second starting port 21. If there is a hit (big hit or small hit) in the reservation information (four reservation icons 9B, 9B, 9B, 9B) corresponding to the four second special figure reservations based on the ball entry, select the selection section SEL. The display mode may be hidden so that the production mode cannot be selected. This is because when the winning/losing announcement tilting performance C in FIG. 185 and the winning/losing announcement tilting performance D in FIG. 186 are performed, no performance mode can be selected in the first place, so there is no problem even if the selection section SEL is hidden. In this case, only the currently selected production mode may be displayed.

[Modification 4]
In the winning/losing announcement tilting performance A in FIG. 183, the winning/losing announcement tilting performance B in FIG. 184, the winning/losing announcement tilting performance C in FIG. 185, and the winning/losing announcement tilting performance D in FIG. It was possible to select one of the production modes (A mode, B mode, C mode, D mode). However, the sword button 65 of the sword member 64 may be used instead of the production button 63. Even with this configuration, the same effect as the operation (pressing operation) of the production button 63 can be achieved by operating the sword button 65 (pressing operation or pressing operation).

[Modification 5]
The winning/losing announcement tilting performance A in FIG. 183, the winning/losing announcement tilting performance B in FIG. 184, the winning/losing announcement tilting performance C in FIG. 185, and the winning/losing announcement tilting performance D in FIG. 186 may not include some of the described performances. However, other effects may be added.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect J1-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images,
A first performance that displays a win/win image that suggests the existence of a win in the win/win information of the pending icon;
After the first performance, it is possible to perform a second performance in which the display mode of the winning/losing image is repeatedly varied;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect J1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect J1-1,
Equipped with operation means that can be operated by the player,
One of a plurality of types of presentation modes can be selected by operating the operating means,
Among the plurality of types of performance modes, the display mode of the winning/losing image is variable by the second performance in a specific performance mode, and the display mode is variable by the second performance in other performance modes other than the specific performance mode. The display mode of the winning/losing image is different,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect J1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect J1-2,
The display mode of the winning/losing image that is varied by the second performance in the specific performance mode is such that a specific operation is repeated;
The display mode of the winning/losing image that is varied by the second performance in the other performance mode is such that an action different from the specific action is repeated;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect J1-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect J1-2 or aspect J1-3,
In the specific effect mode, when the number of operations of the operating means reaches a predetermined number of times, a third effect can be executed in which a specific image announcing a confirmed win is displayed;
After the first performance, the third performance is blocked and the second performance is executed;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect J1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects J1-2 to J1-4,
After the first performance, selection of one of the plurality of performance modes by operation of the operating means is prevented;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇[Aspect J1-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects J1-2 to J1-5,
A win is achieved by moving the winning image that is varied by the second performance in the specific performance mode or the winning image that is varied by the second performance in the other performance mode from a predetermined position to another position. It is possible to execute a fourth effect that changes the winning notification display mode to be announced.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Character selection effects A to D will be explained below using FIGS. 187 to 190. This character selection performance can be executed during the variation performance of the performance symbols. That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variable effect start command received from the sub-control board 90, and if it contains an instruction to execute a character selection effect, reads the corresponding image data from the ROM 103 and displays it on the main display device. This is an effect that displays an image on the display screen 7a of 7.

[Character selection performance A]
FIG. 187 is a diagram for explaining character selection effect A.
First, as shown in FIG. 187(A), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, it is shown how the left performance symbol 8L, the middle performance symbol 8C, and the right performance symbol 8R start to fluctuate. Further, at the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending images 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending and the corresponding pending image 9C corresponding to the variation are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 187(B), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation performance is a performance in which the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R temporarily stop at the same number. Here, it is shown that both the left presentation symbol 8L and the right presentation symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at "7".

Next, as shown in FIG. 187(C), a development effect is executed. The development performance is a performance that announces the development from normal reach to SP reach. Here, a message image MSG "Development" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 187(D), an enemy character appearance effect is executed. The enemy character appearance performance is a performance in which an enemy character that can be an opponent appears in a battle performance to be described later. Here, the appearance of three enemy characters CRB, CRC, and CRD is shown. The enemy character CRB is white, the enemy character CRC is blue (indicated by coarse hatching), and the enemy character CRD is red (indicated by fine hatching).

Next, as shown in FIG. 187(E), an enemy character selection effect is executed. An enemy character selection effect is executed. The enemy character selection performance is a performance for selecting an enemy character to be an opponent. In the enemy character selection effect, information regarding the enemy characters CRB, CRC, and CRD is displayed as images in an area different from the display area of the enemy characters CRB, CRC, and CRD. Here, information images IB, IC, and ID are displayed in correspondence with enemy characters CRB, CRC, and CRD, respectively.

The information images IB, IC, and ID are composed of a type information image IK indicating the type of enemy character and a physical strength information image IH indicating the physical strength of the enemy character. The type information image IK indicates the enemy character using its display color. For example, the type information image IK regarding the enemy character CRB is white. Further, for example, the type information image IK regarding the enemy character CRC is blue (indicated by rough hatching). For example, the type information image IK regarding the enemy character CRD is red (indicated by fine hatching).
In the physical fitness information image IH, a bar extending from the left side to the right side is displayed. The longer this bar is, the greater the enemy character's physical strength and the more difficult it is to win.

In the enemy character selection effect, the order of the information images IB, IC, and ID is changed at high speed. In the figure, the order is information image IC, information image IB, and information image ID, but as time passes, the order changes to information image IB, information image ID, and information image IB, and as time passes, information image ID, The order becomes information image IC and information image IB, and this process is repeated. To change the order, the top information image moves to the back, and the second and third information images move to the front, using a so-called animation. At this time, the information image at the top may be displayed in a larger size than the other information images. After a certain period of time has elapsed, the enemy character corresponding to the information image stopped at the top becomes the opponent in the battle performance. Here, the explanation will be continued assuming that the information image IC is stopped at the top.

Next, as shown in FIG. 187(F), a battle effect is executed. The battle performance is a performance in which an ally character and an enemy character fight, and in the case of a hit, the ally character wins. The opponent at this time will be the enemy character CRC corresponding to the information image IC selected in the enemy character selection effect, and a battle will take place between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRC. An information image IC is displayed at the top of the display screen 7a, and an effect is performed in which the bar of the physical strength information image IH decreases due to the attack of the ally character CRA. When the bar of the physical strength information image IH becomes 0, the victory of the ally character CRA is confirmed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 187(G), a victory effect is executed. The victory performance is a performance that announces that an ally character has won. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the words "Victory" are displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 187(H), a confirmed stop effect (win) is executed. The guaranteed stop effect (hit) is an effect in which the effect pattern is confirmed to stop when the number is zero. Here, all of the left presentation pattern 8L, middle presentation pattern 8C, and right presentation pattern 8R are "7".

[Character selection performance B]
FIG. 188 is a diagram for explaining character selection effect B.
First, as shown in FIG. 188(A), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, it is shown how the left performance symbol 8L, the middle performance symbol 8C, and the right performance symbol 8R start to fluctuate. Further, at the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending images 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending and the corresponding pending image 9C corresponding to the variation are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 188(B), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation performance is a performance in which the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R temporarily stop at the same number. Here, it is shown that both the left presentation symbol 8L and the right presentation symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at "7".

Next, as shown in FIG. 188(C), a development effect is executed. The development performance is a performance that announces the development from normal reach to SP reach. Here, a message image MSG "Development" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 188(D), an enemy character appearance effect is executed. The enemy character appearance performance is a performance in which an enemy character that can be an opponent appears in a battle performance to be described later. Here, the appearance of three enemy characters CRB, CRC, and CRD is shown. The enemy character CRB is white, the enemy character CRC is blue (indicated by coarse hatching), and the enemy character CRD is red (indicated by fine hatching).

Next, as shown in FIG. 188(E), an enemy character selection effect is executed. The enemy character selection performance is a performance for selecting an enemy character to be an opponent. In the enemy character selection effect, information regarding the enemy characters CRB, CRC, and CRD is displayed as images in an area different from the display area of the enemy characters CRB, CRC, and CRD. Here, information images IB, IC, and ID are displayed in correspondence with enemy characters CRB, CRC, and CRD, respectively.

The information images IB, IC, and ID are composed of a type information image IK indicating the type of enemy character and a physical strength information image IH indicating the physical strength of the enemy character. The type information image IK indicates the enemy character with its characters. For example, the type information image IK regarding the enemy character CRB is "B". Further, for example, the type information image IK regarding the enemy character CRC is "C". For example, the type information image IK regarding the enemy character CRD is "D". Although the example of one alphabetic character is given here, if the enemy character has a name, it is possible to display that name.
In the physical fitness information image IH, a bar extending from the left side to the right side is displayed. The longer this bar is, the greater the enemy character's physical strength and the more difficult it is to win.

In the enemy character selection effect, the order of the information images IB, IC, and ID is changed at high speed. In the figure, the order is information image IC, information image IB, and information image ID, but as time passes, the order changes to information image IB, information image ID, and information image IB, and as time passes, information image ID, The order becomes information image IC and information image IB, and this process is repeated. To change the order, the top information image moves to the back, and the second and third information images move to the front, using a so-called animation. At this time, the information image at the top may be displayed in a larger size than the other information images. After a certain period of time has elapsed, the enemy character corresponding to the information image stopped at the top becomes the opponent in the battle performance. Here, the explanation will be continued assuming that the information image IC is stopped at the top.

Next, as shown in FIG. 188(F), a battle effect is executed. The battle performance is a performance in which an ally character and an enemy character fight, and in the case of a hit, the ally character wins. The opponent at this time will be the enemy character CRC corresponding to the information image IC selected in the enemy character selection effect, and a battle will take place between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRC. An information image IC is displayed at the top of the display screen 7a, and an effect is performed in which the bar of the physical strength information image IH decreases due to the attack of the ally character CRA. When the bar of the physical strength information image IH becomes 0, the victory of the ally character CRA is confirmed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 188(G), a victory effect is executed. The victory performance is a performance that announces that an ally character has won. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the words "Victory" are displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 188(H), a confirmed stop effect (win) is executed. The guaranteed stop effect (hit) is an effect in which the effect pattern is confirmed to stop when the number is zero. Here, the left presentation pattern 8L, the middle presentation pattern 8C, and the right presentation pattern 8R are all "7".

[Character selection production C]
FIG. 189 is a diagram for explaining character selection effect C.
First, as shown in FIG. 189(A), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, it is shown how the left performance symbol 8L, the middle performance symbol 8C, and the right performance symbol 8R start to fluctuate. Further, at the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending images 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending and the corresponding pending image 9C corresponding to the variation are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 189(B), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation performance is a performance in which the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R temporarily stop at the same number. Here, it is shown that both the left presentation symbol 8L and the right presentation symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at "7".

Next, as shown in FIG. 189(C), a development effect is executed. The development performance is a performance that announces the development from normal reach to SP reach. Here, a message image MSG "Development" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 189(D), an enemy character appearance effect is executed. The enemy character appearance performance is a performance in which an enemy character that can be an opponent appears in a battle performance to be described later. Here, the appearance of three enemy characters CRB, CRC, and CRD is shown. The enemy character CRB is white, the enemy character CRC is blue (indicated by coarse hatching), and the enemy character CRD is red (indicated by fine hatching).

Next, as shown in FIG. 189(E), an enemy character selection effect is executed. The enemy character selection performance is a performance for selecting an enemy character to be an opponent. In the enemy character selection effect, information regarding the enemy characters CRB, CRC, and CRD is displayed as images in an area different from the display area of the enemy characters CRB, CRC, and CRD. Here, information images IB, IC, and ID are displayed in correspondence with enemy characters CRB, CRC, and CRD, respectively.

The information images IB, IC, and ID are composed of a type information image IK indicating the type of enemy character and a physical strength information image IH indicating the physical strength of the enemy character. The type information image IK indicates the enemy character with its characters. For example, the type information image IK regarding the enemy character CRB is "B". Further, for example, the type information image IK regarding the enemy character CRC is "C". For example, the type information image IK regarding the enemy character CRD is "D". Although the example of one alphabetic character is given here, if the enemy character has a name, it is possible to display that name.
Five stars are displayed in the physical strength information image IH, and the greater the number of black stars, the greater the enemy character's physical strength and the more difficult it is to win.

In the enemy character selection effect, the order of the information images IB, IC, and ID is changed at high speed. In the figure, the order is information image IC, information image IB, and information image ID, but as time passes, the order changes to information image IB, information image ID, and information image IB, and as time passes, information image ID, The order becomes information image IC and information image IB, and this process is repeated. To change the order, the top information image moves to the back, and the second and third information images move to the front, using a so-called animation. At this time, the information image at the top may be displayed in a larger size than the other information images. After a certain period of time has elapsed, the enemy character corresponding to the information image stopped at the top becomes the opponent in the battle performance. Here, the explanation will be continued assuming that the information image IC is stopped at the top.

Next, as shown in FIG. 189(F), a battle effect is executed. The battle performance is a performance in which an ally character and an enemy character fight, and in the case of a hit, the ally character wins. The opponent at this time will be the enemy character CRC corresponding to the information image IC selected in the enemy character selection effect, and a battle will take place between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRC. An information image IC is displayed at the top of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 189(G), a defeat effect is executed. The defeat performance is a performance that announces that the ally character has been defeated. Here, the enemy character CRC is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the words "defeat" are displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 189(H), a confirmed stop effect (loss) is executed. The confirmed stop performance (loss) is a performance in which the performance symbols are determined to be stopped in a losing manner. Here, both the left presentation pattern 8L and the right presentation pattern 8R are "7", and the middle presentation pattern 8C is "8".

[Character selection effect D]
FIG. 190 is a diagram for explaining character selection effect D.
First, as shown in FIG. 190(A), a variation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start performance is a performance in which the performance symbols start to fluctuate. Here, it is shown how the left performance symbol 8L, the middle performance symbol 8C, and the right performance symbol 8R start to fluctuate. Further, at the bottom of the display screen 7a, three pending images 9A corresponding to the first special figure pending and the corresponding pending image 9C corresponding to the variation are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 190(B), a reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation performance is a performance in which the left performance symbol 8L and the right performance symbol 8R temporarily stop at the same number. Here, it is shown that both the left presentation symbol 8L and the right presentation symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at "7".

Next, as shown in FIG. 190(C), a development effect is executed. The development performance is a performance that announces the development from normal reach to SP reach. Here, a message image MSG "Development" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 190(D), an enemy character appearance effect is executed. The enemy character appearance performance is a performance in which an enemy character that can be an opponent appears in a battle performance to be described later. Here, the appearance of three enemy characters CRB, CRC, and CRD is shown. The enemy character CRB is white, the enemy character CRC is blue (indicated by coarse hatching), and the enemy character CRD is red (indicated by fine hatching).

Next, as shown in FIG. 190(E), an enemy character selection effect is executed. The enemy character selection performance is a performance for selecting an enemy character to be an opponent. In the enemy character selection effect, information regarding the enemy characters CRB, CRC, and CRD is displayed as images in an area different from the display area of the enemy characters CRB, CRC, and CRD. Here, an information image IC corresponding to the enemy character CRC is displayed. The information image IB corresponding to the enemy character CRB and the information image ID corresponding to the enemy character CRD are not displayed.

The information images IB, IC, and ID are composed of a type information image IK indicating the type of enemy character and a physical strength information image IH indicating the physical strength of the enemy character. The type information image IK indicates the enemy character with its characters. For example, the type information image IK regarding the enemy character CRB is "B". Further, for example, the type information image IK regarding the enemy character CRC is "C". For example, the type information image IK regarding the enemy character CRD is "D". Although the example of one alphabetic character is given here, if the enemy character has a name, it is possible to display that name.
Five stars are displayed in the physical strength information image IH, and the greater the number of black stars, the greater the enemy character's physical strength and the more difficult it is to win.

In the enemy character selection effect, information images IB, IC, and ID are displayed in order at high speed. In the figure, the information image IC is displayed, but as time passes, the information image IB is displayed, and as more time passes, the information image ID is displayed, and this is repeated. After a certain period of time has elapsed, the enemy character corresponding to the displayed information image becomes the opponent in the battle performance. Here, the explanation will be continued assuming that the information image IC is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 190(F), a battle effect is executed. The battle performance is a performance in which an ally character and an enemy character fight, and in the case of a hit, the ally character wins. The opponent at this time will be the enemy character CRC corresponding to the information image IC selected in the enemy character selection effect, and a battle will take place between the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRC. An information image IC is displayed at the top of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 190(G), a defeat effect is executed. The defeat performance is a performance that announces that the ally character has been defeated. Here, the enemy character CRC is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a, and the words "defeat" are displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 190(H), a confirmed stop effect (loss) is executed. The confirmed stop performance (loss) is a performance in which the performance symbols are determined to be stopped in a losing manner. Here, both the left presentation pattern 8L and the right presentation pattern 8R are "7", and the middle presentation pattern 8C is "8".

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the character selection effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the enemy characters CRB, CRC, and CRD who will be the opponents in the battle performance are displayed by the enemy character appearance performance (FIG. 187(D), FIG. 188(D), FIG. 189(D)) , FIG. 190(D)). Then, by the enemy character selection effect, information images IB, IC, and ID corresponding to the enemy characters CRB, CRC, and CRD are displayed, and when the information images IB, IC, and ID are selected, the enemy character who will be the opponent is selected (FIG. 187(E), FIG. 188(E), FIG. 189(E), FIG. 190(E)). According to this configuration, the selection of enemy characters becomes highly interesting, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the information images IB, IC, and ID corresponding to the enemy characters CRB, CRC, and CRD are the type information image IK indicating the type of the enemy character and the physical strength information image IH indicating the physical strength of the enemy character. (Fig. 187(F), Fig. 188(F), Fig. 189(F), Fig. 190(F)). According to this configuration, the selection of the opponent becomes highly interesting, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the order of the information images IB, IC, and ID is changed at high speed, and after a certain period of time, the enemy character corresponding to the information image that has stopped at the top becomes the opponent in the battle performance ( FIG. 187(E), FIG. 188(E), FIG. 189(E)). Alternatively, the information images IB, IC, and ID are displayed in sequence at high speed, and after a certain period of time, the enemy character corresponding to the displayed information image becomes the opponent in the battle performance (FIG. 190(E)). According to this configuration, the selection of the opponent becomes highly interesting, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the information images IB, IC, and ID include the physical strength information image IH indicating the physical strength of the enemy characters CRB, CRC, and CRD (FIG. 187(E), FIG. 188(E)) , FIG. 189(E), FIG. 190(E)). According to this configuration, the selection of the opponent becomes highly interesting, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the information images IB, IC, and ID include the type information image IK that can identify the enemy characters CRB, CRC, and CRD (FIG. 187(E), FIG. 188(E)) , FIG. 189(E), FIG. 190(E)). According to this configuration, the selection of the opponent becomes highly interesting, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Modified example]
Below, a modified example of the character selection effect will be shown.
[Modification 1]
In the above, the information images IB, IC, and ID include two pieces of information: the type information image IK and the physical fitness information image IH. On the other hand, three or more pieces of information may be included.

[Modification 2]
In the above example, the enemy character of the opponent is selected from among the enemy characters CRB, CRC, and CRD, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is sufficient that the selection target can be selected by selecting the selection target information, and for example, it may be possible to select one of a plurality of types of mini-games.

[Modification 3]
In the above example, the information images IB, IC, and ID are automatically selected, but the information images IB, IC, and ID may also be selected by the player pressing the effect button 63, for example. good.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
[Aspect J2-1]
A gaming machine,
An effect for selecting one of a plurality of selection targets, in which the selection target is displayed and target information that is information regarding the selection target is displayed in an area different from the display area of the selection target, It is possible to perform a selection effect in which the selection target is selected by selecting the target information;
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect J2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect J2-1,
The target information is displayed as an information image representing a plurality of pieces of information.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect J2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect J2-2,
After sequentially displaying the information images as the target information, the selection target is selected by selecting one information image,
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect J2-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects J2-1 to J2-3,
The selection target is an opponent's character.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect J2-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect J2-4,
The information image includes a graph image suggesting the difficulty level of the character.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Aspect J2-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect J2-4 or aspect J2-5,
The information image includes an image that allows the character to be identified.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The starting port light emitting effects A to D will be explained below using FIGS. 191 to 194. In FIGS. 191 to 194, some decorative patterns displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are omitted for the sake of legibility. The first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 arranged in the figure are also omitted for ease of viewing the drawing.

This starting opening light emitting performance is executed during the fluctuating performance of the decorative pattern (for example, during the period from the start of the fluctuation of the decorative pattern to the stop of the fluctuation). That is, the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands (for example, a variable effect start command, a preliminary determination command) received from the sub-control board 90, and if an instruction to execute the starting opening light emission effect is included, the ROM 103 The corresponding image data is read out from the image display device 7, and the image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Further, the lamp control board 107 analyzes various commands (for example, a variable effect start command, a preliminary determination command) received from the sub-control board 90, and changes the light emission mode of the first starting port 20. Further, the audio control board 106 analyzes various commands (for example, a variable performance start command, a preliminary determination command) received from the sub-control board 90, and causes the speaker 67 to execute a sound performance that outputs various sounds.

The first starting port 20 has a first starting port decorative board mounted with one or more full-color LEDs (not shown) capable of emitting multicolor light, and is controlled to emit light by a lamp control board 107 . The first starting port 20 emits light when the full-color LED mounted on the first starting port decorative substrate emits light. When the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board for the first starting port is controlled to light up in white, so that the first starting port 20 lights up in white, and further. Also, in the jackpot performance and the demonstration performance for waiting for customers, the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board for the first starting port is controlled to light up in white, so that the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 is in a state where the light is lit in white. Become.

The inside of the front surface of the first starting port 20 is coated with special plating, and when the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board for the first starting port emits light, the front surface of the first starting port 20 is illuminated. Some are designed to be transparent. A type having this specification will be referred to as a special plating specification, and a normal type not having this special plating specification will be described below as a normal specification. The first starting port 20 in the special plating specification and the normal specification are both molded from colored or colorless transparent resin, and are provided with shapes not shown. Although the first starting port 20 in the special plating specification and the normal specification are both molded from colored or colorless transparent resin, the surface thereof may be formed as a smooth surface (flat or curved surface).

On the inside front surface of the first starting port 20 in the special plating specification, there is a decorative member (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "decorative member modeling (smiling face modeling)") with a smiling face printed on the surface of the first starting port 20. When the full-color LED disposed in front of the decorative board for the opening and mounted on the decorative board for the first starting opening emits light, the decorative member placed inside the first starting opening 20 passes through the front surface of the first starting opening 20. (smiling face) is visible, and when the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board for the first starting port is turned off, it is placed inside the first starting port 20 through the front surface of the first starting port 20. The shaped decorative member (smiling face shaped) is difficult to see, and the color of the special plating (for example, silver) is visible through the front surface of the first starting port 20.

In the special plating specification, when the power is turned on to the gaming machine 1, the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board for the first starting port is turned off, and furthermore, the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board for the first starting port is turned off, and also during the jackpot performance and the demonstration performance for waiting for customers. , the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board for the first starting port is turned off, making it difficult to see the shape of the decorative member (smile model) placed inside the first starting port 20 through the front surface of the first starting port 20. It is said that In addition, in the jackpot performance, the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board for the first starting port is illuminated, and the decoration member placed inside the first starting port 20 through the front surface of the first starting port 20 is shaped (smiling face). (modeling) may be made visible.

Here, we will first explain in order the starting port light emitting effect A, the starting port light emitting effect B, and the starting port light emitting effect C as the light emitting effects of the first starting port 20 in the normal specification, and then the first starting port in the special plating specification. The starting mouth light emitting effect D will be explained as the 20 light emitting effect.

[Starting mouth light emitting effect A]
First, the starting port light emitting effect A will be explained with reference to FIG. 191. FIG. 191 is a diagram for explaining the starting port light emission effect A. The starting opening light emitting effect A is performed during the variation from the start of the variation of the decorative pattern to the end of the variation.

In the starting port light emitting effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 191(A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern of the stereoscopic image. A variable display of decorative symbols (symbols: numbers "1" to "9") is started in a display mode in which the reels rotate from the upper side of the display screen 7a to the lower side of the display screen 7a. When the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern is started, the decorative pattern that has been stopped and displayed changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed, resulting in a display mode that fluctuates at a high speed. Thereby, the background image placed behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. Immediately before stopping, the decorative pattern decelerates, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed in a stopped state (temporarily stopped and then stopped). In addition, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, it is displayed in a display mode in which it slowly moves slowly in the vertical direction.

The pending icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R that are currently changing as the first special pattern pending is displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. is displayed at the corresponding hold display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the hold display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as a first special figure hold. In this hold display area, hold icons 9A can be displayed at four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), so that a maximum of four hold icons 9A can be stocked. The four hold display positions 9Ad are arranged from a position close to the hold display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a: a first hold display position 9Ad, a second hold display position 9Ad, a third hold display position 9Ad, and a fourth hold display position 9Ad. They are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a in order of pending display position 9Ad.

Note that when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the size of the hold icon 9C is the same as the hold icon immediately before the movement. The size is approximately 1.5 times the size of the pending icon 9A, and the shape and color of the pending icon 9C indicate to the player the degree of expectation of winning for the pending icon 9C. On the other hand, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad moves to the third hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad moves to the second hold display position 9Ad. When moving to position 9Ad, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, except when the shape of the hold icon 9A changes to another shape. Therefore, the size of each pending icon 9A is the same as the size of the pending icon 9A immediately before the movement.

Here, the white spherical hold icon 9C is displayed at the hold display position 9Cd, and the white spherical hold icon 9C is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, second hold display position 9Ad, and third hold display position 9Ad. 9A are displayed, and no pending icon is displayed at the fourth pending display position 9Ad. In other words, the three pending icons 9A, 9A, 9A are in a stocked state without being consumed.

Here, to briefly explain the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "pending icon"), the difference in shape and color determines the expectation of winning at the time of lottery corresponding to the pending icon. represents the difference between For example, among the four hold icons: a yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon, a black spherical hold icon, a smiling sphere hold icon, and a white spherical hold icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon is the most The expectation of winning is high, the black spherical pending icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling sphere pending icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical pending icon has the lowest expectation of winning. It has become a thing. The smiling sphere pending icon is further set with a high expectation of winning a jackpot in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (rich jackpot)).

If the decorative pattern in FIG. 191(A) starts to fluctuate and the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 at the time of starting the fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 191(B), the decorative pattern for the first starting port is By controlling the mounted full-color LED to light up in white, the light emission mode of the first starting port 20 becomes a state in which the light is lit in white. At this time, since no game balls have entered the first starting port 20, the number of held balls does not increase, and the holding sound, which is a sound effect of "Supop", is not played from the speaker 67 (the holding sound is turned off). .

When a game ball enters the first starting port 20 after the start of fluctuation (that is, after the start of fluctuation), a white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad, as shown in FIG. 191(C). The four pending icons 9A, 9A, 9A, 9A are stored without being consumed, resulting in a full pending state. Although the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board for the first starting port is already controlled to light up in white, and the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 is lit in white, it is not possible for a game ball to enter the first starting port 20. In order to notify that the number of reserved balls has increased due to balls being hit, the full color LED mounted on the first starting port decorative board lights up for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds), as shown in FIG. 191(D). It is controlled to turn off, and then controlled to turn on white again. As a result, the full-color LED mounted on the first starting port decorative board flashes white only once, and the first starting port 20 flashes white only once. At this time, in order to notify that the number of held balls has increased due to the entry of game balls into the first starting port 20, a holding sound, which is a sound effect of "Supop", is played from the speaker 67 (the holding sound is turned ON). ).

After that, even if a game ball enters the first starting port 20, as shown in FIG. 191(E), since the ball is already full, there is a hold display position where the hold icon is displayed. White spherical hold icons 9A are displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, second hold display position 9Ad, third hold display position 9Ad, and fourth hold display position 9Ad shown in FIG. 191(C). does not change from its current state. In addition, even if game balls enter the first starting port 20, since the ball is full, there is no holding display position for displaying the holding icon, and the number of held balls does not increase. As shown in (F), the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board for the first starting port is controlled to remain lit in white, so that the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 is maintained in a white lit state. Become. At this time, even if game balls enter the first starting port 20, there is no hold display position for displaying the hold icon and the number of held balls does not increase, so there is no need to notify that the number of held balls has increased. , the hold tone, which is a sound effect of "Supop", is not played from the speaker 67 (the hold tone is turned off).

After that, as shown in FIG. 191(G), the left decorative pattern 8L becomes the number "5", the middle decorative pattern 8C becomes the number "1", and the right decorative pattern 8R becomes the number "3", and the same patterns are not aligned. When the display is stopped and the error is confirmed, the fluctuation ends and the pending icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a, and the first pending display position 9Ad, second pending display position 9Ad, and third pending display position 9Ad are displayed. The white spherical hold icon 9A remains displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad. At the end of such fluctuations, the tank is already in the reserved full state, so as shown in Figure 191 (H), the full color LED mounted on the decorative board for the first starting port is controlled to remain lit in white. As a result, the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 is maintained in a white-lit state, and since no game balls have entered the first starting port 20, the number of held balls does not increase, and a "pop" occurs. The hold music, which is a sound effect, is not played from the speaker 67 (the hold music is turned off).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 191(I), when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the second hold icon 9A moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C. The hold icon 9A displayed at the hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad moves to the second hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad moves to the fourth hold display position 9Ad. The hold icon 9A displayed at the hold display position 9Ad moves to the third hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon disappears at the fourth hold display position 9Ad, the decorative pattern starts to fluctuate, and the first start is performed at the time of the start of the change. When the game ball does not enter the opening 20, as shown in FIG. 191(J), the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board for the first starting opening is controlled to turn on in white, so that the first starting opening 20 is turned on. The light emitting mode becomes a white-lit state. At this time, since no game balls have entered the first starting port 20, the number of held balls does not increase, and the holding sound, which is a sound effect of "Supop", is not played from the speaker 67 (the holding sound is turned off). .

In this way, in the starting port light emitting effect A, the full-color LED mounted on the first starting port decorative board is controlled to light up in white, so that the first starting port 20 lights up in white, and the first starting port 20 lights up in white. When the number of reserved balls increases due to game balls entering the starting port 20, the full-color LED mounted on the first starting port decorative board is controlled to be turned off for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds) and turns white again. The full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate for the first starting port is controlled to be turned on, and the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 becomes a state in which the white light blinks only once. On the other hand, the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board for the first starting port is controlled to light up in white, so that the first starting port 20 lights up in white, which means that the tank is full. In some cases, even if a game ball enters the first starting port 20, there is no pending display position for displaying the pending icon, and the number of held balls does not increase. The LED is not controlled to turn off for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds) but is maintained in a white light state, and the light emission mode of the first starting port 20 does not blink white only once, but remains in a white light state. be done.

As a result, when game balls enter the first starting port 20 and the number of reserved balls increases, the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 is controlled from white lighting to off for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds). When the number of held balls does not increase, the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 can be maintained as white lighting. This makes it possible to visually indicate whether or not there is an increase in the number of balls being held, thereby increasing interest.

In addition, in the starting port light emitting effect A, the lighting mode of the first starting port 20 is set to a blinking white color, which is visually appealing, and the holding tone, which is a sound effect of "Supop", is played from the speaker 67, which is appealing to the auditory sense. By using the effect together with the effect, it is possible to provide the player with an innovative effect in which the increase in the number of reserved balls can be communicated to the player.

[Starting mouth light emitting effect B]
Next, the starting port light emitting effect B will be explained with reference to FIG. 192. FIG. 192 is a diagram for explaining the starting port light emission effect B. The starting opening light emitting performance B is performed during the variation from the start of the variation of the decorative pattern to the end of the variation.

In the starting opening light emitting effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 192(A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 already displays the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the stereoscopic image. The right decorative symbol 8R starts to be displayed in a manner in which the reels are rotated from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and the decorative symbols (symbols: numbers "1" to "9") start to be displayed in a variable manner, and then are stopped and displayed. The decorative pattern changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing its speed from a low speed, resulting in a display mode that changes at a high speed. The statically displayed decorative pattern changes from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state while gradually increasing its speed from a low speed, resulting in a display mode that changes at high speed, so that the background image placed behind the decorative pattern is It can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative pattern during high-speed fluctuations.

Then, just before it stops, it decelerates and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed stopped (temporarily stopped and then stopped). In addition, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, it is displayed in a display mode in which it slowly moves slowly in the vertical direction.

Here, the left decorative pattern 8L is the number "5," the middle decorative pattern 8C is the number "1," and the right decorative pattern 8R is the number "3." Ru. Accordingly, the change ends and the pending icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

The pending icons corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R that are being changed as the first special pattern pending is displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the hold display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the hold display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as a first special figure hold. In this hold display area, hold icons 9A can be displayed at four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), so that a maximum of four hold icons 9A can be stocked. The four hold display positions 9Ad are arranged from a position close to the hold display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a: a first hold display position 9Ad, a second hold display position 9Ad, a third hold display position 9Ad, and a fourth hold display position 9Ad. They are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a in order of pending display position 9Ad.

Note that when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the size of the hold icon 9C is the same as the hold icon immediately before the movement. The size is approximately 1.5 times the size of the pending icon 9A, and the shape and color of the pending icon 9C indicate to the player the degree of expectation of winning for the pending icon 9C. On the other hand, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad moves to the third hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad moves to the second hold display position 9Ad. When moving to position 9Ad, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, except when the shape of the hold icon 9A changes to another shape. Therefore, the size of each pending icon 9A is the same as the size of the pending icon 9A immediately before the movement.

Here, at the end of the variation in FIG. 192(A), the variation has ended and the pending icon 9C has disappeared from the display screen 7a at the pending display position 9Cd, and the first pending display position 9Ad has A yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon 9A is displayed, a white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad and a third hold display position 9Ad, and a white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad. , the hold icon is not displayed. In other words, the three pending icons 9A, 9A, 9A are in a stocked state without being consumed.

Here, to briefly explain the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "pending icon"), the difference in shape and color determines the expectation of winning at the time of lottery corresponding to the pending icon. represents the difference between For example, among the four hold icons: a yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon, a black spherical hold icon, a smiling sphere hold icon, and a white spherical hold icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon is the most The expectation of winning is high, the black spherical pending icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling sphere pending icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical pending icon has the lowest expectation of winning. It has become a thing. The smiling sphere pending icon is further set with a high expectation of winning a jackpot in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (rich jackpot)).

When the fluctuation shown in FIG. 192(A) ends and the holding icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a, if the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 at the end of such fluctuation, the change in FIG. As shown in (B), the full-color LED mounted on the decorative substrate for the first starting port is controlled to light up in white, so that the first starting port 20 lights up in white. At this time, since no game balls have entered the first starting port 20, the number of held balls does not increase, and the holding sound, which is a sound effect of "Supop", is not played from the speaker 67 (the holding sound is turned off). . Note that when the fluctuation in FIG. 192(A) ends and the holding icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a, if a game ball enters the first starting port 20 at the end of such fluctuation, The light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 in the starting port light emitting effect A shown in FIG. 191(D) flashed white only once, and the number of held balls increased due to the game ball entering the first starting port 20. In order to notify the user of this, a hold tone, which is a sound effect of "Suppo", is played from the speaker 67 (the hold tone is turned on).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 192(C), when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the second hold icon 9A moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C. The hold icon 9A displayed at the hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad moves to the second hold display position 9Ad, and the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad moves to the third hold display position 9Ad. The hold icon disappears from the hold display position 9Ad and the fourth hold display position 9Ad, the decorative pattern starts to fluctuate, and regardless of whether or not the game ball enters the first starting port 20 at the start of the change, the figure As shown in 192(D), the color is the same as the yellow (gold) star-shaped reservation icon 9C, that is, in conjunction with the color assigned to the reservation icon 9C, The full-color LED mounted on the decorative board for the first starting port is controlled from white lighting to yellow lighting (gold color lighting), so that the light emission mode of the first starting port 20 changes from white lighting to yellow lighting (gold color lighting). state. If no game balls enter the first starting port 20 at the start of the fluctuation, the number of held balls will not increase and the holding sound, which is a sound effect of "supop", will not be played from the speaker 67 (the holding sound will be turned off). .

After the start of fluctuation (that is, after the start of fluctuation), when game balls enter the first starting port 20 one after another (that is, two game balls enter the first starting port 20 one after another) 192(E), a white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad, and a white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad. , the four pending icons 9A, 9A, 9A, 9A are kept in stock without being consumed, resulting in a full pending state. Although the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board for the first starting port has already been controlled to light up in yellow (lighting in gold color), and the light emission mode of the first starting port 20 is in a state where it is lighting in yellow (lighting in gold color), As shown in FIG. 192(F), there is no control to notify that the number of reserved balls has increased due to the entry of game balls into the first starting port 20, and as shown in FIG. By controlling the full-color LED to remain lit in yellow (lit in gold color), the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 is maintained in a state where it is lit in yellow (lit in gold color). The hold tone is not played from the speaker 67 (the hold tone is turned off).

In addition, as a control to notify that the number of reserved balls has increased due to the entry of game balls into the first starting port 20, as explained in the starting port light emitting effect A in FIG. 191, the first starting port decorative board The full-color LED mounted in the LED blinks once in a predetermined color (flashing white in FIGS. 191(C) and (D)), so that the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 blinks once in a predetermined color (flashing white in FIGS. 191(C) and (D)). In FIGS. 191(C) and (D), the white light flashes, and a hold sound, which is a sound effect of "Suppo", is played from the speaker 67 (the hold sound is turned ON).However, the starting port lighting effect In B, unlike the starting port light emitting effect A, as shown in FIG. As a result, the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 is maintained in a state in which the light is lit in yellow (lit in gold color), and furthermore, a hold sound, which is a sound effect of "Suppo", is emitted from the speaker 67. (The hold music is turned off).

After that, even if a game ball enters the first starting port 20, as shown in FIG. 192(G), since the ball is already in a full hold state, there is a hold display position where a hold icon is displayed. White spherical hold icons 9A are displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, second hold display position 9Ad, third hold display position 9Ad, and fourth hold display position 9Ad shown in FIG. 192(E). does not change from its current state. In addition, even if game balls enter the first starting port 20, since the ball is in a full state of holding, there is no holding display position for displaying the holding icon, and the number of held balls does not increase. As shown in (H), the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board for the first starting port is maintained in yellow lighting (gold color lighting), so that the light emission mode of the first starting port 20 is yellow lighting (gold color lighting). (lit) state will be maintained. At this time, even if game balls enter the first starting port 20, there is no hold display position for displaying the hold icon and the number of held balls does not increase, so there is no need to notify that the number of held balls has increased. , the hold tone, which is a sound effect of "Supop", is not played from the speaker 67 (the hold tone is turned off).

After that, as shown in FIG. 192(I), the left decorative pattern 8L becomes the number "3", the middle decorative pattern 8C becomes the number "4", and the right decorative pattern 8R becomes the number "3", and the same patterns are not aligned. When the display is stopped and the error is confirmed, the fluctuation ends and the pending icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a, and the first pending display position 9Ad, second pending display position 9Ad, and third pending display position 9Ad are displayed. The white spherical hold icon 9A remains displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad. At the end of such variation, as shown in FIG. 192(J), the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board for the first starting port is controlled from yellow lighting (gold color lighting) to white lighting, so that the first The light emission mode of the starting port 20 changes from yellow lighting (gold color lighting) to white lighting. At the end of the variation, the holding is already full, so even if game balls enter the first starting port 20, the number of held balls will not increase, and the holding sound, which is a sound effect of "Suppo", will not be heard. is not played from the speaker 67 (the hold music is turned off).

In this way, in the starting port light emitting effect B, the full-color LED mounted on the first starting port decorative board is controlled to light up in yellow (gold color lighting), so that the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 changes to yellow lighting ( Even if the number of held balls increases due to a game ball entering the first starting port 20 in the state where the game ball enters the first starting port 20 (gold color lit), the number of held balls increases due to a game ball entering the first starting port 20. The full-color LED mounted on the decorative board for the first starting port is maintained in a yellow state (gold color lighting), so that the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 is changed to a yellow lighting state (gold color lighting). In addition, the hold tone, which is a sound effect of "supop", is not played from the speaker 67 (the hold tone is turned off).

As a result, when the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 is controlled from white lighting to yellow lighting (gold color lighting) and changing to the light emitting mode of yellow lighting (gold color lighting), the first starting port 20 Even if game balls enter the ball and the number of reserved balls increases, the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 is maintained in yellow lighting (gold color lighting), so the light emission of the first starting port 20 is maintained. Yellow lighting (gold color lighting), which is a mode, can contribute to the performance as an additional light emission performance, and can improve the interest.

In addition, in the starting port light emitting effect B, when the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon with the highest expectation of winning is displayed at the holding display position 9Cd, a game ball enters the first starting port 20. As a result, the control to notify that the number of held balls has increased is not performed at all (in other words, the control to notify that the number of held balls has increased due to the game balls entering the first starting port 20 is prevented. (by this), the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 can be maintained in a yellow lighting state (gold color lighting). Therefore, the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 maintained in yellow lighting (gold color lighting) can contribute as an additional light emitting effect to the effect displayed on the display screen 7a. Furthermore, since the hold sound, which is a sound effect of "Supop", is not played from the speaker 67, the hold sound can be prevented from interfering with the sound effects and music played in connection with the production performed on the display screen 7a.

[Starting mouth light emitting effect C]
Next, the starting port light emitting effect C will be explained with reference to FIG. 193. FIG. 193 is a diagram for explaining the starting port light emission effect C. The starting opening light emitting effect C is performed during the variation from the start of the variation of the decorative pattern to the end of the variation.

In the starting port light emitting effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 193(A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative pattern of the stereoscopic image. A variable display of decorative symbols (symbols: numbers "1" to "9") is started in a display mode in which the reels rotate from the upper side of the display screen 7a to the lower side of the display screen 7a. When the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern is started, the decorative pattern that has been stopped and displayed changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing the speed from a low speed, resulting in a display mode that fluctuates at a high speed. Thereby, the background image placed behind the decorative pattern can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative pattern that is changing at high speed. Immediately before stopping, the decorative pattern decelerates, changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed in a stopped state (temporarily stopped and then stopped). In addition, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, it is displayed in a display mode in which it slowly moves slowly in the vertical direction.

The pending icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, middle decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R that are currently changing as the first special pattern pending is displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. is displayed at the corresponding hold display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the hold display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as a first special figure hold. In this hold display area, hold icons 9A can be displayed at four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), so that a maximum of four hold icons 9A can be stocked. The four hold display positions 9Ad are arranged from a position close to the hold display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a: a first hold display position 9Ad, a second hold display position 9Ad, a third hold display position 9Ad, and a fourth hold display position 9Ad. They are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a in order of pending display position 9Ad.

Note that when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the size of the hold icon 9C is the same as the hold icon immediately before the movement. The size is approximately 1.5 times the size of the pending icon 9A, and the shape and color of the pending icon 9C indicate to the player the degree of expectation of winning for the pending icon 9C. On the other hand, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad moves to the third hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad moves to the second hold display position 9Ad. When moving to position 9Ad, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, except when the shape of the hold icon 9A changes to another shape. Therefore, the size of each pending icon 9A is the same as the size of the pending icon 9A immediately before the movement.

Here, the white spherical hold icon 9C is displayed at the hold display position 9Cd, and the white spherical hold icon 9C is displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, second hold display position 9Ad, and third hold display position 9Ad. 9A are displayed, and no pending icon is displayed at the fourth pending display position 9Ad. In other words, the three pending icons 9A, 9A, 9A are in a stocked state without being consumed.

Here, to briefly explain the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "pending icon"), the difference in shape and color determines the expectation of winning at the time of lottery corresponding to the pending icon. represents the difference between For example, among the four hold icons: a yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon, a black spherical hold icon, a smiling sphere hold icon, and a white spherical hold icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon is the most The expectation of winning is high, the black spherical pending icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling sphere pending icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical pending icon has the lowest expectation of winning. It has become a thing. The smiling sphere pending icon is further set with a high expectation of winning a jackpot in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (rich jackpot)).

If the decorative pattern in FIG. 193(A) starts to fluctuate and the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 at the start of the fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 193(B), the decorative pattern for the first starting port is By controlling the mounted full-color LED to light up in white, the light emission mode of the first starting port 20 becomes a state in which the light is lit in white. At this time, since no game balls have entered the first starting port 20, the number of held balls does not increase, and the holding sound, which is a sound effect of "Supop", is not played from the speaker 67 (the holding sound is turned off). . In addition, when the decorative pattern in FIG. 193(A) starts to fluctuate and a game ball enters the first starting port 20 at the time of starting the fluctuation, the first starting port light emitting effect A shown in FIG. 191(D) The light emitting mode of the starting port 20 flashes white only once, and a holding sound, which is a sound effect of "Suppo", is emitted to notify that the number of held balls has increased due to the game balls entering the first starting port 20. is played from the speaker 67 (the hold tone is turned on).

After the fluctuation starts (that is, after the fluctuation starts), as shown in FIG. 193(C), the white spherical hold icon 9C displayed at the hold display position 9Cd changes to the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon 9C. When the icon changes to the hold icon 9C, as shown in FIG. 193(D), the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon 9C is changed to the same color as the hold icon 9C. The full-color LED mounted on the decorative board for the first starting port is controlled from white lighting to yellow lighting (gold lighting) in conjunction with the color of the first starting port 20, thereby changing the light emission mode of the first starting port 20 from white lighting to white lighting. The light will turn on in yellow (gold color). If no game balls enter the first starting port 20 after the start of fluctuation, the number of held balls does not increase, and the holding sound, which is a sound effect of "Supop", does not come from the speaker 67 (the holding sound is turned off). . Note that before the white spherical holding icon 9C displayed at the holding display position 9Cd in FIG. 193(C) changes to the star-shaped holding icon 9C, a game ball enters the first starting port 20. In this case, the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 in the starting port light emitting effect A shown in FIG. In order to notify that the number of balls on hold has increased, a hold sound, which is a sound effect of "pop", is played from the speaker 67 (the hold sound is turned on).

When the game ball enters the first starting port 20 after the hold icon 9C changes to hold (that is, after the change to hold), a white spherical shape appears at the fourth hold display position 9Ad, as shown in FIG. 193(E). The hold icon 9A is displayed, and the four hold icons 9A, 9A, 9A, 9A are stocked without being consumed, resulting in a full hold status. Although the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board for the first starting port has already been controlled to light up in yellow (lighting in gold color), and the light emission mode of the first starting port 20 is in a state where it is lighting in yellow (lighting in gold color), As shown in FIG. 193(F), there is no control to notify that the number of reserved balls has increased due to the entry of game balls into the first starting port 20, and as shown in FIG. By controlling the full-color LED to remain lit in yellow (lit in gold color), the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 is maintained in a state where it is lit in yellow (lit in gold color). The hold tone is not played from the speaker 67 (the hold tone is turned off).

In addition, as a control to notify that the number of reserved balls has increased due to the entry of game balls into the first starting port 20, as explained in the starting port light emitting effect A in FIG. 191, the first starting port decorative board The full-color LED mounted in the LED blinks once in a predetermined color (flashing white in FIGS. 191(C) and (D)), so that the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 blinks once in a predetermined color (flashing white in FIGS. 191(C) and (D)). In FIGS. 191(C) and (D), the white light flashes, and a hold sound, which is a sound effect of "Suppo", is played from the speaker 67 (the hold sound is turned ON).However, the starting port lighting effect In case C, unlike the starting port light emitting effect A, as shown in FIG. As a result, the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 is maintained in a state in which the light is lit in yellow (lit in gold color), and furthermore, a hold sound, which is a sound effect of "Suppo", is emitted from the speaker 67. (The hold music is turned off).

After that, even if a game ball enters the first starting port 20, as shown in FIG. 193(G), since the ball is already full, there is a hold display position where the hold icon is displayed. White spherical hold icons 9A are displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, second hold display position 9Ad, third hold display position 9Ad, and fourth hold display position 9Ad shown in FIG. 193(E). does not change from its current state. Further, even if game balls enter the first starting port 20, since the ball is in a full state, there is no holding display position for displaying the holding icon, and the number of held balls does not increase. As shown in (H), the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board for the first starting port is maintained in yellow lighting (gold color lighting), so that the light emission mode of the first starting port 20 is yellow lighting (gold color lighting). (lit) state will be maintained. At this time, even if game balls enter the first starting port 20, there is no hold display position for displaying the hold icon and the number of held balls does not increase, so there is no need to notify that the number of held balls has increased. , the hold tone, which is a sound effect of "Supop", is not played from the speaker 67 (the hold tone is turned off).

After that, as shown in FIG. 193(I), the left decorative pattern 8L becomes the number "3", the middle decorative pattern 8C becomes the number "4", and the right decorative pattern 8R becomes the number "3", and the same patterns are not aligned. When the display is stopped and the error is confirmed, the fluctuation ends and the pending icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a, and the first pending display position 9Ad, second pending display position 9Ad, and third pending display position 9Ad are displayed. The white spherical hold icon 9A remains displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad. At the end of such fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 193(J), the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board for the first starting port is controlled from yellow lighting (gold color lighting) to white lighting, so that the first The light emission mode of the starting port 20 changes from yellow lighting (gold color lighting) to white lighting. At the end of the variation, the holding is already full, so even if game balls enter the first starting port 20, the number of held balls will not increase, and the holding sound, which is a sound effect of "Suppo", will not be heard. is not played from the speaker 67 (the hold music is turned off).

In this way, in the starting port light emitting effect C, the full color LED mounted on the first starting port decorative board is controlled to light up in yellow (gold color lighting), so that the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 changes to yellow lighting ( Even if the number of held balls increases due to a game ball entering the first starting port 20 in the state where the game ball enters the first starting port 20 (gold color lit), the number of held balls increases due to a game ball entering the first starting port 20. The full-color LED mounted on the decorative board for the first starting port is maintained in a yellow state (gold color lighting), so that the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 is changed to a yellow lighting state (gold color lighting). In addition, the hold tone, which is a sound effect of "supop", is not played from the speaker 67 (the hold tone is turned off).

As a result, when the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 is controlled from white lighting to yellow lighting (gold color lighting) and changing to the light emitting mode of yellow lighting (gold color lighting), the first starting port 20 Even if game balls enter the ball and the number of reserved balls increases, the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 is maintained in yellow lighting (gold color lighting), so the light emission of the first starting port 20 is maintained. Yellow lighting (gold color lighting), which is a mode, can contribute to the performance as an additional light emission performance, and can improve the interest.

In addition, in the starting port light emitting effect C, when the white spherical holding icon 9C changes to the yellow (gold) star-shaped holding icon with the highest expectation of winning, a game ball enters the first starting port 20. As a result, the control to notify that the number of held balls has increased is not performed at all (in other words, the control to notify that the number of held balls has increased due to the game balls entering the first starting port 20 is prevented). , the light emission mode of the first starting port 20 can be maintained in a yellow lighting state (gold color lighting). Therefore, the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 maintained in yellow lighting (gold color lighting) can contribute as an additional light emitting effect to the effect displayed on the display screen 7a. Furthermore, since the hold sound, which is a sound effect of "Supop", is not played from the speaker 67, the hold sound can be prevented from interfering with the sound effects and music played in connection with the production performed on the display screen 7a.

[Starting mouth light emitting effect D]
Next, the starting port light emitting effect D will be explained with reference to FIG. 194. FIG. 194 is a diagram for explaining the starting port light emission effect D. The starting opening light emitting effect D is performed during the variation from the start of the variation of the decorative pattern to the end of the variation.

In the starting opening light emitting effect D, first, as shown in FIG. 194(A), the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 already displays the left decorative pattern 8L of the stereoscopic image, the middle decorative pattern 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the stereoscopic image. The right decorative symbol 8R starts to be displayed in a manner in which the reels are rotated from the top to the bottom of the display screen 7a, and the decorative symbols (symbols: numbers "1" to "9") start to be displayed in a variable manner, and then are stopped and displayed. The decorative pattern changes from an opaque state to a translucent state while gradually increasing its speed from a low speed, resulting in a display mode that changes at a high speed. The statically displayed decorative pattern changes from an opaque state to a semi-transparent state while gradually increasing its speed from a low speed, resulting in a display mode that changes at high speed, so that the background image placed behind the decorative pattern is It can be visually recognized through the translucent decorative pattern during high-speed fluctuations.

Then, just before it stops, it decelerates and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed stopped (temporarily stopped and then stopped). In addition, when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed, it is displayed in a display mode in which it slowly moves slowly in the vertical direction.

Here, the left decorative pattern 8L is the number "5," the middle decorative pattern 8C is the number "1," and the right decorative pattern 8R is the number "3." Ru. Accordingly, the change ends and the pending icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

The pending icon 9C corresponding to the left decorative pattern 8L, medium decorative pattern 8C, and right decorative pattern 8R that are being changed as the first special pattern pending is displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed at the relevant pending display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image). In the area of the display screen 7a on the left side of the hold icon 9C displayed at the hold display position 9Cd, a hold display area is provided as the first special figure hold. In this hold display area, hold icons 9A can be displayed at four hold display positions 9Ad (above the rectangular image), so that a maximum of four hold icons 9A can be stocked. The four hold display positions 9Ad are arranged from a position close to the hold display position 9Cd toward the left side of the display screen 7a: a first hold display position 9Ad, a second hold display position 9Ad, a third hold display position 9Ad, and a fourth hold display position 9Ad. They are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a in order of pending display position 9Ad.

Note that when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the size of the hold icon 9C is the same as the hold icon immediately before the movement. The size is approximately 1.5 times the size of the pending icon 9A, and the shape and color of the pending icon 9C indicate to the player the degree of expectation of winning for the pending icon 9C. On the other hand, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad moves to the third hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad moves to the second hold display position 9Ad. When moving to position 9Ad, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, except when the shape of the hold icon 9A changes to another shape. Therefore, the size of each pending icon 9A is the same as the size of the pending icon 9A immediately before the movement.

Here, at the end of the change in FIG. 194(A), the change has ended and the hold icon 9C has disappeared from the display screen 7a at the hold display position 9Cd, and the hold icon 9C has disappeared from the display screen 7a at the first hold display position 9Ad. A green smiling sphere holding icon 9A is displayed, a white spherical holding icon 9A is displayed at the second holding display position 9Ad, and only one game ball enters the first starting port 20 at the end of the fluctuation. As a result, the white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad, and no hold icon is displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad. In other words, the three pending icons 9A, 9A, 9A are in a stocked state without being consumed.

Here, to briefly explain the pending icon 9A and the pending icon 9C (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "pending icon"), the difference in shape and color determines the expectation of winning at the time of lottery corresponding to the pending icon. represents the difference between For example, among the four hold icons: a yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon, a black spherical hold icon, a smiling sphere hold icon, and a white spherical hold icon, the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon is the most The expectation of winning is high, the black spherical pending icon has the second highest expectation of winning, the smiling sphere pending icon has the third highest expectation of winning, and the white spherical pending icon has the lowest expectation of winning. It has become a thing. The smiling sphere pending icon is further set with a high expectation of winning a jackpot in the order of, for example, blue → green → red → gold (yellow) → seven colors (rainbow (rich jackpot)).

When the fluctuation shown in FIG. 194(A) ends and the holding icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a, when the game ball enters the first starting port 20 at the end of such fluctuation, the state shown in FIG. As shown in (B), the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board for the first starting port is maintained in its normal light-emitting mode of off, and the special plating applied to the inside front surface of the first starting port 20 No light passes through the front surface of the first starting port 20, and the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 becomes a special plating color (for example, silver), which is the normal light emitting mode. As a result, the special plating applied to the inside of the front surface of the first starting port 20 prevents light from passing through the front surface of the first starting port 20, and the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 is arranged inside the first starting port 20. The shape of the decorative member (smile shape) becomes difficult to see, and the smile shape becomes hidden. In other words, as long as the full-color LED mounted on the first starting port decorative board is maintained in its normal light emitting mode, the smiling face shape is maintained in a hidden state.

At this time (that is, when the fluctuation in FIG. 194(A) ends and the holding icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a, when the game ball enters the first starting port 20 at the end of such fluctuation, As shown in FIG. 194(B)), in order to notify that the number of held balls has increased due to the entry of game balls into the first starting port 20, a holding sound, which is a sound effect of "Suppo", is played. It is played from the speaker 67 (the hold tone is turned on).

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 194(C), the green smiling sphere hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C. The hold icon 9C may be the same color as the green of the smiling sphere hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, or may be of another highly anticipated color (for example, red or seven colors). May change to rainbow)). When the smiling sphere hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the hold displayed at the second hold display position 9Ad accordingly moves to the hold icon 9C. The icon 9A moves to the first hold display position 9Ad, the hold icon 9A displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad moves to the second hold display position 9Ad, and then moves to the third hold display position 9Ad and the fourth hold display position. At 9Ad, the hold icon disappears, and as shown in FIG. 194(D), the full-color LED mounted on the first starting port decorative board is controlled to light up in the same color as the hold icon 9C of the smiling sphere. By doing so, the special plating applied to the inside of the front surface of the first starting port 20 allows light to pass through the front surface of the first starting port 20, and the decoration placed inside the first starting port 20 serves as a light emitting mode of the first starting port 20. A state is reached in which the model of the member (smile model) emits light in the same color as the color of the hold icon 9C. As a result, the special plating applied to the inside of the front surface of the first starting port 20 allows light to pass through the front surface of the first starting port 20, and the light is placed inside the first starting port 20 as a light emitting mode of the first starting port 20. The shape of the decorative member (smile shape) becomes easily visible, and the smile shape becomes displayed. In other words, as long as the full-color LED mounted on the first starting port decorative board is controlled to light up in the same color as the holding icon 9C of the smiley sphere, the smiley face shape is maintained in the displayed state.

At this time (that is, as shown in FIG. 194(C), the smiling sphere pending icon 9A displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad moves to the corresponding pending display position 9Cd and becomes the corresponding pending icon 9C, and As shown in D), if no game balls enter the first starting port 20 at the start of the fluctuation, the number of held balls does not increase and the holding sound, which is a sound effect of "Supop", does not come from the speaker 67. (The hold music is turned off).

After the start of fluctuation (that is, after the start of fluctuation), when game balls enter the first starting port 20 one after another (that is, two game balls enter the first starting port 20 one after another) 194(E), a white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the third hold display position 9Ad, and a white spherical hold icon 9A is displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad. , the four pending icons 9A, 9A, 9A, 9A are kept in stock without being consumed, resulting in a full pending state. The full-color LED mounted on the decorative board for the first starting port has already been controlled to light up in the same color as the holding icon 9C, and the special plating applied to the inside front surface of the first starting port 20 has caused the first starting port 20 to The light passes through the front surface of the first starting port 20, and the shape of the decorative member (smiley face) placed inside the first starting port 20 emits light in the same color as the reservation icon 9C. Although it is in a state where it appears (in other words, the shape of the decorative member (smile shape) placed inside the first starting port 20 is easily visible, the smile shape is displayed in the same color as the color of the hold icon 9C). However, as shown in FIG. 194(F), the first A decoration arranged inside the first starting port 20 as a light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 by controlling the full color LED mounted on the starting port decoration board to maintain the same color as the color of the hold icon 9C. A state is maintained in which the shape of the member (smile shape) emits light in the same color as the color of the relevant hold icon 9C (that is, the shape of the decorative member (smile shape) disposed inside the first starting port 20 remains unchanged). This makes it easier to see and the smiley face is displayed in the same color as the hold icon 9C), and furthermore, the hold sound, which is a "supop" sound effect, is not played from the speaker 67 (the hold sound becomes OFF).

In addition, as a control to notify that the number of reserved balls has increased due to the entry of game balls into the first starting port 20, as explained in the starting port light emitting effect A in FIG. 191, the first starting port decorative board The full-color LED mounted in the LED blinks once in a predetermined color (flashing white in FIGS. 191(C) and (D)), so that the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 blinks once in a predetermined color (flashing white in FIGS. 191(C) and (D)). In FIGS. 191(C) and (D), the white light flashes, and a hold sound, which is a sound effect of "Suppo", is played from the speaker 67 (the hold sound is turned ON).However, the starting port lighting effect In D, unlike the starting port light emitting effect A, as shown in FIG. 194(F), the full-color LED mounted on the first starting port decorative board is controlled to maintain the same color as the color of the hold icon 9C. As a result, the first starting port 20 emits light in the same color as the holding icon 9C in which the decoration member (smiley face) placed inside the first starting port 20 emits light. (In other words, the shape of the decorative member (smile shape) arranged inside the first starting port 20 becomes easily visible, and the smile shape is displayed in the same color as the color of the hold icon 9C. In addition, the hold tone, which is a sound effect of "Supop", is not played from the speaker 67 (the hold tone is turned off).

After that, even if a game ball enters the first starting port 20, as shown in FIG. 194(G), since the ball is already in a full hold state, there is a hold display position where a hold icon is displayed. White spherical hold icons 9A are displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad, second hold display position 9Ad, third hold display position 9Ad, and fourth hold display position 9Ad shown in FIG. 194(E). does not change from its current state. Furthermore, even if game balls enter the first starting port 20, since the ball is in a full state, there is no holding display position for displaying the holding icon, and the number of held balls does not increase. As shown in (H), the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board for the first starting port is controlled to maintain the same color as the corresponding reservation icon 9C, and special plating is applied to the inside front surface of the first starting port 20. As a result, light passes through the front surface of the first starting port 20, and as a light emitting mode of the first starting port 20, the shape (smiling face shape) of the decorative member placed inside the first starting port 20 is the same as the color of the reservation icon 9C. (In other words, the shape of the decorative member arranged inside the first starting port 20 (smile shape) is easily recognized, and the smile shape is the same as that of the reservation icon 9C). (It is displayed in the same color as the color).

At this time (in other words, in FIG. 194(G), since the tank is already in a full hold state), even if a game ball enters the first starting port 20, there is a hold display position where a hold icon is displayed. Since the number of balls on hold does not increase without the ball being held, there is no need to notify that the number of balls on hold has increased, and the holding sound, which is a sound effect of "pop", is not played from the speaker 67 (the holding sound is turned off).

Furthermore, if the color of the hold icon 9C changes to another highly anticipated color after the start of the fluctuation, the color of the full-color LED mounted on the first starting port decorative board also changes to the hold icon 9C. The shape of the decorative member arranged inside the first starting port 20 as the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 (smile model) changes to the same color as the hold icon 9C and appears emitting light. In other words, the shape of the decorative member (smile shape) arranged inside the first starting port 20 becomes easily visible, and the smile shape is displayed in the same color as the reservation icon 9C.

After that, as shown in FIG. 194(I), the left decorative pattern 8L becomes the number "3", the middle decorative pattern 8C becomes the number "4", and the right decorative pattern 8R becomes the number "3", and the same patterns are not aligned. When the display is stopped and the error is confirmed, the fluctuation ends and the pending icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a, and the first pending display position 9Ad, second pending display position 9Ad, and third pending display position 9Ad are displayed. The white spherical hold icon 9A remains displayed at the fourth hold display position 9Ad. At the end of such fluctuations, as shown in FIG. 194(J), the full-color LED mounted on the first starting port decorative board is controlled to turn off, which is the normal light emission mode, and the first starting port 20 is turned off. Due to the special plating applied to the inside of the front surface, light cannot pass through the front surface of the first starting port 20, and the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 is the color of the special plating (for example, silver), which is the normal light emitting mode. This means that the smiley face is not displayed. At the end of the variation, the holding is already full, so even if game balls enter the first starting port 20, the number of held balls will not increase, and the holding sound, which is a sound effect of "Suppo", will not be heard. is not played from the speaker 67 (the hold music is turned off).

In this way, in the starting port light emitting effect D, the full-color LED mounted on the first starting port decorative board is controlled to have the same color as the holding icon 9C, so that it is arranged inside the first starting port 20. When the shaped decorative member (smiling face shaped) is easily visible and the smiling face shaped is displayed in the same color as the hold icon 9C, the game ball enters the first starting port 20. Even if the number of held balls increases due to the game ball hitting the first starting port 20, no control is performed to notify that the number of held balls has increased due to the game ball entering the first starting port 20, and no control is performed to notify that the number of held balls has increased due to the ball entering the first starting port 20. By controlling and maintaining the full-color LED in the same color as the color of the hold icon 9C, the shape of the decorative member (smile shape) arranged inside the first starting port 20 becomes easy to see, and the smile shape becomes visible. The display state is maintained in the same color as the color of the hold icon 9C, and furthermore, the hold sound, which is a sound effect of "Suppo", is not played from the speaker 67 (the hold sound is turned off).

As a result, the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 changes from a state in which the smiley face of the decorative member arranged inside the first starting port 20 is hidden to a state where it emits light in the same color as the color of the hold icon 9C. When the light emitting mode has changed to the state, even if game balls enter the first starting port 20 and the number of held balls increases, the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 changes to the first starting port 20. 20 is maintained in a light emitting mode in which the smiling face model placed inside the holding icon 9C emits light in the same color as the corresponding reservation icon 9C. 1. The state in which the smiling face disposed inside the starting port 20 emits light in the same color as the holding icon 9C can contribute to the performance as an additional light-emitting performance, and improve interest. can be achieved.

In addition, in the starting port light emitting effect D, the model of the decorative member (smile model) placed inside the first starter port 20 is easily visible, and the smile model is displayed in the same color as the corresponding reservation icon 9C. When the state is set, no control is performed to notify that the number of held balls has increased due to the entry of game balls into the first starting port 20 (in other words, when a game ball enters the first starting port 20). (by blocking the control to notify that the number of reserved balls has increased due to the ball being hit), the shape of the decorative member (smile shape) disposed inside the first starting port 20 becomes easily visible, and the smile shape becomes more visible. It can be maintained in a state where it is displayed in the same color as the color of the hold icon 9C. Therefore, the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 in which the smiling face is maintained in the same color as the color of the hold icon 9C contributes as an additional light emitting effect to the effect unfolding on the display screen 7a. can do. Furthermore, since the hold sound, which is a sound effect of "Supop", is not played from the speaker 67, the hold sound can be prevented from interfering with the sound effects and music played in connection with the production performed on the display screen 7a.

[Effect example]
Below is an example of the effect of the starting port light emitting effect.
[Effect 1]
The game machine 1 of the above embodiment has a first starting port 20 (receiving port) that can receive game balls, for example, as shown in FIGS. 191(A) to 191(J) of starting port light emitting effect A. Then, based on the game ball entering (accepting) the first starting port 20 (receiving port), the light emission mode of the first starting port 20 (receiving port) is varied (FIG. 191(A) ~ In Figure 191 (D), the light is turned off in white for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds), and then it is controlled to be lit in white again, and the white flashes only once) The first effect and Figure 191 (E) ~ In step 191 (F), execution of the first effect can be prevented and a second effect can be executed in which the light emitting mode (white lighting) of the first starting port 20 (intake port) can be maintained. According to this configuration, when game balls enter (accept) the first starting port 20 and the number of reserved balls increases, the light emission mode of the first starting port 20 is changed from white lighting to a predetermined period (for example, 0 The light emitting mode can be changed to a light-emitting mode in which the light is turned off for .5 seconds), then controlled to turn on white again, and flashes white only once, and when the number of held balls does not increase, the light-emitting mode of the first starting port 20 Since it is possible to maintain the display in white, the presence or absence of an increase in the number of reserved balls can be visually appealed to, thereby increasing interest.
In the starting port light emitting effect B shown in FIGS. 192(A) to 192(J), there is a first starting port 20 (receiving port) that can receive game balls, and the first starting port 20 (receiving port) has a game ball. The light emission mode of the first starting port 20 (reception port) is changed based on the entry (acceptance) of the ball (from white lighting to yellow lighting (gold) in FIGS. 192(A) to 192(D). 192(E) to 192(H), the execution of the first effect is prevented and the first starting port 20 (reception It is possible to perform a second effect in which the lighting mode (yellow lighting (gold lighting)) of the entrance) can be maintained. According to this configuration, when the light emission mode of the first starting port 20 is controlled from white lighting to yellow lighting (gold color lighting) and changed to the light emission mode of yellow lighting (gold color lighting), the first starting port 20 changes from white lighting to yellow lighting (gold color lighting). Even if game balls enter (accept) the starting port 20 and the number of reserved balls increases, the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 is maintained in yellow lighting (gold color lighting), so this is not maintained. The yellow lighting (gold color lighting), which is the lighting mode of the first starting port 20, can contribute as an additional lighting effect to the performance, and it is possible to improve the interest.
The starting port light emitting effect C shown in FIGS. 193(A) to 193(J) has a first starting port 20 (receiving port) that can receive game balls, and the first starting port 20 (receiving port) has a game ball. The light emission mode of the first starting port 20 (intake port) is changed based on the entry (acceptance) of the ball (from white lighting to yellow lighting (gold) in FIGS. 193(A) to 193(D). 193(E) to 193(H), the execution of the first effect is prevented and the first starting port 20 (reception It is possible to perform a second effect in which the lighting mode (yellow lighting (gold lighting)) of the entrance) can be maintained. According to this configuration, when the light emission mode of the first starting port 20 is controlled from white lighting to yellow lighting (gold color lighting) and changed to the light emission mode of yellow lighting (gold color lighting), the first starting port 20 changes from white lighting to yellow lighting (gold color lighting). Even if game balls enter (accept) the starting port 20 and the number of reserved balls increases, the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 is maintained in yellow lighting (gold color lighting), so this is not maintained. The yellow lighting (gold color lighting), which is the lighting mode of the first starting port 20, can contribute as an additional lighting effect to the performance, and it is possible to improve the interest.
The starting port light emitting effect D shown in FIGS. 194(A) to 194(J) has a first starting port 20 (receiving port) that can receive game balls, and the first starting port 20 (receiving port) has a game ball. The light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 (receiving port) is changed based on the fact that the ball has entered (accepted). The shape of the decorative member (smile shape) placed in is difficult to see, and the shape of the decorative member (smile shape) appears from a state where it is not displayed, emitting light in the same color as the color of the relevant hold icon 9C. 194(E) to FIG. 194(H), and the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 (intake port) (the first starting port 20 A second effect that can maintain a light-emitting state in which the shape of the decorative member (smile shape) placed inside the icon 9C emits light in the same color as the pending icon 9C. . According to this configuration, the first starting port 20 emits light in the same color as the reservation icon 9C from a state in which the smiling face of the decorative member disposed inside the first starting port 20 is not displayed. When the state has changed to the light emitting mode in which the light emitting mode appears as Since the light emitting mode is maintained in such a manner that the smiley face disposed inside the first starting port 20 emits light in the same color as the color of the hold icon 9C, this maintained first starting The state in which the smiley face disposed inside the first starting port 20, which is the light emitting mode of the mouth 20, appears to emit light in the same color as the holding icon 9C contributes to the effect as an additional light emitting effect. You can improve your interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 191(A) to 191(J) of the starting opening light emitting effect A, the second effect is such that the number of hold icons 9A is a predetermined number (4 While the execution of the first performance is allowed until the number of pending icons 9A reaches a predetermined number (four), execution of the first performance is blocked. Specifically, in FIGS. 191(A) to 191(D), the light emission mode of the first starting port 20 (intake port) is changed (white) until the number of pending icons 9A reaches a predetermined number (4). On the other hand, it is possible to allow a change in the light emitting mode in which the light is turned off for a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds) after turning on, is controlled to turn on in white again, and then flashes in white only once. In (H), after the number of pending icons 9A reaches a predetermined number (4), the light emitting mode (white lighting) of the first starting port 20 (reception port) can be maintained. According to this configuration, the state in which the number of pending icons 9A has reached a predetermined number (four) is indicated by the light emission of the first starting port 20 in addition to the pending icons 9A that have reached the predetermined number. This can be conveyed to the player using the form.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 192(A) to 192(J) of the starting opening light emitting effect B, the second effect is more likely to be won than the white spherical hold icon 9A. The yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon 9A (specific hold icon) with a high expectation level becomes the hold icon 9C, allowing execution of the first effect, and the first effect is set to the first starting gate. After changing the light emission mode of the first starting port 20 (intake port) to a specific light emission mode (after changing from white lighting to yellow lighting (gold color lighting)), execution of the first effect is blocked and the first starting port 20 ( The light emitting mode of the inlet) is maintained at yellow lighting ((gold color lighting) (specific light emitting mode)). Specifically, in FIGS. 192(A) to 192(D), the yellow (gold) star-shaped pending icon 9A, which has a higher expectation of winning compared to the white spherical pending icon 9A, is the corresponding pending icon. After the icon becomes 9C and the light emission mode of the first starting port 20 (intake port) is changed from white lighting to yellow lighting (gold lighting), the first effect is executed in FIGS. 192(E) to 192(H). The light emitting mode (yellow lighting (gold color lighting)) of the first starting port 20 (intake port) is maintained by preventing this. According to this configuration, it is possible to indicate to the player that the degree of expectation of winning is high by the light emission mode of the first starting port 20 (receiving port).
In the starting mouth light emitting effect D in FIG. 194, the second effect is that the smiling sphere hold icon 9A (specific hold icon), which is set to have a higher expectation of winning compared to the white spherical hold icon 9A, is the hold icon 9A. The icon becomes 9C, allowing execution of the first effect, and the first effect changes the light emission mode of the first starting port 20 (intake port) to a specific light emission mode (disposed inside the first starting port 20). The state where the decoration member's shape (smile shape) becomes difficult to see and the smile shape is hidden changes to the state where the decorative member's shape (smile shape) lights up in the same color as the relevant hold icon 9C and appears. (later), the execution of the first effect is prevented and the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 (intake port) is suspended, and the modeling of the decorative member (smile modeling) arranged inside the first starting port 20 is suspended. The light emitting state (specific light emitting mode) in which the icon 9C emits light in the same color as the icon 9C is maintained. Specifically, in FIGS. 194(A) to 194(D), the smiling sphere pending icon 9A, which has a higher expectation of winning compared to the white spherical pending icon 9A, becomes the corresponding pending icon 9C. The light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 (intake port) is changed from a state in which the modeling of the decorative member (smile modeling) placed inside the first starting port 20 is difficult to see and the smiling face modeling is hidden, to the modeling of the decorative member. After the (smile model) changes to a state in which it emits light in the same color as the pending icon 9C, execution of the first effect is blocked in FIGS. 194(E) to 194(H), and the first Light-emitting mode of the starting port 20 (intake port) (light-emitting state in which the decoration member (smile model) placed inside the first starting port 20 emits light in the same color as the reservation icon 9C) maintain. According to this configuration, the state in which the expectation level of winning is high is indicated to the player by the light emitting mode in which the shape of the decorative member (smile shape) emits light in the same color as the color of the pending icon 9C. be able to.

[Effect 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 193(A) to 193(J) of the starting port light emitting effect C, the second effect is from the white spherical holding icon 9C to yellow (gold). ) When the icon changes to the star-shaped hold icon 9C (specific hold icon), execution of the first effect is allowed and the first effect specifies the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 (intake port). After changing the lighting mode from white lighting to yellow lighting (gold lighting), the execution of the first effect is blocked and the lighting mode of the first starting port 20 (reception port) is changed to yellow lighting (after changing from white lighting to yellow lighting (gold lighting)). (gold color lighting) (specific lighting mode)). Specifically, in FIGS. 193(A) to 193(D), symbol variations (left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R) are started by the white spherical pending icon 9C, and the white spherical When the hold icon 9C changes to the star-shaped hold icon 9C, which has a higher expectation of winning than the white spherical hold icon 9A, the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 (receiving port) lights up in white. After changing from to yellow lighting (gold color lighting), execution of the first effect is blocked in FIGS. (gold color lit)). According to this configuration, it is possible to indicate to the player that the degree of expectation of winning is high by the light emission mode of the first starting port 20 (receiving port).

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. 191(A) to 191(J) of the starting port light emitting effect A, the first effect further includes the first starting port 20 (reception port). A holding sound (permissible sound) can be output based on the game ball entering (accepted), and the second performance further outputs a holding sound when the first performance is permitted. (allowed sound) is allowed to be output, while the output of the hold sound (allowed sound) is blocked when the first performance is blocked. Specifically, in FIGS. 191(C) to 191(D), in order to notify that the number of held balls has increased due to the entry of game balls into the first starting port 20, a sound effect of "Suppo" is used. A certain hold tone is played from the speaker 67 (the hold tone is turned on). On the other hand, in FIGS. 191(E) to 191(H), even if game balls enter the first starting port 20, the number of held balls does not increase because there is no held display position for displaying the held icon. There is no longer a need to notify that the number of balls on hold has increased, and the hold sound, which is a sound effect of "pop", is not played from the speaker 67 (the hold sound is turned off). According to this configuration, based on the fact that a game ball enters (accepts) the first starting port 20 (acceptance port), the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 is set to a blinking white state. The increase in the number of balls on hold can be communicated to the player by using both an appealing presentation and an auditory presentation in which a holding sound, which is a sound effect of ``pop'', is played from the speaker 67.
In the starting port light emitting effect B shown in FIGS. 192(A) to 192(J), for example, in FIGS. 192(A) to 192(B), the fluctuation ends and the pending icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. When the game ball enters the first starting port 20 at the end of such a variation, a hold sound, which is a sound effect of "pop", is played from the speaker 67 (the hold sound is turned ON). On the other hand, in FIGS. 192(C) to 192(H), when the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon with the highest expectation of winning is displayed at the hold display position 9Cd, the first starting port 20 There is no control to notify that the number of balls on hold has increased due to the entry of game balls into the player, and no hold sound, which is a sound effect of "Suppo", is played from the speaker 67 (the hold sound is turned off). According to this configuration, when the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon with the highest expectation of winning is displayed at the hold display position 9Cd, it is determined that the game ball has entered the first starting port 20. By keeping the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 in yellow lighting (gold color lighting) without performing any control to notify that the number of held balls has increased, it is possible to create an additional light emitting effect for the effect. In addition, by not playing the holding tone, which is a sound effect of "Supop", from the speaker 67, it is possible to prevent it from interfering with the sound effects and music played in connection with the production.
In the starting port light emitting effect C shown in FIGS. 193(A) to 193(J), in FIGS. 193(A) to 193(D), for example, the decorative pattern starts to fluctuate, and at the start of the fluctuation, the first starting port 20 When a game ball enters, the ball enters the first starting port 20 before the white spherical holding icon 9C displayed at the holding display position 9Cd changes to the yellow (gold) star-shaped holding icon 9C. When a game ball enters the ball, a holding tone, which is a sound effect of "Suppo", is played from the speaker 67 (the holding tone is turned ON). On the other hand, in FIGS. 193(C) to 193(H), when the white spherical holding icon 9C changes to a yellow (gold) star-shaped holding icon with the highest probability of winning, the first starting port 20 There is no control to notify that the number of balls on hold has increased due to the entry of game balls into the player, and no hold sound, which is a sound effect of "Suppo", is played from the speaker 67 (the hold sound is turned off). According to this configuration, when the white spherical holding icon 9C changes to the yellow (gold) star-shaped holding icon with the highest probability of winning, the game ball enters the first starting port 20, By keeping the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 in yellow lighting (gold color lighting) without performing any control to notify that the number of held balls has increased, it is possible to create an additional light emitting effect for the effect. In addition, by not playing the holding tone, which is a sound effect of "Supop", from the speaker 67, it is possible to prevent it from interfering with the sound effects and music played in connection with the production.
194(A) to 194(J), when the variation ends and the pending icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a in FIGS. 194(A) to 194(B), At the end of such fluctuation, if a game ball enters the first starting port 20, a holding sound, which is a sound effect of "supop", is played from the speaker 67 to notify that the number of held balls has increased. (The hold music turns on). On the other hand, in FIGS. 194(C) to 194(H), the shape (smile shape) of the decorative member arranged inside the first starting port 20 is easily visible, and the smile shape matches the color of the hold icon 9C. When the display is in the same color, no control is performed to notify that the number of held balls has increased due to the entry of game balls into the first starting port 20, and the sound effect is "spoop". The hold music is not played from the speaker 67 (the hold music is turned off). According to this configuration, the shape (smile shape) of the decorative member arranged inside the first starting port 20 is easily visible, and the smile shape is displayed in the same color as the color of the hold icon 9C. When the game ball enters the first starting port 20, no control is performed to notify that the number of reserved balls has increased. (Smile shape) is easily visible, and by maintaining the smile shape displayed in the same color as the relevant hold icon 9C, it can contribute as an additional light-emitting effect to the performance. By not playing the holding tone, which is a sound effect of "Supop", from the speaker 67, it is possible to prevent it from interfering with the sound effects and music played in connection with the production.

[Modified example]
Below, modified examples of the starting port light emission effect are shown.
[Modification 1]
Starting port light emitting effect B in Figures 192(C) to 192(H), Starting port light emitting effect C in Figures 193(C) to 193(H), and Starting port in Figures 194(C) to 194(H) In the light emitting effect D, even when a game ball enters the first starting port 20, a holding sound which is a sound effect of "Suppo" is not played from the speaker 67. However, a holding tone, which is a sound effect of "supop", may be played from the speaker 67. In this case, the volume of the hold music is adjusted to a level that is 50% to 90% of the volume of the sound effects and music that are played in connection with the performance, so that it does not interfere with the sound effects and music that are played in connection with the performance. It is preferable that

[Modification 2]
192(A) to 192(H), the color of the pending icon 9A that can be displayed at the first pending display position 9Ad to the fourth pending display position 9Ad in FIG. 192(A) is When the icon 9A is shifted each time it is consumed, the color of the pending icon 9A does not change, but it changes to a color that increases the expectation of winning (for example, changes from white to blue, or from white to green). You can do it like this. In this case, when the hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd and becomes the hold icon 9C, the color of the first starting port 20 changes to the hold icon 9C. The color will be the same as the color given to .

[Modification 3]
In the starting port light emitting effect C shown in FIGS. 193(A) to 193(H), the white spherical pending icon 9C in FIGS. 192(A) to 192(D) is yellow (gold) with the highest expectation of winning. When the hold icon changes to the star-shaped hold icon, the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 changes from white to yellow (gold), but also changes from yellow (gold) to seven colors (rainbow (strong jackpot)). ). In this case, the lighting mode of the first starting port 20 changes from yellow lighting (gold color lighting) to seven colors (rainbow (rich jackpot)), and the color of the first starting port 20 is the same as the color attached to the relevant hold icon 9C. Becomes a color.

[Modification 4]
In the starting port light emitting effect A in FIG. 191, the starting port light emitting effect B in FIG. 192, the starting port light emitting effect C in FIG. 193, and the starting port light emitting effect D in FIG. 194, when a game ball enters the first starting port 20, Although the light emitting mode of the first starting port 20 has been varied, it can also be applied to the first gate (through chucker) 28 and the second gate (through chucker) 29. In this case, a decorative board on which a single or multiple full-color LEDs (not shown) capable of emitting multicolor light are mounted is arranged inside the first gate (through chucker) 28 and the second gate (through chucker) 29, respectively, and the lamp control board 107 Light emission is controlled by. When the full-color LEDs mounted on these decorative substrates emit light, the first gate (through chucker) 28 and the second gate (through chucker) 29 emit light. When the first starting port 20 is in the normal specification, when the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the full color LED mounted on the decorative board is controlled to turn on in white, and the first gate (through chucker) is turned on. 28 and the second gate (through chucker) 29 are lit in white, and furthermore, the full color LEDs mounted on the decorative board are controlled to be lit in white during jackpot effects and demo effects for waiting for customers. As a result, the first gate (through chucker) 28 and the second gate (through chucker) 29 are illuminated in white.

On the other hand, if the first gate (through chucker) 28 and the second gate (through chucker) 29 have special plating specifications, the first gate (through chucker) 28 and the second gate (through chucker) A decorative member is placed in front of the decorative board on the inside of the front surface of 29, and when the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board is emitting light, light is emitted through the front surface of the first gate (through chucker) 28 and the second gate (through chucker) 29. While the molding (smile molding) of the decorative members placed inside the first gate (through chucker) 28 and the second gate (through chucker) 29 is visible, the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board is turned off. In the state, the decoration member placed inside the first gate (through chucker) 28 or the second gate (through chucker) 29 through the front of the first gate (through chucker) 28 or the second gate (through chucker) 29 is shaped. (smiling face) is difficult to see, and the color of the special plating (for example, silver) is visible through the front of the first gate (through chucker) 28 and the second gate (through chucker) 29. In addition, if the first gate (through chucker) 28 and the second gate (through chucker) 29 have special plating specifications, when the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the full color LED mounted on the decorative board will turn off. In addition, during the jackpot performance and the demonstration performance for waiting for customers, the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board is controlled to be turned off, and the first gate (through chucker) 28 and the second gate (through chucker) are controlled to turn off. The shape of the decorative member (smile shape) placed inside the chucker 29 is difficult to see. In addition, if the first gate (through chucker) 28 and the second gate (through chucker) 29 have special plating specifications, in the jackpot performance, the first gate will be displayed as the full color LED mounted on the decorative board is emitting light. (Through Chucker) 28 and the front of the second gate (Through Chucker) 29, the molding (smile molding) of the decorative member placed inside the first gate (Through Chucker) 28 and the second gate (Through Chucker) 29 can be seen. It may be possible to do so.

[Modification 5]
192(E) to 192(D), the yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon 9A displayed at the first hold display position 9Ad moves to the hold display position 9Cd. When the hold icon 9C is reached, the light emission mode of the first starting port 20 changes from white lighting to yellow lighting (gold lighting). The yellow (gold) star-shaped hold icon 9A was set to have a higher expectation of winning than the white spherical hold icon 9A. When the light emission mode of the first starting port 20 changes from white lighting to yellow lighting (gold color lighting), the light is controlled to turn off for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds) from yellow lighting (gold color lighting), and then yellow lighting ( The control to return to the gold color lighting) may be repeated five times to cause the yellow light to flash (gold color flashing). The reason for this (the reason why the light emitting pattern changes to repeatedly flash yellow (flashing gold) five times) is that when a game ball enters the first starting port 20 (receiving port), the first starting port 20 ( This is to make the light emitting mode different from the change in the light emitting mode in which, for example, the light is turned on in white, then turned off for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds), then turned on again in white, and then blinks in white only once. In other words, it is possible to indicate to the player that the expectation level of winning is high due to the change in the light emission pattern of repeatedly flashing yellow (blinking gold) five times, and the yellow (gold) star-shaped The fact that the hold icon 9A has moved to the hold display position 9Cd is communicated to the player by the light emitting form of the first starting port 20 (that is, by changing the light emitting form to repeatedly blink yellow (flashing gold) five times). I can do it.

[Modification 6]
In the starting port light emitting effect A in FIG. 191, the starting port light emitting effect B in FIG. 192, the starting port light emitting effect C in FIG. 193, and the starting port light emitting effect D in FIG. 194, when a game ball enters the first starting port 20, Although the light emission mode of the first starting port 20 has been varied, this can also be applied to the second starting port 21. In this case, a decorative board on which a single or a plurality of full-color LEDs (not shown) capable of emitting multicolor light are mounted is placed inside the second starting port 21, and the light emission is controlled by the lamp control board 107. The second starting port 21 emits light when the full-color LED mounted on this decorative board emits light. When the first starting port 20 is in the normal specification, when the gaming machine 1 is powered on, the full color LED mounted on the decorative board is controlled to turn on in white, so that the second starting port 21 emits light. In addition, the full color LED mounted on the decorative board is controlled to illuminate white in the jackpot performance and demo performance for waiting for customers, so that the second starting port 21 lights up in white. The light will remain lit.

On the other hand, when the second starting port 21 has a special plating specification, a decorative member is further placed inside the front surface of the second starting port 21 in front of the decorative board, and a full-color LED mounted on the decorative board is provided. In the state where the light is emitted, the model of the decorative member (smile model) placed inside the second starter port 21 is visible through the front surface of the second starter port 21, while the full color LED mounted on the decorative board is visible. When the lights are off, it is difficult to see the decorative member (smiling face) placed inside the second starting port 21 through the front surface of the second starting port 21, and the special plating color can be seen through the front surface of the second starting port 21. (for example, silver) is visible. In addition, when the second starting port 21 has a special plating specification, when the power is turned on to the gaming machine 1, the full color LED mounted on the decorative board is controlled to be turned off, and furthermore, the jackpot effect and the customer Even in the waiting demonstration performance, the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board is controlled to be off, making it difficult to see the decorative member (smile) placed inside the second starting port 21. In addition, when the second starting port 21 has a special plating specification, in the jackpot performance, the inside of the second starting port 21 is passed through the front surface of the second starting port 21 with the full color LED mounted on the decorative board emitting light. The shape (smile shape) of the decorative member placed on the screen may be made visible.

[Modification 7]
In the starting port light emitting effect D shown in FIG. 194, special plating is applied to the inside front surface of the first starting port 20, and a decorative member is placed in front of the first starting port decorative board. When the full-color LED mounted in the LED emits light, the shape of the decorative member (smile shape) placed inside the first starter port 20 is visible through the front surface of the first starter port 20; When the full-color LED mounted on the mouth decoration board is turned off, the shape of the decorative member (smile shape) placed inside the first starting port 20 is difficult to see through the front surface of the first starting port 20, and the 1. The special plating color (for example, silver) was visible through the front surface of the starting port 20. However, a decorative portion may be provided around the first starting port 20 (for example, on the upper side, right side, lower side, left side, etc.) of the first starting port 20. The first starting port 20 and the decoration part may be formed into a unit, or if they are independent parts, it is preferable that the decoration part is arranged adjacent to the periphery of the first starting port 20. Inside the decorative part, there is a decorative board on which full-color LEDs are mounted, and a decorative member placed in front of the decorative board and shaped with, for example, a character printed thereon (hereinafter referred to as "decorative member modeling (character modeling)"). ) and are accommodated. Special plating is applied to the back side of the decorative part, that is, the surface facing the decorative part, and the full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative board emit light, allowing light to pass through the front of the decorative part. . The decorative portion may be molded from a colorless and transparent resin and may be shaped, or may have a smooth surface (flat or curved). When the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board emits light, the shape of the decorative member (character shape) placed inside the decorative portion can be seen through the front surface of the decorative portion placed around the first starting port 20. On the other hand, when the full-color LED mounted on the decorative board is off, the decoration member placed inside the decoration part can be shaped (character modeling) through the front side of the decoration part placed around the first starting port 20. is difficult to see, and the special plating color (for example, silver) is visible through the front of the decorative part.

[Modification 8]
The starting port light emitting effect A in FIG. 191, the starting port light emitting effect B in FIG. 192, the starting port light emitting effect C in FIG. 193, and the starting port light emitting effect D in FIG. 194 may not include some of the effects described. However, other effects may be added.

[Example of mode]
The gaming machine of this embodiment can realize the following aspects.
◇ [Aspect K1-1]
A game machine having a receiving port capable of receiving game balls,
a first effect that changes the light emission mode of the receiving port based on the game ball being received in the receiving port;
After allowing the light emitting mode of the reception port to vary by executing the first effect, a second effect of preventing execution of the first effect and maintaining the light emission mode of the reception port can be performed. is,
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect K1-2]
The gaming machine according to claim 1,
The second performance may allow execution of the first performance until the number of pending icons reaches a predetermined number, and the first performance may be executed after the number of pending icons reaches a predetermined number. prevent the execution of
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect K1-3]
The gaming machine according to claim 1 or claim 2,
The second effect is such that a specific pending icon, which is set to have a high expectation of winning compared to the pending icon, becomes the pending icon and allows execution of the first effect, and the first effect is executed by the received icon. After changing the light emission mode of the entrance to a specific light emission mode, preventing execution of the first effect and maintaining the light emission mode of the reception port in the specific light emission mode;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect K1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3,
The second effect allows execution of the first effect when the symbol variation by the hold icon starts and changes from the hold icon to a specific hold icon, and the first effect moves to the receiving port. After changing the light emitting mode of the receiving port to a specific light emitting mode, preventing execution of the first effect and maintaining the light emitting mode of the reception port in the specific light emitting mode;
A gaming machine characterized by:

◇ [Aspect K1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4,
The first performance is further capable of outputting a permissible sound based on the game ball being received in the receiving port,
The second performance allows output of the permissible sound when permitting the first performance, and prevents output of the permissible sound when inhibiting the first performance.
A gaming machine characterized by:

[Other variations]
Among the various display effects described above, a configuration that does not include some effects or effects other than those described above may be included.

Although the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment is configured as a so-called 1 type and 2 type mixing machine, the gaming machine 1 may have a configuration other than this. For example, the gaming machine 1 may be an ST machine, a VST machine, a loop machine, or the like. Further, although the above embodiment has been described using a pachinko game machine as an example, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of a pachinko game machine, the present invention may be applied to a reel type game machine such as a slot machine, an arranged ball game machine, or a mahjong ball game machine. When the gaming machine 1 is a slot machine, the gaming medium may be changed from gaming balls to gaming medals.

Although the game machine 1 of the above embodiment is provided with the effect button 63 as an operation section to be operated by a player, the present invention is not limited to this, and a lever, a trigger, etc. may be used as an operation section to be operated by a player. . Further, in the display performance in the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the display performance may be executed using the button image representing the performance button 63, but instead of this, the display performance may be executed using the image representing the select button 68. Alternatively, a display effect may be executed using an image representing a lever or a trigger.

Although the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment described above is a gaming machine equipped with a payout device for paying out balls, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of the gaming machine 1 described above, the present invention may be applied to a gaming machine that is not equipped with a payout device, such as a so-called enclosed gaming machine.

The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment uses the image display device 7 to execute various effects. In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, these effects may be combined with each other to form one display effect. That is, out of the plurality of production examples and/or modifications described above, two or more production examples and/or modifications may be combined. Furthermore, the gaming machine 1 may include a sub-display device in addition to the image display device 7 (display screen 7a). At least a part of the display effect performed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 may be performed on the display screen of the sub-display device.

Although the present aspect has been described above based on the embodiments and modified examples, the embodiments of the above-described aspect are for facilitating understanding of the present aspect, and do not limit the present aspect. This aspect may be modified and improved without departing from the spirit and scope of the claims, and this aspect includes equivalents thereof.

1...Game machine 3...Game area 5...Board lamp 7...Image display device 9A, 9B...Pending image (pending icon)
9C...The relevant pending image (the relevant pending icon)
14...First movable accessory 15...Second movable accessory 20...First starting port (first ball entry port)
21...Second starting port (second ball entry port)
66...Frame lamp 81...Microcomputer for game control 91...Microcomputer for production control 101...Microcomputer for image control

Claims (1)

a display means capable of displaying multiple types of images;
A fixed member arranged so that the whole is visible,
a first movable member;
A gaming machine comprising: a pair of second movable members arranged to be difficult to see due to the fixed member,
At least the fixed member, the first movable member moved to a predetermined first position in front of the display means, and the pair of second movable members moved to a predetermined second position in front of the display means. one of the members and the other of the pair of second movable members moved to a predetermined third position in front of the display means are combined to represent a part of a specific object,
When one of the pair of second movable members is in the second position, it is covered by the first movable member that has moved to the first position, and the other of the pair of second movable members is , when in the third position, is not covered by the first movable member that has moved to the first position;
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images